Fall 2010 Syllabi

Paris Junior College Robert Rankin
College Year: 2010-2011 AS 144

Term: 101S 903-782-0388
Section: 01 rrankin@parisjc.edu
Course # ACCT 2301

Course Title: Principles of Accounting
Course Description

A study of accounting principles as applied to vouchers, books of original entry,
controlling accounts, adjusting and closing entries, financial statements, controls, and
accounting concepts.
Credits: 3 SCH = 3 lecture and 1 laboratory hours per week

Prerequisite(s): None
Textbook and Readings
ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES, 9TH EDITION, by Weygandt, Keiso, and Kimmel

ISBN: 978-0-470-31754-9
Program Outcomes
Analyze and complete journal entries utilizing generally accepted accounting principles.
Categorize accounts to prepare income statement, statement of owners equity,

statement of cash flows, and balance sheet.
Evaluate company production, profitability and cost using managerial accounting tools.
Course Outcomes
1. Learn the accounting equation and apply to the bookkeeping of accounting
transactions.
2. Analyze and complete adjusting and closing entries.
3. Generate the three basic accounting statements: income statement, statement
of owner’s equity and balance sheet.
4. Develop an understanding of banking, bank reconciliations and accounting
controls for cash.
5. Compile and complete employee and employer pay calculations.
6. Apply partnership accounting concepts.
Course # ACCT 2301 - Rankin Page 1 of 4

Learning Objectives
Classify accounts into assets, liabilities, owner’s equity, revenue and expense accounts.
Determine normal balances for all accounts.
Complete income statement, statement of owner’s equity and balance sheet.
Learn and apply accounting concepts for a merchandising company.
Analyze inventory using LIFO, FIFO and moving average cost inventory methods.
Reconcile a bank statement, analyze, complete and post associated adjusting journals.
Calculate bad debt expense/allowance for doubtful accounts. Post associated entries.
Compute depreciation: straightline, units of activity and declining balance methods.
Understand payroll calculations for employer and employee with journal entries.
Determine profit/loss distribution for partnership accounting.
Course Schedule
Semester Week Topic

Week 1 Introduction to accounting/careers in accounting
Week 2 Basic accounting equation/financial statements
Week 3 The recording process
Week 4 Adjusting the accounts
Week 5 Exam 1
Week 6 Completing the accounting cycle
Week 7 Accounting for merchandising operations
Week 8 Inventories
Week 9 Exam 2
Week 10 Fraud, internal control and cash
Week 11 Accounting for receivables
Week 12 Plant assets, natural resources and intangible assets
Week 13 Exam 3
Week 14 Current liabilities/payroll accounting
Week 15 Accounting for partnerships
Week 16 Exam 4 Comprehensive
Course Requirements and Evaluation
1. Prior to each class, students are expected to complete all reading and homework
assignments.
2. Exam will be as follows:
Exam 1 Chapters 1-3
Exam 2 Chapters 4-6
Exam 3 Chapters 7-9
Final Exam Comprehensive
3. Homework will be graded for all chapters.

4. There will be a quiz over every chapter.
Course Policies
Class Attendance
Daily class attendance is critical for the successful completion of this course. You are
given three unexcused absences. For each unexcused absence after three your final
grade will be reduced by 2 percentage points. Withdrawal requests due to a low grade
MUST BE initiated by the student. The last day for a student to drop a course with a
grade of "W" is THURSDAY, November 18. Requests for withdrawal become official
and effective the date they are received in the records office. Students who stop
coming to class, but fail to drop the course will earn an “F” for the course.
General Classroom Rules
Come to class and be on time.

Turn off cell phones and other electronic devices.
Do not send or receive text messages during class.
A student should notify the instructor prior to class if they need to leave early.
Class Procedures
Each day in class, students should be prepared to discuss the previous meeting’s
homework. We will cover one chapter for every two class periods. For the first class
period on a chapter a student is expected to read the chapter and complete all self
study and brief exercises. During the second class period all exercises and problems
are due. At the end of the second class, a quiz over the chapter will be completed.
Generally a thorough review of the self study questions will be sufficient to prepare for
the quiz. Students may NOT take exams early unless notification is received from the
student’s boss or coach that the student will be out of town on the date of the exam.
Missed quizzes may not be made up. Late homework will not be accepted.
Assignments due during an excused absence will be accepted only on the first day of
the student’s return to class.
All exams must be taken on the scheduled day. No make-up exams will be given.
Students who miss one exam will use their grade on the comprehensive final exam to
replace the missed grade. Students who must miss an exam because of school-related
functions or job-related requirements may schedule an early exam IF the instructor
receives official prior notice of the absence.


ADA Statement
Services for students with disabilities are coordinated by the Counseling/Advising
Center. The institution is committed to assisting qualified students as completely as
possible. Services include the arrangement for accommodations and services to allow
equal access to education opportunities for students with disabilities.
Students with disabilities are encouraged to contact a counselor or advisor from the
Counseling/Advising Center by calling 903.782.0426 (Paris campus), 903.454.9333
(Greenville Center), or 903.885.1232 (Sulphur Springs Center) to arrange an
appointment to begin the process.

Term: 101S 903-782-0388
Course # ACCT 2301

Course Description



ISBN: 978-0-470-31754-9
Program Outcomes

Course Outcomes
transactions.
controls for cash.

Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
Semester Week Topic

Week 5 Exam 1
Week 8 Inventories
Week 9 Exam 2
Week 13 Exam 3
assignments.
Exam 1 Chapters 1-3
Exam 2 Chapters 4-6
Exam 3 Chapters 7-9

Course Policies
Class Attendance

Class Procedures


ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0388
Course # ACCT 2301

Course Description



ISBN: 978-0-470-31754-9
Program Outcomes

Course Outcomes
transactions.
controls for cash.

Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
Semester Week Topic

Week 5 Exam 1
Week 8 Inventories
Week 9 Exam 2
Week 13 Exam 3
assignments.
Exam 1 Chapters 1-3
Exam 2 Chapters 4-6
Exam 3 Chapters 7-9

Course Policies
Class Attendance

Class Procedures


ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Tim Kingsbury
College Year: 2010-2011 GC 201
Term: Fall (903) 454-9333
Section: 40 tkingsbury@parisjc.edu
ACCT 2301
Principles of Accounting I
Course Description
Credits: SCH = 3.3.1
TSI Requirement: ≥ M: 85 EA ± ≥ 43 CLM, R: 78+, W: 80+ With Essay 5 or Essay 6 W.
Prerequisite(s): None; eligibility for enrollment in College Algebra is recommended.

Wiley Publishers; ISBN: 978-0470-41458-3
Program Outcomes
1. Analyze and complete journal entries utilizing generally accepted accounting
principles.
2. Categorize accounts to prepare income statement, statement of owner’s equity,
3. Evaluate company production, profitability and cost using managerial accounting
tools.
Course Outcomes
Provide a strong foundation for future courses in business and finance.
Learning Objectives
1. Attend class regularly.
2. Demonstrate responsibility for work submitted and learning subject.
3. Understand how to solve accounting problems.
4. Apply accounting principles to the recording accounting entries.
5. Use books of original entry, accounts and journal entries in accordance with
accounting practices.
6. Understand, analyze and prepare standard accounting financial statements.
Course # (ACCT 2401) – Tim Kingsbury Page 1 of 3

Course Schedule
August 30: Introduction
September 1 – 8: Chapter 1 – Accounting in Action
September 8 – 15: Chapter 2 – The Recording Process
September 15 – 22: Chapter 3 – Adjusting the Accounts
September 27: Exam Chapters 1 – 3
September 27 – October 4: Chapter 4 – Completing the Accounting Cycle
October 4 – October 11: Chapter 5 – Accounting for Merchandising Operations
October 11 – October 18: Chapter 6 – Inventories
October 20: Exam Chapters 4 – 6
October 20 – 27: Chapter 7 – Accounting Information Systems
October 27 – November 3: Chapter 8 – Internal Control and Cash
November 3 – 10: Chapter 9 – Accounting for Receivables
November 15: Exam Chapters 7 – 9
November 15 – 22: Chapter 10 – Plant Assets, Natural Resources, and Intangibles
November 22 – December 1: Chapter 11 – Current Liabilities and Payroll Accounting
December 1 – 8: Chapter 12 – Accounting for Partnerships
December 13: Final Exam Chapters 10 – 12

1. Prior to each class meeting, students should read the assigned chapter,
complete the chapter model, and/or complete the assigned homework.
2. Homework will be assigned for each chapter. That homework may be discussed
during the following class meeting and will be taken up for a grade. Sample
problems and exercises over assigned reading, discussion topics, and homework
problems may be given and gone over during class in order to illustrate the class
material. Quizzes covering the subject chapter or homework may be given
instead of reviewing sample problems, so students should come to class each
day prepared for a quiz.
3. Students must attend classes regularly and arrive promptly. Attendance records,
including classes missed and any tardiness will be maintained for each class
meeting. Attendance, including tardiness, will be taken into consideration in
assigning class grades.
4. Complete four scheduled exams.
Course Policies
Class Procedures: Each day in class, students should be prepared to discuss the
previously assigned homework and/or cover the scheduled chapter in the book. Time
may also be used for individual/group work on the exercises in the chapter.
Class Conduct: Please turn off (or silence) and put away all cell phones, pagers, mp3s,
headphones, etc. before entering the classroom. Gadgets that interrupt class may be
confiscated. No obscene/vulgar language will be permitted in the classroom. No
tobacco products are allowed in the classroom.

Class Attendance: Daily class attendance is critical for the successful completion of this
course, as well as for training for future employment. After three absences, make-up of
work assigned during the absence may not be allowed. Three tardy arrivals count as
one absence for attendance purposes. Withdrawal requests due to a low grade MUST
BE initiated by the student. The last day for a student to drop a course with a grade of
"W" is THURSDAY, November 18. Requests for withdrawal become official and
effective the date they are received in the records office. Students who stop coming to
class but fail to drop the course will earn an “F” for the course. Missed quizzes may not
be made up; quizzes already in progress when a student arrives late may not be taken.
Late Work: Late assignments will be accepted with penalty (at least 20%) for a brief
period. Assignments made before and due during an absence will be accepted without
penalty only on the first day of the student’s return to class, IF the instructor was
previously notified of the reason for the absence. Assignments can always be
submitted early. No late assignments will be accepted during the last week of classes
or the week of final exams.
Exams: Students must take exams over chapters according to the class schedule.
Students who must miss an exam because of school-related functions or job-related
requirements may schedule an early exam IF the instructor receives official notification
from the student’s coach or boss that the student will be out of town on the date of the
exam. Any additional missed exams will result in a score of zero unless extenuating
circumstances exist. No books or materials will be allowed in the classroom during
exams other than materials specially provided by instructor, if any.
Expectations: Students will read the assigned chapter and/or attempt to complete the
assigned homework before each class session. Instructor expects students who do not
understand either the chapter material or the homework will identify any challenging
areas to the instructor so they can be covered in class, during office hours or during a
mutually convenient scheduled time. Instructor expects that students who apply
themselves will be able to learn the course materials.
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Gene Anderson

College Year: 2010-2011 Sulphur Springs Center
Term: 101S 903-885-1232
Section: .50 ganderson@parisjc.edu
Course # ACCT 2301

Course Title: Principles of Accounting I
Course Description
A study of accounting principles as applied to vouchers, books of original

entry, controlling accounts, adjusting and closing entries, financial statements,
controls, and accounting concepts.

TSI Requirement: None

Accounting Principles Weygandt, Kimmel, Kieso
9th edition ISBN # 978-0470-31754-9
Publisher: John C. Wiley & Sons, Inc.
Program Outcomes
1. Resolve ethical dilemmas in a socially responsible manner.

2. Develop leadership and maintain effective working relationships within a multicultural,
diverse organization, group, or team.
3. Utilize technology to solve business problems.
4. Solve business problems using mathematical, accounting, or analytical skills.
Course Outcomes
1. To develop a general understanding of financial reports and analyses that students

will use in their personal affairs regardless of their fields of specialization.
2. To provide a strong foundation for future courses in business and finance.
3. To provide the foundation courses that lead to a career in accounting.
Course # (ACCT 2301) – Gene Anderson Page 1 of 6

Learning Objectives
1. Explain what accounting is.

2. Understand why ethics is a fundamental business concept.
3. Explain generally accepted accounting principles and the cost principle.
4. Explain the monetary unit assumption and the economic entity assumption.
5. State the accounting equation and define assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity.
6. Analyze the effects of business transactions on the accounting equation.
7. Understand the four financial statements and how they are prepared.
8. Explain what an account is and how it helps in the recording process.
9. Define debits and credits and explain their use in recording transactions.
10. Identify the basic steps in the recording process.
11. Explain what a journal entry is and its role in the recording process.
12. Explain what a ledger is and how it helps in the recording process.
13. Explain what a posting is and how it helps in the recording process.
14. Prepare a trial balance and explain its purposes.
15. Explain the time period assumption.
16. Explain the accrual basis of accounting.
17. Explain the reasons for adjusting entries.
18. Describe the purpose of an adjusted trial balance.
19. Explain the process of closing the books.
20. Describe the purpose of a post-closing trial balance.
21. State the required steps in the accounting cycle.
22. Explain the approaches to preparing correcting entries.
23. Identify the sections of a classified balance sheet.
24. Explain the recording of purchases and sales under a perpetual inventory system.
25. Distinguish between a multiple-step and single-step income statement.
26. Explain the computation of gross profit.
27. Determine cost of goods sold under a periodic inventory system.
28. Explain the accounting for inventories and apply the inventory cost flow methods.
29. Explain the lower-of-cost-or-market basis of accounting for inventories.
30. Compute and interpret the inventory turnover ratio.
31. Identify the basic concepts of an accounting information system.
32. Describe the purpose of a subsidiary ledger and special journals.
33. Define internal control and the principles of internal control.
34. Describe the operation of a petty cash fund.
35. Prepare a bank reconciliation.
36. Identify, explain, and distinguish between the different types of receivables.
37. Explain the concept of depreciation and its application.
38. Explain current and long term liabilities and the accounting for them.
39. Identify and explain the characteristics of and accounting for a partnership.
40. Identify and explain the characteristics of and accounting for a corporation.

Course Schedule
Week 1 Introduction
Week 2 Basic Accounting Equation, Financial Statements & Recording Process
Week 3 Exam 1
Week 4 Adjusting & Closing Entries
Week 5 Exam 2
Week 6 Merchandising Operations & Inventories
Week 7 Exam 3
Week 8 Accounting Information Systems, Fraud, Internal Control, & Cash
Week 9 Exam 4
Week 10 Receivables, Natural Resources, Plant & Intangible Assets
Week 11 Exam 5
Week 12 Current Liabilities, Payroll, & Partnerships
Week 13 Thanksgiving
Week 14 Exam 6
Week 15 Corporation Organization & Capital Stock
Week 16 Final Exam (Exam 7)
Students will be required to attend classes, take seven exams, and complete homework
assignments.
Grades of A, B, C, D and F are determined by the student’s achievement of a certain

percentage of possible points in the course.
Possible points: 6 exams-100 points each 600 points
1 final exam-100 points 100 points
Homework assignments 50 points

Attendance 50 points
Total possible points 800 points
Grade determination: A=720 points minimum
B=640 points minimum
C=560 points minimum
D=480 points minimum
F=less than 480 points
Course Policies
CLASS PROCEDURE: Class time will be spent discussing the chapter, working
exercises and working problems. Students should read the assigned chapter(s) prior to
coming to class. Homework is to be completed outside of class and turned in at the start
of next class period. Class attendance and homework are critical for the successful
completion of this course. Roll will be taken every night. Accounting is a technical skill
best learned by practice. There will be no extra projects whereby you can improve your
grade. Homework assignments and class attendance should be an easy way to obtain
100 points toward your final grade. To receive credit, homework must be turned in when
due and exams must be taken on the scheduled class day. Students should arrive
promptly for all classes and not engage in any activity that would disturb others in the
class.
ACADEMIC HONESTY: In the pursuit of learning, it is expected that students will

engage in honest academic endeavor to the highest degree of honor and integrity.
Students who are found to engage in academic dishonesty through such activities as
cheating on exams or collusion with others will be referred to the appropriate college
official for disciplinary action.
ELECTRONIC DEVICES: Cell phones, beepers, etc. should be turned off prior to the
start of class. If you have an emergency situation that could occur while you are in
class, please provide me a written and signed statement describing your emergency
before class, and an exception will be made.
OTHER ISSUES: The use of tobacco and tobacco-related product, including smokeless
tobacco, is prohibited in all indoor public areas of the campus. Smoking is not allowed
within 25 feet of doors to campus buildings. Students are prohibited from bringing

infants and small children into the classroom during class sessions or allowing
unsupervised children to remain on campus.
There will be 13 homework assignments. An assignment is defined as all exercises,

problems, or other tasks related to a single chapter. Homework assignments are subject
to change from the original schedule. If the student misses class, the student is
responsible for verifying the homework assignment. The easiest way to do this is
contact me by email.
Points will be awarded for each full period of class attendance. Points for partial period
attendance will be given at the instructor’s discretion. Additional points can be earned if
the student has perfect attendance for the semester.
ADA Statement




Term: 101S 903-782-0388
Course # ACCT 2302

Course Title Principles of Accounting II
Course Description
A study of accounting principles as a applied to the corporate form of business,

application of accounts and records peculiar to a corporation accounting for
manufacturing, and analysis of financial statements.
Prerequisite(s): ACCT 2301 Principles of Accounting I

ISBN: 978-0-470-31754-9

Program Outcomes

Course Outcomes
1. Learn concepts surrounding corporate form of business.
2. Analyze and complete journal entries for common, preferred and treasury stock.
3. Apply concepts for long term debt financing and redemption.
4. Account for investments at varying levels of investment.
5. Compile statement of cash flows.
6. Generate and interpret various financial ratios.
7. Understand and apply managerial accounting concepts to CVP profitability
analysis.
Course # ACCT 2302 – Rankin Page 1 of 4

Learning Objectives
Learn and apply accounting concepts applicable to corporations including stocks,
dividends, and long term investments.
Analyze income statement, statement of owner’s equity and balance sheet to complete
a statement of cash flows.
Calculate various ratios and metrics to analyze a corporation’s financial position.
Apply managerial accounting concepts to complete cost volume profit analysis.
Distinguish between manufacturing cost and corporate costs.

Course Schedule

Semester Week Topic
Week 1 Stock transactions
Week 2 Dividends and retained earnings
Week 3 Long term liabilities
Week 4 Exam 1
Week 5 Investments
Week 6 Statement of cash flows
Week 7 Financial statement analysis
Week 8 Exam 2
Week 9 Managerial accounting
Week 10 Job order costing
Week 11 Process cost accounting
Week 12 Cost volume profit
Week 13 Exam 3
Week 14 Budgetary planning
Week 15 Budgetary control and responsibility accounting
assignments.
2. Exam will be as follows: Exam 1 Chapters13-15
Exam 2 Chapters 16-18
Exam 3 Chapters19-22
Exam 4 Comprehensive
In the event of bad weather causing missed class days, exams will typically
remain on schedule while the amount of material on the exam may be adjusted.

Course Policies
Class Attendance

Class Procedures


ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0388
Course # ACNT 1411

Course Title: Introduction to Computerized Accounting
Course Description
Introduction to utilizing the computer in maintaining accounting records, making

management decisions, and processing business applications with primary emphasis
on general ledger package.


TH
COLLEGE ACCOUNTING, 20 EDITION, by Heintz & Perry.
ISBN: 978-0-538-74521-5
Program Outcomes
1. Use office resource materials, Internet, and Email to research and complete office
documents and projects proficiently.
2. Demonstrate proficiency in software applications.
3. Demonstrate appropriate workplace behaviors and competencies.
4. Demonstrate keyboarding proficiency.
5. Demonstrate effective communication skills.
Course Outcomes
transactions.
controls for cash.
6. Understand the basics of computerized accounting systems.
Course # ACNT 1411 – Rankin

Page 1 of 4

Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
Semester Week Topic

Week 2 Basic accounting equation
Week 3 Analyzing accounting transactions
Week 4 The double entry framework
Week 5 Exam 1
Week 6 Journalizing and posting transactions
Week 7 Adjusting entries and the worksheet
Week 8 Financial statements and the closing process
Week 9 Exam 2
Week 10 Accounting for cash
Week 11 Payroll accounting: Employee earnings and deductions
Week 12 Payroll accounting: Employee taxes and reports
Week 13 Exam 3
Week 14 Accounting for sales and cash receipts
Week 15 Computerized accounting concepts
assignments.
Exam 1 Chapters 1-3
Exam 2 Chapters 4-6
Exam 3 Chapters 7-9

Page 2 of 4

Course Policies
Class Attendance

Class Procedures


Page 3 of 4

ADA Statement

Page 4 of 4

Paris Junior College Julie Eckhardt
College Year: 2010-2011 Office 209
Term: 101S 903-457-8716
Section: G1 jeckhardt@parisjc.edu
BCIS 1405
Business Computer Applications
Course Description
Study of basic hardware, software, operating systems, and current applications in
various segments of society. Current issues such as the effect of computers on society
and the history and use of computers are also studied. Labs may include but are not
limited to introductions to operating systems, the Internet, word processing,
spreadsheets, databases, and programming concepts with emphasis on critical
thinking/problem solving. This course is intended for non-Business and non-Computer
Science majors.
Credits: 4 SCH = 3 lecture and 3 laboratory hours per week, from approved course list

Discovering Computers & Microsoft Office 2007: A Fundamental Combined Approach
by Shelley and Vermaat
Program Outcomes
1. Analyze a problem definition to identify inputs, processes, and outputs required to
present a viable solution.
2. Utilize industry standard application software to produce personal, business, and
academic reports and presentations.
3. Demonstrate knowledge of industry terminology and effective communication skills.
4. Recognize the interaction of stand-alone and network devices, operating systems,
and applications.
Course Outcomes
This course covers application software for the areas of word processing, spreadsheets,
database and graphics presentations. It also covers initial use of computers and
learning computer terminology.
Learning Objectives
 Identify the MS desktop and objects on the desktop.
 Perform basic mouse and keyboard operations.
 Open, minimize, maximize, restore, scroll, close, move and resize a MS Windows window.
 Understand keyboard shortcut notation
 Launch and quit an application.
 Create, expand and collapse a folder
 Rename a file or folder.
COSC 1400 - Eckhardt Page 1 of 5

 Use MS Windows Help.
 Identify each application in MS Office XP.
 Define Internet, World Wide Web and intranet.
 Use MS Office Help.
 Understand how each MS Office application uses the Internet.
 MS Word:
 Change default font size of all text in a MS Word document.
 Enter text into a MS Word document and save.
 Check spelling in MS Word document.
 Select text and use bold, italic, underline, font and font size.
 Align paragraphs.
 Insert clip art into a document.
 Resize a graphic.
 Open and close a document.
 Print a document.
 Use MS Word Help.
 Describe different documentation styles for research papers.
 Change margin settings and adjust spacing.
 Use MS Word’s AutoCorrect feature.
 Add footnotes to a research paper and insert manual page breaks.
 Count the words in a document.
 Create a hanging indentation.
 Create a hyperlink.
 Sort selected paragraphs.
 Go to a specific location in a document.
 Move text; find and replace text.
 Use Paste Options button.
 Understand how smart tags work.
 Find a synonym for a word.
 Check spelling and grammar at once.
 Display the Web page associated with a hyperlink.
 Email a copy of a document.
MS Excel:
 Describe the Excel Worksheet.
 Select a cell or range of cells in Excel.
 Enter text and numbers in Excel.
 Use the AutoSum button to sum a range of numbers.
 Copy a cell to a range of cells using the fill handle.
 Bold the font, change font size and change font color.
 Center cell contents across a series of columns.
 Apply AutoFormat command to format a range.
 Create a Column chart using the Chart Wizard.
 Save a workbook, print a worksheet.
 Use AutoCalculate area to determine totals.
 Enter multiple lines of text in the same cell.
 Enter a formula using the keyboard.

 Enter formulas using Point mode.
 Identify the arithmetic operators +, ‐, *, /, % and ^.
 Apply the AVERAGE, MAX and MIN functions.
 Verify a formula using Range Finder.
 Change the font of a cell; color the characters and background of a cell.
 Add borders to a range.
 Format numbers using the Format Cells dialog box.
 Add conditional formatting to a range of cells.
 Change width of columns and height of rows.
 Check the spelling of a worksheet.
 Preview how a printed copy of the worksheet will look.
 Copy and paste; insert and delete cells.
 Use absolute cell references in a formula.
 Create a 3D pie chart on a separate chart sheet.
MS Access
 Describe databases and database management systems.
 Create a Database.
 Create a table and define the fields in a table.
 Open a table; add records to a table; close a table.
 Open a database.
 Understand the purpose of queries.
 Create a new query.
 Use a query to display all records and all fields.
 Run a query and print the answer to a query.
 Use numeric data and comparison operators in criteria.
 Sort the answer to a criteria.
 Join tables in a query and restrict the records in a join.
 Use calculated fields in a query.
 Change the contents of records in a table.
 Delete records from a table.
 Add a field.
 Update the contents of a single field.
 Specify referential integrity.
MS PowerPoint:
 Select a design template and create a title slide.
 Change the font size and style.
 Add a new slide.
 Create text slides with both single‐level and multi‐level bulleted lists.
 Change the slide layout.
 Use the Automatic Layout Options button.
 Insert clip art from the MS Clip Organizer.
 Add an animation scheme to a slide show.
 Email a slide show from within PowerPoint

Course Schedule
Week 1: Introduction to computers

Week 3: MS Word
Week 4: MS Word
Week 5: MS Word
Week 6: MS Access
Week 7: MS Access
Week 8: MS Access
Week 9: MS Access
Week 10: MS Excel
Week 11: MS Excel
Week 12: MS Excel
Week 13: MS PowerPoint

This course absolutely requires keyboarding skills.
Course Policies
Grading:
Attendance & Participation: 25%
Final Exam: 25%
Quizzes & Assignments: 50%
Grade scale is based on a calculated average: A (90-100); B (80-89); C (70-79); D
(60-69); F(0-59). Students all begin the semester with 25% of their final grade already
credited to their favor. 25% of the final grade includes attendance and participation. Fifty
points are awarded for acceptable behavior/participation in class and fifty points are
awarded for attendance, a total of 100 points. A percentage will be calculated of the
number of attended class periods divided by total class periods. This percentage will
then be multiplied by the possible 50 points for attendance. The 50 points for
behavior/participation are subject to the instructor’s decision. 25% of the possible 100
points will then be added to the final grade.
Assignments: All assignments are expected on the due date given AT CLASS TIME.
If you miss class, you are expected to email your assignment by class time. Late
assignments will not be accepted.
In-Class Assignments: Grades will be taken on in-class work most of the time. If you
miss class, you need to turn in or show your work the next class period. No work will be
accepted past the following class day of your absence.
Missed quizzes: If you are absent on the day of a quiz, you may choose to write a
one page essay on your favorite hobby. This paper will be graded for grammar and
spelling. You may write in first person in a 12-point font double spaced, but do NOT use
contractions.
Being prepared for class: Students need to be prepared for EVERY CLASS. Bring
book, flash drive, paper and pen or pencil ALWAYS.
Attendance: Attendance is required for this class. Attendance credit requires your
presence the entire class period. If you are late to class, it is YOUR responsibility to see

that you are counted present as you will have been marked absent in the roll. Do not
plan to leave class early.
Withdrawal requests due to a low grade MUST be initiated by the student. The last
day for a student to drop a course with a grade of “W” is November 18, 2010. Requests
for withdrawal become official and effective the date they are received in the records
office. Students who stop coming to class but fail to drop the course will earn an “F” for
the course.
Academic honesty: Students are expected to uphold the school’s standard of
conduct relating to academic honesty. Students assume full responsibility for the
content and integrity of the academic work they submit. The guiding principle of
academic integrity shall be that a student’s submitted work, examinations, reports, and
projects must be that of the student’s own work. Students shall be guilty of violating the
honor code if they represent the work of others, use or obtain unauthorized assistance
in any academic work, give unauthorized assistance to other students, modify (without
instructor approval) an exam paper/record/report for the purpose of obtaining additional
credit, misrepresent the content of submitted work, and/or lie to the instructor. Any
student violating the honor code will receive a zero for the first violation and will
automatically receive a failing grade in the course for the second violation. Any student
violating the honor code the first time will be required to complete a ten page essay on
the subject of “Honesty and Its Importance” written in a 12-point font and double-spaced
with one inch margins. Failure to complete this essay within the time allotted by the
instructor will cause automatic failure in the course. Do not give any appearance of what
could be considered cheating.
Student conduct in the classroom: Any acts of classroom disruption that go beyond
the normal rights of students to questions and discuss with instructors the educational
process relative to subject content will not be tolerated, in accordance with the
Academic Code of Conduct described in the Student Handbook.
Children: PJC policy prohibits children in the classroom or lab facilities.
Electronic devices in the classroom: Cell phones, pagers, CD players, radios and
similar devices are prohibited in the classroom and lab facilities.
Disclaimer statement: The schedule, policies, procedures and assignments in this
course syllabus are subject to change.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-457-8716
BCIS 1405
Course Description
Science majors.

Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

 MS Word:
MS Excel:

MS Access
 Add a field.
MS PowerPoint:

Course Schedule

Week 3: MS Word
Week 4: MS Word
Week 5: MS Word
Week 6: MS Access
Week 7: MS Access
Week 8: MS Access
Week 9: MS Access
Week 10: MS Excel
Week 11: MS Excel
Week 12: MS Excel

Course Policies
Grading:
Final Exam: 25%
contractions.

the course.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-457-8716
BCIS 1405
Course Description
Science majors.

Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

 MS Word:
MS Excel:

MS Access
 Add a field.
MS PowerPoint:

Course Schedule

Week 3: MS Word
Week 4: MS Word
Week 5: MS Word
Week 6: MS Access
Week 7: MS Access
Week 8: MS Access
Week 9: MS Access
Week 10: MS Excel
Week 11: MS Excel
Week 12: MS Excel

Course Policies
Grading:
Final Exam: 25%
contractions.

the course.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-457-8716
BCIS 1405
Course Description
Science majors.

Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

 MS Word:
MS Excel:

MS Access
 Add a field.
MS PowerPoint:

Course Schedule

Week 3: MS Word
Week 4: MS Word
Week 5: MS Word
Week 6: MS Access
Week 7: MS Access
Week 8: MS Access
Week 9: MS Access
Week 10: MS Excel
Week 11: MS Excel
Week 12: MS Excel

Course Policies
Grading:
Final Exam: 25%
contractions.

the course.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-457-8716
BCIS 1405
Course Description
Science majors.

Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

 MS Word:
MS Excel:

MS Access
 Add a field.
MS PowerPoint:

Course Schedule

Week 3: MS Word
Week 4: MS Word
Week 5: MS Word
Week 6: MS Access
Week 7: MS Access
Week 8: MS Access
Week 9: MS Access
Week 10: MS Excel
Week 11: MS Excel
Week 12: MS Excel

Course Policies
Grading:
Final Exam: 25%
contractions.

the course.
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Jenny Herron
Term: 101S 903 782 0359
Section: P1 jherron@parisjc.edu
BCIS1405
Course Description
Computer terminology, hardware, software, operating systems, and information
systems relating to the business environment. The main focus of this course is on
business applications of software, including word processing, spreadsheets,
databases, presentation graphics, and business-oriented utilization of the Internet.
Credits: 4 = 3 lecture and 3 laboratory hours per week
TSI Requirement: xxx M, xxx R, xxx W.
Prerequisite(s): THEA or ACCUPLACER exam

Discovering Computers and Microsoft® Office 2007: A Fundamental Combined
Approach, 1st Edition, Shelly/Vermatt [ISBN: 0-538-47392-4]
Microsoft Windows 7 Essentials, 1st Edition [ISBN: 1439081077]
SAM 2007 Assessment, Projects, & Training v6.0 Access Card, 1st Ed.-
ISBN: 1-4188-4325-3
Program Outcomes
• Analyze a problem definition to identify inputs, processes, and outputs required
to present a viable solution.
• Utilize industry standard application software to produce personal, business, and
• Demonstrate knowledge of industry terminology and effective communication
skills.
• Recognize the interaction of stand-alone and network devices, operating
systems, and applications.
Course Outcomes
skills.
BCIS1405.P1 – Jenny Herron Page 1 of 3

Learning Objectives
• To provide a concise introduction to computers with the most up-to-date
technology in an ever-changing discipline
• To teach the fundamentals of computers and computer nomenclature,
particularly with respect to personal computers, software, and the Web
• To present strategies for purchasing a desktop computer, notebook computer,
smart phone, portable media player, and digital camera
• To offer an introduction to the following: Windows Operating System, Internet
Explorer 8, Microsoft Office Word 2007, Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2007,
Microsoft Office Excel 2007, and Microsoft Office Access 2007.
• To expose students to practical examples of the computer as a useful tool
• To acquaint students with the proper procedures to use a computer; interact with
the Web; and create documents, presentations, worksheets, and databases
suitable for coursework, professional purposes, and personal use
• To help students discover the underlying functionality of Microsoft Office 2007 so
that they can become more productive
Course Schedule
1st Wk. Course Orientation: Syllabus, LMS, Internet Work Sites, Procedures
2nd Wk. Windows 7 Operating Systems fundamental commands
3rd Wk. Introduction to Computers, the Internet, and the World Wide Web
4th Wk. Operating Systems, Utility Programs, Security, Ethics, and Privacy
5th Wk. EXAM: Review and Take EXAM 1
6th Wk. Create and Edit a Word Document
7th Wk. Use Word to create a research paper
8th Wk. Create and Edit a presentation using PowerPoint
9th Wk. Use illustrations, shapes, clipart, and animation in a presentation
10th Wk. Create an Excel worksheet with an embedded chart
11th Wk. Create worksheets with formulas, functions, formatting, and web queries
12th Wk. Use Access to create Tables
13th Wk. Create Reports from database
14th Wk. Query a database
15th Wk. Integrate Office 2007 applications with the World Wide Web
16th Wk. Final Exam

40% EXAMS (two major exams; one is the final exam)
30% Lab Assignments (Application Software Projects)
10% Assignments (Class/Homework)
20 % Quizzes (Chapter quizzes)

Course Policies
• This hybrid class meets once a week for lecture, demonstrations, and “hands-on”
computer assignments.
• Students are expected to attend all scheduled class meetings in a prompt and
timely manner, to come to class with all necessary textbooks and supplies, and
to participate in class discussions and “hands-on “assignments.
• Students are expected to schedule the necessary computer time outside of class
to complete homework assignments, Lab assignments, chapter quizzes, and
application software training session.
• Homework is expected to be completed before the scheduled class begins.
• Lab assignments are expected to be completed during the assigned availability
period.
• Quizzes are expected to be completed during the assigned availability period
• Students are expected to uphold the school’s standard of conduct relating to
academic honesty.
• Students are expected to conduct themselves as civil and courteous adults at all
times, showing respect to the instructor and to other students
• Any acts of classroom disruption that go beyond the normal rights of students to
question and discuss with the instructor the educational process relative to
subject content will not be tolerated.
• Use of cell phones, pagers, or any other electronic audio devices is prohibited
according to the school’s standard of conduct.
• PJC Policy prohibits food, drink, and children in the classroom.
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Rita J. Pringle
College Year: 2010-2011 WTC1205
Term: 101S 903.782.0476
Section: P2 rpringle@parisjc.edu
Course # BCIS1405
Course Title: Business Computer Applications
Course Description
Computer terminology, hardware, software, operating systems and information systems
relating to the business environment. The main focus of this course is on business
applications of software, including word processing, spreadsheets, databases,
presentation graphics and business oriented utilization of the Internet.
Credits: SCH = 4.00
TSI Requirement:
Prerequisite(s): Keyboarding Skills

Approach, 1st Edition. ISBN-13: 9780538473927
Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
Student will understand the following concepts:
 Basic computer operation
 How to navigate the Internet
 Computer Security
 Microsoft Word Basics
o Entering Text
o Formatting Text
o How to Cut/Copy/Paste/Move text
o Designing a Flyer using clipart, page borders and bullets
o Research Paper Basics: MLA format
 Microsoft Excel Basics
o Enter text and numbers
o Functions
o Formatting worksheets
Course # BCIS1405- Faculty Rita J. Pringle Page 1 of 4

o Calculations and formulas
o Copy and Paste
o Charts
o Conditional Formatting
 Microsoft Access
o Database Design
o Creating a Database
o Queries
o Printing
o Joining Tables
 Microsoft PowerPoint
o Creating and editing a Presentation
o Themes and backgrounds
o Slide Layouts
o Clip Art
o Slide transitions and animations
 Microsoft Office Integration
o Hyperlinks
o Converting office elements to be viewed on the Internet
o Embedding charts into Word
Learning Objectives
Students will be able to successfully:
 Create and format flyers
 Create and format a research paper according to MLA format
 Create and format a worksheet to include charts, statistical analysis and formulas
 Create a database, queries, reports, tables and forms
 Integrate Office 2007
Course Schedule
Chapter 1: Introduction to Computers
Chapter 2: The Internet and World Wide Web
Chapter 3: Application Software
Chapter 4: Operating Systems and Utility Programs
Chapter 5: Computer Security and Safety, Ethics and Privacy
Introduction to Windows Vista
Introduction to Windows 7
Word Project 1: Creating and Editing a Word Document
Word Project 2: Creating a Research paper
Excel Project 1: Creating a Worksheet and an Embedded Chart
Excel Project 2: Formulas, Functions, Formatting and Web Queries
Access Project 1: Creating and Using a Database
Access Project 2: Querying a Database
PowerPoint Project 1: Creating and Editing a Presentation
PowerPoint Project 2: Creating a Presentation with Illustrations and Shapes
Integrating Office 2007 Programs and the World Wide Web

Grading Scale:
Tests 35%
Final/Group Project 20%
Class Assignment 20%
Homework 25%
Grade Scale is based on a calculated average: A (90 – 100); B (80 – 89); C (70 – 79); D
(60 – 69); F (0 – 59)
Course Policies
File Name Requirements:

Each assignment file name needs to include student’s first name and last name
preceding the file name. (Ex: RitaPringle Lab 1-3a). Files submitted without student’s
first name will automatically receive a 5 point penalty.
Late Assignments:
Late assignments will be assessed the following penalties:
1 week late: 10 point penalty
2 weeks late: 20 point penalty
Later than 2 weeks: Not Accepted
Class Assignments:
Class Assignments are activities for the student to interact with the instructor to address
problems students might be encountering. Students missing class will not be allowed to
make-up Class Assignments.
Class Attendance:
Daily class attendance is critical for the successful completion of this course. Daily
class attendance includes coming to class and logging into WebCT several times a
week. Withdrawal requests due to a low grade MUST BE initiated by the student.
Requests for withdrawal become official and effective the date they are received in the
records office. Students who stop coming to class but fail to drop the course will earn an
“F” for the course.
Academic Honesty:
Students are expected to uphold the school’s standard of conduct relating to academic
honesty. Students assume full responsibility for the content and integrity of the
academic work they submit. The guiding principle of academic integrity shall be that a
student’s submitted work, examinations, reports, and projects must be that of the
student’s own work. Students shall be guilty of violating the honor code if they:
 Represent the work of others as their own.

 Use or obtain unauthorized assistance in any academic work.
 Give unauthorized assistance to other students.
 Modify, without instructor approval, an examination, paper, record, or report
for the purpose of obtaining additional credit.
 Misrepresent the content of submitted work.
Any student violating the honor code will receive a zero for the first violation and will
the subject of Academic Honesty and Its Importance. Failure to complete this essay
within the time allotted by the instructor will cause automatic failure in the course. Do
not give any appearance of what could be considered cheating!!
Student Conduct:
Any acts of classroom disruption that go beyond the normal rights of students to
question and discuss with instructors the educational process relative to subject content
will not be tolerated, in accordance with the Academic Code of Conduct described in the
Student Handbook.
Electronic Devices:
Cell phones, pagers, CD players, radios and similar devices are prohibited in the
classroom and lab facilities. Students needing to record a lecture must inform the
instructor before each class session when the recorder is to be “ON” so that an
announcement may be made to the class that recording is taking place. Students may
record only lecture sessions. No recording of “Hands-On” work sessions or exams is
permitted.
ADA Statement

College Year: 2010-2011 Office C
Term: 101S 903-885-1232
Section: S1 jeckhardt@parisjc.edu
BCIS 1405
Course Description
Science majors.

Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

 MS Word:
MS Excel:

MS Access
 Add a field.
MS PowerPoint:

Course Schedule

Week 3: MS Word
Week 4: MS Word
Week 5: MS Word
Week 6: MS Access
Week 7: MS Access
Week 8: MS Access
Week 9: MS Access
Week 10: MS Excel
Week 11: MS Excel
Week 12: MS Excel

Course Policies
Grading:
Final Exam: 25%
contractions.

the course.
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Kathy Bush
College Year: 2010-2011 Office location: Sulphur Springs Front Office
Term: Fall 101S Office Phone: 903 885-1232
Section: S2 kbush@parisjc.edu
BCIS 1405
Business Computer Applications/Microcomputer Applications
Course Description
Computer terminology, hardware, software, operating systems and information
systems relating to the business environment. The main focus of this course is
on business applications of software, including word processing, spreadsheets,
databases, presentation graphics, and business oriented utilization of the
Internet. Equivalent to COSC 1401.
A study of microcomputer concepts and applications to provide the student

an understanding of computer technology, hardware, software and production
of meaningful information through the use of integrated application software.
Prerequisite: keyboarding skills. Equivalent to BCIS 1405.

Credits: SCH = 3 lecture and 1 laboratory hours per week, from approved course list (4.3.3)
TSI Requirement: Completed
Prerequisite(s): High School Keyboarding

COSC1401/BCIS1405 Bundle ISBN: 1111485445
1. Discovering Computers and Microsoft Office 2007 (combined approach)
2. SAM 2007 Assessment, Projects, and Training v6.0 Printed Access Card, 1st Edition
3. Microsoft® Windows 7 : Essential, 1st Edition
COSC1401/BCIS1405 ISBNS listed out individually:
a. Discovering Computers and Microsoft Office 2007 (combined approach) 0538473924
b. SAM 2007 Assessment, Projects, and Training v6.0 Printed Access Card, 1st Edition
0840067747
c. Microsoft® Windows 7 : Essential, 1st Edition 1439081077
Course Outcomes
1. Use the basic functions of a computer browser (Internet Explorer), four software
applications in Microsoft Office 2007, and an Operating System (Windows 7).
BCIS 1405/COSC 1401 – Kathy Bush Page 1 of 4

2. Create business and personal documents, spreadsheets, databases, and presentations.
3. Utilize industry standard application software to produce personal, business, and academic
reports and presentations.
Learning Objectives
1. Use the Desktop to open and organize programs, create folders, and search files and folders.
2. Use the Start menu to open programs and to navigate folders,
3. Describe Internet Explorer features and navigate web addresses
4. Save pictures or text on Internet web pages as files or paste them into software applications
5. Enter, format and edit text .or pictures in a document
6. Describe the windows of Word, Excel, Access, and PowerPoint
7. Create, edit, print and present PowerPoint presentations with single and multi‐level bullets
and inserted pictures
8. Use formulas and Autocalculate to find basic statistics in spreadsheets
9. Use charts and pictures to enhance data in a spreadsheet
10. Analyze the data and create the structure of a database to fit the solution
11. Create queries using simple or compound criteria, parameters, or calculations
12. Change document properties of all four software applications.
13. Use Windows 7 to organize and navigate folders and computer functions
Course Schedule
Unit 1 Windows 7
Unit 2 Word
Unit 3 PowerPoint
Unit 4 Excel
Unit 5 Access
Unit 6 Integrating Office and the World Wide Web
Course Format:

Discussions/Demonstrations in Class
Assignments in Word, Excel, Access, and PowerPoint
4 exams
Quizzes
Internet research
e‐mail
Evaluation:
Course Grade : A (90 – 100)
B (80 – 89)
C (70 – 79)
D (60 – 69)
F (0 ‐ 59)

Course Grade Rubric: Exams 60%,
Assignments, quizzes, research, and discussions 40%
Assignment Due Dates: Assignments may be turned in early.
Assignments will be assigned a due date.
Assignments are due at the beginning of the class.
Assignments need to be e‐mailed to the instructor and a printed copy
turned in to the instructor.
Assignments will be accepted within one week of the due date with a 20
point penalty.

Assignment grading: Each grammar and spelling error is five points.
Procedure errors may be more or less than five points.
Please proof all work before submitting the assignment.

Exam grading: Each grammar and spelling error is five points.

Course Policies
Class Attendance:
Students are expected to attend the scheduled class meetings for this course. Students are expected to
complete all assignments and exams as scheduled. Students are expected to communicate with the
instructor when they know they will be absence and after the absence. If the student has extenuating
circumstances for an absence, the student is responsible for contacting the instructor via telephone, e‐
mail, written communication, or messenger. Some make‐up work may require the instructor’s
presence, and must be rescheduled with the instructor.
Class Preparation and Notes:

 Review the chapter before class
 Attend class and participate in demonstrations
 Complete assignments on or before the due dates
 Prepare for exams by reviewing the assignments and by practicing the concepts
 Be present when an exam is scheduled
Academic Honesty:
Students are expected to uphold the school’s standard of conduct relating to academic honesty.
Students assume full responsibility for the content and integrity of the academic work they submit. The
guiding principle of academic integrity shall be that a student’s submitted work, examination, reports,
and projects must be that of the student’s own work. While group discussion, general advice, and
interaction between students is encouraged, each student must submit his/her own solution and
product. Students shall be guilty of violating the honor code if they:
 Represent the work of others as your own.
Student Conduct in Class Policy

Please respect the rights of others in this classroom so that we maintain an environment that enhances
and promotes positive computer literacy learning.
Children in Class Policy

PJC Policy prohibits children in classroom or laboratory facilities
Electronic Devices in Class Policy

Cellular phones, pagers, MP3 players, IPODs, CD players, radios, and similar devices are prohibited in the
classroom facilities. All devices must be turned OFF during class. If a device sounds in class, students
are to take the device out of the classroom and turn it off before returning to class. If a student initiates
the use of the device in class, the student will be asked to leave the class with all personal belongings for
the remainder of the class. Students who use electronic devices in class risk dismissal from the class.
Computer Time
For successful completion of course requirements, approximately three to six hours per week of
computer time is highly recommended. Assignments should be completed outside of class. If you need
help on an assignment, please e‐mail questions, call the instructor, or come before class during office
hours to ask questions.
Miscellaneous
 No food or drink is permitted in the classroom. During scheduled breaks, you may eat or drink
outside the classroom.
If you need to leave the classroom during a discussion or demonstration, please leave as quietly and
with minimum distractions as possible
Disclaimer Statement:
The schedule, policies, procedures and assignments in this course are subject to change in the event of
extenuating circumstances.
Class Attendance:
ADA Statement
Services for students with disabilities are coordinated by the Counseling/Advising Center. The
institution is committed to assisting qualified students as completely as possible. Services include the
arrangement for accommodations and services to allow equal access to education opportunities for
students with disabilities.
Counseling/Advising Center by calling 903.782.0426 (Paris campus), 903.454.9333 (Greenville Center), or
903.885.1232 (Sulphur Springs Center) to arrange an appointment to begin the process.

BCIS 1405
Course Description



0840067747
Course Outcomes

Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
Unit 1 Windows 7
Unit 2 Word
Unit 3 PowerPoint
Unit 4 Excel
Unit 5 Access
Course Format:

4 exams
Quizzes
Internet research
e‐mail
Evaluation:
B (80 – 89)
C (70 – 79)
D (60 – 69)
F (0 ‐ 59)

point penalty.



Course Policies
Class Attendance:

Academic Honesty:



Computer Time
Miscellaneous
Class Attendance:
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Donna Anderson
College Year: 2010-2011 Greenville Center
Term: 101S 903-782-0379
Section: 65 danderson@parisjc.edu
Course #: BMGT 1327

Course Title: Principles of Management
Course Description
Concepts, terminology, principles, theories, and issues in the field of management. The
course will have students to explain and apply the various theories, processes, and
functions of management; identify roles of leadership.
Credits: 3 SCH = 3 lecture and 1 laboratory hour per week, from approved course list.
Prerequisite(s): None.

Management – A Practical Introduction Fourth Edition by Kinicki and Williams,
published by McGraw-Hill Irwin, ISBN 978-0-07-353019-2
Program Outcomes
2. Develop leadership and maintain effective working relationships within a multicultural,
diverse organization, group or team.
Course Outcomes
Explain and apply the various theories, processes, and functions of management;
identify roles of leadership in organizations; and recognize elements of the
communication process.
Learning Objectives
The student should be able to answer the following major questions:
1.1 What are the rewards of being an exceptional manager—of being a star in your
workplace?
1.2 What are six challenges you could look forward to as a manager?
1.3 What would you actually do—that is, what would be your four principal functions
as a manager?
1.4 What are the levels and areas of management you need to know to move up,
down, and sideways?
1.5 Do you have what it takes to be an entrepreneur?
1.6 To be an exceptional manager, what roles must you play successfully?
1.7 To be a terrific manager, what skills should you cultivate?
2.1 What’s the payoff in studying different management perspectives, both
yesterday’s and today’s?
Course # BMGT 1327 – Donna Anderson Page 1 of 9

2.2 If the name of the game is to manage work more efficiently, what can the
classical viewpoints teach you?
2.3 To understand how people are motivated to achieve, what can you learn from the
behavioral viewpoint?
2.4 If the manager’s job is to solve problems, how might the two quantitative
approaches help?
2.5 How can the exceptional manager be helped by the systems viewpoint?
2.6 In the end, is there one best way to manage in all situations?
2.7 Can the quality-management viewpoints offer guidelines for true managerial
success?
2.8 How do you build a learning organization?
3.1 Who are the stakeholders important to you inside the organization?
3.2 Who are stakeholders important to you outside the organization?
3.3 What does the successful manager need to know about ethics and values?
3.4 Is being socially responsible really necessary?
3.5 What trends in workplace diversity should managers be aware of?
4.1 What three important developments of globalization will probably affect you?
4.2 Why learn about international management, and what characterizes the
successful international manager?
4.3 Why do companies expand internationally, and how do they do it?
4.4 What are barriers to free trade, and what are major organizations and trading
blocs promoting trade?
4.5 What are the principal areas of cultural differences?
5.1 How do you tend to deal with uncertainty, and how does planning help?
5.2 What are mission and vision statements, three types of planning and goals, and
SMART goals?
5.3 What is MBO and how can it be implemented successfully to achieve results?
5.4 How does the planning/control cycle help keep your plans headed in the right
direction?
5.5 What is project planning, why is it important, and what is the project life cycle?
6.1 Are you really managing if you don’t have a strategy?
6.2 What’s the five-step recipe for the strategic management process?
6.3 How can SWOT and forecasting help you establish your strategy?
6.4 How can two techniques—Porter’s competitive strategies and the product life
cycle—help you formulate strategy?
6.5 How does effective execution help managers during the strategic-management
process?
7.1 How do I decide to decide?
7.2 How do people know when they’re being logical or illogical?
7.3 How can I improve my decision making using evidence-based management and
business analytics?
7.4 What guidelines can I follow to be sure that decisions I make are not just lawful
but ethical?
7.5 How do I work with others to make things happen?
7.6 What are the barriers to decision making?
8.1 How do you find out about an organization’s “social glue,” its normal way of doing

business?
8.2 What can be done to an organization’s culture to increase its economic
performance?
8.3 How are for-profit, nonprofit, and mutual-benefit organizations structured?
8.4 When you join an organization, what seven elements should use look for?
8.5 How would one describe the eight organizational structures?
8.6 What factors affect the design of an organization’s structure?
9.1 How do star managers view the role of people in their organization’s success?
9.2 To avoid exposure to legal liabilities, what areas of the law do you need to be
aware of?
9.3 How can you reduce mistakes in hiring and find great people who might work for
you?
9.4 Once people are hired, what’s the best way to see that they do what they’re
supposed to do?
9.5 How can you assess employees’ performance more accurately and give more
effective feedback?
9.6 What are the various forms of compensation?
9.7 What are some guidelines for handling promotions, transfers, disciplining, and
dismissals?
10.1 Since change is always with us, what should you understand about it?
10.2 What are the uses of OD, and how effective is it?
10.3 What do you need to know to encourage innovation?
10.4 How are employees threatened by change, and how can you help them adjust?
11.1 In the hiring process, do employers care about one’s personality and individual
traits?
11.2 How do the hidden aspects of individuals—their values and attitudes—affect
employee behavior?
11.3 Is it important for managers to pay attention to employee attitudes?
11.4 What are the distortions in perception that can cloud one’s judgment?
11.5 What causes workplace stress, and how can it be reduced?
12.1 What’s the motivation for studying motivation?
12.2 What kinds of needs motivate employees?
12.3 Is a good reward good enough? How do other factors affect motivation?
12.4 What’s the best way to design jobs—adapt people to work or work to people?
12.5 What are the types of incentives you might use to influence employee behavior?
12.6 How can you use compensation and other rewards to motivate people?
13.1 How is one collection of workers different from any other?
13.2 How does a group evolve into a team?
13.3 How can you as a manager build an effective team?
13.4 Since conflict is a part of life, what should a manager know about it in order to
deal successfully?
14.1 What’s the difference between a leader and a manager?
14.2 What does it take to be a successful leader?
14.3 Do effective leaders behave in similar ways?
14.4 How might effective leadership vary according to the situation at hand?
14.5 What does it take to truly inspire people to perform beyond their normal levels?

14.6 If there are many ways to be a leader, which one would describe me best?
15.1 What do you need to know about the communication process to be an effective
communicator?
15.2 What are the important barriers you need to be aware of, so you can improve
your communication skills?
15.3 How can you use the different channels and patterns of communication to your
advantage?
15.4 How do contemporary managers use information technology to communicate
more effectively?
15.5 How can you be a better listener, reader, writer, and speaker?
16.1 How do managers influence productivity?
16.2 Why is control such an important managerial function?
16.3 How can three techniques—balanced scorecard, strategy maps, and
measurement management—help you establish standards and measure
performance?
16.4 How do successful companies implement controls?
16.5 Financial performance is important to most organizations. What are the financial
tools you need to know about?
16.6 How do top companies improve the quality of their products and services?
16.7 What are the keys to successful control, and what are the barriers to control
success?
Course Schedule
Date Topic Assignment
Week 1 Course Introduction – Getting DUE: Wednesday, September 1

Started Purchase course materials.
 Read the course syllabus
 Please carefully review the schedule
of activities (e.g., Assignments).
Week 2 Chapter 1: The Exceptional Manager DUE: Wednesday, September 8

 Read Chs. 1 & 2
Chapter 2: Management Theory  Submit the Quizzes
 Submit the self assessment
exercises at the end of the
chapters.
Week 3 Chapter 3: The Manager’s Changing DUE: Wednesday, September 15

Work Environment & Ethical  Read Ch. 3
Responsibilities  Submit the Quiz
exercise at the end of the
chapter.
 Submit Ethical Dilemma Case

Week 4 Chapter 4: Global Management DUE: Wednesday, September 22
 Read Chs. 4 and 5
Chapter 5: Planning  Submit the Quizzes
chapters.
Week 5 Chapter 6: Strategic Management DUE: Wednesday, September 29

 Read Ch. 6
 Submit the Quiz
chapter.
Week 6 DUE: Wednesday, October 6

Chapter 7: Individual & Group Decision  Read Ch. 7
Making  Submit the Quiz
 Complete the self assessment
chapter.
Week 7 MIDTERM Exam (October 7 –13)
Week 8 Chapter 8: Organizational Culture, DUE: Wednesday, October 20

Structure, & Design  Read Ch. 8
 Submit the Quiz
chapter.
Week 9 Chapter 9: Human Resource DUE: Wednesday, October 27

Management  Read Chs. 9 & 10
 Submit the Quizzes
Chapter 10: Organizational Change &
Innovation  Complete the self assessment
chapters.
Week 10 Chapter 11: Managing Individual DUE: Wednesday, November 3

Differences & Behavior  Read Chs. 11 & 12
Chapter 12: Motivating Employees  Complete the self assessment
chapters.
Week 11 Chapter 13: Groups & Teams DUE: Wednesday, November 10

 Read Chs. 13 & 14
Chapter 14: Power, Influence, &

Leadership  Submit the Quizzes
chapters.
Week 12 Chapter 15: Interpersonal & DUE: Wednesday, November 17

Organizational Communication  Read Chs. 15 & 16
Chapter 16: Control
chapters.
Week 13 Career Portfolio (Due November 24) – Given the limited time I have to grade
your portfolios, late submissions will not be accepted.
Week 14 Happy Thanksgiving!
Week 15 FINAL Exam (December 2 – 8)
Week 16 Course Wrap-UP

Career Portfolio .......................................... 10%
Chapter Quizzes ........................................ 40%
Ethical Dilemma ......................................... 10%
Midterm Exam Chapters 1 – 7 .................... 20%
Final Exam Chapters 8 – 16 ....................... 20%
Career Portfolio:
In this course, you will complete a career portfolio. This course should help you to know
if a career in management is right for you. If so, this course should help you begin to
identify your career objectives in management. The following is a description of the
career portfolio.
1. Resume (Where are you now?)
Prepare as professional of a resume as possible.
2. Self-Assessment Exercises (To help you assess where you want to go.)
These self assessment exercises are at the end of each chapter.
Complete the self assessment exercises and submit the “questions for
discussion” that follow each of the self assessment exercises. These will be due
throughout the semester, but you should save all of them AND include them in
your career portfolio.
3. Career objectives (Where do you want to go?)
Define your career objectives. Explain how this course has helped you to identify
and/or refine your career objectives.
4. Degree plan (How are you going to get there?)
Submit your degree plan or other plan for how you are going to achieve your
career objectives.

General Grading Rubric for Writing Assignments:
Category 1: Main Idea/Purpose/Meets Assignment
A - Writing clearly states and/or identifies the main idea or purpose and/or meets the
criteria of the assignment.
B - Writing generally states and/or identifies the main idea or purpose and/or meets
most of the criteria of the assignment.
C - Writing does not clearly state and/or identify the main idea or purpose and/or meets
few of the criteria of the assignment.
D/F - Writing fails to state and/or identify the main idea or purpose and/or meets none of
the criteria of the assignment.
Category 2: Language
A - Language sets a tone appropriate to the purpose and audience and is characterized
by variety in word choice and sentence structure.
B - Language occasionally lapses in awareness of purpose and audience and is
characterized by less varied word choice and sentence structure.
C - Language shows little awareness of purpose and audience and is characterized by
sameness in word choice and sentence structure.
D/F - Language fails to recognize purpose and audience and is characterized by
inappropriate or incomprehensible word choice and sentence structure.
Category 3: Organization/Development
A - Organizational structure illustrates a grasp of the main ideas, develops these ideas
effectively, uses transitions competently, and results in a logical and clearly stated
conclusion.
B - Organizational structure illustrates a satisfactory understanding of the main ideas,
develops some ideas less completely than others, occasionally lacks transitions, and
results in an adequate but less clearly stated conclusion.
C - Organizational structure is confusing or unclear, shows minimal development or
understanding of the main ideas, uses transitions inadequately, and results in an
illogical or unclear conclusion.
D/F - Completely lacks organizational structure, fails to identify or develop main ideas,
has no transitions, and reaches no conclusion.
Category 4: Grammar and Spelling Mechanics

A - Has no errors in spelling, grammar and punctuation.
B - Has some errors in spelling, grammar and punctuation.
C - Has frequent errors in spelling, grammar and punctuation.
D/F - Has excessive errors in spelling, grammar and punctuation.
Category 5: Format Requirements

A - Has no formatting errors.
B - Has 1 or 2 formatting errors.
C - Has 3 or 4 formatting errors.
D/F - Has excessive formatting errors.

Course Policies
Class Attendance: Traditional students are expected to attend class and be on time.
Online students are expected to login frequently (at least twice per week).
General Policies and Procedures:

Please understand I am not available 24/7. Please expect that it may take one working
day for me to respond to emails. My working days are Monday – Friday. Although I
often do so, please don’t expect that I will respond to emails over the weekend.
There will be NO makeup work or reopening of closed assignments. Please complete

assignments prior to the assignment closing due date.
In most cases, incompletes will not be given. Unless you have an extended illness that
requires hospitalization or something of a similar nature during the last three (3) weeks
of class, please do not expect that I will issue an incomplete. Failure to complete
assignments prior to the due date will result in a zero on that assignment.
The midterm and the final exam are closed book and closed notes. They must be
proctored at a testing center.
A note about testing centers:
If you reside outside the PJC service area, you may take proctored exams at the testing
center of a different college. Some colleges charge a fee for this service. The student
will be responsible for any fees incurred. If you are taking your exam at a non-PJC
facility, the proctor will need to contact me for instructions, WebCT passwords, etc.
.
More information about the Testing Center on the PJC Paris Campus can be found at
http://www.parisjc.edu/index.php/main/content/about-testing-center/. If you would like to
take your exams on a different PJC campus or at a different testing center, please
contact that location for further instructions. If it is not a PJC testing center, they will
need to contact me for proctoring instructions.
Login frequently:
Please log into WebCT frequently. If I need to contact you, it could be through this
system. Some students have a very bad habit of logging into WebCT on the first class
day and printing everything that they can and then logging back in very infrequently.
This is a very bad practice. You need to log in at least twice per week. There may be
changes and updates that you need to be aware of throughout the semester.
General information about Web CT:

1) Sign on
a) Access the website either through the PJC homepage (http://www.parisjc.edu/)
and then clicking on the WebCT link OR go directly to the site
http://webct.paris.cc.tx.us:8900/webct/public/home.pl)

i) I recommend that you bookmark the path to go directly to the WebCT site. This
way, if the PJC website is down you can still access the class.
b) Log on.
i) Remember, your userid is initial of first name, initial of middle name, and then
last name all in lowercase.
ii) Your password is the last four digits of you social security number.
2) Once you have logged in, select the course name.
3) This brings you to the course homepage
Academic Honesty:
In pursuit of learning, it is expected that students will engage in honest academic
endeavor to the highest degree of honor and integrity. Students who are found to
engage in academic dishonesty through such activities as cheating on exams,
plagiarism, or collusion with others will be referred to the Vice President of Student
Services for disciplinary action such as dismissal from the college. Student violations
involving a question of academic honesty are handled by the faculty member(s)
involved. Should the student object to the decision of the faculty member(s), the
appeals procedures for instructional due process may be utilized. The following list
describes the most common forms of academic dishonesty (cheating):
1. Taking an exam for another student.
2. Having another student take an exam for you.
3. Altering or forging an official college document.
4. Paying someone to write a paper to submit as your own work.
5. Arranging with other students to give or receive answers by us of signals.
6. Arranging to sit next to someone who will let you copy on an exam.
7. Copying from someone’s exam without the student’s knowledge.
8. Writing a paper for another student.
9. Allowing another student to copy from you during an exam.
10. Copying answers from a source without doing work independently.
11. Getting questions or answers from someone who has already taken the same
exam.
12. Copying a few sentences without footnoting in a paper.
13. Working on homework with other students when the instructor doesn’t allow it.
14. “Padding” a few items in a bibliography.
ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-0388
Course # BMGT 1368

Course Title: Practicum
Course Description

Practical, general workplace training supported by individualized learning plan
developed by the employer, college and student.

None
Program Outcomes
2. Develop leadership and maintain effective working relationships within a
multicultural, diverse organization, group or team.
4. Solve business problems using mathematical, accounting, or analytical skills
Course Outcomes
1. Apply concepts learned in the classroom to work environment.
2. Learn how managers operate in their company.
3. Begin or enhance process to transition from being an individual contributor to
being a manager.
4. Understand the “big picture” of the assigned organization and how the student’s
work applies.
5. Career investigation and retrospection to determine next educational and work
steps.
Learning Objectives
Determine career likes and dislikes based on the job.
Apply education with real work experience.
Training and development as a potential manager/leader.
Enhance employment opportunities upon graduation because of work experience.
Course # BGMT 2368 - Rankin Page 1 of 2

Course Schedule
Semester Week Topic
Work 280 hours during the semester
Complete student assessment
Complete company questionnaire
Complete resume
Documentation of work hours, student assessment, company questionnaire and

resume. Each aspect will comprise 25% student’s grade.
Course Policies
Student is expected to complete work schedule as assigned by the sponsoring

organization, remain in contact with the instructor, and complete all work and reports on
time.
ADA Statement
Course # BGMT 2368 - Rankin Page 2 of 2

Paris Junior College Jan Jordan

Term: 10S1 903.782.0378
Section: .65 jjordan@parisjc.edu
BMGT 1441
Business Ethics
Course Description
Topics address ethical issues, the development of a moral frame of reference and the
need for an awareness of social justice in management practices and business
activities. A review of ethical responsibilities and relationships between organizational
departments, divisions, executive management and the public.
Prerequisite(s):
BUSINESS ETHICS 2E, A REAL WORLD APPROACH, by Andrew W.

Ghillyer, published by McGraw-Hill. ISBN is 978-0-07-337710-0.
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The student will be able to apply personal values and ethical principles as a basis for identifying,
analyzing and managing ethical issues in contemporary business settings.
BMGT 1441.65 – Jan Jordan Page 1 of 8

Learning Objectives
The students will be able to:
1. define basic ethical definitions and situations.

2. recognize ethical issues that each functional department of an organization typically faces.
3. resolve ethical dilemmas when given the opportunity.
4. examine the consequences of unethical and ethical business decisions.
5. value their sense of confidence in their ability to recognize and solve ethical dilemmas.
6. recognize their ability to meet the needs of the organization’s stakeholders.
7. identify concepts of corporate governance and corporate social responsibility.
Course Schedule
Complete each assignment as scheduled. Assignments will always be accepted before the due date. The last day to turn in any
assignment is Wednesday, December 15, 2010. Remember—the Final Exam must be taken at a PJC campus given by the
instructor or a lab proctor in the testing centers at a scheduled time. The final exam must be taken by Wednesday, December
15, 2010 by 3 p.m.
DATE ASSIGNMENTS DUE DATE
NOTE: All assignments in one chapter should be done
Aug 30‐Sept 3 on the same document if using Word or on
the same webct mail screen if you are Friday, Sept. 3
using that to send me your assignments.

Chapter 1—Frontline Focus—Doing the Right Thing on
page 5. After reading the chapter, answer
the questions on pages 5 and 19 about this
ethical dilemma. Submit the answers only.
Do not type the questions. Submit as an
attachment through webct using Microsoft
Word or answer questions directly on the
webct mail screen and submit. Always
format your answers as follows:


Jan Jordan
Frontline Focus, Page 5

Then type your answers on the webct mail screen or
send as an attachment in Word.

Frontline Focus, Page 19

Then type your answers on the webct mail screen or
send as an attachment in Word.

Both of these need to be answered on the same
document or on the same screen.

Also, there are three case studies under Ethical
Dilemma on pages 13‐15. Choose one of the cases and
submit the answers only. Use same format as above
except Ethical Dilemma will be your title instead of
Frontline Focus. Also label the case such as Case 1.1 or
whichever case you decide to do. This also needs to be
done on the same document or screen as the other
assignments for this chapter 1.

Monday, Sept. 6 LABOR DAY HOLIDAY!! HAVE FUN!!

Sept 7‐10 Chapter 2—After reading the chapter, answer the
questions on page 38 under Ethical Friday, Sept. 10
Dilemma, Case 2.2. Submit as you did in
Chapter 1.

Also, answer the questions under Review Exercise on
page 41.

Take Quiz 1 (over Chapter 1) listed under “Quizzes” in
webct. You have two hours on each exam
and two chances. Your highest grade
counts. You may use your book. If you
can’t find an answer easily, use your index
in the back of your book to help out and

your glossary sometimes.

Sept 13‐17 Chapter 3— Frontline Focus—Just Sign the Forms on
pages 53 & 69. After reading the chapter, answer the Friday, Sept. 17
questions on pages 53 & 69 about this ethical dilemma.
Submit as above.

Also, answer the Discussion Questions at the bottom of
page 72 under Discussion, Exercise 3.1 and format as
you did in Chapter 1using Discussion Exercise 3.1, page
72 as your title.

Sept 20‐24 Take Quiz 2 (over Chapter 2) listed under “Quizzes” in
webct. You have two hours on each exam Friday, Sept. 24
You may take your and two chances. Your highest grade
quizzes any time counts. You may use your book. If you
you are ready but can’t find an answer easily, use your index
preferably by the in the back of your book to help out and
due date at the your glossary sometimes.
latest.

Sept 27‐Oct 1 Chapter 4—After reading the chapter, answer question
#1 at the bottom of page 98 under Internet Friday, October 1
Exercises. Submit your answers as you did in
Chapter 1.

Also, answer the questions under Discussion Exercise
4.3 on page 104 & 105. Submit as you did in Chapter 1.

Oct 4‐8 Take Quiz 3
Friday, October 8
Chapter 5—After reading the chapter, answer questions
2, 3, & 4 under Review Questions on page
124. Submit as above.

Also, answer questions #2 & 3 under Internet Exercise
on page 124.

Oct 11‐15 Chapter 6— Frontline Focus—Too Much Trouble on
pages 133 & 146. After reading the chapter, answer the Friday, October 15
questions on pages 133 & 146 about this ethical
dilemma. Submit as above.

Also, answer questions # 1, 2, 3 & 5 under Discussion
Exercise 6.1 on pages 153 & 154.

Friday, October 22
Chapter 7—Frontline Focus—Good Money on pages
160 & 173. After reading the chapter, answer the
questions on pages 160 & 173 about this ethical
dilemma. Submit as above.

Also, answer the questions under Internet Exercise on
page 176. When you get to the home page, click on the
About link to find the answers.

Friday, October 29
Take Quiz 6

Chapter 8—After reading the chapter, answer the
Nov 1‐5 questions under Ethical Dilemma, Case 8.2, on page
194. Submit as before. Friday, November 5

Also, answer questions 1, 3, & 4 under Review
Questions on page 199.

Nov 8‐12 Take Quiz 7
Friday, November 12

Nov 15‐19 Chapter 9— Frontline Focus—A Matter of Definition on

page 211. After reading the chapter, answers the Friday, November 19
questions on page 211 only.

Also, answer the questions on page 226 under Internet
Exercise. Submit as before.

Nov 29‐Dec 3 Take Quiz 8
Friday, Dec 3

Dec 6‐10 Take Quiz 9
Chapter 10—Frontline Focus—You Scratch My Back on Friday, December 10
page 237. After reading the chapter, answers the
questions on pages 238 & 251. Submit as before.

Dec 13‐17 Final Exam Week—Take Quiz 10
Wednesday, December
Your final exam is Chapter 10 Quiz in webct. 2010 by 3 p.m.

Your final exam is scheduled for (the latest date to take
it) Wednesday, December 15, 2010 by 3 p.m. (or
sooner in the semester if you are ready). Must be
taken at a PJC Campus Testing Center or with the
instructor at any of the campuses and a password is
required. You may use your textbook. Nothing else.
You only have one chance on the final, but two hours.
Read and study Chapter 10 before you come to take
your final exam. If you use a testing center to take
your final exam, be sure and call ahead of time and
make an appointment. I will be in Sulphur Springs on
Tuesday, December 14 after 1 p.m. in the Library to
give all my exams. I will be in Greenville on
Wednesday, December 15 after 1 p.m. in Room 121 to
give all my exams if you want to take this one with me.

1. Textbooks Assignments—Students are expected to read the assigned material and

complete assignments according to the assignment schedule which will include
assignments from various sections of each chapter. Some of those sections are: Frontline
Focus, Internet Exercises, Ethical Dilemma Case Studies, Review Questions, Review
Exercises, and Discussion Exercises. These assignments are worth 50% of your grade.
There are no right or wrong answers on the Frontline Focus, Ethical Dilemmas Case
Studies, or Discussion Exercises, so you will not be “graded” (receive a letter or numerical
grade on your answers). If I think you are way off base according to the answers in the
instructor’s manual, I will ask you to rethink your answers. There will be right and wrong
answers to the Internet Exercises, Review Questions, and Review Exercises. However, if
you answer the questions incorrectly, I will have you go back and find the correct answers
until you get them right so you can get full credit for this part of your grade! So do them
right the first time. If you get all of these assignments done, you will get the 50 points for
this part of your grade.
2. Quizzes—There will be nine (9) quizzes (taken through webct), all equal in points. Each
exam will cover one chapter. You will take these at home on your computer. You will
have two chances if needed and the highest grade will be recorded. You may use your
book. There will be 20 questions of True-False, Multiple-Choice, and Fill-in-the-Blank.
You will have two hours to take each exam. These exams are worth 35% of your grade.
3. Final Exam—Your final exam will be Quiz 10 (taken through webct) over Chapter 10 in
your textbook. You will need a password to take your final exam. The final exam may be
taken with me at the Paris Junior College Campus in Paris at a time that is convenient for
both of us. You may take it at the Testing Center on the Paris Campus. If you are an off-
campus student, you may take the final exam at one of the off-campus centers through
their testing centers using a password or with me. If you take your final exam at a testing
center, you must call and set up an appointment with them. You will only have one
chance at the final but two hours to take it. You may use your book. Your final exam is
worth 15% of your grade.
COURSE GRADING
Textbook Assignments 50% A= 89.5% and above
Quizzes (9) 35% B= 79.5%-89.4%
Final Exam 15% C = 69.5%-79.4%
Total 100% D = 59.5%-69.4%
Course Policies
1. Be considerate of others in the lab and classroom.

2. No food or drinks are allowed in the computer labs or classrooms.
3. No minor children allowed in the labs or classrooms for safety reasons.

4. All cell phones, beepers and personal digital assistants (pda’s) must be turned off or in
silent mode. Under no circumstances should a cell phone or beeper sound during class.
If a cell phone or beeper does sound during class, the student may be asked to leave for
the remainder of the period. The only exception to this rule includes peace officers, EMT,
EMS, or other emergency personnel, and their devices should be in silent mode.
5. It is the responsibility of the student to initiate a drop form by the last day to withdraw with
a “W” if so desired. The instructor will not drop a student unless the student asks for a
drop form, completes the drop form, and takes it to the Records Office.
6. All Student’s Standard of Conduct policies in the PJC Calendar and Student Handbook
(beginning on page 26) apply to this course.
ADA Statement

equal access to education opportunities for students with disabilities. Students with
disabilities are encouraged to contact a counselor or advisor from the

Paris Junior College Stacy Young

College Year: 2010-2011 Room 154 Admin
Term: 101S 903-782-0270
Section Number: 65 syoung@parisjc.edu
BUSG 1301
Introduction to Business
Course Description
Fundamental business principles including structure, functions, resources and
operational resources. The student will describe the scope of business enterprise in the
nation and the world today, identify major business functions of accounting,
management, marketing and economics; describe the relationships of social
responsibility, ethics and law in business, and define and apply business terminology.
Credits: SCH = 3 lecture and 0 laboratory hours per week, from approved course list
Prerequisite(s):

Foundations of Business, 2nd Edition
Authors: William M. Pride, Robert J. Hughes and Jack R. Kapoor
ISBN: 10-0538744510
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
1. Broaden student’s understanding of the American free enterprise system.
2. Examine how businesses operate in our modern political, social, and economic
environment.
3. Provide a general background in the elements and characteristics of business
enterprise.
4. Discuss the role of profits in our economic system.
5. Differentiate the many aspects of business functions such as management,
organization, human relations, marketing, accounting, finance, and ethics.
6. Analyze the methods and procedures used by people in business to arrive at
effective decisions.
7. To expand and enrich your business vocabulary.
8. Create an awareness of the varied career opportunities in business and to aid in
selecting a vocation or enhancing the vocation already selected.
9. Design an atmosphere in which you can relate personal business experience and
Course # (BUSG 1301.65) – Stacy Young Page 1 of 5

philosophies.
Learning Objectives
1. Define business and identify potential risks and rewards.
2. Identify the ways to measure economic performance.
3. Examine the four different phases in the typical business cycle.
4. Understand what is meant by business ethics.
5. Explain how ethical decision making can be encouraged.
6. Identify the steps a business must take to implement a program of social
responsibility.
7. Discuss the restrictions nations place on international trade, the objectives of
these restrictions and their results.
8. Identify the institutions that help firms finance international business.
9. Describe the advantages and disadvantages of sole proprietorships.
10. Describe the advantages and disadvantages of partnerships.
11. Describe the advantages and disadvantages of a corporation.
12. Define what a small business is and recognize the fields in which small
businesses are concentrated.
13. Asses the contributions of small business to our economy.
14. Describe the four basic management functions: planning, organizing, leading
and motivating and controlling.
15. Explain the different types of leadership.
16. Describe the four basic forms of organizational structure: bureaucratic, matrix,
cluster, and network.
17. Summarize the use of corporate culture, intrpreneurship, committees,
coordination techniques, informal groups, and the grapevine.
18. Describe how research and development lead to new products and services.
19. Explain how purchasing, inventory control, scheduling, and quality control affect
production.
20. Describe cultural diversity and understand some of the challenges and
opportunities associated with it.
21. Explain the purposes and techniques of employee training, development, and
performance appraisal.
22. Describe three contemporary views of motivation: equity theory, expectancy
theory, and goal-setting theory.
23. Identify the four elements of the marketing mix and be aware of their importance
in developing a marketing strategy.
24. Identify the major steps in the consumer buying decision process and the sets of
factors that may influence this process.
25. Discuss the product life cycle and how it leads to new product development.
26. Explain the uses and importance of branding, packaging, and labeling.
27. Examine the three major pricing methods that firms employ.
28. Explain the five most important physical distribution activities.
29. Explain the three types of advertising and describe the major steps of developing
and advertising campaign.
30. Outline the five functions of an information system.

31. Analyze how computers and technology change the way information is acquired,
organized, and used.
32. Read and interpret a balance sheet.
33. Read and interpret an income statement.
34. Explain the need for financial management in business.
35. Identify the services provided by banks and financial institutions for their
business customers.
Course Schedule
Week 1: The Environment of Business
Week 2: Being Ethical and Socially Responsible
Week 3: Exploring Global Business
Week 4: Choosing a Form of Business Ownership
Week 5: Small Business, Entrepreneurship, and Franchise
Week 6: Understanding the Management Process
Week 7: Creating a Flexible Organization and Producing Quality Goods and Services
Week 8: Midterm
Week 9: Attracting and Retaining the Best Employees
Motivating and Satisfying Employees and Teams
Week 10: Building Customer Relationships Through Effective Marketing
Week 11: Creating and Pricing Products that Satisfy Customers
Week 12: Distributing and Promoting Products
Week 13: Review
Week 14: Understanding Information and e-Business
Week 15: Using Accounting Information and Mastering Financial Management
Week 16: Final

Because this is an online course, specific learning activities have been developed to
help you work through each chapter. All learning activities are located within the course
website. You will be expected to complete the following activities for each chapter.
1. Read the chapter assigned.
2. Review Power Point Presentation Materials
3. Take a quiz for each chapter at least once.
4. Complete the weekly assignment or class discussion.
In addition to these weekly assignments you will also be required to take two major
exams. The first exam will be a midterm and will cover chapters 1 – 8. The second
exam will be a final and it will cover chapters 9 – 16. Each of these major exams will
be proctored. You will not be allowed to take any study aids with you to take the exam.
You will be required to take them in one of our testing centers. We have testing centers
located on all three campuses.
The midterm and the final will determine 50% of your grade.
The midterm must be taken between October 18th and October 22nd.
The final must be taken between December 13th and December 16th.

The remainder of your course grade will be made up as follows:

25% from chapter quizzes
25% from weekly assignments and/or discussions
You will be allowed two chances to take each chapter quiz. There will be a 30 minute
wait time between the time you finished the first attempt to the time you are allowed to
attempt the quiz for the second time. I will keep the higher of two grades. Quizzes will
not be reopened once the due date for that chapter has passed (be sure to that you are
familiar with all due dates). I will however drop your two lowest quiz grades.
Course assignments or discussions will be posted weekly along with directions on what
is required of you to receive credit for that assignment. The activities are designed to
increase your understanding of the subject material.
Course Policies
Students are expected to manage their time when enrolled in an internet class.
Students are expected to complete all assignments, quizzes and exams as scheduled.
Students are expected to log in a minimum of twice a week to check mail, complete
quizzes and assignments.
Students that have never attended class before the Official Reporting Day will be
withdrawn from the course by the institution. Students enrolled in an online course must
“log in” and before the Official Accounting Day to be considered an active student or to
be considered attending class.
Students choosing to drop this course must request a “DROP” form from the instructor
and submit it to the records office before the official “last day to drop” date to receive a
“W” as the course grade. Students who have not voluntarily withdrawn from this course
before the official “last day to drop a class” and have insufficient progress to pass will
receive an “F” as the course grade. Students should refer to the PJC catalog or student
handbook to review the procedure for withdrawing from a course. The last day to drop
a course for this semester is Thursday, November 18th.
In the pursuit of learning, it is expected that students will engage in honest academic
engage in academic dishonesty through such activities as cheating on exams or
collusion with others will be referred to the appropriate college official for disciplinary
action.
There will not be any food, drink, tobacco products or cell phone use allowed in the
testing center or campus computer labs. Children will not be allowed to accompany
students in the testing center or campus computer labs.
ADA Statement



Paris Junior College Cathy McManus
Term: 101S 903-454-9333
Section: 65 cmcmanus@parisjc.edu
BUSG 1304
Personal Finance
Course Description
A study of the financial problems which people ordinarily encounter in managing their
family financial affairs. Topics include financial security for the family, budgeting, use of
credit, home ownership, financial tangles, and savings and investment planning. The
student will identify the concepts associated with the time value of money; identify the
concepts associated with personal budgeting; and recognize the differences among
various savings and investment programs and classes of securities. The student will
identify the options for personal insurance; describe retirement and estate planning
techniques; explain the benefits of owning versus renting real property; and discuss
consumer protection legislation. Introduction to utilizing the computer in maintaining
accounting records, making management decisions, and processing common business
applications with primary emphasis on general ledger package.

PERSONAL FINANCE, 9th edition; ISBN 978-0-07-338232-6; Author: Kapoor, Dlabay,
Hughes; Publisher: McGraw-Hill Irwin
Homework Manager Access Code ISBN 978-0-07-3363882
Program Outcomes
1. Use office resource materials, Internet, and Email to research and complete
office documents and projects proficiently.
Course Outcomes
Students will achieve a basic level of understanding of the following financial topics:
1. Financial recordkeeping.
2. Spending planning.
3. Tax planning.
4. Consumer credit.
5. Making buying decisions.
6. Purchasing insurance.
7. Selecting investments.
8. Retirement and estate planning.
Learning Objectives
Identify the concepts associated with the time value of money and personal budgeting,
and recognize the differences among various savings and investments programs and
classes of securities. Identify the options for personal insurance, describe retirement
and estate planning techniques, explain the benefits of owning versus renting real
property; and discuss consumer protection legislation.
Course Schedule
WEEK 1: Introduction to syllabus and course assignments; introduction to Homework
Manager.
WEEK 2: An overview of the basics in personal finances and how they relate to the
Time Value of Money.
WEEK 3: An overview of various financial aspects one should consider in career
planning.
WEEK 4: An overview of money management strategies and the process of creating
financial statements and budgeting.
WEEK 5: An overview of planning personal tax strategy.
WEEK 6: An overview of financial services: Savings plans and Payment accounts.
WEEK 7: An introduction to consumer credit issues and strategies.
WEEK 8: An overview of factors and financing in making housing decisions.
WEEK 9: An overview of strategies involved in the selection of property and motor
vehicle insurance.
WEEK 10: An overview of health, disability, and long-term care insurance.
WEEK 11: An overview of decision-making in the provision of life insurance coverage.
WEEK 12: An introduction to the fundamentals of investing.
WEEK 13: An introduction to investing in stock.
WEEK 14: An introduction to investing in bonds.
WEEK 15: An introduction to investing in mutual funds.
WEEK 16: Final exam for course completion.

1. For each chapter, students should read the chapter, complete the assigned
homework, and take the online chapter quiz. Homework assignments will be
completed online through a website known as Homework Manager. This website
is maintained by the textbook publisher and requires you to setup a student
account using the access code which came with your textbook. You can
learn how to set up this account by following the instructions by going to
Homepage => Homework Manager => Setting Up Student Account within
WebCT. I provide all of the details for how homework works by going to
Homepage => Homework Manager => Homework Rules found within WebCT.
Once you are on the Homework Manager website, you will find info on due dates,
your grade, feedback, etc. You will have two attempts at all homework
problems, so you can print them if you want to work them offline first. If you
have any problems, please let me know. All homework for each chapter should
be completed and submitted online via Homework Manager on Monday at 11:00
CST of the week following which the chapter is opened. Please refer to Homework
Manager link on the Homepage section of WebCT for details
2. You will have 14 Quizzes this semester which will be taken online; see the
Assignment Sheet for availability periods of these quizzes. Chapter Quizzes over
assigned reading must be taken online during the listed availability periods; see the
Assignment Sheet for availability periods. All quizzes are timed for 60 minutes.
You must save your Quiz and submit it before the end of your 60 minutes, or your
grade will not be accepted. Quiz questions can include multiple-choice, matching,
and true/false. Please try to take these as soon as possible during the availability
period so nothing interferes with your meeting the deadline. Due to the number of
quizzes required for this course, it will not be possible to make-up missed quizzes.
If there is any anticipation of not being able to comply with due dates on any
quizzes, please send an email to me via WebCT as soon as you realize there will
be a problem. Any computer difficulties which interfere with the completion of
a quiz should be reported to the instructor immediately so the quiz can be
reset before the availability period ends.
3. You will have 4 Exams in addition to chapter quizzes this semester, which will be
taken online; see the Assignment Sheet for availability periods of these exams. The
questions will be multiple-choice and true/false; the exams will be timed at 75
minutes. You must save your Exam and submit it before the end of your 75 minutes,
or your grade will not be accepted. Please try to take these as soon as possible
during the availability period so nothing interferes with your meeting the deadline.
Due to the number of exams required for this course, it will not be possible to make-
up missed exams. If there is any anticipation of not being able to comply with due
dates on any Exams, please send an email to me via WebCT as soon as you realize
there will be a problem. Any computer difficulties which interfere with the
completion of an exam should be reported to the instructor immediately so the
exam can be reset before the availability period ends.
Objective exams must be completed online at predetermined dates outlined in the

course assignment sheet as follows:
o Exam 1 (Chapters 1-3)
4. Both the Mid-Term Exam and the Final Exam will be proctored, which means they
must be taken in the presence of a representative of Paris Junior College. Students
will schedule a time with the testing center of their choice (Paris, Greenville, or
Sulphur Springs). Testing center hours and information are available on WebCT
under Testing Centers. These exams will be 180 minutes each and will cover
information since the last major exam (i.e. Mid Term will cover all material up to the
Mid Term, and the Final will cover material since the Mid Term). The exams will be
available for approximately one week (see below or the Assignment Sheet on
WebCT for details).
The following proctored exams must be completed by the dates outlined in the
course assignment sheet as follows:
o Mid Term Exam (Chapters 1-6 & 9)
o Final Exam (Chapters 10-16)
GRADING:
Grades of A, B, C, D, and F will be determined by the student’s achievement out of a
possible 100 points based on the following:
1. The average of 14 Quizzes = 25% of the total grade

2. The average of 4 Exams = 25% of the total grade
3. The average of all Homework Assignments = 10% of the total grade
4. The average of Mid Term Exam and Final Exam = 40% of the total grade
For example, consider the following formula to calculate your weighted grade average
for the exams:
(1)
a. Exam 1= 90
b. Exam 2= 80
c. Exam 3= 95
d. Exam 4= 100
365/4 = 91.25 average X 25% = 22.81 points out of a possible
25 points.
Grading Scale:
90% - 100% = A
80% - 89% = B
70% - 79% = C
60% - 69% = D
0% - 59% = F
Course Policies
Class Procedures: Students must login to the class during the first week of the semester
and email the instructor through WebCT. Additionally, students should communicate
with the instructor at least once a week throughout the semester. Submission of
assigned work will count as communication.
Class Attendance: Participation on the class website will constitute “attendance”. If the
student has not logged in and emailed the instructor by the 12th class day, the student
will be dropped for non-attendance. Withdrawal requests due to a low grade MUST BE
initiated by the student. Requests for withdrawal become official and effective the date
they are received in the records office. Students who stop attending class (that is, stop
participating on the class website) but fail to drop the course will earn an “F” for the
course.
Late Work: To be considered “on time”, all work must be submitted online as stipulated
on the Course Schedule. Quizzes may not be taken late. Late homework will not be
accepted.
Exams: Students must take exams over chapters according to the class schedule. No
make-up exams will be given. Students who miss one exam will use their grade on the
mid-term or final exam (depending on when the exam was missed) to replace the
missed grade. Any additional missed exams will result in a score of zero unless
extenuating circumstances exist.
ADA Statement

The college will make reasonable accommodations for qualified students with
documented disabilities who have been admitted to the college and have requested
accommodations. Students may request services by providing appropriate verification of
a disability and completing a Request for Accommodations form. Reasonable
accommodation requests with documentation may be subject to review by the ADA
Committee.
To provide appropriate planning and scheduling, students should submit requests for
most accommodations at least two weeks before accommodations are needed.
However, for scheduling of interpreters, available modified equipment, enlarged
textbooks, scribes, or books on tape, students must make the request four to six weeks
in advance of the need.
Counseling/Advising Center by calling 903.782.0426 (Paris Campus), 903.454.9333

Paris Junior College Rickey McFadden

College Year: 2010-2011 WTC 1111
Term: Fall 903-782-0722
Section: 01 rmcfadden@parisjc.edu
Course # (CETT 1403)

Course Title (DC Circuits)
Course Description
A study of the fundamentals of direct current including Ohm’s law, Kirchoff’s laws and
circuit analysis techniques. Emphasis on circuit analysis of resistive networks and DC
measurements.
Credits: 4 SHC, 3 Lecture, 4 Lab
Prerequisite(s): MATH 1314 or EEIR 1201

Electronics Fundamentals: Circuits, Devices, and Applications 8th ed. – Floyd
Program Outcomes
Students will be able to apply Ohm’s Law to circuits to evalulate them. Students will
also demonstrate how to safely and correctly use a multimeter.
Course Outcomes
Students will analyze DC circuits from the simple to complex; repeat by memory the
resistor color code; and identify a resistor by its electronic symbol.
Learning Objectives
Know resistor color code and apply it.
Apply Ohm’s Law and analyze a circuit using it then verify findings with a multimeter.
Course Schedule
Week # 1 Scientific notation, metric prefixes and electrical safety
Week # 2 Voltage, current, resistance and resistor color code
Week # 3 Ohm’s Law and Power
Week # 4 Series Circuits
Week # 5 Parallel Circuits
Week # 6 Series-Parallel Circuit Identification
Week # 7 Analyzing 3 Resistor S-P Circuits
Week # 10 Analyzing 6 + Resistor S-P Circuits
Week # 11 Voltage Dividers
Week # 12 Loading Effect of S-P Circuits
Week # 13 Wheatstone Bridge
Course # (ACCT 2401) - Faculty Name Page 1 of 3

Week # 14 Maximum Power Transfer

Week # 15 Superposition
Week # 16 Final Exam

Insert each student requirement and evaluation rubric
Course Policies
Grading:
3 Major Tests (NO Make-Up)
+ 1 Final Exam (Required) A Grade of “D” or less is failing
30%: Test Average (3 Major Tests) 90 – 100 = “A”

20%: Lab Experiments / Lab Notebook / Notes 80 – 90 = “B”
30%: Final Exam 70 – 80 = “C”
20%: Daily Tests 10% / Study Group 10%
Study Groups: Students will be required to meet a minimum of 1 hour a week in a

study group consisting of at least 1 other person in that class. Forms must be turned in
weekly, filled out and signed by all participants. You cannot make an “A” without weekly
participation.
Final Exam: Comprehensive final: If the final exam score is higher than the lowest
major test score, it may at the instructors discretion replace that score, provided an
honest attempt at completing the test was made.
Missed Exams: Without prior approval from the instructor, exams taken late will
require a five page essay be written and turned in before the student will be allowed to
take a makeup test.
Supplies: Scientific Calculator (bring to first class meeting.)
Attendance / Drop: Students are expected to be present at each class meeting for the
entire session. For each absence after the second absence, TWO (2) points will be
deducted from the FINAL COURSE GRADE! Three occurrences of tardiness will equate
to one absence. After missing 10% of the classes, you may at the instructors discretion,
be dropped because of lack of attendance.
Those students who wish to drop must initiate the drop themselves or a grade of 'F' will
be assigned. If for some reason, you are unable to complete the course, discuss it with
the instructor. DO NOT just quit coming to class.
Policies: TOBACCO, of any kind, will NOT be allowed in the building. DRINKS or
FOOD will not be allowed in the Lab Area
MINOR CHILDREN ON CAMPUS: For safety reasons, minor children are not allowed

on campus while student/parents are attending classes. Minor children who are visiting
the campus with parents conducting college business must be under the direct
supervision and control of their parents or guardians at all times. EXTRA POINTS:
Each Student in this class who donates blood will receive two (2) points added to their
final grade for each time you give blood during the semester. If the student is unable to
give blood, the student can do a project with the Student Government Association.
PROFANITY will not be allowed. SOFTWARE other than that approved by the
instructor will not be used on or copied by departmental computers. All portable storage
devices used on computers outside the department MUST be scanned for viruses
before use. CLASSES will start at prescribed times and the door will be locked and
make-ups will be at the discretion of the instructor. CELL PHONE USE will not be
allowed in class. If you have one with you it must be turned off or if it rings during class
it will be confiscated. If you are emergency personnel turn your pager, beeper or cell
phone on silent or vibrate. If you have an emergency please let your instructor know
and we will work with you. Cell phones, ect. Will not be allowed during a test.
Academic Honesty: In pursuit of learning, it is expected that students will engage in

honest academic endeavor to the highest degree of honor and integrity. Students who
are found to engage in academic dishonesty through such activities as cheating on
exams, plagiarism, or collusion with others will be referred to the Vice President of
Student Services for disciplinary action such as dismissal from the college. The above
list is examples, but is not an all-inclusive list.
ADA Statement


Term: Fall 903-782-0722

Course Description
measurements.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule



Course Policies
Grading:

30%: Final Exam 70 – 80 = “C”

participation.
take a makeup test.


ADA Statement
Paris Junior College welcomes students who have special needs. The institution is committed to
assisting qualified students as completely as possible. Paris Junior College provides equal
opportunities for students with disabilities and ensures access to a wide variety of resources and
programs.
The passage of Section 504, Federal Rehabilitation Act of 1973, and the Americans with
Disabilities Act of 1990 requires that the college make certain special arrangement for students
with disabilities. This requirement does not mean that less should be required of the student with
a disability than of other students, but only that reasonable accommodations should be made to
ensure that students with a disability have access to an education. The college will make
reasonable accommodations for qualified students with a documented physical, psychological or
learning disability who have been admitted to the college and have requested accommodations.

Paris Junior College Dr. Charles George
Term: Fall 903-782-0245
Section: 03 cgeorge@parisjc.edu

Course Description
measurements.
Prerequisite(s): Departmental Approval

Program Outcomes
The development and enhancement of technical and problem-solving skill sets for
maintenance technicians.
Course Outcomes
Upon successful completion of CETT 1403, the student should be able to:
 Define and demonstrate safe practice toward direct current circuits.
 Define basic terms, symbols and components of electric and electrical circuits,
prefixes, and basic terms.
 Operate a multimeter.
 Calculate voltage drops in series resistive circuits.
 Calculate the current flow in parallel resistive circuits.
 Solve direct-current electric circuit problems using Ohm’s law and Kirchoff’s
voltage and current laws.
 Demonstrate basic concepts as applied to electric circuits.
Learning Objectives
The safe application of Ohm’s and Kirkoff’s Law to analyze DC circuits and then verify
findings with a multimeter.
Course Schedule
Course # (CETT 1403) – Charles George Page 1 of 3

Week # 6 Series-Parallel Circuits
Week # 7 Series-Parallel Circuits
Week # 8 Review & Midterm
Week # 12 Wheatstone Bridge (Rectifiers)
Week # 13 Magnetism
Week # 14 DC Motors

 Completion of homework assignments
 Five (5) assignments 20 points each 20%
 In class quiz
 Three (3) 20 points each 12%
 Class participation
 40 points 8%
 Midterm Exam
 100 points 20%
 Final Exam
 200 points 40%
The total point award for this course is 500 points.

A 500 – 455
B 454 – 405
C 404 – 355
D 354 – 305
F 304 -
Method of Instruction:
The main thrust of this course will be the development of tools to design, calculate, and
trouble-shoot DC circuits. The method of instruction will be lecture, visual
presentations, and hands-on experiments. In class discussions will be used to discuss
workplace applications and prior experiences.

Instructors Expectations:
 Education is a “participation sport” attendance and participation in class

discussion is necessary.
 The student will make every effort to be on time for class.
 A student who misses more than one class will have their class status reviewed.
 Hand in all homework assignments by due date (see Assignments).
 Read the text / handout material before the class and be ready to discuss in class.
Assignments:
 Students’ homework or other assignments will be due on the date assigned. There is
no late homework.
 Missed quizzes can be made-up only with prior approval and on the students own
time.
 Midterm and Final Exams cannot be made-up unless student has a personal or
family emergency. The teacher will be the sole determining factor in determining test
make-up.
 If a student cannot attend class, previous assignments may be turned in early, E-
Mailed or FAXED into the office.
ADA Statement
Paris Junior College welcomes students who have special needs. The institution is
committed to assisting qualified students as completely as possible. Paris Junior
College provides equal opportunities for students with disabilities and ensures access to
a wide variety of resources and programs.
The passage of Section 504, Federal Rehabilitation Act of 1973, and the Americans
with Disabilities Act of 1990 requires that the college make certain special arrangement
for students with disabilities. This requirement does not mean that less should be
required of the student with a disability than of other students, but only that reasonable
accommodations should be made to ensure that students with a disability have access
to an education. The college will make reasonable accommodations for qualified
students with a documented physical, psychological or learning disability who have
been admitted to the college and have requested accommodations.


Term: Fall 903-782-0722

Course Description
measurements.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule



Course Policies
Grading:

30%: Final Exam 70 – 80 = “C”

participation.
take a makeup test.


ADA Statement


Term: Fall 903-782-0722

Course Description
measurements.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule



Course Policies
Grading:

30%: Final Exam 70 – 80 = “C”

participation.
take a makeup test.


ADA Statement
programs.


Term: Fall 903-782-0722
Section: P1 rmcfadden@parisjc.edu

Course Description
measurements.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule



Course Policies
Grading:

30%: Final Exam 70 – 80 = “C”

participation.
take a makeup test.


ADA Statement
programs.


Term: Fall 903-782-0722

Course Title (AC Circuits)
Course Description
A study of the fundamentals of alternating current including series and parallel AC
circuits, phasors, capacitive and inductive networks, transformers, and resonance.
Prerequisite(s): MATH 1316 or EEIR 1201 & CETT 1403

Program Outcomes
Students will be able to apply Ohm’s Law to circuits to evaluate them. Students will also
demonstrate how to safely and correctly use a multimeter.
Complete understanding of a sinusoidal waveform and how to calculate the rms, peak,
and peak-to-peak of an AC waveform.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
The student will analyze AC circuits from simple to complex; construct and make
measurements for AC circuits from simple to complex; describe in technical terms an
AC signal on an oscilloscope; and describe the difference between an AC and DC
signal.
Course Schedule
Week # 1 - Introduction to Alternating Current and Voltage
The Sinusoidal Waveform
Voltage and Current Values of Sine Waves
Week # 2 - The Sine Wave Formula
Analysis of AC Circuits
Nonsinusoidal Waveforms
The Oscilloscope
Week # 3 - Capacitors
The Basic Capacitor
Types of Capacitors

Week # 4 - Series Capacitors

Parallel Capacitors
Week # 5 - RC Circuits
Sinusoidal Response of RC Circuits
Impedance and Phase Angle of Series RC Circuits
Analysis of Series RC Circuits
Impedance and Phase Angle of Parallel RC Circuits
Week # 6 - Analysis of Parallel RC Circuits
Analysis of Series-Parallel RC Circuits
Power in RC Circuits
Week # 7 - Inductors
The Basic Inductor
Types of Inductors
Week # 8 - Series and Parallel Inductors
Inductors in DC Circuits
Inductors in AC Circuits
Week # 9 - RL Circuits
Sinusoidal Response of RL Circuits
Impedance and Phase Angle of Series RL Circuits
Analysis of Series RL Circuits
Week # 10 - Impedance and Phase Angle of Parallel RL Circuits
Analysis of Parallel RL Circuits
Analysis of Series-Parallel RL Circuits
Power in RL Circuits
Week # 11 - RLC Circuits and Resonance

Impedance and Phase Angle of Series RLC Circuits
Analysis of Series RLC Circuits
Series Resonance
Series Resonant Filters
Week # 12 - Parallel RLC Circuits
Parallel Resonance
Parallel Resonant Filters
Week # 13 - Time Response of Reactive Circuits

The RC Integrator
Response of RC Integrators to a Single Pulse
Response of RC Integrators to Repetitive Pulses
Week # 14 - Response of RC Differentiators to a Single Pulse
Response of RC Differentiators to Repetitive Pulses

Response of RL Integrators to Pulse Inputs

Response of RL Differentiators to Pulse Inputs
Week # 15 - Transformers
Mutual Inductance
The Basic Transformer
Step-Up and Step-Down Transformers
Loading the Secondary
Reflected Load
Impedance Matching
Nonideal Transformer Characteristics
Tapped and Multiple-Winding Transformers

Course Policies
Grading:

30%: Final Exam 70 – 80 = “C”

participation.
take a makeup test.


ADA Statement


Term: Fall 903-782-0722

Course Title (AC Circuits)
Course Description
Prerequisite(s): MATH 1316 or EEIR 1201 & CETT 1403

Program Outcomes
Students will be able to apply Ohm’s Law to circuits to evaluate them. Students will also
demonstrate how to safely and correctly use a multimeter.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
The student will analyze AC circuits from simple to complex; construct and make
measurements for AC circuits from simple to complex; describe in technical terms an
AC signal on an oscilloscope; and describe the difference between an AC and DC
signal.
Course Schedule
Week # 1 - Introduction to Alternating Current and Voltage
The Sinusoidal Waveform
Voltage and Current Values of Sine Waves
Week # 2 - The Sine Wave Formula
Analysis of AC Circuits
Nonsinusoidal Waveforms
The Oscilloscope
Week # 3 - Capacitors
The Basic Capacitor
Types of Capacitors

Week # 4 - Series Capacitors

Parallel Capacitors
Week # 5 - RC Circuits
Sinusoidal Response of RC Circuits
Impedance and Phase Angle of Series RC Circuits
Analysis of Series RC Circuits
Impedance and Phase Angle of Parallel RC Circuits
Week # 6 - Analysis of Parallel RC Circuits
Analysis of Series-Parallel RC Circuits
Power in RC Circuits
Week # 7 - Inductors
The Basic Inductor
Types of Inductors
Week # 8 - Series and Parallel Inductors
Inductors in DC Circuits
Inductors in AC Circuits
Week # 9 - RL Circuits
Sinusoidal Response of RL Circuits
Impedance and Phase Angle of Series RL Circuits
Analysis of Series RL Circuits
Week # 10 - Impedance and Phase Angle of Parallel RL Circuits
Analysis of Parallel RL Circuits
Analysis of Series-Parallel RL Circuits
Power in RL Circuits
Week # 11 - RLC Circuits and Resonance

Impedance and Phase Angle of Series RLC Circuits
Analysis of Series RLC Circuits
Series Resonance
Series Resonant Filters
Week # 12 - Parallel RLC Circuits
Parallel Resonance
Parallel Resonant Filters
Week # 13 - Time Response of Reactive Circuits

The RC Integrator
Response of RC Integrators to a Single Pulse
Response of RC Integrators to Repetitive Pulses
Week # 14 - Response of RC Differentiators to a Single Pulse
Response of RC Differentiators to Repetitive Pulses

Response of RL Integrators to Pulse Inputs

Response of RL Differentiators to Pulse Inputs
Week # 15 - Transformers
Mutual Inductance
The Basic Transformer
Step-Up and Step-Down Transformers
Loading the Secondary
Reflected Load
Impedance Matching
Nonideal Transformer Characteristics
Tapped and Multiple-Winding Transformers

Course Policies
Grading:

30%: Final Exam 70 – 80 = “C”

participation.
take a makeup test.


ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Don Harootunian

Term: Fall 90-782-0273
Section: 01 dharootunian@gmail.com

Course Title (Digital Fundamentals)
Course Description
An entry level course in digital electronics covering number systems, binary
mathematics, digital codes, logic gates, Boolean algebra, Karnaugh maps, and
combinational logic. Emphasis on circuit logic analysis and troubleshooting
digital circuits.
Credits: SCH = 4, lecture = 3 and 4 laboratory hours per week,
Prerequisite(s):

Digital Electronics with VHDL, William Kleitz, 1st Edition
Program Outcomes
Comprehend digital circuits and binary systems and how they apply to microprocessors.
Know how flip-flops work and how they apply in a microprocessor circuit.
Course Outcomes
The student will explain the operation of digital logic gates and use Boolean algebra and
Karnaugh mapping, and express operations and minimize logic circuits in design. The
student will construct, analyze, and troubleshoot combinational logic circuits; create a
truth table for standard digital logic gates; and add, subtract, multiply, and divide using
the binary numbering system.
Learning Objectives
1) Digital Numbering Systems and Representations
2) Logic Gate Operation and Specifications
3) Combinational Logic Circuits and Reductions Techniques
a. Boolean Algebra
b. DeMorgan’s Theorem
c. Karnaugh Mapping
4) Data Control Devices
5) Flip Flops and Sequential Logic
6) Counter Circuits and Shift Registers
7) Completion of “Hands-On” Labs

Course Schedule
Week # 1. Number Systems and Codes.

Week # 2. Digital Electronic Signals and Switches.
Week # 3. Basic Logic Gates.
Week # 4. Programmable Logic Devices: CPLDs and FPGAs with VHDL Design.
Week # 5. Boolean Algebra and Reduction Techniques.
Week # 6. Exclusive-OR and Exclusive-NOR Gates.
Week # 7. Arithmetic Operations and Circuits.
Week # 8. Code Converters, Multiplexers, and Demultiplexers.
Week # 9. Logic Families and Their Characteristics.
Week # 10. Flip-Flops and Registers.
Week # 11. Practical Considerations for Digital Design.
Week # 12. Counter Circuits and VHDL State Machines.
Week # 13. Shift Registers.
Week # 14. Multivibrators and the 555 Timer.
Week # 15. Interfacing to the Analog World.
Week # 16. Semiconductor, Magnetic and Optical Memory.

Course Policies
Beginning the first week, lab work on the trainers will be included in all classes.
The course format will be conventional lecture, MultiSIM simulation software, and hands
on work on the DE1 trainers.
Grading:
30% Test Average (Three major tests approximately every 4 weeks)
20% Final Exam (cumulative from day one)
10% Homework
10% MultiSIM
30% Experiments/Labs using DE1 trainer (formal lab reports using MSWord required)
Beginning with the spring semester 2001, a grade of “D” will not be given. An
average of 70 or above will be considered passing while a grade below 70 will be
considered failing. This applies to all technical and math courses in the

Electromechanical and Electronic Technology Degree Programs.
Attendance/Drop
Students are expected to be present at each class meeting for the entire session. For
each absence after the second absence (first on night classes) TWO (2) points (FOUR
for night classes) will be deducted from the FINAL COURSE GRADE. Four tardies (two
for night classes) will constitute one absence. Excessive absence will result in being
dropped in accordance with the college policies. For perfect attendance, FOUR (4)
points will be added to the final course grade. If for some reason, you are unable to
complete the course discuss it with the instructor. Do not just quit coming to class.
Students who wish to drop must initiate the drop themselves or receive a grade of “F.”
Students may be dropped from classes upon the recommendation of the instructor if the
instructor believes the student has been unjustifiably absent or tardy a sufficient number
of times to preclude meeting the course objectives. The number of absences that will
result in being dropped may vary by course, but four absences (two for night classes) or
25% absence after 12 weeks will be considered justification for dropping the student.
Students dropped for this reason will receive a grade of “W.”
Exceptions will be made to the above policy only for those students who can
substantiate a need to miss because of rotating work schedules or unforeseen
shift changes, but all class work will still have to be completed. If the student
fails to stay current on assignments, the attendance policy will be enforced as
outlined above.
Policies
SMOKING or tobacco use of any kind will not be allowed in the building. FOOD AND
DRINKS will not be allowed in areas that would jeopardize equipment. SOFTWARE
other than approved by the instructor will not be used on or copied by departmental
computers. All diskettes used on computers outside the department MUST be scanned
for viruses before use.
For safety reasons, minor children are not allowed on campus while student parents are
attending classes. Minor children who are visiting the campus with parents conducting
college business must be under the direct supervision and control of their parents or
guardians at all times.
Paris Junior College is an affirmative action/equal opportunity educational institution and

employer. Its student and employees are selected and/or assigned without regard to
their regard to their race, color, sex, handicap or national origin, consistent with Titles VI
and VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, and Title IX of the Higher Education Acts as
Amended in 1972, and with Executive Order 11246 as Amended by Executive Order

11375.
The use of cell phones is prohibited in the classroom. Do not have your cell phone on
during class. Do not leave class to answer your cell phone. When a cell phone rings or
you leave the class, it disturbs the class.
Academic Honesty
In pursuit of learning, it is expected that students will engage in honest academic endeavor to the
highest degree of honor and integrity. Students who are found to engage in academic dishonesty
through such activities as cheating on exams, plagiarism, or collusion with others will be referred
to the Vice President of Student Services for disciplinary action such as dismissal from the
college. For detailed information on Academic Honesty, refer to the College Catalog.
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Don Harootunian

Term: Fall 90-782-0273
Section: 02 dharootunian@gmail.com

Course Title (Digital Fundamentals)
Course Description
An entry level course in digital electronics covering number systems, binary
mathematics, digital codes, logic gates, Boolean algebra, Karnaugh maps, and
combinational logic. Emphasis on circuit logic analysis and troubleshooting
digital circuits.
Credits: SCH = 4, lecture = 3 and 4 laboratory hours per week,
Prerequisite(s):

Digital Electronics with VHDL, William Kleitz, 1st Edition
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The student will explain the operation of digital logic gates and use Boolean algebra and
Karnaugh mapping, and express operations and minimize logic circuits in design. The
student will construct, analyze, and troubleshoot combinational logic circuits; create a
truth table for standard digital logic gates; and add, subtract, multiply, and divide using
the binary numbering system.
Learning Objectives
1) Digital Numbering Systems and Representations
2) Logic Gate Operation and Specifications
3) Combinational Logic Circuits and Reductions Techniques
a. Boolean Algebra
b. DeMorgan’s Theorem
c. Karnaugh Mapping
4) Data Control Devices
5) Flip Flops and Sequential Logic
6) Counter Circuits and Shift Registers
7) Completion of “Hands-On” Labs

Course Schedule
Week # 1. Number Systems and Codes.

Week # 2. Digital Electronic Signals and Switches.
Week # 3. Basic Logic Gates.
Week # 4. Programmable Logic Devices: CPLDs and FPGAs with VHDL Design.
Week # 5. Boolean Algebra and Reduction Techniques.
Week # 6. Exclusive-OR and Exclusive-NOR Gates.
Week # 7. Arithmetic Operations and Circuits.
Week # 8. Code Converters, Multiplexers, and Demultiplexers.
Week # 9. Logic Families and Their Characteristics.
Week # 10. Flip-Flops and Registers.
Week # 11. Practical Considerations for Digital Design.
Week # 12. Counter Circuits and VHDL State Machines.
Week # 13. Shift Registers.
Week # 14. Multivibrators and the 555 Timer.
Week # 15. Interfacing to the Analog World.
Week # 16. Semiconductor, Magnetic and Optical Memory.

Course Policies
Beginning the first week, lab work on the trainers will be included in all classes.
The course format will be conventional lecture, MultiSIM simulation software, and hands
on work on the DE1 trainers.
Grading:
30% Test Average (Three major tests approximately every 4 weeks)
20% Final Exam (cumulative from day one)
10% Homework
10% MultiSIM
30% Experiments/Labs using DE1 trainer (formal lab reports using MSWord required)

Attendance/Drop
for night classes) will constitute one absence. Excessive absence will result in being
dropped in accordance with the college policies. For perfect attendance, FOUR (4)
points will be added to the final course grade. If for some reason, you are unable to
complete the course discuss it with the instructor. Do not just quit coming to class.
Students who wish to drop must initiate the drop themselves or receive a grade of “F.”
Exceptions will be made to the above policy only for those students who can
substantiate a need to miss because of rotating work schedules or unforeseen
shift changes, but all class work will still have to be completed. If the student
fails to stay current on assignments, the attendance policy will be enforced as
outlined above.
Policies
DRINKS will not be allowed in areas that would jeopardize equipment. SOFTWARE
other than approved by the instructor will not be used on or copied by departmental
for viruses before use.


11375.
Academic Honesty
ADA Statement


Term: Fall 903-782-0722

Course Title (Solid State Devices)
Course Description
A study of diodes and bipolar semiconductor devices, including analysis of
static and dynamic characteristics, bias techniques, and thermal considerations
of solid state devices.
Prerequisite(s): CETT 1405

Science of Electronics, The: Analog Devices 1st. ed, Floyd/Buchla,
ISBN-13: 9780130875402
Program Outcomes
Understand how an op-amp functions and how it is used in an electronic circuit.
Course Outcomes
A study of diodes and bipolar semiconductor devices, including analysis of static and
dynamic characteristics, bi- techniques, and thermal considerations of solid-state
devices.
Learning Objectives
Semiconductors, Diode Theory, Diode Circuits, Special Purpose Diodes, Bipolar
Transistors, Transistor Fundamentals, Transistor Biasing, AC Models, Voltage
Amplifiers, Power Amplifiers, Emitter Followers
Course Schedule

Week # 1.Analog Concepts.
Week # 2.Analog Concepts.
Week # 3. Diodes and Applications.
Week # 4.Bipolar Junction Transistors.
Week # 5.Field-Effect Transistors.
Week # 6.Multistage, RF, and Differential Amplifiers.
Week # 7.Operational Amplifiers.

Week # 8.Operational Amplifiers

Week # 9.Basic Op-Amp Circuits.
Week # 10.Active Filters.
Week # 11.Special-Purpose Amplifiers.
Week # 12. Oscillators and Timers.
Week # 13. Voltage Regulators.
Week # 14. Voltage Regulators.
Week # 15. Sensing and Control Circuits.

Course Policies
Grading:

40%: Final Exam 70 – 80 = “C”
take a makeup test.


ADA Statement


Term: Fall 903-782-0722

Course Title (Microprocessor)
Course Description
An introductory course in microprocessor software and hardware; its architecture, timing
sequence, operation, and programming; and discussion of appropriate software
diagnostic language and tools.


Text: Digital Electronics, A Practical Approach, Kleitz ISBN#978-0-13-507295-0
Lab: Parallax Boebot programmer
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The student will define terms used to describe microprocessor/microcomputer systems;
program and operate applications for microprocessor/microcomputer systems; write a
program using Assembly Level Language; and describe the purpose of microprocessor
internal registers
Learning Objectives
1. Understand Microprocessor Architecture
2. Understanding microprocessors
3. Ability to program a microprocessor
Course Schedule
Week # 1 - Introduction to Digital Computers
Week # 2 - Microcomputers and Microprocessors
Week # 3 - Use of Codes with Microcomputers
Week # 4 - Microprocessor Software

Week # 5 - Basic Instructions and Addressing Modes
Week # 6 - Microprocessor Instruction Set
Week # 7 - Microprocessor Programs
Week # 8 - Microprocessor Chip
Week # 9 - Semiconductor Memories
Week # 10 - Memory Chips and Organization
Week # 11 - Interface Devices
Week # 12 - Peripheral Interface Adaptor
Week # 13 - Relays and Solid-State Starters and Sensing Devices and Controls
Week # 14 - Asynchronous Communication Interface Adaptor
Week # 15 – Program Robot
Week # 16 - Final Exam

Course Policies
Grading: A grade of “D” or below is failing
30% : Programming robot 90 –100 is an “A”
20% : Homework Exercises 80 – 90 is a “B”
50% : Final Exam 70 – 80 is a “C”
entire session. Students may be dropped from class upon the recommendation of the
instructor for excessive absenteeism and tardiness. For each absence after the second
absence, TWO (2) points will be deducted from the FINAL COURSE GRADE! Three
occurrences of tardiness will equate to one absence. After missing 10% of the classes,
you may at the instructors discretion, be dropped because of lack of attendance. Those
students who wish to drop must initiate the drop themselves or a grade of 'F' will be
assigned. If for some reason, you are unable to complete the course, discuss it with the
instructor. DO NOT just quit coming to class.

FOOD will not be allowed in the Lab Area.

supervision and control of their parents or guardians at all times. Each Student in this
class who donates blood will receive two (2) points added to their final grade for each
time you give blood during the semester. If the student is unable to give blood, the
student can do a project with the Student Government Association or work a weekend
with Habitat for Humanities. PROFANITY will not be allowed. SOFTWARE other than
that approved by the instructor will not be used on or copied by departmental
for viruses before use. CLASSES will start at prescribed times
and the door will be locked and make-ups will be at the discretion of the instructor.
CELL PHONE USE will not be allowed in class. If you have one with you it must be
turned off or if it rings during class it will be confiscated. If you are emergency
personnel turn your pager, beeper or cell phone on silent or vibrate. If you have an
emergency please let your instructor know and we will work with you. Cell phones, ect.
WILL not be allowed during a test. Disruptive students will be ask to leave and the
police will be called if necessary.
ADA Statement


Term: Fall 903-782-0722

Course Title (Linear Integrated Circuits)
Course Description
A study of the characteristics, operations, stabilization, testing, and feedback techniques
of linear integrated circuits. Application in computation, measurements, instrumentation,
and active filtering.

Text: None (Everything on computer)
Lab: None
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Identify and analyze linear integrated circuits including operational amplifiers.
Construct, measure, and troubleshoot circuits containing linear integrated circuits.
Learning Objectives
1. Identify op amps and how they function
2. Construct op amp circuits and analyze
3. Troubleshoot op amp circuits
Course Schedule
Week # 1 - Diode Circuits
Week # 2 - Diode Circuits
Week # 3 - Special Purpose Diodes
Week # 4 - Bipolar Transistors
Week # 5 - Bipolar Transistors

Week # 6 - Transistor Biasing
Week # 7 - AC Models
Week # 8 - AC Models
Week # 9 - Voltage Amplifiers
Week # 10 - Voltage Amplifiers
Week # 11 - Power Amplifiers
Week # 14 - Emitter Followers
Week # 15 – Emitter Followers

Course Policies
30% : End of section exams 90 –100 is an “A”
20% : Class notes 80 – 90 is a “B”
50% : Final Exam 70 – 80 is a “C”

ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Douglas Shuler
College Year: 2010 - 2011 AS – 105
Term: 101S 903-782-0497
Section: 01 dshuler@parisjc.edu
Course #: CJSA - 2364

Course Title: Practicum - Criminal Justice Studies
Course Description:
Practical, general workplace training supported by an individualized learning plan developed by
the instructor, employer, college, and student.
Credits: 3 SCH = 3 lecture and 0 laboratory hours per week, from approved course list.
Prerequisite(s): Consent of Instructor
Textbooks and Readings:

This course does NOT require a textbook. Any materials needed will be provided by the
instructor and/or institution.
This course will/may utilize Texas Commission on Law Enforcement Standards and Education
(TCLEOSE) required training materials when/where required and or other applicable material.
Program Outcomes:
- Communicate
effectively, both oral and in written form
- Apply policy and
procedure within law enforcement, courts and corrections
- Identify the history,
developmental structure and function(s) of the criminal justice system
- Differentiate between
criminal law and civil law as it relates to the criminal justice system
- Apply ethical
principles, which is the basis of the criminal justice system
Course # (CJSA - 2364) – Douglas Shuler Page 1 of 3
Course Outcomes:
The student will gain an understanding of the workplace and the abilities required to become
successful in a criminal justice environment. The plan relates the workplace training and
experiences to the student’s general and technical course of study.
Learning Objectives:
Upon successful completion of this course the student should have a working knowledge and/or
an understanding of the following:
- Theory, concepts, and skills involved in the workplace
- The tools, materials, equipment, procedures, regulations, laws, and interactions within and
among political, economic, environmental, and legal systems associated with the workplace
- Demonstrate ethical behavior, safety practices, interpersonal and teamwork skills
- Appropriate verbal and written communications in the workplace
- Professionalism, Integrity and discretion
Course Schedule:
The student will be required to fulfill their obligation of commitment to the rules and regulations
of the program as outlined by the requirements of the course.
Course Requirement(s) and Evaluation:

- Meet with your Criminal Justice advisor within the first week of the semester - NO later
- A work (practicum) location will be agreed upon and secured (Have a 1st and 2nd choice)
- You will receive a Practicum packet that will include:
Contract signed by all parties: Student, Instructor and Employer
Letter from instructor to the prospective supervisor at the practicum location
Employer evaluation form (for end of program evaluation)
Time logs (That you track and the employer signs) verifying your work hours
The evaluation will be done and a grade dispensed on the basis of your employer evaluation
and successful completion of the practicum contract
You will be required to commit a minimum of 21 hours per week for the length of the semester
to the employer to fulfill you obligation.
Course Policies:
Academic Honesty: By registering and taking this course, the student officially enrolled hereby
declares that this same student will be the author of all work submitted for the course. Allowing
another individual to complete assignments constitutes fraud and academic dishonesty. Should
such behavior come to the attention of the instructor, the student will be dropped from the
course or receive a grade of "F." You are required to familiarize yourself with the PJC Student
Handbook for information regarding student policies, procedure and/or actions while on a PJC
campus.
ADA Statement:
institution is committed to assisting qualified students as completely as possible. Services
include the arrangement for accommodations and services to allow equal access to education
opportunities for students with disabilities.
Counseling/Advising Center by calling 903.782.0426 (Paris campus), 903.454.9333 (Greenville
Center), or 903.885.1232 (Sulphur Springs Center) to arrange an appointment to begin the
process.

Paris Junior College Lana Biggerstaff Adams

College Year: 2010-2011 Greenville - 207
Term: Fall 2010 903-454-9333
Section: 40 ladams@parisjc.edu
Course # (CJSA 2364)

Criminal Justice Practicum
Course Description
This course is the practical, general workplace training supported by an individualized

learning plan developed by the employer, college, and student.
Credits: 3.0.21 =0 lecture and 21 laboratory hours per week

TSI Requirement: Must be TSI compliant in all 3 areas
Prerequisite(s): 30 College hours in your degree plan or consent of instructor

No textbook required
Course Outcomes
Complete a detailed professional Resume’

Complete 8-12 hours per week of internship at the work site
Complete a “mock” job interview
Learning Objectives
The student will be able to identify the value of a profession resume’.
The student will be able to complete work tasks assigned at the designated work site.
The student will be able to present himself/herself in a professional manner during a
“mock” job interview.

Course Schedule
Week 1– Meet with instructor and begin work on resume’

Weeks 2-15 – volunteer 8-12 hours per week at the work site placement
continue developing resume’
Week 16 – Meet with instructor and turn in evaluation for work site
Complete the “mock” job interview using the resume’ you developed
Completion of resume 20% of your grade

Completion of “mock” job interview 20% of your grade
Completion of 112-168 on site work hours 60% of your grade
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE/WITHDRAWAL
Students are expected to make every effort to attend class sessions: however, illness or personal
business may cause a student to be absent. When a student’s absences exceed 3, the instructor has the
right to drop the student from the course. After the drop date, students may not drop. If a student
wishes to drop the course before the drop deadline, it is his/her responsibility to initiate the drop.
Failure to do so may result in a grade of “F”.
POLICY ON PLAGIARISM AND CHEATING
Every student is expected to do his/her own work. Law, ethical standards and the department policy
demand students refrain from plagiarism and any form of cheating. Plagiarism is the “act of
appropriating the literacy composition of another, or parts of passages of his/her writing, or the ideas or
language of the same, and passing them off as the product of one’s own mind”. (Black’s Law Dictionary,
Abridged Fifth Edition, 1893). When using other’s words, phrases, or ideas in writing, the original author
should be given proper credit.

OTHER GENERAL POLICIES
Other general policies and procedures may be found in the Student Handbook
PLEASE FEEL FREE TO ASK IF ANYTHING IS UNCLEAR OR NOT ADDRESSED

ADA Statement

College Year: 2010 - 2011 AS – 105
Term: 101S 903-782-0497
Course #: CJSA - 2364

Course Title: Practicum – Criminal Justice Studies
Course Description:
Practical, general workplace training supported by an individualized learning plan developed by
the instructor, employer, college, and student.
Prerequisite(s): Consent of Instructor

This course does NOT require a textbook. Any materials needed will be provided by the
instructor and/or institution.
Program Outcomes:
- Communicate
- Apply policy and
- Apply ethical
Course Outcomes:
The student will gain an understanding of the workplace and the abilities required to become
successful in a criminal justice environment. The plan relates the workplace training and
experiences to the student’s general and technical course of study.
Upon successful completion of this course the student should have a working knowledge and/or
an understanding of the following:
- Theory, concepts, and skills involved in the workplace
- The tools, materials, equipment, procedures, regulations, laws, and interactions within and
among political, economic, environmental, and legal systems associated with the workplace
- Demonstrate ethical behavior, safety practices, interpersonal and teamwork skills
- Appropriate verbal and written communications in the workplace
- Professionalism, Integrity and discretion
Course Schedule:
The student will be required to fulfill their obligation of commitment to the rules and regulations
of the program as outlined by the requirements of the course.

- Meet with your Criminal Justice advisor within the first week of the semester - NO later
- A work (practicum) location will be agreed upon and secured (Have a 1st and 2nd choice)
- You will receive a Practicum packet that will include:
Contract signed by all parties: Student, Instructor and Employer
Letter from instructor to the prospective supervisor at the practicum location
Employer evaluation form (for end of program evaluation)
Time logs (That you track and the employer signs) verifying your work hours
The evaluation will be done and a grade dispensed on the basis of your employer evaluation
and successful completion of the practicum contract
You will be required to commit a minimum of 21 hours per week for the length of the semester
to the employer to fulfill you obligation.
Course Policies:
campus.
ADA Statement:
process.

Term: 101S 903 782 0359
Section: 65 jherron@parisjc.edu
COSC1300
Introduction to Computing
Course Description
limited to introduction to operating systems, the Internet, word processing,
thinking/problem solving..

Discovering Computers – Fundamentals, 2011 Edition by Shelly/Vermaat
(ISBN: 1-4390-7945-5) and associated Online Companion
Program Outcomes
• Analyze a problem definition to identify inputs, processes, and outputs required to
• Demonstrate knowledge of industry terminology and effective communication skills.
• Recognize the interaction of stand-alone and network devices, operating systems,
and applications.
Course Outcomes
Demonstrate knowledge of industry terminology and effective communication skills.
Learning Objectives
• Introduce basic computer concepts.

• Present the historic time line of computer development.
• Learn about the World Wide Web, browsers, email, FTP, and instant messaging.
• Introduce a variety of business, graphics and multimedia, and communications
COSC1300.65 – Jenny Herron Page 1 of 3

software.
• Learn the components of the system unit; how memory stores data, instructions, and
information.
• Describe various input/output methods and introduce commonly used devices.
• Students learn about various storage media and devices and digital imaging and
video technology.
• Introduce operating systems: stand-alone, network, and embedded operating
systems.
• Present a buyer’s guide for purchasing a computer.
• Present an overview of communications technology and applications.
• Present the advantages of organizing data using a database management tool.
• Introduce the concepts of computer security, ethics, and privacy.
• Introduce the system development cycle and computing requirements for an
enterprise-sized organization.
Course Schedule
2nd Wk. Introduction to Computers
3rd Wk. The Internet and World Wide Web
4th Wk. Application Software
5th Wk. System Unit Components
6th Wk. Input and Output
7th Wk. Storage Media
8th Wk. Mid-Term Exam
9th Wk. Operating Systems and Utility Programs
10th Wk. Communications and Networks
11th Wk. Database Management
12th Wk. Computer Security, Ethics, and Privacy
13th Wk. Information Systems Development
14th Wk. Programming Languages
15th Wk. Enterprise Computing
16th Wk. Final Exam

40% EXAMS: Mid-Term Exam and Final Exam
30% Assignments
30% Quizzes

Course Policies
• Class meets via the Internet using the WebCT LMS and the textbook’s Online
Companion site for course content reinforcement activities.
• The WebCT Learning Management System contains documents for course and
assignment procedures, Homework instructions, course syllabus, course
calendar, links to web sites, manuals for using Online, and any document that
would be distributed in a traditional classroom.
• Students are expected to schedule the necessary computer time, up to 3 hours
per week, to complete course requirements. This includes reading assigned
chapters and other reading materials, homework assignments, chapter quizzes,
and reinforcement activities at the Companion website.
• Students are expected to login to LMS, Online Companion at least 3 times per
week.
• Assignments are expected to be completed during the assigned availability
period.
academic honesty.
times, showing respect to the instructor and to other students in person, in email,
and in discussions
• Students are expected to contact the instructor via WebCT email or discussion
tool, or schedule a conference when experiencing difficulty with course
requirements..
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903 782 0359
COSC1400
Course Description
This course provides an introduction to computer concepts, hardware, operating
systems, and application software. Labs may include but are not limited to introduction
to operating systems, the Internet, word processing, spreadsheets, graphic
presentations, databases, and programming concepts.

ISBN: 1-4188-4325-3
Program Outcomes
skills.
Course Outcomes
skills.

Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
16th Wk. Final Exam


Course Policies
• Class meets twice a week for lecture, demonstrations, and “hands-on” computer
assignments.
period.
academic honesty.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903 782 0359
COSC1400
Course Description

ISBN: 1-4188-4325-3
Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
skills.
Learning Objectives

Course Schedule
16th Wk. Final Exam


Course Policies
assignments.
period.
academic honesty.
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Faculty Name: Keith Coco
College Year: 2010-2011 Office Location: AD 140
Term: 101S Office Phone: 9037820307
Section: 03 kcoco@parisjc.edu
COSC 1401
Microcomputer Applications
Applied Science Room 139 Monday 5:15‐9:45pm
Course Description
A study of microcomputer concepts and applications to provide the student an understanding of computer
technology, hardware, software and production of meaningful information through the use of integrated
application software.

Prerequisite(s): All students must have taken all portions of the THEA test (or an equivalent
exam) and completed a keyboarding course or concurrent enrollment in a keyboarding class.

Discovering Computers and Microsoft® Office 2007: A Fundamental Combined Approach, 1st Edition,
Shelly/Vermatt [ISBN: 0-538-47392-4] (includes Video Companion DVD that correlates to textbook chapters)
One or more USB Jump/Flash Drives, or other removable storage media
One or more Pocket Folders

Program Outcomes
1. Analyze a problem definition to identify inputs, processes, and outputs required to present a viable
solution.
2. Utilize industry standard application software to produce personal, business, and academic reports and
presentations.
4. Recognize the interaction of stand-alone and network devices, operating systems, and applications.
Course Outcomes
• To provide a concise introduction to computers
• To present the most up-to-date technology in an ever-changing discipline
• To teach the fundamentals of computers and computer nomenclature, particularly with respect to personal
computers, software, and the Web
• To present strategies for purchasing a desktop computer, notebook computer, smart phone, portable media
player, and digital camera
• To offer an introduction to the following: Windows Operating System, Internet Explorer 8, Microsoft Office
Word 2007, Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2007, Microsoft Office Excel 2007, and Microsoft Office Access 2007.
• To acquaint students with the proper procedures to use a computer; interact with the Web; and create
documents, presentations, worksheets, and databases suitable for coursework, professional purposes, and
personal use
• To help students discover the underlying functionality of Microsoft Office 2007 so that they can become more
productive
COSC 1400.03 Keith Coco Page 1 of 4
Learning Objectives
Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe and use a microcomputer system including various peripheral devices. Change column widths.
Learn how to access a USB drive. Format numeric values.
Utilize the Web for information Copy relative and absolute values.
Describe and use M icrosoft Windows environment. Use built-in functions.
Start up a microcomputer system and start a program. Insert and delete columns and rows.
Set a path to the correct data disk or directory. M ove the contents of cells.
Correctly open and close a file. Display formulas and functions in cells.
Set M argins and Tabs. Create, display, and print charts.
Enter Headers, Footers, and page numbers. Design and create a database file.
Start a new page when printing. Add and delete records in a database file.
Create and edit a document. Display and print all the records in a database file.
Cut, copy, and paste blocks. Display and modify the structure of a database file.
Change type style, font, and size. Display and print only selected fields.
Find and replace words or phrases. Display and print only selected records.
Change line spacing. Calculate sums and averages.
Use the dictionary to proof a word or document. Sort the records in a database file.
Insert clip art. Sort on multiple fields.
Enter headers and footers. Print a report containing only selected records.
Complete a spreadsheet model by entering numbers, formulas, and text. Add and delete fields from a database file.
Save and retrieve worksheets. Prepare a PowerPoint presentation.
Print a worksheet. Integrate M icrosoft Programs
Edit cell data.
Course Schedule
Week 1: Introduction to Windows & Internet Explorer 8
Week 2: Labor Day holiday
Week 3: Introduction to Microsoft Word
Week 4: Creating research papers with Microsoft Word
Week 5: Lab for students to work on assignments
Week 6: Introduction to Microsoft PowerPoint
Week 7: Introduction to Microsoft Excel
Week 8: Using formulas, functions, formatting, and Web queries in Microsoft Excel
Week 10: Introduction to Microsoft Access
Week 11: Creating queries in Microsoft Access
Week 13: Integrating Office 2007 Programs
Week 16: Final class period to work on assignments

There will be 25 assignments. Assignments are "In the Lab" found at the ends of the chapters or "Chapter
Tutorials" for each chapter. Each assignment will have specific instructions for completion-either as specified in
your textbook or modified by instructor. Instructor modification may be written or oral. Students need to verify
requirements before submitting an assignment for a grade. Assignments must be submitted according to
instructor's specification otherwise the Assignment will be rejected. Five (5) points will be deducted for each
error that occurs in an assignment up to 20 errors. A project with 20 errors or more will receive a zero.
Assignments not received on or before the due date will receive 25 points off per week. Assignments can not
be accepted after the last class/lab night, Dec 13, 2010. Refer to the Assignment Schedule as well as any
"special instructions" provided by the instructor before submitting a project. Assignments must be turned in
during class time to instructor in a pocket folder. An assignment that is turned in on jump drive but no printout
will have an instant 50 points off. Likewise, an assignment that is printed but not on jump drive will have an
instant 50 points off. An assignment that has multiple pages for the assignment’s completion will have 20
points taken off for each page missing.
Course Grade Formula Grade Scale Course Grade in percent
Average of A 90% +
Assignments B 80% - 89%
C 70% - 79%
D 60% - 69%
F less than 60%
Course Policies
Class Attendance:
Excessive unauthorized absences indicate a lack of commitment to the learning process. Students that have
never attended class before the Official Accounting Day will be withdrawn from the course by the institution.
The Official Reporting Day is September 15, 2010.
Students are expected to complete assignments before the due date. Early assignments are accepted.
Students will not be dropped for excessive absences. Students must attend class in order to participate in an
assignment review. . Students are expected to schedule time outside of class to complete all course
assignments that are not completed during a scheduled class session. Students should refer to the PJC
catalog or student handbook to review the procedures for withdrawing from a course. Students wishing to drop
this course must request a "DROP" form from the instructor before the official "last day to drop a class" date,
Nov 18, 2010, to receive a “W” as the course grade. Students who have not voluntarily withdrawn from this
course before the official "last day to drop a class" and have insufficient progress to pass will receive an "F" as
the course grade. For other attendance policies, refer to PJC Catalog or student handbook for Institutional
attendance policy.
Limitation on number of course drops:
[Senate Bill 1231] Under section 51.907 of the Texas Education Code, "an institution of higher education may
not permit a student to drop more than six courses, including any course a transfer student has dropped at
another institution of higher education." This statute was enacted by the State of Texas in spring 2007 and
applies to students who enroll in a public institution of higher education as first-time freshmen in fall 2007 or
later.
Academic Honesty:
Students are expected to uphold the school’s standard of conduct relating to academic honesty. Students
assume full responsibility for the content and integrity of the academic work they submit. The guiding principle
of academic integrity shall be that a student's submitted work, examinations, reports, and projects must be that
of the student's own work. Students shall be guilty of violating the honor code if they:
· Represent the work of others as their own.
· Use or obtain unauthorized assistance in any academic work.
· Give unauthorized assistance to other students.
· Modify, without instructor approval, an examination, paper, record, or report for the purpose of obtaining
additional credit.
· Misrepresent the content of submitted work.
Any student violating the honor code is will receive a zero for the first violation and will receive a failing grade
for the course for the second violation. General advice and interaction are encouraged. Each person, however,
must develop his or her own solutions to the assigned projects, assignments, and tasks
Student Conduct in Class:

Any acts of classroom disruption that go beyond the normal rights of students to question and discuss with
instructors the educational process relative to subject content will not be tolerated, in accordance with the
Academic Code of Conduct described in the Student Handbook. Students are expected to conduct
themselves as civil and courteous adults at all times, showing respect to the instructor and to other students.
Children in Class:
PJC Policy prohibits children in classroom or laboratory facilities.
Electronic Devices in Class Policy:

Cellular phones, pagers, CD players, radios, and similar devices are prohibited in the classroom and laboratory
facilities. Calculators and computers are prohibited during examinations and quizzes, unless specified.
Reasonable laptop-size computers may be used in lecture for the purpose of taking notes. Students needing to
use tape recorders must inform the instructor before each class session when the recorder is to be “ON” so
that an announcement may be made to the class that recoding is taking place. Students may record only
lecture sessions.
ADA Statement
Services for students with disabilities are coordinated by the Counseling/Advising Center. The institution is
committed to assisting qualified students as completely as possible. Services include the arrangement for
accommodations and services to allow equal access to education opportunities for students with disabilities.
Students with disabilities are encouraged to contact a counselor or advisor from the Counseling/Advising
Center by calling 903.782.0426 (Paris campus), 903.454.9333 (Greenville Center), or 903.885.1232 (Sulphur
Springs Center) to arrange an appointment to begin the process.

DISCLAIMER STATEMENT
The above schedule, policies, procedures and assignments in this course are subject to change in the event of
Paris Junior College is an affirmative action/equal opportunity educational institution and employer. Its students and
employees are selected and/or assigned without regard to their race, color, age, sex, handicap or national origin,
consistent with Titles VI and VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, and Title IX of the Higher Education Acts as Amended in
1972, and with Executive Order 1146 as Amended by Executive Order 11375

Paris Junior College
Mary Holbrook Mims
College Year: 2010-2011 Admin Room# 143
Term: 101S Office# 903-782-0226
Section: 04 mmims@parisjc.edu
Course #: COSC 1400

Course Title: Introduction to Computing
Course Description
A study of microcomputer concepts and applications. Topics covered include operating
system, word processing, spreadsheets, data management, and presentation graphics.
Prerequisite(s):
Textbook and Materials

1. Text: Discovering Computers & Microsoft Office 2007: A Fundamental Combined
Approach by Shelly, Vermaat (includes a video companion DVD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-538-47392-7, ISBN-10: 0-538-47392-4
2. Text: Microsoft Windows 7: Essential, 1st Edition
ISBN-13: 978-1-4390-8107-5; ISBN-10: 1-4390-8107-7
3. Sam 2007 Access Card/Code, 1st Edition- ISBN: 1-4188-4325-3
4. BUNDLE of #1, #2 and #3 items above : ISBN: 1111485445
5. USB Flash drive (2GB or larger to store all assignments)
6. Regular access to the Internet and to the required software using Microsoft Office
Suite 2007 via a Computer Lab on campus or the student own personal computer.
Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
The following course outcomes will be addressed in this course:
1. To provide a concise introduction to computers.
2. To present the most up-to-date technology in an ever-changing discipline.
3. To teach the fundamentals of computers and computer organization, particularly with
respect to personal computers, software, and the Web.
4. To present strategies for purchasing a desktop computer, notebook computer, smart
phone, portable media player, and digital camera.
5. To teach an introduction to the following Microsoft products: Windows, Internet
Explorer , Word, PowerPoint, Excel, and Access.
6. To expose students to practical examples of the computer as a useful tool
7. To acquaint students with the proper procedures to use a computer; interact with the
Web; and create documents, presentations, worksheets, and databases suitable for
coursework, professional purposes, and personal use.
8. To help students discover the underlying functionality of Microsoft Office so that they
can become more productive.
Learning Objectives
1. List the parts of a computer system and various peripheral devices.
2. File Organization on a flash drive.
3. Copy files.
4. Describe and use Microsoft Windows environment.
5. Start up a microcomputer system and start a program.
6. Set a path to the correct data disk or directory.
7. Correctly open and close a file.
8. Set Margins and Tabs.
9. Enter Headers, Footers, and page numbers.
10. Start a new page when printing.
11. Create and edit a document.
12. Cut, copy, and paste blocks.
13. Change type style, font, and size.
14. Find and replace words or phrases.
15. Change line spacing.
16. Use the dictionary to proof a word or document.
17. Insert clip art.
18. Enter headers and footers.
19. Complete a spreadsheet model by entering numbers, formulas, and text.
20. Save and retrieve worksheets.
21. Print a worksheet.
22. Edit cell data.
23. Change column widths.
24. Define a range.
25. Format numeric values.
26. Copy relative and absolute values.
27. Use built-in functions.
28. Insert and delete columns and rows.
29. Move the contents of cells.
30. Display formulas and functions in cells.
31. Create, display, and print charts.
32. Design and create a database file.
33. Add and delete records in a database file.
34. Display and print all the records in a database file.
35. Display and modify the structure of a database file.
36. Display and print only selected fields.
37. Display and print only selected records.
38. Calculate sums and averages.
39. Sort the records in a database file.
40. Sort on multiple fields.
41. Print a report containing only selected records.
42. Add and Delete fields from a database file.
43. Work with more than one document at a time in memory.
44. Prepare a PowerPoint presentation.
45. Integrate Office 2007 Programs.
Course Schedule
Homework/Lab
Week Topic Assignment
1 Introduction
Microsoft Windows 7 Essentials Students are given
an assignment
2 Discovering Computers Chapter 1 handout
Discovering Computers Chapter 2 and
it is posted to
3 Discovering Computers Chapter 3 WEBCT.
Discovering Computers Chapter 4
4 Discovering Computers Chapter 5

Internet Explorer
Review for Exam #1
5 EXAM#1
Microsoft Office Word 2007 Chapter 1
6 Microsoft Office Word 2007 Chapter 2
7 Microsoft Office Powerpoint 2007 Chapter 1

Review for Exam#2
9 EXAM#2
10 Microsoft Office Excel 2007 Chapter 1
12 Microsoft Office Access 2007 Chapter 1
14 Microsoft Office Integration Office
15 Review for Exam #3
16 EXAM #3
Assignments should be fully or partially completed before the class due date— ‘class
time’ will not be adequate to complete every assignment.
A. The final grade for the course will be assigned as follows:

1. Fifteen assignments will be averaged and will count 55% of the semester grade.
2. If Flash Cards (2 points) and Practice Test (3 points) with a score of at least 75
are submitted before the exam, the student will earn a maximum of 15 bonus
points per exam.
3. Unannounced Quizzes and announced quizzes will count 15% of the semester
grade.
4. Three EXAMS will be averaged and will count 30% of the semester grade.
B. A grade will be assigned after a student successfully completes an assignment

(error free) or after 2-3 evaluations of an assignment in which five (5) points will be
deducted for each error. If assignments due before an exam are submitted after an
exam, a ten (10) point penalty will be deducted for each assignment due. Penalties can
add up to 30 points by the end of the semester.
100 - 90 A
89 - 80 B
79 - 70 C
69 - 60 D
Below 60 F
Course Policies
Missed Classes: The student is responsible for obtaining material distributed on class
days when he/she was absent. This can be done through contacting a classmate who
was present or by contacting the instructor during office hours or other times. Missed
exams cannot normally be made up, but with good cause and adequate notice, an early
exam or a makeup exam may be given.
Incomplete Policy
Students will not be given an incomplete grade in the course without sound reason and
documented evidence as described in the Student Handbook. In any case, for a student
to receive an incomplete, he or she must be passing and must have completed a
significant portion of the course.
Computer Time
Students are expected to spend approximately four to six hours per week of computer
time outside of class in order to successful complete the course requirements.
Class Attendance
Students are expected to complete assignments on a timely basis. Students are
required to attend class in order to participate in lectures, discussions, assignment
review, take quizzes and exams. Approximately 6-8 random quizzes will be given at the
beginning of class and under no circumstances can a student make them up. Students
should refer to the PJC catalog or student handbook to review the procedures for
withdrawing from a course. Students choosing to drop this course must request a
"DROP" from the instructor before the official "last day to drop a class" date to receive a
before the official "last day to drop a class" and have insufficient progress to pass will
receive and "F" as the course grade.
Web Access
Students are expected to visit WEBCT (http://www.parisjc.edu) often to determine the
assignment due dates and any changes, updates, additions, deletions, or modifications
to student assignments.
Academic Honesty
plagiarism, or collusion with others will be referred to the Vice President of Workforce
Education for disciplinary action such as dismissal from the college. For this class, it is
permissible to assist classmates in general discussions of computing techniques.
General advice and interaction are encouraged. Each person, however, must develop
his or her own solutions to the assigned projects, assignments, and tasks.

Student Handbook.

PJC policy prohibits children in classroom or laboratory facilities.
ADA Statement
The instructor reserves the right to change any portion of the above policies, procedures
and assignments in this course.
Term: 101S 903-885-1232
Section: 50 jeckhardt@parisjc.edu
COSC 1400
Course Description
Science majors.

(Shelley Cashman Series)
Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

 MS Word:
MS Excel:

MS Access
 Add a field.
MS PowerPoint:

Course Schedule

Week 3: MS Word
Week 4: MS Word
Week 5: MS Word
Week 6: MS Access
Week 7: MS Access
Week 8: MS Access
Week 9: MS Access
Week 10: MS Excel
Week 11: MS Excel
Week 12: MS Excel

Course Policies
Grading:
Final Exam: 25%
contractions.

the course.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903 782 0359
COSC1400
Course Description

ISBN: 1-4188-4325-3
Program Outcomes
skills.
Course Outcomes
skills.

Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
16th Wk. Final Exam


Course Policies
• Class meets via the Internet using the WebCT LMS, SAM2007 Assessment site
(requires key code to access), and the textbook’s Online Companion site for
course content reinforcement activities.
• The WebCT Learning Management System contains course documents for
course and assignment procedures, Lab and Homework instructions, course
syllabus, course calendar, links to web sites, manuals for using Online
Companion and SAM Assessment site
chapters and other reading materials, homework assignments, Lab assignments,
practice quizzes, chapter quizzes, and application software training session.
• Students are expected to login to LMS, Online Companion, and/or SAM sites at
least 3 times per week.
period.
academic honesty.
and in discussions
requirements.
ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903 782 0359
COSC1400
Course Description

ISBN: 1-4188-4325-3
Program Outcomes
Analyze a problem definition to identify inputs, processes, and outputs required to
Utilize industry standard application software to produce personal, business, and
Recognize the interaction of stand-alone and network devices, operating systems,
and applications.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
To provide a concise introduction to computers with the most up-to-date technology

in an ever-changing discipline
To teach the fundamentals of computers and computer nomenclature, particularly
with respect to personal computers, software, and the Web
To present strategies for purchasing a desktop computer, notebook computer, smart
phone, portable media player, and digital camera
To offer an introduction to the following: Windows Operating System, Internet
To expose students to practical examples of the computer as a useful tool
To acquaint students with the proper procedures to use a computer; interact with the
Web; and create documents, presentations, worksheets, and databases suitable
for coursework, professional purposes, and personal use
To help students discover the underlying functionality of Microsoft Office 2007 so
Course Schedule
16th Wk. Final Exam


Course Policies
• Class meets via the Internet using the WebCT LMS, SAM2007 Assessment site
(requires key code to access), and the textbook’s Online Companion site for
course content reinforcement activities.
syllabus, course calendar, links to web sites, manuals for using Online
Companion and SAM Assessment site
practice quizzes, chapter quizzes, and application software training session.
• Students are expected to login to LMS, Online Companion, and/or SAM sites at
least 3 times per week.
period.
academic honesty.
and in discussions
requirements.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903.782.0476
Section: 67 rpringle@parisjc.edu
Course # COSC1400
Course Title: Computer Applications
Course Description
A study of microcomputer concepts and application to provide the student an
understanding of computer technology, hardware, software and production of
meaningful information through the use of integrated application software.
Credits: SCH = 4.00
TSI Requirement:

Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
o Entering Text
o Formatting Text
o Functions
Course # COSC1400- Faculty Rita J. Pringle Page 1 of 4

o Copy and Paste
o Charts
o Database Design
o Queries
o Printing
o Joining Tables
o Slide Layouts
o Clip Art
o Hyperlinks
Learning Objectives
Students will be able to successfully:
 Create and format flyers
 Create and format a research paper according to MLA format
 Create and format a worksheet to include charts, statistical analysis and formulas
 Create a database, queries, reports, tables and forms
 Integrate Office 2007
Course Schedule
Chapter 1: Introduction to Computers
Chapter 2: The Internet and World Wide Web
Chapter 3: Application Software
Chapter 4: Operating Systems and Utility Programs
Chapter 5: Computer Security and Safety, Ethics and Privacy
Introduction to Windows Vista
Introduction to Windows 7
Word Project 1: Creating and Editing a Word Document
Word Project 2: Creating a Research paper
Excel Project 1: Creating a Worksheet and an Embedded Chart
Excel Project 2: Formulas, Functions, Formatting and Web Queries
Access Project 1: Creating and Using a Database
Access Project 2: Querying a Database
PowerPoint Project 1: Creating and Editing a Presentation
PowerPoint Project 2: Creating a Presentation with Illustrations and Shapes
Integrating Office 2007 Programs and the World Wide Web

Grading Scale:
Tests 40%
Final Exam 30%
Homework 30%
Grade Scale is based on a calculated average: A (90 – 100); B (80 – 89); C (70 – 79); D
(60 – 69); F (0 – 59)
Course Policies
File Name Requirements:

Each assignment file name needs to include student’s first name and last name
preceding the file name. (Ex: RitaPringle Lab 1-3a). Files submitted without student’s
first name will automatically receive a 5 point penalty.
Late Assignments:
Late assignments will be assessed the following penalties:
1 week late: 10 point penalty
2 weeks late: 20 point penalty
Later than 2 weeks: Not Accepted
Class Attendance:
An Internet course consists of only hands-on training. Students will need to carefully
read the chapters to be able to complete the exercises. Communication between the
student and teacher will also mainly be online through WebCT email. Students should
check their email daily for updates and comments about assignments submitted.
Daily class attendance is critical for the successful completion of this course. Daily
class attendance includes logging into WebCT several times a week to check course
updates and to complete assignments. Withdrawal requests due to a low grade MUST
BE initiated by the student. Requests for withdrawal become official and effective the
date they are received in the records office. Students who stop coming to class but fail
to drop the course will earn an “F” for the course.
Academic Honesty:
student’s submitted work, examinations, reports, and projects must be that of the
student’s own work. Students shall be guilty of violating the honor code if they:
 Represent the work of others as their own.

 Give unauthorized assistance to other students.
 Modify, without instructor approval, an examination, paper, record, or report
for the purpose of obtaining additional credit.
Any student violating the honor code will receive a zero for the first violation and will
the subject of Academic Honesty and Its Importance. Failure to complete this essay
within the time allotted by the instructor will cause automatic failure in the course. Do
not give any appearance of what could be considered cheating!!
Student Conduct:
WebCT is the classroom for an Internet course and student conduct will be governed in
accordance with the Academic Code of Conduct described in the Student Handbook.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-457-8716
COSC 1400
Discovering Computers
Course Description
Science majors.

Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

 MS Word:
MS Excel:

MS Access
 Add a field.
MS PowerPoint:

Course Schedule

Week 3: MS Word
Week 4: MS Word
Week 5: MS Word
Week 6: MS Access
Week 7: MS Access
Week 8: MS Access
Week 9: MS Access
Week 10: MS Excel
Week 11: MS Excel
Week 12: MS Excel

Course Policies
Grading:
Final Exam: 25%
contractions.

the course.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-457-8716
COSC 1400
Course Description
Science majors.

Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

 MS Word:
MS Excel:

MS Access
 Add a field.
MS PowerPoint:

Course Schedule

Week 3: MS Word
Week 4: MS Word
Week 5: MS Word
Week 6: MS Access
Week 7: MS Access
Week 8: MS Access
Week 9: MS Access
Week 10: MS Excel
Week 11: MS Excel
Week 12: MS Excel

Course Policies
Grading:
Final Exam: 25%
contractions.

the course.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-457-8716
COSC 1400
Course Description
Science majors.

Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

 MS Word:
MS Excel:

MS Access
 Add a field.
MS PowerPoint:

Course Schedule

Week 3: MS Word
Week 4: MS Word
Week 5: MS Word
Week 6: MS Access
Week 7: MS Access
Week 8: MS Access
Week 9: MS Access
Week 10: MS Excel
Week 11: MS Excel
Week 12: MS Excel

Course Policies
Grading:
Final Exam: 25%
contractions.

the course.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-457-8716
COSC 1400
Course Description
Science majors.

Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

 MS Word:
MS Excel:

MS Access
 Add a field.
MS PowerPoint:

Course Schedule

Week 3: MS Word
Week 4: MS Word
Week 5: MS Word
Week 6: MS Access
Week 7: MS Access
Week 8: MS Access
Week 9: MS Access
Week 10: MS Excel
Week 11: MS Excel
Week 12: MS Excel

Course Policies
Grading:
Final Exam: 25%
contractions.

the course.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-457-8716
COSC 1400
Course Description
Science majors.

Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

 MS Word:
MS Excel:

MS Access
 Add a field.
MS PowerPoint:

Course Schedule

Week 3: MS Word
Week 4: MS Word
Week 5: MS Word
Week 6: MS Access
Week 7: MS Access
Week 8: MS Access
Week 9: MS Access
Week 10: MS Excel
Week 11: MS Excel
Week 12: MS Excel

Course Policies
Grading:
Final Exam: 25%
contractions.

the course.
ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903.782.0476
Section: P2 rpringle@parisjc.edu
Course # COSC1400
Course Title: Computer Applications
Course Description
A study of microcomputer concepts and application to provide the student an
understanding of computer technology, hardware, software and production of
meaningful information through the use of integrated application software.
Credits: SCH = 4.00
TSI Requirement:

Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
o Entering Text
o Formatting Text
o Functions

o Copy and Paste

o Charts
o Database Design
o Queries
o Printing
o Joining Tables
o Slide Layouts
o Clip Art
o Hyperlinks
Learning Objectives
Insert here
Course Schedule
Insert subject matter of each lecture or lab activity

Course Policies
Insert faculty procedures for class management
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College
Mary Holbrook Mims
College Year: 2010-2011 Admin Room# 143
Term: 101S Office# 903-782-0226
Section: P3 mmims@parisjc.edu
Course #: COSC 1400

Course Title: Introduction to Computing
Course Description
A study of microcomputer concepts and applications. Topics covered include operating
system, word processing, spreadsheets, data management, and presentation graphics.
Prerequisite(s):
Textbook and Materials

1. Text: Discovering Computers & Microsoft Office 2007: A Fundamental Combined
Approach by Shelly, Vermaat (includes a video companion DVD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-538-47392-7, ISBN-10: 0-538-47392-4
2. Text: Microsoft Windows 7: Essential, 1st Edition
ISBN-13: 978-1-4390-8107-5; ISBN-10: 1-4390-8107-7
3. Sam 2007 Access Card/Code, 1st Edition- ISBN: 1-4188-4325-3
4. BUNDLE of #1, #2 and #3 items above : ISBN: 1111485445
5. USB Flash drive (2GB or larger to store all assignments)
6. Regular access to the Internet and to the required software using Microsoft Office
Suite 2007 via a Computer Lab on campus or the student own personal computer.
Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
1. To provide a concise introduction to computers.
2. To present the most up-to-date technology in an ever-changing discipline.
3. To teach the fundamentals of computers and computer organization, particularly with
respect to personal computers, software, and the Web.
4. To present strategies for purchasing a desktop computer, notebook computer, smart
phone, portable media player, and digital camera.
5. To teach an introduction to the following Microsoft products: Windows, Internet
Explorer , Word, PowerPoint, Excel, and Access.
6. To expose students to practical examples of the computer as a useful tool
7. To acquaint students with the proper procedures to use a computer; interact with the
Web; and create documents, presentations, worksheets, and databases suitable for
coursework, professional purposes, and personal use.
8. To help students discover the underlying functionality of Microsoft Office so that they
can become more productive.
Learning Objectives
1. List the parts of a computer system and various peripheral devices.
2. File Organization on a flash drive.
3. Copy files.
4. Describe and use Microsoft Windows environment.
5. Start up a microcomputer system and start a program.
6. Set a path to the correct data disk or directory.
7. Correctly open and close a file.
8. Set Margins and Tabs.
9. Enter Headers, Footers, and page numbers.
10. Start a new page when printing.
11. Create and edit a document.
12. Cut, copy, and paste blocks.
13. Change type style, font, and size.
14. Find and replace words or phrases.
15. Change line spacing.
16. Use the dictionary to proof a word or document.
17. Insert clip art.
18. Enter headers and footers.
19. Complete a spreadsheet model by entering numbers, formulas, and text.
20. Save and retrieve worksheets.
21. Print a worksheet.
22. Edit cell data.
23. Change column widths.
24. Define a range.
25. Format numeric values.
26. Copy relative and absolute values.
27. Use built-in functions.
28. Insert and delete columns and rows.
29. Move the contents of cells.
30. Display formulas and functions in cells.
31. Create, display, and print charts.
32. Design and create a database file.
33. Add and delete records in a database file.
34. Display and print all the records in a database file.
35. Display and modify the structure of a database file.
36. Display and print only selected fields.
37. Display and print only selected records.
38. Calculate sums and averages.
39. Sort the records in a database file.
40. Sort on multiple fields.
41. Print a report containing only selected records.
42. Add and Delete fields from a database file.
43. Work with more than one document at a time in memory.
44. Prepare a PowerPoint presentation.
45. Integrate Office 2007 Programs.
Course Schedule
Homework/Lab
Week Topic Assignment
1 Introduction
Microsoft Windows 7 Essentials Students are given
an assignment
2 Discovering Computers Chapter 1 handout
Discovering Computers Chapter 2 and
it is posted to
3 Discovering Computers Chapter 3 WEBCT.
Discovering Computers Chapter 4
4 Discovering Computers Chapter 5

Internet Explorer
Review for Exam #1
5 EXAM#1
Microsoft Office Word 2007 Chapter 1
6 Microsoft Office Word 2007 Chapter 2

Review for Exam#2
9 EXAM#2
14 Microsoft Office Integration Office
15 Review for Exam #3
16 EXAM #3
Assignments should be fully or partially completed before the class due date— ‘class
time’ will not be adequate to complete every assignment.
A. The final grade for the course will be assigned as follows:

1. Fifteen assignments will be averaged and will count 55% of the semester grade.
2. If Flash Cards (2 points) and Practice Test (3 points) with a score of at least 75
are submitted before the exam, the student will earn a maximum of 15 bonus
points per exam.
3. Unannounced Quizzes and announced quizzes will count 15% of the semester
grade.
4. Three EXAMS will be averaged and will count 30% of the semester grade.
B. A grade will be assigned after a student successfully completes an assignment

(error free) or after 2-3 evaluations of an assignment in which five (5) points will be
deducted for each error. If assignments due before an exam are submitted after an
exam, a ten (10) point penalty will be deducted for each assignment due. Penalties can
add up to 30 points by the end of the semester.
100 - 90 A
89 - 80 B
79 - 70 C
69 - 60 D
Below 60 F
Course Policies
Missed Classes: The student is responsible for obtaining material distributed on class
days when he/she was absent. This can be done through contacting a classmate who
was present or by contacting the instructor during office hours or other times. Missed
exams cannot normally be made up, but with good cause and adequate notice, an early
exam or a makeup exam may be given.
Incomplete Policy
Students will not be given an incomplete grade in the course without sound reason and
documented evidence as described in the Student Handbook. In any case, for a student
to receive an incomplete, he or she must be passing and must have completed a
significant portion of the course.
Computer Time
Students are expected to spend approximately four to six hours per week of computer
time outside of class in order to successful complete the course requirements.
Class Attendance
Students are expected to complete assignments on a timely basis. Students are
required to attend class in order to participate in lectures, discussions, assignment
review, take quizzes and exams. Approximately 6-8 random quizzes will be given at the
beginning of class and under no circumstances can a student make them up. Students
should refer to the PJC catalog or student handbook to review the procedures for
withdrawing from a course. Students choosing to drop this course must request a
"DROP" from the instructor before the official "last day to drop a class" date to receive a
before the official "last day to drop a class" and have insufficient progress to pass will
receive and "F" as the course grade.
Web Access
Students are expected to visit WEBCT (http://www.parisjc.edu) often to determine the
assignment due dates and any changes, updates, additions, deletions, or modifications
to student assignments.
Academic Honesty
plagiarism, or collusion with others will be referred to the Vice President of Workforce
Education for disciplinary action such as dismissal from the college. For this class, it is
permissible to assist classmates in general discussions of computing techniques.
General advice and interaction are encouraged. Each person, however, must develop
his or her own solutions to the assigned projects, assignments, and tasks.

Student Handbook.

PJC policy prohibits children in classroom or laboratory facilities.
ADA Statement
The instructor reserves the right to change any portion of the above policies, procedures
and assignments in this course.
Term: 101S 903-885-1232
Section: S1 jeckhardt@parisjc.edu
COSC 1400
Course Description
Science majors.

Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

 MS Word:
MS Excel:

MS Access
 Add a field.
MS PowerPoint:

Course Schedule

Week 3: MS Word
Week 4: MS Word
Week 5: MS Word
Week 6: MS Access
Week 7: MS Access
Week 8: MS Access
Week 9: MS Access
Week 10: MS Excel
Week 11: MS Excel
Week 12: MS Excel

Course Policies
Grading:
Final Exam: 25%
contractions.

the course.
ADA Statement

COSC 1401
Course Description



0840067747
Course Outcomes

Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
Unit 1 Windows 7
Unit 2 Word
Unit 3 PowerPoint
Unit 4 Excel
Unit 5 Access
Course Format:

4 exams
Quizzes
Internet research
e‐mail
Evaluation:
B (80 – 89)
C (70 – 79)
D (60 – 69)
F (0 ‐ 59)

point penalty.



Course Policies
Class Attendance:


Academic Honesty:



Computer Time
Miscellaneous

Class Attendance:
ADA Statement

COSC 1401
Course Description



0840067747
Course Outcomes

Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
Unit 1 Windows 7
Unit 2 Word
Unit 3 PowerPoint
Unit 4 Excel
Unit 5 Access
Course Format:

4 exams
Quizzes
Internet research
e‐mail
Evaluation:
B (80 – 89)
C (70 – 79)
D (60 – 69)
F (0 ‐ 59)

point penalty.



Course Policies
Class Attendance:

Academic Honesty:



Computer Time
Miscellaneous
Class Attendance:
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903 782 0359
Section: P1 jherron@parisjc.edu
BCIS1405
Course Description
Computer terminology, hardware, software, operating systems, and information
systems relating to the business environment. The main focus of this course is on
business applications of software, including word processing, spreadsheets,
databases, presentation graphics, and business-oriented utilization of the Internet.

ISBN: 1-4188-4325-3
Program Outcomes
skills.
Course Outcomes
skills.

Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
16th Wk. Final Exam


Course Policies
• This hybrid class meets once a week for lecture, demonstrations, and “hands-on”
computer assignments.
period.
academic honesty.
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Beverly Matthews
College Year: 2010-2011 Paris AS 101
Term: 101S 903-782-0379
Section: 65 bmatthews@parisjc.edu
Course # (COSC 1420)

Course Title (C PROGRAMMING I)
Course Description
Introduction to computer programming in the “C” programming language. Emphasis on
the fundamentals of structured design, development, testing, implementation, and
documentation. Includes coverage of language syntax, data and file structures,
input/output devices, and disks/files.
Prerequisite(s): College Algebra or higher or consent of instructor

Starting Out with C++ From Control Structures through Objects, Sixth Edition by Tony
Gaddis. You may use Express Edition Microsoft Visual Studio C++ 2008/2010 or
Bloodshed at http://bloodshed.net/download.html. The preference is the Microsoft Visual
Studio Express Edition available for download.
Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
An introduction to programming using C++. Includes problem solving methods,
algorithm development, program design, coding, debugging and documentation. Topics
covered include the fundamentals of C++, such as data types, variables, constants,
program input/output, relational operators, relational expressions, looping, functions,
arrays, C-strings, string Class, file operations, and file output formatting.
Learning Objectives
Declare valid identifiers with appropriate data types.
Use appropriate arithmetic/relational operators
Input/output data using interactive (cout/cin) objects and file objects.
Use Control Structures—if statements, flags, logical operators, switch statements
Course # (COSC 1420) – Beverly Matthews Page 1 of 4

Use looping/repetition structures—while loop, do-while loop, for loop
Create and use functions--understand void, value returning, and pass by reference
functions
Create and process one-dimensional arrays.
Demonstrate flowcharting and/or pseudocode techniques in program design.
Use good programming style when programming.
Use integrated software to create, debug, and compile programs.
Format output data.
Use input/output cout/cin streams and files.
Use character arrays and the C++ string class.
Course Schedule
Schedule for All Sections
Semester Week Topic

Week 1 Review syllabus, textbook/cd, Review WebCt, Intro to
Programming
Week 2 Intro to C++ Language
Week 4 Review—CIN/COUT, Mathematical Expressions, Input/Output
File Handling
Week 5 Exam 1
Week 6 Control Structures-If & Switch Statements Relational Operators
Week 7 String Comparison
Week 8 Looping, Increment/Decrement Operators, Counters
Week 9 Flags & Sentinels
Week 10 Functions, Boolean Values
Week 11 Pass by reference functions & Scope of Variables
Week 12 Exam 2
Week 13 Creating and Processing One Dimensional Arrays
Week 14 Continue with Processing One Dimensional Arrays
Week 15 Input/Output Adv File Processing & C++ String Class
Week 16 Exam 3

Activity Sheets for each major topic will be distributed via online. These sheets need to
be printed and completed by the student as the exams come from these activity sheets.
These sheets will be listed under Activity Sheets in WebCT.
Three examinations will be given requiring the student to write code. These will be
instructor-proctored exams; students may use two index cards for each exam. Online
sections may come to one of the hybrid classes to take the exam or you will need to
make an appointment with me to take the exam.
Programming Assignments. These will be listed under the Assignment Tool in
WebCT. Coding hints have been added for each program in the assignment section and
please submit the cpp file for grading. Points will be deducted for late assignments.

Online Quizzes (Open Book) will be used as a point system for the major exams. You
will have three opportunities for each quiz. These will be used as bonus points for the
exams. The highest quiz grade will be taken from the three grades for each quiz. If you
score in the 90s, you will receive 3 points toward the exam; if you score in the 80s, you
will receive 2 points toward the exam; and if you score in the 70s, you will receive 1
point toward an exam.
The Student CD with the textbook contains answers for all Checkpoint questions and
answers to the odd numbered review questions and review exercises, complete source
code for example programs, and tutorials
Course Grade is determined as follows: A (90-100); B (80-89); C (70-79); D (60-69); F
(0-59). The 3 exams count 70% of grade, and the programming assignments 30% of
grade. The quizzes will count as bonus points toward the major exams.
Each program should contain your name, the assignment number, and the purpose of
the program. After we cover functions, please use functions in the design of your
program; use comments to explain each function, choose variable names that describe
the variable contents, use camel notation for variable names (checkBalance), use
function prototypes so that the function header/body is located at the end of the
program. Use indentation and blank lines to make your program readable. Your
instructor will explain the meaning of these concepts as we progress through the first
couple of chapters.
Program runs correctly, meets requirements, and follow good programming styles=100
Program runs correctly, meets requirements, but could improve in programming
style=95-90
Program runs correctly but has a few minor errors, such as formatting output errors=85-
80
Program runs correctly but has major errors, such as incorrect output, omission of major
steps=75-65, depending upon the number of errors
Program contains numerous compile errors, but you made a reasonable effort to do the
program=60
(very easy compile errors to fix, but programmer chose not to correct these easy errors)
Please email me when you have problems with a program, especially until you
understand the error messages.
Course Policies
Students are expected to complete and submit all assignments and exams as
scheduled. Students are expected to log on 4-5 times a week to check mail. Students
choosing to drop this course must request a "DROP" from the instructor before the
official "last day to drop a class" date (Nov 18) to receive a W as the course grade.
Approximately three to six hours per week of computer time outside of class is
recommended for successful completion of course requirements. Additional time is
required for the detailed reading of chapter material.

student's submitted work, examinations, reports, and projects must be that of the
student's own work. Students shall be guilty of violating the honor code if they:
Represent the work of others as your own.
Use or obtain unauthorized assistance in any academic work.
Misrepresent the content of submitted work.
General advice and interaction among students are encouraged; however, each student
must develop his or her own solution to the assignments and exams.
When on campus, please respect the rights of others in this classroom/facility so that
we maintain an environment that enhances student learning and success.
All cell phones, beepers and personal digital assistants (pda’s) must be turned off or in
If a cell phone or beeper does sound during class, the study may be asked to leave for
the remainder of the period. The only exception to this rule includes peace officers,
EMT, EMS, or other emergency personnel, and their devices should be in silent mode.
No food or drink is permitted in the classroom.
The schedule, policies, procedures and assignments in this course are subject to
instructor change in the event of extenuating circumstances.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0379
Section: G1 bmatthews@parisjc.edu

Course Description

Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

functions
Format output data.
Course Schedule
Semester Week Topic

Programming
File Handling
Week 5 Exam 1
Week 12 Exam 2
Week 16 Exam 3

instructor-proctored exams; students may use two index cards for each exam. Hybrid
sections will take the exam in class, along with the online sections.

couple of chapters.
style=95-90
80
program=60
Course Policies

ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0379
Section: P1 bmatthews@parisjc.edu

Course Description

Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

functions
Format output data.
Course Schedule
Semester Week Topic

Programming
File Handling
Week 5 Exam 1
Week 12 Exam 2
Week 16 Exam 3

instructor-proctored exams; students may use two index cards for each exam. Hybrid
sections will take the exam in class, along with the online sections.

couple of chapters.
style=95-90
80
program=60
Course Policies

ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Faculty Name Jeff Barnett
College Year: 2010-2011 Office location – Greenville
Term: 101S Office Phone - 903-454-9333
Section: 65 jbarnett@parisjc.edu
Course #: CRIJ - 1301

Course Title: Introduction to Criminal Justice
Course Description
This course will be an introductory level program covering the history, philosophy, and
ethical considerations of criminal justice; the nature and impact of crime; and an
overview of the criminal justice system, including law enforcement and court
procedures.


Criminal Justice Today, Schmalleger, Frank, Pearson
Prentice Hall, 11th Edition, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 2007
This course will/may utilize the Texas Commission on Law Enforcement Standards and
Education (TCLEOSE) required materials or other applicable materials when/where
required.
Course Outcomes
The student will have an understanding of the study and application of the American
criminal justice system. This understanding will consider the nature and impact of crime
on society, the structure and functions of the components of the criminal justice system,
and the methodology of the modern legal system.
Learning Objectives
CRIJ – 1301 Jeff Barnett, Instructor 1

1. Attend class regularly
2. Demonstrate Responsibility
3. Demonstrate ability to locate, present, and discuss modern concerns for criminal
justice practitioners
4. Define and use terms applicable to the course topic.
5. Understand the branches and functions of the criminal justice system
6. Discuss the development of the court system
7. Discuss the development of the corrections system
8. Identify and discuss sources of criminal laws and crimes
9. Compare and contrast criminal and civil law
10. Identify crime trends
11. Identify and describe the categories of crime
12. Identify special considerations within the criminal justice system
13. Provide and in-depth knowledge of the law enforcement role in criminal justice
14. Explain the structure and role of the court system in the United States
15. Explain probation and parole as they relate to criminal justice
Course Schedule
This is an overview of the weekly topics in order of presentation.
History and Philosophy of Crime / Maturity and Impact of Crime / Civil Actions / Amount
and Trends in Crime / Overview of the Criminal Justice System / Law Enforcement /
Court System / Prosecuting and Defense / Trial Process / Corrections
Course Requirement(s) and Evaluation

Requirements: Attendance is mandatory. Attendance in this on-line course is achieved
through completion of assignments, examinations, and communiction with the instructor
via the course mail system. Examinations will be given at established intervals
throughout the semester that will consist of M/C or T/F questions or both; and are
scored at 100 points per examination. Examinations will be given and made available
through the WebCT system. Successful students will prepare for any type of
examination or assignments based on the information provided and use of fundamental

study habits; primarily reading the textbook chapters pertaining to the given
examination. Computer access to the on-line course material is necessary.
Course Policies
Academic Honesty: By registering and taking this course, the student officially enrolled
hereby declares that this same student will be the author of all work submitted for the
course. Allowing another individual to complete assignments constitutes fraud and
academic dishonesty. Should such behavior come to the attention of the instructor, the
student will be dropped from the course or receive a grade of "F." You are required to
familiarize yourself with the PJC Student Handbook for information regarding student
policies, procedure and/or actions while on a PJC campus. Personal commputers are
allowed in class for use only if utilized relative to the class projects (note-taking,
reference /study material usage, etc.).
ADA Statement
The College will provide reasonable accommodations for students with qualified
disabilities. It is the students' responsibility to contact and disclose the nature and extent
of the disability to the ADA Coordinator located in the Counseling/Advising Center at all
campuses. Students with disabilities are encouraged to contact a counselor or advisor
by calling 903-782-0426 (Paris campus), 903-454-9333 (Greenville campus), or 903-
885-1232 (Sulphur Springs campus) to arrange an appointment to begin the campus.

Paris Junior College Patrick Barron

College Year: 2010-2011 Cooper H.S.
Term: 101s 903-885-1232
Section: 95 pbarron@parisjc.edu
Course # CRIJ1301
Course Title: Intro to Criminal Justice
Course Description
This course is a basic study of all components of the criminal justice system in the United
States. Topics include concepts of law and crime, the criminal justice process, overview of
criminal justice agencies, current criminal justice issues, and interactions and conflicts between
criminal justice agencies.
Credits: SCH = 3 lecture 3 and 0 laboratory hours per week, from approved course list
TSI Requirement: None.

Criminal Justice Today: An Introductory Text for the 21st Century, 11/E
Frank J. Schmalleger, Emeritus, University of North Carolina
ISBN-10: 0135074096
Program Outcomes
Insert here
Course Outcomes
1. Development of the student's analytical thinking capabilities through comparison and contrast
in the application of theories and concepts to social problems
2. Enhancement of the student's literacy skills through assigned readings, discussions,

examinations, and other requirements
3. Utilization of the historical perspective which helps with student understanding of

evolutionary developments over time
4. Understanding of the scientific method through research requirements and in-depth case
studies
5. Improvement in social interaction skills and understanding human behavior through

consideration of the impact legal and social systems have on individuals
6. Increased student awareness of cultural and multi-cultural issues through study of how social
problems and social movements are related to, and affect, minority groups
7. Preparation for more advanced study in criminal justice/homeland security
Learning Objectives
•To acquire an informed understanding of the basic components of justice processes
2. To recognize the major sources of crime data, and their uses and limitations
3. To examine the historical evolution of the role of policing in a modern society
4. To examine criminal court systems and adversarial concepts
5. To examine correctional systems and the purposes of punishment
6. To appreciate the basic differences between juvenile and adult systems
7. To appreciate emerging and international forms of justice
Course Schedule
This is an overview of the topics contained in the course.
Policing History & Structure/ Purpose & Organization/ Legal Aspects/ Issues and Challenges/
The Courts: Structure & Participants/ Pretrial Activities/ Criminal trial/ Sentencing/ Corrections:
Probation, parole/ Prisons & Jails/ Prison Life

This is a guide and is subject to change at the instructor's discretion.
ITEMS
Major examinations (8 @ 100 pts each)
Outside Project 100 pts
Additional Assignments: 100 pts (averaged)
Class participation/preparation (Discretionary)
A 90 – 100%

B 80 – 89%
C 70 – 79%
D 60 – 69%
F 59% and Below
Course Policies
campus.
All cellular phones or other personal electronic devices WILL be turned OFF during class
time(s). NO calls or texting will be tolerated during class time. SEE the PJC Student Handbook
for more information. Personal commputers are allowed in class for use only if utilized relative to
the class projects (note-taking, reference /study material usage, etc.). There will be absolutely
NO tolerance for eating in the classroom. Non-alcolholic drinks are allowed where permitted
under PJC policy and procedure for the particular place you are occupying for class purposes.
ADA Statement

College Year: 2010 - 2011 AS – 105
Term: 101S 903-782-0497

Course Title: Court Systems and Practices
Course Description:
Study of the judiciary in the American criminal justice system; and the adjudication processes
and procedures.

Courts and Criminal Justice in America, 1/E. Siegal / Schmalleger / Worrall. Pearson. ISBN-13:
9780131745766.
Program Outcomes:
- Communicate
- Apply policy and
- Apply ethical
Course # (CRIJ - 1306) – Douglas Shuler Page 1 of 3
Course Outcomes:
The student will have an understanding of the study and application of the judiciary in the
American criminal justice system; and the adjudication processes and procedures.
Upon successful completion of this course the student should be able to:
- Define terms relevant to criminal procedure
- Define and use terms applicable to this course topic
- Discuss historical development of courts and the courts role in soiety
- Understand the roots of the court system(s)
- Explain the structure of court systems in the United States and the State of Texas
- Have knowledge of the court structure and understanding of court operations
- Explain the role(s) of court officers
Course Schedule:
Legal Foundations / Court Management / Federal Courts / State Courts / Juvenile Courts /
Specialized Courts / Role of Judges / Role of Prosecutor / Role of Defense / Defendants /
Victims / Arrest / Pleas and Petitions / Role of the Jury / Trial / Conviction / Sentencing /
Appeals / Habeas Corpus.

Requirements: Attendance is mandatory, you are allowed 3 - unexcussed absences. After the 3
are exhausted, 3 - points will be deducted per unexcused absence from your final average and
recalculated.
Examinations will be given at intervals throughout the semester that will consist of M/C or T/F
questions or both; and are scored at 100 points per examination. There will be one non-
comprehensive final examination scored at 100 points. The final examination MUST be
completed in the PJC Testing Center of your choice. One writing assignment worth 100 points
will be completed by the student covering a topic related to the course. This assignment will be
comprised of 1000 words, in APA format, well articulated, using proper structures and
grammer, in a font size between 10 and 12; with a reference page. The student should
familiarize themselves with APA format. ANY copy and paste work from internet or other
sources without citation as part of your original work will result in a grade of "0" for this
assignment. Succesful students will prepare for any type of examination or assignments based
on the information provided and use of fundamental study habits; primarily reading the textbook
chapters pertaining to the given examination.
Course Policies:
campus.
for more information. Personal commputers are allowed in class for use only if utilized relative
to the class projects (note-taking, reference /study material usage, etc.). There will be
absolutely NO tolerance for eating in the classroom. Non-alcolholic drinks are allowed where
permitted under PJC policy and procedure for the particular place you are occupying for class
purposes.
ADA Statement:
process.

Paris Junior College Faculty Name Jeff Barnett
College Year: 2010-2011 Office location – Greenville
Term: 101S Office Phone - 903-454-9333
Section: CJ jbarnett@parisjc.edu

Course Title: CRIME IN AMERICA
Course Description
This course will view American crime problems in a historical perspective. The course
will examine social and public policy factors affecting crime, the impact of crime trends,
the social characteristics of specific crimes, and the prevention of crime. Special issues
in Juvenile crime, terrorism, and drug abuse will be discussed. Crime in a multicultural
and diverse society will be examined and how the future of criminal justice is affected by
all of these issues.

Criminal Justice Today, Schmalleger, Frank, Pearson
Prentice Hall, 11th Edition, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 2007
This course will/may utilize the Texas Commission on Law Enforcement Standards and
Education (TCLEOSE) required materials or other applicable materials when/where
required.
Course Outcomes
The student will have an understanding of the study and application of the American
criminal justice system. This understanding will consider the historical development of
the criminal justice system, crime trends, theoretical causes of crime, and special issues
facing criminal justice practitioners.

Learning Objectives
1. Attend class regularly
2. Demonstrate Responsibility
3. Demonstrate ability to locate, present, and discuss modern concerns for criminal
justice practitioners
4. Define and use terms applicable to the course topic.
5. Understand the history of criminal justice
6. Discuss Due Process and Individual Rights
7. Discuss multiculturalism and diversity in criminal justice
8. Discuss crime trends and reporting in the United States
9. Explain and discuss applicable theories concerning the cause of crime
10. Understand and explain the nature, purpose, and rule of law
11. Identify and describe the categories of crime
12. Identify special considerations within the criminal justice system
13. Discuss terrorism as it relates to criminal justice
14. Discuss the future of crime
Course Schedule
Crime In America / History of Crime / Due Process and Individual Rights /
Multiculturalism and Diversity / Crime Reporting / Theoretical Causes of Crime /
Criminal Law / Nature and Purpose of Law / Types of Law / Categories of Crimes /
Elements and Defenses to Criminal Offenses / Special Issues in Criminal Justice /
Terrorism / Future of Criminal Justice
Course Requirement(s) and Evaluation

Requirements: Attendance is mandatory, you are allowed 3 - unexcussed absences.
Examinations will be given at intervals throughout the semester that will consist of M/C
or T/F questions or both; and are scored at 100 points per examination. Class
participation in discussions and lectures is mandatory. Successful students will prepare
for any type of examination or assignments based on the information provided and use

of fundamental study habits; primarily reading the textbook chapters pertaining to the
given examination.
Course Policies
Academic Honesty: By registering and taking this course, the student officially enrolled
hereby declares that this same student will be the author of all work submitted for the
course. Allowing another individual to complete assignments constitutes fraud and
academic dishonesty. Should such behavior come to the attention of the instructor, the
student will be dropped from the course or receive a grade of "F." You are required to
familiarize yourself with the PJC Student Handbook for information regarding student
policies, procedure and/or actions while on a PJC campus. All cellular phones or other
personal electronic devices WILL be turned OFF during class time(s). NO calls or
texting will be tolerated during class time. SEE the PJC Student Handbook for more
information. Personal commputers are allowed in class for use only if utilized relative to
the class projects (note-taking, reference /study material usage, etc.). There will be
absolutely NO tolerance for eating in the classroom. Non-alcolholic drinks are allowed
where permitted under PJC policy and procedure for the particular place you are
occupying for class purposes. Any assignments or tests that are missed must be turned
in or taken upon return to the next class.
ADA Statement
The College will provide reasonable accommodations for students with qualified
disabilities. It is the students' responsibility to contact and disclose the nature and extent
of the disability to the ADA Coordinator located in the Counseling/Advising Center at all
campuses. Students with disabilities are encouraged to contact a counselor or advisor
by calling 903-782-0426 (Paris campus), 903-454-9333 (Greenville campus), or 903-
885-1232 (Sulphur Springs campus) to arrange an appointment to begin the campus.

College Year: 2010 - 2011 AS – 105
Term: 101S 903-782-0497

Course Title: Fundamentals of Criminal Law
Course Description:
Study of criminal law, its philosophical and historical development; major definitions; concepts;
classifications; including elements of crime(s) and penalties. The State of Texas statutes, State
of Texas Constitution, Federal law and the U.S. Constitution are used to illustrate criminal
responsibility, thus crime and punishment.
TSI Requirement: Presently NA

Texas Criminal Law: Principles and Practices, Jerry L. Dowling, Sam Houston State University.
Pearson, ISBN-13: 9780131721395.
Program Outcomes:
- Communicate
- Apply policy and
- Apply ethical
Course Outcomes:
The student will have an understanding of the study and application of criminal law; and the
procedures, policies and penatlies associated with criminal activity within Texas.
Upon successful completion of this course the student should be able to discuss and have an
understanding of:
- The nature of criminal law
- Historical and philosophical developments of substantive and procedural law
- Terms of law and concepts that accompany them
- Discuss the classifications of crime
- Relate the elements of crimes and attached penalties according to Texas statute
- The criminal responsibilities of persons.
Course Schedule:
Historical Development / Federal and State Agencies / Police in Society /
From Citizen to Police Officer / On Patrol / Community Oriented Policing & Problem Solving /
Criminal Investigation / Rule of Law / Accountability / Civil Liability / Addressing Terrorism /
Crimes Involving Illegal Immigrants / Police Trends and Issues / Technology Review /
Focus on the Future

Requirements: Since this class is offered via WebCT onlince, attendance is monitored by the
instructor. You must log in to the system on the specific date required and throughout the term
to be counted as present.
Examinations will be given weekly via WebCT in accordance with chapter(s) assignment(s).
There will be 14 - Online examinations and 1 - Final that must be completed in the PJC testing
center of your choice. 15 - Examinations at 100 point per examination, with 1500 - total points
possible. Examination questions will consist of M/C or T/F questions or both; and are scored at
100 points per examination. With the exception of the final examination, all examinations can
be taken via the student preferred computer location. There will be one non-comprehensive
final examination scored at 100 points that must be taken by the student in a proctored
environment, being a PJC Testing Center location of the students preference. Succesful
students will prepare for any type of examination or assignments based on the information
provided and use of fundamental study habits; primarily reading the textbook chapters
pertaining to the given examination and any study material furnished by the instructor via
WebCT.
Course Policies:
campus and/or via the internet study.
ADA Statement:
process.

College Year: 2010 - 2011 AS – 105
Term: 101S 903-782-0497

Course Title: Juvenile Justice System
Course Description:
A study of the juvenile justice process including specialized juvenile law, role of the juvenile law,
role of the juvenile courts, role of police agencies, role of correctional agencies, and theories
concerning delinquency.

Juvenile Justice System: The: Delinquency, Processing, and the Law (2010), 6/E
Dean J. Champion, Texas A&M International University, Prentice Hall, ISBN-13:
9780135008058
Program Outcomes:
- Communicate
- Apply policy and
- Apply ethical
Course Outcomes:
Provide the student with the history and philosophy of juvenile justice, the various agencies that
comprise the juvenile justice system, and the various roles of agencies comprising the juvenile
justice system.
Upon successful completion of this course the student should be able to discuss, comprehend
and be able to:
- The history of juvenile justice
- Differentiate juvenile from adult criminal procedure
- Define terms specific to juvenile justice
- Explain various theories of causation of crime
- Explain the role of juvenile courts
- Explain the process of detaining, processing, and adjudicating juvenile offenders
- The relationship between police and juveniles
- Explain the role of diversion in juvenile proceedings
- Alternative sentences available to juvenile courts
- The role of juvenile correctional facilities
Course Schedule:
Introduction to Course / Overview of the System / History of the Juvenile System / Origins
Delinquency Theories / Intervention Programs / Legal Rights of Juveniles /
Juveniles and the Police / Intake and Pre-adjudicatory Processes / Juveniles and Prosecution /
Treatment, Waivers and Other Alternatives / Adjudicatory Process /
Juvenile Probation- Community Based Probation / Juvenile Corrections and Parole

Requirements: Attendance is mandatory, you are allowed 3 - unexcused absences. After the 3
recalculated.
completed in the PJC Testing Center of your choice.The One writing assignment worth 100
points will be completed by the student covering a topic related to the course. This assignment
will be comprised of 1000 words, in APA format, well articulated, using proper structures and
Course Policies:
purposes.
ADA Statement:

process.

College Year: 2010 - 2011 AS – 105
Term: 101S 903-782-0497

Course Description:

9780135008058
Program Outcomes:
- Communicate
- Apply policy and
- Apply ethical
Course Outcomes:
justice system.
and be able to:
Course Schedule:

recalculated.
Course Policies:
purposes.
ADA Statement:

process.

College Year: 2010 - 2011 AS – 105
Term: 101S 903-782-0497

Course Description:

9780135008058
Program Outcomes:
- Communicate
- Apply policy and
- Apply ethical
Course Outcomes:
justice system.
and be able to:
Course Schedule:

recalculated.
Course Policies:
purposes.
ADA Statement:

process.


Term: 101s 903-885-1232
Course # 2313
Course Title: Correctional System and Practices
Course Description
This course provides an overview of the field of corrections. It reviews prisons and jails,
correctional policies, agencies, prison life, and challenges facing corrections.

Corrections: An Introduction, 3/E, Richard P. Seiter
Program Outcomes
Insert here
Course Outcomes
The student will have an understanding of the study and application of the judiciary in the
American criminal justice system; and the adjudication processes and procedures.
Learning Objectives
••Course Objectives
At the end of this course, students will be able to:
oDefine terms related to corrections.
oAssess the purpose, implementation, and effectiveness of corrections.
oTrace the historical evolution of the correctional system.
Examine the organization of corrections.
oExamine challenges faced by the correctional system.
oCompare and contrast the differences and similarities of the various clients of a correctional

facility.
oAnalyze prison life and the effects it can have on individuals and society.
oAppraise the legal rights of inmates and the use of capital punishment.
Course Schedule
The history of Crime and Corrections/ Sentencing and the correctional process/ Jails/ Probation/
Prison systems/ Parole and reentry/ Clients of adult correctional agencies/ Juv. Crrections/
Special offeders/ Prison Mgt./ Prison life for inmates/ Prison staff/ Custody and treatments/
Legal issues and the death penalty/ Issues in corrections

•Lesson Checklist
Every lesson has a prescribed checklist of activities required to successfully complete the
lesson. Follow this checklist, in the specified order, to complete each lesson.
Activities
Introduction to Corrections is made up of numerous graded and ungraded activities listed

below.
Graded Assignments
oDiscussion forums
oPractice exercises
oWriting assignments
oPresentations
oQuizzes
o Midterm & Final Exam
The table below shows the activity types contained within this course, and the assigned
weighting to determine the final course grade.

Activity Types Weights (%)
Discussion Forums 10%
Writing Assignments and Presentations 10%
Practice Exercises 10%
Quizzes 20%
Exams 50%
TOTAL 100%
•Course Participation
Unlike a traditional, instructor-led course, you do not need to show up to class at a specific time
every day to earn your class participation grade. Instead, you need to make a constant effort to
complete the online course lectures, complete ungraded assignments, and participate in the
class discussions. Though some of your activities will be ungraded, your instructor will keep
track of whether you have completed them and will assign you a course participation grade
based upon your completion of these assignments.
Online Etiquette
The objective in an online discussion is to be collaborative, not combative. Please, proofread

your responses carefully before you post them to make sure that they will not be offensive to
others. Use discussions to develop your skills in collaboration and teamwork. Treat the
discussion areas as a creative environment where you and your classmates can ask questions,
express opinions, revise opinions, and take positions just as you would in a more “traditional”
classroom setting.
Course Policies

campus.
ADA Statement

College Year: 2010 - 2011 AS – 105
Term: 101S 903-782-0497

Course Title: Criminal Investigation
Course Description:
The study of investigative theory; collection and preservation of evidence; sources of
information; interview and interrogation; uses of forensic sciences; investigation; surveillance;
and case and trial preparation.

Swanson, C. R., Chamelin, N. C., and Territo, L., Taylor, R.W. (2009). Criminal Investigation
(10th ed.). McGraw-Hill, New York, (ISBN: 978-0-07-340153-9).
Program Outcomes:
- Communicate
- Apply policy and

- Apply ethical
Course Outcomes:
Provide the student with unique aspects of criminal investigation, distinguished from other
areas of police service. Emphasis is placed on investigative techniques employed, identification
of motives and modus operandi, and the use of informants. Gathering information through
interviews and interrogation will be integral parts of the focus of the course, as well as the legal
aspects of crime solving.
and/or be able to:
- Collection and preservation of evidence
- Conduct crime scene searches used by police using proper crime scene security
- Sources of information
- Concepts and actions of interviewing and interrogation
- Surveillance methods
- Warrants, arrests and seizures and trial preparation
- Criteria for writing an effective report and case file
- Concept of offender profiling
- Explain the purpose, role, and functions of a criminal investigation unit and investigator
- Explain the Crime Victims Compensation Act
- Explain the effects of evidence tampering, making false reports
- Explain techniques and purposes of conducting investigations
- Complete detailed reports based on the investigations assigned.
- Proper procedures for preparing for and giving courtroom testimony
Course Schedule:
Introduction to the course / The Evolution of Criminal Investigation and Criminalistics /
Legal Aspects of Investigation / Investigators / Investigative Process and Crime Scene /
Evidence / Interviewing and Interrogation / Field Notes and Investigative Reporting
The Follow-up Investigation and Investigative Resources / Trial Process / Investigator as a
Witness / Basic Investigation Assignment(s) /
Begin Case File / Complaint of Crime and Cultivation of Informants / Interview of Witnesses and
Informants / Identify Suspect(s), Investigation and Surveillance / Cultivation of Evidence and
Evidence Processing / Warrants, Arrests and Seizures / Interview of Suspect(s) / Reports / Trial
Preparation, Testimony and Trial Court / COMPILATION AND REVIEW OF CASE FILE

recalculated.
questions or both; and are scored at 100 points per examination. Succesful students will
prepare for any type of examination or assignments based on the information provided and use
of fundamental study habits; primarily reading the textbook chapters pertaining to the given
examination and completing the assignment(s). It is very important to commit and be present
for all portions of this course as evaluation and points are assigned for participation.
Course Policies:
campus and/or via the internet study. You will be required to be on campus during outdoor /
indoor assignments. You are expected to act in a responsible, respectfull and professional
manner during these assignments. If you fail to act accordingly, academic action may be taken
in accordance with class and institutional policy and procedure.
purposes.
ADA Statement:
process.

Paris Junior College Lana Biggerstaff Adams

College Year: 2010-2011 Greenville - 207
Term: Fall 2010 903-454-9333
Section: 40 ladams@parisjc.edu
Course # (CRIJ2314)
Criminal Investigation
Course Description
Insert Investigative theory; collection and preservation of evidence; sources of
information; interview and interrogation; uses of forensic sciences; case and trial
preparation
Credits: 3.3.0 = 3 lecture and 0 laboratory hours per week

TSI Requirement: Must be TSI compliant in all 3 areas

Criminal Investigation, 10th Edition, Swanson, Charles, et. al, McGraw-Hill, New York,
2008, ISBN# 978-0-07-340153-9
Course Outcomes
Apply investigative theory

Collect and preserve evidence
Locate sources of information
Effectively interview witnesses and interrogate suspects
Utilize forensic science
Prepare cases for trial
Learning Objectives
The student will be learn the crucial role of the investigative process, be able to
objectively view evidence, understand the concept of proof, how to collect and preserve
evidence, locate sources of vital information, and utilize forensic science to solve
crimes.

Course Schedule
Weeks 1 – 4 – Review the history of investigation, learn the legal aspects of crime
scene processing, and how to collect and preserve evidence.
Weeks 5 – 8 – Learn how to investigate crimes against persons
Weeks 9 – 12 – Learn how to investigate crimes against property
Weeks 13/14 - Apply techniques learned to case trial preparation
Weeks 15/16 - Conduct projects on crime scene search
A= 90‐100% B= 80‐89% C=70‐79% D=60‐69% F=59 and below
Grades will be based on:
Chapter Tests – Tests count equally and will be returned in a timely manner.
Class Participation
Attendance – In the day class, if you exceed 4 absences, there will be 5 points deducted
off your overall average for the class for each absence, in a night class, after 2
absences, the same rule will apply.
Project assignment – if a project is assigned it will count as 1 test grade
Any test missed must be made up within the next two meetings if it is a day class or by the next class if it
is a night class. (Consideration will be given to special circumstances)

Course Policies
ATTENDANCE/WITHDRAWAL
Students are expected to make every effort to attend class sessions: however, illness or personal
business may cause a student to be absent. When a student’s absences exceed 3, the instructor has the
right to drop the student from the course. After the drop date, students may not drop. If a student
wishes to drop the course before the drop deadline, it is his/her responsibility to initiate the drop.
Failure to do so may result in a grade of “F”.
POLICY ON PLAGIARISM AND CHEATING
Every student is expected to do his/her own work. Law, ethical standards and the department policy
demand students refrain from plagiarism and any form of cheating. Plagiarism is the “act of
appropriating the literacy composition of another, or parts of passages of his/her writing, or the ideas or
language of the same, and passing them off as the product of one’s own mind”. (Black’s Law Dictionary,
Abridged Fifth Edition, 1893). When using other’s words, phrases, or ideas in writing, the original author
should be given proper credit.
The use of cell phones is prohibited in the classroom. If you are an EMT, Paramedic, or other
emergency services provider, you may have your cell phone on vibrate and may leave the classroom if
an emergency call.
OTHER GENERAL POLICIES
Other general policies and procedures may be found in the Student Handbook
PLEASE FEEL FREE TO ASK IF ANYTHING IS UNCLEAR OR NOT ADDRESSED
ADA Statement


Term: 101s 903-885-1232
Course # 2323
Course Title: Legal Aspects of Law enforcement
Course Description
Exploration of police authority. Topics include responsibilities and constitutional restraints, law of
arrest, search and seizure, and police liability.

TEXT - REQUIRED: Holtz, Larry E, Spencer, Warren J, Texas Law Enforcement Handbook –
Contemporary Criminal Procedure, LexisNexis (2009) Charlottesville, VA, (ISBN: 978-1-4224-
2722-4)
Program Outcomes
Insert here
Course Outcomes
Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to describe our adversary
system of law; explain the concept of elements of crimes; be able to recognize certain basic
elements of all crimes; list offenses against property, homes, the government, and persons;
distinguish between principle and accessories; understand the differences between substantive
and procedural law; have a basic understanding of common law offenses and how they are
dealt with by current statute, using Texas law as an example.
Learning Objectives
At the end of this course, students will be able to:
Understand law as it applies to the police function.
Understand The focus of instruction is on elements of certain crimes,
Understand searches by the police.

A major focus of the course will be on arrests, searches, and seizures.
Historical material will be provided, to improve the student's understanding of court imposed
restrictions on police activities.
Examples will focus on Texas law.
Course Schedule
Describe the adversarial system of law /Explain levels of police contact /Explain various types
of searches /Explain probable cause as a legal concept /Define terms applicable to course
material, including reasonable suspicion, probable cause, warrant, and magistrate/ Explain the
Texas court system, and relate it to the federal system /Identify magistrates and their duties /
Differentiate frisks from searches and discuss warrantless and plain view searches /Distinguish
between search and arrest warrants and identify duties of officers when executing warrants
Distinguish detentions from arrests / Identify situations requiring Miranda warning /Identify what
can be seized during searches / Explain police liability resulting from misconduct

This is a guide and is subject to change at the instructor's discretion.
ITEMS
Major examinations (4 @ 100 pts each)
Outside Project 100 pts
Class participation/preparation (Discretionary)
A 90 – 100%
B 80 – 89%
C 70 – 79%
D 60 – 69%
F 59% and Below
Course Policies

campus.
ADA Statement

College Year: 2010 - 2011 AS – 105
Term: 101S 903-782-0497

Course Title: Police Systems and Practices
Course Description:
The police profession; organization of law enforcement systems; the police role; police
discretion; ethics; police-community interaction; current and future issues.

Policing America, 6/E, Ken Peak (2009), Prentice Hall, ISBN-13: 9780131598034.
Program Outcomes:
- Communicate
- Apply policy and
- Apply ethical
Course Outcomes:
The student will have an understanding of administrative aspects of law enforcement; concepts
of policing; basic organizational structures; police behavior; contemporary issues in policing;
ethics; and factors that affect police performance.
Upon successful completion of this course the student should be able to discuss and have an
understanding of:
- The need for professionalism within the police profession
- Basic organizational structures used in modern police agencies
-The use of discretion in police work
- The role of police in today's society
- Issues concerning morality and ethics within the police agency
- The need for police-community interaction
- Current and future issues within law enforcement.
- The administrative aspects of law enforcement.
Course Schedule:
Historical Development / Federal and State Agencies / Police in Society /
Citizen to Police Officer / On Patrol / Community Oriented Policing & Problem Solving /
Criminal Investigation / Rule of Law / Accountability / Civil Liability / Addressing Terrorism /
Crimes Involving Illegal Immigrants / Policing Trends and Issues / Technology Review /
Focus on the Future

Requirements: Since this class is offered via WebCT onlince, attendance is monitored by the
instructor. You must log in to the system on the specific date required and throughout the term
to be counted as present.
Examinations will be given weekly via WebCT in accordance with chapter(s) assignment(s).
There will be 14 - Online examinations and 1 - Final that must be completed in the PJC testing
center of your choice. 15 - Examinations at 100 point per examination, with 1500 - total points
possible. Examination questions will consist of M/C or T/F questions or both; and are scored at
100 points per examination. With the exception of the final examination, all examinations can
be taken via the student preferred computer location. There will be one non-comprehensive
final examination scored at 100 points that must be taken by the student in a proctored
environment, being a PJC Testing Center location of the students preference. Succesful
students will prepare for any type of examination or assignments based on the information
provided and use of fundamental study habits; primarily reading the textbook chapters
pertaining to the given examination and any study material furnished by the instructor via
WebCT.
Course Policies:
ADA Statement:
process.

Paris Junior College Essie Moore
College Year: 2010-2011 Applied Science-Annex (1) Cosmetology
Term: 101S (903)782-0250
Section: 01 emoore@parisjc.edu
CSME 1242
Manicure & Related Theory
Course Description
An overview of the fundamental skills and knowledge necessary for the field of nail
technology.
Credits: (2) SCH= (1) lecture and (4) laboratory hours per week

Alpert, Arlene, et.al. Milady’s Standard Textbook of Cosmetology. Clifton Park, Ny:
Delmar Learning (2008)
Alpert, Arlene, et.al. Milady’s Standard Cosmetology Theory workbook. Clifton Park, Ny:
Alpert, Arlene, et.al. Milady’s Standard Exam Review book. Clifton Park, Ny: Delmar
Learning (2008)
Program Outcomes
1.Demonstrate knowledge of Texas Law according to the standards governed by
(TDLR), Texas Department of Licensing and Regulations.
2.Demonstrate knowledge of “infection control principles and practice”.
3.Communicate effectively by using effective communication skills to access a
client’s needs based on the total look concept.
4.Demonstrate skills by performing as a licensed professional. These skills include
techniques such as applying artificial nail tips, performing manicures and pedicures,
and identify word terminology.
5.Exemplify a professional image in the workplace by understanding the importance
of personal hygiene, knowing how to properly dress for success, and use the
appropriate methods to ensure personal health and well-being.
6.Articulate leadership skills in owning and operating a business.
Course Outcomes
Demonstrate professional ethics, safety, sanitation and sterilization; and explain the
laws and rules of the state licensing agency.
Learning Objectives
1. Students will have knowledge of the skills that are necessary to prepare
them for the workplace.
2. Students will interpret and demonstrate the basic principles of safety,
sterilization and sanitation as it relates to the cosmetology industry.
Course Schedule
Week 1 & 2
Chapter Review Manicuring & Pedicuring
Chapter Test
(cont).
Watch Video on Manicuring & Pedicuring
Class Discussion on video techniques
Demonstration of manicure & pedicureby instructor.
Students will perform techniques on each other
Grade

All assignments are due when test are given, your performance objectives and exams
will be graded accordingly: test, quizzes,workbook, lab, and final mock written /practical
state examination.
Grading scale is as follows:
Test=40% A=90-100
Labs=40% B=80-89
Quizzes=5% C=70-79
Workbook=5% Below 70% (fail)
Final exam=10%
Course Policies
Paris Jr. College expects all students to engage in honest academic endeavor to the
highest degree of honor and integrity. Students who are found to engage in academic
dishonesty through such activities as cheating on exams, plagiarism, or collusion with
others will be referred to the Vice President of Student Services for disciplinary action.
Student violations involving academic dishonesty are handled by the Faculty members
involved. Should the student object to the decision of the faculty members, the appeals
procedures for instructional due process may be utilized. The following list describes the
most common forms of academic dishonesty (see college catalog).
There are also department guidelines that must be maintained such as, proper attire,
oral/personal hygiene and cleanliness, attendance policy, class behavior, and theft of
property.
Cell phones are not permitted in class and therefore should not be brought to class.
They may be used at break time and whenever class is not in session. Violation of this
rule could result in suspension from class.
ADA Statement
CSME 1242 (Essie Moore)

Term: 101S (903)782-0250
CSME 1291.01
Special Topics in Cosmetology
Course Description
Topics address recently identified current events, skills, knowledge, and/or attitudes and
behaviors pertinent to the technology or occupation and relevant to the professional
development of the student. This course was designed to be repeated multiple times to
improve student proficiency.

Alpert, Arlene, et.al. Milady’s Standard Cosmetology Practical workbook. Clifton Park,
Ny: Delmar Learning (2008)
Learning (2008)
Program Outcomes
techniques learned such as, haircutting, haircoloring, frosting, hairstyling,
shampooing/rinsing, nailcare, facials, and by providing chemical texture services.
Course Outcomes
CSME 1291(Essie Moore) 1 of 3

Learning outcomes/objectives are determined by local occupational need and business
and industry trends.
Learning Objectives
1. Describe the qualities that help a new employee succeed in a service profession
2. List the good habits of a good salon team
3. Explain the function of a job description
4. List the most effective ways to build a client base
5. Discuss the importance of the reception area to a salon’s success
6. Demonstrate good telephone techniques
7. Create a personal budget
Course Schedule
Week 13 & 14
Chapter Review-On the job
Chapter Test
Week 13 & 14
Chapter Review-The Salon Business
Chapter Test
Create budget forms

state examination.
Test=40% A=90-100
Labs=40% B=80-89
Quizzes=5% C=70-79
Final exam=10%
Course Policies

property.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S (903) 782-0250
Section: 01 email@parisjc.edu
CSME 1310
Intro to Haircutting & Related Theory
Course Description
Introduction to the theory and practice of haircutting. Topics include terminology,
implements, sectioning, and finishing techniques.
Credits: (3) SCH=(1) lecture and (8) laboratory hours
TSI Requirement:xxxM, xxxR, xxxW.

Alpert, Arlene, et. al. Milady’s Standard Textbook of Cosmetology. Clifton Park, Ny:
Delmar Learning (2008) ISBN# 13:9781418049355
Alpert, Arlene, et. al. Milady’s Standard Cosmetology Theory workbook. Clifton Park,
Ny: Delmar Learning (2008) ISBN# 10: 1418049417
Alpert, Arlene, et. al. Milady’s Standard Cosmetology Practical workbook. Clifton Park,
Ny: Delmar Learning (2008) ISBN# 10:1418049425
Alpert, Arlene, et. al. Milady’s Standard Exam review book. Clifton Park, Ny: Delmar
Learning (2008) ISBN# 10: 1418049433
Program Outcomes
1. Demonstrate knowledge of Texas Law according to the standards governed by
(TDLR), Texas department of Licensing and Regulations.
2. Demonstrate knowledge of “infection control principles and practice”.

4. Demonstrate skills by performing as a licensed professional. These skills include

shampooing/rinsing, nailcare,facials, and by providing chemical texture services.

of personal hygiene, knowing how to properly dress for success, and use appropriate
methods to ensure personal health and well-being.

Course Outcomes
1. Identifying word terminology.
2. Identify implements and tools used in haircutting.
3. Demonstrate haircutting and finishing techniques
4. Understand how to section for a haircut, using four or five method sectioning.
5. Understand client, safety, and sanitation rules for haircutting.
Learning Objectives
After completing this class, you will be able to:
1.Identify reference points on the head form and understand their role in haircutting.
2. Define angles and lines
3. List the factors involved in a successful client consultation.
4. Demonstrate the safe and proper use of the various tools of haircutting.
5. Demonstrate mastery of the four basic haircuts
6. Demonstrate mastery of other haircutting techniques
Course Schedule
Week 1 & 2
Haircutting:
Review word terminology , lines, and angles
Test over word terms
Review and discuss chapter
Watch Video(1) on Haircutting the “0 degree haircut”

Demonstration of cut by instructor
Students perform same technique as instructed on manniquins
Watch Video (2) on Haircutting the “45 degree haircut”
Watch Video (2) on Haircutting the “90 degree haircut”
Demonstration of each cut will be performed by instructor
Week 1 & 2 (continuation)
Lab: Students perform these same technique as instructed on mannequins

.
will be graded accordingly: test, quizzes, workbook, lab, and final mock written
exam/mock state practical examination. All test are administered online and cannot be
made up. Test must be taken when scheduled. If for any reason Webct has a problem
uploading test, consideration will be made at that time for students to retake exam.
Grading scale as follows:

Tests=40% A=90-100
Labs=40% B=80-89
Quizzes=5% C=70-79
Workbook=5% Below 70% fail
Final exam=10%
Course Policies
Paris Junior College expects all students to engage in honest academic endeavor to the
property.
They may be used at break time and when class is not in session. Violation of this rule
could result in suspension from class.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S (903)782-0250
CSME 1330
Nail Enhancement
Course Description
An overview of the fundamental skills and knowledge necessary for the field of nail
technology.

Learning (2008)
Program Outcomes
techniques learned such as, the application of artificial nails, manicures, pedicures,
and hand, leg, and arm massage.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
Week 3 & 4
Chapter Test
Week 3 & 4 (cont).

Grade

state examination.
Test=40% A=90-100
Labs=40% B=80-89
Quizzes=5% C=70-79
Final exam=10%
Course Policies
property.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S (903) 782-0250
CSME 1401
Orientation to Cosmetology
Course Description
An overview of the skills and knowledge necessary for the field of cosmetology. This
course also includes rules and regulations set by (TDLR), Texas department of licensing
and regulations, governing cosmetology in the state of Texas.
Credit: (4) SCH= (2) lecture and (8) laboratory hours per week.
TSI Requirement: xxxM, xxxR, xxxW.

Learning (2008) ISBN# 10: 1418049433
Program Outcomes
3. Communicate effectively by using effective communication skills to access a


5. Exemplify a professional image in the workplace by understanding the

importance of personal hygiene, knowing how to properly dress for success, and
use appropriate methods to ensure personal health and well-being.
6. Articulate leadership skills in owning and operating a business.
1
Learning Objectives
1. Define ethics
2. List the principles that contribute to personal and professional success.
3. Explain how to set long- and short-term goals.
4. Discuss the most effective ways to manage time.
5. Understand professional hygiene
6. Use appropriate methods to ensure personal health and well-being
7. List the golden rules of human relations
8. Explain the importance of effective communication
9. Build open lines of communication with co-workers and salon managers
10. Understand the rules and regulations set by the institution, department, and state.
Course Schedule
Week 1 & 2
Life Skills and Your Professional Image:

Class Discussion over Life skills/your professional image, and Review chapter
(Chapter Test, over both chapters)
Week 3 & 4
Rules and regulations of the institution, department, state:

Class Discussion over Rules and Regulations and Review chapter
(Test over institution,department and state rules)
Communicating Effectively:
Communication activities: “Silent partner”, “Body Language”
Learning Analogy: Discussion
(Chapter Test)
All assignments are due when test is given, your performance objectives and exams will
be graded accordingly: test, quizzes, workbook, lab, and final mock written exam/mock
state practical examination. All tests are administered online and cannot be made up.
Tests must be taken when scheduled. If for any reason Webct has a problem uploading
test, consideration will be made at that time for students to retake exam.

Tests=40% A=90-100
Labs=40% B=80-89
Quizzes=5% C=70-79
Final exam=10%
2
Course Policies
property.
ADA Statement
CSME 1401(Essie Moore)
3
Term: 101S Office Tele: (903) 782-0250
CSME 1405
Fundamentals of Cosmetology
Course Description
A course in the basic fundamentals of cosmetology. Topics include safety and
sanitation, service preparation, manicure, facial, chemical services, shampoo,
haircut, wet styling, and comb out.

Alpert, Arlene, et. al. Milady’s Cosmetology Theory workbook. Clifton Park, Ny: Delmar
Learning (2008) ISBN# 10: 1418049417
Alpert, Arlene, et. al. Milady’s Cosmetology Practical workbook. Clifton Park, Ny: Delmar
Learning (2008) ISBN# 10:1418049425
Learning (2008) ISBN# 10: 1418049433
Program Outcomes
Demonstrate knowledge of Texas Law according to the standards governed by (TDLR),
Texas department of Licensing and Regulations.



1
Course Outcomes

1. Identify fundamental concepts related to skills required by the Texas
Department of Licensing and Regulation (TDLR).
2. Demonstrate required skills that meet TDLR standards.
Learning Objectives
1. Understand state laws and rules relating to cosmetology.

2. List the types and classifications of bacteria.
3. Describe how to safely clean and disinfect salon tools and equipment
4. Discuss Universal Precautions and your responsibilities as a salon professional.
5. Demonstrate how to protect your client during servicing.
6. Demonstrate how to properly hold implements and use tools correctly.
7. Know how to identify product safety by preparing Material safety data sheet
(MSDS).
Course Schedule
Week 1 & 2
Infection Control:
Chapter Review and discussion
(Chapter Test-1)
Review of State rules and regulations book

(Class discussion) over MSDS sheets
(Test-2 over rules and regulations)
Week 1 & 2
1. Demonstration of practical application skills performed on mannequins.
2. Demonstration of how to properly cleanse and disinfect all tools and equipment
according to state standards.


Tests=40% A=90-100
Labs=40% B=80-89
Quizzes=5% C=70-79
Final exam=10%
2
Course Policies
property.
ADA Statement
3
Term: 101S (903)782-0250
CSME 1434
Cosmetology Instructor I
Course Description
The fundamentals of instructing cosmetology students.

Barnes, Letha. Milady’s Master Educator Student Course Book. Clifton Park, Ny:
Program Outcomes
3. Communicate effectively by using effective communication skills.
4. Demonstrate skills by performing as a licensed professional.
use the appropriate methods to ensure personal health and well-being.
6. Articulate leadership skills in the classroom and be knowledgeable of the subject
matter.
Course Outcomes
1. Classroom/clinic management.
2. Design teaching methodologies
3. Implement lesson plans.
Learning Objectives
1. Understand the importance of developing the qualities and characteristics
desired in a master educator.
2. Perform the key concepts in time management and event control.
3. Put practice into strategies for building self-control.
4. Adopt behaviors necessary for developing enthusiasm
5. Implement the actions for self-motivation

Course Schedule
Week 1
Chapter over “Qualities and Characteristics of a Master Educator”
Study Roles of the Instructor
Review Time management and organization
Chapter Test
Week 2
Use Time Utilization Log
Discuss Authority, Order, and Self-Confidence
Discuss Professional Ethics, Character, and Human Relations
Week 3
Begin work on Lesson Plan #1
Written Presentation
Oral Presentation
Grade

state examination.
Test=40% A=90-100
Labs=40% B=80-89
Quizzes=5% C=70-79
Final exam=10%
Course Policies
property.

ADA Statement

Term: 101S (903)782-0250
CSME 1435
Orientation to the Instruction of Cosmetology
Course Description
An overview of the skills and knowledge necessary for the instruction of cosmetology
students.

Program Outcomes
matter.
Course Outcomes
1. Identify the rules and regulations of the school, department, and state.
2. Discuss teaching methodologies and lesson plan development.
Learning Objectives
1. Understand the steps in the curriculum development process.
2. Undersand the importance and effectiveness of the use of an advisory council in
1
the curriculum development process
3. Define the three domains for instructional outcomes and write learning objectives
for each.
4. Understand the importance of a sound orientation program for new students.
5. Know the value and advantages of lesson planning.
6. Explain what each component of a lesson plan represents.
Course Schedule
Week 4, 5, & 6
1. Examine ways to develop a Course of Study
2. Concentrate on Curriculum Development
3. Discuss importance of an Advisory council
Evaluation of student performance
4. Examine learner Outcomes

5. Begin work on developing a Course outline
6. Examine advantages of lesson planning
7. Lesson plan parts
Evaluation of student performance

state examination.
Test=40% A=90-100
Labs=40% B=80-89
Quizzes=5% C=70-79
Final exam=10%
Course Policies
2
property.
ADA Statement
3
4
Term: 101S (903) 782-0250
CSME 1451
Artistry of Hair Theory & Practice
Course Description
Instruction in the artistry of hair design. Topics include theory, techniques and
application of hair design.
Credit: (4) SCH= (2) lecture and (8) laboratory hours per week.

Learning (2008) ISBN# 10: 1418049433
Program Outcomes



Course Outcome
1. Demonstrate professional skills in hairstyling
1
2. Understand how to manipulate the curling iron properly
3. Develop different techniques in hairstyling and know how to apply extensions
to the head.
4. Demonstrate understanding of various hair designs
Learning Objectives
1. Demonstrate different techniques of styling long and short hair
2. Describe the three types of hair pressing
3. Demonstrate finger-waving, pin-curls, roller setting, and hair wrapping
4. Demonstrate various thermal iron manipulations and explain how they are used
5. Know how to apply hair extensions and artificial hair to the head.
Course Schedule
Week5 & 6
Chapter review
Class Discussion over chapter and theory workbook
Chapter Test
Instructor demonstration over fingerwaving and hairstyling techniques and hair weaving.
Clinical evaluation of techniques performed by students
Grade
All assignments are due when test is given, your performance objectives and exams will
be graded accordingly: test, quizzes, workbook, lab, and final mock written exam/mock
state practical examination. All tests are administered online and cannot be made up.
Tests must be taken when scheduled. If for any reason Webct has a problem uploading
test, consideration will be made at that time for students to retake exam.

Tests=40% A=90-100
Labs=40% B=80-89
Quizzes=5% C=70-79
Final exam=10%
Course Policies
2
property.
ADA Statement
3
Term: 101S (903)782-0250
CSME 1531
Principles of Nail Technology
Course Description
A course in the principles of nail technology. Topics include anatomy, physiology,
theory, and skills related to nail technology.

Learning (2008)
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
1. Identify and explain the basic anatomy and physiology of the hands, arms, and
feet.
2. Practice the related skills of manicuring, pedicuring, and nail enhancement.
Learning Objectives
1. Explain the importance of anatomy and physiology to the cosmetology
profession.
2. Describe bones of the arms and hands, leg and foot.
3. Define divisions of the nervous system, muscles of the hand, leg and foot.
4. Define tissue and identify the types of tissues found in the types of tissues found
in the body.
Course Schedule
Week 9 & 10
Chapter Review-Anatomy & Psysiology
Chapter Test
Chapter Review-Manicuring & Pedicuring

Chapter Test

All assignments are due when test is given, your performance objectives and exams will be
graded accordingly: test, quizzes, workbook, lab, and final mock written exam/mock state
practical examination. All tests are administered online and cannot be made up. Tests must be
taken when scheduled. If for any reason Webct has a problem uploading test, consideration will
be made at that time for students to retake exam.

Tests=40% A=90-100
Labs=40% B=80-89
Quizzes=5% C=70-79
Final exam=10%
Course Policies
property.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S (903)782-0250
CSME 1541
Principles of Nail Technology II
Course Description
A continuation of the concepts and principles of nail technology. Topics include anatomy
and psysiology, theory, and related skills of nail technology.

Learning (2008)
Program Outcomes
techniques such as applying artificial nail tips, performing manicures and pedicures,
and identify word terminology.
Course Outcomes
Exhibit the skills mandated by the Texas Department of licensing and regulations.
Demonstrate professional ethics and salon management; and develop client relation
and related skills.
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
Week 5 & 6
Chapter Test
Review chapter on salon management for discussion

Visit area salons and talk with professional stylist hands on
Week 7 & 8(cont).

Grade

state examination.
Test=40% A=90-100
Labs=40% B=80-89
Quizzes=5% C=70-79
Final exam=10%
Course Policies
property.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S (903)782-0250
CSME 1547
Principles of Skincare/Facials and Related Theory
Course Description
In depth coverage of the theory and practice of skin care, facials, and cosmetics.

Learning (2008)
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Identify the terminology related to the skin, products, and treatments; demonstrate
proper application related to skincare and cosmetics; and exhibit workplace
competencies in skin care and cosmetics.
Learning Objectives
1. List and describe various skin types and conditions
CSME 1547 (Essie Moore) 1 of 3

2. Identify different types of skin massage
3. Be able to describe the different types of products aused in facial treatments
4. Demonstrate the procedures of a basic facial
5. Describe the different types of cosmetics and their uses
6. Demonstrate an understanding of cosmetic color theory
7. Demonstrate the application and removal of false eye lashes.
8. List the safety measures to be followed during makeup application.
Course Schedule
Week 7 & 8
Chapter Review-Facials
Determine skin type and select shades of make for different types of skin
Chapter Test
Facial Makeup
Apply makeup and false lashes to each
Chapter test
Grade

state examination.
Test=40% A=90-100
Labs=40% B=80-89
Quizzes=5% C=70-79
Final exam=10%
Course Policies
property.

ADA Statement

Term: 101S (903) 782-0250
CSME 2310
Advanced Haircutting & Related Theory
Course Description
Advanced concepts and practice of haircutting. Topics include haircuts utilizing
scissors, razor, and/or clippers.
Credits: (3) SCH=(1) lecture and (8) laboratory hours per week
TSI Requirement: XXXM, xxxR, xxxW

Learning (2008) ISBN# 10: 1418049433
Program Outcomes




Course Outcomes
1. Identifying word terminology

2. Demonstrate work place competencies related to advanced haircutting and
finishing techniques.
Learning Objectives
1. Identify reference points on the head form and understand their role in haircutting.
2. Define angles, elevations, and guidelines.
3. List the factors involved in a successful client consultation.
4. Demonstrate the safe and proper use of the various tools of haircutting.
5. Demonstrate mastery of the four basic haircuts
6. Demonstrate mastery of other haircutting techniques
Course Schedule
Week 1 & 2
Haircutting:
Review word terminology , lines, angles, and degree
Test over word terms
Review and discuss chapter

(Chapter Test)
Watch Video(1) on Haircutting the “Horizontal Blunt Cut”
Students perform same technique as instructed on manniquins
Watch Video (2) on Haircutting the “Diagonal Blunt Cut”

Students perform same technique as instructed on mannequins
Watch DVD on “Women’s and Men’s haircutting techniques”

Discussion
Week 1 & 2 (continuation)

Lab: Students perform two advanced haircuts from the dvd (women’s and men’s cuts) of
their choice to be graded by instructor.

Tests=40% A=90-100
Labs=40% B=80-89
Quizzes=5% C=70-79
Final exam=10%
Course Policies
property.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S (903)782-0250
CSME 2401
Haircoloring
Course Description
Presentation of the theory and practice of hair color and chemistry. Topics include
terminology, applications and workplace competencies related to haircolor and
chemistry.

Learning (2008)
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
1. Identify terminology.
2. Demonstrate the proper application of haircolor.
3. Exhibit workplace competencies related to hair color.
Learning Objectives
1. Identify the principles of color theory and relate them to haircolor
2. Explain level and tone and their role in formulating haircolor
3. List the four categories of haircolor, explain their chemical effects on the hair, and
give examples of their use.
4. Explain the action of hair lighteners.
5. Demonstrate special effects haircoloring techniques
Course Schedule
Week 11 & 12
Chapter Review-Haircoloring
Students will test colors on hair swatches to determine intensity, depth, and porosity
control.
Chapter Test
Watch Video on Haircoloring

Demonstration of applying haircolor by instructor.
Students will perform haircolor techniques on manniquins
Grade

state examination.
Test=40% A=90-100
Labs=40% B=80-89
Quizzes=5% C=70-79
Final exam=10%
Course Policies
property.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S (903)782-0250
CSME 2415
Cosmetology Instructor II
Course Description
Presentation of assignments and evaluation techniques for a cosmetology program.

Program Outcomes
matter.
Course Outcomes.
1. Develop and present lesson plans and evaluation techniques used in a

cosmetology program.
2. Classroom/clinic management; design teaching methodologies and implement
lesson plans
Learning Objectives
1. Understand the steps in the curriculum development process.
2. Undersand the importance and effectiveness of the use of an advisory council in
1

the curriculum development process
3. Define the three domains for instructional outcomes and write learning objectives
for each.
4. Understand the importance of a sound orientation program for new students.
5. Know the value and advantages of lesson planning.
6. Explain what each component of a lesson plan represents.
7. Write lesson plans thoroughly.
8. Present Lesson plans to audience.
Course Schedule
Week 7,8,9
1. Continue Writing lesson plans for accuracy
2. Presentation of lesson plans to audience
3. Observe Clinical floor and monitor students under supervision

state examination.
Test=40% A=90-100
Labs=40% B=80-89
Quizzes=5% C=70-79
Final exam=10%
Course Policies
property.
2

ADA Statement

3

Term: 101S (903)782-0250
CSME 2430
Nail Enhancement
Course Description
A course in the general principles of the theory and application of artificial nails and
related theory.

Learning (2008)
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
1. Identify terminology used in the application of artificial nails.

2. Identify different products pertaining to the application of applying nails
1

3. Exhibit workplace competencies relating to the application of artificial nails.
Learning Objectives
1. Identify the supplies needed for nail tips and explain why they are needed.
2. Demonstrate the proper procedure and precautions to use in applying nail tips.
3. Demonstrate proper removal of nail tips
4. List four kinds of nail wraps and what they are used for.
5. Explain the benefits of using silk,linen,fiberglass, and paper wraps.
6. Describe the maintenance of fabric wrap. Include a description of the 2-week and
4-week rebalance.
7. Define no-light gels.
8. Demonstrate the proper procedures for applying no light gels.
Course Schedule
Week 15 & 16
Chapter Review-Haircoloring
Students will prepare colors on hair swatches to determine intensity, depth, and porosity
control.
Chapter Test
Week 15 & 16 (cont).

Watch Video on Haircoloring
Demonstration of applying haircolor by instructor.
Students will perform haircolor techniques on manniquins
Grade
Prepare for Final Exam

state examination.
Test=40% A=90-100
Labs=40% B=80-89
Quizzes=5% C=70-79
Final exam=10%
Course Policies
2

property.
ADA Statement
3

4


Term: 101S (903) 782-0250
CSME 2439
Advanced Haircutting & Related Theory
Course Description
Advanced concepts and practice of haircutting. Topics include haircuts utilizing
scissors, razor, and/or clippers.
Credit: (4) SCH=(2) lecture and (8) laboratory hours per week.
TSI Requirement: XXXM, xxxR, xxxW.


Learning (2008) ISBN# 10: 1418049433
Program Outcomes



Course Outcomes

1. Identifying word terminology
2. Exhibit work place competencies related to hair design
3. Demonstrate proper techniques used in haircutting
Learning Objectives
1. Demonstrate finger waving, pin curls, roller setting and hair wrapping
2. Demonstrate various blow-dry styling techniques
3. Demonstrate three basic techniques of styling long hair
4. Demonstrate the proper use of thermal irons
5. Demonstrate various thermal iron manipulations and explain how they are used.
6. Describe the three types of hair pressing
7. Demonstrate the procedures involved in soft pressing and hard pressing
8. How to interact with clients during consultation

Tests=40% A=90-100
Labs=40% B=80-89
Quizzes=5% C=70-79
Final exam=10%
Course Policies
property.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S (903)782-0250
CSME 2445
Instructional Theory & Clinical Operation
Course Description
An overview of the objectives set by the Texas Department of Licensing and
Regulations.
Prerequisite(s): Valid Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation license and high
school diploma or GED

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Classroom/clinic management; design teaching methodologies and implement lesson
plans.
Learning Objectives
1. Understand the principles of managing learner behavior
1
2. Explain low profile and direct, high profile control techniques that are used in
dealing with learner misconduct.
3. Understand the basic principles involved with academic advising and counselin.
4. Define what is meant by barriers to learning
5. Describe various difficult learner behaviors and explain methods for managing
them
6. Understand the basic principles of conflict management.

state examination.
Test=40% A=90-100
Labs=40% B=80-89
Quizzes=5% C=70-79
Final exam=10%
Course Policies
property.
ADA Statement
2
3
Paris Junior College Chris Malone
College Year: 2010-2011 WTC – Room 1101
Term: 101S 903-782-0391
Section: 01 cmalone@parisjc.edu
Course # (DFTG 1380)

Course Title (Cooperative Education - Drafting and Design
Technology/Technician, General)
Course Description
Career-related activities encountered in the student's area of specialization offered
through an individualized agreement among the college, employer, and student. Under
the supervision of the college and the employer, the student combines classroom
learning with work experience. Includes a lecture component.
TSI Requirement: (na) M, (na) R, (na) W.
Prerequisite(s): DFTG 1405 & DFTG 1409

None
Program Outcomes
Insert here
Course Outcomes
As outlined in the learning plan, apply the theory, concepts, and skills involving
specialized materials, tools, equipment, procedures, regulations, laws, and interactions
within and among political, economic, environmental, social, and legal systems
associated with the occupation and the business/industry and will demonstrate legal
and ethical behavior, safety practices, interpersonal and teamwork skills, and
appropriate written and verbal communication skills using the terminology of the
occupation and the business/industry.
Learning Objectives
 Work with Construction Materials
 Utilize tools in the workplace
 Learn safety Procedures in the workplace
 Learn ethical behavior in the workplace
 Build interpersonal and teamwork skills
Course Schedule
1. Intro to Cooperative Education
2. Resumes
3. Training
4. Materials
Course # (DFTG 1380) – Chris Malone Page 1 of 2

5. Working with prints
6. Communication skills
7. Safety in the workplace
8. Occupational hazards
9. Interpersonal Skills
10. Teamwork skills
11. Tools
12. Equipment
13. Regulations & Laws in industry
14. Environmental concerns
15. Green Applications
16. Finals

Student will be evaluated based on weekly exams, employer interview, a site visit
survey and student essay.
Course Policies
Absence Policy: 1 Absence (Per Session). 4 Tardies equals one absence. Non instructor
release equals one tardy
Grading Objectives: Unit Exams:25% of total grade, Assignments: 50% of total grade
Final Exam/Project: 25% of total grade
Homework: All homework is due on time and must be turned in by the end of class on the due
date. Any deviation will be handled on a case by case basis. Late work will be deducted by
20% per week.
Workplace Ethics: Students will be reviewed in 10 different areas: Quality, Quantity, Attitude,
Productivity, Work Habits, Preparation, Attentiveness, Participation, Following Instructions and
Attendance. Any one of these could affect the student’s grade.
Student Honesty: Any student caught cheating on any written test or drafting project will receive
immediate disciplinary action which may include removal from the drafting program and not
allowed to return until they have gone through the Paris Jr. College academic appeals
procedure.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0391

Course Description

None
Program Outcomes
Insert here
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
2. Resumes
3. Training
4. Materials

10. Teamwork skills
11. Tools
12. Equipment
16. Finals

Course Policies
20% per week.
procedure.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0391

Course Description

None
Program Outcomes
Insert here
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
2. Resumes
3. Training
4. Materials

10. Teamwork skills
11. Tools
12. Equipment
16. Finals

Course Policies
20% per week.
procedure.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0391

Course Description

None
Program Outcomes
Insert here
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
2. Resumes
3. Training
4. Materials

10. Teamwork skills
11. Tools
12. Equipment
16. Finals

Course Policies
20% per week.
procedure.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0391

Course Title (Technical Drafting)
Course Description
Introduction to the principles of drafting to include terminology and fundamentals,
including size and shape descriptions, projection methods, geometric construction,
sections, and auxiliary views.
Prerequisite(s):

None
Program Outcomes
Students will be able to create technical drawings, geometric constructions,
orthographic projections, pictorial/ sectional views, and dimensioned drawings using a
CAD program.
Course Outcomes
Create technical sketches, geometric constructions, orthographic projections,
pictorial/sectional views, and dimensioned drawings.
Learning Objectives
 Successfully understand the basic fundamentals of drafting.
 Solve design problems and find missing views of objects.
 Recognize all basic drafting tools and how they are used in creating drawings.
 Complete basic drawings using orthographic projection.
 Use AutoCAD to create simple single and multi-view drawings.
 Adequately dimension drawings and apply appropriate notes.
 Create Section and Auxiliary Views
Course Schedule
1. What is drafting and how is it used in industry?
2. Drafting tools
3. Lettering and Scales
4. Sketching
5. Multi-view Projection
6. Orthographic Projection
7. Introduction to CAD

8. Beginners Drawing Tools CAD
9. Beginners Modify Tools CAD
10. Multi-views in CAD
12. Dimensioning
13. Isometric Drawing
14. Sections
15. Working with and reading blueprints
16. Finals

Each student will be assigned a series of drawings to complete. Each drawing will be
graded using a rubric based on ANSI/ASME and current industry standards.
Course Policies
20% per week.
procedure.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0391

Course Title (Technical Drafting)
Course Description
Introduction to the principles of drafting to include terminology and fundamentals,
including size and shape descriptions, projection methods, geometric construction,
sections, and auxiliary views.
Prerequisite(s):

None
Program Outcomes
CAD program.
Course Outcomes
Create technical sketches, geometric constructions, orthographic projections,
pictorial/sectional views, and dimensioned drawings.
Learning Objectives
 Successfully understand the basic fundamentals of drafting.
 Solve design problems and find missing views of objects.
 Recognize all basic drafting tools and how they are used in creating drawings.
 Use AutoCAD to create simple single and multi-view drawings.
 Create Section and Auxiliary Views
Course Schedule
1. What is drafting and how is it used in industry?
2. Drafting tools
3. Lettering and Scales
4. Sketching
5. Multi-view Projection
6. Orthographic Projection
7. Introduction to CAD

8. Beginners Drawing Tools CAD
9. Beginners Modify Tools CAD
12. Dimensioning
13. Isometric Drawing
14. Sections
15. Working with and reading blueprints
16. Finals

Course Policies
20% per week.
procedure.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0391

Course Title (Basic Computer-Aided Drafting)
Course Description
An introduction to computer-aided drafting. Emphasis is placed on setup; creating and
modifying geometry; storing and retrieving predefined shapes; placing, rotating, and
scaling objects, adding text and dimensions, using layers, coordinate systems, and
plot/print to scale.
Prerequisite(s): DFTG 1405

“AutoCAD And Its Applications 2010” ISBN 1-60525-163-9
Program Outcomes
CAD program.
Course Outcomes
Identify terminology and basic functions used with CAD software; use CAD hardware
and software to create, display, and plot/print working drawings.
Learning Objectives
 Successfully understand the fundamentals of AutoCAD.
 Recognize all basic commands and how they are used to create drawings.
 Print completed drawings to scale
Course Schedule
1. Getting Started AutoCAD Overview
2. Basic Drawing Set-up
3. Draw Commands
4. Modify Commands
5. Utilities (Zoom, Pan, Undo, Redo)
6. Osnaps
7. Creating & Editing Text

8. Creating & working with Blocks
9. Working with Grips
10. Inquiry Commands (Distance, Area)
11. Dimensioning
12. Multi-view Drawings
13. Isometric Drawings
14. Section Views
15. Printing and Plotting
16. Finals

Course Policies
20% per week.
procedure.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0391

Course Title (Basic Computer-Aided Drafting)
Course Description
An introduction to computer-aided drafting. Emphasis is placed on setup; creating and
modifying geometry; storing and retrieving predefined shapes; placing, rotating, and
scaling objects, adding text and dimensions, using layers, coordinate systems, and
plot/print to scale.
Prerequisite(s): DFTG 1405

Program Outcomes
CAD program.
Course Outcomes
Identify terminology and basic functions used with CAD software; use CAD hardware
and software to create, display, and plot/print working drawings.
Learning Objectives
 Successfully understand the fundamentals of AutoCAD.
 Recognize all basic commands and how they are used to create drawings.
 Print completed drawings to scale
Course Schedule
1. Getting Started AutoCAD Overview
3. Draw Commands
4. Modify Commands
5. Utilities (Zoom, Pan, Undo, Redo)
6. Osnaps
7. Creating & Editing Text

8. Creating & working with Blocks
9. Working with Grips
10. Inquiry Commands (Distance, Area)
11. Dimensioning
12. Multi-view Drawings
13. Isometric Drawings
14. Section Views
15. Printing and Plotting
16. Finals

Course Policies
20% per week.
procedure.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0391

Course Title (Special Topics in Drafting and Design
Course Description
Prerequisite(s): DFTG 1405, DFTG 1409, DFTG 1417, DFTG 1458, DFTG 2402, DFTG
2412, DFTG 2417, DFTG 2417, DFTG 2419, DFTG 2423

None
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
This is a course in which the student selects and develops an advanced course of study
under the direction of the professor in the specific area of employment. This course
guides students through the process of creating a professional quality portfolio and
resume. Job hunting techniques and interviewing skills and strategies are also
discussed and presented.
Learning Objectives
 To Enhance the students skills in a particular discipline in drafting
 Prepare a resume, references, and professional-quality portfolio suitable for
seeking employment in the field of technical drawing and CAD.
 Apply job hunting strategies and interviewing skills required of a job search in the
drafting industry.
Course Schedule

The Student will be evaluated based on the completion of the resume and portfolio.
Course Policies
20% per week.
procedure.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0391

Course Description

None
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
drafting industry.
Course Schedule

Course Policies
20% per week.
procedure.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0391

Course Description

None
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
drafting industry.
Course Schedule

Course Policies
20% per week.
procedure.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0391

Course Description

None
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
drafting industry.
Course Schedule

Course Policies
20% per week.
procedure.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0391

Course Title (Machine Drafting)
Course Description
Production of detail and assembly drawings of machines, threads, gears, utilizing
tolerances, limit dimensioning and surface finishes.

“Modern Graphics Communication” (4th Edition) ISBN # 0-13-515103-1
Program Outcomes
Students will be able to Create detail and assembly drawings of machine parts, threads,
& gears.
Course Outcomes
Interpret terms used in tolerancing; identify dimensions of two mating parts; draw spur
and/or bevel gears; draw details and assemblies; identify interference and clearance
fits; identify types of threads forms; and interpret thread notes.
Learning Objectives
 Understand mechanical tolerances and rules.
 Become familiar with threads and allowances.
 Create working shop drawings of machine parts and assemblies.
 Understand terminology used with and on mechanical drawings.
Course Schedule
1. Intro to Mechanical Drawings
2. Mechanical Drawings in Industry
3. Detail Drawings
4. Assembly Drawings
5. Dimensioning and Tolerances
6. Titleblocks, Bill of materials, and Notes
7. Specifications, Threads, and Callouts
8. Fastners
9. Gears
10. Cams
11. Weldment drawings
12. Sheet metal bends

13. Working Drawings
14. Fabrication tools
15. Blueprint Reading
16. Finals

Course Policies
20% per week.
procedure.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0391

Course Title (Machine Drafting)
Course Description
Production of detail and assembly drawings of machines, threads, gears, utilizing
tolerances, limit dimensioning and surface finishes.

Program Outcomes
Students will be able to Create detail and assembly drawings of machine parts, threads,
& gears.
Course Outcomes
Interpret terms used in tolerancing; identify dimensions of two mating parts; draw spur
and/or bevel gears; draw details and assemblies; identify interference and clearance
fits; identify types of threads forms; and interpret thread notes.
Learning Objectives
 Understand mechanical tolerances and rules.
 Become familiar with threads and allowances.
 Create working shop drawings of machine parts and assemblies.
 Understand terminology used with and on mechanical drawings.
Course Schedule
1. Intro to Mechanical Drawings
2. Mechanical Drawings in Industry
3. Detail Drawings
4. Assembly Drawings
5. Dimensioning and Tolerances
6. Titleblocks, Bill of materials, and Notes
7. Specifications, Threads, and Callouts
8. Fastners
9. Gears
10. Cams
11. Weldment drawings
12. Sheet metal bends

13. Working Drawings
14. Fabrication tools
15. Blueprint Reading
16. Finals

Course Policies
20% per week.
procedure.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0391

Course Title (Technical Illustration and Presentation)
Course Description
Study of pictorial drawings including isometrics, obliques, perspectives, charts, and
graphs. Emphasis on rendering and using different media.
Prerequisite(s): DFTG 1405, DFTG 1409 and DFTG 2419

Program Outcomes
CAD program.
Course Outcomes
Identify the processes used in technical illustration and produce pictorial drawings for
use in technical presentation.
Learning Objectives
 Utilize AutoCAD to create a working set of illustrations and instructions showing how to
assemble an object and operate it.
 Learn different modeling skills using AutoCAD
 Use isometric or 3D drawing techniques to create drawings.
 Create easy to understand drawings.
 Dimension 3D models
 Explore different presentation capabilities using AutoCAD
Course Schedule
1. Introduction to Technical Illustrations
3. Navigating in 3D
4. UCS Basics
5. AutoCAD 3d Modeling tools
6. Creating Solid Models
7. Editing Solid Models
8. Using Solid Models to create technical drawings

9. Dimension 3D Models
10. Plotting 3D
11. Rendering
12. Animation in design
13. Presentations
14. Project (Create a full Illustrated Instruction Booklet)
16. Finals

Course Policies
20% per week.
procedure.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0391

Course Title (Technical Illustration and Presentation)
Course Description
Study of pictorial drawings including isometrics, obliques, perspectives, charts, and
graphs. Emphasis on rendering and using different media.
Prerequisite(s): DFTG 1405, DFTG 1409 and DFTG 2419

Program Outcomes
CAD program.
Course Outcomes
Identify the processes used in technical illustration and produce pictorial drawings for
use in technical presentation.
Learning Objectives
 Utilize AutoCAD to create a working set of illustrations and instructions showing how to
assemble an object and operate it.
 Learn different modeling skills using AutoCAD
 Use isometric or 3D drawing techniques to create drawings.
 Create easy to understand drawings.
 Dimension 3D models
 Explore different presentation capabilities using AutoCAD
Course Schedule
1. Introduction to Technical Illustrations
3. Navigating in 3D
4. UCS Basics
5. AutoCAD 3d Modeling tools
6. Creating Solid Models
7. Editing Solid Models
8. Using Solid Models to create technical drawings

9. Dimension 3D Models
10. Plotting 3D
11. Rendering
12. Animation in design
13. Presentations
16. Finals

Course Policies
20% per week.
procedure.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0391

Course Title (Descriptive Geometry)
Course Description
Graphical solutions to problems involving points, lines, and planes in space.

Program Outcomes
CAD program.
Course Outcomes
Describe spatial relationships; use sequential thinking; and create views necessary to
show object's true size and shape/development using points, lines, and planes in space.
Learning Objectives
 Create and Interpret Points/Lines/Planes
 Create and Interpret Solids and Surfaces
 Create and Interpret Intersections
 Create and Interpret Auxiliary Views
 Create and Interpret Revolutions
 Describe spatial relationships
 Use sequential thinking
 Create views necessary to show object's true size and shape
 Developments using points, lines, and planes in space.
Course Schedule
1. Intro to Descriptive Geometry
2. Principles and Basic Concepts
3. Points in three dimensional space
4. Lines in three dimensional space
5. Planar surfaces in three dimensional space
6. Location of points & planes on geometric solids & surfaces
7. Intersections of geometric solids and surfaces

8. Folding line method
9. Reference Line Method
10. Primary Auxiliary Views
11. Secondary Auxiliary Views
12. Tertiary Auxiliary
13. Revolutions
14. Creating Developments
15. Development of surfaces of basic geometric solids
16. Finals

Course Policies
20% per week.
procedure.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0391

Course Title (Descriptive Geometry)
Course Description
Graphical solutions to problems involving points, lines, and planes in space.

Program Outcomes
CAD program.
Course Outcomes
Describe spatial relationships; use sequential thinking; and create views necessary to
show object's true size and shape/development using points, lines, and planes in space.
Learning Objectives
 Create and Interpret Points/Lines/Planes
 Create and Interpret Solids and Surfaces
 Create and Interpret Intersections
 Create and Interpret Auxiliary Views
 Create and Interpret Revolutions
 Describe spatial relationships
 Use sequential thinking
 Create views necessary to show object's true size and shape
 Developments using points, lines, and planes in space.
Course Schedule
1. Intro to Descriptive Geometry
2. Principles and Basic Concepts
3. Points in three dimensional space
4. Lines in three dimensional space
5. Planar surfaces in three dimensional space
6. Location of points & planes on geometric solids & surfaces
7. Intersections of geometric solids and surfaces

8. Folding line method
9. Reference Line Method
10. Primary Auxiliary Views
11. Secondary Auxiliary Views
12. Tertiary Auxiliary
13. Revolutions
14. Creating Developments
15. Development of surfaces of basic geometric solids
16. Finals

Course Policies
20% per week.
procedure.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0391

Course Title (Intermediate Computer-Aided Drafting)
Course Description
A continuation of practices and techniques used in basic computer-aided drafting
including the development and use of prototype drawings, construction of pictorial
drawings, extracting data, and basics of 3D.
Prerequisite(s): DFTG 1405 and DFTG 1409

Program Outcomes
CAD program.
Course Outcomes
Produce 2D and 3D drawings, pictorial drawings; use external referencing of multiple
drawings to construct a composite drawing; and import and extract data utilizing
attributes.
Learning Objectives
 Utilize the AutoCAD Design Center.
 Utilizing AutoCAD’s Tool Pallets.
 Utilize AutoCAD to create External References.
 Utilize AutoCAD to create blocks with attributes.
 Become familiar with 3D drawing within AutoCAD.
 Perform basic customization of AutoCAD.
 Utilize AutoCAD to create 2D drawings from 3D models
Course Schedule
1. Advanced AutoCAD Commands
2. Using Design Center and Tool Palettes
3. Creating custom Tool Palettes
4. Creating & using Attributes
5. External Referencing
6. Parametric Design

7. Using Layouts
8. Basic Customization of AutoCAD
9. Basic 3D modeling
10. Wire frame models
11. Surface models
12. Solid models
13. Editing Surfaces
14. Rendering
15. Creating 2D Drawings from 3D Models
16. Finals

Course Policies
20% per week.
procedure.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0391

Course Title (Intermediate Computer-Aided Drafting)
Course Description
A continuation of practices and techniques used in basic computer-aided drafting
including the development and use of prototype drawings, construction of pictorial
drawings, extracting data, and basics of 3D.
Prerequisite(s): DFTG 1405 and DFTG 1409

Program Outcomes
CAD program.
Course Outcomes
Produce 2D and 3D drawings, pictorial drawings; use external referencing of multiple
drawings to construct a composite drawing; and import and extract data utilizing
attributes.
Learning Objectives
 Utilize the AutoCAD Design Center.
 Utilizing AutoCAD’s Tool Pallets.
 Utilize AutoCAD to create External References.
 Utilize AutoCAD to create blocks with attributes.
 Become familiar with 3D drawing within AutoCAD.
 Perform basic customization of AutoCAD.
 Utilize AutoCAD to create 2D drawings from 3D models
Course Schedule
1. Advanced AutoCAD Commands
2. Using Design Center and Tool Palettes
3. Creating custom Tool Palettes
4. Creating & using Attributes
5. External Referencing
6. Parametric Design

7. Using Layouts
8. Basic Customization of AutoCAD
9. Basic 3D modeling
10. Wire frame models
11. Surface models
12. Solid models
13. Editing Surfaces
14. Rendering
15. Creating 2D Drawings from 3D Models
16. Finals

Course Policies
20% per week.
procedure.
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Anthony Sawyer
Term: 101S 903-782-0318
Section: 01 asawyer@parisjc.edu
ECON 2301
PRINCIPLES OF MACROECONOMICS
Course Description
History, development, and application of macroeconomic theory underlying the
production, distribution, and exchange of goods and services including the utilization of
resources, analysis of value and prices, national income analysis, fiscal policies,
monetary and banking theory and policy, international economics, and economics
systems. Attention given to the application of economic principles to economic
problems.

Economics 18th Edition by McConnell, Brue, & Flynn, McGraw-Hill Publishing, 2009
(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes
Evaluate economic data.
Demonstrate an understanding of political economy and alternative schools of economic

thought.
Demonstrate an understanding of economic terminology and concepts.
Course Outcomes
This course will provide an introduction to the U.S. economy’s organization and
operation. Emphasis is placed on national income determination, monetary and fiscal
policies, money and banking, business cycles, and economic growth.
Learning Objectives
The definition of economics and the features of the economic perspective.
About alternative perspectives on the causes of macroeconomic instability, including the

views of mainstream economists, monetarists, real-business cycle advocates, and
proponents of coordination failure.
How the market system decides what to produce, how to produce it, and who obtains it.
ECON 2301 – Anthony Sawyer Page 1 of 5

The difference between a command system and a market system.
Additional learning objectives are listed at the beginning of each chapter covered in the
course.
Course Schedule
Topic Week
Limits, Alternatives and Choices 1
The Market System and the Circular Flow
Labor Day 2
Demand, Supply and Market Equilibrium
Demand, Supply and Market Equilibrium 3
The US. Economy: Private and Public Sectors
The United States in the Global Economy 4
Exam 1
An Introduction to Macroeconomics 5
Measuring Domestic Output and National Income
Economic Growth 6
Business Cycles, Unemployment, and Inflation
Exam 2 7
Basic Macroeconomic Relationships
The Aggregate Expenditures Model 8
Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply
Fiscal Policy, Deficits, and Debt 9
Exam 3
Video 1 10
Money and Banking
Money Creation 11
Interest Rates and Monetary Policy
Financial Economics 12
Exam 4
Video 2 13
Thanksgiving
Extending the Analysis of Aggregate Supply 14
Current Issues in Macro Theory and Policy
International Trade 15
The Balance of Payments, Exchange Rates, and
Trade Deficits
Semester Exam 16

Letter grades will be assigned on the following scale:
Grade Average Letter Grade
90 - 100 = A
80 - 89 = B
70 - 79 = C
60 - 69 = D
0 - 59 = F
There will be five exams (including a comprehensive final exam) and two current event
topics. Each of the five exams will be 16% of the semester grade (total 80 points of
semester grade). Each current event topic will be 10% of the semester grade. Please
consult the course schedule (located above) to determine the content of each exam.
Course Policies
Please attend class and complete your work on time.
Please read the entire syllabus.
When answering exam questions, emailing, and conducting any other written
communication in this course, please use proper grammar and spelling. I understand
that this is not an English course, but you are still expected to exhibit acceptable written
communication skills. Regardless of the professional field that you choose to enter, oral
and written communication skills will be very important.
I DO NOT ACCEPT LATE ASSIGNMENTS. PLEASE TURN IN YOUR WORK ON

TIME!
day for me to respond to emails.
I very seldom give incompletes. Unless you have an extended illness that requires
hospitalization or something of a similar nature, please do not expect that I will issue an
incomplete. In most cases, failure to complete assignments prior to the due date will
result in a zero on that assignment and failure to complete the coursework prior to the
end of the semester will result in an F in the course.
Students are expected to be civil and respectful toward both the instructor and other

students. Rudeness and disruptions will result in the student being removed from the
classroom for the remainder of that class period. Further disruptions will result in the
instructor dropping the student from the course.
Remove mp3 headphones before class. The purpose of attending class is to listen to
the course material, not music.
Do not speak while the instructor or other students are speaking. Please wait your turn
to speak.
Students should always remain civil and courteous even when they disagree with
someone during class discussions.
A student should notify the instructor prior to class if they need to leave early. When
leaving early, students should do everything possible to minimize the disruption of the
learning environment.
No laptop computers are allowed in class.
ADA Statement
Paris Junior College is an affirmative action/equal employment opportunity educational

institution. Its students and employees are selected and/or assigned without regard to
their race, color, age, sex, handicap or national origin, consistent with Titles VI and VII
of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, and Title IX of the Higher Education Acts as amended in
1972, and with Executive Order 11246 as amended by Executive Order 11375.

The above schedule, policies, procedures and assignments in this course are subject to
change in the event of extenuating circumstances.
If you have any questions or concerns about the syllabus, please email the instructor so
that these concerns may be addressed.
Please send the instructor an email stating that you have read the syllabus and agree to
abide by the rules and procedures as stated in the syllabus.

Term: 101S 903-782-0318
ECON 2301
Course Description
problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives


course.
Course Schedule
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
Exam 1
Economic Growth 6
Exam 2 7
Exam 3
Video 1 10
Money and Banking
Money Creation 11
Exam 4
Video 2 13
Thanksgiving
Trade Deficits
Semester Exam 16

90 - 100 = A
80 - 89 = B
70 - 79 = C
60 - 69 = D
0 - 59 = F
Course Policies

TIME!

to speak.
ADA Statement



Term: 101S 903-782-0318
ECON 2301
Course Description
problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives


course.
Course Schedule
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
Exam 1
Economic Growth 6
Exam 2 7
Exam 3
Video 1 10
Money and Banking
Money Creation 11
Exam 4
Video 2 13
Thanksgiving
Trade Deficits
Semester Exam 16

90 - 100 = A
80 - 89 = B
70 - 79 = C
60 - 69 = D
0 - 59 = F
Course Policies

TIME!

to speak.
ADA Statement



Term: 101S 903-782-0318
ECON 2301
Course Description
problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives


course.
Course Schedule
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
Exam 1
Economic Growth 6
Exam 2 7
Exam 3
Video 1 10
Money and Banking
Money Creation 11
Exam 4
Video 2 13
Thanksgiving
Trade Deficits
Semester Exam 16

90 - 100 = A
80 - 89 = B
70 - 79 = C
60 - 69 = D
0 - 59 = F
Course Policies

TIME!

to speak.
ADA Statement



Paris Junior College Jeff Tarrant
Term: 101S 903-457-8720
Section: 40 jtarrant@parisjc.edu
ECON 2301
Course Description
problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

Page 1 of 5

course.
Course Schedule
Meeting Times
Monday and Wednesday 1:00 pm – 2:15 pm
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
Exam 1
Economic Growth 6
Exam 2 7
Exam 3
Video 1 10
Money and Banking
Money Creation 11
Exam 4
Video 2 13
Thanksgiving
Page 2 of 5

Trade Deficits
Semester Exam 16
This schedule is meant to be only general guide. It will be adjusted as time and
circumstances dictate.

Attendance. Class attendance is absolutely critical to the mastery of the subject
matter. Attendance will be taken each day. Each student has the responsibility to
prepare for each class by reading assigned material and completing all assignments.
All students should be prepared to participate in class discussions of assigned
materials.
Chapter Quizzes. Each chapter of the textbook covered has a corresponding quiz in
WebCT. Chapter quizzes may be completed outside of class, but each one must be
completed by the due date to receive credit.
Exams. Each exam will be taken during class in the week indicated. More information
concerning the exams will be given as the class progresses.
Video Quizzes. During the semester, two videos will be shown. At the end of each
video, a short answer quiz will be given.
Method of Evaluation
Attendance 20%
Chapter Quizzes 30%
Exams 40%
Video Quizzes 10%
Grading Scale
Total Point Percentage Letter Grade
90% – 100% A
80% – 89% B
70% – 79% C
60% – 69% D
0% – 59% F
Page 3 of 5

Course Policies
Students are expected to attend class and to be on time. It is the primary responsibility
of the student who wishes to drop the course to meet with the instructor to initiate the
paperwork. A student may have 3 absences without penalty throughout the semester.
Beginning with the 4th absence, there is a 10-point deduction from the total attendance
grade for each absence. Three late arrivals or early departures will count as one
absence. A student with 6 absences at any point in the semester may be dropped from
the course at the instructor’s discretion; however, it should not be assumed that the
instructor will drop a student automatically. An absence may be excused with
proper documentation. The instructor is the final authority as to whether an absence
may be excused, so the student must contact the instructor as soon as possible if
he/she is unable to attend. If any work must be made up, the student must make
arrangements to do so.
Cellular phones, pagers, CD players, mp3 players, radios, laptop computers, tape
recorders and similar devices are prohibited in the classroom. There are no
exceptions to this rule.
No food or drink is permitted in the classroom. This is a PJC and Greenville Center
policy.
attending classes or labs.
Forms or Reports requiring the instructor’s attention, evaluation, or signature must be

presented in the instructor’s office during conference time to protect the student’s
privacy. Do not request progress, attendance, or other individual reports during class
time. Monthly progress reports required by various agencies must be left with the
instructor to be completed at the end of the month. The student must complete as
much of the form as possible.
Any student who disrupts the class in ANY way will be asked to leave the class,
and may be dropped from the course. Any student who sleeps in class will also
be considered disrupting the class. In addition, any student who conducts text
messages or phone conversations will be considered disrupting the class.

Page 4 of 5

The schedule, policies, procedures and assignments in this course and on this syllabus
are subject to change in the event of extenuating circumstances.
Please send the instructor an email stating that you have read the syllabus and
agree to abide by the rules and procedures as stated in the syllabus.
ADA Statement
Page 5 of 5

Term: 101S 903-457-8720
ECON 2301
Course Description
problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

Page 1 of 5

course.
Course Schedule
Meeting Times
Wednesday 6:00 pm – 9:00 pm
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
Exam 1
Economic Growth 6
Exam 2 7
Exam 3
Video 1 10
Money and Banking
Money Creation 11
Exam 4
Video 2 13
Thanksgiving
Page 2 of 5

Trade Deficits
Semester Exam 16

materials.
Attendance 20%
Chapter Quizzes 30%
Exams 40%
Video Quizzes 10%
Grading Scale
90% – 100% A
80% – 89% B
70% – 79% C
60% – 69% D
0% – 59% F
Page 3 of 5

Course Policies
Beginning with the 3rd absence, there is a 15-point deduction from the total attendance
policy.


Page 4 of 5

ADA Statement
Page 5 of 5

Term: 101S 903-457-8720
Section: 4D jtarrant@parisjc.edu
ECON 2301
Course Description
problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

Page 1 of 5

course.
Course Schedule
Meeting Times
Monday and Wednesday 8:00 am – 9:15 am
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
Exam 1
Economic Growth 6
Exam 2 7
Exam 3
Video 1 10
Money and Banking
Money Creation 11
Exam 4
Video 2 13
Thanksgiving
Page 2 of 5

Trade Deficits
Semester Exam 16

materials.
Attendance 20%
Chapter Quizzes 30%
Exams 40%
Video Quizzes 10%
Grading Scale
90% – 100% A
80% – 89% B
70% – 79% C
60% – 69% D
0% – 59% F
Page 3 of 5

Course Policies
policy.


Page 4 of 5

ADA Statement
Page 5 of 5

Term: 101S 903-457-8720
ECON 2301
Course Description
problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

Page 1 of 5

course.
Course Schedule
Meeting Times
Tuesday and Thursday 8:00 am – 9:15 am
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
Exam 1
Economic Growth 6
Exam 2 7
Exam 3
Video 1 10
Money and Banking
Money Creation 11
Exam 4
Video 2 13
Thanksgiving
Page 2 of 5

Trade Deficits
Semester Exam 16

materials.
Exams. Each exam will be taken in during class in the week indicated. More
information concerning the exams will be given as the class progresses.
Attendance 20%
Chapter Quizzes 30%
Exams 40%
Video Quizzes 10%
Grading Scale
90% – 100% A
80% – 89% B
70% – 79% C
60% – 69% D
0% – 59% F
Page 3 of 5

Course Policies
policy.


Page 4 of 5

ADA Statement
Page 5 of 5

Term: 101S 903-457-8720
ECON 2301
Course Description
problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

Page 1 of 5

course.
Course Schedule
Meeting Times
Wednesday 6:00 pm – 9:00 pm
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
Exam 1
Economic Growth 6
Exam 2 7
Exam 3
Video 1 10
Money and Banking
Money Creation 11
Exam 4
Video 2 13
Thanksgiving
Page 2 of 5

Trade Deficits
Semester Exam 16

materials.
Attendance 20%
Chapter Quizzes 30%
Exams 40%
Video Quizzes 10%
Grading Scale
90% – 100% A
80% – 89% B
70% – 79% C
60% – 69% D
0% – 59% F
Page 3 of 5

Course Policies
Beginning with the 3rd absence, there is a 15-point deduction from the total attendance
policy.


Page 4 of 5

ADA Statement
Page 5 of 5

Term: 101S 903-457-8720
ECON 2301
Course Description
problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

Page 1 of 5

course.
Course Schedule
Meeting Times
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
Exam 1
Economic Growth 6
Exam 2 7
Exam 3
Video 1 10
Money and Banking
Money Creation 11
Exam 4
Video 2 13
Thanksgiving
Page 2 of 5

Trade Deficits
Semester Exam 16

materials.
Exams. Each exam will be taken in during class in the week indicated. More
Attendance 20%
Chapter Quizzes 30%
Exams 40%
Video Quizzes 10%
Grading Scale
90% – 100% A
80% – 89% B
70% – 79% C
60% – 69% D
0% – 59% F
Page 3 of 5

Course Policies
policy.


Page 4 of 5

ADA Statement
Page 5 of 5

Term: 101S 903-457-8720
ECON 2301
Course Description
problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

Page 1 of 5

course.
Course Schedule
Meeting Times
Tuesday and Thursday 1:55 pm – 2:45 pm
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
Exam 1
Economic Growth 6
Exam 2 7
Exam 3
Video 1 10
Money and Banking
Money Creation 11
Exam 4
Video 2 13
Thanksgiving
Page 2 of 5

Trade Deficits
Semester Exam 16

materials.
Exams. Each exam will be taken in WebCT during class in the week indicated. They
will be taken in the computer lab and will be proctored by the instructor. More
Attendance 20%
Chapter Quizzes 30%
Exams 40%
Video Quizzes 10%
Grading Scale
90% – 100% A
80% – 89% B
70% – 79% C
60% – 69% D
0% – 59% F
Page 3 of 5

Course Policies
policy.


Page 4 of 5

ADA Statement
Page 5 of 5

Term: 101S 903-457-8720
ECON 2301
Course Description
problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

Page 1 of 5

course.
Course Schedule
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
Exam 1
Economic Growth 6
Exam 2 7
Exam 3
Video 1 10
Money and Banking
Money Creation 11
Exam 4
Video 2 13
Thanksgiving
Trade Deficits
Semester Exam 16
Page 2 of 5

matter. Attendance will be measured by the number of quizzes completed on time.
WebCT. Chapter quizzes must be completed by the due date to receive credit.
Exams. Each exam will be taken in WebCT during class in the week indicated. They
will be taken in the computer lab and will be proctored. More information concerning the
exams will be given as the class progresses.
Attendance 20%
Chapter Quizzes 30%
Exams 40%
Video Quizzes 10%
Grading Scale
90% – 100% A
80% – 89% B
70% – 79% C
60% – 69% D
0% – 59% F
Page 3 of 5

Course Policies
It is the primary responsibility of the student who wishes to drop the course to meet with
the instructor to initiate the paperwork. There is a 5-point deduction from the total
attendance grade for each quiz not completed on time. A student with 6 missed quizzes
at any point in the semester may be dropped from the course at the instructor’s
discretion; however, it should not be assumed that the instructor will drop a
student automatically. An absence may be excused with proper documentation.
The instructor is the final authority as to whether an absence may be excused, so the
student must contact the instructor as soon as possible if he/she is unable to attend. If
any work must be made up, the student must make arrangements to do so.

and may be dropped from the course.

ADA Statement
Page 4 of 5

Page 5 of 5

Term: 101S 903-782-0318
ECON 2301
Course Description
problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives


course.
Course Schedule
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
Exam 1
Economic Growth 6
Exam 2 7
Exam 3
Video 1 10
Money and Banking
Money Creation 11
Exam 4
Video 2 13
Thanksgiving
Trade Deficits
Semester Exam 16

90 - 100 = A
80 - 89 = B
70 - 79 = C
60 - 69 = D
0 - 59 = F
Course Policies

TIME!

to speak.
ADA Statement



Term: 101S 903-457-8720
ECON 2301
Course Description
problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

Page 1 of 5

course.
Course Schedule
Meeting Times
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
Exam 1
Economic Growth 6
Exam 2 7
Exam 3
Video 1 10
Money and Banking
Money Creation 11
Exam 4
Video 2 13
Thanksgiving
Page 2 of 5

Trade Deficits
Semester Exam 16

materials.
Attendance 20%
Chapter Quizzes 30%
Exams 40%
Video Quizzes 10%
Grading Scale
90% – 100% A
80% – 89% B
70% – 79% C
60% – 69% D
0% – 59% F
Page 3 of 5

Course Policies
policy.


Page 4 of 5

ADA Statement
Page 5 of 5

Term: 101S 903-782-0318
ECON 2301
Course Description
problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives


course.
Course Schedule
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
Exam 1
Economic Growth 6
Exam 2 7
Exam 3
Video 1 10
Money and Banking
Money Creation 11
Exam 4
Video 2 13
Thanksgiving
Trade Deficits
Semester Exam 16

90 - 100 = A
80 - 89 = B
70 - 79 = C
60 - 69 = D
0 - 59 = F
Course Policies

TIME!

to speak.
ADA Statement



Term: 101S 903-457-8720
ECON 2301
Course Description
problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

Page 1 of 5

course.
Course Schedule
Meeting Times
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
Exam 1
Economic Growth 6
Exam 2 7
Exam 3
Video 1 10
Money and Banking
Money Creation 11
Exam 4
Video 2 13
Thanksgiving
Page 2 of 5

Trade Deficits
Semester Exam 16

materials.
Attendance 20%
Chapter Quizzes 30%
Exams 40%
Video Quizzes 10%
Grading Scale
90% – 100% A
80% – 89% B
70% – 79% C
60% – 69% D
0% – 59% F
Page 3 of 5

Course Policies
policy.


Page 4 of 5

ADA Statement
Page 5 of 5

Term: 101S 903-782-0318
Section: PH asawyer@parisjc.edu
ECON 2301
Course Description
problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives


course.
Course Schedule
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
Exam 1
Economic Growth 6
Exam 2 7
Exam 3
Video 1 10
Money and Banking
Money Creation 11
Exam 4
Video 2 13
Thanksgiving
Trade Deficits
Semester Exam 16

90 - 100 = A
80 - 89 = B
70 - 79 = C
60 - 69 = D
0 - 59 = F
Course Policies

TIME!

to speak.
ADA Statement



Term: 101S 903-782-0318
ECON 2302
PRINCIPLES OF MICROECONOMICS
Course Description
History, development, and application of microeconomic theory underlying the
resources, analysis of value and prices, distribution of income, labor problems, and
economics systems. Attention given to the application of economic principles to
economic problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
This course will provide an introduction to the market economy. Emphasis is placed on
the price mechanism, supply and demand analysis, degrees of competition, and income
distribution.
Learning Objectives
About price elasticity of demand and how it can be applied.
How purely competitive firms maximize profits or minimize losses.
The conditions required for purely competitive markets.
The characteristics of pure monopoly.
The characteristics of oligopoly.

The characteristics of monopolistic competition.
Course Schedule
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
The United States in the Global Economy
Exam 1 4
Elasticity, Consumer Surplus, and Producer Surplus
Consumer Behavior 5
Public Goods, Externalities, and Information
Asymmetries
Public Choice Theory and the Economics of Taxation 6
Exam 2
The Costs of Production 7
Pure Competition
Pure Monopoly 8
Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly
Exam 3 9
Current Event Topic 1
The Demand for Resources 10
Wage Determination
Rent, Interest, and Profit 11
Natural Resources and Energy Economics
Exam 4 12
Current Event Topic 2
Antitrust Policy and Regulation 13
Thanksgiving
Agriculture: Economics and Policy 14
Income Inequality, Poverty, and Discrimination
Health Care 15
Immigration
Semester Exam 16


90 - 100 = A
80 - 89 = B
70 - 79 = C
60 - 69 = D
0 - 59 = F
There will be five exams (including a comprehensive final exam) and two current
event topics. Each of the five exams will be 16% of the semester grade (total 80
points of semester grade). Each current event topic will be 10% of the semester
grade. Please consult the course schedule (located above) to determine the content
of each exam.
Course Policies

TIME!

to speak.
ADA Statement



Term: 101S 903-782-0318
ECON 2302
Course Description
economic problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
distribution.
Learning Objectives

Course Schedule
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
Exam 1 4
Consumer Behavior 5
Asymmetries
Exam 2
Pure Competition
Pure Monopoly 8
Exam 3 9
Video 1
Wage Determination
Exam 4 12
Video 2
Thanksgiving
Health Care 15
Immigration
Semester Exam 16


90 - 100 = A
80 - 89 = B
70 - 79 = C
60 - 69 = D
0 - 59 = F
of each exam.
Course Policies

TIME!

to speak.
ADA Statement



Term: 101S 903-782-0318
ECON 2302
Course Description
economic problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
distribution.
Learning Objectives

Course Schedule
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
Exam 1 4
Consumer Behavior 5
Asymmetries
Exam 2
Pure Competition
Pure Monopoly 8
Exam 3 9
Video 1
Wage Determination
Exam 4 12
Video 2
Thanksgiving
Health Care 15
Immigration
Semester Exam 16


90 - 100 = A
80 - 89 = B
70 - 79 = C
60 - 69 = D
0 - 59 = F
of each exam.
Course Policies

TIME!

to speak.
ADA Statement



Term: 101S 903-782-0318
ECON 2302
Course Description
economic problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
distribution.
Learning Objectives

Course Schedule
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
Exam 1 4
Consumer Behavior 5
Asymmetries
Exam 2
Pure Competition
Pure Monopoly 8
Exam 3 9
Video 1
Wage Determination
Exam 4 12
Video 2
Thanksgiving
Health Care 15
Immigration
Semester Exam 16


90 - 100 = A
80 - 89 = B
70 - 79 = C
60 - 69 = D
0 - 59 = F
of each exam.
Course Policies

TIME!

to speak.
ADA Statement



Term: 101S 903-782-0318
ECON 2302
Course Description
economic problems.

(ISBN: 0077401840).
Program Outcomes

thought.
Course Outcomes
distribution.
Learning Objectives

Course Schedule
Topic Week
Labor Day 2
Exam 1 4
Consumer Behavior 5
Asymmetries
Exam 2
Pure Competition
Pure Monopoly 8
Exam 3 9
Video 1
Wage Determination
Exam 4 12
Video 2
Thanksgiving
Health Care 15
Immigration
Semester Exam 16


90 - 100 = A
80 - 89 = B
70 - 79 = C
60 - 69 = D
0 - 59 = F
of each exam.
Course Policies

TIME!

to speak.
ADA Statement




Term: Fall 903-782-0722
Course # (EEIR 1201)

Course Title (Math for Electronics Technicians)
Course Description
An applied mathematics course with emphasis on the numbering systems, calculations
and problem solving skills needed to solve for electronic circuit parameters. Schematic
diagrams and electronic terminology are introduced.

Text: None (Everything on computer)
Lab: None
Program Outcomes
Thorough understanding of Ohm's Law and Power Law and how it applies to DC and
AC Circuits.
Identify a resistor, know its purpose, calculate its value per the color code, and measure
it value with a multimeter.
In-depth understanding of line diagrams including symbols, line reference, cross
referenced and wire reference numbers, how the components function individually and
how they function as a system.
Develop the thought processes necessary to become an effective troubleshooter for
motor control circuits.
Course Outcomes
Complete operations with whole numbers, common and decimal fractions, exponents,
electronic units, and roots. Complete operations with Ohm’s and Watt’s laws, ratio and
proportion, percentages, averages, tolerances, DC and AC circuits.
Learning Objectives
Develop math skills necessary to succeed in electronics

Course Schedule
Week # 1 – Basic Math
Week # 2 - Fractions
Week # 3 - Exponents
Week # 4 – Metric Notation
Week # 5 – Fundamentals of Algebra
Week # 6 – Linear Equations
Week # 7 - Exponents
Week # 8 - Polynomials
Week # 9 – Fundamentals of Trigonometry
Week # 10 – Trig Functions
Week # 11 – Graphing Trig Functions
Week # 12 – Trig Identities
Week # 13 – Angle Formulas
Week # 14 – Computer Math
Week # 15 – Measurements

Course Policies
40% : End of section exams 90 –100 is an “A”
10% : Class notes 80 – 90 is a “B”

50% : Final Exam 70 – 80 is a “C”
for viruses before use. CLASSES will start at prescribed times and the door will be
locked and make-ups will be at the discretion of the instructor. CELL PHONE USE will
not be allowed in class. If you have one with you it must be turned off or if it rings
during class it will be confiscated. If you are emergency personnel turn your pager,
beeper or cell phone on silent or vibrate. If you have an emergency please let your
instructor know and we will work with you. Cell phones, ect. WILL not be allowed during
a test. Disruptive students will be ask to leave and the police will be called if necessary.
ADA Statement



Paris Junior College Larry Roberts

Term: 101S 903-782-026
Section: 01 lroberts@parisjc.edu
Course ELMT1480
Course Title: Cooperative Education – Electromechanical Technology
Course Description
Insert ACGM or WECM description
Prerequisite(s): Working in a maintenance or technical field

No Text Required
Program Outcomes
There are several program outcomes for the Electromechanical Technology program,
but the only outcome for this course is that the student perform satisfactorily on the job
and complete all the paperwork and agreements associated with the course.
Course Outcomes
Become a more knowledgeable graduate because of the actual experience on the job.
Learning Objectives
Learn real-life practical information that cannot be easily learned in the classroom.
Course Schedule
The student must work at least 21 hours on the job and complete all assignments made
by the instructor
Course Policies
Grading:
The student will receive an A in the course if they complete all requirements by week
13, a B by week 14, a C by week 15 and will fail the course if not complete by week 15.

Attendance/Drop

This is the standard Electromechanical Technology policy, but it does not really apply to the coop course.
for night classes) will constitute one absence. For perfect attendance, FOUR (4) points
will be added to the final course grade. If for some reason, you are unable to complete
the course discuss it with the instructor. Do not just quit coming to class. Students who
wish to drop must initiate the drop themselves or receive a grade of “F.”
DRINKS will not be allowed in areas that would jeopardize equipment.
SOFTWARE other than approved by the instructor will not be used on or copied by
departmental computers. All diskettes used on computers outside the department
MUST be scanned for viruses before use.
Cellular Phones, Beepers and Personal Digital Assistants (pda) All cell phones,
beepers and personal digital assistants (pda) must be turned off or in silent mode.
Under no circumstances should a cell phone or beeper sound during class. If a cell
phone or beeper does sound during class the student may be asked to leave for the
remainder of the period. The only exception to this rule includes peace officers, EMT,
Students must abide by the Paris Junior College internet use policy which is available
online. The policy states that “users are not allowed to use the internet for illegal or
offensive activities.”


11375.
Academic Honesty

Services for disciplinary action such as dismissal from the college. For detailed
information on Academic Honesty, refer to the College Catalog.
ADA Statement


Term: Fall 903-782-0722
Course # (ELMT 2433)

Course Title (Industrial Electronics)
Course Description
A study of devices, circuits, and systems primarily used in automated manufacturing
and/or process control including computer controls and interfacing between mechanical,
electrical, and electronic, and computer equipment. Presentation of programming
schemes.
Prerequisite(s):

Text: Electrical Motor Controls - Rockis/Mazur 4th edition
Lab: Experiments for... (above text) - Rockis/Mazur (NEW ONLY) \4th edition
Program Outcomes
how they function as a system
Course Outcomes
The student will describe how electronic input and output circuits are used to control
automated manufacturing and/or process systems; identify basic elements used for
input, output, timing, and control; define how programmable electronic systems use
input data to alter output responses; troubleshoot a representative system; and
demonstrate how system operation can be altered with software programming.
Learning Objectives
1. Electrical Tools, Instruments, and Safety. Industrial Electrical Symbols, and Line Diagrams.
2. Introduction to Logic as Applied to Line Diagrams and Basic Control Circuits.
3. AC Manual Contactors and Motor Starters. Magnetism and Magnetic Solenoids. AC/DC
Contactors and Magnetic Motor Starters.
4. Time Delay and Logic Applied to More Complex Line Diagrams and Control Circuits.
5. Power and Distribution Systems, Transformers, Switchboards, Panelboards, Motor Control
Centers and Busways.
6. Solid State and Electromechanical Relays.
7. Applications and Installation of Control Devices.
8. AC Reduced voltage Starters. Accelerating and Decelerating Methods and Circuits.
9. Preventative Maintenance and Troubleshooting Techniques and Applications.

Course Schedule
Week # 1 - Electrical Quantities and Circuits
Week # 2 - Electrical Tools and Test Instruments and Electrical Safety
Week # 4 - Electrical Symbols and Diagrams
Week # 5 - Control Logic
Week # 6 - Solenoids, DC Generators, and DC Motors
Week # 7 - AC Generators, Transformers, and AC Motors
Week # 8 - Power Distribution Systems
Week # 9 - Contactors and Magnetic Motor Starters
Week # 10 - AC and DC Motor Drives and Control Devices
Week # 11 - Reversing Motor Circuits
Week # 12 - Solid-State Devices and System Integration
Week # 13 - Timing and Counting Functions
Week # 15- Programmable Controllers and Preventive and Predictive Maintenance Systems
Week # 16 – Final Exam

Course Policies
30% : Unit Tests (no-makeup’s) 90 –100 is an “A”
20% : Labs / Workbook Exercises 80 – 90 is a “B”
50% : Final Exam 70 – 80 is a “C”
Make-up Exams: If you miss an exam without prior approval of the instructor, you will
be required to write a 5 page essay before you will be given the exam.

ADA Statement



Term: Fall 903-782-0722

Course Description
schemes.
Prerequisite(s):

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

Course Schedule

Course Policies
50% : Final Exam 70 – 80 is a “C”

ADA Statement



Term: Fall 903-782-0722

Course Description
schemes.
Prerequisite(s):

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives

Course Schedule

Course Policies
50% : Final Exam 70 – 80 is a “C”

ADA Statement



Term: Fall 903-782-0722

Course Title (Troubleshooting Industrial Electronics)
Course Description
In-depth coverage of electronic systems, maintenance, troubleshooting, and repair.
Topics include symptom identification, proper repair procedures, repair checkout,
preventive maintenance. Emphasis on safety and proper use of test equipment. May be
offered as a capstone course.
Prerequisite(s): 2433

Text: Electrical Troubleshooting Electrical/Electronic Systems 3rd ed. - Mazur / Proctor
ISBN # 978-0-8269-1791-1
Lab: Electrical Troubleshooting Electrical/Electronic Systems Workbook 3rd ed. (NEW
ONLY) – Mazur/Proctor 978-0-8269-1793-0
Program Outcomes
Develop the thought processes necessary to become an effective troubleshooter for
motor control circuits.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
1. Troubleshoot Electrical/Electronic Systems.
2. Create and use Troubleshooting Flow Charts/Thought Processes.
3. Use Electrical Tools and Instruments Safely.

4. Apply Industrial Electrical Symbols, and Line Diagrams.

5. Troubleshoot Power and Distribution Systems, Transformers, Switchboards, Panel
boards, Motor Control Centers and Busways.
6. Troubleshoot Solid State and Electromechanical Relays.
7. Troubleshoot Applications and Installation of Control Devices.
8. Assess Variable Frequency Drives.
Course Schedule


Course Policies
50% : Final Exam 70 – 80 is a “C”
for viruses before use. CLASSES will start at prescribed times and the door will be
locked and make-ups will be at the discretion of the instructor. CELL PHONE USE will
not be allowed in class. If you have one with you it must be turned off or if it rings
during class it will be confiscated. If you are emergency personnel turn your pager,
beeper or cell phone on silent or vibrate. If you have an emergency please let your
instructor know and we will work with you. Cell phones, ect. WILL not be allowed during
a test. Disruptive students will be ask to leave and the police will be called if necessary.

ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Patrick M. O’Connor

Term: 101S 903-782-0283
Section: 02 poconnor@parisjc.edu
ELMT-2441
Electro-Mechanical Systems
Course Description
Credits: SCH = 3 lecture and2 laboratory hours per week, from approved course list
Prerequisite(s): RBTC 1401

No textbook is required for this course. There will be handouts.
Program Outcomes
Insert here
Course Outcomes
This course is a study in advanced programming in RSLogix 500 on an industrial level
motion control trainer. The student will be introduced to ControlLogix and programming
in RSLogix 5000. Remote IO, and Networking between ControlLogix Controllers. Basic
print reading is also covered. PID theory is discussed.
Learning Objectives
The student will use RSLogix 500 to program an industrial conveyor system to perform
several different operations. This is a self-paced project based on previous attendance
in an RSLogix 500 course. The project will simulate the real world industrial
environment where the technician must program a system to perform certain functions
in the proper sequence.
The student will learn to configure and program RSLogix 5000 on the ControlLogix
platform. Programs will be written and verified on a ControlLogix simulator trainer. The
trainer will include remote IO capability and network options for more complex systems.
The student will understand the basic navigation and cross referencing of ANSI prints.
Course Schedule
Week 1 – Introductions, Syllabus Review, Course Objectives, Grading, Class Schedule,
Homework, Tests, Programs, Communications Drivers, Final Exam, Intro to Hardware

Week 2 – Available Network Topologies, Software Overview (RSLogix 5000, RSLinx,

ControlFLASH, RSNetWorx), Communications Drivers, Homework Due (Lessons 1-3)
Week 3 – Adding Local IO, Program Structure, Program Execution, Download/Upload, Basic
Editing, Programming Exercises, Homework Due (Lessons 4-6)
Week 4 – Tags, Aliases, Arrays, Bit Instructions, Timer Instructions, Counter Instructions,
Programming Exercises, Homework Due (Lessons 7-9)
Week 5 – Test #1
Week 6 - Instructions (Math/Compute, Move/Mask, Program Control, Sequencer), Programming

Exercises, Homework Due (Lessons 10-12)
Week 7 – Remote IO, Ethernet, ControlNet, Scheduling a Network, Program Exercise,

Homework Due (Lessons 13-15)
Week 8 – Messaging, Ethernet, ControlNet, Programming Exercises, Homework Due (Lessons

16-18)
Week 9 – Test #2
Week 10 – Documenting and Searching, CTRL+F, Quick Search, Cross Reference, Search and
Find Exercises
Week 11 – Process Flow Control (PID Loops); Bit Tracing
Week 12 – Producer/Consumer Model, Ethernet, ControlNet, Programming Exercises
Week 13 – Test #3
Week 14 – Print Reading; Basic System Wiring Concepts; All outstanding assignments due
Week 15 – Final Exam Review
Week 16 – Final Exam
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE/DROP
Students are expected to be present at each class meeting for the entire session. After
the second absence (first on night classes) the instructor has the option of dropping a
student from the course in accordance with the college policies. If for some reason, you
are unable to complete the course discuss it with the instructor. Do not just quit coming
to class. Students who wish to drop must initiate the drop themselves or receive a grade

of “F.”
POLICIES
departmental computers. All external media used on computers outside the department

11375.
Cellular Phones, Beepers and Personal Digital Assistants (pda)
All cell phones, beepers and personal digital assistants (pda) must
be turned off or in silent mode. Under no circumstances should a
cell phone or beeper sound during class. If a cell phone or beeper
does sound during class the student my be asked to leave for the
remainder of the period. The only exception to this rule includes
peace officers, EMT, EMS, or other emergency personnel, and their
devices should be in silent mode.

Improper use of the Internet on any PJC computer will not be tolerated. Visiting sites
containing pornographic materials or other inappropriate content will result in the
student being asked to voluntarily remove themselves from the course. If the site
includes child pornography, the student will be prosecuted.
ACADEMIC HONESTY
ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-026
Course ELMT 2480

Course Description

No Text Required
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
by the instructor
Course Policies
Grading:

Attendance/Drop



11375.
Academic Honesty

ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-026
Course ELMT 2481

Course Description

No Text Required
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
by the instructor
Course Policies
Grading:

Attendance/Drop



11375.
Academic Honesty

ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Faculty Brad Bolton
College Year: 2010-2011 Office WTC 1042
Term: 101S Office 903.782.0754
Section: 01 bbolton@parisjc.edu
Course # EMSP 1160

Course Title Clinical Basic – Emergency Medical
Technology/Technician
Course Description
A health-related work-based learning experience that enable s the student to apply
specialized occupational theory, skills, and concepts.
TSI Requirement: Not subject to TSI requirements.

Limmer/Okeefe, (2009). Brady’s Emergency Care, (11th ed.) Pearson Prentice Hall.
ISBN: 0-13-507467-3
Program Outcomes
1 Upon completion of the program, the graduate will administer appropriate
emergency medical care based on assessment findings of a patient's condition.
2. Upon completion of the program, the graduate will demonstrate appropriate
documentation of all required aspects of an EMS run.
3. Upon completion of the program, the graduate will lift, move, position and otherwise
handle the patient to minimize discomfort and prevent further injury.
4. Upon completion of the program, the graduate will demonstrate personal behavior
and attitudes consistent with employer expectations and professional standards.
Course Outcomes
The student will:
1. Apply the theory, concepts and skills involving specialized materials, equipment,
procedures, regulations, laws, and interactions within and among political, economic,
environmental, social, and legal systems associated with the particular occupation and the
business/industry;
2. Demonstrate legal and ethical behavior, safety practices, interpersonal and
teamwork skills, communicating in the applicable language of the occupation and
the business or industry.
Learning Objectives
At the completion of the program, the EMT student will be able to:
Course # EMSP 1160.01 – Brad Bolton Page 1 of 11

C:\Users\ElaPit\Documents\Syllabi for 101s\Word to convert to PDF\EMSP1160 01 101s.doc
1. Understand his or her roles and responsibilities within an EMS system, and how
these roles and responsibilities differ from other levels of providers.
2. Understand and value the importance of personal wellness in EMS and serve as a
healthy role model for peers.
3. Integrate the implementation of primary injury prevention activities as an effective
way to reduce death, disabilities and health care costs.
4. Understand the legal issues that impact decisions made in the out-of-hospital
environment.
5. Understand the role that ethics plays in decision making in the out-of-hospital
environment.
6. Apply the general concepts of pathophysiology for the assessment and management
of emergency patients.
7. Integrate pathophysiological principles of pharmacology and the assessment
findings to formulate a field impression and implement a pharmacologic
management plan.
8. Integrate the principles of therapeutic communication to effectively communicate
with any patient while providing care.
9. Integrate the physiological, psychological, and sociological changes throughout
human development with assessment and communication strategies for patients of
all ages.
10. Establish and/ or maintain a patent airway, oxygenate, and ventilate a patient.
11. Use the appropriate techniques to obtain a medical history from a patient.
12. Integrate the principles of history taking and techniques of physical exam to perform
a patient assessment.
13. Apply a process of clinical decision making to use the assessment findings to help
form a field impression.
14. Follow an accepted format for dissemination of patient information in verbal form,
either in person or over the radio.
15. Effectively document the essential elements of patient assessment, care and
transport.
16. Integrate pathophysiological principles and assessment findings to formulate a field
impression and implement the treatment plan for the patient with shock or
hemorrhage.
17. Integrate pathophysiological principles and the assessment findings to formulate a
field impression and implement the treatment plan for the patient with soft tissue
trauma.
field impression and implement the management plan for the patient with a burn
injury.
field impression and implement a treatment plan for the trauma patient with a
suspected head injury.
20. ntegrate pathophysiological principles and the assessment findings to formulate a
field impression and implement a treatment plan for the patient with a suspected
spinal injury.

field impression and implement a treatment plan for a patient with a thoracic injury.
field impression and implement the treatment plan for the patient with suspected
abdominal trauma.
field impression and implement the treatment plan for the patient with a
musculoskeletal injury.
24 Integrate pathophysiological principles and assessment findings to formulate a field
impression and implement the treatment plan for the patient with respiratory
problems.
impression and implement the treatment plan for the patient with cardiovascular
disease.
impression and implement the treatment plan for the patient with a neurological
problem.
impression and implement a treatment plan for the patient with an endocrine
problem.
impression and implement a treatment plan for the patient with an allergic or
anaphylactic reaction.
impression and implement the treatment plan for the patient with a gastroenterologic
problem.
field impression and implement a treatment plan for the patient with a renal or
urologic problem.
impression and implement a treatment plan for the patient with a toxic exposure.
32. Integrate the pathophysiological principles of the hematopoietic system to formulate
a field impression and implement a treatment plan.
impression and implement the treatment plan for the patient with an environmentally
induced or exacerbated medical or traumatic condition.
impression and implement a management plan for the patient with infectious and
communicable diseases.
35. Describe and demonstrate safe, empathetic competence in caring for patients with
behavioral emergencies.
36. Utilize gynecological principles and assessment findings to formulate a field
impression and implement the management plan for the patient experiencing a
gynecological emergency.
37. Apply an understanding of the anatomy and physiology of the female reproductive
system to the assessment and management of a patient experiencing normal or
abnormal labor.

impression and implement the treatment plan for the neonatal patient.
impression and implement the treatment plan for the pediatric patient.
40. Integrate the pathophysiological principles and the assessment findings to formulate
and implement a treatment plan for the geriatric patient.
41. Integrate the assessment findings to formulate a field impression and implement a
treatment plan for the patient who has sustained abuse or assault.
42. Integrate pathophysiological and psychosocial principles to adapt the assessment
and treatment plan for diverse patients and those who face physical, mental, social
and financial challenges.
a field impression and implement a treatment plan for the acute deterioration of a
chronic care patient.
44. Integrate the principles of general incident management and multiple casualty
incident (MCI) management techniques in order to function effectively at major
incidents.
45. Integrate the principles of rescue awareness and operations to safely rescue a
patient from water, hazardous atmospheres, trenches, highways, and hazardous
terrain.
46. Evaluate hazardous materials emergencies, call for appropriate resources, and work
in the cold zone.
46. Awareness of the human hazard of crime and violence and the safe operation at
crime scenes and other emergencies.
Course Schedule
64 hours EMS (MICU) with 8 emergency runs
24 hours ER
8 hours labor and delivery

Determination of Course Grade:
Module exams grades will be averaged to equal ¾ of the ongoing average grade.
Homework and quizzes will equal ¼ of average grade. The comprehensive final
examination will count as a module exam. Any malpractices demonstrated during
clinical / internship will result in a failure of this course. A passing evaluation in the skills
component of the course is required for a passing grade. A failure in skills will result in
failure of the course – 2 attempts are provided. Any special work must be turned in
on time. One point per day will be subtracted from module exam average for each late
paper.
An overall grade average of at least 80% must be maintained in the class at all times.
Any test grade below 70% is considered a failing grade. The student will then get one
retest on which a grade of 70% or higher must be achieved. If the student fails a retest
then the student will not be released for the state exam and will not be allowed to
complete the clinical internship. You will be allowed to stay in the classroom portion of

the program for college credit if you wish.
Classroom reasons for not being released for the National Registry exam are listed
below:
1. Overall grade average falling below 80%
2. Repeated failure of skills
3. Failure of any retest
Grade Range
“A” 90 – 100
“B” 80 –89
“C” 70-79
“D” 60-69
“F” Below 60
Course Policies
Unsatisfactory Progress In A Course
Students who have unsatisfactory classroom performance will be given written
notification and a plan for remediation will be completed.
Clinical performance needing improvement or clinical performance that is unsatisfactory

will be specified in the documentation. If the student does not show improvement, the
probation status will be implemented. A student may be placed on probation at the
faculty team's decision without preliminary remediation.
Probationary Status:
Probationary criteria will be written in the form of behavioral objectives and recorded
Probationary Status". A time frame for review of status will be specified. The terms of
probation will be discussed with the student and validated by the signatures of the
course instructors and the student. At the end of the specified term of probation, the
student's status is reviewed by the course faculty. This review will be recorded. If the
probation criteria has been met, the student's probation is lifted. Failure to meet
probationary criteria will result in further disciplinary action up to and including failure
from the program. Probation will be contained within the course.
Withdrawal
A student may withdraw from an EMS course by using the procedure outlined in the
Paris Junior College catalog following counsel with his/her instructors and/or the
Director of the EMS Program. After withdrawing from an EMS course, a student must
reapply for admission to the EMS Program in order to enroll in any subsequent EMS
course.
The student must initiate the withdrawal procedure with the team leader prior to the
withdrawal date or a grade of "F" will be recorded for the total semester hours of the
dropped EMS course.

Dismissal
Any student may be dismissed from the program without a probationary period if the
student shows gross negligence, unsafe practices, lack of personal integrity, breach of
patient confidentiality, or commits a criminal or immoral act. Dismissal from the program
will be decided by the faculty, Director of Health Occupations and the Dean of Workforce
Education.
Personal integrity as well as concern for the welfare of patients entrusted to our care are
personal attributes that are absolutely essential for those entering the EMS profession.
Actions taken and attitudes expressed while in the student role are considered
indicative of behaviors to be expected of the graduate. The student will be given the
opportunity to discuss the incident(s) with the course team faculty.
Grounds For Immediate Dismissal From Program

A student may be subject to immediate dismissal from the EMS program, and failure of
the course in the following situations.
a. Failure to maintain client safety resulting in injury to the patient.
b. A medication error which results in injury to the patient.
c. The practice of academic dishonesty; such as, preparation for clinical and cheating
on tests or written assignments (both parties), making false entries in records
pertaining to the giving of medications, treatments, or nursing care, or failing to do so
under circumstances that indicate a disregard for patient safety or welfare.
d. The use of alcohol, illegal drugs, or misuse of prescription or any other drugs, during
school activities or on school property; or reporting to class/clinical under the
influence of alcohol or illegal drugs.
e. Appropriating, in connection with the practice of EMS, medication, supplies,
equipment, or personal items of the patient, employer, or any other person or entity.
(This includes accepting remuneration, gifts, etc.)
Procedure for Dismissal

STEP 1. Dismissal from the program will be initiated by the faculty team with prior
notification of the Director of Health Occupations. If the director is absent, the
Dean of Workforce Education must be notified prior to dismissal.
STEP 2. The team leader and instructor will meet with the student to inform him/her that
they are initiating the procedure. If the team leader is the instructor, another
faculty member will be present.
STEP 3. If the student wishes to contest this decision, he/she must file a Report of
Grievance with the team leader or Director of Health Occupation.
Grievance Procedure
Problems of an individual or of a personal nature should be handled in the following
ways: A student may formally express dissatisfaction with his/her progress in the EMS
Program. Grade disputes should be resolved at the lowest level possible (i.e., the
instructor and student). Recognizing that this is not always possible, the following

procedure has been adopted as policy for resolving grade and course progress
disputes. The steps have been defined to facilitate resolution at the lowest level and in
that interest; the order of steps will at no time be violated. The grievance procedure
must be initiated within two (2) working days of the incident by which time the student
must initiate a "Report of Grievance" with the team leader or Director of Health
Occupations if the team leader is not available..
STEP 1. The student should request an appointment to discuss the case with the faculty
and the team leader of the course. If a satisfactory decision still has not been
reached, the student may request to meet with the Director of the program.
STEP 2. If resolution of the grievance has not been reached under the guidance of the
Director, the student may request an appointment with representative
members of the faculty-as-a-whole. (The definition of faculty-as-a-whole: a
representative group of the EMS and a neutral party. After presentation of the
facts to the faculty-as-a-whole, the faculty vote will be taken by ballot and
tallied by the Director of the program and the neutral party. Failure will require
a two-thirds majority vote. The conference will be recorded on tape and on a
Grievance Conference Report form, a copy of which goes to the student and
the original placed in the Confidential File.
Director, the student may request an appointment with the Dean of Workforce
Education to present his/her case.
At any time during the grievance procedure should the student desire an attorney
present, he/she must notify the Director of the program at least 24 hours before a
scheduled meeting.
Attendance/Tardy Policy
Attendance is of significant importance in the Emergency Medical Technician program in

order to meet the objectives necessary for successful completion of the course. Absences
must be for emergencies only and must not exceed the maximum hours designated at the
beginning of the semester. The instructor or clinical agency must be notified prior to the
absence, or as soon as possible in accident situations. Any assignments missed because
of an absence or tardy is due on the assignments due date regardless of the absence. It is
the student’s responsibility to contact the instructor and make arrangements to receive the
assignments and complete them on the due date. Students who fail to take responsibility
for their assignments will receive a 0. This policy applies to major exams, quizzes and
home work. Any exceptions to this will be handled on a case by case basis. Absences and
tardiness without notification demonstrate lack of responsibility and may result in dismissal
or other disciplinary action.
Clinical And Field Internship

The purpose of the clinical and field internship is to provide the student with a progression
of increasing patient care responsibilities in order to proceed from observational
experience to working as a member of a team.
Students are expected to demonstrate achievement of all critical clinical objectives in the

hospital clinical area and field internship under direct supervision of a preceptor. Failure to
achieve all objectives will be handled on an individual basis but may result in failure of the
course. Specific written objectives will be required for each experience. Attire or uniforms
appropriate for the various agencies will be specified.
In all agency experiences, students should keep in mind that they are there for specific
learning experiences and are guests of the various agencies. Any behavior other than
complete professionalism may result in dismissal from the program. They are acting in the
capacity of students from the PJC Emergency Medical Technician Program and should
conduct themselves accordingly. If problems arise in the agencies, the instructor should be
notified immediately.
Scheduling Of Clinical Rotations

The clinical rotation sheets will be available for sign up in class. A copy of the rotation
sheet will be sent to the designated clinical site and the coordinator will retain the
original. All assignments will be made before the student reports to the clinical site.
Rules And Regulations At The Clinical Site

The student will be assigned to a preceptor by the charge nurse or other designated
person at the clinical site. Upon arrival at the clinical site, the student should report
directly to the person in charge. While at the clinical site the student shall always have
the following on their person; BCLS card, current level EMS certification card, and valid
driver’s license. The student shall wear his/her name badge for identification and
indicate the level of training to the person in charge. During the EMS rotation, students
must remain with the preceptors. Wandering off to other areas of the site or leaving for
lunch is not permissible. Once you are at the site, you are expected to stay at the site
until your shift is complete. Students can only perform skills in which they are checked
off on or certified to do while at the clinical site. Students are not allowed to go on out of
town, hospital to hospital transfers unless the paramedic attending the patient needs
assistance during transport. Shift supervisors must give expressed permission for
students to go on out of town transfers. While at the EMS internship rotation, the
student is expected to make every call that his/her preceptor makes unless given
permission by the preceptor. If you miss more than two calls during the course you
may be dismissed from the class. If you miss a call, remain at the EMS station until the
crew gets back. Following the ambulance in your personal vehicle is a violation of the
law and of PJC policies and procedures and punishable as such. While on the
ambulance, students will ride in the patient compartment at all times unless special
circumstances exist at which time the preceptor will decide where the student should
ride.
Documentation Of Records
It is the responsibility of the student to bring the appropriate forms to the clinical site.
Before the student leaves the clinical site for that particular rotation, all documentation is
to be completed. The preceptor will not verify and sign off any documentation after the
student has left the clinical site for that rotation. Absolutely no clinical forms will be
signed for any rotation except the rotation just completed. Students attempting to have

clinical sheets signed at any other time will be reported to the EMS Coordinator.
Attempting to falsify a clinical rotation will result in immediate dismissal from the course.
Dress Code
Dress in the classroom and skills lab should be comfortable; however, shorts or revealing
garments should not be worn. This is a distraction in the learning environment. EMTs and
Paramedics do not wear short shorts and low cut shirts while on duty. You will be
performing the same skills in the classroom as you do in the streets. Appearance of the
student in the clinical and field internship setting is of the utmost importance. Listed below
are partial guidelines to be followed:
1. Cleanliness and neat personal appearance are essential to the EMT.
2. Hair should be neat, clean, and worn in a conservative style that doesn't hang in the
face. Conservative combs and barrettes are acceptable. Men should be clean-shaven
with a neatly clipped established mustache and/or beard will be allowed.
3. Fingernails should be clean and short.
4. A watch with a second hand should be worn. Novelty watches are not appropriate.
5. Use of perfumes, colognes, or scented lotions should be avoided.
6. Purses and other valuable items should not be brought into the hospital or clinical
setting.
7. Students may smoke in designated smoking areas. There should be no smoking in
patient care areas or in the EMT classroom. If a student smokes, he/she should not
have an odor offensive to patients or classmates.
8. Jewelry in moderation; Absolutely no piercing jewelry in any part of the exposed body
including the ears. (Example Nose rings, eye rings or tongue rings)
9. No alcohol consumption or controlled/non-controlled substance abuse tolerated.
10. A name badge will be issued to each student to wear during clinical rotations. If you
lose this name badge, it must be replaced before doing any more clinical. A student
without a name badge will be sent home from clinical. The cost of replacing the name
badge is $5.
11. The clinical uniform shall only be worn during times directly connected to clinical or
classroom. Wearing the clinical uniform at any other time without expressed
permission of the instructor is a violation of the EMS program policies and
procedures and may result in disciplinary action including immediate dismissal from
the course.
Clinical Uniform: White shirt, navy or black pants (EMS pants are
acceptable…denim is NOT!); black belt and shoes; white uniform shirt purchased in
bookstore; student nametag; stethoscope; pen light; scissors; any deviation from
clinical uniform is unacceptable.
12. Deviations from dress code are unacceptable.
HEALTH POLICIES
Since good health is essential for the EMT, the following policies have been adopted:
1. A release from the student's physician will be required after hospitalization, any
surgical procedure or any conditions that will affect clinical practice.
2. A student is expected to report any condition that will affect his clinical practice. A

student will demonstrate good judgment by not reporting to the clinical setting while
experiencing overt signs and symptoms of an infectious process that would endanger
patient's well being.
3. Students who, in the opinion of the EMT coordinator and/or instructor, are showing
symptoms of physical or emotional illness may be required to have an appropriate
examination from a physician with a report submitted to the Coordinator.
4. Students diagnosed with a communicable disease must notify the coordinator.
Liability Insurance
In addition to regular tuition and fees, students will be assessed a fee for liability insurance
to cover them as EMS students. This insurance is mandatory.
Personal Illness Or Injury

Paris Junior College will not assume the responsibility for any illness or injury of a student
while engaged in any activity of any aspect of the Emergency Medical Technician
Program. Any medical expenses incurred during the EMS program will be the
responsibility of the student. The instructors reserve the right to seek medical help for any
student if they feel it is necessary. It is recommended the student carry personal medical
insurance. Hunt County Regional EMS requires all students to carry personal medical
insurance in order to ride as a student with their services. All students riding with Hunt
County Regional EMS are required to show proof of medical coverage.
Overall Grade
Quizzes may be given at any time at the discretion of the faculty. The EMT course is
composed of three distinct sections: lecture, skills lab, and clinical rotations. The final
grade in this course will be a composite of these elements. None of these components is
expendable, therefore, all must be completed satisfactorily prior to challenging the state
certification exam. Each element has its own set of unique performance standards. A
composite score of less than 80% or a failure of any subdivision is considered to be a
failure of the course.
Required Materials
Designated, workbook and student packet
The approved uniform
Stethoscope
One pair of shears
Penlight
Liability Insurance
ADA Statement


Term: 101S Office 903.782.0754
Course # EMSP 1160

Course Title Clinical Basic – Emergency Medical
Technology/Technician
Course Description

ISBN: 0-13-507467-3
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The student will:
environmental, social, and legal systems associated with the particular occupation and the
business/industry;
teamwork skills, communicating in the applicable language of the occupation and
the business or industry.
Learning Objectives

environment.
environment.
management plan.
all ages.
transport.
hemorrhage.
trauma.
injury.
spinal injury.

abdominal trauma.
problems.
disease.
problem.
problem.
problem.
urologic problem.
abnormal labor.

incidents.
terrain.
in the cold zone.
Course Schedule
64 hours EMS (MICU) with 8 emergency runs
24 hours ER
8 hours labor and delivery

paper.

below:
Grade Range
“A” 90 – 100
“B” 80 –89
“C” 70-79
“D” 60-69
“F” Below 60
Course Policies

Withdrawal
course.
dropped EMS course.

Dismissal
Education.


Grievance Procedure

scheduled meeting.





ride.

Dress Code
setting.
badge is $5.
the course.
HEALTH POLICIES

Liability Insurance

Overall Grade
Required Materials
Stethoscope
One pair of shears
Penlight
Liability Insurance
ADA Statement


Term: 101S Office 903.782.0754
Course # EMSP 1161

Course Title Paramedic Clinical I
Course Description
Prerequisite(s): EMSP 1501, EMSP 1160

1. Mosby’s Paramedic Textbook Revised 3rd Edition, International Trauma Life
Support, ACLS and EKG ISBN: 978-0-323-04690-9
2. Workbook for Mosby’s Paramedic Textbook Revised 3rd Edition, International
Trauma Life Support, ACLS and EKG ISBN: 978-0-323-04690-9
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
As outlined in the learning plan, the student will:
environmental, social, and legal systems associated with the particular occupation
and the business/industry;
teamwork skills, communicating in the applicable language of the occupation and the
business or industry.
Learning Objectives
Course # EMSP 1161 – Brad Bolton Page 1 of 8

1 At the completion of this unit, the paramedic student will be able to establish and
manage an IV on Patient
2 At the completion of this unit, the paramedic student will be able to correctly perform
a patient assessment on a patient.
3 At the completion end of this unit, the paramedic student will be able to correctly and
safely administer medications.
4 At the end of this unit, the paramedic student will be able successfully intubate a
patient via an ET tube
Course Schedule
80 clinical hours:
Emergency Department – 72 hours
Anesthesia – 8 hours

Overall grade for this course is based on evaluation and feedback from preceptors and
patient documentation evaluated by the instructor. Periodic feedback will be given to the
class pertaining to documentation at different points in the class. The student will be
evaluated after each rotation by his/her preceptor. The appropriate forms shall be
completed by the preceptor prior to the student leaving the clinical site. Failure to
complete the total hours for this class will result in failure of the class.
Grade Range
“A” 90 – 100
“B” 80 –89
“C” 70-79
“D” 60-69
“F” Below 60
Course Policies


Withdrawal
course.
dropped EMS course.
Dismissal
Education.



Grievance Procedure
scheduled meeting.






ride.
Dress Code
setting.
badge is $5.
the course.

HEALTH POLICIES
Liability Insurance

Overall Grade
Required Materials

Stethoscope
One pair of shears
Penlight
Liability Insurance
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Faculty Blaine Jones
Term: 101S Office 903.782.0735
Section: 01 bjones@parisjc.edu
Course # EMSP 1356

Course Title Patient Assessment and Airway Management
Course Description
A detailed study of the knowledge and skills required to perform patient assessment and
airway management.

1. Mosby’s Paramedic Textbook Revised 3rd Edition, International Trauma Life Support,
ACLS and EKG ISBN: 978-0-323-04690-9
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
At the completion of this module, the student will be able to:
1. Take a proper history and perform a comprehensive physical exam on any patient;
2. Develop a patient care plan;
3. Communicate with others;
4. Establish and/or maintain a patient airway, oxygenate,
5. Ventilate a patient.
Learning Objectives
1 At the completion of this unit, the paramedic student will be able to establish and/ or
maintain a patent airway, oxygenate, and ventilate a patient.
Course # EMSP 1356 – Blaine Jones Page 1 of 9

2 At the completion of this unit, the paramedic student will be able to use the
appropriate techniques to obtain a medical history from a patient.
3 At the completion end of this unit, the paramedic student will be able to explain the
pathophysiological significance of physical exam findings.
4 At the end of this unit, the paramedic student will be able to integrate the principles
of history taking and techniques of physical exam to perform a patient assessment.
5 At the end of this unit, the paramedic student will be able to apply a process of
clinical decision making to use the assessment findings to help form a field
impression.
6. At the completion of this unit, the paramedic student will be able to follow an
accepted format for dissemination of patient information in verbal form, either in
person or over the radio.
7 At the completion of this unit, the paramedic student will be able to effectively
document the essential elements of patient assessment, care and transport.
Course Schedule
Week 1: EMS Systems, Roles and Responsibilities, Well Being of the Paramedic,
Illness and Injury Prevention, Ethics, Medical Legal Issues
Week 2: Anatomy and Physiology
Week 3: Anatomy and Physiology continued
Week 4: EXAM, Pathophysiology
Week 5: Pathophysiology continued
Week 6: Pathophysiology continued, EXAM
Week: 7: Therapeutic Communication, Life Span Development, EXAM
Week 8: Airway and Ventilation, Basic and ET Tubes
Week 9: Airway and Ventilation, Dual Lume, and Airway Skills
Week 10: Airway Exam, Patient Assessment
Week 11: Patient Assessment continued, EXAM
Week 12: Clinical Decision Making, Communications, Documentation, EXAM
Week 13: Pharmacology including IV Fluids
Week 14: Pharmacology, Venous Access, Medication Administration
Week 15: Pharmacology continued
Week 16: EXAM, Medication Skills, FINAL EXAM

paper.

below:
Grade Range
“A” 90 – 100
“B” 80 –89
“C” 70-79
“D” 60-69
“F” Below 60
Course Policies

Withdrawal
course.

dropped EMS course.
Dismissal
Education.


Grievance Procedure

scheduled meeting.





ride.

Dress Code
setting.
badge is $5.
the course.
HEALTH POLICIES

Liability Insurance

Overall Grade
Required Materials
Stethoscope
One pair of shears
Penlight
Liability Insurance
ADA Statement


Term: 101S Office 903.782.0735
Course # EMSP 1438

Course Title Introduction to Advanced Practice
Course Description
An exploration of the foundations necessary for mastery of the advanced topics of
clinical practice out of the hospital.

ACLS and EKG ISBN: 978-0-323-04690-9
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
At the completion of this module, the student will understand the roles and
responsibilities of a paramedic within the EMS system;
1. Apply the basic concepts of developmental, pathophysiology and pharmacology to
the assessment and management of emergency patients;
2. Be able to properly administer medications; communicate effectively with patients;
3. Understand the medical/legal and ethical issues relating to EMS practice as well as
the issues impacting the well being of the paramedic.
Learning Objectives
1 At the completion of this unit, the paramedic student will understand his or her roles

and responsibilities within an EMS system, and how these roles and responsibilities
differ from other levels of providers.
2 At the completion of this unit, the paramedic student will understand and value the
importance of personal wellness in EMS and serve as a healthy role model for
peers.
3 At the completion of this unit, the paramedic student will be able to integrate the
implementation of primary injury prevention activities as an effective way to reduce
death, disabilities and health care costs.
4 At the completion of this unit, the paramedic student will understand the legal issues
that impact decisions made in the out-of-hospital environment.
5 At the completion of this unit, the paramedic student will understand the role that
ethics plays in decision making in the out-of-hospital environment.
6 At the completion of this unit, the paramedic student will be able to apply the general
concepts of pathophysiology for the assessment and management of emergency
patients.
7 At the completion of this unit, the paramedic student will be able to integrate
pathophysiological principles of pharmacology and the assessment findings to
formulate a field impression and implement a pharmacologic management plan.
8 At the completion of this unit, the paramedic student will be able to safely and
precisely access the venous circulation and administer medications.
principles of therapeutic communication to effectively communicate with any patient
while providing care.
physiological, psychological, and sociological changes throughout human
development with assessment and communication strategies for patients of all ages.
Course Schedule

clinical / internship will result in a failure of this course. A passing evaluation in the
skills component of the course is required for a passing grade. A failure in skills will
result in failure of the course – 2 attempts are provided. Any special work must be
turned in
on time. One point per day will be subtracted from module exam average for each
late paper.
retest on which a grade of 70% or higher must be achieved. If the student fails a
retest then the student will not be released for the state exam and will not be allowed
to complete the clinical internship. You will be allowed to stay in the classroom portion
of the program for college credit if you wish.
below:
Grade Range
“A” 90 – 100
“B” 80 –89
“C” 70-79
“D” 60-69
“F” Below 60
Course Policies
Clinical performance needing improvement or clinical performance that is

unsatisfactory will be specified in the documentation. If the student does not show
improvement, the probation status will be implemented. A student may be placed on
probation at the faculty team's decision without preliminary remediation.

Withdrawal
course.
dropped EMS course.
Dismissal
Education.
Personal integrity as well as concern for the welfare of patients entrusted to our care
are personal attributes that are absolutely essential for those entering the EMS
profession. Actions taken and attitudes expressed while in the student role are
considered indicative of behaviors to be expected of the graduate. The student will be
given the opportunity to discuss the incident(s) with the course team faculty.

A student may be subject to immediate dismissal from the EMS program, and failure
of the course in the following situations.
c. The practice of academic dishonesty; such as, preparation for clinical and
cheating on tests or written assignments (both parties), making false entries in
records pertaining to the giving of medications, treatments, or nursing care, or
failing to do so under circumstances that indicate a disregard for patient safety or
welfare.
d. The use of alcohol, illegal drugs, or misuse of prescription or any other drugs,
during school activities or on school property; or reporting to class/clinical under
the influence of alcohol or illegal drugs.
equipment, or personal items of the patient, employer, or any other person or
entity. (This includes accepting remuneration, gifts, etc.)

notification of the Director of Health Occupations. If the director is absent,
the Dean of Workforce Education must be notified prior to dismissal.
STEP 2. The team leader and instructor will meet with the student to inform him/her
that they are initiating the procedure. If the team leader is the instructor,
another faculty member will be present.
Grievance Procedure
disputes. The steps have been defined to facilitate resolution at the lowest level and
in that interest; the order of steps will at no time be violated. The grievance procedure
STEP 1. The student should request an appointment to discuss the case with the
faculty and the team leader of the course. If a satisfactory decision still has
not been reached, the student may request to meet with the Director of the
program.
STEP 2. If resolution of the grievance has not been reached under the guidance of
the Director, the student may request an appointment with representative
representative group of the EMS and a neutral party. After presentation of
the facts to the faculty-as-a-whole, the faculty vote will be taken by ballot
and tallied by the Director of the program and the neutral party. Failure will
require a two-thirds majority vote. The conference will be recorded on tape
and on a Grievance Conference Report form, a copy of which goes to the
student and the original placed in the Confidential File.
STEP 3. If resolution of the grievance has not been reached under the guidance of
the Director, the student may request an appointment with the Dean of
Workforce Education to present his/her case.
scheduled meeting.
order to meet the objectives necessary for successful completion of the course.
Absences must be for emergencies only and must not exceed the maximum hours

designated at the beginning of the semester. The instructor or clinical agency must be
notified prior to the absence, or as soon as possible in accident situations. Any
assignments missed because of an absence or tardy is due on the assignments due
date regardless of the absence. It is the student’s responsibility to contact the instructor
and make arrangements to receive the assignments and complete them on the due
date. Students who fail to take responsibility for their assignments will receive a 0. This
policy applies to major exams, quizzes and home work. Any exceptions to this will be
handled on a case by case basis. Absences and tardiness without notification
demonstrate lack of responsibility and may result in dismissal or other disciplinary
action.

The purpose of the clinical and field internship is to provide the student with a
progression of increasing patient care responsibilities in order to proceed from
observational experience to working as a member of a team.
hospital clinical area and field internship under direct supervision of a preceptor. Failure
to achieve all objectives will be handled on an individual basis but may result in failure of
the course. Specific written objectives will be required for each experience. Attire or
uniforms appropriate for the various agencies will be specified.
complete professionalism may result in dismissal from the program. They are acting in
the capacity of students from the PJC Emergency Medical Technician Program and
should conduct themselves accordingly. If problems arise in the agencies, the instructor
should be notified immediately.


the following on their person; BCLS card, current level EMS certification card, and
valid driver’s license. The student shall wear his/her name badge for identification and
indicate the level of training to the person in charge. During the EMS rotation,
students must remain with the preceptors. Wandering off to other areas of the site or
leaving for lunch is not permissible. Once you are at the site, you are expected to stay
at the site until your shift is complete. Students can only perform skills in which they
are checked off on or certified to do while at the clinical site. Students are not allowed
to go on out of town, hospital to hospital transfers unless the paramedic attending the

patient needs assistance during transport. Shift supervisors must give expressed
permission for students to go on out of town transfers. While at the EMS internship
rotation, the student is expected to make every call that his/her preceptor makes
unless given permission by the preceptor. If you miss more than two calls during the
course you may be dismissed from the class. If you miss a call, remain at the EMS
station until the crew gets back. Following the ambulance in your personal vehicle is a
violation of the law and of PJC policies and procedures and punishable as such.
While on the ambulance, students will ride in the patient compartment at all times
unless special circumstances exist at which time the preceptor will decide where the
student should ride.
Before the student leaves the clinical site for that particular rotation, all documentation
is to be completed. The preceptor will not verify and sign off any documentation after
the student has left the clinical site for that rotation. Absolutely no clinical forms will be
signed for any rotation except the rotation just completed. Students attempting to
have clinical sheets signed at any other time will be reported to the EMS Coordinator.
Attempting to falsify a clinical rotation will result in immediate dismissal from the
course.
Dress Code
Dress in the classroom and skills lab should be comfortable; however, shorts or
revealing garments should not be worn. This is a distraction in the learning environment.
EMTs and Paramedics do not wear short shorts and low cut shirts while on duty. You
will be performing the same skills in the classroom as you do in the streets. Appearance
of the student in the clinical and field internship setting is of the utmost importance.
Listed below are partial guidelines to be followed:
face. Conservative combs and barrettes are acceptable. Men should be clean-
shaven with a neatly clipped established mustache and/or beard will be allowed.
setting.
8. Jewelry in moderation; Absolutely no piercing jewelry in any part of the exposed
body including the ears. (Example Nose rings, eye rings or tongue rings)
without a name badge will be sent home from clinical. The cost of replacing the

name badge is $5.
procedures and may result in disciplinary action including immediate dismissal
from the course.
acceptable…denim is NOT!); black belt and shoes; white uniform shirt purchased
in bookstore; student nametag; stethoscope; pen light; scissors; any deviation
from clinical uniform is unacceptable.
HEALTH POLICIES
experiencing overt signs and symptoms of an infectious process that would
endanger patient's well being.
Liability Insurance
In addition to regular tuition and fees, students will be assessed a fee for liability
insurance to cover them as EMS students. This insurance is mandatory.

Paris Junior College will not assume the responsibility for any illness or injury of a
student while engaged in any activity of any aspect of the Emergency Medical
Technician Program. Any medical expenses incurred during the EMS program will be
the responsibility of the student. The instructors reserve the right to seek medical help
for any student if they feel it is necessary. It is recommended the student carry personal
medical insurance. Hunt County Regional EMS requires all students to carry personal
medical insurance in order to ride as a student with their services. All students riding
with Hunt County Regional EMS are required to show proof of medical coverage.
Overall Grade

Required Materials
Stethoscope
One pair of shears
Penlight
Liability Insurance
ADA Statement

Term: 101S Office 903.782.0754
Course # EMSP 1501

Course Title Emergency Medical Technician (EMT)
Course Description
Introduction to the level of emergency medical technician (EMT)-Basic. Includes all the
skills necessary to provide emergency medical care at a basic life support level with an
ambulance service or other specialized services.

ISBN: 0-13-507467-3
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The student will:
Learning Objectives

environment.
environment.
management plan.
all ages.
transport.
hemorrhage.
trauma.
injury.
spinal injury.

abdominal trauma.
problems.
disease.
problem.
problem.
problem.
urologic problem.
abnormal labor.

incidents.
terrain.
in the cold zone.
Course Schedule
Week 1: Orientation
Introduction to EMS
Well-Being of EMT
Medical Legal
Week 2: The Human Body
Week 3: Lifting & Moving Patients
Airway Lecture Groups
Baseline Vital Signs
Week 4: Practical
Mechanical Aids to Breathing
Vital Signs/ Sample History
Skill practice
Week 5: Skills Evaluation
Vital Signs
Week 6: Patient Assessment
Practical Lab
Patient Assessment
Week 7: Documentation
Communications

Week 8: General Pharmacology
Respiratory Emergencies
Cardiovascular Emergencies
Week 9: Diabetic Emergencies
Altered Level of Consciousness
Allergies/Poisonings/Overdose
Week 10: Practical Lab
Medications Administration
AED
Week 11: Obstetrics
Gynecological Emergencies
Behavioral Emergencies
Environmental Emergencies
Week 12: Bleeding & Shock
Soft Tissues Injuries
Musculoskeletal Injuries
Head & Spinal Injuries
Infants & Children
Week 13: EMS Operations
Weapons of Mass Destruction
MCI/ICS
HazMat Awareness
Week 14: Practical Lab:
Bandaging
Splinting
Traction Splint
Spinal Immobilization
PASG
Week 15: Skills Evaluation:
Bandaging
Splinting
Traction Splint
PASG
Week 16: Final Exam

paper.

below:
Grade Range
“A” 90 – 100
“B” 80 –89
“C” 70-79
“D” 60-69
“F” Below 60
Course Policies

Withdrawal

course.
dropped EMS course.
Dismissal
Education.

c. The practice of academic dishonesty; such as, preparation for clinical and cheating on
tests or written assignments (both parties), making false entries in records pertaining to
the giving of medications, treatments, or nursing care, or failing to do so under circumstances
that indicate a disregard for patient safety or welfare.
d. The use of alcohol, illegal drugs, or misuse of prescription or any other drugs, during school
activities or on school property; or reporting to class/clinical under the influence of alcohol or
illegal drugs.
e. Appropriating, in connection with the practice of EMS, medication, supplies, equipment, or
personal items of the patient, employer, or any other person or entity. (This includes
accepting remuneration, gifts, etc.)


Grievance Procedure
scheduled meeting.




ride.

Dress Code
setting.
badge is $5.
the course.

HEALTH POLICIES
Liability Insurance

Overall Grade
Required Materials
Stethoscope
One pair of shears
Penlight
Liability Insurance
ADA Statement


Term: 101S Office 903.782.0754
Course # EMSP 1501

Course Title Emergency Medical Technician (EMT)
Course Description
Introduction to the level of emergency medical technician (EMT)-Basic. Includes all the
skills necessary to provide emergency medical care at a basic life support level with an
ambulance service or other specialized services.

ISBN: 0-13-507467-3
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The student will:
Learning Objectives

environment.
environment.
management plan.
all ages.
transport.
hemorrhage.
trauma.
injury.
spinal injury.

abdominal trauma.
problems.
disease.
problem.
problem.
problem.
urologic problem.
abnormal labor.

incidents.
terrain.
in the cold zone.
Course Schedule
Week 1: Orientation
Introduction to EMS
Well-Being of EMT
Medical Legal
Week 2: The Human Body
Week 3: Lifting & Moving Patients
Airway Lecture Groups
Baseline Vital Signs
Week 4: Practical
Vital Signs/ Sample History
Skill practice
Week 5: Skills Evaluation
Vital Signs
Week 6: Patient Assessment
Practical Lab
Patient Assessment
Week 7: Documentation
Communications

Week 8: General Pharmacology
Respiratory Emergencies
Cardiovascular Emergencies
Week 9: Diabetic Emergencies
Altered Level of Consciousness
Allergies/Poisonings/Overdose
Week 10: Practical Lab
Medications Administration
AED
Week 11: Obstetrics
Gynecological Emergencies
Behavioral Emergencies
Environmental Emergencies
Week 12: Bleeding & Shock
Soft Tissues Injuries
Musculoskeletal Injuries
Head & Spinal Injuries
Infants & Children
Week 13: EMS Operations
Weapons of Mass Destruction
MCI/ICS
HazMat Awareness
Week 14: Practical Lab:
Bandaging
Splinting
Traction Splint
PASG
Week 15: Skills Evaluation:
Bandaging
Splinting
Traction Splint
PASG
Week 16: Final Exam

paper.

below:
Grade Range
“A” 90 – 100
“B” 80 –89
“C” 70-79
“D” 60-69
“F” Below 60
Course Policies

Withdrawal

course.
dropped EMS course.
Dismissal
Education.

c. The practice of academic dishonesty; such as, preparation for clinical and cheating on
tests or written assignments (both parties), making false entries in records pertaining to
the giving of medications, treatments, or nursing care, or failing to do so under circumstances
illegal drugs.


Grievance Procedure
scheduled meeting.




ride.

Dress Code
setting.
badge is $5.
the course.

HEALTH POLICIES
Liability Insurance

Overall Grade
Required Materials
Stethoscope
One pair of shears
Penlight
Liability Insurance
ADA Statement


Term: 101S Office 903.782.0735
Course # EMSP 2348

Course Title Emergency Pharmacology
Course Description
A detailed study of the knowledge and skills required to perform patient assessment and
airway management.

ACLS and EKG ISBN: 978-0-323-04690-9
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
At the completion of this module, the student will be able to
1. Discuss general pharmacological terminology, administration routes and procedures,
and drug dose calculations;
2. Identify pharmacodynamics, pharmacokinetics, and drug profiles of various
medications used in out-of-hospital medical care.
Learning Objectives
1 At the completion of this unit, the paramedic student will be able to integrate
pathophysiological principles of pharmacology and the assessment findings to
formulate a field impression and implement a pharmacologic management plan.

2 At the completion of this unit, the paramedic student will be able to safely and
precisely access the venous circulation and administer medications.
Course Schedule

paper.
below:

Grade Range
“A” 90 – 100
“B” 80 –89
“C” 70-79
“D” 60-69
“F” Below 60
Course Policies

Withdrawal
course.
dropped EMS course.
Dismissal
Education.



Grievance Procedure

scheduled meeting.





ride.
Dress Code

setting.
badge is $5.
the course.
HEALTH POLICIES

Liability Insurance

Overall Grade
Required Materials
Stethoscope
One pair of shears
Penlight
Liability Insurance
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Jenna Ormsbee
Term: 101S 903-782-0347
Section: 02 jormsbee@parisjc.edu
HART 1391
Special Topics in Heating, Air Conditioning & Refrigeration
Direct Digital Controls
Course Description
Topics address recently identified current events; skills, knowledge, and/or attitudes and
improve student proficiency. Fee charged.
Credits: 3SCH = 1 lecture and 2 laboratory hours per week, from approved course list
TSI Requirement: N/A
Prerequisite(s): Instructor approval

Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Technology, Sixth Edition
Whitman, Johnson, Tomczyk, and Silberstein
Program Outcomes
Students graduating from the program will be able to install, service, and repair window
unit air conditioners; refrigerators and freezers; central air conditioning units using
electric or gas heat and heat pumps; commercial and industrial refrigeration equipment;
and/or demonstrate control sequence and operation of air conditioning, commercial, and
industrial equipment using direct digital controls.
Course Outcomes
Learning outcomes/objectives are determined by local occupational needs and business
and industry trends.
Learning Objectives
Students will be able to demonstrate control sequence and operation of residential air
conditioning, and/or commercial, and industrial equipment using direct digital controls.
Course Schedule
Classes meet on Tuesday and Thursday from 6:00 p.m. to 10:00 p.m.

Grading System: Overall semester grades will be determined by performance in two
areas:
1. 15% Classroom activities, Tests, and Final Exams
2. 85% Lab participation
HART 1391 – Jenna Ormsbee Page 1 of 5

The importance of lab grades cannot be stressed enough as this is a technical course.
Lab grades are the best measure of field experience. Some of the areas that students
will be graded on in the lab are: safety, attitude, cleanliness, care of tools, following
instructions, team work, initiative, completion of lab projects and amount of absences.
The grading symbols used are A=90-100

B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
RUBRIC USED FOR HANDS ON FINAL EXAM:
NO.
ERROR < 60 60 75 90 105 > 105 SCOR
Unit‐Digital Controls S mins mins mins mins mins mins. E
Wire Unit Cooling
Circuit
High Voltage 4 4 3 2 1 0
Contactor/Compressor 4 4 3 2 1 0
Transformer 4 4 3 2 1 0
Contactor/Fan Motor 4 4 3 2 1 0
Run Capacitor 4 4 3 2 1 0
Temperature Sensor 4 4 3 2 1 0
Wire Digital Controls 0
Analog Input/Temp 4 3 2 1 0 0
Discrete Output Comp 4 3 2 1 0 0
Discrete Output Fan 4 3 2 1 0 0
Set DIP Switches 4 3 2 1 0 0
Program Logic 4 3 2 1 0 0
Create Set Points 4 3 2 1 0 0
Create Graphics 4 3 2 1 0 0
Locate Station Address 4 3 2 1 0 0

Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY
NO MUSIC OR VIDEO DEVICES: NO PORTABLE MUSIC OR VIDEO DEVICE MAY BE USED DURING
LECTURE. NO PORTABLE MUSIC OR VIDEO DEVICE MAY BE USE WHEN YOU ARE SUPPOSED TO
BE WORKING IN THE LAB.
NO SLEEPING IN CLASS OR LAB: SLEEPING DURING LECTURE TIME WILL NOT BE TOLERATED.
SLEEPING WHEN YOU ARE SUPPOSED TO BE WORKING IN THE LAB WILL NOT BE TOLERATED.
STUDENTS IN VIOLATION OF THIS RULE WILL BE GIVEN A ZERO FOR THE DAY. NO EXCEPTIONS.
OBSCENE, PROFANE, OR VULGAR LANGUAGE: STUDENTS SHALL NOT ENGAGE IN USING

LANGUAGE THAT IS NORMALLY CONSIDERED BY THE MAJORITY OF SOCIETY TO BE OBSCENE,
PROFANE, OR VULGAR. USE COMMON SENSE AND DECENCY IN CHOOSING LANGUAGE.
SEXUAL HARASSMENT: SEXUAL HARASSMENT IS VERBAL OR PHYSICAL CONDUCT THAT

DENIGRATES OR SHOWS HOSTILITY OR AVERSION TOWARD AN EMPLOYEE, STUDENT, OR GROUP
OF EMPLOYEES OR STUDENTS BECAUSE OF HIS OR HER GENDER THAT: HAS THE PURPOSE OR
EFFECT OF CREATING AN INTIMIDATING, HOSTILE, OR OFFENSIVE WORKING OR ACADEMIC
ENVIRONMENT, HAS THE PURPOSE OR EFFECT OF UNREASONALBY INTERFERING WITH AN
INDIVIDUAL’S PERFORMANCE OF DUTIES OR STUDIES, OR OTHERWISE ADVERSELY AFFECTS AN
INDIVIDUAL’S EMPLOYMENT OR ACADEMIC OPPORTUNITIES. HARASSING CONDUCT INCLUDES
(1) EPITHETS, SLURS, NEGATIVE STEREOTYPING, OR THREATENING, INTIMIDATING, OR HOSTILE
ACTS THAT RELATE TO GENDER AND (2) WRITTEN OR GRAPHIC MATERIAL THAT DENIGRATES
OR SHOWS HOSTILITY OR AVERSION TOWARD AN INDIVIDUAL OR GROUP BECAUSE OF GENDER
AND THAT IS PLACED ON WALLS, BULLETIN BOARDS, OR ELSEWHERE ON PJC PREMISES, OR IS
CIRCULATED IN THE WORKPLACE. STUDENTS SHALL NOT ENGAGE IN CONDUCT CONSTITUTING
SEXUAL HARASSMENT OF OTHER STUDENTS OR INSTRUCTORS.
SCHEDULED BREAKS: A THIRTY MINUTE BREAK IS SCHEDULED FROM 8 P.M. TO 8:30 P.M.. THIS IS
THE ONLY TIME THAT A STUDENT MAY LEAVE THE AIR CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION
BUILDING FOR BREAKS.
TESTS: TESTS MUST BE TAKEN ON THE DAY SCHEDULED BY THE INSTRUCTOR. NO STUDENT
WILL BE ALLOWED TO MAKE UP A TEST WITHOUT A WRITTEN DOCTOR’S EXCUSE OR PROOF OF A
DEATH IN THE FAMILY. IF YOU KNOW THAT YOU MUST BE OUT ON A TEST DATE YOU SHOULD
MAKE ARRANGEMENTS TO TAKE THE TEST ON AN EARLIER DATE.
MINOR CHILDREN ON CAMPUS: FOR SAFETY REASONS, MINOR CHILDREN ARE NOT ALLOWED
ON CAMPUS WHILE STUDENT PARENTS ARE ATTENDING CLASSES. MINOR CHILDREN WHO
ARE VISITING THE CAMPUS WITH PARENTS CONDUCTING COLLEGE BUSINESS MUST BE UNDER
THE DIRECT SUPERVISION AND CONTROL OF THEIR PARENTS OR GUARDIANS AT ALL TIMES.
PERSONAL BUSINESS: STUDENTS SHOULD ARRANGE TO TAKE CARE OF PERSONAL BUSINESS,

DOCTOR’S APPOINTMENTS, ETC... OUTSIDE OF SCHOOL HOURS.
HORSEPLAY: HORSEPLAY WILL NOT BE TOLERATED AS IT CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO

YOURSELF AND OTHERS.
SAFETY: FOLLOW ALL SAFETY RULES AND INSTRUCTIONS.
PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT: ALL STUDENTS ARE EXPECTED TO BEHAVE IN A MATURE AND
PROFESSIONAL MANNER.

Students with Special Needs/Students with Disabilities:
The Student Development Center is responsible for coordinating services for students with special needs. Individual
students have the right and the responsibility to decide whether and when to choose among accessible service
offerings. Paris Junior College provides equal opportunities for students with disabilities and ensures access to a
wide variety of resources and programs. The College will make reasonable accommodations for qualified students
with a documented physical, psychological, or learning disability who have been admitted to the College and have
requested accommodations. (Employee Procedures Handbook, p. 43)
Academic Honesty:
Student violations involving a question of academic honesty are handled by the faculty member(s) involved. Should
the student object to the decision of the faculty member(s), the appeals procedures for instructional due process may
be utilized. The following list describes the most common forms of academic dishonesty (cheating):
5. Arranging with other students to give or receive answers by use of signals.
11. Getting questions or answers from someone who has already taken the same exam.
Paris Junior College is an equal opportunity/affirmative action institution and prohibits

discrimination on the basis of race, color, creed or religion, national origin, age, sex, disability or
veteran status.

ADA Statement
process.

Paris Junior College Charlie Hodgkiss

Term: 101S 903-782-0465
Section: 01 chodgkiss@parisjc.edu
HART 1401
Electricity Principles
Course Description
Principles of electricity including proper use of test equipment, A/C circuits, and air
conditioning and refrigeration control component theory and operation, single phase and
three phase motors and controls. Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Students completing this course will demonstrate knowledge of basic principles of
electricity, electrical current, circuitry, and air conditioning devices; apply Ohm’s Law to
electrical calculations; perform electrical continuity and current tests with appropriate
meters; and demonstrate electrical safety.
Learning Objectives
Students will be able to install, service, troubleshoot, and repair window unit air
conditioners/and or refrigerators.
Course Schedule
The course meets on Tuesday and Thursday each week of the semester from 8:00 a.m.
to 2:30 p.m. for a total of 6 hours each day.

areas:
Page 1 of 5



B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY


Page 2 of 5



Academic Honesty:
Academic Honesty:(cont.)
Page 3 of 5


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.
Page 4 of 5


Term: 101S 903-782-0347
HART 1401
Course Description

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
Classes meet on Monday, Tuesday, and Wednesday from 6:00 p.m. to 10:00 p.m.

areas:
HART 1401 Jenna Ormsbee Page 1 of 5


B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
NO.
< 15 15 16 18 20 > 20
Wiring ERRORS mins mins mins mins mins mins. SCORE
Refrigerator Defrost
Thermostat 4 4 3 2 1 0
Defrost Timer 4 4 3 2 1 0
Defrost Heater 4 4 3 2 1 0
Defrost Termination
Switch 4 4 3 2 1 0
Refrigerator Cooling 4 4 3 2 1 0
Evaporator Fan Motor 4 4 3 2 1 0
Condenser Fan Motor 4 4 3 2 1 0
Compressor Overload 4 4 3 2 1 0
Compressor 4 4 3 2 1 0
Door Light 4 4 3 2 1 0
Door Switch 4 4 3 2 1 0
Mullion Heater 4 4 3 2 1 0
Compressor Current
Relay 4 4 3 2 1 0
Compressor Solid State 4 4 3 2 1 0
Ice Maker
Ground 4 4 3 2 1 0
Ice Maker 4 4 3 2 1 0

Fill Switch 4 4 3 2 1 0
Harvest Heater 4 4 3 2 1 0
Harvest Timer 4 4 3 2 1 0
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY




Academic Honesty:

veteran status.

ADA Statement
process.

Paris Junior College Chris Bardrick

College Year: 2010-2011 GC
Term: 101S 903-782-0465
Section: 40 cbardrick@parisjc.edu
HART 1401
Course Description

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
The course meets on Tuesday, Wednesday, and Thursday each week of the semester
from 6:00 p.m. to 10:30 p.m.

areas:
Page 1 of 5



B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY


Page 2 of 5



Academic Honesty:
Page 3 of 5


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.
Page 4 of 5


Term: 101S 903-782-0465
HART 1403
Control Principles
Course Description
A basic study of electrical, pressure and temperature controls including motor
starting devices, operating relays, troubleshooting safety controls and devices.
Emphasis on use of wiring diagrams to analyze high and low voltage circuits.
A review of Ohm’s law as applied to A/C controls and circuits. Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Test, repair, and/or replace HVAC-related electrical components; and read, draw, and
interpret high and low voltage control circuits.
Course Schedule
to 2:30 p.m. for a total of 6 hours a day.

areas:
Page 1 of 5



B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY


Page 2 of 5



Academic Honesty:
Page 3 of 5


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.
Page 4 of 5

Term: 101S 903-782-0347
HART 1403
Control Principles
Course Description
A basic study of electrical, pressure and temperature controls including motor starting
devices, operating relays, troubleshooting safety controls and devices. Emphasis on
use of wiring diagrams to analyze high and low voltage circuits. A review of Ohm’s law
as applied to A/C controls and circuits. Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Students graduating from the one year certificate program will be able to install, service,
and repair window unit air conditioners; refrigerators and freezers; central air
conditioning units using electric or gas heat and heat pumps; commercial and industrial
refrigeration equipment; and/or demonstrate control sequence and operation of air
conditioning, commercial, and industrial equipment using direct digital controls.
Course Outcomes
Students successfully completing this course will demonstrate a basic knowledge and
understanding of testing, repairing, and/or replacing heating, air conditioning and
refrigeration related electrical components. Students will also be able to read, draw,
and interpret high and low voltage control circuits.
Learning Objectives
conditioners, and/or refrigerators and freezers.
Course Schedule

areas:
HART 1403 –Jenna Ormsbee Page 1 of 5


B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
NO.
< 15 15 16 18 20 > 20
Defrost Termination
Switch 4 4 3 2 1 0
Compressor Current
Relay 4 4 3 2 1 0
Ice Maker
Ground 4 4 3 2 1 0

Ice Maker 4 4 3 2 1 0
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY




Academic Honesty:

veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.


Term: 101S 903-454-9333
HART 1403
Control Principles
Course Description
A basic study of electrical, pressure and temperature controls including motor
starting devices, operating relays, troubleshooting safety controls and devices.
Emphasis on use of wiring diagrams to analyze high and low voltage circuits.
A review of Ohm’s law as applied to A/C controls and circuits. Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Test, repair, and/or replace HVAC-related electrical components; and read, draw, and
interpret high and low voltage control circuits.
Course Schedule
from 6:00 p.m. to 10:30 p.m.

areas:
Page 1 of 5



B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY


Page 2 of 5



Academic Honesty:
Page 3 of 5


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.
Page 4 of 5

Term: 101S 903-782-0347
HART 1407
Refrigeration Principles
Course Description
An introduction to the refrigeration cycle, basic thermodynamics, heat transfer,
temperature/pressure relationship, safety, refrigeration containment and refrigeration
components. Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule

areas:


B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
NO.
< 15 15 16 18 20 > 20
Defrost Termination
Switch 4 4 3 2 1 0
Compressor Current
Relay 4 4 3 2 1 0
Ice Maker
Ground 4 4 3 2 1 0
Ice Maker 4 4 3 2 1 0

Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY



HORSEPLAY:HORSEPLAY WILL NOT BE TOLERATED AS IT CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO

Academic Honesty:

veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.

Term: 101S 903-782-0347
HART 1407
Course Description
An introduction to the refrigeration cycle, basic thermodynamics, heat transfer,
temperature/pressure relationship, safety, refrigeration containment and refrigeration
components. Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule

areas:


B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
NO.
< 15 15 16 18 20 > 20
Defrost Termination
Switch 4 4 3 2 1 0
Compressor Current
Relay 4 4 3 2 1 0
Ice Maker
Ground 4 4 3 2 1 0
Ice Maker 4 4 3 2 1 0

Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY




Academic Honesty:

veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.


Term: 101S 903-454-9333
HART 1407
Course Description
An introduction to the refrigeration cycle, basic thermodynamics, heat
transfer, temperature/pressure relationship, safety, refrigeration containment
and refrigeration components. Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Students completing this course will identify refrigeration components; explain operation
of the basic refrigeration cycle and heat transfer; demonstrate proper application and/or
use of tools, test equipment, and safety procedures.
Learning Objectives
Install, test, repair, and/or replace HVAC-related refrigeration components including
compressors, evaporators, flow control devices, condensers, service valves.
Course Schedule
from 6:00 p.m. to 10:30 p.m.

areas:


B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY





Academic Honesty:


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.


Term: 101S 903-782-0465
HART 1441
Residential Air Conditioning and Refrigeration
Course Description
A study of components, applications and installation of mechanical air
conditioning systems including operating conditions, troubleshooting, repair
and charging of air conditioning systems. Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Demonstrate systems applications; implement and demonstrate industry accepted
refrigerant charging procedures; demonstrate air conditioning system installation
procedures; and demonstrate component and part diagnostics and replacement.
Course Schedule
The course meets on Monday and Wednesday each week of the semester from 8:00
a.m. to 2:30 p.m. for a total of 6 hours a day.

areas:



B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY





Academic Honesty:


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.
Term: 101S 903-782-0347
HART 1441
Course Description
A study of components, applications and installation of mechanical air conditioning
systems including operating conditions, troubleshooting, repair and charging of air
conditioning systems. Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Students will be able to install, service, troubleshoot, and repair central air conditioning
units using electric or gas heat and heat pumps.
Course Schedule

areas:


B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Test NO.
< 15 15 16 18 20 > 20
Wire Heating Circuit
Control Voltage 4 4 3 2 1 0
Transformer High Voltage 4 4 3 2 1 0
Transformer Low Voltage 4 4 3 2 1 0
Blower Relay 4 4 3 2 1 0
Gas Valve 4 4 3 2 1 0
Fan Motor Low Speed 4 4 3 2 1 0
Sequencer 4 4 3 2 1 0
Time Delay 4 4 3 2 1 0
Wire Cooling Circuit

Contactor 4 4 3 2 1 0
Blower Motor High Speed 4 4 3 2 1 0
Compressor Current Relay 4 4 3 2 1 0
Identify Heating
Components
Gas Valve 4 4 3 2 1 0

Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY




Academic Honesty:

veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.


Term: 101S 903-454-9333
HART 1441
Course Description
A study of components, applications and installation of mechanical air
conditioning systems including operating conditions, troubleshooting, repair
and charging of air conditioning systems. Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Demonstrate systems applications; implement and demonstrate industry accepted
refrigerant charging procedures; demonstrate air conditioning system installation
procedures; and demonstrate component and part diagnostics and replacement.
Course Schedule
from 6:00 p.m. to 10:30 p.m.

areas:



B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY





Academic Honesty:


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.


Term: 101S 903-782-0465
HART 1445
Gas and Electric Furnaces
Course Description
A study of the procedures and principles used in servicing heating systems
including gas fired and electric furnaces. Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Students completing this course will identify the procedures and principles used in
servicing heating systems including gas fired furnaces and electric heating systems.
Learning Objectives
Identify different types of gas furnaces; identify and discuss component operation of gas
furnaces; service and troubleshoot gas furnaces; perform safety inspections on gas and
electric heating systems; identify unsafe operation of gas furnaces; identify and discuss
component operation of electric heating systems; and service and troubleshoot electric
heating systems.
Course Schedule

areas:



B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY





Academic Honesty:


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.
Term: 101S 903-782-0347
HART 1445
Gas and Electric Heating
Course Description
A study of the procedures and principles used in servicing heating systems including
gas fired and electric furnaces. Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
and/or demonstrate control sequence and operation of air conditioning, commercial,
and industrial equipment using direct digital controls.
Course Outcomes
Students completing this course will be able to successfully identify different types of gas
furnaces; Identify and discuss component operation of gas furnaces; service and
troubleshoot gas furnaces; perform safety inspections on electric and gas systems;
identify unsafe operations of gas furnaces; identify and discuss component operation of
electric heating systems, and service and troubleshoot electric heating systems.
Learning Objectives
Students completing this course will be able to install, service, troubleshoot, and repair
central air conditioning units using electric or gas heat.
Course Schedule
Classes meet on Tuesday, Wednesday, and Thursday from 6:00 p.m. to 10:00 p.m.

areas:


B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
GAS OR ELECTRIC HEAT NO.

< 15 15 16 18 20 > 20
Wiring Trainer ERRORS mins. mins. mins. mins. mins. mins. SCORE
Transformer High Voltage 4 4 3 2 1 0
Transformer Low Voltage 4 4 3 2 1 0
Gas Valve 4 4 3 2 1 0
Limit Switch
Capacitor 4 4 3 2 1 0
Potential Relay 4 4 3 2 1 0

Identify Heating
Components
Gas Valve 4 4 3 2 1 0

Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY
LECTURE. NO PORTABLE MUSIC OR VIDEO DEVICE MAY BE USE WHEN YOU ARE SUPPOSED TO BE
WORKING IN THE LAB.


INDIVIDUAL’S EMPLOYMENT OR ACADEMIC OPPORTUNITIES. HARASSING CONDUCT INCLUDES (1)
EPITHETS, SLURS, NEGATIVE STEREOTYPING, OR THREATENING, INTIMIDATING, OR HOSTILE ACTS
THAT RELATE TO GENDER AND (2) WRITTEN OR GRAPHIC MATERIAL THAT DENIGRATES OR
SHOWS HOSTILITY OR AVERSION TOWARD AN INDIVIDUAL OR GROUP BECAUSE OF GENDER AND

THAT IS PLACED ON WALLS, BULLETIN BOARDS, OR ELSEWHERE ON PJC PREMISES, OR IS


offerings. Paris Junior College provides equal opportunities for students with disabilities and ensures access to a wide
variety of resources and programs. The College will make reasonable accommodations for qualified students with a
documented physical, psychological, or learning disability who have been admitted to the College and have requested
accommodations. (Employee Procedures Handbook, p. 43)
Academic Honesty:


veteran status.
ADA Statement
institution is committed to assisting qualified students as completely as possible. Services include
the arrangement for accommodations and services to allow equal access to education opportunities
for students with disabilities.
Center), or 903.885.1232 (Sulphur Springs Center) to arrange an appointment to begin the process.


Term: 101S 903-454-9333
HART 1445
Gas and Electric Furnaces
Course Description
A study of the procedures and principles used in servicing heating systems
including gas fired and electric furnaces. Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Students completing this course will identify the procedures and principles used in
servicing heating systems including gas fired furnaces and electric heating systems.
Learning Objectives
Identify different types of gas furnaces; identify and discuss component operation of gas
furnaces; service and troubleshoot gas furnaces; perform safety inspections on gas and
electric heating systems; identify unsafe operation of gas furnaces; identify and discuss
component operation of electric heating systems; and service and troubleshoot electric
heating systems.
Course Schedule
from 6:00 p.m. to 10:30 p.m.

areas:



B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY





Academic Honesty:


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.


Term: 101S 903-782-0465
HART 2436
Troubleshooting
Course Description
An advanced course in application of troubleshooting principles and use of
test instruments to diagnose air conditioning and refrigeration components
and system problems including conducting performance tests.Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Students completing this course will demonstrate proficiency in troubleshooting
principles and use of test instruments to diagnose air conditioning and refrigeration
components and system problems including conducting performance tests.
Learning Objectives
Test and diagnose components, systems, and accessories; and exhibit knowledge of
system's sequence of operation, accessory applications, and component operation.
Course Schedule

areas:


B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY





Academic Honesty:


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.
Term: 101S 903-782-0347
HART 2436
Troubleshooting
Course Description
An advanced course in application of troubleshooting principles and use of test
instruments to diagnose air conditioning and refrigeration components and system
problems including conducting performance tests. Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
unit air conditioners; refrigerators and freezers; central air conditioning units using electric
or gas heat and heat pumps; commercial and industrial refrigeration equipment; and/or
demonstrate control sequence and operation of air conditioning, commercial, and
Course Outcomes
Students completing this course will demonstrate proficiency in troubleshooting principles
and use of test instruments to diagnose air conditioning and refrigeration components
and system problems including conducting performance tests.
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
Classes meet on Tuesday, Wednesday and Thursday from 6:00 p.m. to 10:00 p.m.

areas:
HART 2436- Jenna Ormsbee Page 1 of 4


B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY
LECTURE. NO PORTABLE MUSIC OR VIDEO DEVICE MAY BE USE WHEN YOU ARE SUPPOSED TO BE
WORKING IN THE LAB.


INDIVIDUAL’S EMPLOYMENT OR ACADEMIC OPPORTUNITIES. HARASSING CONDUCT INCLUDES (1)
EPITHETS, SLURS, NEGATIVE STEREOTYPING, OR THREATENING, INTIMIDATING, OR HOSTILE ACTS
THAT RELATE TO GENDER AND (2) WRITTEN OR GRAPHIC MATERIAL THAT DENIGRATES OR
SHOWS HOSTILITY OR AVERSION TOWARD AN INDIVIDUAL OR GROUP BECAUSE OF GENDER AND
THAT IS PLACED ON WALLS, BULLETIN BOARDS, OR ELSEWHERE ON PJC PREMISES, OR IS



offerings. Paris Junior College provides equal opportunities for students with disabilities and ensures access to a wide
variety of resources and programs. The College will make reasonable accommodations for qualified students with a
documented physical, psychological, or learning disability who have been admitted to the College and have requested
accommodations. (Employee Procedures Handbook, p. 43)
Academic Honesty:

veteran status.
ADA Statement
institution is committed to assisting qualified students as completely as possible. Services include
the arrangement for accommodations and services to allow equal access to education opportunities
for students with disabilities.
Center), or 903.885.1232 (Sulphur Springs Center) to arrange an appointment to begin the process.


Term: 101S 903-454-9333
HART 2436
Troubleshooting
Course Description
An advanced course in application of troubleshooting principles and use of
test instruments to diagnose air conditioning and refrigeration components
and system problems including conducting performance tests.Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Students completing this course will demonstrate proficiency in troubleshooting
principles and use of test instruments to diagnose air conditioning and refrigeration
components and system problems including conducting performance tests.
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
from 6:00 a.m. to 10:30 p.m.

areas:


B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY





Academic Honesty:


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.


Term: 101S 903-782-0465
HART 2438
Installation and Service
Course Description
A study of air conditioning system installation, refrigerant piping, condensate
disposal and air cleaning equipment with emphasis on service, troubleshooting,
performance testing and repair techniques.Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Students completing this course will demonstrate proficiency in air conditioning system
installation, refrigerant piping, condensate disposal, and air cleaning equipment with
emphasis on startup and performance testing.
Learning Objectives
Install air conditioning equipment and evaluate system performance.
Course Schedule

areas:


B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY





Academic Honesty:


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.


Term: 101S 903-782-0347
HART 2438
Course Description
A study of air conditioning system installation, refrigerant piping, condensate disposal
and air cleaning equipment with emphasis on service, troubleshooting, performance
testing and repair techniques. Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
and/or demonstrate control sequence and operation of air conditioning, commercial,
and industrial equipment using direct digital controls.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule

areas:


B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY


WILL BE ALLOWED TO MAKE UP A TEST WITHOUT A WRITTEN DOCTOR’S EXCUSE OR PROOF OF
A DEATH IN THE FAMILY. IF YOU KNOW THAT YOU MUST BE OUT ON A TEST DATE YOU SHOULD



Academic Honesty:


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.


Term: 101S 903-454-9333
HART 2438
Course Description
A study of air conditioning system installation, refrigerant piping, condensate
disposal and air cleaning equipment with emphasis on service, troubleshooting,
performance testing and repair techniques.Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
from 6:00 a.m. to 10:30 p.m.

areas:


B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY





Academic Honesty:


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.


Term: 101S 903-782-0465
HART 2441
Commercial Air Conditioning and Refrigeration
Course Description
The student will demonstrate knowledge of systems components; diagnose
and troubleshoot systems; describe system application and demonstrate system
installation procedures.Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Students completing this course will identify the components, applications, and
installation of air conditioning systems with capacities of 25 tons or less.
Learning Objectives
Apply and describe the sequence of operation for commercial air conditioning systems
and their accessories; demonstrate knowledge of components relative to commercial air
conditioning.
Course Schedule

areas:


B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY





Academic Honesty:


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.
Term: 101S 903-782-0347
HART 2441
Course Description
The student will demonstrate knowledge of systems components; diagnose and
troubleshoot systems; describe system application and demonstrate system installation
procedures. Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Students will be able to install, service, troubleshoot and repair commercial/industrial
refrigeration equipment.
Course Schedule

areas:
HART 2441) – Jenna Ormsbee Page 1 of 6


B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Wire and Identify NO.

Commercial ERROR < 15 15 16 18 20 > 20
Board S mins mins mins mins mins mins. SCORE
Wire Heating
Circuit
Transformer High
Voltage 4 4 3 2 1 0
Transformer low
voltage 4 4 3 2 1 0
Evaporator Fan
Motors 4 4 3 2 1 0
Line Voltage
Defrost Limit/Fan
Control 4 4 3 2 1 0
Hot Gas Solenoid 4 4 3 2 1 0
Heat Strip 4 4 3 2 1 0
Time Clock
Wire Cooling
Circuit

Evaporator Fan
Motors 4 4 3 2 1 0
Line Voltage
Condenser Fan
Motor 4 4 3 2 1 0
Hi/Low Pressure
Switches 4 4 3 2 1 0
Oil Pressure
Switch
Identify
Heating
Components
Evaporator Fan
Motors 4 4 3 2 1 0
Line Voltage
Defrost Limit/Fan
Control 4 4 3 2 1 0
Time Clock 4 4 3 2 1 0
Identify
Cooling
Components
Evaporator Fan
Motors 4 4 3 2 1 0
Line Voltage
Condenser Fan
Motor 4 4 3 2 1 0

Hi/Low Pressure
Oil Pressure
Switch 4 4 3 2 1 0
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY




Academic Honesty:

veteran status.

ADA Statement
process.


Term: 101S 903-454-9333
HART 2441
Course Description
The student will demonstrate knowledge of systems components; diagnose
and troubleshoot systems; describe system application and demonstrate system
installation procedures.Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Students completing this course will identify the components, applications, and
installation of air conditioning systems with capacities of 25 tons or less.
Learning Objectives
Apply and describe the sequence of operation for commercial air conditioning systems
and their accessories; demonstrate knowledge of components relative to commercial air
conditioning.
Course Schedule
from 6:00 p.m. to 2:30 p.m.

areas:


B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY





Academic Honesty:


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.


Term: 101S 903-782-0465
HART 2445
Air Conditioning System Design
Course Description
A study of the properties of air and results of cooling, heating, humidifying or
dehumidifying; ACCA Manual J heat gain and heat loss calculations including
equipment selection, ACCA Manual D duct design and balancing the air
system.Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Students completing this course will demonstrate proficiency in the properties of air and
results of cooling, heating, humidifying or dehumidifying; heat gain and heat loss
calculations including equipment selection and balancing the air system.
Learning Objectives
Calculate heat loss and heat gain; design a complete duct system; size heating and
cooling equipment to the structure; perform a load calculation using Manual J or other
load calculation forms; and balance air flow on a duct system.
Course Schedule

areas:



B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY





Academic Honesty:


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.
Term: 101S 903-782-0347
HART 2445
Course Description
dehumidifying; ACCA Manual J heat gain and loss calculations including equipment
selection, ACCA Manual D duct design and balancing the air system. Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule

areas:

B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Wire and Identify NO.

< 15 15 16 18 20 > 20
Commercial Board ERRORS mins mins mins mins mins mins. SCORE
Transformer High
Voltage 4 4 3 2 1 0
Transformer low voltage 4 4 3 2 1 0
Evaporator Fan Motors 4 4 3 2 1 0
Line Voltage Thermostat 4 4 3 2 1 0
Defrost Limit/Fan Control 4 4 3 2 1 0
Time Clock
Hi/Low Pressure
Oil Pressure Switch
Identify
Heating Components
Defrost Limit/Fan Control 4 4 3 2 1 0

Time Clock 4 4 3 2 1 0
Identify
Cooling Components
Hi/Low Pressure
Oil Pressure Switch 4 4 3 2 1 0
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY





Academic Honesty:
Academic Honesty :( cont.)


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.


Term: 101S 903-454-9333
HART 2445
Course Description
dehumidifying; ACCA Manual J heat gain and heat loss calculations including
equipment selection, ACCA Manual D duct design and balancing the air
system.Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Students completing this course will demonstrate proficiency in the properties of air and
results of cooling, heating, humidifying or dehumidifying; heat gain and heat loss
calculations including equipment selection and balancing the air system.
Learning Objectives
Calculate heat loss and heat gain; design a complete duct system; size heating and
cooling equipment to the structure; perform a load calculation using Manual J or other
load calculation forms; and balance air flow on a duct system.
Course Schedule
The course meets on Tuesday ,Wednesday and Thursday each week of the semester
from 6:00 p.m. to 10:30 p.m.

areas:



B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY





Academic Honesty:


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.


Term: 101S 903-782-0465
HART 2449
Heat Pumps
Course Description
A study of heat pumps, heat pump control circuits, defrost controls, auxiliary
heat, air flow and other topics related to heat pump systems. Fee charged.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Students completing this course will identify the components of heat pumps, heat pump
control circuits, defrost controls, auxiliary heat, air flow, and other topics related to heat
pump systems.
Learning Objectives
Explain a reverse cycle system; list the mechanical and electrical components for the
heat pump operation; and explain the operation of heat pump modes including cooling,
heating, defrost, emergency heat, and auxiliary heat mode. Identify and explain different
methods of accomplishing defrost; charge a system correctly in the heating and cooling
mode; troubleshoot electrical and mechanical components; perform tests for adequate
air flow; and determine balance point and C.O.P. (coefficiency of performance).
Course Schedule


areas:

B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY





Academic Honesty:


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.


Term: 101S 903-782-0347
HART 2449
Heat Pumps
Course Description

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
pump systems.
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
Classes meet Tuesday, Wednesday, and Thursday from 6:00 p.m. to 10:00 p.m.
HART 2449-Jenna Ormsbee


areas:

B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY





Academic Honesty:


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.


Term: 101S 903-454-9333
HART 2449
Heat Pumps
Course Description

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
pump systems.
Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
from 6:00 p.m. to 10:30 p.m.


areas:

B=80-89
C=70-79
D=60-69
F=59 and below
W=Withdraw
X=Incomplete
Course Policies
GENERAL POLICY





Academic Honesty:


veteran status.
ADA Statement
process.
Paris Junior College Anita Ferguson
Term: 10S1 903-782-0362
Section: P1 aferguson@parisjc.edu
HITT 1305
Medical Terminology
Course Description
Instruction in the practical application of a medical vocabulary system. Topic include
structure; recognition; analysis; definition; spelling; pronunciation; and combination of
medical terms from prefixes, suffixes, roots, and combining forms.
Prerequisite(s):
Medical Terminology for Health Professions 6E, by Ann Ehrlich and Carol L.
Schroeder. ISBN#1418072524
Program Outcomes
1. Use medical research/resource materials.

2. Transcribe dictated reports using correct grammar, punctuation, and
format.
3. Input CPT and ICD-9 codes into billing software.
4. Match doctors’ diagnoses with appropriate codes.
5. Recognize medical terminology and diseases.
Course Outcomes
The student will define terms and abbreviations which apply to the structural
organization of the body; recognize and analyze terms and their components from a list
including prefixes, suffixes, roots and combining forms; identify correct pronunciation,
spelling, and definitions of medical terms; and interpret correctly contents of a written
patient scenario.
HITT 1305.P1 – Anita Ferguson Page 1 of 6

Learning Objectives
1. Describe the origins and purpose of medical terminology.

2. Recognize medical terminology word parts such as root words, prefixes,
suffixes, and combining forms.
3. Define and correctly utilize medical terminology describing body
structures, functions, conditions and disorders, body regions, cavities,
areas and landmarks.
4. Define and correctly utilize medical abbreviations and symbols correlated
by the body system.
Course Schedule
WEEK 1 (Sept. 2)
DAY 1‐ Syllabus and information on webct and software.
Homework‐ Read Chapter 1 and 2, (Introduction to Medical Terminology and The

Human Body in Health and Disease) complete end of chapters questions
(Learning Exercises) (write your answers on a separate sheet of paper). Hand
out chapter review sheets.
LABOR DAY HOLIDAY September 6
WEEK 2 (September 9)
DAY 1 ‐ Review Chapter 1 and 2. Pronounce words. Turn in your end‐of‐chapter

questions for chapters 1 and 2. Demonstrate software disk in back of book.
Homework‐ Complete test 1 on webct which is over chapters 1 and 2. Read chapter 3 (The
Skeletal System) and complete end‐of‐chapter questions (Learning Exercises)
for both chapters. Complete software exercises (tests) on disk in back of your
textbook for chapters 1 and 2.
DAY 1 ‐ Review chapter 3. Pronounce words. Turn in end‐of‐chapter questions for
chapter 3. Turn in summary for chapters 1 and 2 software.
Homework‐ Read Chapter 4 (The Muscular System). Complete end‐of‐chapter questions
(Learning Exercises) for chapter 4. Complete software test for chapters 3 and 4.

DAY 1 ‐ Review Chapter 4. Pronounce words. Turn in end‐of‐chapter questions for
chapter 4 and your software summary for chapters 3 and 4.
Homework‐ Complete test 2 on webct which is over chapter 3 and 4. Read chapter 5 (The
Cardiovascular System) and complete end‐of‐chapter questions (Learning
Exercises) for both chapters. Complete software tests for chapter 5.
DAY 1 Review Chapter 5. Pronounce words. Turn in end‐of‐chapter questions for both
chapters. Complete software test for chapter 5.
Homework‐ Read chapter 6 (The Lymphatic and Immune Systems). Complete the end‐of‐
chapter questions (Learning Exercises) for chapter 4. Complete software tests
for 6.
WEEK 6 (October 7)
DAY 1‐ Review Chapter 6. Pronounce words. Turn in end‐of‐chapter questions and
your software summary for chapter 6.
Homework‐ Complete test 3 on webct which is over chapter 5 and 6. Read chapter 7 and
complete end‐of‐chapter questions (Learning Exercises) for both chapters.
Complete software tests for chapter 7.
WEEK 7 (October 14)
DAY 1 ‐ Review Chapter 7 (The Respiratory System). Pronounce words. Turn in Chapter
7 end‐of chapter questions and your software summary for chapter 7.
Homework‐ Read Chapter 8 (The Digestive System). Complete end‐of‐chapter questions
(Learning Exercises) and complete software tests for chapter 8.
WEEK 8 (October 21)
your software summary for Chapter 8.

Homework‐ Complete test 4 on webct which is over chapter 7 and 8. Read chapter 9 (The
Urinary System)and complete end‐of‐chapter questions (Learning Exercises) for
both chapters. Complete software tests for chapter 9.
WEEK 9 (October 28)
DAY 1‐ Review Chapter 9. Pronounce words. Turn in Chapter 9 end‐of‐chapter
questions and your software summary for chapter 9.
Homework‐ Read Chapter 10 (The Nervous System). Complete end‐of‐chapter questions
(Learning Exercises) and complete software tests for chapter 10.
Week 10 (Nov. 4)
DAY 1‐ Review chapter 10. Pronounce words. Turn in end‐of‐chapter questions and
Homework‐ Complete test 5 on webct which is over chapter 9 and 10. Read chapter 11
(Special Senses: The Eyes and Ears) and complete end‐of‐chapter questions
(Learning Exercises) for both chapters. Complete software tests for chapter 11.
WEEK 11 (November 11)
DAY 1‐ Review Chapter 11. Pronounce words. Turn in end‐of‐chapter questions
(Learning Exercises) and your software summary for chapter 11.
Homework‐ Read Chapter 12 (Skin: The Integumentary System). Complete end‐of‐chapter
questions (Learning Exercises) and complete software tests for chapter 12.
WEEK 12 (November 18)
(The Endocrine System) and complete end‐of‐chapter questions (Learning
Exercises) for both chapters. Complete software tests for chapter 13.
THANKSGIVING BREAK‐November 24‐29.
WEEK 13 (Tuesday, November 23)
DAY 1‐ Review chapter 13. Pronounce words. Turn in on end‐of‐chapter questions and

complete software tests for chapter 13.
Homework‐ Read Chapters (The Reproductive Systems and Diagnostic Procedures and
Pharmacology). Complete end‐of‐chapter questions (Learning Exercises) and
complete software tests for chapter 14 & 15.
WEEK 14 (Dec. 2)
DAY 1 ‐ Review Chapter 14. Pronounce words. Turn in end‐of‐chapter questions and
your software summary for chapters 14.
and complete end‐of‐chapter questions and software tests.
WEEK 15 (Dec. 9)
DAY 1‐ Complete test 8 on webct which is over chapter 15. Turn in end‐of‐chapter
questions and your software summary for chapter 15.
Homework‐ Review for FINAL EXAM.
FINAL EXAM‐‐December 14
For evaluation purposes, the student may earn A, B, C, D, or F as a course grade.

Grade A indicates excellent, Grade B above average, C average, D below average.
100-90=A
80-89=B
70-79=C
60-69=D
Daily Grade (includes learning exercise at the end of each chapter and computer
tests results from the StudyWare disk) 15% of the grade
Theory Tests (Chapter tests) will count 70% of the grade
Final Exam 15% of the grade
100%
Course Policies

4. All cell phones, beepers and personal digital assistants (pda’s) must be turned off
or in silent mode. Under no circumstances should a cell phone or beeper sound
during class. If a cell phone or beeper does sound during class, the student may
be asked to leave for the remainder of the period. The only exception to this rule
includes peace officers. EMT, EMS, or other emergency personnel, and their
5. It is the responsibility of the student to initiate a drop form by the last day to
withdraw with a “W” if so desired. The instructor will not drop a student unless
the student asks for a drop form, completes the drop form, and takes it to the
Records Office.
6. All Student’s Standard of Conduct policies in the PJC Calendar and Student
Handbook (beginning on page 26) apply to this course.
ADA Statement

Term: 10S1 903-782-0362
Section: 65 aferguson@parisjc.edu
HITT 1305
Medical Terminology
Course Description
Prerequisite(s):
Program Outcomes

format.
Course Outcomes
patient scenario.
HITT 1305.65 – Anita Ferguson Page 1 of 6

Learning Objectives

by the body system.
Course Schedule
WEEK 1 – Read chapter 1 (Introduction to Medical Terminology). Complete learning

exercises (100 questions) at the end of the chapter and check your answers with the
answer key provided. Complete the multiple choice quiz, the fill-in-the blank quiz, and
the true/false quiz using WebCt internet. Also e-mail the media link you have
summarized to your instructor using WebCt e-mail (remember this is an article you
located using WebCt within the chapter assignment instructions).
WEEK 2 – Read chapter 2 (The Human Body In Health and Disease). Complete
learning exercises (100 questions) at the end of the chapter and check your answers
with the answer key provided. Complete the multiple choice quiz, the fill-in-the blank
quiz, and the true/false quiz using WebCt internet. Also e-mail the media link you have
WEEK 3 – Read chapter 3 (The Skeletal System). Complete learning exercises (100
questions) at the end of the chapter and check your answers with the answer key
provided. Complete the multiple choice quiz, the fill-in-the blank quiz, and the true/false
quiz using WebCt internet. Also e-mail the media link you have summarized to your
instructor using WebCt e-mail (remember this is an article you located using WebCt
within the chapter assignment instructions).
WEEK 4 – Read chapter 4 (The Muscular System). Complete learning exercises (100

WEEK 5 – Read chapter 5 (The Cardiovascular System). Complete learning
WEEK 6 – Read chapter 6 (The Lymphatic and Immune Systems). Complete

WEEK 7 – Read chapter 7 (The Respiratory System). Complete learning exercises

(100 questions) at the end of the chapter and check your answers with the answer key
WEEK 8 – Read chapter 8 (The Digestive System). Complete learning exercises

WEEK 9 – Read chapter 9 (The Urinary System). Complete learning exercises (100
WEEK 10 – Read chapter 10 (The Nervous System). Complete learning exercises

WEEK 11 – Read chapter 11 (Special Senses: The Eyes and Ears). Complete

WEEK 12 – Read chapter 12 (The Integumentary System). Complete learning

WEEK 13 – Read chapter 13 (The Endocrine System). Complete learning exercises

WEEK 14 – Read chapter 14 (The Reproductive Systems). Complete learning

WEEK 15– Read chapter 15 (Diagnostic Procedures and Pharmacology).

Complete learning exercises (100 questions) at the end of the chapter and check your
answers with the answer key provided. Complete the multiple choice quiz, the fill-in-the
blank quiz, and the true/false quiz using WebCt internet. Also e-mail the media link you
have summarized to your instructor using WebCt e-mail (remember this is an article you
The section after chapter 15 is the COMPREHENSIVE MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY

REVIEW—You may take this for the practice. It will not be counted in the grading
process.
The Proctored Final Exam must be taken before or on Monday, December 13 at

your nearest testing center. You will need to call the testing center the week
before the final and make an appointment to reserve a seat and a computer.


100-90=A
80-89=B
70-79=C
60-69=D
*Chapter quizzes will be averaged and this grade will count 50% of the grade
Media Links –one for each chapter (15 links in all) will count 10% of the grade
**Final Exam (150 multiple choice questions) 40% of the grade
100%
*Each chapter quiz counts 20 points—these points will be added
(the points you actually received for the correct answer) and
Divided by the total number of possible points for a percentage
Grade.
**The final exam counts 150 points—these points will be added

Divided by the total number of possible points (150) for a percentage
Grade.
Course Policies

Records Office.

ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Faculty Name: Mistie Ford

College Year: 2010-2011 Office Location: By Appt.
Term: 101S Office Phone: 903-782-0379
Section: 66 mford@parisjc.edu
Course # (HITT 1305)

Course Title (Medical Terminology)
Course Description
HITT 1305 Medical Terminology 3.3.2
Instruction in the practical application of a medical vocabulary system. Topic
include structure; recognition; analysis; definition; spelling; pronunciation;
and combination of medical terms from prefixes, suffixes, roots, and combining
forms
Credits: 3 SCH 3 lecture and 2 lab hours per week from approved course list
TSI Requirement: xxx M, xxx R, xxx W

Prerequisite(s): N/A

1. MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY FOR HEALTH PROFESSIONS by Ann Ehrlich and Carol
L. Schroeder, 6th Edition, Delmar Publishers
2. TABER'S CYCLOPEDIC MEDICAL DICTIONARY. F.A. Davis Co. or
Websites on the internet may be used
Student audio disk to accompany textbook (ISBN#1435434889)
Program Outcomes
2. Transcribe dictated reports using correct
grammar, punctuation, and format.
3. Input CPT and ICD-9 codes into billing
software.
4. Match doctors' diagnoses with appropriate codes.
Course # (HITT 1305) – MFORD

Page 1 of 4

Course Outcomes
The student will define terms and abbreviations which apply to the structural organization of the
body; recognize and analyze terms and their components from a list including prefixes, suffixes,
roots and combining forms; identify correct pronunciation, spelling, and definitions of medical
terms and interpret correctly contents of a written patient scenario.
Learning Objectives
1. To define medical terminology words by decoding, using contextual clues, and

recognizing word parts such as root words, prefixes, suffixes, and combining forms
2. To demonstrate analytical and reasoning skills by correctly defining and utilizing medical
terminology words that describe body structures, functions, conditions, disorders, and
body regions.
3. To think logically, reason, and analyze problems by using the textbook material, software
and dictionary as resource tools to increase understanding of medical terms.
4. To utilize effective study skills pertaining to the origins and purpose of medical
terminology terms.
5. To use the English language grammatically, clearly, and precisely by defining and
correctly utilizing medical abbreviations and symbols according to medical terms and
body systems.
Course Schedule
Week 1: Introduction to Medical Terminology
Week 2: The Human Body in Health and Disease
Week 3: The Skeletal System
Week 4: The Muscular System
Week 5: The Cardiovascular System
Week 6: The Lymphatic and Immune Systems
Week 7: The Respiratory System
Week 8: The Digestive System
Week 9: The Urinary System
Week 10: The Nervous System
Week 11: Special Senses: The Eyes and Ears
Week 12: Skin: The Integumentary System
Week 13: The Endocrine System
Week 14: The Reproductive System
Week 15: Diagnostic Procedures and Pharmacology
Week 16: Comprehensive medical Terminology Review/Final Exam

Page 2 of 4


1. Complete the text-workbook, MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY FOR HEALTH
PROFESSIONS, by Ann Ehrlich . Complete the end-of-chapter questions starting with
1.1 through 1.l00 (check with the key in each chapter of WebCT). The student will do
this for each chapter in the book—chapter 1 through 15.
2. Complete the lab assignments using the computer software (the disk in the back of
textbook). For each lesson there are 5 tests on this disk for each lesson that will help
prepare the student for the quizzes that are in the WebCT on line. In WebCT there are 4
quizzes for each lesson. The student will need to complete the quizzes for the last chapter
labeled “Comprehensive Review”.
3. Complete all the quizzes.
4. Complete the final exam.
5. Complete one learning (media) link for each chapter. The student will choose a subject
for each chapter and write a short summary over what is learned and submit via email on
WebCt.
COURSE FORMAT: This an internet course using computers, the internet and PJC’s WebCT
server.
GRADING POLICY
50 % Quizzes
40% Final Exam
10% Media Links
100% Total Grade
TO PASS THE COURSE, YOU MUST MAINTAIN AN OVERALL “C” AVERAGE
(70% or above)
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE POLICY: A CALENDAR IS PROVIDED IN WEBCT WITH DUE DATES
TO HELP THE STUDENT NOT GET BEHIND AND COMPLETE THE COURSE BY THE
END OF THE SEMESTER. CONTACT OR LOGIN FOR THIS COURSE MUST BE MADE
WITH THE INSTRUCTOR BY THE OFFICIAL REPORTING DAY OR THE STUDENT
WILL BE DROPPED FROM THE COURSE.

Page 3 of 4

Academic Honesty
Student violations involving a question of academic honesty are handled by the faculty
member(s) involved. The following are forms of academic dishonesty (cheating):
Having another student take an exam for you or you take it for someone else.
Altering or forging an official college document.
Paying someone to write a paper to submit as your own work.
Arranging with other students to give or receive answers by use of signals.
Arranging to sit next to someone who will let you copy on an exam.
Copying from someone’s exam without the student’s knowledge.
Writing a paper for another student.
Allowing another student to copy from you during an exam.
Copying answers from a source without doing work independently.
Getting questions or answers from someone who has already taken the same exam.
Copying a few sentences without footnoting in a paper.
Working on homework with other students when the instructor doesn’t allow it.
Padding a few items in a bibliography.
ADA Statement


Page 4 of 4

Paris Junior College Faculty Name: Mistie Ford

College Year: 2010-2011 Office Location: By Appt.
Term: 101S Office Phone: 903-782-0379
Course # (HITT 1305)

Course Title (Medical Terminology)
Course Description
HITT 1305 Medical Terminology 3.3.2
Instruction in the practical application of a medical vocabulary system. Topic
include structure; recognition; analysis; definition; spelling; pronunciation;
and combination of medical terms from prefixes, suffixes, roots, and combining
forms
Credits: 3 SCH 3 lecture and 2 lab hours per week from approved course list
TSI Requirement: xxx M, xxx R, xxx W

Prerequisite(s): N/A

1. MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY FOR HEALTH PROFESSIONS by Ann Ehrlich and Carol
L. Schroeder, 6th Edition, Delmar Publishers
2. TABER'S CYCLOPEDIC MEDICAL DICTIONARY. F.A. Davis Co. or
Websites on the internet may be used
Student audio disk to accompany textbook (ISBN#1435434889)
Program Outcomes
2. Transcribe dictated reports using correct
grammar, punctuation, and format.
3. Input CPT and ICD-9 codes into billing
software.
4. Match doctors' diagnoses with appropriate codes.

Page 1 of 4

Course Outcomes
The student will define terms and abbreviations which apply to the structural organization of the
body; recognize and analyze terms and their components from a list including prefixes, suffixes,
roots and combining forms; identify correct pronunciation, spelling, and definitions of medical
terms and interpret correctly contents of a written patient scenario.
Learning Objectives
1. To define medical terminology words by decoding, using contextual clues, and

recognizing word parts such as root words, prefixes, suffixes, and combining forms
2. To demonstrate analytical and reasoning skills by correctly defining and utilizing medical
terminology words that describe body structures, functions, conditions, disorders, and
body regions.
3. To think logically, reason, and analyze problems by using the textbook material, software
and dictionary as resource tools to increase understanding of medical terms.
4. To utilize effective study skills pertaining to the origins and purpose of medical
terminology terms.
5. To use the English language grammatically, clearly, and precisely by defining and
correctly utilizing medical abbreviations and symbols according to medical terms and
body systems.
Course Schedule
Week 1: Introduction to Medical Terminology
Week 2: The Human Body in Health and Disease
Week 3: The Skeletal System
Week 4: The Muscular System
Week 5: The Cardiovascular System
Week 6: The Lymphatic and Immune Systems
Week 7: The Respiratory System
Week 8: The Digestive System
Week 9: The Urinary System
Week 10: The Nervous System
Week 11: Special Senses: The Eyes and Ears
Week 12: Skin: The Integumentary System
Week 13: The Endocrine System
Week 14: The Reproductive System
Week 15: Diagnostic Procedures and Pharmacology
Week 16: Comprehensive medical Terminology Review/Final Exam

Page 2 of 4


1. Complete the text-workbook, MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY FOR HEALTH
PROFESSIONS, by Ann Ehrlich . Complete the end-of-chapter questions starting with
1.1 through 1.l00 (check with the key in each chapter of WebCT). The student will do
this for each chapter in the book—chapter 1 through 15.
2. Complete the lab assignments using the computer software (the disk in the back of
textbook). For each lesson there are 5 tests on this disk for each lesson that will help
prepare the student for the quizzes that are in the WebCT on line. In WebCT there are 4
quizzes for each lesson. The student will need to complete the quizzes for the last chapter
labeled “Comprehensive Review”.
3. Complete all the quizzes.
4. Complete the final exam.
5. Complete one learning (media) link for each chapter. The student will choose a subject
for each chapter and write a short summary over what is learned and submit via email on
WebCt.
COURSE FORMAT: This an internet course using computers, the internet and PJC’s WebCT
server.
GRADING POLICY
50 % Quizzes
40% Final Exam
10% Media Links
100% Total Grade
(70% or above)
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE POLICY: A CALENDAR IS PROVIDED IN WEBCT WITH DUE DATES
TO HELP THE STUDENT NOT GET BEHIND AND COMPLETE THE COURSE BY THE
END OF THE SEMESTER. CONTACT OR LOGIN FOR THIS COURSE MUST BE MADE
WITH THE INSTRUCTOR BY THE OFFICIAL REPORTING DAY OR THE STUDENT
WILL BE DROPPED FROM THE COURSE.

Page 3 of 4

Academic Honesty
Student violations involving a question of academic honesty are handled by the faculty
member(s) involved. The following are forms of academic dishonesty (cheating):
Having another student take an exam for you or you take it for someone else.
Altering or forging an official college document.
Paying someone to write a paper to submit as your own work.
Arranging with other students to give or receive answers by use of signals.
Arranging to sit next to someone who will let you copy on an exam.
Copying from someone’s exam without the student’s knowledge.
Writing a paper for another student.
Allowing another student to copy from you during an exam.
Copying answers from a source without doing work independently.
Getting questions or answers from someone who has already taken the same exam.
Copying a few sentences without footnoting in a paper.
Working on homework with other students when the instructor doesn’t allow it.
Padding a few items in a bibliography.
ADA Statement


Page 4 of 4

Term: 10S1 903-782-0362
HITT 1305
Medical Terminology
Course Description
Prerequisite(s):
Program Outcomes

format.
Course Outcomes
patient scenario.

Learning Objectives

by the body system.
Course Schedule
WEEK 1 – Read chapter 1 (Introduction to Medical Terminology). Complete learning

WEEK 2 – Read chapter 2 (The Human Body In Health and Disease). Complete
WEEK 3 – Read chapter 3 (The Skeletal System). Complete learning exercises (100
WEEK 4 – Read chapter 4 (The Muscular System). Complete learning exercises (100

WEEK 5 – Read chapter 5 (The Cardiovascular System). Complete learning
WEEK 6 – Read chapter 6 (The Lymphatic and Immune Systems). Complete

WEEK 7 – Read chapter 7 (The Respiratory System). Complete learning exercises

WEEK 8 – Read chapter 8 (The Digestive System). Complete learning exercises

WEEK 9 – Read chapter 9 (The Urinary System). Complete learning exercises (100
WEEK 10 – Read chapter 10 (The Nervous System). Complete learning exercises

WEEK 11 – Read chapter 11 (Special Senses: The Eyes and Ears). Complete

WEEK 12 – Read chapter 12 (The Integumentary System). Complete learning

WEEK 13 – Read chapter 13 (The Endocrine System). Complete learning exercises

WEEK 14 – Read chapter 14 (The Reproductive Systems). Complete learning

WEEK 15– Read chapter 15 (Diagnostic Procedures and Pharmacology).

Complete learning exercises (100 questions) at the end of the chapter and check your
answers with the answer key provided. Complete the multiple choice quiz, the fill-in-the
blank quiz, and the true/false quiz using WebCt internet. Also e-mail the media link you
have summarized to your instructor using WebCt e-mail (remember this is an article you
The section after chapter 15 is the COMPREHENSIVE MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY

REVIEW—You may take this for the practice. It will not be counted in the grading
process.
The Proctored Final Exam must be taken before or on Monday, December 13 at

your nearest testing center. You will need to call the testing center the week
before the final and make an appointment to reserve a seat and a computer.


100-90=A
80-89=B
70-79=C
60-69=D
*Chapter quizzes will be averaged and this grade will count 50% of the grade
Media Links –one for each chapter (15 links in all) will count 10% of the grade
**Final Exam (150 multiple choice questions) 40% of the grade
100%
*Each chapter quiz counts 20 points—these points will be added

Divided by the total number of possible points for a percentage
Grade.
**The final exam counts 150 points—these points will be added

Divided by the total number of possible points (150) for a percentage
Grade.
Course Policies

Records Office.

ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Faculty Mistie Ford
College Year: 2010-2011 Office Not Applicable
Term: 101S Office 903.782.0734
Course # HITT 1345

Course Title Health Care Delivery Systems
Course Description
An introductory course to organization, financing, and delivery of health care services,
accreditation, licensure, and regulatory agencies.
Credits: 3 SCH = x lecture and x laboratory hours per week, from approved course list
TSI Requirement: All sections must be complete.
Prerequisite(s): HITT 1301

1. Health Information Technology: An Applied Approach, 2nd Edition, Merida L. Johns,
AHIMA, 2006, ISBN: 1-58426-141-2
Program Outcomes
1. Analyze health records for documentation that reflects the progress, clinical findings,
discharge status and supports the patient’s diagnosis.
2. Discuss regulations and standards associated with health information management.
3. Apply and validate ICD-9-CM code and CPT codes using official guidelines to assign
and sequence correct diagnosis and procedure codes for inpatient and outpatient
services by use of the ICD-9-CM, CPT manuals and an encoding system while
recognizing the effects of those codes on reimbursement.
4. Practice within and understand the legal/ethical framework of the health information
system and those affecting healthcare institutions and healthcare professionals.
5. Identify administrative procedures in the management of a medical office
environment, including regulatory agencies, accreditation standards and
technological tools.
Course Outcomes
1. Identify components and functions of multiple health care delivery systems to include
accreditation, licensure, regulatory agencies, payment, and reimbursement systems.
2. Compute routine institutional statistics.
3. Analyze and interpret health care data and be able to prepare health care data for
presentation purposes.
4. Verify reliability and validity of health care data.
5. State characteristics of medical facilities, including medical office procedures and
define terms related to health care delivery systems.
Course # HITT 1345.65 – Mistie Ford Page 1 of 5

C:\Users\ElaPit\Documents\Syllabi for 101s\Word to convert to PDF\HITT1345 65 101s.doc
6. Identify medical office systems and administrative procedures, including
management and compliance with regulatory agencies and standards of
accreditation.
7. Identify the major allied health professional and their educational requirements.
8. Explain procedures for JCAHO and AOA accreditation.
9. Identify the social, legal, and economic factors that affect the delivery of health care.
10. Differentiate between proper and improper methods in the control and use of health
information.
11. Discuss the role of technology in inpatient/outpatient health care including the use of
common software or hardware technology and protections of data integrity and
validity.
Learning Objectives
Health Services Organizations and Delivery
1. Understand the history of the healthcare delivery system from ancient times until
present.
2. Describe the major occupations usually considered to be Allied Health Professions.
3. Recognize the role of government in healthcare services.
4. Recognize the impact that external forces have on healthcare industry.
5. Understand the basic organization of the various types of hospitals and healthcare
organizations.
6. Describe the systems used for reimbursement of healthcare services.
7. Identify the major ethical principles that guide HIM decision making.
8. Define the terms: privacy, confidentiality, security.
9. Recognize some of the core ethical problems, including those related to the release
of health information and coding.
10. Identify professional values and obligations inherent in the AHIMA Code of Ethics,
including those important to patients, the healthcare team, employers, the public,
peers and colleagues, and professional associations.
11. Understand how the steps in an ethical decision-making process are used to resolve
ethical issues.
12. Recognize the legal issues pertaining to the confidentiality aspect of HIM.
13. Understand the significance of the roles that statues, administrative laws, and
regulatory agencies, including public health reporting requirements, have with regard
to the use and disclosure of health information.
14. Discuss HIPPA privacy standards and rules with regard to health information use
and disclosure.
Information Technology and Systems
15. Identify the three components of information technology.
16. Describe the major types of information systems and give an example of each.
17. Describe the steps in the systems development life cycle.
18. Identify the three main types of system software and provide an example of each.
19. Discuss the major types of databases.
20. Compare and contrast clients and servers.
21. Compare and contrast Local-Area Networks (LAN), Wide-Area Networks (WAN),
intranets, extranets, and the Internet.

22. Identify four criteria used to evaluate an information system.
23. Describe the evolution of information systems in healthcare.
24. Identify the major types of Information Systems applications used in healthcare
organization.
25. Understand the systems development process and its role in the planning, selection,
implementation, and evaluation of healthcare information systems.
26. Identify the key elements needed to manage information resources effectively.
27. Recognize emerging trends affecting the development of healthcare information
systems.
28. Differentiated among strategic, tactical, and operational decision making.
29. Define and give an example of a management information system.
30. Define and give an example of a decision support system.
31. Define and give an example of an executive information system.
32. Identify types of information technologies that can be used to support the physician-
patient relationship and decision making.
33. Understand the differences among the terms confidentiality, privacy, and security.
34. Describe the elements of a data security program.
35. Identify the greatest threats to the security of health information.
36. Discuss methods for minimizing threats to data security.
37. Describe the primary components of the security provisions of the Health Insurance
Portability and Accountability Act.
Health Statistics, Biomedical Research and Quality Management
38. Differentiate between descriptive and inferential statistics.
39. Discuss methods of displaying data.
40. Define hospital-related statistical terms.
41. Discuss the National Vital Statistics System.
42. Define community-based morbidity and mortality rates.
43. Identify external sources of healthcare data.
44. Discuss the concepts of quality in relation to healthcare.
45. Identify and define terms related to quality management.
46. Discuss the topic of clinical quality assessment.
47. Describe the planning and application of clinical quality assessment program.
48. Discuss Medicare requirements for utilization management.
49. List regulatory and accreditation requirements for utilization management in acute
care hospitals.
50. Discuss the steps involved in the planning and implementation of a utilization
management program.
51. Discuss the key elements in a risk management plan.
52. List and define the regulatory and accreditation requirements for risk management
in acute care facilities.
53. Discuss documentation guidelines in relation to risk management.
54. Discuss the planning and implementation of a risk management program.
55. Identify recent clinical management initiatives.
56. Identify and explain performance improvement principles.
57. Identify principles and concepts of performance improvement.
58. List individuals that are considered quality masters and discuss their contribution to

performance improvement.
59. Discuss quality management.
60. List and explain performance improvement models.
61. Identify performance improvement tools and techniques.
Course Schedule
Week 1: Healthcare Delivery Systems
Week 2: Ethical and Legal Issues
Week 3: Exam One
Week 4: Fundamentals of Information Systems, Introduction to Healthcare Information
Systems
Week 5: Information Systems for Managerial and Clinical Support, Information security
Week 6: Exam Two
Week 7: Healthcare Statistics, Clinical Quality Management
Week 8: Performance Improvement
Week 9: Exam three
Week 10: Project
Week 11: Reimbursement Methodologies
Week 12: Reimbursement Methodologies continued
Week 13: Thanksgiving Week
Week 14: Exam Four
Week 15: Review for Final
Week 16: Final Exam

In order to pass HITT 1345, the student must achieve final average grade of 70 or
higher. The final grade will consist of the following: 11 chapter reviews (daily grade)
which are 10% of the final grade, one project which is 10% of the final grade, four
exams that are averaged for a total of 60% of the final grade. The Final Exam will be
20% of the final grade.
This course does not attempt to teach basic use of a computer. All students must be
able to search the net, send e-mail, and perform other basic computer tasks. Students
without these computer skills should not enroll in the course. Minimum computer
requirements are a Pentium or K6, 200MHz, 800MB hard drive, 32MB RAM, 28.8
Modem, Sound Card, Video Card with 1M Ram, Windows 95, Microsoft Word 97 or later
(not Works), 4.0 or higher web browser, reliable internet access, e-mail account, Adobe
Acrobat Reader v3.0, CD ROM Drive, course specific plugins and software, basic
working knowledge of computer, applications, and internet usage.
Course Policies
Daily grades are 10% of the final grade. These grades consist of the eleven (11)
chapter reviews, critical thinking, or problem solving activities. There is a Discussion
Posting icon on the homepage. This will be used to respond to questions the instructor
will ask. Think of this as group discussions in a classroom. Please be thorough when
responding to the posted discussion questions. The length should be enough to cover
the question. Please proof your work for grammatical errors and spelling. If you miss a

deadline on a daily assignment, 10 points will be taken off.
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Faculty Ron Vrba
Term: 101S Office 903.782.0731
Section: 01 rvrba@parisjc.edu
Course # HITT 1441

Course Title Coding and Classification Systems
Course Description
Application of basic coding rules, principles, guidelines, and conventions.

1. Basic ICD-9-CM Coding by Lou Ann Schraffenberger, 2011.
ISBN: 978-1-58426-275-6
2. 2011 ICD-9-CM Professional for Hospitals, vol. 1, 2, and 3.
ISBN: 978-1-4377-0209-5
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
1. Identify different nomenclatures and classification systems
2. Assign codes using appropriate rules, principles, guidelines and conventions. (Using
ICD-9-CM) by:
a. Applying knowledge of current approved "ICD-9-CM Coding and Reporting
Official Guidelines" to assign and sequence the correct diagnosis and procedure
codes for hospital inpatient services.
b. Applying knowledge of current "Diagnostic Coding and Reporting Guidelines for
Course # (HITT 1441) – Ron Vrba Page 1 of 5

C:\Users\ElaPit\Documents\Syllabi for 101s\Word to convert to PDF\HITT1441 01 101S.doc
Outpatient Services."
3. Validate coding accuracy using clinical information found in the health record.
4. Validate reimbursement classification system assignments.
5. Collect the data necessary to assign patients to severity of illness categories.
6. Assign codes using a computerized encoding system.
Learning Objectives
Introduction to Inpatient/Outpatient Coding
1. Define coding.
2. Explain what the organization WHO and the United States Public Health Service did
related to coding.
3. Define ICD-10-CM and ICD-10-PCS.
4. Compare and contrast ICD-10-CM and ICD-10-PCS with ICD-9.
5. Describe how HIM professionals can help transition to ICD-10.
6. Define HIPAA Code Sets.
7. Compare/contrast ICD-9-CM Volume 3, CPT-4 and HCPCS.
8. Explain the Addendum process for ICD-9-CM.
9. List characteristics of ICD-9-CM.
10. List the contents found in Volume 1 and discuss in detail the purpose of each one,
giving examples of each.
11. Discuss the contents found in Volume 2 including the 3 levels of indentation.
12. Compare/contrast the conventions use in ICD-9-CM.
13. Describe the purpose for Instructional notes and give examples.
14. Discuss the importance of multiple coding and the different conditions requiring it.
15. List examples of connecting words.
16. List examples of Symbols, Punctuation, and Abbreviations and define.
17. Give a brief synopsis of the Basic Coding Steps in ICD-9-CM coding.
18. List the contents found in Volume 3 and what it is used for.
19. Discuss the format of the Tabular List in Volume 3.
20. Describe the Alphabetic Index in Volume 3.
21. Compare/contrast Main terms and Subterms.
22. Define Eponyms.
23. List the coding conventions used in Volume 3 and explain the rules for each one.
24. Define principle procedure.
25. Describe the basic instructions for Procedural Coding.
26. Define UHDDS and list a few of the specific items pertaining to patients and their
episodes of care.
27. Define the following terms: Principle Diagnosis; Complication; Cormobidity; Principal
Procedure.
28. Define UB-92.
29. Discuss rules for selecting principal diagnosis for Inpatient care.
30. Define PPS and compare/contrast Medicare's Inpatient payment system and
Medicare's Outpatient payment system.
31. Define medical necessity.
32. Define PRO.
33. List two other types of DRG systems and differentiate between the two.

Coding Application of Inpatient Records
1. Utilizing a code book assign the correct codes to Infectious and Parasitic Diseases.
2. Utilizing a code book assign the correct codes to Neoplasms.
3. Discuss the guidelines for V codes with neoplasms.
4. List the steps for coding neoplasms using the Alphabetic Index and the Tabular List.
5. Use knowledge of coding the anatomical sites for neoplasms.
6. Differentiate between Primary/Secondary Sites of neoplasms.
7. Utilizing a code book correctly assign codes to Endocrine, Nutritional and Metabolic
Diseases and Immunity Disorders.
8. Utilizing a code book correctly assign codes to Diseases of the Blood and Blood-
Forming organs.
9. Utilizing a code book correctly assign codes to Mental Disorders.
10. Select Principle Diagnosis for patients admitted for Alcohol/Drug Treatment.
11. Utilize a code book to correctly assign codes for therapies for Alcohol/Drug
Dependence.
12. Utilizing a code book assign codes to Diseases of the Nervous System and Sense
Organs.
13. Utilizing a code book assign codes to Diseases of the Circulatory System.
14. Utilizing a code book assign codes to Cardiovascular Procedures.
15. Utilizing a code book assign codes to diseases of the Respiratory System.
16. Utilizing a code book assign codes to Respiratory Procedures.
17. Assign codes correctly to Diseases of the Digestive System.
18. Assign procedure codes for gastrointestinal procedures.
19. Utilizing a code book assign codes to diseases of the Genitourinary System.
20. Utilizing a code book assign codes to complications of Pregnancy, Childbirth, and
the Puerperium.
21. Differentiate between Preterm, Term, Postterm, Prologned Terms.
22. Utilizing a code book assign Labor and Delivery codes.
23. Utilizing a code book assign codes and Diseases of the Skin and Subcutaneous
Tissue.
24. Utilizing a code book assign codes for procedures on the Integumentary System.
25. Utilize a code book assign diagnoses codes to Diseases of the Musculoskeletal
System and Connective Tissue.
26. Utilizing a code book assign diagnosis codes to congenital anomalies and certain
conditions originating in the Perinatal Period.
27. Utilizing a code book assign diagnosis codes to Symptoms, Signs, and Ill-Defined
conditions.
28. Utilizing a code book assign diagnosis codes for Injury and Poisoning.
29. Utilizing a code book assign codes for Supplementary Classifications—E codes.
30. Define the term "Late Effects."
31. Using a code book assign codes for Late Effects.
32. Utilizing a code book assign codes to Supplementary Classifications—V Codes.
33. Utilizing a code book/3M, assign diagnosis and procedure codes to intermediate
level inpatient and outpatient hospital charts for each body system.

Course Schedule
Week 1: Characteristics of ICD-9-CM
Procedures
Introduction to the Prospective payment System and the Uniform Hospital
Discharge Data Set
Week 2: Infectious and Parasitic Diseases
Neoplasms
Week 3: Endocrine, Nutritional and Metabolic Diseases and Immunity Disorders
Diseases of the Blood and blood-Forming Organs
Mental Disorders
Diseases of the Nervous System and Sense Organs
Diseases of the Circulatory System
Week 4: Diseases of the Respiratory System
Diseases of the Digestive System
Diseases of the Genitourinary System
Complications of Pregnancy, Childbirth and the Puerperium
Diseases of the Skin and Subcutaneous Tissue
Week 5: Diseases of the Musculoskeletal System and Connective Tissue
Congenital Anomalies and Certain Conditions Originating in the Perinatal
Period
Symptoms, Signs and ill-Defined conditions
Injury and Poisoning I
Injury and Poisoning II
Week 6: Supplementary Classifications – E Codes
Late Effects
Supplementary Classifications – V Codes
3M Encoder Lab
Week 7: Chart Assignment using 3M Encoder
Week 8: Coding Self Test
Week 9: Review for Final Exam
Final Exam

In order to pass HITT 1441, the student must achieve a final average grade of 70 or
higher. The final grade average will consist of:
6 Exams (averaged) 60%

Daily Grades and Quizzes 10% (in class exercise)
Comprehensive Final Exam 15%
Lab Projects 15% (Review exercises; projects, papers, etc.)
Late assignments will have 10 points deducted for every class day that it is late.
If you miss an exam, you must contact the instructor as soon as possible. Make-up
exams will be fill in the blank or essay.

Students who have unsatisfactory progress in classroom will be given written
90-100 points - A
80-89 points - B
70-79 points - C
60-69 points - D
< 60 points - F
Course Policies
Attendance Policy
Daily class attendance is critical for the successful completion of this course. The
student will not be allowed to make-up the following: unannounced quizzes and
assignments done in class. Withdrawal requests must be initiated by the student.
Failure to take the final exam will result in a grade of "F" in the course.
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Faculty Betsy Chapman
Term: 101S Office 903.782.0731
Section: 01 bchapman@parisjc.edu
Course # HITT 1442

Course Title Ambulatory Coding
Course Description
Application of basic coding rules, principles, guidelines, and conventions with emphasis
on ambulatory coding.

1. 2010 CPT/HCPCS Coding and Reimbursement for Physician Services by Lynn
Kuehn ISBN: 978-1-58426-246-6
2. 2011 CPT Professional Ed. ISBN not available, published annually in October.
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
1. Identify different nomenclatures and classification systems
2. Assign codes using appropriate rules, principles, guidelines and conventions. (Using
CPT) by:
a. Applying knowledge of current “Diagnostic Coding and Reporting Guidelines for
Outpatient Services.”
b. Applying knowledge of CPT format, guidelines, and notes to locate the correct
Course # (HITT 1442) – Betsy Chapman Page 1 of 7

codes for all services and procedures performed during the encounter/visit and
sequence them correctly.
c. Applying knowledge of procedural terminology to recognize when an unlisted
procedure codes must be used in CPT.
3. Validate coding accuracy using clinical information found in the health record.
4. Validate reimbursement classification system assignments.
5. Collect the data necessary to assign patients to severity of illness categories.
Learning Objectives
Introduction to Coding Basics
1. Define the health record.
2. Identify organizations that address the content of health records.
3. Describe the content, purpose, and various arrangement patterns of the basic
components of health records.
4. Describe documentation guidelines appropriate for use in the outpatient health
record.
5. Describe the basic concepts and resources used to assign diagnostic and
procedure code in outpatient health record documentation.
6. Describe the two levels of HCPCS and the types of codes contained in each level.
7. Discuss the basic structure, organization, conventions, and symbols used in CPT
coding.
8. Identify sources of documentation that generate physician charges.
9. List the methods used to locate codes in the CPT book.
10. Interpret health record documentation to identify codable diagnostic and procedure
statements resulting from a physician service.
11. Identify credentials specific to coding fields.
Evaluation and Management Coding

1. Understand the code descriptions and terms pertaining to evaluation and
management services.
2. Understand modifiers and their application to E&M services.
3. Identify the seven components involved in selecting the level of E&M visit.
4. Define the 4 different levels of E&M services.
5. Apply knowledge of E&M service guidelines to locate the correct code for the level
of service performed during the encounter or visit.
Anesthesia
1. Describe the format and arrangement of the anesthesia section and its codes.
2. List the services included in the anesthesia code package and describe services
that may be included in addition to the anesthesia code.
3. Define the modifiers used in coding anesthesia services.
4. Discuss other anesthesia coding systems and their use.
5. Assign anesthesia codes to given cases.
Surgery
1. Describe the format and basic content of the surgery section of the CPT book and

its subsections.
2. Define surgical package as defined by CPT and Medicare.
3. Define and cite examples of “separate procedures” and “add-on codes.”
4. Define National Correct Coding Initiative (CCI).
5. Identify surgery related modifiers and define appropriate use of each.
6. Identify guidelines for coding removal of lesions.
7. Differentiate between simple, intermediate, and complex repairs.
8. Differentiate between types of skin grafts.
9. Differentiate between excisional and incisional breast biopsies.
10. Differentiate between fracture and/or dislocation and methods of treatment.
11. Identify appropriate use of casting / strapping codes.
12. Differentiate between surgical and diagnostic endoscopies/arthroscopies.
13. Define 3 types of revisions on the nose.
14. Differentiate between direct and indirect laryngoscopy.
15. Identify cardiovascular subsections and understand guidelines.
16. Identify Digestive System procedures and understand guidelines.
17. Understand anatomy and guidelines for urinary procedures.
18. Define various urodynamic procedures.
19. Identify types of stents and specific guidelines.
20. Differentiate between laparoscopic and hyteroscopic.
21. Understand guidelines for maternity care and delivery.
22. Understand guidelines for nervous system procedures.
23. Understand anatomy and general guidelines for eye and ocular adnexa.
24. Understand guidelines for auditory system procedures.
25. Given a scenario, assign appropriate CPT codes to surgical procedures.
Radiology
1. List four subsections for Radiology and discuss guidelines and applications.
2. Define “supervision and interpretation” as it applies to radiology and professional vs.
technical component.
3. Apply modifiers with radiological procedures.
4. Identify HCPCS codes associated with Radiology.
5. Given a scenario, assign appropriate CPT codes to radiological procedures.
Pathology and Laboratory

1. Apply physician billing guidelines for coding laboratory services.
2. Define the appropriate use of laboratory codes in subsections.
3. Identify additional HCPCS codes used in Pathology and Laboratory Coding.
4. Assign appropriate codes for pathology and laboratory procedures.
Medicine
1. Describe the contents and structure of the medicine section of the CPT codebook.
2. Identify modifiers used in coding Medicine Services.
3. Identify HCPCS (Level II) Codes used in coding Medicine Services.
4. Assign appropriate codes for Medicine Services.

HCPCS Level II Coding
1. Define HCPCS codes and when they are used.
2. Discuss effects of HIPAA on HCPCS.
3. Identify billing rules for HCPCS codes.
Modifiers
1. Describe what modifiers are, how they are used, and where to locate lists of
modifiers.
2. Differentiate between modifiers for physicians use and modifiers for hospital
outpatient use.
Reimbursement Process
1. Describe various payment methodologies used for physician, hospital outpatient,
and ambulatory surgery centers.
2. Identify sources of coding and reimbursement guidelines.
3. Apply payer specific guidelines to coding principles so that codes are assigned
correctly for each visit.
4. Identify data elements required for completing claims submission.
5. Define data elements required for computerized internal fee schedule database
(code file, dictionary, etc.)
6. Describe the flow of claims generation and processing from patient visit to final
payment.
7. Define accounts receivable management process.
8. Describe purposes of Medicare Outpatient Code Editor.
Coding and Reimbursement Reports and Databases

1. Define qualitative and quantitative reports used to evaluate coding quality and
completeness.
2. Recognize potential coding quality issues.
3. Define remittance reports, reviewing formats and code edits.
4. Describe purposes of Medicare Outpatient Code Editor.
Evaluation of Coding Quality

1. Identify ways to obtain or create tools to clarify conflicting, ambiguous, or missing
health record documentation and/or billing information from the physician.
2. Identify steps in performing an internal audit.
3. Discuss compliance regulations
Course Schedule
Week 1: Introduction to Coding Basics
Evaluation and Management Coding
1995 Documentation Guidelines for Evaluation and Management Services
1997 Documentation Guidelines for Evaluation and management Services
Ethics in Coding
Week 2: Anesthesia
Radiology

Pathology and Laboratory
Week 3: Medicine
HCPCS Level II Coding
Modifiers
Week 4: Reimbursement Process
Coding and Reimbursement Reports and Databases
Evaluation of Coding Quality
CMD-1500 Claim Form
Healthcare Web Sites and Resources
AHIMA Practice Brief on Data Quality
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Glossary
Medical Office Procedures
Week 5: Surgery
Integumentary System
Musculoskeletal System
Respiratory System
Cardiovascular, Hemic and Lymphatic Systems
Digestive System
Week 6: Urinary System
Male Genital System
Female Genital System
Nervous System
Eye and Ocular Adnexa Systems
Auditory System
Review for Final Exam
Week 7: Final Exam

In order to pass HITT 1442, the student must achieve a final average grade of 70 or

Daily Grades and Quizzes 10% (in class exercises)
Lab Projects 15%
Late assignments will have 10 points deducted for every class day that it is late.
exams will be fill in the blank or essay.

90-100 points - A
80-89 points - B

70-79 points - C
60-69 points - D
< 60 points - F
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE POLICIES
Medical Records Coding students will follow the absence and tardy policies of Paris
Junior College as discussed in the school catalog, with the following modifications
because of the nature of Medical Records Coding:
1. During inclement weather on practicum days, the student must make his/her
own decision regarding safety for travel to school. A student who decides not to
attend practicum/class because of inclement weather will receive an absence
unless official notification by the college has been made that classes are closed.
2. Any student arriving at the practicum area later than 30 minutes will be given an
absence. Students arriving 30 minutes or less at the practicum area will receive
a tardy. Students missing 60 minutes or less of classroom during a given day
will receive a tardy. Students missing more than 60 minutes will be given an
absence. A tardy or absence such as arriving late or leaving early may occur at
any point during the day. Students may miss up to 60 minutes of practicum and
receive a tardy, with the exception of the 30 minutes arrival rule
( i.e. the student who arrives 15 minutes late to practicum and leaves 45
minutes early from post-conference would miss 60 minutes or less and receive a
tardy).
3. Three (3) tardies = one (1) absence.
4. Permission to enter the practicum will be left to the discretion of the practicum
instructor.
A. Students must demonstrate accountability to clients. If a student reports to
practicum with an illness which may pose a threat to clients, he/she will be
dismissed from the practicum area and will receive a practicum absence.
5. Students who are absent will be required to make up the lab/practicum hours.
A. Should the student miss the make-up hours it will be considered an absence.
6. Students missing any time after two (2) absences per course per semester
must, upon return to school, make a request to the Program Coordinator or the
Division Chair of Health Occupations, to discuss absences.
Procedure for Reporting an Absence or Tardy

When a student must be late or absent from the practicum, that individual must notify
the practicum area by telephone. If the assignment is in a hospital, the agency must be
notified as soon as possible.
When calling, the student should attempt to contact the person in charge, but if this
person is unavailable, speak to the next person in line of authority. The student should
then convey his/her message be relayed to the instructor when he/she arrives. The

student must obtain the name and position of the person contacted about the absence.
Failure to comply with the requirements may result in automatic probation. Abuse of
these rules may result in a termination from the program.
Electronic Devices
1. Student may use quiet, laptop computer for lecture note taking. Students are not
allowed to tape/record any patient information. If patient information is recorded,
disciplinary action may be taken.
2. No cellular telephones (voice or text) or beepers are permitted in the classroom,
laboratory, or practicum areas.
ADA Statement

Term: 10S1 903-782-0362
HITT 2340
Advanced Medical Billing and Reimbursement
Course Description
Health insurance and reimbursement in various health care settings. Includes
application of coding skills to prepare insurance forms for submission to third party
payers. Demonstrate accurate coding of medical records using various coding systems:
demonstrate proper preparation and execution of third party payor reimbursement forms
using local, state, and federal guidelines; and demonstrate proper bookkeeping
transactions on patient accounts.
Prerequisite(s):
Computers in The Medical Office, Susan M. Sanderson, 6th E. and Case Studies
for the Medical Office, 6th E. (Capstone Billing Simulation) ISBN#0078066557
Program Outcomes

format.
Course Outcomes
The student will describe the billing cycle in a medical office, list various types of
health insurance providers, process insurance claims, enter patient demographic
data, enter charges and payments, create and analyze reports, schedule
appointments, and explain the various claim forms.

Learning Objectives
1. The student will enter personal and employer information for new patients.
2. Locate and change information for a patient.
3. Determine when to create a new case.
4. Set up a new case.
5. Enter information on a patient’s diagnosis.
6. Enter charges for a procedure.
7. Record and apply payments received from patients.
8. Print walkout receipts.
9. Create Claims.
10. Review claims for errors and omissions.
11. Record and apply payments from insurance carriers
12. Print walkout receipts.
13.Create Claims and
14.Review claims for errors and omissions.
15.The student will enter personal and employer information for new patients.
16 Locate and change information for a patient.
17. Determine when to create a new case.
18. Set up a new case.
19.Enter information on a patient’s diagnosis.
20. Enter charges for a procedure.
21. Record and apply payments received from patients.
22. Schedule appointments.
Course Schedule
Date Due—Sept. 7
Install your Student-At-Home Medisoft Advanced Version 14 that came with your bundled textbooks.
Instructions for installing using Vista or XP are in the textbook or came separately in the disk. (2) Next
install your Student Data Template CD ROM. The data template provides the patient database. (3) Read
chapter 1 and complete the chapter review on pp. 20-23. You may email the answers only to me through
webct. Include name & chapter.
Date Due-Sept. 13
Read Chapter 2 and answer Chapter Review Questions on pp. 40-42. E-mail the answers only to me through
webct e-mail.
Date Due-Sept 17
Read chapter 3 and complete chapter review, pp. 73-75, and e-mail your answers only through webct.
Complete exercises 3.1 through 3.6 Be sure you understand how to Backup your work to a jump drive and
how to restore each time you start a new session. Read the information on page 67,68,69,70,71,72 only. Do
not perform the functions on these pages--just read
Date Due –Sept. 23

Read chapter 4 and complete chapter review and e-mail through webct. Complete exercises 4.1 through 4.6.
Also complete the "On your own exercise 1: Entering a New Patient", pg. 95. After completing the own your
own exercise, go to the "List" menu and click list, then click "Patients/Guarantor" and select Lis Wright. Print
screen the name and address screen (just press print screen) and paste it into word and email this to me

(aferguson@parisjc.edu). When completing the exercises, take your time and read carefully and you will
make fewer mistakes. Please remember to back up your disk using the backup file name at the bottom of
page 95 (FCC11-4.mbk). The 4 indicates the lesson and this will prove valuable when tracing for errors. Be
sure to remember to "Restore" your disk using the "File" menu each time you restart a session. Each lesson
will indicate the backup name for each lesson. For the exercises in chapter 4, you will begin referring to the
"Source Documents" located in Part 4 in the back of the textbook. This is information or forms you will refer
Date Due- Sept. 28

Read Chapter 5 and complete chapter review and exercises 5.1through 5.6. Also complete "On your own
Exercise 2: Creating a Case for A New Patient, pg.126. After completing the own your own exercise, go to
the "List" menu and click list, then click "Patients/Guarantor" and select Lis Wright. Select the case (on the
right side of the screen) then select the tab "Policy 1" (just press print screen) and paste it into word and
email this to me (aferguson@parisjc.edu). When completing the exercises, take your time and read carefully
and you will make fewer mistakes.
Date Due- October 4

Read Chapter 6 and complete chapter review and e-mail to me using webct e-mail. Complete exercises 6.1
through 6.5. Screen print ex.6.5 walkout receipt for John Fitzwilliams and paste it into Microsoft Word and e-
mail to me. Complete the "own your own exercises 3 and 4 pg. 153 and printscreen the walkout receipt for
Hiro Tanaka and e-mail it to me. Follow the same procedure for screenprinting as instructed in chapter 5
assignment.
Date Due-October 8
Read Chapter 7 and complete Chapter Review and e-mail to me. Complete exercises 7.1 through 7.3.
Printscreen ex. 7.1 and e-mail to me. Complete "on your own exercise 5", pg. 176 and printscreen and e-
mail to me.
Date Due-October 12
Read Chapter 8 and complete Chapter Review and e-mail to me. Complete exercises 8.1 through 8.8. Print
screen exercise 8.8 after you have completed the first 7 steps and e-mail to me. Complete the "On your own
Exercise 6 and 7 on page 226. Print screen both exercises and e-mail to me.
Date Due –October 18
Read Chapter 9 and complete Chapter Review and e-mail to me. Complete exercises 9.1 through 9.9.
Screen print exercise 9.1 (Patient Day Sheet and Procedure Code Day Sheet) and e-mail to me. Screen print
exercise 9.2 and e-mail to me. Screen Print exercise 9.3 and e-mail to me. Screen print exercise 9.4 and e-
mail to me. Screen print exercise 9.5 and e-mail to me. Screen print exercise 9.6 and e-mail to me. Screen
print Exercises 9.7, 9.8, 9.9 and email to me. Complete "On your own Exercises 8 and 9 on page 253 and
screen print both and e-mail to me.
Date Due- October 22

Complete the reading of chapter 10 and complete the Chapter Review on pp. 277through 279 and e-mail
to me. Complete Exercise 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, and 10.4 screenprint and e-mail me the Tickler Item for Jo
Wong, the Tickler Office Notes, the Work List and the Collection Tracer Report for Jo Wong. Complete the
"On Your Own Exercises, page 276. Exercise 10 --screen print the Patient Aging Applied Payment and e-
mail to me, Exercise 11 screen print the Tickler Item and the Work Listand the Collection Letter Report for
Elizabeth Jones and e-mail to me. Exercise 12--screen print the Collection Letter for Elizabeth Jones and
e-mail to me.

Complete the chapter review on pp. 305-307 and e-mail to me. Complete Exercises 11.1 through 11.12
and print an Appointment Schedule for John Rudner for Monday, November 15, 2010 (Screenprint and e-
mail to me). Complete the Exercises --On Your Own--on page 304 and printscreen the Appointment
Schedule for Jessica Rudner for Monday, December 06, 2010 and e-mail to me.

Complete Exercises 12.1 through 12.5. Printscreen 12.4 Walkout Receipt for Christopher Palmer and e-
mail to me. Printscreen for 12.5 East Ohio PPO Deposit dialog box, East Ohio PPO, Lawana Brooks Apply
Payment/ Adjustment to Charges dialog box, East Ohio PPO, Diane Hsu, Apply Payment/Adjustment to
charges dialog box, East Ohio PPO, Raji Patel, Apply Payment/Adjustment to Charges dialog box, and East
Ohio PPO, Michael Syzmanski, Apply Payment/Adjustment to charges dialog box and e-mail to me.

Date Due-November 5
Read Chapter 13 and complete exercises 13.1 through 13.6. Exercise 13.1 you will need to screen print
the appointments for Nancy Stern, Sheila Giles, and Raji Patel and e-mail to me (you will have a separate
screen print for each). Also screen print 13.3, 13.4, and e-mail to me. For 13.5 screen print the personal
tab and the Diagnosis tab of Diane Hsu and e-mail to me. Also print screen Diane Hsu's Transaction Entry
and her Appointment screen and e-mail to me. For Michael Syzmanski--screen print his Personal tab, his
Diagnosis tab, his Transaction Entry screen and e-mail to me. For !3.6 screen print Christopher Palmer's
Transaction Entry dialog box and e-mail to me.
Date Due –November 11

Read Chapter 14 and complete Exercises 14.1 through 14.8. For 14.1 screen print 14.2 (appointment
schedule), and e-mail to me. Screen print 14.3 (Patient Day Sheet --3 pages) and e-mail to me. Screen
print the Procedure Code Day Sheet --2 pages and e-mail to me. Exercise 14.4 screen print the Patient
Aging Applied Payment and e-mail to me. Exercise 14.5 Screen print Randall Klein Tickler Item and
James L. Smith Tickler Item and the Work List and e-mail to me. Exercise 14.6 screen print the Practice
Analysis Report (2 pages) and email to me. Exercise 14.7 Screen print the Name Address tab for
Stewart Robertson, Other Information tab, Personal tab, Account tab, Policy 1 tab, and Appointment
screen, Diagnosis tab, Transaction Entry dialog box and e-mail to me. Exercise 14.8 screen print
Michael Syzmanski's Personal tab, Diagnosis tab, Condition tab, Transaction Entry dialog box and e-mail
to me.
Date Due – November 17

Read Chapter 15 and complete Exercises 15.1 through 15.9. For 15.3 screen print Luther Jackson's
Transaction Entry dialog box, Jill Simmons Transaction Entry dialog box,Nancy Stern's Transaction Entry
dialog box, Debra Syzmanski's, Sheila Giles', Pauline Battistuta's, and e-mail to me. Exercise 15.4
screen print the "Ready to Send"Claim Management dialog box and the "Sent" Claim Management
dialog box and e-mail to me. Exercise 15.5 screen print The Apply Payment/Adjustment to charges
dialog box for Anthony Battistuta, Elizabeth Jones,John Fitzwilliams (ChampVA), Christopher Palmer
(Medicaid), Hanna Syzmanski (East Ohio PPO, Michael Syzmanski (East Ohio PPO) and e-mail to me.
Also screen print OhioCare HMO, EOB Only Deposit--Deposit List dialog box . and e-mail to me. Exercise
15.7 screen print the Patient Day Sheet for 1-5-2011 through 1-5-2001 (2 pages), also the Patient
Aging Applied Payment report, the Practice Analysis(1-1-2010 to 12-31-2010) (3 pages) and e-mail to
me. Exercise 15.8 screen print the Work List and e-mail to me. Exercise 15.9 screen print the Collection
Letter Report and the Collection Letters for Anthony Battistuta, Sheila Giles, Jill Simmons, and e-mail to
me.
Case Studies for the Medical Office--Capstone Billing Simulation
Assignment Information
Maximum grade: 100
Due date: November 20, 2010
Instructions: In this simulation, you will be working for the Polaris Medical Group. You
will work 2 weeks for this group and you will be working 5 days for each
week. You will need to go to your homepage and copy the CASE STUDIES
student data and send it to your desk top and unzip it and the new patients
will appear on your software. You will need to open a new medical group
(Polaris Medical Group) you should not have to delete anything you used in
The Computers In The Medical Office textbook. You will need to read part 1
and Part 2 of the text--part 2 is the Policy and Procedures Manual for the
company you are working for (Polaris Medical Group). You will need this
information for inputting some physicians, insurance companies, and other
information. Source documents are in the back of the textbook that you will
use when keying in new patients. Be careful with your dates and note the
dates and change as indicated in your day-to-day jobs.
WEEK 1- Day 1- Date Due November 24

You will complete all 14 jobs for day 1. For job 13 and 14 you will need to

screen print and e-mail the patient day sheets and the claim management
form (after completion) to me. This will let me know whether you
completed all the previous
jobs correctly for day 1.
WEEK 1- Day 2-Date Due November 26

Complete all 13 jobs for Day 2. For job 12 (Patient Day Sheet) screen print
both pages and e-mail to me. Also screen print job 12 (Claim Management)
and e-mail to me.
WEEK 1- Day 3 Due Date –November 28

Complete all 13 jobs for Day 3. For job 12 (Patient Day Sheet) screen print and e-
mail to me.
WEEK 1- Day 4
Complete all 14 jobs for Day 4. For job 6 (Patient Face Sheet) screen print
and e-mail to me. For job 13 (Patient Day Sheet) screen print both pages
and e-mail to me. Also screen print job 14 (Claim Management) and e-mail
to me.
WEEK 1- Day 5-Due Date December 1

Complete all 14 jobs. Screen print Job 13 (Patient Day Sheet for 6-18-2010 two
sheets) and e-mail to me. Screen print job 14 (Claim Management) and e-mail to
me. Also screen print the Co-Payment Report for 6-18-2010 and e-mail to me.
WEEK 2- Day 1-Date Due December 3

me.
WEEK 2- Day 2-Date Due- December 5

me.
WEEK 2- Day 3-Date Due –December 8

sheets) and e-mail to me. Screen print job 11(Claim Management) and e-mail to me.
WEEK 2- Day 4- Due Date-December 9

sheets) and e-mail to me. Screen print job 11(Claim Management) and e-mail to
me.
WEEK 2‐ Day 5‐Due Date December 13
Complete all 13 jobs. Screen print Job 12(Patient Day Sheet for 6-25-2010, three
sheets) and e-mail to me. Screen print job 13(Claim Management) and e-mail to me.

End-of-Month Jobs
Assignment Information
Maximum grade: 100
Due date: December 13, 2010
Instructions: Complete all the jobs in this section. Job 4 (Practice Analysis from
June 14, 2010 to June 25, 2010, three pages) screenprint and e-
mail to me. Job 5 (Patient Aging Applied Payment as of June 30,
2010) screenprint and e-mail to me. I know you will be happy to
know this is the last you have to e-mail to me!
1. Complete assignments using the text Computers in the Medical Office using
the software as assigned by the instructor.
2. Complete Capstone Billing Simulation (Case Studies for the Medical Office).
You will complete this text second.
Grading Policy
For evaluation purposes, the student may earn A, B, C, D, as a course grade.

Lesson Tests (chapter Review questions after each lesson) 10%

Medisoft computer exercises (exercises will be averaged) 50%
Capstone Billing Simulation 40%
100%
Course Policies

Records Office.
All Student’s Standard of Conduct policies in the PJC Calendar and Student Handbook

ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Faculty Sheila Jones
Term: 101S Office 903.782.0743
Section: 01 sjones@parisjc.edu
Course # HPRS 2300

Course Title Pharmacology for Health Professions
Course Description
A study of drug classifications, actions, therapeutic uses, adverse effects, routes of
administration and calculation of dosages.

Pharmacology Clear & Simple (Make sure that the textbook has the accompanying CD),
Nina Beaman, F.A.Davis , 1st Edition, 2008 ISBN: 978-0-8036-1239-6
Program Outcomes
Dependant upon certificate/degree selected.
Course Outcomes
1. Apply knowledge of pharmacology to the health care field.
2. Apply general terminology to medication usage.
3. Identify and categorize drug classifications and list examples of common drugs in
that classification.
4. Identify the therapeutic use of individual drugs including indications,
contraindications, routes of administration and adverse effects.
5. Calculate medication conversions and dosages.
6. Recognize the safe management of medications and solutions.
Learning Objectives
1. Define pharmacology and related terms.
Patient Safety
2. Discuss patient safety and list safety issues as they relate to drug administration.
3. List the abbreviations and symbols used for medication orders.
4. Explain the moral, ethical and legal issues in relation to medication administration.
5. Describe how to contact the Poison Control Center.
6. Explain who is at risk for poisoning.
7. Describe the symptoms and treatment of a patient who has an allergic or
anaphylactic reaction to a medication.
Course # HPRS 2300.01 – Sheila Jones Page 1 of 7

C:\Users\ElaPit\Documents\Syllabi for 101s\Word to convert to PDF\HPRS2300 01 101S.doc
Laws and Regulations Related to Medications
8. Discuss drug laws, standards and how they protect the public.
9. List and discuss the stages of development of drugs.
10. Describe the names by which drugs are known.
11. Discuss the organization of drugs by classification.
12. Define the role of the Drug Enforcement Administration and describe the function of
the Controlled Substance Act.
13. Discuss the abuse potential of drugs and the impact of substance abuse.
14. Explain the health care worker’s responsibilities when dispensing medications.
Drug Sources
15. List and describe the sources of medications.
16. Define pharmacodynamics and the six categories of desired effects.
17. Define pharmacokinetics and discuss the four major areas.
18. Discuss drug efficacy and the variables that can affect the speed and efficiency that
certain drugs have on the body.
19. List and define the terms related to drug interactions.
20. Discuss the difference between a side effect and an adverse effect and the
unexpected responses that may occur.
21. Discuss how unique conditions may effect drug administration.
Drug Sources and Actions
22. Identify the routes of administration of medications, examples of each and discuss
the advantages and disadvantages of each.
Prescriptions and Drug Labeling
23. List the types of medication orders.
25. Identify the parts of a medication order.
26. Identify and interpret information found on prescription and over the counter drug
labels.
Drug Resources
27. Discuss drug references and list common reference books.
28. Identify and define terms found in drug references and discuss what information
should be included on a drug card or drug information sheet.
29. Evaluate Internet Websites for reliability of drug information.
Medication Administration
30. List and describe the supplies needed for the administration of medications.
31. Discuss the safety issues involved in administering medications.
32. Describe the procedures for administering parenteral and nonparenteral
medications.
Review of Basic Math
33. Review basic math skills
Drug Measurement Systems
34. Compare and contrast the systems of measurement.
Dosage Calculations
35. List the different methods of dosage calculation.
36. Calculate dosage calculation problems utilizing dimensional analysis.
37. List and explain the special circumstances that may arise in calculating medication

dosages.
Nervous System Medications
38. List and discuss the purpose, side effects, contraindications, precautions and patient
education of drugs that affect the autonomic nervous system.
39. Contrast the knowledge needed to administer medications for the control of pain and
fever.
40. Explain the purpose, side effects, contraindications, precautions and patient
education of drugs that are used for anxiety, insomnia, sedation, and seizures.
41. List and explain the classification of psychotropic drugs.
42. List examples of degenerative disorders and discuss medications used in a patient’s
treatment.
43. Discuss the use of general and local anesthetics.
44. Explain the role of medical personnel in the use and abuse of alcohol.
Cardiovascular Medications
45. Describe the medications used to treat angina.
46. Discuss the drugs used for coagulation disorders.
47. Identify drugs used to stimulate bone marrow to produce more red blood cells.
education of drugs that are to treat hypertension.
49. Describe congestive heart failure and list and explain the drugs used for the
treatment of heart failure.
50. Define dysrhythmias and discuss treatment protocols.
51. List the types of shock and the treatment.
52. Compare and contrast the antilipemic agents used to treat lipidemia.
Immunologic Medications
53. Explain the immune response in the body and drug effects on that system.
54. Discuss the use and list examples of the classification of anti-inflammatory
medications.
55. List and discuss the use, side effects, contraindications, cautions, interactions and
patient education of various antiinfective medications.
56. Describe the use of medications to fight viruses.
57. Discuss cancer treatment and the classifications of drugs used in chemotherapy.
58. Discuss biological response modifiers and monoclonal antibodies as a form of
cancer treatment.
59. Explain what the health professional needs to know about radioactive isotopes and
their use in cancer treatment.
60. Describe the responsibilities of administration of chemotherapeutic drugs.
Integumentary Medications
61. Describe the basic anatomy and physiology of the skin as it relates to integumentary
system medications.
62. List and describe the medications used to treat acne.
63. Discuss medications used to treat parasitic, viral and fungal infections of the skin.
64. Describe what the healthcare professional needs to know about medications for the
treatment of inflammatory conditions.
65. Discuss the treatment of skin cancers.
Pulmonary Medications

66. Review key terms as it relates to pulmonary medications.
67. Differentiate between common pulmonary diseases including medications.
68. List the action, uses, side effects, and contraindications for the classification mast
cell stabilizers.
69. Explain the side effects, cautions, and interactions of antiinfluenza agents.
70. List the uses, side effects, and contraindications for drugs for congestion and
coughs.
71. Discuss the used of drugs for asthma.
72. Explain the use of oxygen in pulmonary conditions.
73. Describe the side effects and cautions when using smoking cessation aids.
Gastrointestinal Medicaitons
74. Review the anatomy and physiology of the gastrointestinal system.
75. Identify the various medications used to treat constipation.
76. List and describe the drugs used to treat diarrhea.
77. Describe the use of antiemetics and drugs used to treat motion sickness.
78. Discuss medications for the treatment of gastroesophageal reflux disease.
79. List and describe the drugs used to treat ulcers.
80. Define cholelithiasis and discuss treatment options.
81. List and explain the medications used to treat obesity.
82. Define hemorrhoids and discuss methods of treatment.
83. Discuss the use of antiflatulents.
84. Discuss disease causing organisms of the gastrointestinal tract and their
pharmacological treatment.
85. Explain the use of emetics and list situations that emetics might be used.
86. Explain problems that can result from poor nutrition and discuss nutritional
supplements.
87. Discuss mouthwashes and other oral treatments.
Musculoskeletal Medications
88. Explain the action, uses, side effects, contraindications, cautions and patient
education of medications used to treat musculoskeletal disorders.
89. List and describe the drugs used to treat osteoporosis.
90. Discuss the disorder gout and the medications used in the treatment of gout.
Endocrine Medications
91. List the hormones secreted by the pituitary, adrenals, thyroid and the islets of
Langerhans.
92. Explain the action, uses, side effects, contraindications, precautions, interactions
and patient education of medications used to treat endocrine disorders.
93. Differentiate between the types of diabetes and related medications.
Reproductive and Urinary Medications
94. Explain the types of contraceptive agents and drugs used for labor and delivery.
95. List and explain the drugs used for the treatment of infertility.
96. Discuss the use of reproductive medications in the treatment of premenstrual
dysphoric disorder and infections of the reproductive system.
97. Explain the use of medications for male reproductive disorders.
98. Compare and contrast diuretics for uses, side effects, precautions, interactions and
patient education.

99. Describe the treatment options for common disorders of the urinary system and
effects of medication on the color of urine.
Eye and Ear Medications
100 .Explain the action, uses, side effects, contraindications, cautions, interactions and
patient education of drugs used to treat disorders associated with the eye.
101. Discuss drugs used to treat disorders associated with the ear.
Herbs, Vitamins, and Minerals
102. Describe complementary and alternative therapy and its role in today’s
healthcare.
103. List and discuss the fat-soluble vitamins and their impact on health.
104. List and discuss the water-soluble vitamins and their impact on health.
105. Explain the use of minerals and their impact on health.
Course Schedule
Week 1 Patient Safety
Week 2 Laws and Regulations Related to Medications, Drug sources and actions
Week 3 Drug Forms and Routes, Prescriptions and Drug Labeling
Week 4 Drug Resources, Medication Administration
Week 5 Review of Basic Math, Nervous System Medications, Exam 1
Week 6 Drug Measurement Systems, Cardiovascular Medications
Week 7 Immunologic Medications
Week 8 Integumentary Medications
Week 9 Pulmonary Medications
Week 10 Gastrointestinal Medications, Exam 2
Week 11 (Part 1) Dosage Calculations, Musculoskeletal Medications
Week 12 Endocrine Medications
Week 13 (Part 2) Dosage Calculations, Reproductive and Urinary Medications
Week 14 Eye and Ear Medications
Week 15 Exam 3
Week 16 Optional Final

In order for HPRS 2300 to be accepted by any of the Paris Junior College Health
Occupation Programs, the student must achieve a final average grade of 70 or higher.
The grades for this course are calculated on a point system and are based on 100
points. You will have an area under the WebCT icon titled My Grades that will show the
current number of points that you have earned. The final grade will consist of:
Learning Modules (7) 21 points

End of Chapter Activities 8 points
Daily Grades 5 points
Pharmacology Project 15 points
Exam I 17 points
Exam II 17 points
Exam III 17 points
Total Points 100

90-100 points - A
80-89 points - B
70-79 points - C
60-69 points - D
< 60 points - F
Extra Credit –If you would like to earn a maximum of 5 extra points on your final grade,
you may take an optional final. This final will be given during the last week of school.
To convert your grade to points, your score is multiplied by 0.05 {ex. If you make 100,
(100x 0.05 is 5 points), 80 x .05 is 4 points}. This is the only extra credit that I offer.
Course Policies
student must initiate a request for withdrawal from the course. Failure to take the
exams may result in a grade of "F" in the course.
Cellular Phones, MP3’s, Computers and Pagers: All electronic devices must be
turned off or set to silent mode during class. Under no circumstances should an
electronic device sound during class. Electronic devices may be used in the class
setting for educational purposes and only with the permission of the instructor. There is
no instance in which any electronic device may be used for personal communication,
social networking or non-class related internet access during class. The instructor will
exercise his/her right to ask any student in violation of this policy to leave the classroom
setting for the rest of the period. Repeated violations may result in dismissal from the
course.
Texting, Social Networking: There is no instance in which reading a text message,

replying to a text message, accessing any form of social networking, or accessing the
internet for non-class related matters should be necessary during class. Instruct loved
ones and/or employers to call the Health Occupations office (903-782-0734) if there is
an emergency. Office personnel will contact the student or the instructor regarding the
emergency. Any situation involving texting, social networking or inappropriate internet
access in the classroom may be considered academic dishonesty. We do understand
that our society has come to expect that we all be available on a 24/7 basis; however,
the student needs to inform all concerned that time in class is devoted to the subject at
hand and the student will not be available to them during that time. Please understand
the definition of “emergency,” according to the American Heritage Dictionary, is “a
situation or occurrence of a serious nature, developing suddenly and unexpectedly, and
demanding immediate action.”
Disruptive Behavior: Although we encourage an open and friendly classroom

environment, it is necessary to remind students that they have been allowed to be in the
class to participate and learn about the topic assigned to that time period. If a student is
disruptive to the point of interfering with the learning of other students or fails to treat the
instructor and other members of the class with civility, the student may be asked to

leave the classroom area for the remainder of that class period. This may result in the
student being counted absent for that class. Repeated violations of this policy may
result in dismissal from the course. If the student chooses to leave the classroom for
any reason, you will not be allowed to return until after the break or the next class
period.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S Office 903.782.0743
Course # HPRS 2300

Course Description

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Patient Safety

Drug Sources
labels.
Drug Resources
medications.
Dosage Calculations

dosages.
fever.
treatment.
medications.
cancer treatment.
system medications.

cell stabilizers.
coughs.
supplements.
Langerhans.
patient education.

healthcare.
Course Schedule
Week 15 Exam 3


Exam I 17 points
Exam II 17 points
Exam III 17 points
Total Points 100

90-100 points - A
80-89 points - B
70-79 points - C
60-69 points - D
< 60 points - F
Course Policies
course.



period.
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Faculty Brenda Allen
Term: 101S Office 903.782.0746
Section: 40 ballen@parisjc.edu
Course # HPRS 2300

Course Description

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Patient Safety
Course # HPRS 2300.40 – Brenda Allen Page 1 of 7

Drug Sources
labels.
Drug Resources
medications.
Dosage Calculations

dosages.
fever.
treatment.
medications.
cancer treatment.
system medications.

cell stabilizers.
coughs.
supplements.
Langerhans.
patient education.

healthcare.
Course Schedule
Week 15 Exam 3


Exam I 17 points
Exam II 17 points
Exam III 17 points
Total Points 100

90-100 points - A
80-89 points - B
70-79 points - C
60-69 points - D
< 60 points - F
Course Policies
course.



period.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S Office 903.782.0743
Course # HPRS 2300

Course Description

Program Outcomes
Dependant on certificate/degree selected.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Patient Safety

Drug Sources
labels.
Drug Resources
medications.
Dosage Calculations

dosages.
fever.
treatment.
medications.
cancer treatment.
system medications.

cell stabilizers.
coughs.
supplements.
Langerhans.
patient education.

healthcare.
Course Schedule
Week 15 Exam 3

points. You will have an area under the icon titled My Grades that will show the current
number of points that you have earned. The final grade will consist of the following:
Seven Learning Modules (These are located on the CD that accompanied your
Textbook) which are 21 points of the final grade. The seven modules are averaged and
the resulting average is converted to points by multiplying this average by 0.21 for a
maximum of 21 points. Discussions are 5 points (there will be at least 3 discussion
assignments); Pharmacology Project counts as 15 points and three exams are 17 points
each for a total of 51 points of the final grade. Each chapter has a corresponding End of
Chapter Activity. At the end of the semester, these activities are averaged and the
resulting average is converted to points by multiplying the average by 0.08 points for a
maximum of 8 points. To review, your grade will consist of a maximum of 100 points.

Exams are worth 51 points, Learning Modules are 21 points, Discussions are 5 points,
End of Chapter Activities are 8 points and the Pharmacology Project is 15 points. There
is an opportunity for extra credit in this course. You may take an optional final exam
over the drug classifications on pages 341 to 356. This is a multiple choice exam and
your grade will be converted to points by multiplying the grade by 0.05 points. This can
add a maximum of 5 points to your total score. This is the only extra credit that I offer.
The following is the grading criteria for the course: 90-100 points = A, 80-89 = B, 70-79
= C, 60-69 = D, Below 60 = F.
Course Policies
The first two weeks of school, there will be a time set aside for chat times with the
instructor. These sessions are an optional part of the course. In order to facilitate the
lines of communication between the instructor and the students, the instructor will be
available on-line Tuesday at 10am to 11 am, and 6 pm to 7pm to answer questions.
Remember, there are times that computers and the Internet may have problems. If you
have an immediate question please feel free to WebCT e-mail or call my office. Please
use appropriate language and respect for others when utilizing the chat session.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S Office 903.782.0743
Course # HPRS 2300

Course Description

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Patient Safety

Drug Sources
labels.
Drug Resources
medications.
Dosage Calculations

dosages.
fever.
treatment.
medications.
cancer treatment.
system medications.

cell stabilizers.
coughs.
supplements.
Langerhans.
patient education.

healthcare.
Course Schedule
Week 15 Exam 3


= C, 60-69 = D, Below 60 = F.
Course Policies
ADA Statement

Term: 101S Office 903.782.0743
Course # HPRS 2300

Course Description

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Patient Safety

Drug Sources
labels.
Drug Resources
medications.
Dosage Calculations

dosages.
fever.
treatment.
medications.
cancer treatment.
system medications.

cell stabilizers.
coughs.
supplements.
Langerhans.
patient education.

healthcare.
Course Schedule
Week 15 Exam 3


= C, 60-69 = D, Below 60 = F.
Course Policies
ADA Statement

Term: 101S Office 903.782.0743
Course # HPRS 2300

Course Description

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Patient Safety

Drug Sources
labels.
Drug Resources
medications.
Dosage Calculations

dosages.
fever.
treatment.
medications.
cancer treatment.
system medications.

cell stabilizers.
coughs.
supplements.
Langerhans.
patient education.

healthcare.
Course Schedule
Week 15 Exam 3


= C, 60-69 = D, Below 60 = F.
Course Policies
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Faculty Donna Gatlin
College Year: 2010-2011 Office Not Applicable
Term: 101S Office 903.782.0734
Section: 65 dgatlin@parisjc.edu
Course # HPRS 2301

Course Title Pathophysiology
Course Description
A study of the pathology and general health management of diseases and injuries
across the life span. Topics include etiology, symptoms, and the physical and
psychological reactions to diseases and injuries.

1. An Introduction to Human Disease Pathology and Pathophysiology Correlations,
Leonard V. Crowley, Jones & Bartlett, Eighth Edition, ISBN:10: 0-7637-6591-0
2. An Introduction to Human Disease: Student Workbook, Leonard V. Crowley, Jones
and Bartlett, Eighth Edition, ISBN: 978-0-7637-7467-7
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The student will have accomplished the following course outcomes:
1. Analyze cell pathology in relationship to its response and adaptation to injury.
2. Distinguish environmental factors, physical, psychosocial, and cognitive
characteristics of various diseases and conditions.
3. Identify implications of therapeutic interventions for common diseases and
conditions.
4. Examine hemodynamic disorders, inflammation and infection.
5. Compare and contrast various surgical pathologies and analyze surgical treatments
including surgical treatments for cancer.
Learning Objectives
General Concepts of Disease
1. Define the common terms used to describe diseases.
2. List the major categories of human disease.
3. Explain the approach that a practitioner uses to make a diagnosis and decide on a
patient's treatment.
Course # HPRS 2301.65 – Donna Gatlin Page 1 of 10

4. Describe the various types of screening, diagnostic tests and procedures that can
help the practitioner in making a diagnosis and deciding on proper treatment.
Cells and Tissues
1. Identify the structures of normal cells.
2. Explain how cells are organized to form tissues including the fundamental structure
of the 4 basic types of tissues.
3. Explain how tissues are organized to form organ systems.
4. Describe the three germ layers and their derivatives.
5. Describe how cells utilize the genetic code within DNA chains to convey genetic
information to daughter cells during cell division.
6. Illustrate how materials move in and out of cells.
7. Discuss adaptation of cells to changing conditions.
8. Describe cell injury, cell death, apoptosis and ways an aging cell may become
vulnerable to injury.
Chromosomes, Genes, and Cell Division
1. Describe how chromosomes are studied and explain how a karyotype is
determined.
2. Compare mitosis and meiosis.
3. Compare spermatogenesis and oogenesis and explain the implications of abnormal
chromosome separations in the course of meiosis in older women.
4. Describe the inheritance pattern of genes and define dominant, recessive,
codominant, and sex-linked inheritance.
5. Describe the HLA system and explain its application to organ transplantation and its
relation to disease susceptibility.
6. Describe the applications and limitations of gene therapy.
Inflammation and Repair
1. List the characteristics and clinical manifestations of an acute inflammation.
2. Describe the possible outcomes of an inflammatory reaction.
3. Name the chemical mediators of inflammation. Explain how they interact to
intensify the inflammatory process.
4. Describe the harmful effects of inflammation and why it is sometimes necessary to
suppress the inflammation process.
5. Compare inflammation and infection naming some of the terms used to describe
infections.
Immunity, Hypersensitivity, Allergy, And Autoimmune Diseases
1. Discuss the body’s defense mechanism and list the basic features of cell-mediated
and humoral immunity. Explain the role of lymphocytes in the immune response.
2. List the five classes of antibodies and explain how they differ from one another.
3. Compare immunity and hypersensitivity. Explain why it is sometimes necessary to
suppress the immune response and describe how this is accomplished.
4. Summarize the theories concerning the pathogenesis of autoimmune disease, the
clinical manifestations, and the methods.
Pathogenic Microorganisms
1. Explain the characteristics by which bacteria are classified. List and describe the
major groups of pathogenic bacteria.
2. Describe the mechanism by which antibiotics inhibit the growth and metabolism of

bacteria. Explain the adverse effects of antibiotics.
3. Describe the procedures used in antibiotic sensitivity testing and explain the
principles by which the results are interpreted.
4. List the common infections caused by chlamydiae, mycloplasmas, and rickettsiae.
5. Explain the mode of action of virus infections and describe how the body's response
to viral infection leads to recovery.
6. Describe the bodily defenses against viral infections.
7. Discuss the spectrum of infections caused by fungi. Explain the factors that
predispose to systemic infections and methods used to treat fungus infections.
Animal Parasites
1. List the common parasitic infestations that affect humans.
2. Explain how these infestations are acquired.
3. Describe their clinical manifestations and explain their clinical significance.
Communicable Diseases
1. Explain how communicable diseases are transmitted and controlled.
2. List the common sexually transmitted diseases. Describe their major clinical
manifestations, complications, and methods of treatment.
3. Describe the symptoms of herpes infection in men and women. Explain the effects
on sexual partners. Describe how herpes may affect a fetus or newborn infant of an
infected mother.
4. Understand the pathogenesis of human immunodeficiency virus infections, the
groups affected, and the effects of the virus on the immune system. List the major
clinical manifestations of the infection, the significance of a positive test for antibody
to the virus, and methods of preventing spread of the infection.
Congenital and Hereditary Diseases
1. List the common causes of congenital malformations and their approximate
incidence.
2. List the abnormalities of sex chromosomes and describe their clinical
manifestations.
3. Describe some of the common genetic abnormalities and explain four methods of
transmission.
4. Compare the methods of transmission and clinical manifestations of
phenylketonuria, Tay-Sachs and hemophilia.
5. Describe some of the more important malformations resulting from intrauterine
injury.
6. Explain multifactorial inheritance. Give an example of a multifactorial defect and
describe the relevant factors.
7. Understand the various methods available to make a diagnosis of a congenital
abnormality in the fetus and explain the process of amniocentesis.
Neoplastic Disease
1. Compare the general characteristic of benign and malignant tumors. Explain how
tumors are named. List the common exceptions to standard terminology.
2. Summarize the features of lymphoid, skin, teratomas and primitive cell tumors.
3. Differentiate between infiltrating and in situ carcinoma. Explain the role of the Pap
smear in early diagnosis of a neoplasm.
4. Explain the etiological factors in neoplastic disease and discuss the mechanisms of

the body's immunologic defenses against tumor.
5. List methods that are used in the diagnosis of tumors.
6. Summarize the principal modalities of tumor treatment, including advantages,
disadvantages, and common side effects of each technique.
7. Explain how leukemias are classified. Describe the clinical manifestations of each
type of response to treatment.
8. Discuss multiple myeloma including clinical manifestations and methods of
diagnosis.
9. Compare the incidence and survival rates for various types of malignant tumors.
Explain the mechanisms of late recurrence. Define the role of adjuvant therapy in
preventing late recurrence.
Abnormalities of Blood Coagulation
1. Describe the functions of blood vessels and platelets in controlling bleeding.
2. Explain the three phases of coagulation and list the coagulation factors involved.
3. List the most common clinically significant disturbances of hemostasis and describe
their clinical manifestations.
4. Describe the laboratory tests used to evaluate hemostasis.
Circulatory Disturbances
1. Describe the causes and effects of venous thrombosis.
2. Explain the pathogenesis of pulmonary embolism. Describe the clinical
manifestations and compare the techniques of diagnosis.
3. Describe the causes and effects of arterial thrombosis.
4. Describe the pathogenesis of the hypercoagulable states sometimes seen in
patients with carcinoma.
5. Discuss embolisms that result from foreign material.
6. Describe the pathogensis and classification of edema.
Cardiovascular System
1. Explain the basic anatomy and physiology of the heart as they relate to the common
types of heart disease.
2. Discuss heart disease in relation to pump function.
3. Describe the common causes of valvular heart disease. Explain the effects and
outline the methods of treating valvular heart disease.
4. Discuss endocarditis including complications.
5. Describe the pathogenesis of coronary heart disease. List the four most important
risk factors. Describe the clinical manifestations of coronary heart disease. Explain
the methods of treatment and their rationales.
6. List the major complications of myocardial infarction and describe the symptoms.
7. Explain the general principles applied to the diagnosis and treatment of coronary
heart disease and myocardial infarction.
8. Describe the adverse effects of hypertension on the cardiovascular system and the
kidneys.
9. Discuss diseases that result from primary disease of the heart muscle.
10. Differentiate between pathogenesis of acute and chronic heart failure. Describe the
pathogenesis of each and list the principles of treatment.
11. Differentiate between the pathogenesis and clinical manifestations of arteriosclerotic
and dissecting aneurysms of the aorta. Explain the treatment.

12. List the diseases affecting veins, their clinical manifestations, and methods of
treatment.
Hematopoietic and Lymphatic Systems
1. Describe the composition of blood and describe its functions. Explain the functions
of the lymphatic system.
2. Explain the principles by which anemias are classified and treated.
3. List and describe the usual causes of iron deficiency anemia and treatment.
4. List the usual causes of anemia including diagnosis and treatment.
5. Describe the causes and effects of polycythemia, thrombocytopenia and
hemochromatosis.
6. Describe the cause and clinical manifestations of infectious mononucleosis.
7. List and describe the neoplasms that effect the lymph nodes and lymphocytic
leukemia.
8. Describe alterations of the immune reactions in diseases of the lymphatic system.
9. Explain the role of the spleen in protecting the body against infection. Describe the
effects of a splenectomy on the body's defenses and relate them to the
management of the patient who has had a splenectomy.
Respiratory System
1. Explain the basic anatomic and physiologic principles of ventilation and gas
exchange.
2. Describe ventilation and gas exchange including pulmonary function tests.
3. Describe the causes, clinical effects, complications, and treatment of pneumothorax
and atelectasis.
4. Discuss the classification of pneumonia and pneumocystis pneumonia and the
treatment.
5. Describe the historic facts of tuberculosis. Explain the possible outcome of an
infection and describe methods of diagnosis and treatment.
6. Differentiate between bronchitis and bronchiectasis.
7. List the anatomic and physiologic derangements in chronic obstructive lung
disease. Explain its pathogenesis. Describe the clinical manifestations and
methods of treatment.
8. Describe the pathogenesis and manifestations of bronchial asthma and respiratory
distress syndrome.
9. Explain the causes and effects of pulmonary fibrosis. Describe the special
problems associated with asbestosis.
10. List the major types of lung carcinoma. Describe the clinical manifestations of lung
carcinoma and explain the principles of treatment.
Breast
1. Describe the normal structure and physiology of the breast. List and define the
common developmental abnormalities.
2. Explain the applications and limitations of mammography in the diagnosis of breast
disease.
3. List and describe three common breast disorders.
4. Describe the clinical manifestations of breast carcinoma. Explain the methods of
diagnosis and treatment.
5. Explain the role of heredity in the pathogenesis of breast carcinoma.

Female Reproductive System
1. Describe the common infections of the genital tract and relate them to sexually
transmitted diseases.
2. Describe the clinical manifestations and complications of endometriosis.
3. Describe cervical polyps.
4. Discuss cervical dysplasia and cervical carcinoma.
5. Describe endometrial hyperplasia, polyps, carcinoma and uterine myomas.
6. List the common causes of irregular uterine bleeding and dysmenorrhea.
7. Describe cysts and tumors of the ovary and diseases of the vulva.
8. Explain the pathogenesis, clinical manifestations, and treatment of toxic shock
syndrome.
9. Categorize the common methods of artificial contraception; explain how they
prevent conception, and describe their possible side effects.
10. Describe the abnormalities of the genital tract that most commonly develop in
women whose mothers took diethylstilbestrol during pregnancy.
Prenatal Development and Diseases Associated with Pregnancy
1. Explain the processes of fertilization, implantation, and early development of the
ovum, including the origin of the decidua, fetal membranes, and the placenta.
2. Describe how amniotic fluid is formed and eliminated. Identify the conditions
leading to abnormal amounts of amniotic fluid.
3. Explain the causes and effects of spontaneous abortion and ectopic pregnancy.
4. Explain the causes and clinical manifestations of an ectopic pregnancy.
5. Identify and explain the problems that may occur after failure of contraceptive pills
or an intrauterine device.
6. Describe the mechanism and clinical manifestations of the problems associated
with abnormal attachment of the placenta within the uterus and abnormal
attachment of the umbilical cord.
7. Differentiate identical and fraternal twins. Describe how zygosity can be determined
from examination of the placenta.
8. List the disadvantages of a twin pregnancy.
9. Classify the types of gestational trophoblast disease. Explain their prognoses and
describe the methods of treatment.
10. Explain the pathogenesis, clinical manifestations, diagnostic criteria, and methods
used to treat hemolytic diseases of the newborn.
Urinary System
1. Describe the normal structures of the kidneys and their functions.
2. Explain the pathogenesis, clinical manifestations, treatment of glomerulonephritis,
nephrotic syndrome, nephrosclerosis and diabetic nephropathy.
3. Describe the clinical manifestations and complications of urinary tract infections.
4. Discuss the role of vesicoureteral reflux in urinary tract infections.
5. Explain the mechanism for formation of urinary tract calculi. Describe the
complications of stone formation. Explain the manifestations of urinary tract
obstructions.
6. Discuss the incidence of foreign bodies in the urinary tract and obstruction of the
urinary tract.
7. Differentiate the major forms of cystic diseases of the kidney and their prognoses.

Name the more common kinds of tumors affecting the urinary tract.
8. Discuss various diagnostic tests for the urinary system.
9. Describe the causes, clinical manifestations, and treatment of renal failure.
Male Reproductive System
1. Name the anatomic structures of the male reproductive system and their functions
2. List and describe common sexually transmitted diseases.
3. Differentiate between prostatitis, benign prostatic hyperplasia and prostatic
carcinoma, describing clinical manifestations and methods of treatment.
4. List and describe structural problems affecting the male reproductive system
5. Compare and contrast carcinoma of the penis, testes and prostate.
Liver and the Biliary System
1. Describe the normal structure of the liver and explain the functions of the liver as the
related to the major diseases of the liver.
2. List the major causes of the liver injury and describe their effects on hepatic
function.
3. Compare the three major types of viral hepatitis in terms of their pathogenesis,
incubation period, incidence of complications, and frequency of carriers. Explain
the diagnostic tests used to identify each type of viral infection and describe
methods of preventions.
4. Explain the adverse effects of excess alcohol intake on liver structure and function,
including cirrhosis of the liver.
5. Discuss Reye's Syndrome, including the relationship to the effect of viral illness and
aspirin.
6. Explain how gallstones are formed and describe their causes and effects.
7. Describe the diagnosis and treatment for tumors of the gallbladder and liver.
8. Compare the three major causes of jaundice.
Pancreas and Diabetes Mellitus
1. Discuss the structure and function of the pancreas.
2. Describe the pathogenesis and treatment of pancreatitis.
3. Describe the pathogenesis, manifestations, complications, and prognosis of
pancreatic cystic fibrosis.
4. Differentiate between the two principal types of diabetes.
5. Compare and contrast hypoglycemia and hyperglycemia.
6. List the types of tumors found in the pancreas.
Gastrointestinal Tract
1. Identify the major types of cleft lip and cleft palate deformity.
2. Explain the pathogenesis of dental caries periodontal disease and describe
prevention and treatment.
3. Discuss the diseases of the esophagus.
4. Name the common disorders of the gastrointestinal tract, describe their clinical
manifestations, and explain methods of diagnosis and treatment.
5. Name and describe the most common diagnostic evaluations of the gastrointestinal
tract.
Water, Electrolyte, and Acid-Base Balance
1. Explain the basic concepts relating to the regulation of the concentration of
electrolytes in the body. List the major ions in the intracellular and extracellular fluid

and define units of concentration.
2. Describe the common disturbances of water balance and their pathogenesis.
3. Explain the physiologic mechanisms concerned with the control of pH and describe
the pathogenesis of the four common disturbances.
4. Define the role of the kidneys and the lungs in the regulation of acid base balance.
Endocrine Glands
1. Explain the normal physiologic functions of the pituitary hormones, name the
common endocrine disturbances, and describe the methods of treating each
disturbance.
2. Describe the major disturbances of thyroid function and their clinical manifestations,
and explain methods of treatment.
3. Define the causes and effects of parathyroid dysfunction, and describe methods of
treatments.
4. Explain the normal physiologic functions of the adrenal cortex and medulla, name
the common endocrine disturbances resulting from dysfunction, and describe
methods of treatment.
5. Discuss the function of the gonads.
6. Understand the concept of ectopic hormone production by nonendocrine tumors.
7. Explain how stress affects the endocrine system.
8. Name the adverse health effects of obesity. Describe the surgical procedures used
to treat massive obesity, and explain the rationale for each procedure.
Nervous System
1. Describe the normal structure and basic functions of the brain, meninges, and
cerebrospinal fluid as they relate to neurologic disease.
2. Define muscle tone and voluntary motor activity and relate these concepts to the
two forms of muscle paralysis.
3. Explain the pathogenesis and clinical manifestations of closure defects of the
central nervous system. Name the techniques used for prenatal diagnosis.
4. Describe the pathogenesis and manifestations of hydrocephalus and relate them to
treatment measures.
5. Differentiate between the two principal types of stroke in regard to pathogenesis,
prognosis, and treatment.
6. Name the causes, manifestations, and treatment of transient ischemic attacks.
7. Describe the pathogenesis, manifestations, and treatment of congenital cerebral
aneurysm.
8. Name the types of disorders that affect the central nervous system and explain their
origin, pathogenesis, clinical manifestations, and treatment.
9. Explain the pathogenesis, major clinical manifestations, and general principles of
treatment of tumors of the nervous system.
10. Discuss the pathogenesis, clinical manifestations, and treatment of peripheral nerve
disorders.
11. Describe the neurologic manifestations of the HIV infection.
Musculoskeletal System
1. Describe the structure and function of the musculoskeletal system.
2. Name the common congenital abnormalities of the skeletal system.
3. List the three major types of arthritis, describe their pathogenesis and clinical

manifestations, and explain the methods of treatment.
4. List and describe the types of fractures
5. Describe the causes and effects of osteomyelitis, bone tumors and osteoporosis
and name the methods of treatment.
6. Describe the manifestations, complications, and treatment of avascular necrosis.
7. Describe the structure of the intervertebral disks and explain their function.
Describe the clinical manifestations of scoliosis and intervertebral disk disease.
8. Compare the pathogenesis and clinical manifestations of muscular disorders.
Name and describe the common types of each.
9. Describe the pathogenesis, manifestations, and treatment of myasthenia gravis.
Course Schedule
Week 1: General Concepts of Disease, Cells and Tissues
Week 2: Chromosomes, Genes, and Cell Division, Inflammation and Repair
Week 3: Immunity, Hypersensitivity, Allergy, and Autoimmune Diseases, Pathogenic
Microorganisms
Week 4: Animal Parasites, Communicable Diseases
Week 5: Congenital and Hereditary Diseases, Neoplastic Disease
Week 6: Abnormalities of Blood Coagulation, Circulatory Disturbances
Week 7: Cardiovascular System, Hematopoietic and Lymphatic System
Week 8: Respiratory System, Breast
Week 9: Female Reproductive System, Prenatal Development and Diseases
Associated with Pregnancy
Week 10: Urinary System, Male Reproductive System
Week 11: Liver and the Biliary System, Pancreas and Diabetes Mellitus
Week 12: Holiday
Week 13: Gastrointestinal Tract, Water, Electrolyte, and Acid-Base Balance
Week 14: Endocrine Glands, Nervous System
Week 15: Musculoskeletal System and Review
Week 16: Final Exam

In order to pass HPRS 2301, the student must achieve a final average grade of 70 or
higher. the final grade will consist of: 3 exams (averaged & proctored) 15%: 6
assignments 20%: 6 chapter reviews 65% (not proctored, open book) Chapter review
and assignments become active at 08:00 and inactive at 23:55 Assignments will consist
of quizzes /instructor assignments. All assignments are to be completed in Word. At the
end of the Semester the student will be provided an opportunity to “re-take” one of the 6
Chapter Reviews in an attempt to increase the student’s grade average. The student
will request the date and time that the student will be available, during the specified
time, to re-take the chapter review so the instructor will be able to re-open the
appropriate chapter review for the student. Any request after the specified time will not
be accepted. The Chapter Reviews/Exams are timed. The time starts when the Chapter
Review/Exam is opened by the student and runs continuously. Therefore, it is essential
that the student arrange for undisturbed time for the Chapter Review/Exam as any
questions answered after the time limit will not receive any credit. Chapter Reviews are

equal to "Tests" and are to be the individual work of each student. (Please refer to
academic honest in this document.) The three Exams are mandatory and proctored at
one of the testing centers at Paris, Greenville, Sulphur Springs. It is the responsibility of
the student to make the appointments for the Exams during the hours of the appropriate
testing center. Exams are closed books and no papers, books, etc will be allowed in the
testing area. Failure to complete any of the three Exams will result in a failure for the
course regardless of the grades earned by the Assignments/Chapter Reviews. Ten
points will be deducted for all late work. I do not give the grade "I" Incomplete. If your
Assignments/Chapter Reviews/Exams are not completed on the last day of the course,
a grade of "0" will be awarded, the grades averaged and the grade submitted to the
business office. Up to the last day of Exam three, I will assist the student in any way I
am able. If you have any questions e-mail or call. Answers to the student workbook will
be found on the homepage.
Course Policies
If you would like to chat with the instructor on any assignment, concern, or question,
please make an appointment and the instructor will join you at the chat room on the
date and time agreed upon.
Attendance Policy:
The student must initiate a request for withdrawal from the course. Failure to take any
of the proctored 3 Exams will result in a grade of "F" in the course.
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Serina Omori
College Year: 2010-2011 AP #135
Term: 101S 903-782-0363
Section: .01 somori@parisjc.edu
Course # (HRGY 1301)

Course Title (Jewelry Techniques I)
Course Description
An introduction to the proper use and care of hand tools along with industry
terminology, skill development in layout, sawing, filing, drilling, and hand finishing
to industry standard.
Credits: 3 SCH = 1 lecture and 8 laboratory hours per week, from approved
course list

Jewelry Making by Murray Bovin, The Complete Metal-smith by Tim McCreight,
The Theory & Practice of Goldsmithing by Erhard Brephol
Program Outcomes
1.) Demonstrate knowledge of the proper use and care of tools and equipment, materials,
industry nomenclature, and ethics.

2.) Demonstrate skills in metal fabrication techniques: lay‐out, sawing, filing, drilling, finishing,
polishing, soldering, shaping, forming, doming, wire rolling and drawing.

3.) Demonstrate skills in casting techniques: wax carving, injecting, spruing, treeing, investing,
and casting centrifugally and by vacuum.
4.) Demonstrate skills in jewelry repair: sizing, chain repair, tipping, beading, pronging, and
plating.
5.) Demonstrate skills in setting single and multiple round and fancy‐cut stones into various
mounting styles.
6.) Demonstrate proficient skills appropriate to their employment in the jewelry industry using
the level II JA bench test criteria.
7.) Demonstrate a professional image in the workplace and at interviews to obtain a job in the
jewelry industry.
Course Outcomes
Layout, saw out, file and emery small objects within a specified tolerance to
jewelry industry standards; describe and display preventive maintenance
techniques on all classroom equipment and hand tolls used in the course; identify
names and uses of common jewelry hand tools; and list the different
characteristics of materials (i.e. emery paper) used in jewelry repair.
Learning Objectives
Upon successful completion of this course the student will be able to:
1.) Use a scribe, steel rule, and dividers to layout geometric shapes within .1mm
of specified measurement
2.) Saw out geometric shapes maintaining a uniform distance of .5mm outside of
the layout line
3.) File and emery small objects within .1mm of specified measurement
4.) Identify the names and uses of common jewelry hand tools
5.) Demonstrate the ability to properly care for and maintain jewelry making tools
and equipment.
6.) Understand the characteristics of different materials used in jewelry making

and repair (for example 4/0 emery paper compared to 2/0 emery paper)
Course Schedule
Meeting time and location:
Monday through Thursday 8:00am – 4:00pm
Applied Science Building Room #133

August 30th - September 23rd, 2010
Class Date Lecture Project #
August 30th Layout #101
Layout #102
August 31st Layout #103
September 1st Sawing #1 #104
September 2nd Sawing #2 #105
September 7th Filing #1 #106
September 9th Filing #2 #107
September 14th Emery #1 #108
September 21st Frame #111
Students are evaluated in three areas:
Projects: Projects are graded to jewelry industry standards as established by the

Industry Steering Committee. Students must complete each project with a grade
of “70” or higher. If a student’s project did not qualify to the required 70%
competency level, the student must repeat the project until he or she acquires
the skills set needed to meet the qualification. Each student must demonstrate a
competent use and execution of skills to the 70 % rule in order to advance to the
next course. Students will take a written final at the end of this course.
Tests: Test and/or papers will be graded on the accuracy of the answers and
content of a scale from 0 to 100. Test and/or papers must be completed to pass
the course. Expect a test the last day of each quarter!
Workplace Ethics: Students will be graded in 10 different areas: appearance,

attitude, interest in work, work habits, preparation, attentiveness, participation,
following instructions, confidentiality, and attendance. Any one of these could
cause a student to fail any one of the courses.
Final Course Grades:
Project average 80%

Workplace Ethics 10%
Final Test 10%
Final course grade 100%
Course Policies
Attendance:
Students are allowed 7 hours of absence per course without penalty. Students
Workplace Ethics grade will be penalized one letter grade for each additional 7
hours missed thereafter.
Hours missed per course Grade reduction
0-7 --------------------------------------------------- No reduction
8-14 --------------------------------------------------- 1 letter grade
15-22 --------------------------------------------------- 2 letter grades
23-30 --------------------------------------------------- 3 letter grades
Attendance may be taken at any time during the class period.
Students that arrive later than five minutes after the scheduled class time will be
counted as tardy. A tardy equates into one hour missed time.
Cellular Phones, Beepers and Personal Digital Assistants (pda’s)
If a cell phone or beeper does sound during class the student may be asked to leave for
Please refer to the 2010/2011 Student Handbook for Students Standard of Conduct and
Students Rights and Responsibilities.
ADA Statement
Center. The institution is committed to assisting qualified students as completely
as possible. Services include the arrangement for accommodations and services
to allow equal access to education opportunities for students with disabilities.
Students with disabilities are encouraged to contact a counselor or advisor from
the Counseling/Advising Center by calling 903.782.0426 (Paris campus),
903.454.9333 (Greenville Center), or 903.885.1232 (Sulphur Springs Center) to
arrange an appointment to begin the process.

Term: 101S 903-782-0363

Course Title (Jewelry Techniques II)
Course Description
Continuation of Jewelry Techniques I. Introduction to machine-polishing flat and
curved surfaces.
course list
Prerequisite: Completion of HRGY 1301

Program Outcomes


plating.
mounting styles.
jewelry industry.
Course Outcomes
Polish concave, flat, convex, and round surfaces to a high shine; describe and
display preventative maintenance techniques on all classroom equipment and
hand tools used in the course, identifying names and uses of common jewelry
hand tools; and list the different characteristics of materials (i.e. polishing
compounds, buffs and brushes, ultrasonic cleaners and solutions) used in jewelry
repair.
Learning Objectives
1.) List the steps in the polishing process in the correct order
2.) Polish concave, flat, convex, and round surfaces to a high shine to industry
standards
3.) Identify the names and uses of common jewelry hand tools
4.) Demonstrate the ability to properly care for and maintain jewelry making tools
and equipment
5.) Understand the characteristics of different materials used in jewelry making

and repair (i.e. polishing compounds, buffs and brushes, ultrasonic cleaners and
solutions)
Course Schedule

September 27th – October 20th, 2010
Sept. 27th Piercing #112
Sept. 30th Polishing #113
Oct. 6th Polishing #114
Oct. 13th #115


Project average 80%

Final Test 10%
Course Policies
Attendance:
0-7 --------------------------------------------------- No reduction
8-14 --------------------------------------------------- 1 letter grade
15-22 --------------------------------------------------- 2 letter grades
23-30 --------------------------------------------------- 3 letter grades
If a cell phone or beeper does sound during class the student my be asked to leave for
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0363

Course Title (Jewelry Techniques III)
Course Description
Continuation of Jewelry Techniques II with an emphasis on rolling mill and wire
drawing techniques, torch soldering, and ring fabrication.
course list

Program Outcomes


plating.
mounting styles.

jewelry industry.
Course Outcomes
Solder single and multiple jointed pieces with different angled joints; produce
square wire with the proper use of a rolling mill, list the basic steps of soldering
as used in the fabrication process; and describe the characteristics of metals
commonly used in jewelry.
Learning Objectives
1.) List the steps of soldering in the correct order
2.) Solder single and multiple jointed pieces with different angled joints to
industry standards
3.) Properly use and maintain the rolling mill to industry standards.
4.) Use the rolling mill to produce square wire within .1mm the specified
measurement.
5.) Understand and describe the characteristics of different metals commonly

used in jewelry.
Course Schedule

October 21st - November 16th , 2010
Oct. 21st Soldering Project #1 #116
Oct. 27th Soldering Project #2 #117
Nov. 1st Wedding Band #1 #118
Nov. 4th Wedding Band #2 #119
Nov. 10th Charm Bracelet #120


Project average 80%

Final Test 10%
Course Policies:
Attendance:
0-7 --------------------------------------------------- No reduction
8-14 --------------------------------------------------- 1 letter grade
15-22 --------------------------------------------------- 2 letter grades
23-30 --------------------------------------------------- 3 letter grades
ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-0363

Course Title: Jewelry Techniques IV
Course Description
Continuation of Jewelry Techniques III with emphasis on chain making, catch
construction, ring sizing, and mass finishing.
course list

Program Outcomes


plating.
mounting styles.

jewelry industry.
Course Outcomes
Solder single and multiple jointed pieces with different angled joints; produce
round wire with proper use of a draw plate; half round wire with the proper use of
rolling mills; list the basic steps of soldering as used in the fabrication process;
and describe the characteristics of metals and solders commonly used in jewelry.
Learning Objectives
1.) List the steps of soldering in the correct order
2.) Solder single and multiple jointed pieces with different angled joints to
industry standards
3.) Properly use a draw plate to produce round wire within .1mm the specified
measurement
4.) Use the rolling mill to produce half round and flat wire within .1mm the
specified measurement.
5.) Fabricate wedding bands with a ¼ size tolerance of the specified ring size.
7.) Understand and describe the characteristics of different metal and solders
commonly used in jewelry.
Course Schedule

November 17th – December 15th , 2010
Class Date Lecture for Project #
Nov. 17th #121
Nov. 18th #122
Nov. 22nd #123
Dec. 7th #124
Dec. 8th #125
Dec. 9th #126
Dec. 13th #127
Dec. 15th Recognition Ceremony 10:00am


Project average 80%

Final Test 10%
Course Policies:
Attendance:
0-7 --------------------------------------------------- No reduction
8-14 --------------------------------------------------- 1 letter grade
15-22 --------------------------------------------------- 2 letter grades
23-30 --------------------------------------------------- 3 letter grades
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Harrel Harrison

Term: 101S 903-782-0451
Section: .30 hharrison@parisjc.edu
Course # HRGY 1304

Course Title (Jewelry Techniques IV )
Course Description
Continuation of Jewelry Techniques III including advanced skills in layout, sawing, filing, emery, polishing,
and soldering with limited fabrication.

Bovin, Murray. Jewelry Making, Bovin Publishers, Forest Hill, NY 1979
Brepohl, Erhard. The Theory and Practice of Goldsmithing, Brynmorgen Press,
Portland, Main, 2001
McCreight, Tim. The Complete Metalsmith, Davis Publications, Inc. Worcester, Mass., 1991
Texas Institute of Jewelry Technology, Reference Manual of
Jewelry Related Terms.
Wooding, Robert. Diamond Setting, Dry Ridge Company, Erlanger, Kentucky, 2002
Program Outcomes
1. Demonstrate knowledge of the proper use and care of tools and equipment, materials, industry
nomenclature, and ethics.
2. Demonstrate skills in metal fabrication techniques: lay‐out, sawing, filing, drilling, finishing,
3. Demonstrate skills in casting techniques: wax carving, injecting, spruing, treeing, investing, and
casting centrifugally and by vacuum.
4. Demonstrate skills in jewelry repair: sizing, chain repair, tipping, beading, pronging, and plating.
5. Demonstrate skills in setting single and multiple round and fancy‐cut stones into various mounting
styles.
6. Demonstrate proficient skills appropriate to their employment in the jewelry industry using the level
II JA bench test criteria.
7. Demonstrate a professional image in the workplace and at interviews to obtain a job in the jewelry

industry.
Course Outcomes
Solder single and multiple jointed pieces with different angle joints; produce round wire with the proper
use of a draw plate and half round wire with the proper use of rolling mills; list the basic steps of
soldering; and describe the characteristics of metals commonly used in jewelry.
Learning Objectives
The student will learn to saw, file, polish and drill.
The student will learn to solder and size rings down.
The student will learn to size rings up using two methods the dove‐tail and butt joint.
Course Schedule
August 30 Registration, class syllabus, learner information
August 31 Layout geometric shapes
Sawing, filing, emery, polish, precision drilling and soldering.
September 8 600
Clean‐up castings

September 14 601
Size rings down

September 20 602
Size rings up (dove‐tail and butt joint)

September 23 Test

Projects are graded to jewelry industry standard.

Students must complete each project with a grade of “70” or better
The course grade is compiled as follows:
Technical Average 80%
Written final 10%
Grade scale: A: 90‐100 B: 80‐89 C: 70‐79 F: 69‐0
Course Policies
Students are allowed 7 hours of absence per course without penalty. Students will be penalized
one letter grade for each additional 7 hours missed thereafter.
0‐7 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ No reduction
8‐14 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 1 letter grade
15‐22 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 2 letter grades
23‐30 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 3 letter grades
Students that arrive later than five minutes after the scheduled class time will be counted as tardy.
A tardy equates into one hour missed time.
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Shannon Calloway
College Year: 2010-2011 Office AS126
Term: 101S 903-782-0249
Section: .01 scalloway@parisjc.edu

Course # HRGY 1309

Course Title: Casting I

Course Description
Emphasis on lost wax casting, both centrifugal and vacuum processes. Includes introduction to
wax carving.
Prerequisite(s): There are no prerequisites

Murry Bovin, Jewelry Casting, Bovin Publishers, Forest Hill, N.Y. 1979
Tim McCreight, Complete Metalsmith, Davis Publications, Inc. Worcester, Mass., 1982
Program Outcomes
A. Student Learning Outcomes for Jewelry Technology
1. Demonstrate knowledge of the proper use and care of tools and
equipment, materials, industry nomenclature, and ethics.

2. Demonstrate skills in metal fabrication techniques: lay‐out, sawing,
filing, drilling, finishing, polishing, soldering, shaping, forming,
doming, wire rolling and drawing.

3. Demonstrate skills in casting techniques: wax carving, injecting,
spruing, treeing, investing, and casting centrifugally and by vacuum.
4. Demonstrate skills in jewelry repair: sizing, chain repair, tipping,
beading, pronging, and plating.
5. Demonstrate skills in setting single and multiple round and fancy‐
cut stones into various mounting styles.
6. Demonstrate proficient skills appropriate to their employment in
the jewelry industry using the level II JA bench test criteria.
7. Demonstrate a professional image in the workplace and at
interviews to obtain a job in the jewelry industry.
Course Outcomes
Demonstrate the basic casting processes and uses of related materials and equipment for the
manufacture of jewelry articles; maintain industry standards with regard to quality
craftsmanship while emphasizing time management in conjunction with all skills learned and
developed; and prepare, invest, and burnout wax patterns. Identify the types, characteristics,
and uses of waxes and tools used in preparing wax models; and list units of weight and
characteristics of metal alloys

Learning Objectives
The student will cast a ring without mold lines or distortion
Will cast cluster tops to fit a specific ring
Will demonstrate injecting wax, cleaning wax patterns and spruing
Will demonstrate knowledge of both centrifugal and vacuum casting methods
Course Schedule
Aug 30 #28 GENTS FLAT TOP (4)
SEPT. 6 #39 OVAL BEZEL RING (3)
SEPT. 13 #14 CHANNEL RING (10)
SEPT. 20 #1A SEVEN STONE CLUSTER TOP (3)
#18 5 STONE FISHTAIL RING (10)

Projects are graded to industry standards.
The final semester grade for HRGY 1309 is complied as
Daily Grades 05%
Ethics 10%
Written Final 10%
Final Semester Grade 100%
Grade scale:
A: 90 ‐ 100
B: 80 ‐ 89.5
C: 70 ‐ 79.5
F: 0 ‐ 69.5
Course Policies
Students are expected to attend classes on a regular and punctual basis. Absences are
considered unauthorized unless the absences are due to sickness, emergencies, or sanctioned
school activities. Student’s mastery of course content is measured by the individual instructor’s
criteria. Students may be dropped from classes upon the recommendation of the instructors
who believe the students have been unjustifiably absent or tardy a sufficient number of times to
preclude meeting the course objectives. Students dropped from classes will receive a grade of
“W”. Each instructor must have on file in the respective Dean’s office attendance policies,
course objectives, and other relevant materials which comprehensively describe the course
procedures applicable to each class section. Instructors are responsible for making all students
enrolled in their classes aware of these procedures. When it becomes necessary to drop a
student from a class, the instructor will submit a properly completed withdrawal notice to the
appropriate Dean. Instructor withdrawals of students may be appealed by student pursuant to
the college’s Academic Appeals procedures.
ADA Statement
If you have a disability and may require some accommodation in taking any of the jewelry
courses, be sure to fill out and submit the "Request, for Accommodation" to the Counseling
Center in the Alford Center.

Paris Junior College Anthony Underwood
College Year: 2010-2011 Applied Sciences RM 107
Term: Fall 903-782-0383
Section: 01 tunderwood@parisjc.edu

Course Title (Fundamental Gemology I)
Course Description
Fundamentals of Gemology I (Diamonds)
Credits: 3 -1- 8

Gemology for the Jeweler by Orlando S. Paddock and Malcolm Heuser
Gemstones of the World by Walter Schumann
Dealer’s Book of Gems by M. Sevdermish and A. Mashiah
Diamond Grading ABC by Verena Pagel-Theisen G.G. F.G.A.
Laboratory-Grown Diamonds by Branko Deljanin and Dusan Simic
Program Outcomes
Demonstrate skills in the identification, plotting, and grading of diamonds, including the
detection of various enhancements and treatments.
Course Outcomes
This course will familiarize the student in the study of diamonds in gemology. Emphasis
is given to the development of skills in grading of diamonds through competent use of
techniques using the industry standard 4 “C’s” as the foundation for he quality
determination, detection of clarity enhanced diamonds, and the proper use and care of
gemological laboratory instruments for successful outcomes.
Learning Objectives
Week 1
Introduction to the properties of the diamond
History and background of diamond recovery and methods
Occurrences and processing of diamond material
Diamond marketing and distribution infrastructures
Kimberly Processes
Course # (HRGY 1313) – A. Underwood Page 1 of 3

Week 2
The fashioning of the diamond
History and development of the round brilliant cut
Ideal diamond proportions for the round brilliant cut diamond
Weight estimations for the round brilliant cut diamond
Week 3
Grading the diamond for proportions and cut
Grading the diamond for clarity
Grading the diamond for color
Grading the fancy shaped brilliant cut diamond
Week 4
Fancy colored diamonds
Diamond Simulants
Man-made/lab created synthetic diamonds HPHT-grown and CVD grown diamonds
Re-cutting of old style or damaged diamonds
Evaluation protocol for mounted diamonds
Course Schedule
Class meets Monday through Thursday from 8:00am until 4:00pm for the 1st four weeks
of each semester

HRGY 1313 is primarily a lecture, demonstration, and lab process. Lecture topics will be
from reading assigned to the student from the textbooks and handouts for the course.
There will be three essay tests from the lecture content given in class, therefore note
taking skills are vitally important for successful completion of the course.
Course Policies
Grading Policies
25% of the student’s grade is associated with the daily grade based on student
participation and attendance. 35% of the student’s grade is based on either essay, short
answer, or scan-tron weekly tests averaged. 20% of the student’s grade is based on
completion of the 20 diamond evaluation and plotting laboratory projects requirement.
In order to receive a certificate in Gemology, each student must complete all projects and
tests to a final grade average of 2.0 for the semester; (this equates to a 70 minimum
score). The Gemology Certificate requires the minimum of 15 credit hours for
completion. To fulfill the additional hours needed, the student is required to take the
course titled *Applied Jewelry Practices or Business Ethics Class offered Friday
mornings.
Student Withdraw Policy
A grade of an “X” for incomplete course work may be given for lost time due to a
catastrophic incident and only if 75% of the course work is complete and a minimum of 7
diamond lab certificates are completed. An incomplete will be scheduled at the
convenience of the instructor and must be completed within a timely manner that follows
the pace of the gemology course. A faculty review committee must approve a waiver or
release for absences caused by catastrophic incidents. Students desiring to repeat the

semester must repeat all projects and tests. No exceptions will be considered.
Cell/Mobile phones or other communication devices must be deactivated (turned

completely off) during class. Texting is not tolerated during class time or in the
classroom.
Paris Junior College prohibits the use of any tobacco products (cigarettes and smokeless
tobacco) within any buildings on the PJC Campus. Cigarette smoking and the use of
smokeless tobacco products are permitted outdoors.
ADA Statement
Services for students with disabilities are coordinated by the Counseling/Advising Center.
The institution is committed to assisting qualified students as completely as possible.
Services include the arrangement for accommodations and services to allow equal
access to education opportunities for students with disabilities.
(Greenville Center), or 903.885.1232 (Sulphur Springs Center) to arrange an appointment
to begin the process.


Term: Fall 903-782-0383

Course Title (Fundamentals of Gemology II)
Course Description
Fundamentals of Gemology II (Colored Stones)
3.1.8
Prerequisite(s): HRGY 1313 recommended

Handbook of Gem Identification by Richard T. Liddicoat
Program Outcomes
Demonstrate knowledge of gem formation, recovery, species and variety of gems, lore
and superstition.
Demonstrate skills in the use and proper care of laboratory instruments including loupe,
microscope, polariscope, spectroscope, refractometer, dichroscope, scales, and
measuring devises.
Demonstrate skills in gem identification of colored gem stones, synthetics, enhanced
and treated stones.
Course Outcomes
This course will familiarize the student in the study of gemology. Emphasis is given to
the development of skills in gemstone identification, detection of imitation, synthetic gem
materials and the proper use and care of gemological laboratory instruments.
Learning Objectives
By the use of lectures, discussions and demonstrations with hands on experience, the
student will become familiar with the tools, nomenclature and theory associated with the
gemological process used to identify gemstones.
Week 1
Gemstone classification and Characteristics
Crystallography
Chemical Physical and Optical Properties
Hardness and Toughness of Gems and Minerals

Cleavage and Fracture associated with Gems and Minerals

Week 2
Light and Polarity Theories for Gems and Minerals
Nomenclature and Protocol for the Polariscope and Moor’s Sphere
Nomenclature and Protocol for the Dichroscope
Nomenclature and Protocol for the Refractometer
Causes of Color for Gems and Minerals
Fluorescence and Phosphorescence of Gems and Minerals
Light Spectrum Related to Gems and Minerals
Light Phenomena Associated with Gems and Minerals
Week 3
Protocol and definitions for Inclusions associated with Gems and Minerals
Densities of Gems and Minerals
Nomenclature and Protocol for Hydrostatic and Heavy Liquids testing
Gemologist’s Loupe and Binocular Microscope
Nomenclature and Protocol for the 10X corrected loupe and the Mark X Gemolite
Microscope
Laboratory Protocol for the Gemologist
Imitation and Composite Gemstones
Week 4
Gemstone treatments
Synthetic Gemstones Process
The Study of Specific Gemstone Species and Varieties
Corundum
Chrysoberyl
Beryl
Tourmaline
Turquoise
Topaz
Course Schedule
Class meets Monday through Thursday from 8:00am until 4:00pm for the 2nd four
weeks of each semester.

The Course format for the gemology course HRGY 1313.01 is primarily a lecture and
lab process. Lecture will be from the reading assigned to the student from the textbooks
for the course. There will be three essay tests from the lecture content given in class;
therefore note taking skills are detrimental for successful completion of the course.
Course Policies
Grading policies
participation and attendance. 35% of the student’s grade is based on either essay,

short answer, or scan-tron weekly tests averaged. 20% of the student’s grade is base
on the completion of the 450 colored gemstone identification laboratory projects
requirements. In order to receive a certificate in Gemology, each student must
complete all projects and tests to a final grade average of 2.0 for the semester; (this
equates to a 70 minimum score). The Gemology Certificate requires the minimum of 15
credit hours for completion. To fulfill the additional hours needed, the student is
required to take the course titled Applied Jewelry Practices or a Business Ethics Class.
A grade of an “X” for incomplete course work may be given for missed class time due to
a catastrophic incident if 75% of the course work is complete and a minimum of 300
colored gemstone lab identifications have been completed. An incomplete will be
scheduled at the convenience of the instructor and must be completed within a timely
manner that follows the pace of the gemology course. A faculty review committee must
approve a waiver or release for absences caused by catastrophic incidents. Students
desiring to repeat the semester must repeat all projects and tests. No exceptions will be
considered.
Cell/Mobile phones or other communication devices must be deactivated (turned
classroom.
Paris Junior College prohibits the use of any tobacco products (cigarettes and
smokeless tobacco) within any buildings on the PJC campuses. Cigarette smoking and
the use of smokeless tobacco products are permitted outdoors.
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Faculty Name Frank Poye
College Year: 2010-2011 Office location AS 132
Term: Fall Office Phone 903 782-0361
Section: 01 email fpoye@parisjc.edu

Course Title (Basic Horology I)
Course Description
Introduction to disassembly, cleaning, and reassembly of the basic watch using time
proven methods. Emphasis on nomenclature.
Prerequisite(s): none

The Watch repairer’s manual by Henry B. Fried
Bench Practices for Watch and Clockmakers by Henry B. Fried
Bestfit #111 Encyclopedia of Watch Material Part #1 and Part #2
Program Outcomes
Graduates will use material systems and recognize the names and function of parts
common to all mechanical watches. They will demonstrate skills by making tools and
watch parts including turning parts on a watchmakers lathe to 1/100 mm tolerance,
reflecting industry standards. They will perform disassembly, cleaning, oiling, repair and
adjustment operations on multi-function mechanical movements, automatic, and calendar
movements. They will practice electronic theory related to quartz analog and digital
timepieces. Graduates will demonstrate a professional image in the workplace and at
interviews to obtain a job in the watch industry.
Course Outcomes
Practice the use of watch nomenclature and materials systems to the functions and parts
common to all mechanical watches.
Learning Objectives
Disassemble and reassemble a standard watch; identify and order basic watch parts using
available catalogues and bulletins; clean and overhaul a basic mechanical watch, fit
crowns, crystals, and gaskets to specified cases; describe basic principles of hairspring
manipulation.
Course Schedule
Unit Time Alloted
Orientation 1 hrs. Aug. 30
Intro.to hand Tools 2 hrs. Aug. 30
Measuring Devices 2 hrs. Aug. 30
Nomenclature 42 hrs. Aug 31 - Sept. 9
Material Systems 17 hrs. Sept.13 - Sept.15
Crowns Crystals & Gaskets 27 hrs. Sept 16 - Sept.22
Intro to Cleaning 3 hrs. Sept 22
Hairspring Theory 2 hrs. Sept.23
Written Final Exam

Intro to Hand Tools ,Organization, Cooperation, Completion of paper work ,Measuring
Tools, Nomenclature, Accuracy Development of hand eye coordination, Part
identification, avoiding broken or lost parts, Clean work, tools, bench lay out, Material
Systems, Accurate watch identification, Part number identification, Clarity of paper
work, Crowns, Crystals, Gaskets, Case tubes, Proper type and fit of crowns, Proper type
and fit of gasket, Proper type and fit of gaskets, Proper type and fit of case tubes, Proper
appearance with case style, ~~ Intro to Cleaning Lecture/Written test questions
Hairspring Theory Lecture/Written test questions
a. Composite grade on all projects = 80%
b. Work Ethics = 10%
c. Composite grade on written final test = 10%
Course Policies
1. This is in no way intended to void, modify or circumvent any of the policies

and/or procedures contained in the Student Handbook and events calendar; but
rather, is intended to define and emphasize certain of these policies as they apply
to the Horology Division students.
2.
In order to achieve either a Certificate or an Associate Degree in Horology, a
student must have accumulated a 2.0 grade point average (GPA). A grade of at
least "C" is required for completion of all Horology courses. In order to receive
credit for a Horology course, the student must complete all projects listed in the
instructor's guide for that course. A grade of 70 or better is required to complete a
project and advance to the next project.
3.
A student may withdraw from a class with a "W" on or before November 18,
2010.
4.
Project grades are based on, first and foremost, the quality of workmanship;
secondly, when applicable, speed and quantity of work done.
5.
Absolutely no makeup tests will be given. Students who know that they will be
absent from school on the date of a test may request a prior test--not to interfere
with other class schedules.
6.
If you have a disability and / or may require some accommodation be sure to fill
out and submit the "Request for Accommodation" form (see Barbara Thomas). If
an accommodation is not requested in advance, we cannot guarantee the
availability of the accommodation on site.
7.
No semester finals will be given for any student unless all projects are completed.
II. Work Benches
1.
Bench tops will be clean at the end of each day. Remove all trash, lint and dust. Put all
tools in bench drawers or tool boxes at the end of each day. Watch movements or other
unfinished work may be left in the center of the bench pad, provided these movements
are covered and protected from dust and lint.
2.
Turn off each bench light when not in use.
3.
Each student is responsible for his/her bench and surrounding area. Do not keep books on
the floor.
4. Keeping the lab clean is a must for proper Watchmaking. There is no clean up crew
that takes care of the lab. The first 15 minutes of each Tuesday morning is devoted to
cleaning the entire lab and each student will be required to enthusiastically take part in
the clean up of the room in addition to their own daily work bench clean up.
III.
Personal Property and Accessories
1.
Tool boxes will be kept in the storage cabinet when not in use.
2.
Coats and hats shall be kept on the racks provided. Walk areas and isles between the
benches must be kept clear for other students and the instructor. Ones with purses should
keep these items in one of the larger bench drawers and out of sight. P.J.C. assumes no
responsibility for loss of personal items or tools.
IV. Safety Codes

1.
There are certain elementary precautions that MUST be observed at any time one is
working with sharp objects, machines or hot metals. Therefore, shorts, halters, open toed
shoes, sandals and sleeveless shirts are not permitted in classroom areas.
2.
Safety glasses, face shields and other special equipment shall be used in all designated
areas.
3.
Radios, tape recorders, CD players, cell phones and any other distracting or sound
producing or reproducing device may only be used at the instructor’s discretion.
4.
Students must pass a safety test before the start of each semester.
Students must be checked out on a piece of equipment before they use it.
V. Dress Code
In addition to proper dress for safety the following requirements must be observed. These
requirements are part of the overall Work Ethics
Instructor Approved ~ White Lab Coats ~ must be worn at all times. Students are
required to have Their Lab Coats laundered at least once a week or more often if they
become soiled. Dirty clothes and lab coats will not be allowed in the Lab. Lab coats are
to be hung in the coat rack using coat hangers. Lab coats are not to be laid over the back
of You’re chair or just tossed somewhere as You dash out the door. Do not wear your lab
coat outside of the lab. Students working on the lathe may elect to wear approved
jewelers aprons. Students without proper attire will be dismissed from class. This
dismissal will have a negative affect on the Students grade for Work Ethics.
No hats of any kind are to be worn in the Lab.
Students are expected to practice proper Personal Hygiene and exercise cleanliness in all
things while in the lab.
VI. Use of Tobacco
1. No smoking is allowed in any classroom area. Tobacco in any form is also not
allowed.
2. The use of Alcohol or Drugs while in the Lab is not only dangerous and disrespectful,
but also just plan stupid. If you must act like a fool then you will be treated as one.
Students found to be under the influence will be dismissed from class.
3. There will be no food or drink allowed in the lab at any time or for any reason. Do not
bring food or drink trash into the lab.
These rules are simple and have been kept to the minimum consistent with good work
habits and an acceptable state of cleanliness and safety within the work area. Neglect or
violations of these rules will be considered as evidence of either a lack of interest or
aptitude, and will be dealt with accordingly.
Nature of the Course
All of the Horology courses at Paris Junior College center on the study of watches and
the repair and service of watches. They are presented in a lab environment using lectures
and demonstrations followed up with practical projects performed by the student in the
lab.
ADA Statement



Course Title (Basic Horology II)
Course Description
Continuation of Basic Horology I with emphasis on identification and functions of parts
common to all mechanical watches.
Prerequisite(s): HRGY 1319

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The student will practice the use of watch nomenclature and materials systems to the
functions and parts common to all mechanical watches, operate watch cleaning machines,
and apply theory of hairspring manipulation.
Learning Objectives
Name the parts and explain the functions of the power unit, winding mechanism, train
wheels, escapement, dial train, and setting mechanism of a standard watch; identify
symbols and all movement styles within the watch repair industry; identify type, style,
and size of watch cases; and explain the techniques used in case part replacement.
Course Schedule
Unit Time
Basic Cleaning and
Overhauling 87 hrs. Aug. 30 - Sept. 20
Intro to Hairspring Truing 23 hrs. Sept. 21 - 23

Basic Cleaning and Overhauling Proper care and use of watch cleaning machines as per
instruction. Layout of cleaning work area, Techniques for watch cleaning to industry
standards with no dirt, residue, rust , foreign matter left on watches after cleaning and
overhauling. Proper oiling techniques, Proper use of other lubricants. Proper care of
watch projects without loss or damage to components. General overall appearance of
project when turned in. Introduction to Hairspring Truing Project hairsprings are first
distorted by the instructor and must be formed back to original shape on frosted glass
using tweezers. Grading is based on trueness in the round and in the flat of hairsprings
corrected by the student. This will determine pass or fail of the project. The spring is
either good or it is not. Attention to detail in the degree of accuracy, cleanliness and the
absence of scratches and other damage also affect the grade. Appearance is also
important as is the neatness of the work area and tools. Written test questions
Course Policies

2.
3.
2010.
4.
5.
6.
7.
II. Work Benches
1.
2.
3.
the floor.
III.
1.
2.
IV. Safety Codes

1.
2.
areas.
3.
4.
V. Dress Code
VI. Use of Tobacco
allowed.

lab.
ADA Statement


Course # ( HRGY 1321 )

Course Title ( Basic Horology III )
Course Description
Continuation of Basic Horology II. Emphasis on replacement of case parts as well as
hairspring manipulation.
Prerequisite(s): HRGY1320

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The student will practice the staffing and poising of balance wheels, be able to identify
different types of staffs, collets and studs and true watch train wheels.
Learning Objectives
Staff a basic balance wheel; discuss the correct method of truing it within the watch; and
identify the different types of collets and studs.
Course Schedule
Unit Time
Hairspring Truing Stage #2 10 hrs. Aug.30 - Aug.31
Train Wheel Truing 20 hrs. Aug 31 - Sept.2
Balance Staff Fitting 16 hrs. Sept. 7 - Sept 9
Staff Removal 4 hrs. Sept. 9
Balance Truing 10 hrs. Sept. 9 – Sept.13
Poising 30 hrs. Sept 14 – Sept. 21
Fit Hairsprings 2 hrs. Sept. 22
Balance Theory 3 hrs. Sept. 22
Staff 11 Ligne Mens Watch 15 hrs. Sept. 22 - Sept. 27
Hairspring Truing Stage#2 Continuation of Intro. To Hairsprings from HRGY 1320.

Grading is based on trueness in the round and in the flat of hairsprings corrected by the
student. The spring is either up to industry standards or it is not. Attention to detail in the
degree of accuracy, cleanliness and the absence of scratches and other damage will affect
the grade. Appearance is also important as is the neatness of the work area and tools.
Train Wheel Truing Train wheels distorted by the instructor are corretcted by the student.
Grading is based on trueness in the round and in the flat of the finished wheel. Nine ( 9 )
watch train wheels and three( 3 ) train wheel in selected watches are trued in this project.
The wheels are either up to industry standards or not. Attention to detail in the degree of
accuracy, cleanliness and the absence of scratches and other damage will affect the grade.
Appearance is also important as is the neatness of the work area and tools. Balance Staff
Fitting Knowledge or staff nomenclature and the relationship to the balance wheel are a
factor in assuring a precise and secure fit in the staffing process. Accurate ordering,
cleanliness, tool selection and organization are key points. Scratches, loss of parts and
other damage on projects will affect the grade. Staff Removal Knowledge or staff
nomenclature and the relationship to the balance wheel are a factor in assuring a precise
removal of balance staffs from balance wheels. Nine( 9 ) Wheels are used in this project.
Accuracy, cleanliness, tool selection and organization are key points. Scratches, loss of
parts and other damage on projects will affect the grade. Balance Truing Knowledge or
staff nomenclature and the relationship to the balance wheel are a factor in assuring a
precise truing of balance wheels. Nine( 9 ) Wheels are used in this project. Accuracy,
cleanliness, tool selection, tool use and organization are key points. Scratches, loss of
parts and other damage on projects will affect the grade. Poising Proper knowledge of the
theory and practice of balance wheel poising are essential. Nine ( 9 ) wheels are used in
this project. Accuracy, cleanliness, tool selection, tool use and organization are key
points. Scratches, loss of parts and other damage on projects will affect the grade. Fit
Hairsprings Proper knowledge of the theory and practice of hairspring installation are
essential. Nine ( 9 ) wheels are used in this project. Proper alignment of the installation,
Accuracy, cleanliness, tool selection, tool use and organization are key points. Scratches,
loss of parts and other damage on projects will affect the grade. Balance Theory Lecture /
Testable Staff 11 Ligne Mens Watch Replace the balance staff, Clean , Overhaul , and
electronically time a gents 11 ½ ligne mechanical wrist watch. Accuracy in part ordering,
installation of the staff cleanliness, tool selection, tool use and organization are key
points. Scratches, loss of parts and other damage will affect the grade. The overall
appearance on projects and the daily rate ( gain or loss of time when running) and
positional errors of the finished watch are also key grading factors. Written test questions

Course Policies

2.
3.
2010.
4.
5.
6.
7.
II. Work Benches
1.
2.
3.
the floor.
III.
1.
2.
IV. Safety Codes

1.
2.
areas.
3.
4.
V. Dress Code
VI. Use of Tobacco
allowed.
lab.
ADA Statement

Course # (HRGY 1322 )

Course Title ( Basic Horology IV )
Course Description
Continuation of Basic Horology III. Emphasis on replacement and repair of damaged
parts in mechanical watches.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Student will staff, clean, lubricate and electronically time a basic mechanical watch and
collet and stud hairsprings
Learning Objectives
True a train wheel; pin a hairspring to the collet and stud to achieve basic performance
standards; discuss the use and limitations of a truing caliper; and identify correct
specifications of a true wheel.
Course Schedule
Unit Time
Staff 10 Ligne Mens Watch 30 hrs. Aug. 30 - Sept. 8
Staff 6 ¾ Ligne Ladies Watch 30 hrs. Sept. 8 - Sept. 16

Hairspring Pinning 30 hrs. Sept. 20 -
Sept. 27

Staff 10 Ligne Mens Watch Replace the balance staff, Clean , Overhaul , and
electronically time a gents 10 ligne mechanical wrist watch. Accuracy in part ordering,
installation of the staff cleanliness, tool selection, tool use and organization are key
points. Scratches, loss of parts and other damage will affect the grade. The overall
appearance on projects and the daily rate ( gain or loss of time when running) and
positional errors of the finished watch are also key grading factors Staff 6 ¾ Ligne Ladies
Watch Replace the balance staff, Clean , Overhaul , and electronically time a gents 6 ¾
ligne mechanical wrist watch. Accuracy in part ordering, installation of the staff
parts and other damage will affect the grade. The overall appearance on projects and the
daily rate ( gain or loss of time when running) and positional errors of the finished watch
are also key grading factors Hairspring Pinning Collet and stud nine ( 9 ) wrist watch
hairsprings. Proper pinning of these components are necessary to assure a secure and
accurate fit . Selection of component collet and studs , centering of the collet , leveling
the spring at the collet, collet and stud pin fitting and finishing , leveling of the stud are
key factors. Removal of these components will then be performed. Accuracy ,
parts and other damage will affect the grade. Written test questions
c. Composite grade on written final test = 10
Course Policies

2.
3.
2010.
4.
5.
6.
7.
II. Work Benches
1.
2.
3.
the floor.
III.
1.
2.
IV. Safety Codes

1.
2.
areas.
3.
4.
V. Dress Code
VI. Use of Tobacco
allowed.
lab.
ADA Statement



Term: 101S 903-782-0249
Section: 01 scalloway@parisjc.edu

Course Title (Stone Setting I)
Course Description
Focus on bead setting and bright cutting techniques.
Prerequisite(s): Completion of HRGY 1349

Program Outcomes
styles.

industry.
Course Outcomes
Students will be able to identify four types of stone setting gravers, classify them as to their particular use,
and modify them to fit his/her hand properly; assemble two prong pushers and identify their uses; layout
and saw metal plates to a specific dimension; bead set a stone, bright cut the surrounding metal, and
embellish the edges with a mill grain pattern.
Learning Objectives
The student will:
set stone setting gravers into handles, recall the numbering system for each graver, adjust them to
fit their hand, grind the appropriate spine on each graver type, sharpen the correct face angle
appropriate to the graver type, and polish the bellies to a mirror finish;
set up prong pushers to fit their hand;
cut metal plates to a tolerance of .1mm, fit and solder them into rings;
use the correct size bur for the stone size, seat the stone to the appropriate crown height;
bead‐set a stone and bright‐cut the surrounding metal;
choose the correct beading tool, millgrain tool, for the size of the plate;
assemble and set 4 prong rings keeping heads straight and stones centered and level;
Course Schedule
All projects are preceded by a project lecture
8/30 Introduction to the Third Semester of the Jewelry Program
Syllabus and Classroom Guidelines
Lecture on Safety and Honesty
Separate castings into job envelopes
8/31 Lecture: Gravers ‐ Pushers
Cut fit and solder 5 bright cut plates into rings.
9/6 Labor Day

9/7 Set up stone setting gravers
9/13 Lecture: Burs, Beading tool, Millgrain tool
301 Gents square ring
9/16 302 Fabricate and set 4 prong rings
9/22 303 Bright Cut Ring Hexagon
9/23 Written Final

The course grade is compiled as follows: Technical Average 80%
Written final 10%
Grade scale: A: 90‐100 B: 80‐89 C: 70‐79 F: 69‐0
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE
0‐7 hours no reduction 8‐14hours 1 letter grade,
15‐22 hours 2 letter grades 23‐30 hours 3 letter grades
ADA Statement



Paris Junior College Ulla Raus

Term: 101S 903-782-0474
Section: 01 uraus@parisjc.edu

Course Title (Stone Setting II)
Course Description
Continuation of Stone Setting I with focus on prong setting, repronging, retipping, and
rebeading.

Program Outcomes
styles.

industry.
Course Outcomes
Students will be able to bead set stones, bright cut the surrounding metal, embellish the edges with
millgrain and bevels proportioned to the stone; fabricate and set six prong rings; strengthen or replace
prongs and beads with metal; perform butt and dovetail sizing methods.
Learning Objectives
The student will :
bead set stones centered and level, bright cut the metal to a smooth finish, and apply double
millgrain and bevels to keep stone and plate in proportion;
assemble and set 6 prong rings keeping heads straight and stones centered and level;
size rings to the correct size without pits and gaps in solder seam while maintaining the original
width and thickness.
re‐tip, re‐prong, and re‐bead broken prongs and tips matching the existing prongs in size and
shape;
assemble baker top rings and set stones using the saw‐cut and chasing methods, keeping stones
centered and level;
polish all projects to a mirror finish removing all scratches while maintaining the integrity of the
piece;
apply texture finishes even and matching;
perform a final cleaning and inspection for delivery to the customer.
Course Schedule
Lectures and demonstration precede each project.
9/27 304 Bright Cut Gents Ring, double millgrain
9/30 305 Fabricate and set 6 prong rings
10/6 306 Bright Cut Gents Ring, bevel
10/11 307 Retip
308 Reprong

10/12 309 Rebead
Lecture: Metals and Alloys
10/13 310 Fabricate and set Baker top rings chased
10/18 311 Fabricate and set Baker top rings sawcut
10/20 Apply Mizzy and Florentine finshes
Written Final

Written final 10%
Grade scale: A: 90‐100 B: 80‐89 C: 70‐79 F: 69‐0
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE
ADA Statement




Term: 101S 903-782-0249

Course Title (Stone Setting III)
Course Description
Continuation of Stone Setting II including fancy bright cuts, bezel sets, and gypsy sets.
Credits: 3SCH =1 lecture and 8laboratory hours per week, from approved course list

Program Outcomes
styles.

industry.
Course Outcomes
Continuation of Stone Setting II including the setting of multiple stones such as channel-setting, cluster-
setting, and fishtail-setting.
Learning Objectives
The student will:
assemble ring components straight and level without pits and gaps in solder seam
set multiple stones into a domed cluster keeping stones level and conforming to the dome shape,
set multiple stones on a curve keeping stones level and conforming to the curve
undercut seats for channels keeping stones at even depth,
saw‐cut prongs to set stones into fishtail mountings keeping stones level and at the correct depth
identify the properties of gemstones in order to set stones without causing .damage
Course Schedule
10/21 312 Fabricate and set Cluster Rings ()
10/27 313 Set Fishtail Wedding Bands (
11/1 314 Set Channel Rings (
11/4 Lecture: The property of Gemstones
315 Fabricate and set Four Prong Fishtail rings
11/10 316 Fabricate and set Illusion Rings
11/16 Written final


Written final 10%
Grade scale: A: 90‐100 B: 80‐89 C: 70‐79 F: 69‐0
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0451

Course Title (Stone Setting III)
Course Description
Course Description: Continuation of Stone Setting II including fancy bright cuts, bezel sets, and gypsy
sets.
Credits: 3SCH = 1lecture and 8laboratory hours per week, from approved course list

Program Outcomes
styles.

industry.
Course Outcomes
Set an oval stone by chasing the metal to tighten the stones; set stones into tubes and tighten the metal
around them with a burnisher; and undercut seats and use a chasing tool to tighten the stones in freeform
rings. Set stones into fancy shaped plates and into a ring cutting the spaces into a diamond pattern;
channel set single-row mountings; identify major parts of gemstones; list steps for taking jewelry with
gemstones for repair; and explain the importance of honesty in the jewelry business.
Learning Objectives
SET UP GRAVERS
The student will learn to correctly assemble and size each type of graver to their hand
FOUR PRONG RINGS

The student will learn to assemble, size and set round stones in four prong rings.
OVAL SIX PRONG RINGS
The student will learn to assemble, size and set oval stones in two styles of oval
heads.
Course Schedule
September 27 603
Four prong rings assemble, size and set stones
Gravers to be set up
October 4 604
Oval six prong rings(double gallery) assemble, size and set stones
October 11 605
Oval six prong rings assemble, size and set stones


October 14 Test

EVALUATION

Written final 10%
Grade scale: A: 90‐100 B: 80‐89 C: 70‐79 F: 69‐0
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE
0‐7 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ No reduction
8‐14 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 1 letter grade
15‐22 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 2 letter grades
23‐30 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 3 letter grades
ADA Statement



Term: 101S 903-782-0249

Course Title (Stone Setting IV)
Course Description
Continuation of Stone Setting III including fancy bright cuts, bezel sets, gypsy sets, and the setting of
multiple stones such as channel-setting, cluster-setting, and fishtail-setting.

Program Outcomes

styles.
industry.
Course Outcomes
Set an oval stone by chasing the metal to tighten the stones; set stones into tubes and tighten the metal
around them with a burnisher; and undercut seats and use a chasing tool to tighten the stones in freeform
rings. Set stones into fancy shaped plates and into a ring cutting the spaces into a diamond pattern;
channel set single-row mountings; identify major parts of gemstones; list steps for taking jewelry with
gemstones for repair; and explain the importance of honesty in the jewelry business.
Learning Objectives
The student will:
set stones into Gypsy mountings keeping stones level and centered and metal smooth,
set stones into tubes keeping stones level and metal smooth,
flat‐set stones into free forms, level and at matching depth,
bead‐set stones and bright‐cut a star pattern keeping stone centered and at the correct depth,
bead‐set and bright‐ cut multiple stones on a curve, keeping stones level, at the same depth and
conforming to the curve.
will be able to order the correct components and estimate costs of labor and material for profit.
Course Schedule
11/17 317 Set and Gypsy Rings
11/22 318 Assemble and set Tube Rings
11/24 Thanksgiving
11/29 319 Flat‐set Freeform Rings
11/30 Lecture: Ordering Findings and estimating cost and profit
320 Fabricate four prong and six prong rings
12/2 321 Three‐stone Bright Cut Ring

12/7 322 Star Cut Ring
12/9 323 Bearing Bezel Pendant
12/14 324 Bearing Bezel Pendant
12/15 Written Final
Lecture: Preparation for 4th Semester

Written final 10%
Grade scale: A: 90‐100 B: 80‐89 C: 70‐79 F: 69‐0
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE
ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-0451

Course Title (Stone Setting IV)
Course Description
Continuation of Stone Setting III including fancy bright cuts, bezel sets, gypsy sets, and the setting of
multiple stones such as channel-setting, cluster-setting, and fishtail-setting.
Credits:3 SCH = 1 lecture and 8 laboratory hours per week, from approved course list

Program Outcomes
1. I Demonstrate knowledge of the proper use and care of tools and equipment, materials, industry
styles.

industry.
Course Outcomes
Set stones into a cluster and into illusion plates; set multiple stones following a curve and separating
prongs with saw cuts; separate metal to create multiple beads; and fabricate a pendant to hold a square
stone.
Learning Objectives
The student will learn assemble pendant and bail and bezel set stone
The student will learn to retip prongs
The student will learn solder post to earring and set stones
The student will learn to assemble bracelet links and set stones
The student will learn to repair a box catch and install “8” safety latch
The student will learn to repair different types of chains
Course Schedule
October 18 606
Bezel pendant assemble and set stone
October 21 607
Retip 4 and 6 prong rings
October 26 608
Earrings solder posts to head and set stones
October 28 609
Bracelet links assemble and set stones
November 2 610
Box catch repair tongue and install figure “8” safety latch


November 4 611
Chain repair: cable, curb, box, “S”, loose rope, rope,
herringbone
November 9 JA Test November 9‐15, 2010


EVALUATION

Written final 10%
Grade scale: A: 90‐100 B: 80‐89 C: 70‐79 F: 69‐0
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE
0‐7 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ No reduction
8‐14 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 1 letter grade
15‐22 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 2 letter grades
23‐30 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 3 letter grades

ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0249

Course # HRGY 1348

Course Title: Jewelry Repair and Fabrication I

Course Description
Emphasis on techniques, fabrication, and repair of jewelry. Introduction to equipment and
techniques of jewelry manufacturing including assembly of findings.

Tim McCreight, The Complete Metalsmith, Davis Publications, Inc. Worcester, Mass., 1982
Reference Manual of Terms for Jewelry and Related Technologies, Paris Junior College, Paris,
Texas, 1988
Program Outcomes


3. Demonstrate skills in casting techniques: wax carving, injecting, and
Course Outcomes
Size and reshank rings using the dovetail and butt‐joint method of sizing; assemble a ring guard
to accept a solitaire ring; demonstrate correct layout and drilling of holes in a ring; fabricate
projects from flat stock, wire and tubing using intricate soldering, sawing and filing techniques.
Learning Objectives
The student will size rings using both butt joint and dovetail methods with out pits in the solder
joints, while maintaining width and thickness of the shank.
Will layout for a pave’ and drill keeping the holes round while maintaining spacing.
Will fabricate using raw materials to create a piece of jewelry to accept gemstones
Will fabricate using components to complement a center ring
Course Schedule
WEEK 1 POLISH: GENTS FLAT TOP
FREEFORM RING
DRILL FLAT TOP
WEEK 2 DOVETAIL: GENTS RING
DRILLING: WEDDING BAND
WEEK 3 RESHANK LADIES RING
FABRICATE BC HINGE
FABRICATE CLUSTER PENDANT
WEEK 4 ASSEMBLE RING GUARD

The final semester grade for HRGY 1348 HRGY 1349is complied as follows:
Ethics 10%
Written Final 10%
Grade scale: A: 90 ‐ 100
B: 80 ‐ 89.5
C: 70 ‐ 79.5
F: 0 ‐ 69.5
Course Policies
“W”.
Each instructor must have on file in the respective Dean’s office attendance policies, course
objectives, and other relevant materials which comprehensively describe the course procedures
applicable to each class section. Instructors are responsible for making all students enrolled in
their classes aware of these procedures.
When it becomes necessary to drop a student from a class, the instructor will submit a properly
completed withdrawal notice to the appropriate Dean. Instructor withdrawals of students may
be appealed by student pursuant to the college’s Academic Appeals procedures.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0451
Course # HRGY 1348

Course Title (Jewelry Repair/Fabrication)
Course Description
Emphasis on techniques, fabrication, and repair of jewelry. Introduction to equipment and techniques of
jewelry manufacturing including assembly of findings.
Program Outcomes
styles.

industry.
Course Outcomes
Size and reshank rings using the dovetail and butt-joint method of sizing; assemble a ring guard to accept
a solitaire ring; demonstrate correct layout and drilling of holes in a ring; fabricate projects from flat stock
wire and tubing using intricate soldering, sawing, and filing techniques; assemble both four and six prong
heads to shanks; list the melting points of precious metals used in the jewelry industry; explain the uses
of acids and chemicals used in the jewelry industry; and identify the types of solders used in the jewelry
industry
Learning Objectives
The student will learn to solder multi heads into a ring and set stones
The student will learn assemble head and shank and set stone
The student will learn to fabricate a locket in sterling silver
Course Schedule
November 16 612
Multi‐stone setting, solder heads in place and set stones
November 17 613
Assemble marquise head and shank and set stone.
November 22 614
S/S dome locket
November 23 Test

EVALUATION


Workplace Ethics 10% Written final 10%

Grade scale: A: 90‐100 B: 80‐89 C: 70‐79 F: 69‐0
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE
0‐7 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ No reduction
8‐14 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 1 letter grade
15‐22 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 2 letter grades
23‐30 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 3 letter grades
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0249

Course # HRGY 1349

Course Title: Jewelry Repair and Fabrication II

Course Description
Emphasis on techniques, fabrication, and repair of jewelry. Introduction to equipment and
techniques of jewelry manufacturing including assembly of findings.


Marry Bovine, Jewelry Casting, Bovine Publishers, Forest Hill, N.Y. 1979
Tim McVeigh, The Complete Metal smith, Davis Publications, Inc. Worcester, Mass., 1982
Reference Manual of Terms for Jewelry and Related Technologies, Paris Junior College, Paris,
Texas, 1988
Program Outcomes


3. Demonstrate skills in casting techniques: wax carving, injecting, and

Course Outcomes
Perform prong retipping and repronging on both four and six prong settings; combine
knowledge and skills to perfect polishing techniques and different styles of surface finishes on
metals; demonstrate electroplating of different metals over other metals; repair of multiple
styles of chain; maintain industry standards with regard to quality craftsmanship while
emphasizing time management in conjunction with all skills learned and developed.
Learning Objectives
The student will size rings, using both butt joint and dovetail methods, without pits in the solder
joints, while maintaining width and thickness of the shank.
Will repair chains without visible solder joints or distortion of the links
Will electroplate with even color and without blemishes from polishing

Course Schedule
WEEK 5 CHAIN REPAIR: CABLE, FRENCH ROPE
BOX, LOOSE LINK ROPE, SERPITINE,
SOLDER JUMP RING
RING SIZING: BUTT JOINT

WEEK 6 ASSEMBLE BRACELET
REMOVE LINK AND REPAIR BC
WEEK 7
RETIP 4 AND 6 PRONG RINGS
DOVETAIL LADIES RING
FINISHES: MIZZY
SATIN
ELECTROPLATING

The final semester grade for HRGY 1348 HRGY 1349is complied as follows:
Ethics 10%
Written Final 10%
Grade scale: A: 90 ‐ 100
B: 80 ‐ 89.5
C: 70 ‐ 79.5
F: 0 ‐ 69.5
Course Policies
“W”.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0451
Course # HRGY 1349

Course Title (Jewelry Repair/Fabrication II)
Course Description
Continuation of Jewelry Repair/Fabrication I with emphasis on techniques, fabrication, and repair of
jewelry. Introduction to equipment and techniques of jewelry manufacturing including chain repair and
electroplating.
Program Outcomes
styles.

industry.
Course Outcomes
Perform prong retipping and repronging on both four and six prong settings; combine knowledge and
skills to perfect polishing techniques and different styles of surface finishes on metals; demonstrate
electroplating of different metals over other metals; and maintain industry standards with regard to quality
craftsmanship while emphasizing time management in conjunction with all skills learned and developed.
List and define vocabulary terms common to the jewelry industry; cite selected laws that govern the
jewelry industry and explain how they affect the bench jeweler; relate the weight conversion factors that
are common in the jewelry industry; list the precious metals and alloys used in the jewelry industry; and
explain the processes used to manufacture gold filled, rollgold plate, and electroplate used in the jewelry
industry.
Learning Objectives
The student will learn to channel set stones into a ring
The student will learn to set baguette stones into a ring
The student will learn to solder and polish platinum
Course Schedule
November 29 615
Channel set
December 2 616
Three stone baguette ring. .
Dec 7 617
Platinum

EVALUATION



Grade scale: A: 90‐100 B: 80‐89 C: 70‐79 F: 69‐0
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE
0‐7 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ No reduction
8‐14 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 1 letter grade
15‐22 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 2 letter grades
23‐30 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 3 letter grades
ADA Statement

Term: Fall 903-782-0383

Course Title (Intermediate Gemology)
Course Description
Intermediate Gemology
Credits:3.1.8

The Gem Merchant – How to Be One How to Deal With One by David S. Epstein
OPL A Students’ Guide To Spectroscopy by Colin H. Winter, FGA, DGA
Program Outcomes
and superstition.
measuring devises.

and treated stones.
Course Outcomes
Development of skills in the identification, quality grading of diamonds; plotting of

various characteristics, enhancements, and treatments.
Learning Objectives
This course will familiarize the student in the intermediate study of gemology. Emphasis
is given to the continuation of development of skills in gemstone identification, detection
of imitation, synthetic gem materials and the proper use and care of gemological
laboratory instruments.

Week 1
Study of Gemstone Treatments/Enhancements
The study of the following Gem Species:
Peridot
Garnets
Lapis Lazuli
Week 2
Jades
Spinel
Feldspar
Spodumene
Week 3
Quartz
Chalcedony
Diopside
Opal
Zoisite
Week 4
Iolite
Zircon
Andalusite
Apatite
Course Schedule
Class meets Monday through Thursday from 8:00am until 4:00pm for the 3rd four week
period of each semester.

The course format for the gemology course HRGY 1350 is primarily a lecture and lab
process. Lectures will be given from the reading assigned to the student from the text
books for the course. There will be three essay tests from the lecture content given in
class; therefore note taking skills are detrimental for successful completion of the
course.
Course Policies
Grading Policies
short answer, or scan-tron weekly tests averaged. 20% of the student’s grade is based
on completion of the 450 colored gemstone identification laboratory projects
requirements.
In order to receive a certificate in Gemology, each student must complete all projects
and tests to a final grade average of 2.0 for the semester; (this equates to a 70
minimum score). The Gemology Certificate requires the minimum of 15 credit hours for
course titled *Applied Jewelry Practices or Business Ethics Class offered Friday

mornings.
catastrophic incident and only if 75% of the course work is complete and a minimum of
300 colored gemstone ID lab-forms are completed. An incomplete will be scheduled at
the convenience of the instructor and must be completed within a timely manner that
follows the pace of the gemology course. A faculty review committee must approve a
waiver or release for absences caused by catastrophic incidents. Students desiring to
repeat the semester must repeat all projects and tests. No exceptions will be
considered.
Cell-phone/mobile phones or other communication devices must be deactivated (turned

classroom.
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Butch Munday
2400 Clarksville Street AS 108
Term: 101S 903-782-0392
Section: .01 bmunday@parisjc.edu
Course # HRGY 1373

Course Title: Introduction to Computer Aided Design
Course Description
Study of the programs operations, characteristics, modeling, and machining

techniques of computer aided design. Computer aided manufacturing are explored
in this course. Applications and visualization, rendering, animation, 2D design,
3D design and solid modeling as it relates to jewelry design.
Credits:3= 1 lecture and 8 laboratory hours per week
Prerequisite(s): Basic computer skills and applications or consent of instructor
Matrix VI Software for Jewelry Artisans
Program Outcomes
Fundamentals of learning to properly draw curves and how to join them into
shapes that will then become an article of jewelry
Apply the demonstrated skills for Revo milling
.
Course Outcomes
Provide a working foundation in interpreting, and creating computer-generated

Matrix jewelry models.
Describe the organization, terminology, function, capabilities and limitations of 3-
D computer graphic software in regards to jewelry modeling.
Apply demonstrated projects on Revo mill.
Use Matrix 3-D modeling software to create surface and solid jewelry models.
Learning Objectives
Demonstrate skill of producing and changing jewelry articles into a more complex
model, demonstrate knowledge of Revo strategies 4 Flat on Rotary (4ops) and
Auto Flip Plus Rotary (4ops).
Course Schedule
October 11 thru October 28
Creating intermediate projects for jewelry articles.

Revo advanced milling projects.
Students are evaluated in three (3) areas:
PROJECTS: Assigned and personal design work is required as projects for this
class. The projects are graded to industry standards as established by the Industry
Steering Committee. Students must complete each project with a grade of “70” or
higher. If a student’s project did not qualify to the required 70% competency
level, the student must repeat the project until he or she acquires the skills set
needed to meet the qualification. Each student must demonstrate a competent use
and execution of skills to the 70% rule in order to advance to the next course.
TEST: Test and/or papers will be graded on the accuracy of the answers and
content of a scale from 0 to 100 Test and/or papers must be completed to pass the
course. Expect a test the last day of each quarter!
WORKPLACE ETHICS: Students will be graded in 10 different areas:

appearance, attitude, interest in work, work habits, preparation, attentiveness,
participation, following instructions, confidentiality, and attendance.

DESIGN ASSIGNMENTS 55%
QUARTLY TEST 20%
STUDENT PORTFOLIO 15%
FINAL TEST 19%
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE:
Students are allowed 7 hours of absence per curse without penalty. Students

0 – 7 _____________________________________ No reduction
8 – 14 ____________________________________ 1 letter grade
15 – 22 ----------------------------------------------------- 2 letter grades
23 – 30 ----------------------------------------------------- 3 letter grades

Students that arrive later than five (5) minutes after the scheduled class time will
be counted as tardy. A tardy equates into one hour missed time.
Celluar phones, beepers and personal digital assistants (pda’s)
All cell phones, beepers and personal digital assistants (pda’s) must be turned off
during class. If a cell phone or beeper does sound during class the student may be
asked to leave for the remainder of the period. The only exception to this rule
includes peace officers, EMT, EMS, or other emergency personnel, and their
Please refer to the 2010/2011 Student Handbook for Student Standard of Conduct
and Students Rights and Responsibilities.
ADA Statement

Center the institution is committed to assisting qualified students as completely as
possible. Services include the arrangement for accommodations and services to
allow equal access to education opportunities for students with disabilities.
the Counseling/Advising Center by calling 903-782-0426 (Paris Campus), 903-
454-9333 (Greenville Center), or 903-885-1232 (Sulphur Springs Center) to
Term: 101S 903-782-0392
Course # HRGY 1372

Course Title: TECHNICAL ILLUSTRATION for JEWELRY DESIGN
Course Description
Continuation of HRGY 1371, topics include pictorial drawing, shading and

rendering of jewelry articles
Credits: 3= 1 lecture and 8 laboratory hours per week
Textbook and Readings and machining
Program Outcomes
The student will demonstrate aspects of jewelry modeling, such as freeform

curves, surfaces and solids.
.
Course Outcomes
Provide a working foundation in interpreting, and creating computer generated

Provide students with the ability to describe the organization, terminology,
function, capabilities and limitation of 3 – D computer graphic software in regards
to jewelry modeling.
Learning Objectives
Demonstrate knowledge of producing simple jewelry articles. Knowledge of

surfaces, polysurfaces and meshes for modeling jewelry. Knowledge of Revo
strategies Auto Flip Plus Milling (3ops) and Auto Flip Plus Rotary (3op).
Course Schedule
September 20 thru October 7
A primary introduction of how to create simple rings, shanks bezels and heads for
jewelry modeling.
Revo milling projects include flat and 360 degree cutting.

participation, following instructions, confidentiality, and attendance. Any one of
these could cause a student to fail any one of the courses.
QUARTLY TEST 20%
FINAL TEST 19%
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE:

0 – 7 _____________________________________ No reduction
8 – 14 ____________________________________ 1 letter grade
15 – 22 ----------------------------------------------------- 2 letter grades
23 – 30 ----------------------------------------------------- 3 letter grades

ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0392
Course # HRGY 1373

Course Title: Introduction to Computer Aided Design
Course Description
Continuation of HRGY 1372 with focus on more advanced modeling, identifying

and solving of problems in 3 – D jewelry design applications.
Program Outcomes
Fundamentals of learning to properly draw curves and how to join them into
shapes that will then become an article of jewelry
Apply the demonstrated skills for Revo milling
.
Course Outcomes
Providing a working foundation in interpreting and creating computer generated

function, capabilities and limitations of 3 – D computer graph software in regards
Use Matrix 3 – D modeling software to create surface and solid jewelry models.
Learning Objectives
Demonstrate skill of producing and changing jewelry articles into a more complex
model, demonstrate knowledge of Revo strategies 4 Flat on Rotary (4ops) and
Auto Flip Plus Rotary (4ops).
Course Schedule
October 11 thru October 28

Creating intermediate projects for jewelry articles.
Revo advanced milling projects.


QUARTLY TEST 20%
FINAL TEST 19%
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE:

0 – 7 _____________________________________ No reduction
8 – 14 ____________________________________ 1 letter grade
15 – 22 ----------------------------------------------------- 2 letter grades
23 – 30 ----------------------------------------------------- 3 letter grades

ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0392
Course # HRGY 1374

Course Title: SOLID MODELING DESIGN for JEWELRY
Course Description
Continuation of HRGY 1373 conversion of 3 – D models for computer aided

milling processes.
Program Outcomes
The student will understand and recall the principals of 3 – D modeling and
convert 3 – D designs into a multiple layered milling process
.
Course Outcomes
Provide a working foundation in interpreting, and creating computer-generated

Describe the organization, terminology, function, capabilities and limitations of 3-
D computer graphic software in regards to jewelry modeling.
Apply demonstrated projects on Revo mill.
Use Matrix 3-D modeling software to create surface and solid jewelry models.
Learning Objectives
Demonstrate skill of modeling Advanced Surfaces and Pave’.

Knowledge of advanced Revo strategies.
Course Schedule
November 1 thru November 18
Design intermediate and advanced projects for articles of jewelry.

Rev advanced milling projects.

QUARTLY TEST 20%
FINAL TEST 19%
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE:

0 – 7 _____________________________________ No reduction
8 – 14 ____________________________________ 1 letter grade
15 – 22 ----------------------------------------------------- 2 letter grades
23 – 30 ----------------------------------------------------- 3 letter grades

ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0392
Course # HRGY 1375

Course Title: COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING for
JEWELRY
Course Description
Continuation of HRGY 1374 conversion of 3 – D models for computer aided

milling processes.
Program Outcomes
The student will understand proper operating procedures for computer-aided

modeling and milling of jewelry models for manufacturing.
.
Course Outcomes
Provide a working foundation in interpreting and creating computer-aided Matrix

jewelry models.
function, capabilities and limitation of 3 – D computer graphic software in regards
Use Matrix 3 – D modeling software to create surface and solid jewelry models
Learning Objectives
Matrix Art, advance surface modeling and advance curve from 2 views.
Course Schedule
November 22 thru December 15
Advanced jewelry projects for manufacturing.

Revo milling projects as required.

QUARTLY TEST 20%
FINAL TEST 19%
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE:

0 – 7 _____________________________________ No reduction
8 – 14 ____________________________________ 1 letter grade
15 – 22 ----------------------------------------------------- 2 letter grades
23 – 30 ----------------------------------------------------- 3 letter grades
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0249

Course # HRGY 1391

Course Title: Industrial Casting

Course Description
Industrial Casting


Prerequisite(s): Completion of HRGY 2333 or consent of instructor

Program Outcomes


Course Outcomes
Emphasis is placed on large volume lost wax casting; both centrifugal and vacuum processes are
taught. Includes instruction on resistance heated vacuum casting, horizontal platinum casting,
carving waxes for production and mold making. Continues the hands on approach to learning
jewelry skills, with continued emphasis on industry standards being evaluated through
completed projects.
Learning Objectives
The student will carve a ring to the instructors specifications
Will inject sprue and cast a tree of assigned pieces
The student will carve a ring to accept an assigned gemstone
Will sprue, invest and cast using platinum methods and investment
Will pack, cook and cut a rubber mold
Will carve a pattern of their own design, cast, mold, and cast while tracking shrinkage
Course Schedule
Sept 17 Cast a tree of assigned mold patterns. This tree will be cast in the J2r resistance
casting machine.
Oct. 1 Carve a wax ring to instructor’s specifications.
Oct. 22 Design and carve a bracelet link with the hinge incorporated into the link.
Nov 5 Cast a ring with the stone in place
Nov 26 Inject, sprue and cast a ring in the platinum casting machine.

The final semester grade is complied as follows;
Notebook 25%
Ethics 05%
GRADE SCALE
A: 90 ‐ 100
B: 80 ‐ 89.5
C: 70 ‐ 79.5
F: 0 ‐ 69.5
Course Policies
“W”.
ADA Statement
courses, be sure to fill out and submit the "Request, for Accommodation" form (see PJC
counseling center.) If accommodation is not requested in advance, we cannot guarantee the

Term: Fall 903-782-0383

Course Title (Applied Jewelry Practices)
Course Description
Applied Jewelry Practices
Credits: 4.3.4

None
Program Outcomes
The objective for this course is to develop a general understanding of the jewelry
industry business practices that the student will use when entering the work force and to
provide a strong foundation and resource for future study of the jewelry industry.
Course Outcomes
To familiarize the student with the topics associated with the management and
operations procedures related with the Jewelry, Watch, and Gemstone industries
Learning Objectives
Development of competent communication skills related to the watch and jewelry

industries by the use of Business Professional lectures, demonstrations, and video
presentations.
Course Schedule
Class meets on Friday mornings at 8:00am until 12:00pm during the semester.
Topics covered as part of the course are:
Week 2
Introduction to the Automated Catalog Resources available at Paris Junior College
As segment on the History of the development of the Internet
Week 3
Workshop presentation on “How to Start a Small Business
Week 4
Presentations on Identification and Circa dating of Antique Jewelry
Week 5
Creating a Professional Image through Sales Associate Protocol

Skills Development in Writing a Resume’
Week 6
Workshop on Copyrights, Patents, and Trademarks
Week 7
Presentations on the many aspects of maintenance of security as a Jewelry
Professional
Week 8
Presentations on the Proper Protocol on Take-In-Jewelry and Watch Repairs
Week 9
Workshop on International Business Import and Exporting
Week 10
Research paper on the Federal Trade Commission’s document to the Jewelry and
Watch Industries.
Week 11
Workshop on Marketing and Effective Advertizing for Jewelry and Watch Professionals.
Week 12
Field Trip to the Dallas area to visit with Rolland Safe Company and Dillon and Gage
Precious Metals Refiners.
Week 13
Presentation on Social Implications of a Global Business on Cultures
Presentation on Effective Inventory Control in Business.
Week 14
Presentations on development of an Effective Business Plan
Week 15
Kimberley Process International Rough Diamond Protocol

The course format for the Applied Jewelry Practices class is primarily a lecture and
workshop series. Professionals from the business industries lecture during class
periods on a specific topic within their area of expertise. Students will evaluate the
lectures for each of the events. One of two fieldtrips is usually planned as part of the
requirement for the student’s successful completion of this course.
Grades of A, B, C, D, and F are determined by the student’s achievement of the

following criteria:
1. The student must demonstrate appropriate active classroom participation
2. The student must successfully complete the FTC research paper assignment.
3. The student must successfully complete a Resume’ and Cover letter.
4. The student must attend all class fieldtrips.
5. See the attendance policy
Course Policies
Attendance Policy
Students must complete a roster sign-in sheet to receive credit for attendance during a
class period.
For every third class absence, the student’s grade will be reduced by one letter grade.

ADA Statement


Course Title ( Intermediate Horology I )
Course Description
Introduction to the theory and repair of watch escapements.
TSI Requirement: THEA 230 M, 230 R, 220 W.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The student will analyze , trouble shoot and repair detached lever escapements
Learning Objectives
Describe the theory and functions of basic escapements.
Course Schedule
Unit Time
Roller Jewels 24 hrs. Aug. 30 - Sept. 2
Pallet Jewels 9 hrs. Sept.7
Guard Fingers 9 hrs. Sept. 8
Pallet Arbors 24 hrs. Sept. 9 - Sept.15
Escapements 33 hrs. Sept. 16 - 23

Roller Jewels Roller jewel selection, removal, installation and alignment are to be
performed to industry standards. Heat control and proper use of shelac in the installation
process and security of the fit of the roller jewel are essential. Time keeping of the
finished watch will be considered the ultimate test of a satisfactory installation. Neatness
of the work area and cleanliness of the project will affect the grade as will Scratches ,
damage, broken and lost parts. Six ( 6 ) unmounted roller tables will be fitted with roller
jewels and roller jewels will also be fitted to three ( 3 ) watches One 1 1 1/2 ligne ~ One
10 ligne ~ One 6 3/4 ligne Pallet Jewels Pallet jewel selection, removal, installation and
alignment are to be performed to industry standards. Heat control and proper use of
shelac in the installation process and security of the fit of the Pallet jewels are essential.
Time keeping of the finished watch will be considered the ultimate test of a satisfactory
installation. Neatness of the work area and cleanliness of the project will affect the grade
as will Scratches , damage, broken and lost parts. Pallet jewels will be removed and
installed in six ( 6 ) pallet forks Guard Fingers Guard Finger selection, removal,
installation and adjustment are to be performed to industry standards. Security of the fit
of the Guard Pin is essential. Time keeping of the finished watch will be concidered the
ultimate test of a satisfactory installation. Neatness of the work area and cleanliness of
the project will affect the grade as will Scratches , damage, broken and lost parts. Guard
fingers will be removed and installed in six ( 6 ) pallet forks Pallet Arbors Pallet arbor
selection, removal, installation and adjustment are to be performed to industry standards.
Security of the fit and the adjustment of the hieght of the pallet arbor is essential. Time
keeping of the finished watch will be considered the ultimate test of a satisfactory
installation. Neatness of the work area and cleanliness of the project will affect the grade
as will Scratches , damage, broken and lost parts. Pallet Arbors will be removed and
installed in six ( 6 ) pallet forks Escapements Having performed sequential repairs to
escapement components the student will now perform matched escapement set ups using
a large scale model of the detached lever escapement. ( admirably know in the trade as
"The Crib Toy" ) After satisfactory sequential adjustment of the escapement model the
student will perform escapement repairs/adjustments on three ( 3 ) watches One 1 1 1/2
ligne ~ One 10 ligne ~ One 6 3/4 ligne Time keeping of the finished watches will be
considered the ultimate test of a satisfactory Repairs. Neatness of the work area and
cleanliness of the project will affect the grade as will Scratches , damage, broken and lost
parts. Written test questions
Course Policies

2.
3.
2010.
4.
5.
6.
7.
II. Work Benches
1.
2.
3.
the floor.
III.
1.
2.
IV. Safety Codes

1.
2.
areas.
3.
4.
V. Dress Code
VI. Use of Tobacco
allowed.
lab.
ADA Statement



Course Title ( Intermediate Horology II )
Course Description
Continuation of Intermediate Horology I with emphasis on advanced hairspring
manipulation and friction jeweling.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Student will practice friction jewelling, Swiss key and regulator pin removal, Swiss key
replacement and adjustment, forming and adjustment of overcoil hairsprings, and the
integration of these within the watch.
Learning Objectives
Describe the theory and functions of friction jeweling, hairspring adjustments, and
forming overcoil hairsprings; describe the Swiss keys and regulating procedures of the
basic watch; replace the roller jewel, pallet guard finger, and pallet jewels in standard
watches within a specified time frame ensuring that they operate correctly; replace and
adjust pallet arbors in standard watches within a specific time frame ensuring they
operate correctly; and perform escapement adjustment to standard watches ensuring they
operate correctly. Replace and adjust friction jewels common to the standard watch
ensuring that it operates correctly; perform advanced hairspring manipulation in
operating watches and correct overhaul and regulating procedures to standard watches;
form overcoil hairsprings; and replace Swiss-style regulator keys.
Course Schedule
Unit Time
Hairspring Adjustments 20 hrs. Aug. 30 - Sept.2
Regulator Pin Adjustments 10 hrs. Sept. 2 - Sept. 6
Hairsprings in the Watch 30 hrs. Sept. 7 - Sept. 14
Swiss Key Function / Replacement 10 hrs. Sept. 14 - Sept. 15
Friction Jeweling 30 hrs. Sept. 15 - Sept.23

Hairspring Adjustments The student will correct instructor introduced hairspring errors.
Designed to develop confidence and job speed this unit of instruction stresses centering
and leveling the hairspring to the balance bridge, formation of the hairspring concentric
curve, adjustment at the regulator pin and Swiss key and corrective bends. Neatness of
the work area and cleanliness of the project will affect the grade as will scratches,
damage, broken and lost parts will affect the project grade. Regulator Pin Adjustments
The student will correct, adjust and trouble shooting problems of regulator pins. Neatness
of the work area and cleanliness of the project will affect the grade as will scratches,
damage, broken and lost parts will affect the project grade. Hairsprings in the Watch The
student will correct instructor introduced hairspring errors in watch movements.
Designed to develop confidence and job speed this unit of instruction stresses centering
and leveling the hairspring without removal from the watch, formation of the hairspring
concentric curve, adjustment at the regulator pin and Swiss key and corrective bends.
Neatness of the work area and cleanliness of the project will affect the grade as will
scratches, damage, broken and lost parts will affect the project grade. Swiss Key Function
and Replacement Friction Jeweling. Written test questions
Course Policies

2.
3.
2010.
4.
5.
6.
7.
II. Work Benches
1.
2.
3.
the floor.
III.
1.
2.
IV. Safety Codes

1.
2.
areas.
3.
4.
V. Dress Code
VI. Use of Tobacco
allowed.
lab.
ADA Statement


Course # ( HRGY 2303)

Course Title ( Intermediate Horology III )
Course Description
Continuation of Intermediate Horology II with emphasis on complicated watch
movements.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Student will practice the 16 point check overhaul on basic mechanical watches
Learning Objectives
Explain and perform overhaul procedures on the standard watch and the Sixteen Point
Check System.
Course Schedule
Unit Time
16 Point Check System 110 hrs. Aug. 30 – Sept. 23

16 Point Check System Given various wristwatches of different sizes and manufactures
the student will perform the necessary sequential steps to complete overhauls as if they
were being prepared for an actual paying customer. Attention to detail in the completion
of the watch movement, its time keeping, cleanliness, proper oiling, lubricating,
hairspring work and care of the crystal, case ,dial and hands are to be considered .
Scratches, damage and loss of parts will subtract from the overall project grade. A Job
work sheet is to be completed for each watch project. 10 watches are normally completed
by the average student , 16 by ‘ B‘ level students and more then 20 by ‘A’ level students.
Quality of workmanship and difficulty of the projects will be assessed as will the students
ability to work independently. Watches that are not repaired to industry standards will not
be accepted for grading. Replacements for broken or lost parts will not always be
available in the TIJT lab or in the industry, therefore care must be taken to insure that
components are not mishandled or misplaced. The complete 16 point check system is
detailed in a technical manual in the horology classroom. The steps are to be listed from
memory on the written final exam.
Course Policies

2.
3.
2010.
4.
5.
6.
7.
II. Work Benches
1.
2.
3.
the floor.
III.
1.
2.
IV. Safety Codes

1.
2.
areas.
3.
4.
V. Dress Code
VI. Use of Tobacco
allowed.
lab.
ADA Statement


Course Title ( Intermediate Horology IV )
Course Description
Continuation of Intermediate Horology III with emphasis on complicated watch
movements including disassembly, cleaning, and repair.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Student will vibrate a hairsping to a operating watch and remove knots and tangles in
hairsprings.
Learning Objectives
Describe the theory and function of overcoil hairsprings; form overcoil hairsprings and
untangle hairsprings to watch repair industry standards; locate and correct problems in
hairsprings occurring at the collet; and correct positional errors related to hairsprings and
regulator pins.
Course Schedule
Unit Time
Advanced Hairspring Work 10 hrs. Aug. 30 - 31
Removal of Tangles 10 hrs. Aug. 31 - Sept. 2
Adjustment at Regulator 10 hrs. Sept. 2 - Sept.6
Correcting Hairspring Positional Errors 10 hrs. Sept. 6 - Sept. 7
Forming Overcoils 30 hrs. Sept 8. - Sept.15
Vibrating a Hairspring To a Watch 35 hrs. Sept 16 - Sept. 23

Advanced Hairspring Work Continuation of hairspring adjustment and repairs in
operating watch movements. The student will correct instructor introduced overcoil as
well as flat hairspring errors to assure the watches proper time keeping as tested by
electronic testing equipment . Designed to develop confidence and job speed this unit of
instruction stresses centering and leveling the hairspring to the balance bridge, formation
of the hairspring concentric curve, adjustment at the regulator pin and swiss key and
corrective bends. Neatness of the work area and cleanliness of the project will affect the
grade as will Scratches , damage, broken and lost parts will effect the project grade.
Removal of Tangles The student will remove tangles and knots from hairsprings without
damage to the spring. Neatness of the work area and cleanliness of the project will affect
the grade as will Scratches , damage, broken and lost parts will effect the project grade.
Adjustment at Regulator Student will adjust the regulator pins and keys in watches with
both flat and overcoil hairsprings to assure the watches proper time keeping as tested by
electronic testing equipment Correcting Hairspring Positional Errors Hairsprings will be
adjust in project watches to compensate for errors in the watches position as checked on
electronic testing equipment. Forming Overcoils Overcoil hairsprings will be formed to
blueprint specification using the Loosier Curve design. Accuracy of the formation or this
curve in the round and in the flat will be subject to very close inspection . The absence of
unnecessary bends will be vital in producing an acceptable project Large , medium and
small hairsprings will be used in these projects and will be form evolving to the left and
evolving to the right. Vibrating a Hairspring To a Watch The student will be provided a
ETA 6497 watch movement , a collet, a stud, a hairspring, stud pins, roller table , balance
staff and balance wheel . The student will staff and true the balance wheel, install the
roller and static poise the balance. The student will vibrate the hairspring to the balance to
insure it proper operating frequency of 18000 beats per hour using a vibrating tool. The
student will the center the hairspring to the balance bridge . the watch will then be clean ,
oiled and timed and adjust to correct positional errors using electronic test equipment .
The overall accuracy of the work and time keeping will affect the grade Neatness of the
work area and cleanliness of the project will affect the grade . Scratches , damage, broken
and lost parts will effect the project grade. Written test questions
Course Policies

2.
3.
2010.
4.
5.
6.
7.
II. Work Benches
1.
2.
3.
the floor.
III.
1.
2.
IV. Safety Codes

1.
2.
areas.
3.
4.
V. Dress Code
VI. Use of Tobacco
allowed.
lab.
ADA Statement



Course Title ( Intermediate Horology V )
Course Description
Continuation of Intermediate Horology IV with emphasis on speed. Focus on adjustment
of escapements and hairsprings, precision timing, regulation of mechanical movements,
and disassembly, cleaning, and repair of both calendar and self-winding watches.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The student will sharpen watch gravers and practice turning of brass and steel to blueprint
specifications.
Learning Objectives
Describe the functions of the watchmaker's lathe and demonstrate a thorough knowledge
of its uses through practical application; describe and demonstrate construction of cutting
tools and gravers to include the tempering process and the proper care and sharpening of
gravers; exhibit an understanding of the theory and application of burnishers and
polishing techniques; and properly remove balance staffs from balance wheels using the
watchmaker's lathe.
Course Schedule
Unit Time
Gravers 12 hrs. Aug. 30 - 31
4mm double shoulder brass 12 hrs. Sept. 1 - 2
4mm double shoulder steel 18 hrs. Sept. 6 - 8
0.5mm double shoulder brass 12 hrs. Sept. 9 - 13
0.5mm double shoulder steel 12 hrs. Sept. 14 - 15
0.2mm double shoulder brass 12 hrs. Sept. 16 - 20
0.2mm double shoulder steel 12 hrs. Sept. 21 - 23

Gravers Grinding to shape , hardening and heat treating , lapping and mirror polishing 6 tool steel
gravers for the watchmakers lathe. The gravers properly hardened tempered as to be able to cut
drill rod steel. The shape must be kept square and the cutting edges must be razor sharp. 18 hours
Unless otherwise stated all watchmakers lathe projects must be held to blueprint specification of
Tolerance : Diameters ~ .01 mm + .00mm , - .10mm Lengths ~ + - .10mm Projects must be
without scratches, dents or other surface irregularities and must be polished unless stated
otherwise.
4mm double shoulder brass
4mm double shoulder steel
0.5mm double shoulder brass
0.5mm double shoulder steel
0.2mm double shoulder brass
0.2mm double shoulder steel

Written test questions
Course Policies

2.
3.
2010.
4.
5.
6.
7.
II. Work Benches
1.
2.
3.
the floor.
III.
1.
2.
IV. Safety Codes

1.
2.
areas.
3.
4.
V. Dress Code
VI. Use of Tobacco
allowed.
lab.
ADA Statement



Course Title ( Intermediate Horology VI )
Course Description
Continuation of Intermediate Horology V with further emphasis on speed to meet
industry standards. Focus on adjustment of escapements and hairsprings, precision
timing, regulation of mechanical movements, and disassembly, cleaning, and repair of
both calendar and self-winding watches.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The student will practice precision turning of pivots in brass and steel to blueprint
specifications.
Learning Objectives
Describe the functions of the watchmaker's lathe and demonstrate a thorough knowledge
of its uses through practical application; describe and demonstrate construction of cutting
tools and gravers to include the tempering process and the proper care and sharpening of
gravers; exhibit an understanding of the theory and application of burnishers and
polishing techniques; and properly remove balance staffs from balance wheels using the
watchmaker's lathe.
Course Schedule
Unit Time
0.5mm cone pivot brass 12 hrs. Aug. 30 - 31
0.5mm cone pivot steel 12 hrs. Aug. 31 - Sept.2
0.2mm cone pivot brass 12 hrs. Sept. 7 - 8
0.2mm cone pivot steel 12 hrs. Sept. 8 - 9
12mm Balance Staff 24 hrs. Sept. 9 - 15
6mm Balance Staff 18 hrs. Sept.15 -21
21mm Stem in Brass 12 hrs. Sept. 21 - 23

Unless otherwise stated all watchmakers lathe projects must be held to blueprint
specification of Tolerance : Diameters ~ .01 mm + .00mm , - .01mm Lengths ~ + -
.10mm Projects must be without scratches, dents or other surface irregularities and must
be polished unless stated otherwise.
0.5mm cone pivot brass
0.5mm cone pivot steel
0.2mm cone pivot brass
0.2mm cone pivot steel
12mm Balance Staff
6mm Balance Staff
21mm Stem in Brass

Course Policies
2.
3.
2010.
4.
5.
6.
7.
II. Work Benches
1.
2.
3.
the floor.
III.
1.
2.
IV. Safety Codes

1.
2.
areas.
3.
4.
V. Dress Code
VI. Use of Tobacco
allowed.
lab.
ADA Statement



Course Title ( Intermediate Horology VII )
Course Description
Continuation of Intermediate Horology VI with emphasis on speed. Focus on
disassembly, cleaning, and repair of automatic winding watches; and on precision timing
including nomenclature, parts interchangeability, proper lubrication, and casing.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Practice pivot repair using the Jacot tool and use of watch material systems for automatic
winding and calendar watches
Learning Objectives
Describe and demonstrate the theories and applications of pivot repair and polishing;
exhibit a thorough understanding of the nomenclature of automatic winding watches and
utilize the complicated watch material system to procure replacement parts as required;
explain and demonstrate proper cleaning, overhaul, and repair procedures for automatic
winding watches; and demonstrate proper repair procedures for small jobs common in the
watch repair industry to include case polishing and repairs, removing broken screws,
fitting spring bars, and dissolving screws with alum.
Course Schedule
Unit Time
19mm Stem in Steel 19 hrs. Aug. 30 - Sept. 1
Stem for Watch 12 hrs. Sept. 1 - Sept. 6
Cut off Balance Hubs 8 hrs. Sept. 6 - 7
Screwdriver Project /intro to repivoting 3 hrs. Sept. 7
Pivot Repairs/ Jacot Tool
Burnish Train wheel Pivots 25 hrs. Sept. 7 - 13
Burnish Balance Pivots 25 hrs. Sept. 13 - 16
Automatic Watches
Nomenclature/Materials and Ordering Parts 5 hrs. Sept. 20 - 21
Trouble Shooting Automatics 10 hrs. Sept. 21- 23

Unless otherwise stated all watchmakers lathe projects must be held to blueprint
specification of Tolerance : Diameters ~ .01 mm + .00mm , - .1mm Lengths ~ + - .10mm
Projects must be without scratches, dents or other surface irregularities and must be
polished unless stated otherwise.
19mm Stem in Steel
Stem for Watch
Cut off Balance Hubs
Screwdriver Project (intro to repivoting exercise)

Pivot Repairs/ Jacot Tool : Burnish Train wheel Pivots Burnish Balance Pivots
Automatic Watches Nomenclature/Materials and Ordering Parts
Trouble Shooting Automatics

Course Policies

2.
3.
2010.
4.
5.
6.
7.
II. Work Benches
1.
2.
3.
the floor.
III.
1.
2.
IV. Safety Codes

1.
2.
areas.
3.
4.
V. Dress Code
VI. Use of Tobacco
allowed.
lab.
ADA Statement



Course Title ( Intermediate Horology VIII )
Course Description
Continuation of Intermediate Horology VI with emphasis on speed. Focus on
disassembly, cleaning, and repair of automatic winding watches; and on precision timing
including nomenclature, parts interchangeability, proper lubrication, and casing.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Student will practice overhauls and repairs to automatic and calendar watches
Learning Objectives
Describe and demonstrate the theories and applications of pivot repair and polishing;
exhibit a thorough understanding of the nomenclature of automatic winding watches and
utilize the complicated watch material system to procure replacement parts as required;
explain and demonstrate proper cleaning, overhaul, and repair procedures for automatic
winding watches; and demonstrate proper repair procedures for small jobs common in the
watch repair industry to include case polishing and repairs, removing broken screws,
fitting spring bars, and dissolving screws with alum.
Course Schedule
Unit Time
Automatic Watches 100 hrs. Aug. 30 ‐ Sept. 23

Given various automatic wristwatches of different sizes and manufactures the student will
perform the necessary sequential steps to complete overhauls as if they were being prepared
for an actual paying customer. The process will follow the same order as the 16 point check used
in HRGY 2303. Attention to detail in the completion of the watch movement, its time keeping,
cleanliness, proper oiling , lubricating, hairspring work and care of the crystal, case ,dial , hands
and strap or band are to be considered . Scratches, damage and loss of parts will subtract from
the overall project grade. A Job work sheet is to be completed for each watch project. 20‐25
watches are normally completed by the average student , 25‐35 by ‘ B‘ level students and more
then 35 by ‘A’ level students. Quality of workmanship and difficulty of the projects will be
assessed as will the students ability to work independently. Watches that are not repaired to
industry standards will not be accepted for grading. Replacements for broken or lost parts will
not always be available in the TIJT lab or in the industry, therefore care must be taken to insure
that components are not mishandled or misplaced. The complete 16 point check system is
detailed in a technical manual in the horology classroom. Written test questions

Course Policies

2.
3.
2010.
4.
5.
6.
7.
II. Work Benches
1.
2.
3.
the floor.
III.
1.
2.
IV. Safety Codes

1.
2.
areas.
3.
4.
V. Dress Code
VI. Use of Tobacco
allowed.
lab.
ADA Statement


Term: Fall 903-782-0383

Course Title (Advanced Gemological Practices)
Course Description
Advanced Gemological Practice
3.1.8

The Gem Merchant – How to Be One How to Deal With One by David S. Epstein
OPL A Students’ Guide To Spectroscopy by Colin H. Winter, FGA, DGA
Program Outcomes
and superstition.
measuring devises.

and treated stones.
Course Outcomes
This course will continue to familiarize the student in the advanced study of gemology.
Emphasis is given to the development of observation skills in gemstone identification,
detection of imitation, synthetic gem materials and gemstone enhancement/treatments
and the proper use of and care for gemological laboratory instruments.
Learning Objectives
By the use of lectures, discussions and demonstrations with hands on experience, the
student will become familiar with the tools, nomenclature and theory associated with the
gemological process used to identify gemstones.

Week 1
The study of specific gemstone specie and varieties
Specie:
Amber
Coral
Ivory
Pearl
Week 2
Jet
Azurite
Benitoite
Hematite
Week 3
Idocrase
Malachite
Rhodochrosite
Calcite
Week 4
Obsidian
Serpentine
Sodalite
Course Schedule
Class meets Monday through Thursday from 8:00am until 4:00pm for the 4th four week
period of the semester.

The course format for the gemology course HRGY 1350 is primarily a lecture and lab
process. Lectures will be given from the reading assigned to the student from the text
books for the course. There will be three essay tests from the lecture content given in
class; therefore note taking skills are detrimental for successful completion of the
course.
Course Policies
Grading Policies
short answer, or scan-tron weekly tests averaged. 20% of the student’s grade is based
on completion of the 450 colored gemstone identification laboratory projects
requirements.
In order to receive a certificate in Gemology, each student must complete all projects
and tests to a final grade average of 2.0 for the semester; (this equates to a 70
minimum score). The Gemology Certificate requires the minimum of 15 credit hours for
course titled Applied Jewelry Practices or Business Ethics Class offered Friday
mornings.

catastrophic incident and only if 75% of the course work is complete and a minimum of
300 colored gemstone ID lab-forms are completed. An incomplete will be scheduled at
the convenience of the instructor and must be completed within a timely manner that
follows the pace of the gemology course. A faculty review committee must approve a
waiver or release for absences caused by catastrophic incidents. Students desiring to
repeat the semester must repeat all projects and tests. No exceptions will be
considered.
Cell-phone/mobile phones or other communication devices must be deactivated (turned

classroom.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0249

Course # HRGY 2333

Course Title: Casting II

Course Description
Continuation of Casting I. Includes instruction in mold making and vibratory finishing.


Program Outcomes



Course Outcomes
Demonstrate the basic casting processes and uses of related materials and equipment for the
manufacture of jewelry articles; maintain industry standards with regard to quality
craftsmanship while emphasizing time management in conjunction with all skills learned and
developed; and prepare, invest, and burnout wax patterns; make rubber molds for
reproduction; and demonstrate various techniques for finishing cast patterns.
Learning Objectives
The student will cast a ring without mold lines or distortion
Will cast findings demonstrating a knowledge of casting temperatures
Will make and cut a rubber mold
Will demonstrate use and knowledge of mass finishing
Course Schedule
SEPT. 23
# 19A CLUSTER RING
#21A BRIGHT CUT WEDDING BAND
#9 BAKER TOP
SEPT. 29
#16 RING GUARD
#31 HEXAGONAL GENTS RING
#42 FREEFORM RING
OCT. 6
# 11B LARGE RING SHANK
OCT. 13
# 15 GENTS SQUARE TOP RING
OCT. 20
#8 BRACELET LINKS (6)
#2 SIX PRONG HEAD (8)
#3 FOUR PRONG V HEAD (8)
#4 CATHEDRAL BASKET HEAD (3)
#5 SPLIT PRONG FISHTAIL HEAD (5)
#6 FOUR PRONG ILLUSION TOP (4)
#7 PENDANT BAIL (2)

Projects are graded to industry standards.
The final semester grade for HRGY 1309 is complied as
Daily Grades 05%
Ethics 10%
Written Final 10%
Grade scale:
A: 90 ‐ 100
B: 80 ‐ 89.5
C: 70 ‐ 79.5
F: 0 ‐ 69.5
Course Policies
“W”. Each instructor must have on file in the respective Dean’s office attendance policies,
course objectives, and other relevant materials which comprehensively describe the course
procedures applicable to each class section. Instructors are responsible for making all students
enrolled in their classes aware of these procedures. When it becomes necessary to drop a
student from a class, the instructor will submit a properly completed withdrawal notice to the
appropriate Dean. Instructor withdrawals of students may be appealed by student pursuant to
the college’s Academic Appeals procedures.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0451
Section: 01 hharrison@parisjc.edu

Course Title (Precious Metals I)
Course Description
Emphasis on layout, bright cuts, baguettes, marquise, pear, cushion, and emerald cut stones. Focus on
utilization of commercial shop guidelines.
Program Outcomes
styles.

industry.
Course Outcomes
Cast the project specified in 14K gold using both the vacuum and centrifugal type casting methods; attach
gold heads of various shapes and sizes for round stones to shanks and mountings; set round stones in
heads; finish and polish pieces; rhodium plate white gold heads; and retip prongs and polish. Size various
rings; repair chain; relate specific laws that govern the jewelry industry and explain how they affect the
bench jeweler; describe the different functions, equipment, and procedures associated with casting
jewelry; and explain the characteristics and functions of precious metals and alloys used in the jewelry
industry
Learning Objectives
The student will cast projects without defects
The student will solder heads to level and straight and prong set stones to level and center and tight
The student will bead set stones to level and bright cut walls flat
The student will repair chain with no more than 3 stiff links
Course Schedule
800 Chain Repair 8/30
801 Freeform Ring
8/31 Cast ring solder heads set stones
802 Four Prong Solitaire
Cast one shank and set stone size up turn in for grading then retip 3 prongs.
9/2
803 Three Stone Channel Ring
Cast gold ring, channel set stones. Size down.
9/7
804 Ribbon Rings
Cast 14K yellow gold ring and bead‐set and bright cut stones.
Cast one 14k white gold ring and bead set
9/9

805 Freeform Ring with multi head strip
Cast 14k yellow gold ring and one 14k white gold multi stone strip. Fit the
strip to the ring and solder in place and set stones.
9/14N
806 Flat Top Ring
Cast 14k yellow gold ring. Bead‐set and bright cut stones.
9/16N
807 Freeform Ring with Bezels
Cast 14k yellow gold ring. Solder 14k white gold bezels (issued) into place and
set stones.
9/21N
Test September 23
HRGY 2335 STARTS on August 30
HRGY2335 ENDS on September 23

EVALUATION


Grade scale: A: 90‐100 B: 80‐89 C: 70‐79 F: 69‐0
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE

0‐7 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ No reduction
8‐14 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 1 letter grade
15‐22 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 2 letter grades
23‐30 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 3 letter grades
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0451
Course # HRGY 2336

Course Title (Precious Metals II)
Course Description
A continuation of Precious Metals I. Focus on layout, bright cuts, baguettes, marquise, pear, cushion,
and emerald cut stones as well as pave in precious metals. Includes utilization of commercial shop
guidelines. Emphasis on speed.
Program Outcomes
styles.

industry.
Course Outcomes
Cast the project specified in 14K gold using both the vacuum and centrifugal type casting methods;
attach gold heads of various shapes and sizes for round stones to shanks and mountings; set round
stones in heads; finish and polish pieces; rhodium plate white gold heads; and retip prongs and polish.
Size various rings; repair chain; relate specific laws that govern the jewelry industry and explain how
they affect the bench jeweler; describe the different functions, equipment, and procedures associated
with casting jewelry; and explain the characteristics and functions of precious metals and alloys used in
the jewelry industry
Learning Objectives
The student will cast projects without defects
The student will solder heads to level and straight and prong set stones to level and center and tight
The student will bezel and flush set to level , straight and tight
The student will channel set stone level ,same height
Course Schedule
808 Three Stone Baguette Ring
Cast 14k yellow gold rings, set three baguettes in ring.
9/27
809 3 Stone Freeform Ring
Cast 14k yellow gold ring. Solder 14k white gold heads into ring set
stones and size down.
9/29N
810 5 Stone Channel Ring
Cast 14k yellow gold ring and set stones, size up.
9/30N

811 Hollow Dome Earrings
Solder posts to hollow domes.
10/4N
812 Marquise/Baguette Wedding Set
Cast 14k yellow gold engagement ring and 14k yellow gold wedding
ring, set stones, size down and solder together.
10/5
813 Oval Bezel/Flush Set
Cast 14k yellow gold ring. Bezel set the stone and flush the round
stones one on each.
10/7
814 Princess Cut Solitaire
Cast 14k white gold shank. Cast one 14k white gold princess
head, solder head and shank together, set stone and size down.
10/11
815 Platinum Band
Solder and polish
10/12

JA TEST October 13‐20, 2010
HRGY 2336 STARTS Septembe27
HRGY 2336 ENDS on October 20

EVALUATION



Grade scale: A: 90‐100 B: 80‐89 C: 70‐79 F: 69‐0
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE
0‐7 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ No reduction
8‐14 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 1 letter grade
15‐22 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 2 letter grades
23‐30 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 3 letter grades
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0451
Course # HRGY 2337

Course Title (Precious Metals III)
Course Description
Continuation of Precious Metals II with emphasis on techniques and refinement of commercial shop
practices including lost wax process of casting in precious metals and assembly of die- struck and cast
findings. General review of bench techniques.
Prerequisite(s): Completion 2336
Program Outcomes
styles.

industry.
Course Outcomes
Cast the project specified in 14K gold using both the vacuum and centrifugal type casting methods; attach
gold heads of various shapes and sizes for fancy cut stones to shanks and mountings; set fancy cut
stones including oval, pear, marquise, rectangular, emerald, and baguette; channel set round and
baguettes in appropriate mountings; finish and polish mountings; and display employee characteristics
valued by employers in the jewelry industry.
Learning Objectives
The student will set fancy cut stones to level and tight
The student will assemble and solder heads level and straight
The student will layout pave’ with equal spacing
The student will pave’ stones level and with equal spacing
Course Schedule
816 Four Prong Rings with a Baguette on each side
Cast 14k yellow gold ring. Set 2 baguettes and round center stone.
10/21
817 Ring Guard
Cast 14k yellow gold rings. Size guard ring to size of project, set stones in
the guard.
10/26
818 Marquise Solitaire Ring
Cast 14k yellow gold shank, assemble shank and 14k white head stone , size
up.
10/28
819 Pear Solitaire Ring
Cast14k yellow gold shank, assemble shank and 14k white and set stone ,

size up.
11/2
820 Nine Stone Pave' Layout pattern and pave' stones into plate.
11/4
821 Oval Ring
Cast 14k yellow gold shank. Assemble and shank 14k white head. Set stone
and size down.
11/9N
822 Gents Baguette Channel Ring
Cast 14k yellow gold ring. Channel set baguettes.
11/10N
823 Marquise Peg Head Ring
Cast 14k yellow gold ring, solder 14k white marquise in place and set stone.
11/15N
824 Buttercup Earrings/Pendant
Set stones in earrings and pendant
11/16N
HRGY 2337 STARTS ON October 21
HRGY 2337 ENDS ON November 16

EVALUATION



Grade scale: A: 90‐100 B: 80‐89 C: 70‐79 F: 69‐0
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE
0‐7 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ No reduction
8‐14 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 1 letter grade
15‐22 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 2 letter grades
23‐30 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 3 letter grades
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0451
Course # HRGY 2338

Course Title (Precious Metals IV)
Course Description
Continuation of Precious Metals III with emphasis on techniques and refinement of commercial shop
practices including lost wax process of casting in precious metals and assembly of die- struck and cast
findings. General review of bench techniques from fabrication of a platinum pendant to soldering die
struck heads on mountings. Emphasis on speed.
Program Outcomes
styles.

industry.
Course Outcomes
Cast the project specified in 14K gold using both the vacuum and centrifugal type casting methods;
attach gold heads of various shapes and sizes for fancy cut stones to shanks and mountings; set fancy
cut stones including oval, pear, marquise, rectangular, emerald, and baguette; channel set round and
baguettes in appropriate mountings; finish and polish mountings; and rhodium plate white gold heads.
Retip prongs; size various mountings; repair chain; fabricate a piece using platinum wire; identify the
reaction of fancy cut stones to various setting procedures; and display employee characteristics valued by
employers in the jewelry industry.
Learning Objectives
The student will set fancy cut stones to level and tight
The student will assemble and solder heads level and straight
The student will layout pave’ with equal spacing
The student will pave’ stones level and with equal spacing
Course Schedule
825 31 Stone Pave'
Cast 14k yellow gold ring. Layout and pave' stones.
11/17
826 Emerald Cut Stone Ring
Cast 14k yellow gold shank Cast 14k white gold head. Assembly head and shank
and set stone.
11/23
827 Waterfall Ring
Cast 14K white gold ring, cast one 14K white gold waterfall head. Solder
waterfall head and shank together and set stones.
11/30

828 Pear/Baguette Pendant
Cast pear shaped head and two baguette heads in 14kyellow gold. Fabricate
bail and solder in place. Set stones.
12/2
829 Wedding Set
Cast ring in 14k yellow gold and wedding band 14k yellow. Size rings up and
solder together.
12/8
830 Gents Nugget Ring
Cast l4k white gold ring. set stones.
12/13
HRGY 2338 starts on November 17

HRGY 2338 ends on December 14

EVALUATION


Grade scale: A: 90‐100 B: 80‐89 C: 70‐79 F: 69‐0
Course Policies
ATTENDANCE

0‐7 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ No reduction
8‐14 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 1 letter grade
15‐22 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 2 letter grades
23‐30 ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ 3 letter grades
ADA Statement


Course Title ( Advanced Horology Systems I )
Course Description
Includes the study of disassembly, cleaning, and repair of timers, alarms, and other more
complicated mechanical movements; and magnetic fields, basic electronics, and direct
currents.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The student will practice overhauls of timers and simple chronograph watches
Learning Objectives
Demonstrate cleaning, overhaul, and repair of complicated watches and watches with
multiple complications to include automatic, calendar alarm, chronographic mechanisms,
and timers.
Course Schedule
Unit Time
Timers 40 hrs. Aug. 30 ‐ Sept. 7
Simple Chronograph 60 hrs. Sept. 8 ‐ Sept. 23

Given various Stop Watches / Timers of different manufactures the student will perform
the necessary sequential steps to complete overhauls as if they were being prepared for an
actual paying customer. The process will follow the same order as the 16 point check
used in HRGY 2303. Attention to detail in the completion of the watch movement, its
time keeping, cleanliness, proper oiling , lubricating, hairspring work and care of the
crystal, case ,dial , hands and strap or band are to be considered . Scratches, damage and
loss of parts will subtract from the overall project grade. A Job work sheet is to be
completed for each watch project. 6 Stop Watches / Timers are to be completed. Quality
of workmanship and difficulty of the projects will be assessed as will the students ability
to work independently. Watches that are not repaired to industry standards will not be
accepted for grading. Replacements for broken or lost parts will not always be available
in the TIJT lab or in the industry, therefore care must be taken to insure that components
are not mishandled or misplaced. The complete 16 point check system is detailed in a
technical manual in the horology classroom. Simple Chronographs Given various Simple
Chronographs of different manufactures the student will perform the necessary sequential
steps to complete overhauls as if they were being prepared for an actual paying customer.
The process will follow the same order as the 16 point check used in HRGY 2303.
Attention to detail in the completion of the watch movement, its time keeping,
cleanliness, proper oiling , lubricating, hairspring work and care of the crystal, case ,dial ,
hands and strap or band are to be considered . Scratches, damage and loss of parts will
subtract from the overall project grade. A Job work sheet is to be completed for each
watch project. 6 - 8 Simple Chronographs are to be completed. Quality of workmanship
and difficulty of the projects will be assessed as will the students ability to work
independently. Watches that are not repaired to industry standards will not be accepted
for grading. Replacements for broken or lost parts will not always be available in the
TIJT lab or in the industry, therefore care must be taken to insure that components are not
mishandled or misplaced. The complete 16 point check system is detailed in a technical
manual in the horology classroom.

Course Policies

2.
3.
2010.
4.
5.
6.
7.
II. Work Benches
1.
2.
3.
the floor.
III.
1.
2.
IV. Safety Codes

1.
2.
areas.
3.
4.
V. Dress Code
VI. Use of Tobacco
allowed.
lab.
ADA Statement



Course Title ( Advanced Horology Systems II )
Course Description
A continuation of Advanced Horology I with emphasis on speed. Includes the study of
disassembly, cleaning, repair, and adjustment of timers, alarms, and other more
complicated mechanical movements; magnetic fields, basic electronics, and direct
currents.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The student will practice overhauls of modern and vintage automatic, calendar and moon
phase chronograph watches
Learning Objectives
Demonstrate cleaning, overhaul, and repair of complicated watches and watches with
multiple complications to include automatic, calendar alarm, chronographic mechanisms,
and timers; and describe the theory of basic electricity as it applies to troubleshooting,
cleaning, overhaul, and repair of electric balance wheel watches and basic tuning fork
watches.
Course Schedule
Unit Time
Calendar and Automatic
Chronographs 100 hrs. Aug. 30 – Sept. 23

Given various Calendar and Automatic Chronographs of different manufactures the
student will perform the necessary sequential steps to complete overhauls as if they were
being prepared for an actual paying customer. The process will follow the same order as
the 16 point check used in HRGY 2303. Attention to detail in the completion of the
watch movement, its time keeping, cleanliness, proper oiling , lubricating, hairspring
work and care of the crystal, case ,dial , hands and strap or band are to be considered .
Scratches, damage and loss of parts will subtract from the overall project grade. A Job
work sheet is to be completed for each watch project. 6 - 8 Calendar and Automatic
Chronographs are to be completed. Quality of workmanship and difficulty of the projects
will be assessed as will the students ability to work independently. Watches that are not
repaired to industry standards will not be accepted for grading. Replacements for broken
or lost parts will not always be available in the TIJT lab or in the industry, therefore care
must be taken to insure that components are not mishandled or misplaced. The complete
16 point check system is detailed in a technical manual in the horology classroom.
Course Policies

2.
3.
2010.
4.
5.
6.
7.
II. Work Benches
1.
2.
3.
the floor.
III.
1.
2.
IV. Safety Codes

1.
2.
areas.
3.
4.
V. Dress Code
VI. Use of Tobacco
allowed.
lab.
ADA Statement



Course Title ( Advanced Horology III )
Course Description
Continuation of Advanced Horology Systems II including the repair of tuning fork
electronic movements. Preparation for a career in watch or instrument manufacture,
repair, or maintenance.

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Student will practice the use of multi testers and electronic timing machiones in
overhauling and trouble shooting basic electric and quartz watches.
Learning Objectives
Apply advanced theory of cleaning, overhaul, and repair procedures for the Accutron 221
and 230 watches and the ESA 913-42 watch.
Course Schedule
Unit Time
Using VOM 15 hrs. Aug. 30 - Sept. 1
Quartz Analog 85 hrs. Sept. 2 – Sept. 23

Using VOM The student will perform checks of of electronic components using a Watch
Multitester. Battery voltage, resistor ohms and circuit amperage will be checked using a
component board and readings will be recorded. Systems will be checked using selected
batteries in circuit . All readings will be recorded and passed off by the Instructor.
Grading will be based on the accuracy of test readings and calculation performed.
Neatness of paper work is also a factor. Quartz Analog Given various Quartz Analog
Watches of different manufactures the student will perform the necessary sequential steps
to complete overhauls as if they were being prepared for an actual paying customer.
Attention to detail in the completion of the watch movement, its time keeping,
cleanliness, proper oiling , lubricating, care of the crystal, case ,dial , hands and strap or
band are to be considered . Scratches, damage and loss of parts will subtract from the
overall project grade. A Job work sheet is to be completed for each watch project. There
are 15 standard Calibres used in this section although this will depend on availability.
Quality of workmanship and difficulty of the projects will be assessed as will the students
ability to work independently. Watches that are not repaired to industry standards will not
be accepted for grading. Replacements for broken or lost parts will not always be
available in the TIJT lab or in the industry, therefore care must be taken to insure that
components are not mishandled or misplaced.
Course Policies

2.
3.
2010.
4.
5.
6.
7.
II. Work Benches
1.
2.
3.
the floor.
III.
1.
2.
IV. Safety Codes

1.
2.
areas.
3.
4.
V. Dress Code
VI. Use of Tobacco
allowed.
lab.
ADA Statement



Course Title ( Advanced Horology IV )
Course Description
Continuation of Advanced Horology Systems III including the repair of quartz analog
and quartz digital timepieces. Preparation for a career in watch or instrument
manufacture, repair, or maintenance.
TSI Requirement: none

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The student will practice servicing of Analog quartz and LED and LCD watches and
perform case and bracelet repairs.
Learning Objectives
Describe and demonstrate the proper troubleshooting, cleaning, overhaul, and repair
procedures for the LED quartz watch, LCD quartz watch, and step motor quartz analog
watches.
Course Schedule
Unit Time
Electronic Watches
Quartz Chronographs 60 hrs. Aug. 30 – Sept. 14
Quartz Digital 15 hrs. Sept. 15 – Sept. 20
Water Proof Testing 5 hrs. Sept. 20
Case and Band Repair 15 hrs. Sept. 20 - Sept. 23

Given various Quartz Chronograph Watches of different manufactures the student will
perform the necessary sequential steps to complete overhauls as if they were being
prepared for an actual paying customer. Attention to detail in the completion of the watch
movement, its time keeping, cleanliness, proper oiling , lubricating, care of the crystal,
case ,dial , hands and strap or band are to be considered . Scratches, damage and loss of
parts will subtract from the overall project grade. A Job work sheet is to be completed for
each watch project. There are 3 standard Calibres used in this section although this will
depend on availability. Quality of workmanship and difficulty of the projects will be
assessed as will the students ability to work independently. Watches that are not repaired
to industry standards will not be accepted for grading. Replacements for broken or lost
parts will not always be available in the TIJT lab or in the industry, therefore care must
be taken to insure that components are not mishandled or misplaced. Quartz Digital
Given various Quartz Digital Watches of different manufactures the student will perform
the necessary sequential steps to complete overhauls as if they were being prepared for an
actual paying customer. Attention to detail in the completion of the watch movement, its
time keeping, cleanliness, care of the crystal, case ,dial , and strap or band are to be
considered . Scratches, damage and loss of parts will subtract from the overall project
grade. A Job work sheet is to be completed for each watch project. Calibres used in this
section will depend on availability. Quality of workmanship and difficulty of the projects
will be assessed as will the students ability to work independently. Watches that are not
repaired to industry standards will not be accepted for grading. Replacements for broken
or lost parts will not always be available in the TIJT lab or in the industry, therefore care
must be taken to insure that components are not mishandled or misplaced. Water Proof
Testing Using the Bergeon 5555 presure tester the student will perform waterproofing
checks on watch cases. Grading will be based on the ability to locate leaks in the watch
cases and make the necessary adjustments or repairs to insure a water tight seal . Case
and Band Repair The student will size and adjust standard watch bands and demonstrate
refinishing procedures. Attention to detail in fitting of parts and the accuracy of the
refinish/polishing will determine the grade of the projects. Replacements for broken or
lost parts will not always be available in the TIJT lab or in the industry, therefore care
must be taken to insure that components are not mishandled or misplaced. Electives :
Projects Accutrons , Tuning Fork and Balance Wheel Electric Watches

Course Policies

2.
3.
2010.
4.
5.
6.
7.
II. Work Benches

1.
2.
3.
the floor.
III.
1.
2.
IV. Safety Codes

1.
2.
areas.
3.
4.
V. Dress Code
VI. Use of Tobacco
allowed.
lab.
ADA Statement


Paris Junior College Diann V. Mason, SPHR
College Year: 2010-2011 Williams AD 133-B
Term: 101S 903.782.0374
Section: 65 dmason@parisjc.edu
HRPO 2301
Human Resources
Course Description
This course will assist students in understanding the principles, policies, and practices
related to procurement, development, maintenance and utilization of human resources
in the business environment and will cover the current business human resource
practices and concepts including the development of human resource management;
evaluate current methods of job analysis, recruitment, selection, training/development,
performance, appraisal, promotion, and separation; appraise management’s ethical,
socially responsible, and legally required actions; assess methods of compensation and
benefits planning; and evaluate role of strategic human resource planning in support of
organizational mission and objectives.

R. Wayne Mondy (2009). Human Resource Management. Prentice Hall.
ISBN: 13: 9780136077282
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
1. Examine and interpret the development of human resources management .
2. Evaluate current methods of job analysis, recruitment, selection, training and
development, performance appraisal, promotion, and separation.
3. Appraise management's ethical and social responsibilities as well as legally
required actions.
4. Assess methods of compensation and benefits planning.
5. Evaluate the role of strategic human resource planning in support of
organizational mission and objectives.
HRPO 2301-Diann V. Mason, SPHR Page 1 of 4

Learning Objectives
1. Access the class information regularly.
2. Demonstrate responsibility.
3. Read materials and demonstrate understanding through testing.
4. Compare and interpret terms as they relate in human resource management.
5. Organize and plan writing assignments based on the criteria.
6. Research and defend interpretation of a topic in hr.
7. Evaluate relevant business cases.
8. Argue business practices and justify interpretations.
9. Understand and evaluate federal laws and court cases as relating to human
resource management.
Course Schedule
Week One (Aug 30-Sep 6): Review of course information and Chapter 1: Strategic
Human Resource Management: An Overview.
Week Two (Sep 7 – Sep 12): Chapter 2: HR: Social Responsibility and Business
Ethics.
Week Three (Sep 12 – Sep 19): Chapter 3: Workforce Diversity, Equal Employment
Opportunity, and Affirmative Action; Case Study One due.
Week Four (Sep 20 - Sep 26): Chapter 4: Job Analysis and Human Resource Planning;
article abstract due.
Week Five (Sep 27 – Oct 3): Test One (Chaps 1-4).
Week Six (Oct 4 – Oct 10): Chapter 6: Selection
Week Seven (Oct 11 – Oct 17): Chapter 7: Training and Development
Week Eight (Oct 18 – Oct 24): Chapter 8: Performance Appraisal; abstract 2 due
Week Nine Assignment: Oct 25 – Oct 31: Test Two (Chaps 6-8).
Week Ten Assignment: Nov 1-Nov 7: Chapter 9: Compensation; Case Study Two due.
Week Eleven Assignment: Nov 8 – Nov 14: Chapters 10: Benefits and Other
Compensation Issues and Chapter 11 Safety and Health.
Week Twelve Assignment: Nov 15 – Nov 21: Test Three (Chaps 9-11); Book Review
due.
Week Thirteen Assignment: Nov 22 – Nov 28: Thanksgiving Holiday

Week Fourteen Assignment: Nov 29 – Dec 5:Chapter 12: Employee and Labor
Relations; research essay due.
Week Fifteen Assignment: Dec 6 - Dec 12: Chapter 13: Collective Bargaining and
Chapter 14: Internal Employee Relations.
Week Sixteen Assignment: Dec 13 - Dec 16: Test Four (Chaps 12-14).

As an online course, students are expected to work independently. Students will read
assigned sections of the textbook, complete online assignments and quizzes as well as
required writing assignments. Students will be required to go to a college campus or
testing site to complete two of the four required exams. Online Quizzes will cover
terminology and topics covered within the assigned reading. Discussion will be posted
by the instructor or brought up in the weekly chat session. Research topic will be a two-
page extended definition of a topic in human resource management to be assigned.
Tests will cover the chapters stated. The final exam will count as one of these four tests
and will not be comprehensive. The semester grade will be based on the following
assignments and points:
350 points reading quizzes and daily homework
50 points for 2 article abstracts
100 points for research essay
100 points for book review
300 points for (3) tests
100 points for the final exam test
1000 points total
900-1000 = A, 800 – 899 = B, 700 – 799 = C, 650-699 = D, below 650 = F
Course Policies
Attendance/Withdrawal: This online course uses a computer and the internet to deliver
lessons and for interaction between the instructor and the student. To be successful, the
student must access the course material on a regular basis as assignments will be due
weekly. It is important that students not get behind in completing the assignments. A
student risks non-attendance issues when he/she has not signed into WebCt or
completed assignments for more than 2 weeks. A student may withdraw from this
course at any time during the semester through the last date to withdraw, Nov 18, 2010.
All withdrawals must be initiated by the student, as I will not drop you for failure to
participate or complete assignments.
Academic Honesty: In the pursuit of learning, it is expected that students will engage
in honest academic endeavor to the highest degree of honor and integrity. By
registering and taking this course, the officially enrolled student declares that he/she will
be the author of ALL work submitted for the course. Allowing another individual to
complete assignments constitutes fraud and academic dishonesty. Should such

behavior come to the attention of the instructor, the instructor will discuss the situation
with the student and discipline, up to and including a course grade of “F,” will be
determined.
Late Work Policy: Students are expected to complete assignments by the published
deadlines. If you miss an assignment because of an emergency, you must contact me
as soon as possible. Any late work accepted must be completed within one week of the
due date. Late work will not be accepted unless prior approval has been granted.
Approval will not be granted for work that is more than 2 weeks late. A minimum of 10
points will be deducted for late work.
Testing: Test 2 and 4 (the final exam) of the four major tests will be given at testing
center either at Paris Junior College or one of the off-campus centers. You must travel
to the testing site and present a valid photo ID to access the test. If you will be unable to
travel to a testing site, contact me as soon as possible, but no later than Sept 14. The
PJC Testing Center hours are posted on the main PJC website (www.parisjc.edu) under
the "Informative" tab on the left or see the website for the nearest off-campus center
(Greenville or Sulphur Springs).
Writing assignment format: Students are expected to have basic writing skills and to
be able to apply these skills to any college-level assignment. Writing assignments for
HRPO 2301 should be in the proper APA style and submitted online via WebCt as well
as adhere to the criteria as outlined. You will be expected to use proper business
communications skills as well as Standard English grammar and punctuation. NOTE:
the instructor reserves the right to refuse for grading any illegible paper that
would require an inordinate amount of time to decipher. The instructor may also
refuse to grade any paper which has been deemed plagiarized.
ADA Statement

Center (Paris campus). Services include arrangements for accommodations,
counseling, and services to allow equal access to educational opportunities for students
with disabilities. Students must request services by providing a letter of verification of
disability and must complete an interview with a Counseling/Advising Center counselor
or advisor. Reasonable accommodation request(s) with documentation may be subject
to review by the ADA Committee.
To provide appropriated planning and scheduling, students must submit their requests
at least two weeks before accommodations are needed.
For scheduling of interpreters, available modified equipment, enlarged text and/or books
on tape, please allow four to six weeks.
For more information, contact Counseling/ Advising at 903.782.0426 (Paris campus).

Students are encouraged to seek assistance in advance of the beginning of the
semester in which accommodations are requested.

Term: 101S Office Phone 903-782-0726
Course # (HYDR 1405)

Course Title (Hydraulics)
Course Description
An overview of the fundamentals of fluid power as applied to automated systems.

Topics include the application, function, construction, and operations of pumps, motors,
cylinders, valves, and other components.


Parker Industrial Hydraulic Technology Interactive CD, Bulletin 0298-P17/CD USA
Version 1.0 (Provided)
LAB EXPERIMENTS: TII EXPLORER II (Provided)
Parker Hydraulic Technology Lab Manual, Bulletin 0249 (Provided)
Program Outcomes
There are several Electromechanical Technology Programs Outcomes for all the
different courses, at the end of the HYDR 1405 course, Hydraulics, the student will be
able to design a schematic and build a circuit on the hydraulic trainer to sequence a
motor with a hydraulic cylinder and limit the maximum force the cylinder will exert.
Course Outcomes
In addition to what is outlined in the Program Outcomes, the student will become

completely familiar with cylinder force and speed calculations as well as understand all
the hydraulic components for flow rate, flow direction and pressure.
Learning Objectives
This course will familiarize the student with hydraulic systems in industry. Basic theory
will be covered followed by detailed study of each system component beginning with
hydraulic pumps, reservoirs and filters then proceeding to pressure and flow control
valves, directional valves, servo valves, cylinders, accumulators, flow conduit and other
Course Schedule

Over the course of 16 weeks the following hydraulic modules will be covered, along with
35 hydraulic lab experiments and 10 system analysis homework problems:
Module 1 Introduction to Hydraulics
Module 2 Hydraulic Fluids
Module 3 Hydraulic Pumps
Module 4 Hydraulic Actuators
Module 5 Control of Hydraulic Energy
Module 6 Reservoirs/Coolers/Filtration
Module 7 Maintenance/Fault Finding
Module 8 Circuit Diagrams/Applications
Course Policies
Grading: Six (6) tests, module and homework grades and one comprehensive final
exam

80% Tests, module and homework grades
20% Final Exam
At the discretion of the instructor, the final exam score can be substituted for the lowest
test score.
Attendance/Drop


11375.
Academic Honesty
In pursuit of learning, it is expected that students will engage in honest academic endeavor to
the highest degree of honor and integrity. Students who are found to engage in academic
dishonesty through such activities as cheating on exams, plagiarism, or collusion with others
will be referred to the Vice President of Student Services for disciplinary action such as
dismissal from the college. For detailed information on Academic Honesty, refer to the College
Catalog.
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Marjorie Pannell

College Year: 2010-2011 AS Room 140
Term: 101S 903-782-0360
Section: P1 mpannell@parisjc.edu
ITNW 1425
Fundamentals of Networking
Course Description
Instruction in networking technologies and their implementation. Topics include the OSI
reference model, network protocols, transmission media, and networking hardware and
software.
4 credit hours, 3 lecture and 3 laboratory hours per week

Managing and Troubleshooting Networks 2e
Mike Meyers
ISBN: 978-0-07-161483-2
Program Outcomes
1. Demonstrate techniques to design and implement a secure infrastructure
network.
2. Demonstrate computer literacy and knowledge of computer technologies.
3. Ability to evaluate resources and make relevant recommendations for purchase
or upgrade of a system.
4. Identify tools, diagnostic procedures and troubleshooting techniques for personal
computer components.
6. Recognize the interaction of personal and network devices, operating systems,
and applications.
Course Outcomes
network.
and applications.
Learning Objectives
ITNW 1425.P1 – Marjorie Pannell Page 1 of 3

 Learn about all types of networks from the ground up, including SOHO (small
office/home office) and large enterprise networks.
 Work within the OSI seven-layer model
 Configure network hardware, topologies, and cabling
 Connect multiple Ethernet components
 Install a structured cable network and a network interface card.
 Configure wireless networking hardware
 Work wit network protocols – NetBEUI, IPX/SPX, and TCP/IP
 Share and access resources, including files and printers.
 Set up clients and servers for remote Internet access
 Secure your network using firewalls, packet filtering, encryption, authentication,
and other methods.
 Learn to perform complete network installations and basic troubleshooting in
order to move on to a network certification course of study.
Course Schedule
Week 1: CompTIA Network+ in a Nutshell
Week 2: Building a Network with the OSI Model and Cabling and Topology
Week 3: Ethernet Basics and Modern Ethernet
Week 4: Installing a Physical Network
Week 5: TCP/IP Basics
Week 6: The Wonderful World of Routing
Week 7: TCP/IP Applications
Week 8: Exam 1
Week 9: Network Naming
Week 10: Securing TCP/IP
Week 11: Advanced Networking Devices and IPv6
Week 12: Remote Connectivity
Week 13: Network Troubleshooting
Week 14: Protecting Your Network and Network Management
Week 15: Exam 2

50% Lab Assignments (Review Assignments and Case Projects)
Course Policies
• As a hybrid, class meets once a week for lecture, demonstrations, and “hands-
on” computer assignments.


to complete Lab assignments, and chapter quizzes.
period.
academic honesty.
ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-0360
ITNW 1425
Fundamentals of Networking
Course Description
Instruction in networking technologies and their implementation. Topics include the OSI
reference model, network protocols, transmission media, and networking hardware and
software.

Managing and Troubleshooting Networks 2e
Mike Meyers
ISBN: 978-0-07-161483-2
Program Outcomes
network.
and applications.
Course Outcomes
network.
and applications.
Learning Objectives
ITNW 1425.P2 Marjorie Pannell Page 1 of 3

 Learn about all types of networks from the ground up, including SOHO (small
office/home office) and large enterprise networks.
 Work within the OSI seven-layer model
 Configure network hardware, topologies, and cabling
 Connect multiple Ethernet components
 Install a structured cable network and a network interface card.
 Configure wireless networking hardware
 Work wit network protocols – NetBEUI, IPX/SPX, and TCP/IP
 Share and access resources, including files and printers.
 Set up clients and servers for remote Internet access
 Secure your network using firewalls, packet filtering, encryption, authentication,
and other methods.
 Learn to perform complete network installations and basic troubleshooting in
order to move on to a network certification course of study.
Course Schedule
Week 1: CompTIA Network+ in a Nutshell
Week 2: Building a Network with the OSI Model and Cabling and Topology
Week 3: Ethernet Basics and Modern Ethernet
Week 4: Installing a Physical Network
Week 5: TCP/IP Basics
Week 6: The Wonderful World of Routing
Week 7: TCP/IP Applications
Week 8: Exam 1
Week 9: Network Naming
Week 10: Securing TCP/IP
Week 11: Advanced Networking Devices and IPv6
Week 12: Remote Connectivity
Week 13: Network Troubleshooting
Week 14: Protecting Your Network and Network Management
Week 15: Exam 2

Course Policies


period.
academic honesty.
ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-0360
Section: G1 mpannell@parisjc.edu
ITNW 1451
Fundamentals of Wireless LANs
Course Description
Instruction in security for network hardware, software, and data, including physical
security; backup procedures; relevant tools; encryption; and protection from viruses.

Fundamentals of Wireless Networking
Ron Price
ISBN: 9780072256680
Program Outcomes
network.
and applications.
Course Outcomes
and applications.
Learning Objectives
 Examine the characteristics, markets and applications, and issues of wireless
networks.
 Identify where wireless network may be appropriate, the variety of wireless
ITNW 1451.G1 –Marjorie Pannell Page 1 of 3

networking technology available now and in the future, and the advantages and
disadvantages of wireless networking.
 Examine the Open Systems Interconnection Reference Model (OSI model),
networking topologies, and media access methods.
 Define radio frequency and examine the basic operations, standards, and
technologies that provide the foundation on which wireless data networking is
built.
 Identify the underlying concepts of how spread spectrum technology works.
 Identify and apply the concepts which make up the functionality of spread
spectrum technology.
 Identify, explain, and apply the concepts covered by the IEEE 802.11 standards.
 Summarize the processes involved in authentication and association.
 Identify technology roles for which wireless LAN technology is appropriate.
 Identify and explain how to solve wireless LAN implementation challenges.
 Describe wireless LAN security attacks, and explain how to identify and prevent
them where possible.
 Identify the equipment and applications involved in performing manual site
surveys.
Course Schedule
Week 1: Introduction to Wireless Networks
Week 2: Wireless Modes Technologies
Week 3: Wireless Network Devices
Week 4: Radio Frequency (RF) Communications
Week 5: Wireless LAN Standards
Week 6: Infrared and Other Networking Media
Week 7: Bluetooth and Wireless Personal Area Networks
Week 8: Wireless LAN Planning and Design
Week 9: WLAN Configuration and Installation
Week 10: WLAN Antennas
Week 11: WLAN Security
Week 12: HAN, SOHO, and The Enterprise
Week 13: Troubleshooting WLANs and Wireless Devices
Week 14: Wireless WANs
Week 15: Final Exam

50% Lab Assignments
Course Policies


period.
academic honesty.
ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-0360
ITNW 1451
Fundamentals of Wireless LANs
Course Description

Fundamentals of Wireless Networking
Ron Price
ISBN: 9780072256680
Program Outcomes
network.
and applications.
Course Outcomes
and applications.
Learning Objectives
 Examine the characteristics, markets and applications, and issues of wireless
networks.
 Identify where wireless network may be appropriate, the variety of wireless

networking technology available now and in the future, and the advantages and
disadvantages of wireless networking.
 Examine the Open Systems Interconnection Reference Model (OSI model),
networking topologies, and media access methods.
 Define radio frequency and examine the basic operations, standards, and
technologies that provide the foundation on which wireless data networking is
built.
 Identify the underlying concepts of how spread spectrum technology works.
 Identify and apply the concepts which make up the functionality of spread
spectrum technology.
 Identify, explain, and apply the concepts covered by the IEEE 802.11 standards.
 Summarize the processes involved in authentication and association.
 Identify technology roles for which wireless LAN technology is appropriate.
 Identify and explain how to solve wireless LAN implementation challenges.
 Describe wireless LAN security attacks, and explain how to identify and prevent
them where possible.
 Identify the equipment and applications involved in performing manual site
surveys.
Course Schedule
Week 1: Introduction to Wireless Networks
Week 2: Wireless Modes Technologies
Week 3: Wireless Network Devices
Week 4: Radio Frequency (RF) Communications
Week 5: Wireless LAN Standards
Week 6: Infrared and Other Networking Media
Week 7: Bluetooth and Wireless Personal Area Networks
Week 8: Wireless LAN Planning and Design
Week 9: WLAN Configuration and Installation
Week 10: WLAN Antennas
Week 11: WLAN Security
Week 12: HAN, SOHO, and The Enterprise
Week 13: Troubleshooting WLANs and Wireless Devices
Week 14: Wireless WANs
Week 15: Final Exam

50% Lab Assignments
Course Policies


period.
academic honesty.
ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-0360
Section: 40 mpannell@parisjc.edu
ITNW 2413
Networking Hardware
Course Description
Maintain network hardware devices. Topics include network cables, servers, and
workstations; network connectivity devices such as routers, hubs, bridges, gateways,
repeaters, and uninterruptible power supplies; and other networking hardware devices

All Materials for this class will be furnished.
Program Outcomes
network.
and applications.
Course Outcomes
and applications.
Learning Objectives
 Identify the tools and equipment necessary to complete fiber optic terminations.
 Identify the tools and equipment necessary to complete copper based cabling.
 Identify the five elements of a typical fiber optic system and develop an
understanding of the function and operation of each.
ITNW 2413.40 – Marjorie Pannell Page 1 of 3

 Explain attenuation and explain the causes of attenuation in fiber optic cables.
 Identify the characteristics and construction of loose core fiber optic cable; and
tight core fiber optic cable; and compare their construction.
 Explain, and use the step-by-step procedure for placing fiber optic cables in a
building and as used in backbone cabling deployments.
 Explain and perform fiber optics continuity testing utilizing different types of fiber
optic test equipment.
 Identify the tools and step-by-step process used to attach a fiber connector to a
fiber.
 Understand the evolution and operation of copper based cabling systems used in
phone systems, coaxial systems, and twisted pair computer networks.
 Develop the skills necessary to construct, test, and troubleshoot various Physical
Layer network problems, including cables, NICs, and other Physical Layer
components.
 Understand the uses and responses of the DAVE-3 test set.
 Understand the Interactive Telecommunication Board, and how its miniature
systems relate to the equivalent systems in use in today’s telecommunications
and network environment.
 Understand the relevance of bandwidth, cable routing, and other critical factors
(such as building codes, electrical standards, and safety) when designing and
installing a twisted pair computer network.
Course Schedule
Week 1: The ACT with DAVE Training Aid
Week 2: Twisted Pair Cabling Systems and Safety
Week 3: Constructing/Testing and Troubleshooting/Punching Down of 4-Pair Cabling
Systems
Week 4: Coaxial Cable
Week 5: Commercial and Residential Cabling Topologies and Standards
Week 6: Testing and Troubleshooting Copper-Based Cabling Systems
Week 7: Local Area Network Overview
Week 8: Exam 1
Week 9: Fiber Optic Concepts and Cabling
Week 10: Sources, Detectors, and the Fiber Optic Termination Workstation
Week 11: Terminating Fiber Optic Cable
Week 12: Placement of Fiber Optic Cable
Week 13: Testing and Troubleshooting Fiber Optic Cabling Systems
Week 14: The Network Cabling Specialist
Week 15: Exam 2

50% EXAMS (two major exams)

Course Policies
assignments.
period.
academic honesty.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903 782 0359
ITSC1301
Introduction to Computers
Course Description
Overview of computer information systems. Introduces computer hardware, software,
procedures, and human resources.

Discovering Computers – Fundamentals, 2011 Edition by Shelly/Vermaat
(ISBN: 1-4390-7945-5) and associated Online Companion
Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
• Introduce basic computer concepts.

• Present the historic time line of computer development.
• Learn about the World Wide Web, browsers, email, FTP, and instant messaging.
• Introduce a variety of business, graphics and multimedia, and communications
software.
• Learn the components of the system unit; how memory stores data, instructions, and
information.
ITSC1301.65 – Jenny Herron Page 1 of 3

• Describe various input/output methods and introduce commonly used devices.
• Students learn about various storage media and devices and digital imaging and
video technology.
• Introduce operating systems: stand-alone, network, and embedded operating
systems.
• Present a buyer’s guide for purchasing a computer.
• Present an overview of communications technology and applications.
• Present the advantages of organizing data using a database management tool.
• Introduce the concepts of computer security, ethics, and privacy.
• Introduce the system development cycle and computing requirements for an
enterprise-sized organization.
Course Schedule
2nd Wk. Introduction to Computers
3rd Wk. The Internet and World Wide Web
4th Wk. Application Software
5th Wk. System Unit Components
6th Wk. Input and Output
7th Wk. Storage Media
8th Wk. Mid-Term Exam
9th Wk. Operating Systems and Utility Programs
10th Wk. Communications and Networks
11th Wk. Database Management
12th Wk. Computer Security, Ethics, and Privacy
13th Wk. Information Systems Development
14th Wk. Programming Languages
15th Wk. Enterprise Computing
16th Wk. Final Exam

40% EXAMS: Mid-Term Exam and Final Exam
30% Assignments
30% Quizzes
Course Policies
• Class meets via the Internet using the WebCT LMS and the textbook’s Online
Companion site for course content reinforcement activities.

• The WebCT Learning Management System contains documents for course and
assignment procedures, Homework instructions, course syllabus, course
calendar, links to web sites, manuals for using Online, and any document that
would be distributed in a traditional classroom.
chapters and other reading materials, homework assignments, chapter quizzes,
and reinforcement activities at the Companion website.
• Students are expected to login to LMS, Online Companion at least 3 times per
week.
• Assignments are expected to be completed during the assigned availability
period.
academic honesty.
and in discussions
requirements.
ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-0360
ITSC 1364
Practicum
Course Description
Practical, general workplace training supported by an individualized learning plan
developed by the employer, college, and student.

No Textbook is required.
Program Outcomes
network.
and applications.
Course Outcomes
network.
and applications.
Learning Objectives
ITSC 1364.01 –Marjoie Pannell Page 1 of 2

specialized materials, tools, equipment, procedures, regulations, laws, and

interactions within and among political, economic, environmental, social, and
legal systems associated with the occupations and the business/industry and will
demonstrate legal and ethical behavior, safety practices, interpersonal and
teamwork skill, and appropriate written and verbal communication skills using the
terminology of the occupation and the business/industry.
Course Schedule
Students will work according to an individual plan developed for them by the instructor
and employer based on the student’s course of study and the employer’s job
description.

Grade will be based on evaluation by the employer, an internship log, and the
instructors assessment of students performance.
Course Policies
• Students are expected to show up for work on time and dress appropriately.
• Students are expected to keep weekly internship logs of their duties at work.
• Students dismissed for cause by the employer will receive a failing grade.
• Students are required to keep copies of all documents pertaining to their
workplace until they have successfully received credit for and completed their
practicum class.
ADA Statement
ITSC 1364.01 –Marjoie Pannell Page 2 of 2


Term: 101S 903-782-0360
ITSC 1405
PC Operating Systems
Course Description
Introduction to personal computer operating systems including installation,
configuration, file management, memory and storage management, control of peripheral
devices, and use of utilities.

Microsoft Windows 7
Parsons, Oja, Ruffolo
Course Technology
978-0-538-74600-7
Program Outcomes
1. Analyze a problem definition to identify inputs, processes, and outputs required
academic report and presentations.
3. Demonstrate knowledge of industry terminology and effective communication
skills.
4. Recognize the interaction of stand-alone and network devices, operating
Course Outcomes
skills.
Learning Objectives
 Personalize the desktop, manage files, and secure computers.
 Examine Windows Media Center, Homegroups, libraries, Windows Live
Essentials, and Windows Touch
 Manage multimedia files, coordinate mobile computers and home networks,
maintain hardware and software, and improve system performance.
ITSC 1405.65 – Marjorie Pannell Page 1 of 3

Course Schedule
Week 1: Intro
Week 2: Exploring the Basics of Microsoft Windows 7
Week 3: Organizing Your Files
Week 4: Personalizing Your Windows Environment
Week 5: Working with the Internet and E-Mail
Week 6: Protecting Your Computer
Week 7: Searching for Information and Collaborating with Others
Week 8: Exam 1
Week 9: Managing Multimedia File
Week 10: Connecting to Networks with Mobile Computing
Week 11: Maintaining Hardware and Software
Week 12: Improving Your Computer’s Performance
Week 13: Connecting Computers to the Internet
Week 14: Exploring Additional Windows 7 Tools
Week 15: Exam 2

Course Policies
• Class meets via the Internet using the WebCT.
syllabus, course calendar.
chapter quizzes, and exams.
• Students are expected to login to WebCT at least 3 times per week.
period.
academic honesty.
and in discussions

ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-0360
ITSC 1405
Course Description

Microsoft Windows 7
Course Technology
978-0-538-74600-7
Program Outcomes
skills.
Course Outcomes
skills.
Learning Objectives

Course Schedule
Week 1: Intro
Week 8: Exam 1
Week 15: Exam 2

Course Policies
• Class meets via the Internet using the WebCT.
syllabus, course calendar.
chapter quizzes, and exams.
• Students are expected to login to WebCT at least 3 times per week.
period.
academic honesty.
and in discussions

ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-0360
ITSC 1405
Course Description

Microsoft Windows 7
Course Technology
978-0-538-74600-7
Program Outcomes
skills.
Course Outcomes
skills.
Learning Objectives
ITSC 1405.P1 – Marjorie Pannell Page 1 of 3

Course Schedule
Week 1: Intro
Week 8: Exam 1
Week 15: Exam 2

Course Policies
period.
academic honesty.


ADA Statement


Term: 10S1 903.782.0378
ITSC 1409
Integration of Software Applications I
Course Description
Integration of applications from popular business productivity software suites.
Instruction in embedding data, linking and combining documents using word processing,
spreadsheets, databases, and/or presentation media software.
Prerequisite(s): Keyboarding proficiency.
Microsoft Office (2007) Marquee Series, by Nita Rutkosky and Denise Sequin. ISBN
9780763832230 (text and CD data files). Publisher: Paradigm Publishing
Program Outcomes
1. Analyze a problem definition to identify inputs, processes, and outputs required to present a
viable solution.



4. Recognize the interaction of personal and network devices, operating systems, and applications.
Course Outcomes
Use word processing, spreadsheet, database, and/or presentation media software;

apply integration techniques; and produce combined documents.
ITSC 1409.01-Jan Jordan Page 1 of 5

Course Schedule

ITSC 1409 Integrated Software Applications I
Microsoft Office 2007 ‐‐ Marquee Series
Fall 2010‐‐Schedule of Assignments and Due Dates
Complete each section tutorial as assigned. Assignments will always be accepted before the due date. The last day to turn in
any assignment is Wednesday, December 15, 2010. Remember—the Final Production Exam must be taken by Wednesday,
December 15, 2010 at 8:25‐9:40 in AS Room 154.
Class Meeting Unit/Tutorial/Section Page No. Assignments

SR=Skills Review
SA=Skills Assignments
MC=Marquee Challenge
Aug 30‐ Introduction to Word
Sept 3 Section 1: Word ‐‐ Creating and Word 1‐32 SR 1
Editing a Document MC 1
Sept 7‐10 Continue working on Section 1
tion 2: Word ‐‐ Formatting Characters Word 33‐64 SA 3

and Paragraphs
Sept 13‐17
Section 3: Word ‐‐ Formatting and Word 65‐96 SR 1
Enhancing a Document

Sept 20‐24 Continue with Section 3
Section 4: Word—Formatting with Word 97‐134 SR 3
Special Features

Sept 27‐Oct 1 Introduction to Excel Excel 1‐32 SR 1 & 2
Section 1: Excel—Analyzing Data
Using Excel

Take Word Production Exam

Oct 4‐8 Section 2: Excel ‐‐ Editing and Excel 33‐64 SR 1, 2
Formatting Worksheets

Oct 11‐15 Section 3: Excel – Using Functions, Excel 65‐96 SR 1 (Skip #14)
Setting Print Options, and
Adding Visual Elements

Oct 18‐22 Section 4: Excel – Working with Excel 97‐128 SR 2
Multiple Worksheets, Tables, and
Other File Formats

Oct 25‐29 Integrating I—Word and Excel Integrating I SR 1
129‐134
Take Excel Production Exam
Introduction to Access
Nov 1‐5 1: Access ‐‐ Maintaining Data in Access Access 1‐32 SR 1, 2
Tables

Nov 8‐12 Section 2: Access ‐‐ Creating Tables
and Relationships Access 33‐64 SR 1

Nov 15‐19
Section 3: Access – Creating Queries, Access 65‐96 SR 1
Forms, and Reports
Nov 29‐ Section 4: Access – Summarizing Data Access 97‐ After completing all of Section

Dec 3 and Calculating in Forms and Reports 128 4 through 4.8, send me
WEEmployees 4
and I will check everything
you have done in the Section.
No SR, SA, or MC.

Then do 4.9 and send it to
me.

______________________________ ___________ ____________________
Introduction to PowerPoint PP 1‐32 SR 1
Section 1: PowerPoint ‐‐ Preparing a
Presentation

Dec 6‐10 Take Production Exam over Access

Section 2: PowerPoint – Editing and PP 33‐64 SR 2
Enhancing Slides


Section 3: PowerPoint – Customizing PP 65‐96 MC 1 or MC 2

a Presentation Your Choice!

Final Production Exam over
Dec 13‐16 PowerPoint
Scheduled for Wednesday,
December 15, 2010 at 8:25‐9:40 in
Room 154.
1. Read and study assignments.
2. Complete assignments on or before the due date and submit to instructor (60% of your
grade).
3. Complete three Production Exams over Word, Excel, and Access (30% of your grade).
4. Complete Final Production Exam over the fourth software which is PowerPoint during final
exam week by Wednesday, December 15, 2010 (10% of your grade). If you do not take your
final exam, you will receive an “F” in this course.

Course Policies

4. All cell phones, beepers and personal digital assistants (pda’s) must be turned off or
in silent mode. Under no circumstances should a cell phone or beeper sound during
class. If a cell phone or beeper does sound during class, the student may be asked
to leave for the remainder of the period. The only exception to this rule includes
peace officers, EMT, EMS, or other emergency personnel, and their devices should
be in silent mode.
withdraw with a “W” if so desired. The instructor will not drop a student unless the
student asks for a drop form, completes the drop form, and takes it to the Records
Office.

ADA Statement



Term: 10S1 903.782.0378
ITSC 1409
Course Description
Integration of applications from popular business productivity software suites. Instruction in
embedding data, linking and combining documents using word processing, spreadsheets,
databases, and/or presentation media software.
Program Outcomes
solution.

2. Utilize industry standard application software to produce personal, business, and academic reports
and presentations.


Course Outcomes
Use word processing, spreadsheet, database, and/or presentation media software; apply
integration techniques; and produce combined documents.
Learning Objectives
1. Use Microsoft Word, create and edit a document; format characters, paragraphs, and documents; and enhance
appearance of a document.
2. Use Microsoft Excel, analyze data; edit and format worksheets; work with multiple worksheets and use
functions; and add visual elements to worksheets and manage files.

3. Use Microsoft Access, maintain data in tables; create tables and relationships; modify data, create
forms, and view data; and create queries, reports, and web pages.
4. Use Microsoft PowerPoint, prepare, edit, enhance, and customize a slide presentation.
5. Integrate Word, Excel, Access, and PowerPoint documents as instructed.
Course Schedule

Complete all section activities as assigned. Assignments will always be accepted before the due date
(Assignments in last column on chart below). The last day to turn in any assignment is Wednesday, December
15, 2010. Remember—the Final Production Exam must be taken at a PJC campus given by the instructor. The
final exam must be taken by Wednesday, December 15, 2010 by 3 p.m.

WEEK Section Activities Page No. Assignment (end of
each section)
SR=Skills Reviews
SA=Skills Assessments
Aug 30‐Sept 3 Introduction to Word SR 1
Section 1: Word ‐‐ Creating and Editing a Word 1‐32 MC 1
Document
Sept 7‐10 Continue working on Section 1
Section 2: Word ‐‐ Formatting Characters and Word 33‐64 SA 3
Paragraphs
Sept 13‐17 Section 3: Word ‐‐ Formatting and Enhancing Word 65‐96 SA 2

a Document
Sept 20‐24 Continue with Section 3
Section 4: Word—Formatting with Special Word 97‐134 SR 3
Features
Continue with Section 4
Make sure all 4 webct Word quizzes have
Sept 27‐Oct 1 been completed!!
Introduction to Excel
Section 1: Excel ‐‐ Analyzing Data Using Excel Excel 1‐32 SR 1 & 2
Section 2: Excel ‐‐ Editing and Formatting
Oct 4‐8 Worksheets Excel 33‐64 SR 1 & 2
Section 3: Excel – Using Functions, Setting
Oct 11‐15 Print Options, and Adding Visual Excel 65‐96 SR 2
Elements

Section 4: Excel – Working with Multiple
Oct 18‐22 Worksheets, Tables, and Other File Formats Excel 97‐128 SR 2

Make sure all 4 webct quizzes in Excel have
Oct 25‐29 been completed! Integrating SR 1
Pages 129‐140
Integrating 1—Integrating Word and Excel
Nov 1‐5 Section 1: Access ‐‐ Maintaining Data in Access 1‐32 SR 1 & 2
Access Tables
Section 2: Access ‐‐ Creating Tables and
Nov 8‐12 Relationships Access 33‐64 SR 1
Section 3: Access – Creating Queries, Forms,
Nov 15‐9 and Reports Access 65‐96 SR 1
Nov 22‐23 Section 4: Access – Summarizing Data and Access 97‐128 Complete all of

Calculating in Forms and Section 4
Reports through Activity
4.8. Then send
me the
WEEmployees4
database and I
will check
everything you
have done in the
section
activities. Then
send me 4.9.

No SR, SA, or
MC.
Make sure all 4 webct Access quizzes have
Nov 29‐Dec 3 been completed!

Introduction to PowerPoint

Presentation PP 1‐32 SR 1

Dec 6‐10 Section 2: PowerPoint – Editing and PP 33‐64 SR 2

Enchancing Slides

Section 3: PowerPoint – Customizing a
Presentation PP 65‐96 MC 1 or MC 2
Your Choice!
Make sure both webct PowerPoint quizzes
have been completed!
Dec 13‐17 Final Production Exam over all 4 softwares
scheduled for Tuesday, December 14 in
Sulphur Springs, Wednesday, December 15
in Greenville, or Monday or Thursday in
Paris, December 13 or 16.
Students will complete section activities, Skills Reviews, Skill Assessments, and Marquee Challenges as
assigned in the assignment schedule. Four Quizzes over each software (PowerPoint only has two)
should be completed in webct as scheduled. The Final Production Exam over all four softwares will be
taken during the final exam week and will be taken at the Paris Campus or at one of the off-campus
centers. I will give you your final exam scheduled at a convenient time for both of us. The final exam
must be completed by Wednesday, December 15, 2010 by 3 p.m. since grades have to be turned in by
Thursday morning. The student’s final grade will be calculated as follows:
Average of software Quizzes as assigned in WebCT 10%

Average of Skills Reviews, Skills Assessments, and Marquee Challenges at the 60%
end of each software section in your textbook sent as attachments to the

instructor.

Final Production Exam (taken at a PJC testing site) 30%

TOTAL 100%
If you do not take your final exam, you will receive an “F” in this course.

Course Policies

ADA Statement


Paris Junior College Roy Edmonson
College Year: 2010-2011 AD 140
Term: 10S1 903.782.0489
Section: .66 redmonson@parisjc.edu
ITSC 1409
Course Description
Integration of applications from popular business productivity software suites. Instruction in
embedding data, linking and combining documents using word processing, spreadsheets,
databases, and/or presentation media software.
Program Outcomes
solution.

2. Utilize industry standard application software to produce personal, business, and academic reports
and presentations.


Course Outcomes
Use word processing, spreadsheet, database, and/or presentation media software; apply
integration techniques; and produce combined documents.
Learning Objectives
1. Use Microsoft Word, create and edit a document; format characters, paragraphs, and documents; and enhance
appearance of a document.
2. Use Microsoft Excel, analyze data; edit and format worksheets; work with multiple worksheets and use
functions; and add visual elements to worksheets and manage files.
ITSC 1409.66-Roy Edmonson Page 1 of 8

3. Use Microsoft Access, maintain data in tables; create tables and relationships; modify data, create
forms, and view data; and create queries, reports, and web pages.
4. Use Microsoft PowerPoint, prepare, edit, enhance, and customize a slide presentation.
5. Integrate Word, Excel, Access, and PowerPoint documents as instructed.
Course Schedule
Complete all section activities as assigned. Assignments will always be accepted before the due date
(Assignments in last column on chart below). No assignments will be accepted after the due date. Remember
the Final Production Exam must be taken at a PJC campus given by the instructor. The final exam must be taken
Thursday, December 16 in the morning at Sulphur Springs, Thursday, December 16 in the afternoon in
Greenville, or Monday or Tuesday in Paris, December 13 or 14..
WEEK Section Activities Page No. Assignment (end of

each section)
SR=Skills Reviews
SA=Skills Assessments
Aug 30‐Sept 3 Introduction to Word SR 1
Section 1: Word ‐‐ Creating and Editing Word 1‐32 MC 1
a Document
Due By midnight September 3

September 6 Labor Day Holiday!! Have Fun!
Sept 7‐10 Section 2: Word – Formatting
Characters and Paragraphs SA 3
Due by midnight September 10 Word 33‐64
Section 3: Word ‐‐ Formatting and
Sept 13‐17 Enhancing a Document Word 65‐96 SA 2
Due by midnight September 17
Sept 20‐24 Section 4: Word Formatting with Special
Features Word 97‐134 SR 3
Due by midnight September 24
Make sure all 4 webct Word quizzes have
been completed!!
Sept 27‐Oct 1
Introduction to Excel

Section 1: Excel ‐‐ Analyzing Data Using Excel 1‐32 SR 1 & 2
Excel
Due by midnight October 1
Section 2: Excel ‐‐ Editing and Formatting
Oct 4‐8 Worksheets Excel 33‐64 SR 1 & 2
Section 3: Excel – Using Functions,
Oct 11‐15 Setting Print Options, and Adding Visual Excel 65‐96 SR 2

Elements
Section 4: Excel – Working with Multiple
Worksheets, Tables, and Other File Formats
Oct 18‐22 Excel 97‐128 SR 2

Make sure all 4 webct quizzes in Excel have
been completed!
Oct 25‐29 Integrating SR 1

Pages 129‐140
Integrating 1—Integrating Word and Excel
Nov 1‐5 Section 1: Access ‐‐ Maintaining Data in Access 1‐32 SR 1 & 2
Access Tables
Due by Midnight November 5
Section 2: Access ‐‐ Creating Tables &
Nov 8‐12 Relationships Access 33‐64 SR 1
Due by midnight November 12
Section 3: Access – Creating Queries,
Nov 15‐19 Forms, and Reports Access 65‐96 SR 1
Due by midnight November 19
Section 4: Access – Summarizing Data

Nov 22‐23 & Calculating in Forms and Reports Access 97‐128 Complete all of Section
4 through Activity 4.8.
Due by midnight November 23 Then send me the
WEEmployees4
database and I will
check everything you
have done in the
section activities. Then
send me 4.9.
No SR, SA, or MC.
Nov 24‐26 THANKSGIVING HOLIDAYS! Don’t eat too much!!
Nov 29‐Dec 3 Make sure all 4 webct Access quizzes have
been completed!

Introduction to PowerPoint


Presentation
PP 1‐32 SR 1
Due by midnight December 3
Section 2: PowerPoint – Editing and
Dec 6‐10 Enchancing Slides PP 33‐64 SR 2

Section 3: PowerPoint
Customizing a Presentation

Due by midnight December 10 PP 65‐96 MC 1 or MC 2
Your Choice!
Make sure both webct PowerPoint quizzes
have been completed!
Dec 13‐17 Final Production Exam over all 4 softwares
scheduled for Thursday, December 16 in the
morning at Sulphur Springs, Thursday,
December 16 in the afternoon in Greenville,
or Monday or Tuesday in Paris, December
13 or 14.
Students will complete section activities, Skills Reviews, Skill Assessments, and Marquee Challenges as
assigned in the assignment schedule. Four Quizzes over each software (PowerPoint only has two) should
be completed in webct as scheduled. The Final Production Exam over all four softwares will be taken
during the final exam week or before and will be taken at the Paris Campus or at one of the off-campus
centers. I will give you your final exam scheduled at a convenient time for both of us. The final exam
must be completed by Thursday, December 16 in the morning at Sulphur Springs, Thursday,
December 16 in the afternoon in Greenville, or Monday or Tuesday in Paris, December 13 or 14.
since grades have to be turned in by Thursday afternoon.
I will have virtual office hours through the chat icon Monday-Wednesday night from 7:00-8:00 PM.
No late assignments will be accepted past the due date, if it’s not here before midnight on the date
due it’s a ZERO

The student’s final grade will be calculated as follows:
Average of software Quizzes as assigned in WebCT 10%
Average of Skills Reviews, Skills Assessments, and Marquee Challenges at the 60%
end of each software section in your textbook sent as attachments to the
instructor.
Final Production Exam (taken at a PJC testing site) 30%
TOTAL 100%
You will submit your assignments through the submit assignments drop box. If you are sending me
an attachment, you will follow the same steps, but under the message box is a Browse box. When you
click on it, your computer drives will appear where you will choose the drive where you have saved your
documents. When you find the document you want to send me, just double click or click and open the
document. The name of the document will appear in the box next to the word Attachments. Be sure and
click on the box that says Attach file. If you do it correctly, the name of the document will appear under
the Attachments box in purple or blue. Then you can click on the submit button and I will get your
assignment with the document attached to it.
You will be saving your documents on your C drive or jump drive and you will submit them through the
submit assignments box on the class homepage by midnight on the date due. Failure to do so will result
in a zero for that assignment. Each mistake will be worth one (1) point each with a maximum grade of
100.
The Quiz/Tests icon takes you to the Quizzes (4) on each software (except PowerPoint there are only
two). The average of these Quizzes counts as 10% of your grade.
When you are ready to take the exam, you will click on the exam you are ready to take and a screen
will appear with all of your questions listed. Each time you answer a question, you will click the save
button in that box.
After you have answered all the questions, there will be a submit box at the end of the exam. When you
click on submit, it may tell you that you have not answered some questions and do you want to go back
and answer them before you submit. If necessary, go back and do that and submit again. It will give you
another chance and ask you if you are sure you want to submit. If you are ready, submit your exam. It
will be graded immediately and you should be able to see the results of your exam. If the results are not
there immediately, they will be displayed soon. You will have two chances to take each exam and two
hours for each one. There will be 25 questions on each exam. These count as 10% of your grade.

.
The final must be taken at a PJC Campus. You cannot use your book or notes on this exam so don’t
bring any with you. You may use the Help function in the programs all you want. If you are taking the final
exam at an off-campus center, your final exam will be given at the scheduled times please make plans
ahead of time to come for the following scheduled days: Final Production Exam over all 4 software’s
scheduled for Thursday, December 16 in the morning at Sulphur Springs, Thursday, December 16
in the afternoon in Greenville, or Monday or Tuesday in Paris, December 13 or 14.
Failure to take the final exam will result in a “F” for the course
Course Policies
4. All cell phones, beepers and personal digital assistants (pda’s) must be turned off or in silent mode. Under
no circumstances should a cell phone or beeper sound during class. If a cell phone or beeper does sound
during class, the student may be asked to leave for the remainder of the period. The only exception to this rule
includes peace officers, EMT, EMS, or other emergency personnel, and their devices should be in silent mode.
5. It is the responsibility of the student to initiate a drop form by the last day to withdraw with a “W” if so
desired. The instructor will not drop a student unless the student asks for a drop form, completes the drop
form, and takes it to the Records Office.
6. All Student’s Standard of Conduct policies in the PJC Calendar and Student Handbook (beginning on page
26) apply to this course.
ADA Statement
Services for students with disabilities are coordinated by the Counseling/Advising Center. The institution
is committed to assisting qualified students as completely as possible. Services include the arrangement
for accommodations and services to allow equal access to education opportunities for students with
disabilities.
Students with disabilities are encouraged to contact a counselor or advisor from the Counseling/Advising
Center by calling 903.782.0426 (Paris campus), 903.454.9333 (Greenville Center), or 903.885.1232
(Sulphur Springs Center) to arrange an appointment to begin the process.

Paris Junior College Faculty Name Tevis Ricks

College Year: 2010-2011 Office Location- Online
Section: 65 tricks@parisjc.edu
Course # (ITSW 1307.65)

Course Title (Intro to Database)
Course Description
Introduction to database theory and the practical applications of a database
Credits: 3.3.2 SCH = x lecture and x laboratory hours per week, from approved course
list
Prerequisite(s):
ITSC 1409 or COSC 1401
Microsoft Access 2007 Comprehensive Concepts, and Techniques,
Shelly/Cashman/Pratt ISBN: 10-1-41884341-5
Program Outcomes
and applications.
Course Outcomes
Identify database terminology and concepts; plan,
define, and design a database; design and generate tables, forms, and reports;
and devise and process queries
Learning Objectives
Describe the advantages and disadvantages of database management system.
Define a database management system (DBMS) in terms of capabilities.
Design and create a database.
Display and print the structure of a database file.
Change the structure of a working multiple table database system.
Create and print mailing labels.
Create and print reports.
Perform both simple and compound queries of a database.
Append, modify, and delete records.
Create and use forms to control data entry.
Course # (ITSW 1307.65) - Faculty Name: Tevis Ricks Page 1 of 4

Integrate data base data with other programs.

Export data.
Write and use Macros.
Define relationships.
Course Schedule
Course Content Articles posted on WebCT
Projects, quizzes and Unit Exams
Lab work to enhance knowledge and skill development

Read chapter and complete tutorial assignment before class
Attend class and participate in demonstrations or online Discussions
Read all articles and/or discussions posted by the instructor.
Complete assignments on or before the due date.
Course Policies
Student Handbook.
SCANS COMPETENCIES:
Resources: Identifies, organizes, plans, and allocates resources
 Time - Selects goal-relevant activities, ranks them, allocates time, and prepares and follows
schedules C1
 Money - Uses or prepares budgets, makes forecasts, keeps records, and makes adjustments to
meet objectives C2
 Material and Facilities - Acquires, stores, allocates, and uses materials or space efficiently C3
 Human Resources - Assesses skills and distributes work accordingly, evaluates performance
and provides feedback C4
Interpersonal: Works with others
 Participates as Member of a Team - contributes to group effort C9
 Works with Diversity - works well with men and women from diverse backgrounds C14
Information: Acquires and uses information
 Acquires and Evaluates Information C5
 Organizes and Maintains Information C6
 Interprets and Communicates Information C7
 Uses Computers to Process Information C8
Systems: Understands complex inter-relationships
 Understands Systems - knows how social, organizational, and technological systems work and
operates effectively with them C15

 Monitors and Corrects Performance - distinguishes trends, predicts impacts on system

operations, diagnoses systems’ performance and corrects malfunctions C16
 Improves or Designs Systems - suggests modifications to existing systems and develops new or
alternative systems to improve performance C17
Technology: Works with a variety of technologies
 Selects Technology - chooses procedures, tools or equipment including computers and related
technologies C18
 Applies Technology to Task - Understands overall intent and proper procedures for setup and
operation of equipmentC19
 Maintains and Troubleshoots Equipment - Prevents, identifies, or solves problems with
equipment, including computers and other technologies C20
Basic Skills: Reads, writes, performs arithmetic and mathematical operations, listens and speaks
 Reading - locates, understands, and interprets written information in prose and in documents
such as manuals, graphs, and schedules F1
 Writing - communicates thoughts, ideas, information, and messages in writing; and creates
documents such as letters, directions, manuals, reports, graphs, and flowcharts F2
 Arithmetic/Mathematics - performs basic computations and approaches practical problems by
choosing appropriately from a variety of mathematical techniques F3
 Listening - receives, attends to, interprets, and responds to verbal messages and other cues F5
 Speaking - organizes ideas and communicates orally F6
Thinking Skills: Thinks creatively, makes decisions, solves problems, visualizes, knows how to learn, and
reasons
 Creative Thinking - generates new ideas F7
 Decision Making - specifies goals and constraints, generates alternatives, considers risks, and
evaluates and chooses best alternative F8
 Problem Solving - recognizes problems and devises and implements plan of action F9
 Seeing Things in the Mind's Eye - organizes, and processes symbols, pictures, graphs, objects,
and other information F10
 Knowing How to Learn - uses efficient learning techniques to acquire and apply new knowledge
and skillsF11
 Reasoning - discovers a rule or principle underlying the relationship between two or more objects
and applies it when solving a problem F12
Personal Qualities: Displays responsibility, self-esteem, sociability, self-management, and integrity and
honesty
 Responsibility - exerts a high level of effort and perseveres towards goal attainment F13
 Self-Esteem - believes in own self-worth and maintains a positive view of self F14
 Sociability - demonstrates understanding, friendliness, adaptability, empathy, and politeness in
group settings F14
 Self-Management - assesses self accurately, sets personal goals, monitors progress, and
exhibits self-control F16
 Integrity/Honesty - chooses ethical courses of action F17
The Secretary's (of the U.S. Department of Labor) Commission on Achieving Necessary Skills has identified several
Competencies and Skills that are necessary for today's workforce. The following competencies and skills are
included in this course:
Paris Junior College is an affirmative action/equal opportunity educational institution and employer. Its students and
employees are selected and/or assigned without regard to their race, color, age, sex, handicap or national origin,
consistent with Titles VI and VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, and Title IX of the Higher Education Acts as Amended

in 1972, and with Executive Order 1146 as Amended by Executive Order 11375
ADA Statement
In compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), all qualified students
enrolled in this course are entitled to “reasonable accommodations.” Please present the
proper documents specifying any accommodations needed for the course to the
instructor during the instructor’s office hours during the first week of class or as soon as
possible. Do not approach the instructor during class with this request.


Term: 101S 903-782-0318
ITSW 1404
Introduction to Spreadsheets
Course Description
Instruction in the concepts, procedures, and application of electronic spreadsheets.
Prerequisite(s): ITSC 1409 or COSC 1401

Go! With Microsoft Excel 2007 Comprehensive by Gaskin Jolly. First Edition.
Published by Pearson – Prentice Hall. ISBN 0-13-225559-6
Program Outcomes
Analyze a problem definition to identify inputs, processes, and outputs required to

Recognize the interaction of personal and network devices, operating systems, and
applications.
Course Outcomes
Define spreadsheet terminology and concepts, create formulas and functions, use
formatting features, and generate charts, graphs, and reports.
Learning Objectives
Start Excel and Navigate a Worksheet
Select Parts of a Worksheet
Enter Data, Construct a Formula, and Use the SUM Function
Format Data, Cells, and Worksheets
Insert a Footer into a Worksheet
Delete Unused Worksheets and Preview and Print a Worksheet
Print Formulas, Close a Workbook, and Exit Excel
Check Spelling and Edit a Worksheet
Enter Data by Range

Create and Copy Formulas

Use Format Painter and Chart Data
Use the Microsoft Excel Help
Work with a Multiple-Sheet Workbook
Enter a Series
Copy and Paste Cell Contents
Copy and Paste with the Office Clipboard
Total the Worksheet Range and Enter a Grand Total
Format a Multiple-Sheet Workbook Group
Insert Columns and Rows in Multiple Worksheets
Copy a Worksheet
Create Formulas with Absolute Cell References and Copy Formats
Find and Replace Text and Hide and Unhide Columns
Conduct a What-If Analysis and use Statistical Functions
Create Accurate Worksheets with Accuracy Tools
Construct an IF Function
Link Data in Workbooks
Create IF Functions That Return Text
Emphasize Data Using Conditional Formatting
Format with Themes
Add Information in the Header and Footer
Enter Dates
Format Large Worksheets
Apply Number Formats
Control Print Options
Use Text Orientation
Create a Column Chart
Create a Chart Sheet and Edit the Chart
Create and Modify a Pie Chart
Apply a Theme to a Chart
Print Charts
Sort Data
Convert Text to Columns
Apply Conditional Formatting Using Data Bars and Color Scales
Insert a Table and Filter Data
Create Text Functions
Create Statistical Functions
Insert Date and Time Functions
Create Logical Functions and Insert a Comment
Insert Financial Functions
Create What-If Analysis with Goal Seek
Determine Future Value and Present Value
Create Formulas Using Named Ranges
Utilize Lookup Lists
Customize and Use Microsoft-Created Templates
Transpose Data in a Worksheet and Apply Cell Styles

Use 3-D References to Link Data in Worksheets and Workbooks and Create a
Workspace
Create Hyperlinks
Create and Expand a Table and Insert a Calculated Column
Create and Sort a Custom List
Filter by Using Advanced Criteria
Evaluate Data with Database Functions
Import Data to Excel
Create Lookup Tables in Another Workbook
Enter Subtotals and Outline the Worksheet
Link and Embed a Worksheet and Chart into Word Documents
Create and Run a Macro
Apply Depreciation Functions
Evaluate Worksheet Data with Conditional IF Functions
Create a PivotTable and PivotChart
Format with Graphic Images Including WordArt to Enhance Worksheets
Insert SmartArt Graphics
Create, Edit, and Publish a Web Page
Create Specialized Charts
Format Column Charts with Pictures and Other Graphic Elements
Protect Worksheet Elements
Unprotect Elements and Hide Formulas
Protect a Workbook
Save Worksheet and Chart Templates
Complete a Report with Worksheet and Chart Templates
Create a Form
Validate a Form
Insert Macro Command Boxes
Nest One Function within Another
Use 3-D References and Nested Lookups
Check Accuracy with Excel’s Auditing Tools
Consolidate Workbooks
Share and Merge Workbooks
Create a Data Table
Create a Scenario
Use Solver
Prepare a Document for Distribution
Use XML to Enhance Security
Course Schedule
Aug 30 – Sept. 12 Creating a Worksheet and Charting Data
Sept 13 – Sept 19 Using Multiple-Sheet Workbooks
Sept. 20 – Sept. 26 Working with IF Functions and Large Worksheets
Sept. 27 – October 3 Creating Charts and Tables; Sorting and Filtering Data
End of Exam 1 Material – Exam 1 to be completed no later than October 7

Oct. 4 – Oct. 10 Making Decisions with Functions

Oct. 11 – Oct. 17 Using Named Ranges, Templates, Lookup Values, and 3-D
References
Oct. 18 – Oct. 24 Importing Data, Expanding a Table, and Utilizing Database Features
Oct. 25 – Oct. 31 Creating Macros, Using Depreciation and Conditional Functions, and
Creating PivotTables, and PivotChart Reports
End of Exam 2 Material – Exam 2 to be completed no later than Nov. 4
Nov. 1 – Nov. 7 Inserting Graphic Elements into Worksheets and Charts

Nov. 8 – Nov. 14 Creating Templates and Validating Forms
Nov. 15 – Nov. 21 Nesting Functions and Consolidating Worksheets
Nov. 22 – Dec. 5 Working with Data Tables, Scenarios, Solver, XML, and the Document
Inspector
End of Exam 3 Material – Exam 3 to be completed no later than Dec. 9
Comprehensive Final Exam to be completed no later than Dec. 15

There are three proctored (taken at testing center) exams and one comprehensive,
proctored final exam. Each of the regular exams will cover four chapters of material
from the text. The comprehensive final will be over all twelve chapters of the text. The
exams are closed book and closed notes. To prepare for them, read and work through
the projects contained in each chapter and be sure that you know each of the key terms
located at the end of the chapter, and complete the matching and fill in the blank
questions at the end of each chapter. Although you do not have to turn in any of this
work, failure to complete this preparation work will result in a low grade on the exams.
Each of the exams (including the final) is 7% of your semester grade. This means that
proctored exams will total 28% of your end of semester grade.
The remaining 72% of your grade will come from:
“Mastering Excel” Projects at the end of each chapter. There is one project for each
chapter. You will find these projects under the assignments tab in WebCT. Each project
is 3% of your end of semester grade.
“Problem Solving” Projects at the end of each chapter. There is one project for each
chapter. You will find these projects under the assignments tab in WebCT. Each
project is 3% of your end of semester grade.
You are required to take the final. Although it shows as only 7% of your grade under
“Method of Evaluation,” students who fail to take the final will receive a final course
grade of F. This is PJC policy.
“Method of Evaluation”

Three Proctored Exams over four chapters each………………..………7% each = 21%
One Comprehensive, Proctored Final Exam……………………..….…..7%
12 “Mastering Excel” Projects…………………………….………………..3% each = 36%
12 “Problem Solving” Projects (considered lab portion of course…..…3% each = 36%
Course Policies
Please log into the WebCT site frequently. If I need to communicate with you, it will be
through WebCT. You will not be able to keep up with the course without logging into
the WebCT site frequently.
Although there is no traditional classroom for this course, students are expected to work
on this course weekly. Assignments will be given each week. Please complete your
work on time. I do not accept late assignments or reopen assignments. It is not fair to
the students that do their work on time. Please log into the WebCT site frequently.
Due dates for assignments and exams can be found on the WebCT site.
Although the WebCT system is available 24/7, please understand that I am not
available 24/7. If you email me during the work week, you can expect a response within
24 hours. If you email over the weekend, you can expect a response on Monday.
Please start on your assignments early. This will give you time to email questions and
receive a response. If you wait until the night it is due to start, you will not have time to
email questions and receive a response.
ADA Statement
The Student Development Center is responsible for coordinating services for students
with special needs. Individual students have the right and the responsibility to decide
whether and when to choose among accessible service offerings. Please contact a
counselor at the main campus or at the tech centers. Paris Junior College provides
equal opportunities for students with disabilities and ensures access to a wide variety of
resources and programs. The College will make reasonable accommodations for
qualified students with a documented physical, psychological, or learning disability who
have been admitted to the College and have requested accommodations.


Please send the instructor an email stating that you have logged into WebCT and read
the syllabus and agree to abide by the rules and procedures as stated in the syllabus.


Term: 101S 903-782-0360
Section: G1 mpannell@parisjc.edu
ITSY 1442
Information Technology Security
Course Description

Security+ Guide to Network Security Fundamentals, 3e
Mark Ciampa
ISBN 978-1-4283-4066-4
Program Outcomes
network.
and applications.
Course Outcomes
network.
and applications.
Learning Objectives
 Ensure the physical security of file servers and other network components using
ITSY 1442.G1 – Marjorie Pannell Page 1 of 3

best practices
 Develop backup procedures to provide for data security
 Use network operating system features to implement network security
 Describe the nature of computer viruses, their methods of spreading, and means
of protecting networks from viruses
 Use relevant tools to provide for network security
 Use encryption techniques to protect network data.
Course Schedule
Week 1: Introduction to Security
Week 2: Systems Threats and Risks
Week 3: Protecting Systems
Week 4: Network Vulnerabilities and Attacks
Week 5: Network Defenses
Week 6: Wireless Network Security
Week 7: Access Control Fundamentals
Week 8: Authentication
Week 9: Performing Vulnerability Assessments
Week 10: Conducting Security Audits
Week 11: Basic Cryptography
Week 12: Applying Cryptography
Week 13: Business Continuity
Week 14: Security Policies and Training
Week 15: Final Exam

Course Policies
period.

academic honesty.
ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-0360
ITSY 1442
Information Technology Security
Course Description

Security+ Guide to Network Security Fundamentals, 3e
Mark Ciampa
ISBN 978-1-4283-4066-4
Program Outcomes
network.
and applications.
Course Outcomes
network.
and applications.
Learning Objectives
 Ensure the physical security of file servers and other network components using
ITSY 1442.P1 – Marjorie Pannell Page 1 of 3

best practices
 Develop backup procedures to provide for data security
 Use network operating system features to implement network security
 Describe the nature of computer viruses, their methods of spreading, and means
of protecting networks from viruses
 Use relevant tools to provide for network security
 Use encryption techniques to protect network data.
Course Schedule
Week 1: Introduction to Security
Week 2: Systems Threats and Risks
Week 3: Protecting Systems
Week 4: Network Vulnerabilities and Attacks
Week 5: Network Defenses
Week 6: Wireless Network Security
Week 7: Access Control Fundamentals
Week 8: Authentication
Week 9: Performing Vulnerability Assessments
Week 10: Conducting Security Audits
Week 11: Basic Cryptography
Week 12: Applying Cryptography
Week 13: Business Continuity
Week 14: Security Policies and Training
Week 15: Final Exam

Course Policies
period.

academic honesty.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S Office 903.782.0735
Course # MDCA 1309

Course Title
Course Description
This course is an introduction to anatomy and physiology with emphasis on normal
human anatomy and physiology of cells, tissues, organs, and systems with an overview
of common pathophysiology. It is designed to prepare the student to enter the health
information environment with entry-level knowledge of anatomy and physiology.

1. The Human Body in Health and Illness, Herlihy, Barbara & Maebius, Nancy K, W.
Saunders, 3rd ed. 2006, ISBN: 1-4160-2885-4
2. Study Guide for the Human Body in Health and Illness, Herlihy, Barbara & Maebius,
Nancy K., W. Saunders, 3rd ed. 2006, ISBN: 1-4160-2884-6
Recommended for Paramedic choice:

ACLS and EKG ISBN: 978-0-323-04690-9
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Given textbook and appropriate materials, the student will have accomplished the
following course outcomes:
1. Apply knowledge of anatomy and physiology, and clinical disease processes.
2. Identify and correlate cells, tissues, organs, and systems of the human body.
3. Differentiate normal from abnormal structure and function.
4. Identify all body systems, their organs, and relevant physiology.
Learning Objectives
Introduction to the Human Body

C:\Users\ElaPit\Documents\Syllabi for 101s\Word to convert to PDF\MDCA1309 01 101S.doc
1. Define the terms anatomy and physiology.
2. List the levels of organization of the human body.
3. Describe the 11 major organ systems.
4. Explain the word homeostasis.
5. Define the term anatomical position and list common terms used for positions of the
body.
6. Describe the three major planes of the body.
7. List anatomical terms for regions of the body.
8. Describe the major cavities of the body.
Basic Chemistry
1. Define the words matter, element and atom.
2. List the four elements that compose 96% of body weight.
3. Describe the three components of an atom.
4. Describe the role of electrons in the formation of chemical bonds.
5. Differentiate among ionic, covalent, and hydrogen bonds.
6. Explain the differences among ions, cations, and anions.
7. Describe the relationship of an electrolyte to an ion.
8. Explain the difference between a molecule and a compound.
9. List five reasons why water is essential to life.
10. Describe a chemical reaction and explain the role of a catalyst.
11. Differentiate between an acid and a base and discuss acid balance and pH.
12. Discuss forms of energy and energy conversion and transfer.
13. State an example of a mixture, a solution, a suspension, and a colloidal suspension.
Cells
1. Label a diagram of the main parts of a typical cell, with the cell membrane,
cytoplasm, nucleus, and organelles.
2. List and describe the functions of the main organelles of the cells.
3. Differentiate between active and passive transport.
4. Describe the movement of substances across a cell membrane: diffusion,
facilitated diffusion, osmosis, and filtration.
5. Compare isotonic, hypotonic, and hypertonic solutions.
6. Discuss active transport.
7. Discuss cell reproduction.
8. Explain what is meant by cell differentiation.
9. List and define six disorders of cellular growth.
Microbiology
1. Define the terms associated with basic microbiology.
2. List and describe types of bacteria including methods of classification.
3. Discuss laboratory identification procedures.
4. Describe how pathogens spread including portals of entry and exit.
5. Discuss important microbiological principles.
6. Describe the disorders caused by pathogens.
Tissues and Membranes
1. List the four basic types of tissues.
2. Describe the functions and types of epithelial.
3. Explain how epithelial tissue is classified.

4. Differentiate between endocrine and exocrine glands.
5. List and describe the types of connective tissue.
6. Describe nervous tissue.
7. List and describe the types of muscle tissue.
8. Describe how tissue repairs itself.
9. Differentiate between the classifications of membranes.
10. Discuss the disorders of tissue and membranes.
Integumentary System and Body Temperature
1. Describe the two layers of skin: epidermis and dermis.
2. List the two major functions of the subcutaneous layers.
3. List the factors that influence the color of the skin.
4. Describe the accessory structures of the skin.
5. List six functions of the skin.
6. Describe how the skin helps to regulate temperature.
7. Describe ways in which the skin is affected by partial-thickness and full-thickness
burns.
8. Discuss the importance of skin care.
9. List symptoms of skin disorders.
Skeletal System
1. List the functions of the skeletal system.
2. List the types of osseous tissue.
3. Differentiate between red and yellow bone marrow.
4. Describe the role of ossification.
5. Contrast the axial skeleton and the appendicular skeleton.
6. List the bones of the axial skeleton.
7. List the bones of the appendicular skeleton.
8. Label important landmarks for selected bones on the skeleton.
9. List the main types of joints.
10. Describe the functions of joints.
11. Describe the types of movements that occur at diarthrotic, or synovial joints.
12. Recognize various disorders of the skeletal system.
Muscular System
1. Identify three types of muscle tissue and their function.
2. Describe the structure and function of muscle fibers.
3. Describe the events that occur in muscular contraction.
4. Explain the role of calcium and adenosine triphosphate in muscle contraction.
5. Identify the sources of energy and trace the sequence of energy for muscle
contraction.
6. Define twitch, summation, tetanus, and recruitment as characteristics of muscle
contraction.
7. Describe common types of movement.
8. List and give examples of the overuse and underuse of muscles.
9. State the basis for naming muscles.
10. Identify the major muscles and their actions.
11. List and describe the disorders of the muscular system.
Nervous System: Nervous Tissue and Brain

1. Define the two divisions of the nervous system.
2. List three general functions of the nervous system.
3. Compare the structure and functions of the neuroglia and neurons.
4. Explain the importance of the myelin sheath.
5. Define the three types of neurons.
6. Describe the structure and function of the four major areas of the brain.
7. Describe how the body protects the central nervous system.
8. Describe the disorders of the nervous tissue and the brain.
Nervous System: Spinal Cord and Peripheral Nerves-Autonomic Nervous System
1. Describe the structure and three functions of the spinal cord.
2. List four components of the reflex arc.
3. Describe the structural classification of the peripheral nervous system.
4. List the 12 cranial nerves and their functions.
5. List the functions of the three major plexuses.
6. Explain the structure and function of the autonomic nervous system.
7. Compare the structure and function of the sympathetic and parasympathetic
nervous system.
8. Compare the disorders of the spinal cord and peripheral nerves.
Sensory System
1. State the functions of the sensory system.
2. Define the five types of sensory receptors.
3. Describe the four components involved in the perception of a sensation.
4. Differentiate general senses from special senses.
5. Describe the five general senses.
6. Describe five special senses.
7. Describe the visual accessory organs.
8. Describe the structure of the eye.
9. Explain the movement of the eye.
10. Describe how the size of the pupils change.
11. Describe the three divisions of the ear.
12. Describe the functions of the parts of the ear involved in hearing.
13. Explain the role of the ear in maintaining the body's equilibrium.
Endocrine System
1. List the functions of the endocrine system.
2. Differentiate between protein hormones and steroid hormones.
3. Explain negative feedback control as a control for hormone levels.
4. Describe the relationship of the hypothalamus to the anterior and posterior pituitary
glands.
5. Describe the structure and function of the pituitary gland.
6. List major hormones secreted by the anterior pituitary gland.
7. Describe the two major hormones of the posterior pituitary gland.
8. Identify the major endocrine glands of the body.
9. Describe the actions of hormones secreted by the major endocrine glands.
10. Explain the effects of hyposecretion and hypersecretion of the major hormones of
the body.
11. Describe the disorders of the endocrine system.

Blood
1. Describe three functions of blood.
2. Describe the composition of blood.
3. Describe the three types of blood cells and their functions.
4. Explain the formation of blood cells.
5. Explain the breakdown of red blood cells and the formation of bilirubin.
6. Identify the steps of hemostasis.
7. Describe the four blood types.
8. Describe the Rh factor.
9. Compare the disorders of the blood.
Heart
1. Describe the location and size of the heart.
2. Name the layers and covering of the heart.
3. Explain the function of the heart as two separate pumps.
4. Identify the four chambers of the heart.
5. Explain the functions of the four heart valves.
6. Describe the characteristics of the heart that affect the two main heart sounds.
7. Describe blood flow through the heart.
8. List the vessels that supply blood to the heart.
9. Identify the major components of the heart's conduction system.
10. Describe the events of the cardiac cycle and define cardiac output.
11. Name five factors that affect heart rate.
12. List two ways in which stroke volume may be altered.
13. Describe the disorders of the heart.
Blood Vessels and Circulation
1. Describe the pulmonary and systemic circulation.
2. Describe the structure and function of blood vessels.
3. List the three layers of tissue found in arteries and veins.
4. Explain the functions of conductance, resistance, exchange, and capacitance
vessels.
5. List those major arteries of the systemic circulation that are branches of the
ascending aorta, the aortic arch, and the descending aorta.
6. List the major veins of the systemic circulation.
7. Describe the following special circulations: blood supply to the head and brain,
hepatic circulation, and fetal circulation.
8. Explain the factors that determine blood pressure and what keeps blood pressure
within normal limits.
9. Describe what a pulse is.
10. Describe capillary exchange.
11. Compare the disorders of blood vessels and circulation.
Lymphatic System
1. List three functions of the lymphatic system.
2. Describe the composition of lymph.
3. Describe the lymph vessels and flow of lymph.
4. Describe the four lymphoid organs.
5. Discuss the functions of the lymphoid organs.

6. State the locations of the body's major lymph nodes.
7. Describe the disorders of the lymphatic system.
Immune System
1. Differentiate between specific and nonspecific immunity.
2. Describe the process of phagocytosis in the second line of defense.
3. Explain the causes of the signs of inflammation.
4. Explain the role of fever in fighting infection.
5. Describe two groups of protective proteins.
6. Describe the relationship of antigens to specific immunity.
7. Describe the development and function of T cells (T lymphocytes) and B cells (B
lymphocytes).
8. List the three most common immunoglobulins.
9. Describe the actions of antibodies.
10. Describe the two main categories of immunity.
11. Give examples of naturally and artificially acquired, active and passive immunity.
Respiratory System
1. Describe the structure and functions of the organs of the respiratory system.
2. Trace the movement of air from the nostrils to the alveoli.
3. List the three steps of respiration.
4. Describe the role of pulmonary surfactants in reducing surface tension.
5. Explain the role of pressure in maintaining expanded lungs.
6. Describe the relationship of Boyle's law to ventilation.
7. Explain how respiratory muscles affect thoracic volume and list lung volumes and
capacities.
8. Discuss what makes the alveoli well suited for the exchange of oxygen and carbon
dioxide.
9. Explain how respiratory gases diffuse.
10. Describe how oxygen and carbon dioxide move to and from the lungs.
11. Explain how breathing functions through neural and chemical controls.
12. Describe common variations and abnormalities of breathing.
13. Discuss the disorders of the respiratory system.
Digestive System
1. List the functions of the digestive system.
2. Describe the four layers of the digestive tract.
3. List three functions of the peritoneal membranes.
4. List, in sequence, the parts of the alimentary canal from the mouth to the anus.
5. Describe the structure and functions of the organs of the digestive tract.
6. Describe the structure and functions of the accessory organs of the digestive tract.
7. List the functions of the liver.
8. Explain the physiology of digestion and absorption.
9. List the major enzymes involved in digestion.
10. Discuss basic concepts of nutrition.
11. List and describe the categories of nutrients.
12. List six factors that affect metabolic rate.
13. Compare disorders of the digestive system.
Urinary System

1. List four organs of excretion.
2. Describe the major organs of the urinary system.
3. Describe the location, structure, blood supply, and functions of the kidneys.
4. Explain the role of the nephron in the formation of urine.
5. Explain the three processes involved in the formation of urine: glomerular filtration,
reabsorption, and secretion.
6. Describe control of water and electrolytes through hormones.
7. List the normal constituents of urine.
8. Describe what happens when the kidneys shut down.
9. Describe the structure and functions of the ureters, urinary bladder, and urethra.
10. Discuss disorders of the urinary system.
Water, Electrolyte, and Acid Base Balance
1. Describe the two fluid compartments.
2. Describe the concept of water balance.
3. Discuss electrolyte balance.
4. List and describe the common ions.
5. Describe factors that affect acid-base balance.
6. List three mechanisms that regulate pH in the body.
7. Discuss acid-base imbalances: acidosis and alkalosis.
8. Compare and contrast the disorders resulting from fluid and electrolyte imbalance.
Reproductive System
1. List the structures and function of the male and female reproductive systems.
2. Describe the structure and function of the testes.
3. Explain the process of sperm formation.
4. Describe the structure and function of the male genital ducts.
5. Describe the accessory glands that add secretions to the semen.
6. Describe the male and female sexual response.
7. Describe the hormonal control of male reproduction, including the effects of
testosterone.
8. Describe the structure and function of the ovaries.
9. Describe the structure and function of the female genital tract.
10. Explain the hormonal control of the female reproductive cycle.
11. Describe common methods of birth control.
12. Compare and contrast disorders of the reproductive systems.
Human Development and Heredity
1. Describe the process of fertilization.
2. Describe the process of development.
3. Explain the three periods of prenatal development.
4. State two functions of the placenta.
5. Explain hormonal changes during pregnancy.
6. List six ways in which the mother's body changes during pregnancy.
7. Describe the process of labor, including the hormonal changes and the individual
stages.
8. Describe the structure of the breast.
9. Describe the process of lactation.
10. Describe the relationship among DNA, chromosomes, and genes.

11. Explain how the sex of the child is determined.
12. Describe sex-linked traits.
13. State the difference between congenital and hereditary diseases.
14. Discuss the disorders of human development.
Course Schedule

paper.
below:

Grade Range
“A” 90 – 100
“B” 80 –89
“C” 70-79
“D” 60-69
“F” Below 60
Course Policies

Withdrawal
course.
dropped EMS course.
Dismissal
Education.


c. The practice of academic dishonesty; such as, preparation for clinical and cheating on tests
or written assignments (both parties), making false entries in records pertaining to the
giving of medications, treatments, or nursing care, or failing to do so under circumstances
illegal drugs.

Grievance Procedure

scheduled meeting.




ride.
Dress Code

face. Conservative combs and barrettes are acceptable. Men should be clean-
shaven with a neatly clipped established mustache and/or beard will be allowed.
setting.
8. Jewelry in moderation; Absolutely no piercing jewelry in any part of the exposed
body including the ears. (Example Nose rings, eye rings or tongue rings)
badge is $5.
procedures and may result in disciplinary action including immediate dismissal
from the course.
acceptable…denim is NOT!); black belt and shoes; white uniform shirt purchased
in bookstore; student nametag; stethoscope; pen light; scissors; any deviation
from clinical uniform is unacceptable.
HEALTH POLICIES
experiencing overt signs and symptoms of an infectious process that would
endanger patient's well being.
Liability Insurance


Overall Grade
Required Materials
Stethoscope
One pair of shears
Penlight
Liability Insurance
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Faculty Donna Gatlin
College Year: 2010-2011 Office Location
Term: 101S Office Phone
Section: 65 dgatlin@parisjc.edu
Course # MDCA 1309

Course Title Anatomy and Physiology for Medical Assistants
Course Description
This course is an introduction to anatomy and physiology with emphasis on normal
human anatomy and physiology of cells, tissues, organs, and systems with an overview
of common pathophysiology. It is designed to prepare the student to enter the health
information environment with entry-level knowledge of anatomy and physiology.

1. The Human Body in Health and Illness, Herlihy, Barbara & Maebius, Nancy K, W.
Saunders, 3rd ed. 2006, ISBN: 1-4160-2885-4
2. Study Guide for the Human Body in Health and Illness, Herlihy, Barbara & Maebius,
Nancy K., W. Saunders, 3rd ed. 2006, ISBN: 1-4160-2884-6
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Given textbook and appropriate materials, the student will have accomplished the
following course outcomes:
1. Apply knowledge of anatomy and physiology, and clinical disease processes.
2. Identify and correlate cells, tissues, organs, and systems of the human body.
3. Differentiate normal from abnormal structure and function.
4. Identify all body systems, their organs, and relevant physiology.
Learning Objectives
Introduction to the Human Body
1. Define the terms anatomy and physiology.
2. List the levels of organization of the human body.
3. Describe the 11 major organ systems.
4. Explain the word homeostasis.
5. Define the term anatomical position and list common terms used for positions of the
body.

6. Describe the three major planes of the body.
7. List anatomical terms for regions of the body.
8. Describe the major cavities of the body.
Basic Chemistry
1. Define the words matter, element and atom.
2. List the four elements that compose 96% of body weight.
3. Describe the three components of an atom.
4. Describe the role of electrons in the formation of chemical bonds.
5. Differentiate among ionic, covalent, and hydrogen bonds.
6. Explain the differences among ions, cations, and anions.
7. Describe the relationship of an electrolyte to an ion.
8. Explain the difference between a molecule and a compound.
9. List five reasons why water is essential to life.
10. Describe a chemical reaction and explain the role of a catalyst.
11. Differentiate between an acid and a base and discuss acid balance and pH.
12. Discuss forms of energy and energy conversion and transfer.
13. State an example of a mixture, a solution, a suspension, and a colloidal suspension.
Cells
1. Label a diagram of the main parts of a typical cell, with the cell membrane,
cytoplasm, nucleus, and organelles.
2. List and describe the functions of the main organelles of the cells.
3. Differentiate between active and passive transport.
4. Describe the movement of substances across a cell membrane: diffusion,
facilitated diffusion, osmosis, and filtration.
5. Compare isotonic, hypotonic, and hypertonic solutions.
6. Discuss active transport.
7. Discuss cell reproduction.
8. Explain what is meant by cell differentiation.
9. List and define six disorders of cellular growth.
Microbiology
1. Define the terms associated with basic microbiology.
2. List and describe types of bacteria including methods of classification.
3. Discuss laboratory identification procedures.
4. Describe how pathogens spread including portals of entry and exit.
5. Discuss important microbiological principles.
6. Describe the disorders caused by pathogens.
Tissues and Membranes
1. List the four basic types of tissues.
2. Describe the functions and types of epithelial.
3. Explain how epithelial tissue is classified.
4. Differentiate between endocrine and exocrine glands.
5. List and describe the types of connective tissue.
6. Describe nervous tissue.
7. List and describe the types of muscle tissue.
8. Describe how tissue repairs itself.
9. Differentiate between the classifications of membranes.

10. Discuss the disorders of tissue and membranes.
Integumentary System and Body Temperature
1. Describe the two layers of skin: epidermis and dermis.
2. List the two major functions of the subcutaneous layers.
3. List the factors that influence the color of the skin.
4. Describe the accessory structures of the skin.
5. List six functions of the skin.
6. Describe how the skin helps to regulate temperature.
7. Describe ways in which the skin is affected by partial-thickness and full-thickness
burns.
8. Discuss the importance of skin care.
9. List symptoms of skin disorders.
Skeletal System
1. List the functions of the skeletal system.
2. List the types of osseous tissue.
3. Differentiate between red and yellow bone marrow.
4. Describe the role of ossification.
5. Contrast the axial skeleton and the appendicular skeleton.
6. List the bones of the axial skeleton.
7. List the bones of the appendicular skeleton.
8. Label important landmarks for selected bones on the skeleton.
9. List the main types of joints.
10. Describe the functions of joints.
11. Describe the types of movements that occur at diarthrotic, or synovial joints.
12. Recognize various disorders of the skeletal system.
Muscular System
1. Identify three types of muscle tissue and their function.
2. Describe the structure and function of muscle fibers.
3. Describe the events that occur in muscular contraction.
4. Explain the role of calcium and adenosine triphosphate in muscle contraction.
5. Identify the sources of energy and trace the sequence of energy for muscle
contraction.
6. Define twitch, summation, tetanus, and recruitment as characteristics of muscle
contraction.
7. Describe common types of movement.
8. List and give examples of the overuse and underuse of muscles.
9. State the basis for naming muscles.
10. Identify the major muscles and their actions.
11. List and describe the disorders of the muscular system.
Nervous System: Nervous Tissue and Brain
1. Define the two divisions of the nervous system.
2. List three general functions of the nervous system.
3. Compare the structure and functions of the neuroglia and neurons.
4. Explain the importance of the myelin sheath.
5. Define the three types of neurons.
6. Describe the structure and function of the four major areas of the brain.

7. Describe how the body protects the central nervous system.
8. Describe the disorders of the nervous tissue and the brain.
Nervous System: Spinal Cord and Peripheral Nerves-Autonomic Nervous System
1. Describe the structure and three functions of the spinal cord.
2. List four components of the reflex arc.
3. Describe the structural classification of the peripheral nervous system.
4. List the 12 cranial nerves and their functions.
5. List the functions of the three major plexuses.
6. Explain the structure and function of the autonomic nervous system.
7. Compare the structure and function of the sympathetic and parasympathetic
nervous system.
8. Compare the disorders of the spinal cord and peripheral nerves.
Sensory System
1. State the functions of the sensory system.
2. Define the five types of sensory receptors.
3. Describe the four components involved in the perception of a sensation.
4. Differentiate general senses from special senses.
5. Describe the five general senses.
6. Describe five special senses.
7. Describe the visual accessory organs.
8. Describe the structure of the eye.
9. Explain the movement of the eye.
10. Describe how the size of the pupils change.
11. Describe the three divisions of the ear.
12. Describe the functions of the parts of the ear involved in hearing.
13. Explain the role of the ear in maintaining the body's equilibrium.
Endocrine System
1. List the functions of the endocrine system.
2. Differentiate between protein hormones and steroid hormones.
3. Explain negative feedback control as a control for hormone levels.
4. Describe the relationship of the hypothalamus to the anterior and posterior pituitary
glands.
5. Describe the structure and function of the pituitary gland.
6. List major hormones secreted by the anterior pituitary gland.
7. Describe the two major hormones of the posterior pituitary gland.
8. Identify the major endocrine glands of the body.
9. Describe the actions of hormones secreted by the major endocrine glands.
10. Explain the effects of hyposecretion and hypersecretion of the major hormones of
the body.
11. Describe the disorders of the endocrine system.
Blood
1. Describe three functions of blood.
2. Describe the composition of blood.
3. Describe the three types of blood cells and their functions.
4. Explain the formation of blood cells.
5. Explain the breakdown of red blood cells and the formation of bilirubin.

6. Identify the steps of hemostasis.
7. Describe the four blood types.
8. Describe the Rh factor.
9. Compare the disorders of the blood.
Heart
1. Describe the location and size of the heart.
2. Name the layers and covering of the heart.
3. Explain the function of the heart as two separate pumps.
4. Identify the four chambers of the heart.
5. Explain the functions of the four heart valves.
6. Describe the characteristics of the heart that affect the two main heart sounds.
7. Describe blood flow through the heart.
8. List the vessels that supply blood to the heart.
9. Identify the major components of the heart's conduction system.
10. Describe the events of the cardiac cycle and define cardiac output.
11. Name five factors that affect heart rate.
12. List two ways in which stroke volume may be altered.
13. Describe the disorders of the heart.
Blood Vessels and Circulation
1. Describe the pulmonary and systemic circulation.
2. Describe the structure and function of blood vessels.
3. List the three layers of tissue found in arteries and veins.
4. Explain the functions of conductance, resistance, exchange, and capacitance
vessels.
5. List those major arteries of the systemic circulation that are branches of the
ascending aorta, the aortic arch, and the descending aorta.
6. List the major veins of the systemic circulation.
7. Describe the following special circulations: blood supply to the head and brain,
hepatic circulation, and fetal circulation.
8. Explain the factors that determine blood pressure and what keeps blood pressure
within normal limits.
9. Describe what a pulse is.
10. Describe capillary exchange.
11. Compare the disorders of blood vessels and circulation.
Lymphatic System
1. List three functions of the lymphatic system.
2. Describe the composition of lymph.
3. Describe the lymph vessels and flow of lymph.
4. Describe the four lymphoid organs.
5. Discuss the functions of the lymphoid organs.
6. State the locations of the body's major lymph nodes.
7. Describe the disorders of the lymphatic system.
Immune System
1. Differentiate between specific and nonspecific immunity.
2. Describe the process of phagocytosis in the second line of defense.
3. Explain the causes of the signs of inflammation.

4. Explain the role of fever in fighting infection.
5. Describe two groups of protective proteins.
6. Describe the relationship of antigens to specific immunity.
7. Describe the development and function of T cells (T lymphocytes) and B cells (B
lymphocytes).
8. List the three most common immunoglobulins.
9. Describe the actions of antibodies.
10. Describe the two main categories of immunity.
11. Give examples of naturally and artificially acquired, active and passive immunity.
Respiratory System
1. Describe the structure and functions of the organs of the respiratory system.
2. Trace the movement of air from the nostrils to the alveoli.
3. List the three steps of respiration.
4. Describe the role of pulmonary surfactants in reducing surface tension.
5. Explain the role of pressure in maintaining expanded lungs.
6. Describe the relationship of Boyle's law to ventilation.
7. Explain how respiratory muscles affect thoracic volume and list lung volumes and
capacities.
8. Discuss what makes the alveoli well suited for the exchange of oxygen and carbon
dioxide.
9. Explain how respiratory gases diffuse.
10. Describe how oxygen and carbon dioxide move to and from the lungs.
11. Explain how breathing functions through neural and chemical controls.
12. Describe common variations and abnormalities of breathing.
13. Discuss the disorders of the respiratory system.
Digestive System
1. List the functions of the digestive system.
2. Describe the four layers of the digestive tract.
3. List three functions of the peritoneal membranes.
4. List, in sequence, the parts of the alimentary canal from the mouth to the anus.
5. Describe the structure and functions of the organs of the digestive tract.
6. Describe the structure and functions of the accessory organs of the digestive tract.
7. List the functions of the liver.
8. Explain the physiology of digestion and absorption.
9. List the major enzymes involved in digestion.
10. Discuss basic concepts of nutrition.
11. List and describe the categories of nutrients.
12. List six factors that affect metabolic rate.
13. Compare disorders of the digestive system.
Urinary System
1. List four organs of excretion.
2. Describe the major organs of the urinary system.
3. Describe the location, structure, blood supply, and functions of the kidneys.
4. Explain the role of the nephron in the formation of urine.
5. Explain the three processes involved in the formation of urine: glomerular filtration,
reabsorption, and secretion.

6. Describe control of water and electrolytes through hormones.
7. List the normal constituents of urine.
8. Describe what happens when the kidneys shut down.
9. Describe the structure and functions of the ureters, urinary bladder, and urethra.
10. Discuss disorders of the urinary system.
Water, Electrolyte, and Acid Base Balance
1. Describe the two fluid compartments.
2. Describe the concept of water balance.
3. Discuss electrolyte balance.
4. List and describe the common ions.
5. Describe factors that affect acid-base balance.
6. List three mechanisms that regulate pH in the body.
7. Discuss acid-base imbalances: acidosis and alkalosis.
8. Compare and contrast the disorders resulting from fluid and electrolyte imbalance.
Reproductive System
1. List the structures and function of the male and female reproductive systems.
2. Describe the structure and function of the testes.
3. Explain the process of sperm formation.
4. Describe the structure and function of the male genital ducts.
5. Describe the accessory glands that add secretions to the semen.
6. Describe the male and female sexual response.
7. Describe the hormonal control of male reproduction, including the effects of
testosterone.
8. Describe the structure and function of the ovaries.
9. Describe the structure and function of the female genital tract.
10. Explain the hormonal control of the female reproductive cycle.
11. Describe common methods of birth control.
12. Compare and contrast disorders of the reproductive systems.
Human Development and Heredity
1. Describe the process of fertilization.
2. Describe the process of development.
3. Explain the three periods of prenatal development.
4. State two functions of the placenta.
5. Explain hormonal changes during pregnancy.
6. List six ways in which the mother's body changes during pregnancy.
7. Describe the process of labor, including the hormonal changes and the individual
stages.
8. Describe the structure of the breast.
9. Describe the process of lactation.
10. Describe the relationship among DNA, chromosomes, and genes.
11. Explain how the sex of the child is determined.
12. Describe sex-linked traits.
13. State the difference between congenital and hereditary diseases.
14. Discuss the disorders of human development.
Course Schedule

Week 1: Introduction to the Human Body, Basic Chemistry, Cells, Cell Metabolism
Week 2: Microbiology Basics, Tissues and Membranes
Week 3: Integumentary System and Body Temperature, Skeletal System, Muscular
System
Week 4: Nervous System: Nervous Tissue and Brain, Spinal Cord and Peripheral
Nerves, Autonomic Nervous System
Week 5: Sensory System, Endocrine System
Week 6: Exam
Week 7: Blood, Anatomy of the Heart
Week 8: Function of the Heart, Anatomy of the Blood Vessels
Week 9: Functions of the Blood Vessels, Lymphatic System
Week 10: Exam
Week 11: Immune System, Respiratory System
Week 12: Digestive System, Urinary System
Week 13: Water, Electrolyte, and Acid-Base Balance, Reproductive System
Week 14: Human Development and Heredity
Week 15: Review
Week 16: Final Exam

In order to pass MDCA 1309, the student must achieve a final average grade of 70 or
higher. The final grade average will consist of: 3 Exams (averaged, proctored &
mandatory) 15%: 6 Assignments 20%: 6 Chapter Reviews 65% (not proctored, open
book), Chapter review and assignments become active at 08:00 and inactive at 23:55
Course work will consist of Chapter Reviews, Assignments, and Exams. Assignments
will consist of instructor assignments posted on WebCT. All assignments are to be
completed in Word. At the end of the semester, the student will be provided an
opportunity to “re-take” one of the 6 Chapter Reviews in an attempt to increase the
student’s grade average. The student will request the date and time, during the
specified time frame, that the student will be available to re-take the Chapter Review so
the instructor will be able to re-open the appropriate Chapter Review for the student.
Any request after 9:00 p.m. the last specified date, will not be accepted. The Chapter
Reviews are 50 questions (True/False, Fill in the Blank, Multiple Choice) with a time
limit of 90 minutes and are open book tests. The time starts when you open the Chapter
Review and the time runs continuous. Therefore it behooves you to schedule this time
so as not to be disturbed. You cannot stop the clock during the Chapter Review to get a
drink of water or take a telephone call. The Chapter Reviews are equal to "Tests" and
are to be the individual work of each student. (Please refer to academic honesty on
Page 3 of this document.) Any questions answered after the time limit on the Chapter
Reviews will not be awarded any points. The 3 Exams are proctored Exams at one of
the testing centers at Paris Junior College (If you are a Virtual College of Texas student
and/or live out of the area, special arrangements will be made for your Exams.) These
include Paris, Sulphur Springs, and Greenville. It is the responsibility of the student to
make the appointments for the Exams during the hours of the appropriate testing
center. Exams are closed books and no papers, books, etc will be allowed in the testing
area. Exams are mandatory and will automatically result in a failure for the course if not

completed regardless of the grade earned from the Assignments and Chapter Reviews.
Ten points (10) will be deducted for all late work. I do not give the grade of "I"
incomplete. If the students Assignments and/or Chapter Reviews are not completed on
the last day of the course, a grade of "0" zero will be awarded, the grades averaged and
the grade submitted to the business office. Up to the last day of the final, I will assist in
any way I can. If you have any questions e-mail or call me and I'll be glad to assist.
Course Policies
This course does not attempt to teach basic use of a computer. All students must be
able to search the internet, send e-mail, and perform other basic computer tasks.
Students without these computer skills should not enroll in the course. Minimum
computer requirements are a Pentium or K6, 200 MHz, 800 MB hard drive, 32 MB ram,
28.8 Modem, Explorer 4.0 or higher web browser, reliable internet access, e-mail
account, Adobe Acrobat Reader v3.0, CD ROM drive, course specific plugins, and
software, basic working knowledge of computers, applications and internet usage.
ADA Statement

Term: 10S1 903-782-0362
MDCA 1343
Medical Insurance Intermediate
Course Description
Emphasizes accurate ICD-9 and CPT coding procedures for payment/reimbursement

by patient or third party. Additional topics may include managed care or medical
economics.
Prerequisite(s): HITT 1305, POFM 1300 or Taking Concurrently
Medisoft Made Easy: A Step-by-Step Approach, 2/E

Lillian Burke, Middlesex (NJ) Community College
Barbara Weill, Middlesex (NJ) Community College
Lori Tyler ISBN-10: 0138131392
Understanding Pharmacology for Health Professionals, 4th E. Susan M. Turley

ISBN#0135145708
Program Outcomes

format.
Course Outcomes
The student will accurately bill patients or insurance carriers for visits/procedures; and
describe and explain the differences/similarities among insurance plans. The student
will evaluate different types of drugs as they apply to the body system and will discuss
brand name drugs and generic drugs.
MDCA 1343.01 –Anita Ferguson Page 1 of 4

Learning Objectives
1. The student will apply pharmacology principles to the various body systems.
2. Assign codes to patients’ files using Medisoft software.
3. Input patient information into billing software.
4. Use the PDR in researching drugs.
5. Define pharmacology.
6. List the routes used for drug administration.
7. Describe the adverse reactions for some drugs
8. Explain the cycle of medical billing.
Course Schedule
WEEK 1-Complete Chapter 1 (An Introduction to Medical informatics) and Chapter 2 (A

Brief Introduction to the Windows Environment). Complete the Review Exercises for
chapter 2 and submit to instructor.
WEEK 2 –Complete Chapter 3 (An overview. Using MediSoft in the Medical Office)
and Chapter 4 (A Hands-On Introduction to MediSoft, and the Appointment Book)
Complete the Review Exercises for Chapter 3 and 4 and submit to instructor.
WEEK 3-Complete Chapter 5 (Entering Patient and Case Information—A Hands-On

Approach. Complete the Review Exercises for Chapter 5 and submit to instructor.
WEEK 4- Complete Chapter 6 (An Introduction to Transaction Entry and Claim

Management. Complete the Review Exercises for Chapter 6 and submit to instructor.
WEEK 5- Complete Chapter 7 (Electronic Media Claims). Complete the Review

Exercises for Chapter 7 and submit to instructor.
WEEK 6-Complete chapter 8 (Printing Reports). Complete the Review Exercises for
Chapter 8 and submit to instructor.
WEEK 7-Complete Chapter 9 (Designing Reports). Complete the Review Exercises for
Chapter 9 and submit to instructor.
WEEK 8-Complete Chapter 10 (Setting Up a New Practice) This is a performance-

based project of all skills learned in chapters 1-9. Complete and submit to instructor.
WEEK 9-Complete Chapters 1 through 4 in your Pharmacology textbook. Complete all

computer generated exercises as assigned and submit to your instructor for grading.
WEEK 10- Complete Chapters 5 through 9 in your Pharmacology textbook. Complete

all computer generated exercises as assigned and submit to your instructor for grading.

WEEK 11- Complete Chapters 10 through 13 in your Pharmacology textbook.
Complete all computer generated exercises as assigned and submit to your instructor
for grading.

for grading.

for grading.

for grading.
WEEK 15-Review and Catch-up week.
WEEK 16 – Exam Week—Take final exam on scheduled day.
Grading Policy
Pharmacology (Tests will be averaged) 50%

Medisoft (Tests will be averaged) 30%
Performance based chapter 10 20%
100%
Course Policies


Records Office.
ADA Statement

Term: 10S1 903-782-0362
MRMT 1307
Medical Transcription I
Course Description
Fundamentals of medical transcription including basic reports such as history and
physicals, discharge summaries, consultations, operative reports, and other medical
reports. Emphasis on development of speed and accuracy.
Prerequisite(s): HITT 1305 and typing skills of 40 wpm.

Medical Transcription Fundamentals & Practice, 3rd E, by Campbell, Drake, Pitman,
Dirckx. ISBN# 0131881434.
Program Outcomes

2. Transcribe dictated reports using correct grammar, punctuation, and format.
Course Outcomes
The student will explain the importance of confidentiality in medical records, describe the
purpose and content of medical records; transcribe physician dictation; develop
proofreading and editing skills; and increase speed and productivity.
Learning Objectives
1. Describe the importance of the confidential nature of medical records.
2. Describe the content and purpose of the seven medical records used at a Medical
Center.
3. Transcribe medical records using correct report format: Students will team with a
partner in helping each other listen and understand the physician’s dictation.
4. Transcribe medical records using correct capitalization, number, punctuation,
abbreviation, symbol, and metric measurement rules using the computer and
appropriate software.
MRMT 1307.01 – Anita Ferguson Page 1 of 7

5. Spell correctly both the English and medical terms and abbreviations presented,
either by memory or by using a dictionary/reference book.
6. Define the medical terms and abbreviations presented, either by memory or by
using a dictionary/reference book.
7. Define the prefixes, combining forms, and suffixes presented.
8. Identify the knowledge, skills, and abilities required of a medical transcriptionist.
Course Schedule
Week 1 (Aug. 30) Monday Discuss Chapter 1
(Sept. 1) Discuss Chapter 2
LABOR DAY HOLIDAY September 6
Week 2 (Sept. 8) Monday Discuss Chapter 3
Begin Video on Style
Guide
Week 3 (Sept. 13) Monday Complete Video on
Style Guide
(Sept. 15) Discuss Chapter 3 and
Chapter 4 end-of-chapter
Exercises Assign key
Term words
Week 4 ( Sept. 20) Monday Explain exercises to
turn in and demonstrate
where to find Skills
challenges,proofreading,
and key terms (each term
will be typed 5 times
before beginning the
lesson. Demonstrate the
use of the pedal and

earphones.Begin
transcribing Chapter 4.
(Sept. 22) Continue Transcribing ch. 4
Reports. Turn in key words
and definitions as assigned.
Week 5 (Sept. 27) Monday Continue Transcribing
(Sept. 29) Wednesday Chapter 4
Week 6 (Oct. 4) Monday VOCABULARY TEST OVER
CHAPTER 4 AND FINISH
REPORTS FOR CHAPTER 4!
Turn in all reports.
Discuss and turn in the
Answers to the skills
Challenges, proofreading
For chapter 4.
(Oct. 6) Wednesday Begin transcribing Chapter
5 Definitions.and reports.
Explain how To interpret
graded reports to students.
Week 7 (Oct. 11) Monday Continue Transcribing
Chapter 5 reports.
(Oct. 13) Wednesday Review Chapter 5 end-of-

chapter Exercises.
Continue Transcribing
Chapter 5.
Week 8 (Oct. 18) Monday TURN IN ALL REPORTS FOR
CHAPTER 5 at end of class period.
(Oct. 20) Wednesday Handout Chapter 6 end-of- chapter
exercises. Begin
Transcribing Chapter 6.
Week 9 (Oct. 25) Monday Continue Transcribing
Chapter 6.
(Oct. 27) Wednesday Continue transcribing ch. 6
Week 10 (Nov. 1) Monday Vocabulary test over Ch. 6
Check end-of-Chapter
Exercises for Chapter 6.
Turn in Chapter 6 Reports
(Nov. 3) Wednesday Begin Transcribing
Chapter 7 reports.
Week 11 (Nov. 8) Monday Continue transcribing
Chapter 7 reports.
(Nov. 10) Wednesday check End of chapter reports

for chapter 7
Week 12 (Nov. 15) Monday Vocabulary Test over ch. 7
Begin transcribing
Chapter 8 Reports.
Begin Speed and Accuracy Timings
(Nov. 17) Wednesday Continue transcribing
Chapter 8 Reports
Take a Speed and Accuracy Timing
Week 13 (Nov. 22) Monday Continue Transcribing
Chapter 8.Turn in all
Reports for Chapter 8.
THANKSGIVING BREAK November 24-29
(Nov. 29) Wednesday Test over Chapter 8
Vocabulary. Check end-of
Chapter exercises for chapter 8.
(Dec. 1) Wednesday Begin Transcribing
Chapter 9 Reports.
Speed and Accuracy Timing
Week 14 (Dec. 6) Monday Continue transcribing Chapter 9
Vocabulary test over ch. 9.
WEEK 15 (Dec. 8) Wednesday Review Chapter 9 end-

of-Chapter exercises. Turn
in all reports for ch. 9.
WEEK 16 (Dec. 13) Monday FINAL Exam Speed and Accuracy
Timing
For evaluation purposes, the student may earn A, B, C, D, or F as a course grade. Grade
A indicates excellent, Grade B above average, C average, D below average.
Timed Transcription Tests (includes speed and accuracy) 75%

Quiz Scores (Spelling Quizzes) 25%
100
To increase your transcribing, word searching, and proofreading speed and skills, the following approach
will be used in grading your speed and accuracy:
Transcribe 50 lines of 72‐characters per line..........A
of transcribed and proofread material per hour
with no more than 5 errors
40 lines per hour......................................B
No more than 5 errors
30 lines per hour......................................C
Course Policies


Office.
ADA Statement

Term: 10S1 903-782-0362
MRMT 1307
Medical Transcription I
Course Description
Fundamentals of medical transcription including basic reports such as history and
physicals, discharge summaries, consultations, operative reports, and other medical
reports. Emphasis on development of speed and accuracy.
Prerequisite(s): HITT 1305 and typing skills of 40 wpm.

Program Outcomes

2. Transcribe dictated reports using correct grammar, punctuation, and format.
Course Outcomes
The student will explain the importance of confidentiality in medical records, describe the
purpose and content of medical records; transcribe physician dictation; develop
proofreading and editing skills; and increase speed and productivity.
Learning Objectives
2. Describe the content and purpose of the seven medical records used at a Medical
Center.

Course Schedule
WEEK 1 Lesson1: Read Chapter 1 and complete Skills Challenge and submit.
WEEK 2 Lesson 2 & 3: Read Chapter 2 and 3 : Complete Skills Challenge and submit both
chapters.
WEEK 3 Lesson 4: Read chapter 4 and begin Transcribing dictated reports using the disk, the
computer, the wavpedal and earphones. Complete the Skills Challenge
and the vocabulary test, the transcription reports and submit to
instructor.
computer, the wavpedal and earphones. Complete the Skills Challenge
and the vocabulary test, the transcribed reports and submit to instructor.
computer, the wavpedal and earphones. Continue working the Skills
Challenge and the vocabulary test, the transcribed reports.
WEEK 6 Lesson 6: Continue completing chapter 6 and submit to instructor.


computer, the wavpedal and earphones. Continue working on the Skills
Challenge, the vocabulary test, and the transcription reports .
WEEK 10 Lesson 8: Continue Chapter 8 and submit Skills Challenge, vocabulary test, and
transcribed reports to instructor.
Challenge, the vocabulary test, and the transcription reports.

WEEK 13 –WEEK 15 Take Speed and Accuracy Timings.
WEEK 16 Final Exam Dec. 13 (Speed and Accuracy Timing)
For evaluation purposes, the student may earn A, B, C, D, or F as a course grade. Grade
A indicates excellent, Grade B above average, C average, D below average.

100
40 lines per hour......................................B

30 lines per hour......................................C
Course Policies
1.Be considerate of others in the lab and classroom.

2.No food or drinks are allowed in the computer labs or classrooms.
3.No minor children allowed in the labs or classrooms for safety reasons.
4.All cell phones, beepers and personal digital assistants (pda’s) must be turned off
Office.
ADA Statement

Term: 10S1 903-782-0362
MRMT 2333
Medical Transcription II
Course Description
Skill development in the production of medical reports including history and physicals,
consultations, discharge summaries, operative reports, and other medical reports.
Emphasis on speed and accuracy.
Prerequisite(s): HITT 1305 and MRMT 1307 and typing skills of 50 wpm.

Program Outcomes

format.
Course Outcomes
The student will increase skill development in the production of medical reports
including history and physicals, consultations, discharge summaries, operative reports,
and other medical reports. Emphasis on speed and accuracy.
Learning Objectives
2. Describe the content and purpose of the seven medical records used at a
Medical Center.

Course Schedule
WEEK 1 Lesson 10: Endocrinology: Chart Note, Note, Chart Note, Discharge Summary,
Discharge Summary, Discharge Summary, Discharge Summary
Operative Report. Transcribe these reports using correct format.
Type the Review words five times each and Complete Skills challenges
for this lesson.
WEEK 2 Lesson 11: Urology and Nephrology: Chart Note, Chart Note,Preop
History and Physical, History and Physical, Preop Note,
Discharge Summary, Preop Note,Operative Report. Transcribe
these reports using correct format. Type the Review words five times
each and Complete Skills challenges for this lesson. Prepare for the
vocabulary test over chapter 10 and chapter 11.
WEEK 3 Day 1 – Take Vocabulary test over chapter 10. Review skills
challenge for chapter 10.
Day 2‐Take Vocabulary test over chapter 11. Review skill challenge for
chapter 11.
WEEK 4 Lesson 12: Obstetrics and Gynecology: Discharge Summary, Chart Note, Chart
Note, Chart Note, Chart Note,Discharge Summary, Chart Note, Chart
Note,Chart Note, Chart Note,Discharge Summary, Preop Note,
Discharge Summary, Operative Report, Operative Report. Transcribe
these reports and submit to instructor. Type the Review words five
times each and Complete Skills Challenge for this lesson.
WEEK 5 Lesson 13: Orthopedics: History & Physical, Emergency Note, Chart Note, Chart
Note, Chart Note, Preop Note, Chart Note, Preop Note, Chart Note,
Chart Note, Preop Note, Preop Note, Operative Report, Operative
Report. Transcribe these reports and submit to instructor. Type the
Review words five times each and Complete Skills Challenge for this
lesson. Prepare for vocabulary test over chapter 12 and 13.

WEEK 6 Day 1‐ Take Vocabulary test over chapter 12. Review skills challenge
for chapter 12.
Day 2‐ Take Vocabulary test over chapter 13. Review skills challenge
for chapter 13.
WEEK 7 Lesson 14: Neurology: Chart Note, Chart Note, Chart Note, Chart Note,Chart
Note, Chart Note, Chart Note, Discharge Summary, Chart Note, Chart
Note, Chart Note, Chart Note, Chart Note, Emergency Note, Nerve
Conduction Study, Operative Report. Transcribe these reports and
submit to instructor. Type the Review words five times each and
Complete Skills challenges for this lesson.
WEEK 8 Lesson 15: Psychiatry: Transcribe these reports and submit to instructor. Type
the review words five times each and Complete Skills Challenges for
this lesson.
for chapter 14.
for chapter 15.
WEEK 10 Lesson 16: Pathology: Gross and Microscopic,Gross, Gross, Gross, Gross,
Cytology, Microscopic, Microscopic, Frozen Section, Microscopic,
Autopsy. Type Review Words five times each and complete Skills
Challenge for this lesson.
WEEK 11 Lesson 17: Radiology: X‐Ray, Chest; X‐Ray Chest;, X‐Ray Elbow; X‐Ray Cervical
Spine; X‐Ray KUB; Barium Enema; Ultrasound Obstetrical; CT Scan
Chest Abdomen Pelvic; MRI Head and Sella; Myelogram; Duplex Scan,
Neck; Myocardial imaging; Duplex Scan Legs. Transcribe these reports
and submit to instructor. Type Review Words five times each and
complete Skills Challenge for this lesson.
for chapter 16.
for chapter 17.



100
This course consists of 8 lessons, each of which consists of transcription practices. The
transcriptions will be checked for accuracy, neatness and format; therefore, in some
instances, some of the reports may have to be typed a second or third time.
All of the lessons must be completed satisfactorily by the end of the semester, before
finals week, to receive a grade.
70 lines per hour......................................B
60 lines per hour......................................C
Course Policies


Records Office.
ADA Statement

Term: 10S1 903-782-0362
Section:65 aferguson@parisjc.edu
MRMT 2333
Medical Transcription II
Course Description
Skill development in the production of medical reports including history and physicals,
consultations, discharge summaries, operative reports, and other medical reports.
Emphasis on speed and accuracy.
Prerequisite(s): HITT 1305 and MRMT 1307 and typing skills of 50 wpm.

Program Outcomes

format.
Course Outcomes
The student will increase skill development in the production of medical reports
including history and physicals, consultations, discharge summaries, operative reports,
and other medical reports. Emphasis on speed and accuracy.
Learning Objectives
2. Describe the content and purpose of the seven medical records used at a
Medical Center.

Course Schedule

WEEK 1 Lesson10: Read Chapter 10 and work on Skills Challenge, Vocabulary test, and
transcribe reports using the software disk, the computer, the wavpedal
and earphones.
WEEK 2 Lesson 10: Continue working on chapter 10 and submit Skills Challenge, vocabulary
test, and transcribed reports.
computer, the wavpedal and earphones. Continue the Skills Challenge
and the vocabulary test, and the transcription reports.
WEEK 4 Lesson 11: Continue working on chapter 11 and submit Skills Challenge,
vocabulary test, and transcribed reports.

WEEK 7 Lesson 13: Read chapter 13 and begin Transcribing dictated reports using the disk,
the computer, the wavpedal and earphones. Continue working the
Skills Challenge and the vocabulary test, the transcribed reports.

Challenge, the vocabulary test, and the transcription reports .
computer, the wavpedal and earphones. Submit the Skills Challenge,
the vocabulary test, and the transcription reports to your instructor.
computer, the wavpedal and earphones. Submit the Skills Challenge,
the vocabulary test, and the transcription reports to your instructor.
WEEK 13 Lesson 17: Read chapter 17 and begin Transcribing dictated reports
using the disk, the computer, the wavpedal and earphones. Submit the
Skills Challenge, the vocabulary test, and the transcription reports to
your instructor.



100
This course consists of 8 lessons, each of which consists of transcription practices. The
transcriptions will be checked for accuracy, neatness and format; therefore, in some
instances, some of the reports may have to be typed a second or third time.
All of the lessons must be completed satisfactorily by the end of the semester, before

finals week, to receive a grade.
70 lines per hour......................................B
60 lines per hour......................................C
Course Policies
1.
Be considerate of others in the lab and classroom.
2.
No food or drinks are allowed in the computer labs or classrooms.
3.
No minor children allowed in the labs or classrooms for safety reasons.
4.
Records Office.
ADA Statement

Term: 10S1 903-782-0362
POFM 1300
Medical Coding
Course Description
Presentation and application of basic coding rules, principles, guidelines, and
conventions utilizing various coding systems.

Step‐by‐Step Medical Coding 10th Edition, by Carol J. Buck, Publisher: Elsevier
www.elsevierhealth.com
ICD‐9‐CM 2010 (Volumes 1,2,3)
CPT 2010
HCPCS 2010 Access Code
These books will be bundled together for a lower cost—ISBN#9781437767063
The ACCESS CODE is also bundled with these books. You will need this code to put in when
you first access the course in WebCt.
Program Outcomes

format.
5. Recognize medical terminology and diseases
Course Outcomes
The student will define terms and abbreviations which apply to medical coding and learn the
basics to code patient charts by applying the rules for accurate medical coding.
POFM 1300.65 – Anita Ferguson Page 1 of 4

Learning Objectives
1. Identify the purpose of the CPT and ICD‐9‐CM manuals
2. Explain ICD‐9‐CM coding conventions
3. Assign ICD‐9‐CM codes to various diagnosis statements
4. Distinguish between Medicare Parts A, B, and C
5. Assign Codes using the ICD‐9‐CM and the CPT coding manuals
Course Schedule
SIXTEEN-WEEK COURSE OUTLINE
Week 1 Chapter 1 Reimbursement, HIPAA, and Compliance Chapter 2 An

Overview of ICD-9-CM. Complete exams.
Week 2 Chapter 3 Outpatient Coding and Reporting Guidelines

Chapter 4 Using ICD-9-CM. Complete exams.
Week 3 Chapter 5 Chapter-Specific Guidelines (ICD-9-CM Chapters 1-8) Complete

exams.
Week 4 Chapter 6 Chapter-Specific Guidelines (ICD-9-CM Chapters 9-17)

Chapter 7 ICD-10-CM. Complete exams.
Week 5 Chapter 8 Introduction to the CPT and Level II National Codes (HCPCS)
Chapter 9 Modifiers, Complete exams.
Week 6 Chapter 10 Evaluation and Management (E/M) Services. Complete exams
Week 7 Chapter 11 Anesthesia

Chapter 12 Surgery Guidelines and General Surgery. Complete exams.
Week 8 Chapter 13 Integumentary System. Complete exams.
Week 9 Chapter 14 Musculoskeletal System. Complete exams.
Week 10 Chapter 15 Respiratory System. Complete exams.
Week 11 Chapter 16 Cardiovascular System. Complete exams.
Week 12 Chapter 17 Hemic, Lymphatic, Mediastinum, and Diaphragm

Chapter 18 Digestive System. Complete exams.
Week 13 Chapter 19 Urinary and Male Genital Systems Chapter 20 Reproductive,

Intersex.
Surgery, Female Genital System, and Maternity Care and Delivery. Complete Exams.

Week 14 Chapter 21 Endocrine and Nervous Systems Chapter 22 Eye, Ocular Adnexa,
Auditory, and Operating Microscope. Complete exams.
Week 15 Chapter 23 Radiology Chapter 24 Pathology/Laboratory. Complete exams.
Week 16 Chapter 25 Medicine Chapter 26 Inpatient Coding. Complete exams.
GRADING POLICY
Complete all exams (both part 1 and part 2) for each lesson (26 lessons). These will be averaged
for the course grade.
A=90 to 100%
B=80 to 89%
C=70 to 79%
D=60 to 69%
F=50% and below
The total possible points will be divided into your total points you obtained for all exams.
Course Policies

Records Office.
ADA Statement



Term: 10S1 903.782.0378
POFT 1127
Introduction to Keyboarding
Course Description
Skill development in keyboarding with emphasis on alphabet, number, and symbol keys by touch.
Prerequisite(s):
College Keyboarding 16E, Lessons 1-25 Keyboarding Course, by VanHuss/Forde/Woo. ISBN

0538728256 (Text and software CD—Keyboarding Pro 4.0). Publisher: Thomson/Southwestern
Learning.
Program Outcomes
1. Use office resource materials, Internet, and Email to research and complete office documents
and projects proficiently.
Course Outcomes
The student will be able to keyboard by touch utilizing the alphabet, number, and symbol keys
with improved speed and accuracy.
POFT 1127.01 – Jan Jordan Page 1 of 4

Learning Objectives
1. The student will be able to demonstrate the correct posture at the computer.
2. The student will be able to demonstrate touch keyboarding at the computer.
3. The student will be able to demonstrate rhythmic keyboarding at the computer.
4. The student will be able to keyboard at least 15 words a minute with no more than one error on a
1-minute timing.
5. The student will be able to demonstrate correct finger usage of the shift and enter keys.
6. The student will be able to operate the printer functions.
7. The student will be able to demonstrate the correct procedure for ending each computer session.
8. The student will be able to manipulate the computer cursor through the use of the backspace,
delete, tab, and arrow-movement keys.
Course Schedule
(Any lessons not completed in class must be completed as homework. The software will record a red
checkmark by completed lessons). Complete each lesson at least twice before proceeding to next lesson.
Aug 30-Sep 3 Review Syllabus, schedule, textbook, software.

Begin Keyboarding Pro 4 Software.
Sep 7-Oct 15 Complete Alphabetic (Lessons 1-13) in the Keyboarding Pro 4 Software.
Complete 1-minute timings for speed and accuracy grade. If you do not reach the speed and accuracy
grade you desire, you may continue to come to class and work on the Skillbuilding (Lessons A-T) section of
Keyboarding Pro 4 software until you reach your goal or until the end of the semester.
Last Class Meeting is Wednesday, October 15, 2010 (unless you want to continue to improve
your speed and accuracy). Final Exam week is December 13-17. If you are still in the course
during that week, the final day you can take your timings is Monday, December 13, 2010 at
9:50 a.m. in Room 152—your classroom.
1. Touch keyboarding must be demonstrated by the student at all times. Students must complete
through Lesson 13. If time allows and the student is trying for a higher grade, Skillbuilding
Lessons (Lessons A through T) may be completed as appropriate.

2. To complete the course, students must be able to touch keyboard 15 gwam on a 1-minute
timing with one error or less (no backspacing allowed). The software can check for
backspacing.
3. If necessary, student must attend lab to reach the above speeds/accuracies and to do homework.
To meet the minimum course requirements, classroom time, daily lab time at school or at-home
combinations are recommended for this course. Students usually require this minimum time to
meet the requirement of touch keyboarding 15 gwam on a 1-minute timing with one error or less
(no backspacing).
Evaluation:
For evaluation purposes, the student may earn A, B, C, or F as a course grade. Because this course is
based on skill, the grade of D will not be given. Grade A indicates excellent keyboarding skill, Grade B
above-average keyboarding skill, and Grade C average keyboarding skill.
Your performance will be evaluated as follows.
The student must perform these skills for Grade A:
1. Touch keyboarding must be consistently demonstrated by the student.
2. Student must be able to touch keyboard 25 gwam on a 1-minute timing with one error or less (no
backspacing).
3. Complete all lessons in Alphabetic (Lessons 1-13)—Keyboarding Pro 4 Software.
The student must perform these skills for Grade B:
backspacing).
The student must perform these skills for Grade C:
backspacing).

Course Policies

ADA Statement
access to education opportunities for students with disabilities. Students with disabilities
are encouraged to contact a counselor or advisor from the Counseling/Advising Center
by calling 903.782.0426 (Paris campus), 903.454.9333 (Greenville Center), or


Term: 10S1 903.782.0378
POFT 1127
Introduction to Keyboarding
Course Description
Skill development in keyboarding with emphasis on alphabet, number, and symbol keys by touch.
Prerequisite(s):
College Keyboarding 16E, Lessons 1-25 Keyboarding Course, by VanHuss/Forde/Woo. ISBN

0538728256 (Text and software CD—Keyboarding Pro 4.0). Publisher: Thomson/Southwestern
Learning.
Program Outcomes
1. Use office resource materials, Internet, and Email to research and complete office documents
and projects proficiently.
Course Outcomes
The student will be able to keyboard by touch utilizing the alphabet, number, and symbol keys
with improved speed and accuracy.
Learning Objectives

4. The student will be able to keyboard at least 15 words a minute with no more than one error on a
1-minute timing.
6. The student will be able to operate the printer functions.
7. The student will be able to demonstrate the correct procedure for ending each computer session.
8. The student will be able to manipulate the computer cursor through the use of the backspace,
delete, tab, and arrow-movement keys.
Course Schedule
Complete the Alphabetic Section, Lessons 1-13 by October 15, 2010. This is an accelerated course.
However, if you wish to remain in the course for a longer period of time to increase your speed and
develop accuracy, you may continue with the Skillbuilder Section, Lessons A-T in the Keyboarding Pro 4
software.
1. Touch keyboarding must be learned by the student upon completing each lesson and before going
to the next lesson in the series. Students should meet the average progress goals set by Lesson 7
(12 gwam by touch), Lesson 10 (15 gwam by touch), Lesson 12 (16 gwam by touch), and Lesson
13 (16 gwam by touch). Students must complete through Lesson 13. If time allows and the
student is trying for a higher grade, skillbuilding lessons (Lessons A through T) may be completed
as appropriate.
2. To complete the course, students must be able to touch keyboard 15 gwam for a 1-minute
timing with one error or less (no backspacing allowed). The software can check for
backspacing. Three timings with this speed/accuracy will be required from student.
3. If necessary, student must attend lab or work at home to reach the above speeds/accuracies and
to do homework.

Evaluation:
For evaluation purposes, the student may earn A, B, C, or F as a course grade. Because this course is
based on skill, the grade of D will not be given. Grade A indicates excellent keyboarding skill, Grade B
above-average keyboarding skill, and Grade C average keyboarding skill.
Your performance will be evaluated as follows:
backspacing).
backspacing).
backspacing).
Course Policies



ADA Statement


Term: 10S1 903.782.0378
POFT 1321
Business Math
Course Description
Instruction in the fundamentals of business mathematics including analytical and problem-

solving skills for critical thinking in business applications.
Prerequisite(s):
MATH FOR BUSINESS AND LIFE, 4th Edition, by John Webber. Publisher: Olympus Publishing Company
Pencil, scratch paper, and hand‐held calculator.
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The student will be able to use fundamentals of business mathematics including analytical and problem‐solving
skills for critical thinking in business applications.

Learning Objectives
The student will be able to solve mathematical problems using
1. whole numbers and decimals.

2. fractions.
3. equations.
4. percents.
5. trade and cash discounts.
6. markup and markdown.
7. checking accounts.
8. payroll.
9. simple and compound interest.
10. depreciation.
11. measurements.
12. exchange rates and metrics.
13. statistics.
Course Schedule
Date Text Assignment Sections

Aug 31 Syllabus, schedule, etc. Chapter 1 All
Sep 2 Chapter 1

MONDAY, SEPTEMBER 6—LABOR DAY HOLIDAY—HAVE FUN!!!

7 Chapter 2 All
9 Chapter 2
14 Chapter 3 3.1, 3.2
16 Chapter 3
21 Review over Chapters 1‐3

September 23 (Thursday) Exam (1‐3)—NO CALCULATORS!

Sep 28 Chapter 4 All
30 Chapter 4
Oct 5 Chapter 5 All
7 Chapter 5
12 Chapter 6 All
14 Chapter 6
19 Review over Chapter 4‐6

October 21 (Thursday) Exam (4‐6) You can use your calculators!!!!

Oct 26 Chapter 7 All
28 Chapter 7

Nov 2 Chapter 8 8.1, 8.2
4 Chapter 8
9 Chapter 9 All
11 Chapter 9
16 Begin Case Problem—Final Exam
16 Review over Chapters 7, 8, & 9

Nov 18 (Thursday) Exam (7, 8, 9)

23 Chapter 22 All

THANKSGIVING HOLIDAYS—NOVEMBER 24‐26—DON’T EAT TOO MUCH!!

Nov 30 Chapter 26 All
Dec 2 Chapter 27 27.1
7 Work on case problem
7 Review over Chapters 22, 26, 27

Dec 9 (Thursday) Exam (22, 26, 27)

Case Problem Due – Final Exam No later than Tuesday, December 14, 2010.

Prior to each class meeting, students should read the assigned chapter and complete the assigned homework.

Homework will be assigned after each class meeting. That homework may be discussed during the following class
meeting or taken up for a grade. Quizzes over assigned reading and homework problems may also be given during
class.

A Comprehensive Case Problem will be assigned for completion during the final three weeks of the semester.
This case will serve as the final exam for the course. Failure to submit the final exam (case problem) will result in a
grade of F in the course. The final exam (case problem) must be submitted by Tuesday, December 14, 2010.
ABSOLUTELY NO EXCEPTIONS!

Students must attend classes regularly and arrive promptly. During class, students should be polite and
attentive to those talking.

Grades of A, B, C, D, and F will be determined by the student’s achievement of a certain percentage of possible
points based on (1) exams, (2) homework and quizzes, and (3) final exam. The average of the four unit exams,


along with related homework and quizzes, will determine 80% of the total grade for this course. The final exam
will count as 20%.
For example, if the following grades are made throughout the semester:
(1) Exam 1—90
Exam 2—88
Exam 3—87
Exam 4—95
360 / 4 = 90 avg X 80% = 72 pts out of a possible 80 pts from exams
Final Exam—90 X 20% = 18 points out of a possible 20 points
72 points from exams + 18 points from the final exam = 90, which is an A based on the following 10‐point Grading
Scale: 89.5%‐100% = A
79.5%‐89.4% = B
69.5%‐79.4% = C
59.5%‐69.4% = D
0‐59.4% = F
Course Policies

ADA Statement


Term: 10S1 903.782.0378
POFT 1329
Keyboarding & Document Formatting
Course Description
Skill development in the operation of the keyboard by touch applying proper keyboarding
techniques. Emphasis on development of acceptable speed and accuracy levels and
formatting basic documents.
Prerequisite(s):
College Keyboarding 16E, Lessons 1-25, by Vanusss · Forde · Woo. Keyboarding Pro 4.0 Software–comes
wrapped with your textbook. ISBN# 0538728256. Publisher: Thomson/Southwestern Learning.
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The student will demonstrate proper keyboarding techniques including touch technique; demonstrate an
acceptable level of keyboarding skills with a minimum speed of 20 correct words per minute (cwpm) by touch;
apply proofreading and editing skills; and create basic business documents.

Learning Objectives
4. The student will be able to keyboard at least 20 words a minute with no more than 3 errors for a 3-
minute timing.
5. The student will be able to demonstrate touch keyboarding of the numeric keypad.
7 The student will be able to operate the printer.
8 The student will be able to demonstrate the correct procedure for ending each computer session.
9 The student will be able to manipulate the computer cursor through the use of the backspace, delete,
tab, and arrow-movement keys.
10. The student will be able to apply paragraph formatting procedures when keying documents.
11. The student will be able to efficiently use the backspace, delete, and arrow movement keys when
keying documents.
Course Schedule
Aug 30-Sep 3 Review time schedule, syllabus, and textbook.
Learn how to Start/Stop Lessons in Keyboarding Pro 4 software.

Read introduction. Practice using software.
Sep 7-Oct 8 Complete Alphabetic Keyboarding lessons listed below.

Each lesson takes 15-25 minutes to complete; notice that some lessons are
completed twice; we have about 5 weeks to complete this group; homework/lab for this group
is approximately 1 hour to 1 hour 45 minutes each week.
Lesson 1(1st) ___ Lesson 4(1st) ___ Lesson 6(2nd)___ Lesson 9(2nd) ___
Lesson 1(2nd)___ Lesson 4(2nd)___ Lesson 7 ___ Lesson 10(lst) ___
Lesson R1 ___ Lesson 5(lst) ___ Lesson 8(1st) ___ Lesson 10(2nd)___
Lesson 2(1st) ___ Lesson 5(2nd)___ Lesson 8(2nd)___ Lesson 11 ___
Lesson 2(2nd)___ Lesson 6(1st) ___ Lesson 9(1st) ___ Lesson 12 ___
Lesson 3 ___ Lesson 13 ___

Oct 11- In the Keyboarding Pro 4 software:
Dec 3
Complete Numeric Skill (Lesson 14 through Lesson 25) listed below.
Complete Skill Builder (Lesson A through Lesson T) listed below.
(Notice you are to alternate the lessons: Do Lesson A and then Lesson 14,
Do Lesson B and then Lesson 15, etc.)
Each lesson takes 20-30 minutes to complete; we have about 7 weeks to complete this group;
homework/lab time for this group is approximately 2 hours to 4 hours each week depending on
your speed and accuracy.
Lesson A ___ Lesson 14 ___ Lesson N ___

Lesson B ___ Lesson 15 ___ Lesson O ___
Lesson C ___ Lesson 16 ___ Lesson P ___
Lesson D ___ Lesson 17 ___ Lesson Q ___
Lesson E ___ Lesson 18 ___ Lesson R ___
Lesson F ___ Lesson 19 ___ Lesson S ___
Lesson G ___ Lesson 20 ___ Lesson T ___
Lesson H ___ Lesson 21 ___
Lesson I ___ Lesson 22 ___
Lesson J ___ Lesson 23 ___
Lesson K ___ Lesson 24 ___
Lesson L ___ Lesson 25 ___
Lesson M ___
Dec 6-10 Practice for Keyboarding Exams (correctly formatted business letter and memo)
as instructed.
Dec 13-17 Final Exam Week
Your final exam time is scheduled for Monday, December 13, 2010 in Room 152 (your
classroom) at 9:50 a.m.
Final Exam 1 (business memo) until passing score is obtained—no more than three errors.
Final Exam 2 (business letter) until passing score is obtained—no more than three errors.
All work must be completed by Monday, December 13, 2010.

2. Student must be able to touch keyboard 20 WPM for a 3-minute timing with three errors or less to pass
the course. This is a minimum speed and accuracy.
3. Student must pass two exams with three errors or less. The first exam will consist of a properly
formatted business letter. The second exam will consist of a properly formatted business memo. Each
exam must be completed in 25 minutes. This time frame includes the time allowed for keying in
paragraphs and for proofreading the paragraphs. Touch keyboarding must be demonstrated when taking
exam.
4. To meet the course requirements (pass this course), the student should key Monday through
Thursday minimum—preferably every day of the week. Look on the time schedule for the
amount of time each lesson will take to complete and for the amount of time needed to spend
in homework/lab to finish the assignments and pass the course.
For evaluation purposes, the student may earn A, B, C, or F as a course grade. Because this course is based
on skill, the grade of D will not be given. Grade A indicates excellent keyboarding skill, Grade B above-
average keyboarding skill, and Grade C average keyboarding skill.
2. Student must be able to keyboard 30 WPM for a 3-minute timing with three errors or less. Three
timings with this speed/accuracy will be required from student.
3. Student must pass two keyboarding exams (business letter and memo).

The student must achieve Grade C objectives to pass this course. If you do not take your final exam, you will
receive an F in this course.
Course Policies

ADA Statement


Term: 10S1 903.782.0378
POFT 1329
Keyboarding & Document Formatting
Course Description
Skill development in the operation of the keyboard by touch applying proper keyboarding
techniques. Emphasis on development of acceptable speed and accuracy levels and
formatting basic documents.
Prerequisite(s):
College Keyboarding 16E, Lessons 1-25, by Vanusss · Forde · Woo. Keyboarding Pro 4.0 Software–comes
wrapped with your textbook. ISBN# 0538728256. Publisher: Thomson/Southwestern Learning.
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The student will demonstrate proper keyboarding techniques including touch technique; demonstrate an
acceptable level of keyboarding skills with a minimum speed of 20 correct words per minute (cwpm) by touch;
apply proofreading and editing skills; and create basic business documents.

Learning Objectives
4. The student will be able to keyboard at least 20 words a minute with no more than 3 errors for a 3-
minute timing.
5. The student will be able to demonstrate touch keyboarding of the numeric keypad.
7 The student will be able to operate the printer.
8 The student will be able to demonstrate the correct procedure for ending each computer session.
9 The student will be able to manipulate the computer cursor through the use of the backspace, delete,
tab, and arrow-movement keys.
10. The student will be able to apply paragraph formatting procedures when keying documents.
11. The student will be able to efficiently use the backspace, delete, and arrow movement keys when
keying documents.
Course Schedule
Aug 30-Sep 3 Review time schedule, syllabus, and textbook.
Learn how to Start/Stop Lessons in Keyboarding Pro 4 software.

Read introduction. Practice using software.
Sep 7-Oct 8 Complete Alphabetic Keyboarding lessons listed below.

Each lesson takes 15-25 minutes to complete; notice that some lessons are
completed twice; we have about 5 weeks to complete this group; homework/lab for this group
is approximately 1 hour to 1 hour 45 minutes each week.
Lesson 1(1st) ___ Lesson 4(1st) ___ Lesson 6(2nd)___ Lesson 9(2nd) ___
Lesson 1(2nd)___ Lesson 4(2nd)___ Lesson 7 ___ Lesson 10(lst) ___
Lesson R1 ___ Lesson 5(lst) ___ Lesson 8(1st) ___ Lesson 10(2nd)___
Lesson 2(1st) ___ Lesson 5(2nd)___ Lesson 8(2nd)___ Lesson 11 ___
Lesson 2(2nd)___ Lesson 6(1st) ___ Lesson 9(1st) ___ Lesson 12 ___
Lesson 3 ___ Lesson 13 ___
Oct 11- In the Keyboarding Pro 4 software:

Dec 3
Complete Numeric Skill (Lesson 14 through Lesson 25) listed below.
Complete Skill Builder (Lesson A through Lesson T) listed below.
(Notice you are to alternate the lessons: Do Lesson A and then Lesson 14,
Do Lesson B and then Lesson 15, etc.)
Each lesson takes 20-30 minutes to complete; we have about 7 weeks to complete this group;
homework/lab time for this group is approximately 2 hours to 4 hours each week depending on
your speed and accuracy.
Lesson A ___ Lesson 14 ___ Lesson N ___

Lesson B ___ Lesson 15 ___ Lesson O ___
Lesson C ___ Lesson 16 ___ Lesson P ___
Lesson D ___ Lesson 17 ___ Lesson Q ___
Lesson E ___ Lesson 18 ___ Lesson R ___
Lesson F ___ Lesson 19 ___ Lesson S ___
Lesson G ___ Lesson 20 ___ Lesson T ___
Lesson H ___ Lesson 21 ___
Lesson I ___ Lesson 22 ___
Lesson J ___ Lesson 23 ___
Lesson K ___ Lesson 24 ___
Lesson L ___ Lesson 25 ___
Lesson M ___
Dec 6-10 Practice for Keyboarding Exams (correctly formatted business letter and memo)
as instructed.
Dec 13-17 Final Exam Week
Your final exam time is scheduled for Tuesday, December 14 at Sulphur Springs in the Library
after 1 p.m., in Greenville on Wednesday, December 15 in Room 121 after 1 p.m., and at the
Paris Campus in Room 152 on Monday through Thursday mornings December 13-16 until 11
a.m. with the instructor.
Final Exam 1 (business memo) until passing score is obtained—no more than three errors.
Final Exam 2 (business letter) until passing score is obtained—no more than three errors.
All work must be completed by Monday, December 13, 2010.

2. Student must be able to touch keyboard 20 WPM for a 3-minute timing with three errors or less to pass
the course. This is a minimum speed and accuracy.
3. Student must pass two exams with three errors or less. The first exam will consist of a properly
formatted business letter. The second exam will consist of a properly formatted business memo. Each
exam must be completed in 25 minutes. This time frame includes the time allowed for keying in
paragraphs and for proofreading the paragraphs. Touch keyboarding must be demonstrated when taking
exam.
4. To meet the course requirements (pass this course), the student should key Monday through
Thursday minimum—preferably every day of the week. Look on the time schedule for the
amount of time each lesson will take to complete and for the amount of time needed to spend
in homework/lab to finish the assignments and pass the course.
For evaluation purposes, the student may earn A, B, C, or F as a course grade. Because this course is based
on skill, the grade of D will not be given. Grade A indicates excellent keyboarding skill, Grade B above-
average keyboarding skill, and Grade C average keyboarding skill.

The student must achieve Grade C objectives to pass this course. The student will meet with the instructor at
the end of the semester to take the final exam in person at a testing center or in the instructor’s classroom at the
Paris Campus to demonstrate touch keyboarding skills. This is the only time you will have to meet with the
instructor for this course unless you need to other times which can be scheduled if needed. If you do not meet
the instructor to take your final exam, you will receive an “F” in this course.
Course Policies

ADA Statement


Term: 10S1 903.782.0378
POFT 1364
Practicum
Course Description
Practical general training and experiences in the workplace. The college with the
employer develops and documents an individualized plan for the student. The plan
relates the workplace training and experiences to the student’s general and technical
course of study. The guided external experiences may be for pay or no pay. This course
may be repeated if topics and learning outcomes vary.
Prerequisite(s):
Textbook: YOUR CAREER—How to Make it Happen, 7th ed., Julie Griffin Levitt, Thompson South‐
Western Publishing Company, ISBN 0‐538‐730994.
Program Outcomes

Course Outcome
Students will be able to confirm an appropriate career, to conduct a successful job search, and to lay the
foundation for successful career development and to apply these skills to achieving immediate and future
career goals.
Learning Objectives
1. Develop proactive success attitudes.
2. Increase self‐motivation and confidence‐building skills.
3. Identify and focus job strengths and match them to the best job.
4. Organize the job search and identify the best potential employers.
5. Develop a strong career network.
6. Prepare resumes and cover letters that get positive results.
7. Prepare professional electronic resumes and cover letters.
8. Develop a career portfolio that demonstrates job readiness.
9. Get interviews and interview skillfully.
10. Negotiate for a fair salary and benefits package.
11. Use the internet to increase career development knowledge and employment potential.
Course Schedule
POFT 1364—Fall, 2010 Schedule

PART 1: Starting Your Career

August 30‐September 3

In each Chapter, complete all Career Actions and Trial Runs as assigned by instructor.

Chapter 1 The Job Search Process (Career Actions 1‐1, 1‐3—Career Portfolio, Appendix B, 1‐4, 1‐5)
Career Portfolio will be in a 3‐ring binder with 14 dividers—one divider for each
chapter in your textbook. You will store all of your Career Action assignments in this
notebook.

Trial Run

September 6—LABOR DAY HOLIDAY!! HAVE FUN!!

September 7‐10

Chapter 2 Know What Employers Expect (CA 2‐2, 2‐3, 2‐4)

Begin your on‐the‐job practicum work assignment no later than September 13, 2010.

September 13‐17

Chapter 3 Know Yourself to Market Yourself (All Career Actions)

PART 2: Sources of Job Information

Thursday, September 23: Exam 1 over Chapters 1‐3 is due (Take‐Home Exam)

September 27‐October 1

Chapter 4 Your Winning Network (CA 4‐1, 4‐2, 4‐3)

October 4‐8

Chapter 5 Research Careers and Find Job Leads (All Career Actions)

PART 3: Essential Job Search Communications

October 11‐15

Chapter 6 Resumes (All Career Actions)

October 18‐22

Chapter 7 Job Applications and Cover Letters (7‐1, 7‐3, 7‐4)

Thursday, October 28: Exam 2 over Chapters 4‐7 is due (Take‐Home Exam)


PART 4: The Job Interview

October 25‐29

Chapter 8 Interview Essentials (CA 8‐1, 8‐2, 8‐3, 8‐4)

November 1‐5

Chapter 9 Ask for and Get the Interview (All Career Actions)

November 8‐12

Chapter 10 Interview Styles and Questions (CA 10‐1 Part 2‐‐Internet Research, 10‐2, 10‐3)

November 15‐19

Chapter 11 Interview Like a Pro (CA 11‐1 & 11‐2—Practice Interviewing, 11‐5, 11‐6)

You can choose who you want to interview with or you might be interviewed by your
practicum employer before you start your on‐the‐job practicum assignment.

These two assignments will help you prepare for interviews. In 11‐2, it refers to CA
10‐5 which does not exist. The book is referring to the Interview Critique Form in CA
11‐4 in Chapter 11 on pages 258 and 259. If you are interviewed by the practicum
employer, you might ask the employer to complete the Interview Critique Form for
you. Employers are busy people and they might not have time to do this. However,
some will be glad to do it for you.

Your instructor will also be available to interview you asking the questions in Career
Action 10‐3 in Chapter 10 on pages 237‐240, and then will critique you using the
Interview Critique Form in Chapter 11.

November 24‐26 THANKSGIVING HOLIDAYS!! DON’T EAT TOO MUCH!!

Thursday, December 2: Exam 3 over Chapters 8‐11 is due (Take‐Home Exam)

PART 5: Next Steps

Chapter 12 Following Up and Negotiating Offers (All Career Actions)


November 29‐December 3

Chapter 13 Handling Rejection (CA 13‐1, 13‐2)
Chapter 14 Take Charge of Your Career (CA 14‐1, 14‐2)

Your On‐the‐Job Practicum Work Assignment ends this week on December 3, 2010.

December 13‐17 is final exam week. Turn in your Career Portfolio binder on Tuesday, December
14, 2010.

Turn in your final exam over Chapters 12‐14 by Thursday, December 16, 2010 by your class time of
11:15 a.m.

If you want to keep your Career Portfolio binder at the end of the semester, make two copies of
everything you do during the semester. The instructor has to keep your binder for several
semesters for filing purposes.
1. Complete the text‐workbook, Your Career—How to Make it Happen as assigned by the
instructor. You will spend approximately three hours a week outside of class time completing
the assignments in the text‐workbook that will include the following:
a. Visiting with perspective employers in your community.

b. Preparing your Career Management Files binder. (Appendix B in textbook)
c. Interviewing employees in local jobs about office skills you will be expected to
perform when you go to work (survey questions).
d. Job search networking assignments in the field and on the internet.
e. Career /Job Fairs
f. Seminars or workshops in the local community.
g. Practicing Interviews.
2. Complete lab assignments using the text software as assigned by the instructor.
3. Observe in an employment setting as a volunteer for a minimum of 14 hours a week as
discussed with your instructor no later than September 13, 2010.
4. Complete all tests with 70% accuracy.
5. Complete final exam with 70% accuracy.

Evaluation:
Completion of all class and Career Action Assignments 35%

Chapter Test Scores 15%
On‐the‐Job Employer Evaluation 50%
100%
If you do not turn in your portfolio, you will receive an “F” in this course.
Course Policies

ADA Statement



Term: 10S1 903.782.0362
POFT 1364
Practicum
Course Description
Prerequisite(s):
Program Outcomes

format.
Course Outcome
career goals.
POFT 1364.30 – Anita Ferguson Page 1 of 6

Learning Objectives
Course Schedule




notebook.

Trial Run


September 7‐10




September 13‐17






October 4‐8



October 11‐15


October 18‐22




October 25‐29


November 1‐5


November 8‐12


November 15‐19







PART 5: Next Steps






December 13‐17 is final exam week. Turn in your Career Portfolio binder on Turn in your Career
Portfolio binder on Wednesday , December 8, 2010.

Turn in your final exam over Chapters 12‐14 by Wednesday, December 8, 2010 by 1:30 p.m.


Evaluation:

100%

Course Policies

ADA Statement


Term: 10S1 903.782.0362
Section: 3G aferguson@parisjc.edu
POFT 1364
Practicum
Course Description
Prerequisite(s):
Program Outcomes

format.
Course Outcome
career goals.
POFT 1364.3G– Anita Ferguson Page 1 of 6

Learning Objectives
Course Schedule




notebook.

Trial Run


September 7‐10




September 13‐17






October 4‐8



October 11‐15


October 18‐22




October 25‐29


November 1‐5


November 8‐12


November 15‐19







PART 5: Next Steps





December 13‐17 is final exam week. Turn in your Career Portfolio binder on Wednesday ,
December 8, 2010.


Turn in your final exam over Chapters 12‐14 by Wednesday , December 8, 2010 by 1:30 p.m.


Evaluation:

100%
Course Policies


ADA Statement


Term: 10S1 903.782.0362
Section: 3S aferguson@parisjc.edu
POFT 1364
Practicum
Course Description
Prerequisite(s):
Program Outcomes

format.
Course Outcome
career goals.
POFT 1364.3S – Anita Ferguson Page 1 of 6

Learning Objectives
Course Schedule




notebook.

Trial Run



September 7‐10



September 13‐17






October 4‐8



October 11‐15


October 18‐22




October 25‐29



November 1‐5


November 8‐12


November 15‐19







PART 5: Next Steps






December 13‐17 is final exam week. Turn in your Career Portfolio binder on Wednesday ,
December 8, 2010.

Turn in your final exam over Chapters 12‐14 by Wednesday , December 8, 2010 by 1:30 p.m.


Evaluation:

100%

Course Policies

ADA Statement



Term: 10S1 903.782.0378
POFT 1364
Practicum
Course Description

Prerequisite(s):
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
career goals.

Learning Objectives
Course Schedule
It will be necessary for the instructor to meet with you the first week of the semester to help you get
started in this course and to discuss where you will work for your practicum on‐the‐job training. The
first week of the semester will be a very busy week for everyone, but we will pick a time that is
convenient for everyone. If necessary, I will contact all of you if we need to meet again as a class
during the semester which probably won’t be necessary. Otherwise, I will meet with you individually
as needed throughout the semester at an appointed time.




notebook.

Trial Run


September 7‐10



September 13‐17






October 4‐8



October 11‐15


October 18‐22



October 25‐29


November 1‐5


November 8‐12


November 15‐19







PART 5: Next Steps




December 13‐17 is final exam week. I will be in Greenville on Wednesday, December 15 after 1
p.m. in Room 121 giving my other final exams. You may turn in your Career Portfolio binder to
me at that time. If you do not turn in your portfolio, you will receive an “F” in this course.
You will send me your textbook final exam as an attachment over Chapters 12‐14 by Monday,
December 13, 2010 so I can bring it to Greenville with me on December 15 with your results for
that exam.

Evaluation:

100%

Course Policies

in silent mode. Under no circumstances should a cell phone or beeper sound during
class. If a cell phone or beeper does sound during class, the student may be asked
to leave for the remainder of the period. The only exception to this rule includes
peace officers, EMT, EMS, or other emergency personnel, and their devices should
be in silent mode.
Office.
ADA Statement



Term: 10S1 903.782.0378
POFT 2301.01
Document Formatting & Skillbuilding
Course Description
A continuation of keyboarding skills in document formatting, speed, and accuracy.

Emphasis on proofreading, editing, and following instructions, and keying documents
from various copy.
Prerequisite(s): POFT 1329 or equivalent.
Key Champ, Technique Analysis · Speed Building, Enhanced Version, Sharp, Olinzock, Santos.
ISBN # 0-538-43390-6. Publisher: Southwestern/Thomson Learning.
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The student will produce alphabetic, alphanumeric, and numeric material at a minimum speed of 40
correct words per minute (cwpm) by touch; use proofreading and editing skills; and format and produce a
variety of business documents using word processing software.

Learning Objectives
1. Students will correctly format and efficiently keyboard block and modified-block style letters and
interoffice memorandums.
2. Students will demonstrate proficiency of basic word processing commands and operation of the
computer workstation.
3. The student will demonstrate proofreading skills.
4. The student will increase speed/accuracy on the computer workstation using keyboarding
software.
Course Schedule
Course covers Key Champ Software and Microsoft Word 2007 Software
Aug 30-Sep 3 Read syllabus, assignments, and schedule. Discuss Key Champ software.
You will be expected to spend at least 3 hours per week in lab (on campus or at home)
practicing the Key Champ software. You will also be completing various Word 2007 business documents
(memos and letters) and taking 5-minute keyboard timings for speed and accuracy grades. After you have
completed the minimum requirements for timings (40/5--40 words per minute on a 5-minute timing), then
you should continue doing the Key Champ Lessons that will help you reach the requirements of this
course for A (50/5) or B (45/5) speeds.
Complete Session 1 and print out your results to determine which Sessions you will need to
complete for the letter combinations you need to work on to build your speed and accuracy.
SEP 6 LABOR DAY HOLIDAY!! HAVE FUN!!
Sep 7-10 Key Champ Sessions

Review Memos (example memo given by instructor)
Start 5-minute timings
Sep 27- Key Champ Sessions

Oct 1 Work on Memos
Timings
Oct 4-8 Key Champ Sessions

Review Block Style Business Letters (example given by instructor)

Review Modified Block Business Letters (example given by instructor)
Review Open Punctuation (example given by instructor)
Review Standard or Mixed Punctuation (interchangeable terms)—(example given
by instructor)

Work on formatting Block Style and Modified Block Style business letters using
open and mixed punctuation as instructed.
Timings

Timings

Work on Practice Memos and Letters if necessary.
Timings
Nov 1-5 Key Champ Sessions

Timings

Practice memos and letters if necessary.
Timings

Timings
Nov 29- Key Champ Sessions

Dec 3 Timings
Dec 6-10 Review for Final Word Exam over business letters and memos.
Timings
Dec 13-15 Final Exam Week—Everything must be completed and turned in to the
instructor by Monday, December 13, 2010.
Dec 13 Take final exam in Word over business letters and memos.
(Monday) Determine final grade on 5-minute timings.
2. Student must be able to key by touch at least 40 WPM on a 5-minute timing with five errors or

less without using the backspace key.
3. Student's final grade must be at least a C to pass this course.
4. Complete all assigned Key Champ and Word documents.
5. Complete one final exam over Word with at least 70% accuracy.
6. You must meet with the instructor to take your final exam in this course. If you do not take the
final exam, you will receive an “F” in the course.
Speed (5' Timings on keyboard) counts as 90% of your grade and one Word Exam counts as 10% of your
grade.
Final Grade Scale: Speed Scale 5' timings

A = 4 grade points A= 50 wpm
B = 3 grade points B= 45 wpm
C= 2 grade points C= 40 wpm
F= 0 grade points
If you do not take your final exam, you will receive an “F” in this course.
Course Policies

silent mode. Under no circumstances should a cell phone or beeper sound during cla
If a cell phone or beeper does sound during class, the student may be asked to leave
the remainder of the period. The only exception to this rule includes peace officers, E
5. It is the responsibility of the student to initiate a drop form by the last day to withdraw
a “W” if so desired. The instructor will not drop a student unless the student asks for
6. All Student’s Standard of Conduct policies in the PJC Calendar and Student Handbo


ADA Statement

Term: 10S1 903.782.0378
POFT 2301.01
Document Formatting & Skillbuilding
Course Description
A continuation of keyboarding skills in document formatting, speed, and accuracy.

Emphasis on proofreading, editing, and following instructions, and keying documents
from various copy.
Prerequisite(s): POFT 1329 or equivalent.
Key Champ, Technique Analysis · Speed Building, Enhanced Version, Sharp, Olinzock, Santos.
ISBN # 0-538-43390-6. Publisher: Southwestern/Thomson Learning.
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
The student will produce alphabetic, alphanumeric, and numeric material at a minimum speed of 40
correct words per minute (cwpm) by touch; use proofreading and editing skills; and format and produce a
variety of business documents using word processing software.

Learning Objectives
1. Students will correctly format and efficiently keyboard block and modified-block letters and
interoffice memorandums.
2. Students will demonstrate proficiency of basic word processing commands and operation of the
computer workstation.
3. The student will demonstrate proofreading skills.
4. The student will increase speed/accuracy on the computer workstation using keyboarding
software.
Course Schedule
Course covers Key Champ Software and Microsoft Word 2007 Software
You will have to meet with the instructor the first week of school for an orientation session for this
course. I would like to meet as a group, but might have to meet with some of you individually depending
on your work schedule, etc. After the first meeting, you will only have to meet with me again at the end
of the semester when you take your final exam. I will also meet anyone during the semester on an
individual basis if needed.
You will be expected to spend at least 3 hours per week practicing the Key Champ software. You need
to key some every day to build your speed and accuracy. You will also be completing various Word 2007
business documents (memos and letters) and taking 5-minute keyboard timings for speed and accuracy
grades. After you have completed the minimum requirements for timings (40/5--40 words per minute on
a 5-minute timing), then you should continue doing the Key Champ Lessons that will help you reach the
requirements of this course for A (50/5) or B (45/5) speeds.
Complete Session 1 and print out your results to determine which Sessions you will need to complete for
the letter combinations you need to work on to build your speed and accuracy.
Aug 30-Sep 3 Read syllabus, assignments, and schedule. Discuss Key Champ software.

Review Memos (example memo given by instructor)
Start 5-minute timings
Sep 27- Key Champ Sessions

Oct 1 Work on Memos
Timings

Review Block Style Business Letters (example given by instructor)
Review Modified Block Business Letters (example given by instructor)
Review Open Punctuation (example given by instructor)
Review Standard or Mixed Punctuation (interchangeable terms)—(example given
by instructor)

Work on formatting Block Style and Modified Block Style business letters using
open and mixed punctuation as instructed.
Timings

Timings

Work on Practice Memos and Letters if necessary.
Timings

Timings

Practice memos and letters if necessary.
Timings

Timings
Nov 29- Key Champ Sessions

Dec 3 Timings
Dec 6-10 Review for Final Word Exam over business letters and memos.
Timings
Dec 13-15 Final Exam Week—Everything must be completed and turned in to the instructor by
Wednesday, December 15, 2010.
Take final exam in Word over business letters and memos.

Determine final grade on 5-minute timings.
I will be in Sulphur Springs on Tuesday, December 14, 2010 in the Library after 1
p.m. to give final exams, in Greenville on Wednesday, December 15, 2010 in Room 121
after 1 p.m., and in Paris on Monday through Thursday mornings from 8-11 and
Monday afternoon from 1-5.

2. Student must be able to key by touch at least 40 WPM on a 5-minute timing with five errors or
less without using the backspace key.
3. Student's final grade must be at least a C to pass this course.
4. Complete all assigned Key Champ and Word documents.
5. Complete one final exam over Word with at least 70% accuracy.
6. You must meet with the instructor to take your final exam in this course. If you do not take the
final exam, you will receive an “F” in the course.
Speed (5' Timings on keyboard) counts as 90% of your grade and one Word Exam counts as 10% of your
grade.
Final Grade Scale: Speed Scale 5' timings

A = 4 grade points A= 50 wpm
B = 3 grade points B= 45 wpm
C= 2 grade points C= 40 wpm
F= 0 grade points
If you do not take your final exam with the instructor, you will receive an “F” in this
course.
Course Policies

silent mode. Under no circumstances should a cell phone or beeper sound during cla
If a cell phone or beeper does sound during class, the student may be asked to leave
the remainder of the period. The only exception to this rule includes peace officers, E
5. It is the responsibility of the student to initiate a drop form by the last day to withdraw
a “W” if so desired. The instructor will not drop a student unless the student asks for
6. All Student’s Standard of Conduct policies in the PJC Calendar and Student Handbo


ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Rita Tapp

College Year: 2010-2011 AD 138
Term: Fall 2010 (101S) Phone: 903-782-
0301
Section: 65 rtapp@parisjc.edu
POFT 2312
Business Communications
Course Description
Development of writing skills to produce effective business documents.
TSI Requirement: none
Prerequisite(s): none

Essentials of Business Communication, Guffey 7th edition ISBN: 0-324-37642-1
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Apply the basic rules of grammar, spelling, capitalization, number usage, and
punctuation; utilize terminology applicable to technical and business writing; develop
proofreading and editing skills; and write effective sentences and paragraphs for
business applications (letters and memos).
Learning Objectives
1. The student will identify examples of communication media and explain their
functions.
2. The student will discuss the effect(s) of electronic technology on the business
communication process.
3. The student will discuss the responsibilities of the sender and the receiver in
communicating effectively.
4. The student will identify communications barriers.
5. The student will compose messages that show the “you” attitude.
6. The student will change negative statements to positive statements.
7. The student will rewrite messages to limit the uses of “it” and “there”.
8. The student will rewrite messages to change passive voice to active voice.
9. The student will compose messages that meet the criteria for the six basic
POFT 2312 – Rita Tapp Page 1 of 4

qualities – courtesy, clarity, conciseness, concreteness, correctness, and

completeness.
10. The student will identify the basic letter and memorandum parts.
11. The student will apply appropriate sentence and paragraph construction and
placement to achieve a favorable reader response.
Course Schedule
Aug. 30 – Sep. 5 Review schedule, syllabus, quiz, and testing schedule. Take the
Syllabus/Schedule quiz.
Sep. 6 – Sep. 12 Read Chapter 1. You must sign in by September 14 to avoid being
dropped.
Sep. 13 – Sep. 19 Read Chapter 2. Begin taking the grammar/business etiquette
quizzes.
Sep.20 – Sep. 26 Objective Exam 1 over Chapters 1-2.
Sep. 27 – Oct. 3 Read Chapter 3.
Oct. 4 – Oct. 10 Read Chapter 4.
Oct. 11 – Oct. 15 Objective Exam 2 over Chapters 3-4.
Oct. 18– Oct. 24 Read Chapter 5. Compose a memo using the information found in
5.7 Information/Procedure E-Mail: Countdown to Performance
Appraisal Deadline on p. 125.
Oct. 25 – Oct. 31 Read Chapter 6. Write a personal business letter using the
information found in 6.1 Direct Request: Las Vegas Conference on
page 158.
Nov. 1 – Nov. 7 Write a claim letter using the information found in 6.9 Direct Claim:
Headaches From “No Surprise” Offer on page 162.
Nov. 8 – Nov. 14 Read Chapter 9. Compose a progress report following the
instructions found in 9.4 Progress Report: Making Headway
Toward Your Degree on page 260.
Nov. 15 – Nov. 21 Exam 3 Writing exam.
Nov. 18 Last Day to withdraw with a W grade.
Nov. 22 – Nov. 28 Read and review Chapter 13.
Nov. 30 All Grammar/Business Etiquette quizzes must be completed.
Nov. 29 – Dec. 5 Read and review Chapter 14.
Dec. 6 – Dec. 12 Objective Exam 4 covering Chapters 13 and 14.

1. Nature of the course content: Students will read each chapter as assigned by the
instructor and will complete all required course assignments. The activities in this
course include instructor notes over key chapters and students completing letters and
memos using Microsoft Word for writing assignments and exams.
2. Letters/Memos Assignments (30%). Students will have many opportunities to apply
the concepts and effective writing practices prescribed by this course. These writing
projects are from business situations located at the end of each chapter (Guffey
textbook) or information located in designated files on WebCT. Writing assignments
and writing exams must be submitted in Microsoft Word format (.doc or .docx). Writing

assignments and writing exams will be evaluated with numerical grades in these areas:
Format 14 points
Opening 18 points
Body 18 points
Closing 18 points
Spelling 12 points
Grammar/punctuation 10 points
Conciseness 10 points
Total 100 points
3. Writing and Objective Exams (50%). Objective exams will be multiple choice,
matching, and true/false. The objective exams are not open book. At least one
objective exam must be taken at a designated testing site. See Testing Schedule for
details. Writing exam projects will be similar to the writing assignments. The same
grading scale will apply. If all projects are completed on time and the instructor/textbook
suggestions are applied, you will be successful with the writing exams. The writing
exams are open book; you may use all notes and all graded assignments to complete
the exam. Exams dates are listed on the Testing Schedule. Only one exam can be a
make-up exam.
4. Quizzes (20%). Quizzes will cover grammar topics and have assigned due dates.
Textbook and/or instructor notes may be used to take each quiz.
5. Late work. All students are expected to complete assignments by the published
deadlines. If you miss an assignment because of an emergency, you must contact me
as soon as possible. Any late work accepted must be completed within one week of the
due date. Work will not be accepted more than one week after the due date. A
minimum of ten (10) points will be deducted for late work.
6. Evaluation:
Letter/Memo assignments 30%
Writing and Objective Exams 50%
Quizzes 20%
Course Policies
This online course uses a computer and the internet to deliver lessons and for
interaction between the instructor and the student. To be successful, students must
access the course material on a regular basis as assignments will be due weekly.
Students should log in to the course a minimum of once a week. All correspondence for
the course will be delivered through WebCT/Blackboard. It is important that students
not get behind in completing the assignments. A student may withdraw from this course
at anytime until the date listed on the semester schedule. All withdrawals must be
initiated by the student. I will not withdraw a student for failure to participate or
complete assignments.
ADA Statement



Paris Junior College Faculty Karen Powers
Term: 101S Office 903-782-0734
Section: 01 kpowers@parisjc.edu
Course RADR 2235

Course Title Radiologic Technology Seminar (Capstone)
Course Description
A capstone course focusing on the synthesis of professional knowledge, skills, and
attitudes in preparation for professional employment and lifelong learning.
Prerequisite(s): BIOL 2401, RADR 1201, RADR 1311, RADR 1266, RADR 1303, RADR
1213, RADR 1267, RADR 2301, RADR 2336, RADR 2266, RADR 2309, RADR2431,
BIOL 2402, RADR 2305, RADR 2313, RADR 2366, ENGL 1301, MATH 1314, RADR
2217, RADR 2233, RADR 2267, Humanities/Fine Arts/Literature Elective

1. Introduction to Radiologic Science and Patient Care, Adler, Carlton, 4th edition, 2007
ISBN: 978-1-416-03194-9
2. Radiologic Science for Technologists Physics, Biology, & Protection, Bushong, 8th
edition, 2004 ISBN: 0-323-04837-4
3. Merrill’s Atlas of Radiographic Positions & Radiologic Procedures Volume 1, Frank,
Long, & Smith, 11th edition, 2007 ISBN: 978-0-323-04210-9
6. Radiographic Anatomy, Positioning, & Procedures Workbook, Frank, Long, & Smith,
11th edition, 2007 ISBN: (Vol. 1) 978-0-323-04214-7; (Vol. 2) 978-0-323-04215-4
7. Comprehensive Radiographic Pathology, Eisenberg, Johnson, 4th edition, 2007
ISBN: 978-0-323-03624-5
8. Mosby’s Comprehensive Review of Radiology: The Complete Study Guide and
Career Planner, Callaway, 5th edition, 2008 ISBN: 978-0-323-054331
9. Workbook for Comprehensive Radiographic Pathology, Eisenberg, Johnson, 4th
edition, 2007 ISBN: 978-0-323-04219-2
10. Principles of Radiologic Imaging: An Art and A Science, Carlton, Alder, 4th edition,
2006 ISBN: 978-1-4018-7194-9
Program Outcomes
1. Students will be able to effectively evaluate images.
Course # (RADR 2235) – Karen Powers Page 1 of 19

C:\Users\ElaPit\Documents\Syllabi for 101s\Word to convert to PDF\RADR2235 01 101S.doc
2. Students will promote exemplary customer service.
3. Students will be able to adjust to trauma situations using critical thinking.
4. Students will use proper radiation protection.
5. Graduation (retention) rates will meet or exceed JRCERT standards.
6. Graduate will be competent as entry level radiological technologist.
7. Graduates will be employed within 6 months post graduation.
8. Graduates will pass the ARRT exam on the 1st attempt.
9. Graduates will purse further education within 6 months post graduation.
Course Outcomes
1. Synthesize professional knowledge, skills, and attitudes;
2. Demonstrate entry level competencies for professional employment;
3. Demonstrate skills for lifelong learning.
Learning Objectives
1. Demonstrate knowledge of writing a Professional Resume’.
2. Knowledge of Interview Process.
3. Knowledge of Employer Expectations.
4. Prepare student to take the registry.
5. Demonstrate knowledge of Radiation Protection.
6. Demonstrate knowledge of Equipment Operation and Quality Control.
7. Demonstrate knowledge of Image Production and Evaluation.
8. Demonstrate knowledge of Radiographic Procedures.
9. Demonstrate knowledge of Patient Care and Education.
Course Schedule
Week 1: Orientation to Class, Exam 1
Week 2: Equipment Operation and Quality Control
Week 3: Exam 2
Week 4: Image Production and Evaluation
Week 5: Image Production and Evaluation continued
Week 6: Exam 3
Week 7: Career Paths, Writing Résumé, Interviewing, Employment
Week 8: Radiographic Procedures – Anatomy
Week 9: Radiographic Procedures continued
Week 10: Exam 4
Week 11: Radiation Protection
Week 12: Exam 5
Week 13: Patient Care & Education
Week 14: Exam 6
Week 15: Evaluations, Review
Week 16: Final Exam

Complete all objectives satisfactorily.

Grading Criteria
In order to pass RADR 2235, the student must achieve a final average grade of 70 or
higher.
Attendance 5%
Resume’ 5%
Assignments 25%
Quizzes 5%
Mock Exams 40%
Final Exam 20%
exams will be an alternate examination.

90-100 points - A
80-89 points - B
70-79 points - C
60-69 points - D
< 60 points - F
Course Policies
Radiology Technology Program Technical Standards
CATEGORY STANDARD EXAMPLES
Critical Critical thinking ability Able to perform and interpret data, and
Thinking sufficient to exercise respond with appropriate interventions.
sound judgment.
Analytical Reasoning skills The ability to work alone, deal with
Thinking sufficient to perform abstract and concrete variables, define
deductive/inductive problems and make correct, independent
thinking. decisions.
Interpersonal Interpersonal abilities Ability to accept and carry out
sufficient to interact with responsibilities in high stress situations.
individuals, families and Ability to work with patients and families
groups respecting social, as well as the healthcare team in
cultural and spiritual stressful situations.
diversity.
Communication Communication abilities Follows verbal and/or written instructions.
sufficient for interaction Must be able to communicate verbally
with others in oral and and in writing patient responses to
written form. therapeutic care. Able to consult with
other healthcare providers in a
professional manner.
Hearing Auditory ability sufficient Able to hear alarms, bells, telephones,

for physical monitoring blood pressures, and normal
and assessment of client conversation
health care needs.
Visual Visual ability sufficient for Must have near and far visual acuity,
accurate observation and depth perception, and color vision in
performance of care. order to read and document on patient
charts/flow-graphic sheets, reading a
thermometer and monitors. Also, the
ability to draw up (using syringes)
medications, and monitor skin color.
Tactile Tactile ability sufficient Ability to collect data, handle and
for physical monitoring assemble instrument sets, gown, glove,
and assessment of open supplies utilizing sterile technique.
health care needs.
Fine and gross Fine and gross motor Perform vital signs, CPR, transportation
motor skills abilities sufficient to of patients, manipulation of equipment,
provide a full range of and patient care necessary to the care of
safe and effective care the patient.
activities, including
psychomotor skills.
Physical Physical strength and Walking to and from departments, rooms,
strength, stamina sufficient to standing for extended periods of time.
endurance and stand for extended Assisting in transporting, lifting and
mobility periods of time, move transferring patients and equipment.
from place to place and Ability to lift and/or occasionally transfer
to maneuver to perform up to and over 100 pounds.
various activities.
Latex Warning: The use of latex / latex based products may exist in health care
standard precautions and in environments such as, but not limited to, Health
Occupations classrooms and training labs, hospitals, long term facilities, laboratories,
clinical areas, and medical/dental offices. Individuals with latex sensitivity or allergies
should seek expert advice from their health care provider so that they may receive
information to make an informed decision regarding their exposure to latex in the health
care field.
REGISTRATION AND PROGRESSION

Students majoring in the Radiology Technology Program will enroll in the same manner
as other Paris Junior College students. The Division Chair of the program or his/her
academic advisor will assist the student as needed in scheduling courses.
Radiology Technology courses must follow the sequence as given in the college
catalog.
Each student will have a Radiology Technology degree plan prepared in consultation
with his/her academic advisor or the Division Chair/or Program Coordinator of

Radiology Technology Program. It is the responsibility of each student to see that
he/she progresses through his/her degree plan as outlined, or arrange appropriate
deviation from this plan with the Division Chair/or Program Coordinator of Radiology
Technology Program.
In order to continue and progress in the Radiology Technology Program the student's
work must remain satisfactory in the following areas:
1. Maintain a 2.0 average in total course work.
2. Completion of required academic courses.
3. Maintain 2.0 or better grades in each of the Radiology Technology Program
courses.
4. Evidence of satisfactory clinical performance at the end of each semester based
on the criteria for the semester.
Withdrawal, Probation, and Dismissal Policies

Withdrawal
A student may withdraw from a Radiology Technology course by using the procedure
outlined in the Paris Junior College Catalog following counsel with his/her instructors
and/or the Division Chair/or Program Coordinator of the Radiology Technology
Program. After withdrawing from a Radiology Technology course, a student must
reapply for admission to the Radiology Technology Program in order to enroll in any
subsequent Radiology Technology course.
The student must initiate the withdrawal procedure with the instructor prior to the
dropped Radiology Technology course.

Contract for Improvement
Students who have unsatisfactory classroom/clinical performance will have a student
conference scheduled, be given written notification and a plan for improvement will be
completed. If the student does not show improvement, the probation status will be
implemented.

Probationary criteria will be written in the form of behavioral/clinical objectives and
recorded in the document entitled "Report of Unsatisfactory Progress/Probation Form".
A time frame for review of status will be specified. The terms of probation will be
discussed with the student and validated by the signatures of the course instructor and
the student.
At the end of the specified term of probation, the student's status is reviewed by the

program faculty. This review will be recorded on the document entitled, "Report of
Status Review". If the probation criteria has been met, the student's probation is lifted.
Failure to meet probationary criteria may result in failure of the course at the faculty
team’s decision. Probation will be contained within each course.
Dismissal
student shows gross negligence, unsafe care, lack of personal or professional integrity,
breach of patient confidentiality, or commits a criminal act.
"Unsafe care" is defined as any act of omission or commission which places the
client(s) in jeopardy of negative changes in health status.
Personal integrity as well as concern for the welfare of patients are personal attributes
that are absolutely essential for those entering the Radiology Technology profession.
Grounds for Immediate Dismissal From Program

A student may be subject to immediate dismissal from the Radiology Technology
Program and failure of the course in the following situations:
a. Failure to maintain patient safety resulting in injury to the patient.

c. The practice of academic dishonesty such as cheating on preparation for clinical,
and on tests or written assignments (both parties), making false entries in a record.
d. The use of alcohol, illegal drugs, or misuse of prescription or any other drugs during
school activities or on school property, or reporting to class/clinical under the
e. Appropriating, in connection with the practice of Radiology Technology, medication,
supplies, equipment, or personal items of the patient/client, employer, or any other
person or entity. (This includes accepting remuneration, gifts, etc.)

STEP 1. Dismissal from the program will be initiated by the faculty and program
coordinator with prior notification of the Division Chair of Health Occupations. If
the Division Chair is absent, the Vice President of Workforce Education must
be notified prior to dismissal.
STEP 2. The program coordinator and instructor will meet with the student to inform
him/her that they are initiating the procedure. If the program coordinator is the
instructor, another faculty member will be present.
STEP 3. If the student wishes to contest this decision, he/she must file a Request of
Grievance Conference with the Program Coordinator. (Appendix XVI).

Grievance Procedure
ways: A student may formally express dissatisfaction with his/her progress in the
Radiology Technology Program. Grade disputes should be resolved at the lowest level
possible (i.e., the instructor and student). Recognizing that this is not always possible,
the following procedure has been adopted as policy for resolving grade and course
progress disputes. The steps have been defined to facilitate resolution at the lowest
level and in that interest; the order of steps will at no time be violated. The grievance
procedure must be initiated within two (2) working days of the incident by which time the
student must initiate a "Request of Grievance Conference" with the program coordinator
or Division Chair of Health Occupations if the team leader is not available.
faculty and the program coordinator. If a satisfactory decision still has not been
reached, the student may request to meet with the Division Chair of the Health
Occupations within five (5) working days.
Division Chair within five (5) working days, the student may request an
appointment with representative members of the faculty-as-a-whole within five
(5) working days. The faculty vote will be taken by ballot and tallied by the
Division Chair and a PJC non-Radiology Technology faculty/staff member.
Failure will require a two-thirds majority vote of the faculty. The conference will
be recorded on tape and on a Grievance Conference Report form, a copy of
which goes to the student and the original placed in the Confidential File.
appointment within five (5) working days with the Vice President of Workforce
Access to Confidential File

The CONFIDENTIAL FILE will be kept in the office of the Division Chair of Health
Occupations. Access to the file will be controlled by the Division Chair and limited to the
course faculty directly involved in the particular grievance, and the Vice President of
Workforce Education.
The procedures in this policy have been set up to assure confidentiality and a full
hearing of the student's position.
Attendance Policies
Radiology Technology students will follow the absence and tardy policies of Paris Junior
College as discussed in the school catalog, with the following modifications because of
the nature of Radiology Technology:
1. During inclement weather on clinical/classroom days, the student must make

his/her own decision regarding safety for travel to school. A student who decides

not to attend clinical/class because of inclement weather will receive an absence
2. Any student arriving at the clinical area later than 30 minutes will be given an
absence. Students arriving 30 minutes or less at the clinical area will receive a
tardy. Students missing 60 minutes or less of classroom during a given day will
receive a tardy. Students missing more than 60 minutes will be given an
any point during the day. Students may miss up to 60 minutes of clinical and
receive a tardy, with the exception of the 30 minutes arrival rule (i.e. the student
who arrives 15 minutes late to clinical and leaves 45 minutes early from post-
conference would miss 60 minutes or less and receive a tardy).
4. Permission to enter the clinical/classroom will be left to the discretion of the
clinical/classroom instructor.
A. Students must demonstrate accountability. If a student reports to
clinical/classroom with an illness which may pose a threat to others, he/she
will be dismissed from the clinical area and will receive a clinical absence.
5. Students who are absent will be required to make up the lab/clinical hours.
Division Chair of Health Occupations, to discuss absences, and if needed, meet
with the extenuating circumstance committee. The student must provide
supporting evidence to validate the necessity of the absence.
The Extenuating Circumstance Committee

Extenuating Circumstances Committee composed of student, student advocate if
desired, one Radiology faculty and/or course instructor faculty, PJC/staff person,
program coordinator and/or Division Chair of Health Occupations.
1. Students missing any time after two (2) absences per semester must, upon
return to school, make a request to the program coordinator or the Division
Chair of Health Occupations, to meet with the Extenuating Circumstances
Committee. The student must provide supporting evidence to validate the
necessity of the absence. The student may request no more than two (2)
extenuating absence meetings per semester. Any further absences will result in
failure of the program, or withdrawal if prior to the drop date.
A. Automobile maintenance problems, traffic violation occurrences, or other
preventable occurrences are generally not considered extenuating
circumstances.
2. The faculty calling the meeting will write the minutes of the meeting, with copies
for the student, program coordinator, and minutes notebook.
3. An extenuating circumstance may be recorded in writing without a face-to-face
meeting with the student and members of the committee if all members agree
on the circumstances presented by the faculty responsible for the meeting.
4. A physician's physical condition statement may be required to return to clinical.

5 A 2/3 majority vote of the committee will be required for the student request of
extenuating circumstances to be granted.
6. When the decision is made by the committee to allow the student to continue,
the committee may then review other absences or tardies to determine if a
contingency plan should be formulated by the student to help prevent further
time lost.
7. If the Extenuating Circumstance Committee does not agree to allow the student
to continue, this will result in failure of the course.

When a student must be late or absent from the clinical/classroom, that individual must
notify the clinical area or classroom instructor by telephone. If the assignment is in a
hospital, the agency must be notified as soon as possible.
The student is required to be present for all scheduled exams. If an exam is missed, the
student will be required to contact the instructor of absence, and schedule the exam.
The exam must be taken by or upon the first class day upon his/her return to class. The
make-up exam may be an alternative exam.
If all students have taken the test on the scheduled date, the test review may be
performed immediately after the test; however, test grades will not be available until the
next class day. Grades will not be given over the telephone.
Daily grades/pop quizzes may be given at any time during the class periods, and may
consist of take-home assignments or study guides. The daily grade/pop quizzes will be
related to classroom content. No make-up daily grade/pop quiz will be given to a
student who is absent or tardy when a daily grade/pop quiz is given. A student who
misses a daily grade/pop quiz will receive a grade of zero (0) for that quiz.
A student may withdraw with a “W” in any Radiology course if prior to the drop date.
Clinical And/Or Campus Laboratory Grades

In RADR 1266, 1267, 2266, 2366, 2267, and 2367, grades for the clinical and/or
laboratory experience will be based on the number of mastered competencies, an
average of the clinical instructor’s evaluations for the semester, and attendance. The
clinical grade is separate from the classroom grade. A student who withdraws or
receives a failing grade in a didactic course will be required to repeat both the didactic
and the clinical course for the specified semester.

Incomplete or "X" Grades
Should a student receive an incomplete or "X" grade in a Radiology Technology course
or a concurrent support course, and this "X" is not removed by the end of two weeks
into the next semester, he/she may not continue in the Radiology Technology Program.
Student Conferences and Evaluations

Student conferences and evaluations will be held at least twice during any major
grading period (or more if a situation warrants). It is at this time that the student will be
told of his/her weak and strong points. There will be a complete set of records and data
kept on each student. Both the counselor and the student will sign all conferences and
evaluations.
Academic Counseling Services

Either the student or the instructor, or both, may initiate conferences regarding learning
and/or progress in a course. Sometimes concerns or problems of a personal nature
interfere with student learning. When these problems occur, the student should initiate,
or be encouraged to initiate, counseling. Such academic counseling is considered a
crucial part of the learning experience. The student development center (903-782-0426)
is staffed with professional counselors who are available to assist students.
CAMPUS LABORATORY EXPERIENCE

The Radiology Technology laboratories are located at the O. W. Robinson Building,
1128 Clarksville Street, Paris, Texas, and within the Workforce Training Center building,
Room 1026, and are considered to be a learning resource center for the student's use.
Within the Paris Junior College laboratory /media area (located in the Workforce
Training Center), the student will find a current selection of journals and a complete
selection of audio-visual materials (located in the Health Occupations Office) to
complement learning objectives. Students may also be required to use the Mike
Rheudasil Learning Center. Occasionally classroom instructors will refer students to
audio-visual materials and computer-assisted instruction (CAI). These will be used as
enrichment tools to be reviewed on the students' own time, and/or during assigned
laboratory times.
The Radiology Technology laboratories have an x-ray room. As this area is considered
a learning resource area, it is utilized in the same manner and environment as a library.
The expectations of keeping noise levels down and maintaining an environment
conducive to learning will be expected. It is required that the students take advantage of
these learning opportunities.
The Paris Junior College Learning Resource Center has been designed for student use.
There are a variety of learning experiences available for varied course work.
LABORATORY SKILL EVALUATION

A laboratory skill conference is a scheduled discussion of theory and/or practice of

psychomotor skills in the laboratory setting. These skill conferences are instructor led
with discussion, demonstration, and practice sessions. Students are encouraged to
practice in pairs. These conferences can be of several hours in duration, and are
usually held during clinical laboratory time.
Laboratory Skill Evaluation

While practice time does vary, it must be emphasized that no student should present
himself/herself for skill evaluation unless he/she has practiced at least once. If practice
time is used, every student should be able to master every skill in the course. No
student should present themselves for evaluation until the skill can be performed
according to the skill evaluation tool.
Time frames for completion of skills will be established by the instructor. At the
completion of each evaluation period the competency log form will be updated.
Guidelines for Campus Laboratory Use
1. The laboratory is available for student use during specified hours.
2. Each student is responsible for replacing supplies and/or equipment in the proper
place after use.
3. Any items which are defective should be reported to the faculty. This is to assure that
as many items as possible may be kept available for student use.
4. Required skill evaluations must be completed within the time designated by the
instructors.
5. There will be no smoking or visitors in the laboratory.
6. Misuse of the laboratories, equipment and/or materials will be documented and
placed in the student's file.
Lab Safety Protocol

1. Do not use damaged electrical cords or equipment. Report damaged equipment to
the faculty.
2. Use only manikins or fellow students for practice for radiographic simulations.
3. Use blood and body fluid standard precautions in the lab and clinical areas.
4. Equipment may be cleaned as instructed by the faculty. Proper use of these
substances are to be followed according to the manufacturer's directions as noted on
the label for each agent with respect to directions for safe use, product warnings and
precautions. READ LABELS.
5. Practice of any invasive procedure is to be done only with manikins in the lab. This
includes procedures such as: insertion of any tube and injections.
6. To reinforce utilization of Standard Precautions in the actual practice setting, students
should at all times use protective apparatus such as gloves, goggles, gowns, masks,
etc., as appropriate when working in the lab.
7. Report any accident or injury to instructor immediately. Campus security is to be
notified in emergency situations or injury. A PJC accident report must be completed
and filed on the same day. Forms may be obtained from the Health Occupations
Department.
CLINICAL EXPERIENCE

Clinical experience may be scheduled at any time during the 24-hour day on any of the
seven days of the week and may be scheduled in out-lying facilities to assure a
satisfactory clinical experience.
CPR certification, immunizations and any required medical screenings, must be current
prior to entering any semester clinical experiences.
Uniforms will consist of: 2nd year student-Caribbean blue top and pants; 1st year
student-Caribbean blue top and white pants. Solid white shirt may be worn under the
top. Shoes will be predominately white.
Documentation of the clinical experience is recorded in the Student Journal.
Instructors may be contacted through the Health Occupations Department Office (903-
782-0734).
Instructors will be accessible to students during assigned clinical experiences. It is the

student's responsibility to seek instructor assistance when needed or in cases where the
student is uncertain about his/her ability to perform a particular procedure.
Invasive Procedures
The student may only give contrast mediums under direct supervision. The student
may not perform any invasive procedures unless permission is given by the clinical
instructor.
Documented Trends of Unsafe Conduct and/or Practice

Identified behaviors of unsafe conduct and/or clinical practice will be documented by the
Student Evaluation Form. Unsafe behavior will be analyzed by the faculty team to
determine whether or not a consistent trend in such behavior is identifiable.
Particular attention will be given to behaviors which compromise patient safety and
welfare, and demonstrate unprofessional conduct.
When an unsafe behavior trend is identified, the student will be placed on clinical
probation.
The student will be given specific criteria, in writing, for removal of probation. Failure to
comply with the terms of probation will result in failure of the course.
If an unsafe behavior is severe enough to jeopardize patient safety, the student will be
placed on probation and/or could be immediately dismissed with a “F” from the program
by faculty team decision, whether or not an unsafe trend has been identified.
Identifiable trends in the following behaviors are some examples which may constitute
unsafe practice resulting in clinical probation.
UNSAFE AND UNPROFESSIONAL CLINICAL PRACTICE DEFINED

Unsafe clinical practice shall be deemed to be behaviors demonstrated by the student
which threaten or violate the physical, biological, or emotional safety of the patient

assigned to her/his care.
The following examples, which may serve as guidelines for the student's understanding
of unsafe clinical practices. Examples are not inclusive.
PHYSICAL SAFETY: unsafe behaviors: inappropriate use of side rails, wheelchairs,

positioning straps and equipment, lack of proper protection of the patient which
potentiates falls, lacerations, burns, etc.
BIOLOGICAL SAFETY: unsafe behaviors: fails to recognize errors in aseptic technique,

attends clinical site while ill, performs technical actions without appropriate supervision,
fails to seek help when needed, etc.
EMOTIONAL SAFETY: unsafe behaviors: threatens patient, make patient fearful,

provides patient with inappropriate or incorrect information, fails to seek help when
needed, demonstrates unstable emotional behaviors.
Unprofessional practice shall be deemed to be behaviors demonstrated by the student

which are inappropriate to the student-instructor, student-personnel, or student-patient
interactions which may be taken to be unsafe practice or to reflect negatively upon the
Radiology Technology Program or Paris Junior College.
Examples of unprofessional practice (not inclusive): verbal or non-verbal language,

actions, or voice inflection which compromise rapport or working relations with patients,
family members and/or working relations with clinical affiliates, or constitute violations of
legal or ethical standards.
Trends of unsafe performance will require documentation on the Student Conference

Form which is signed by the student during counseling with the instructor.
Documentation becomes a part of the student's permanent file.
Clinical Forms
The student will record procedures observed in their clinical area in Student Journals
and have it initialed by the clinical instructor. The instructor who observes the students'
performance will evaluate their performance utilizing the Clinical Instructor Evaluation of
Student Form.
Progress Analysis and Summative Evaluation

Students will receive a progress report midway through the semester and at the end of
the semester. If areas of improvement are identified during any of the rotations, written
notification will be given to the student identifying the problem area(s) and guidelines for
improvement and/or removal of probationary status.
DRESS CODE
Uniform
1. The uniform will be worn in the clinical area. The uniform should always be clean and

neat.
2. Complete uniform includes: 2nd year student-Caribbean blue top and pants, 1st year
student-Caribbean blue top and white pants; a watch with a second hand, school
identification badge, film badge and lead markers. Appropriate shoes will be
discussed at clinical orientation.
a. Shoes should be clean, comfortable, closed, conservative, and must be
predominately white.
b. Scrub tops for women will be buttoned at all times.
c. If a shirt is worn under the scrub top, it must be solid white (short or long sleeve)
and the length can not be longer than the scrub top.
d. Lab jackets must be solid white only.
3. If a student’s uniform is incomplete and does not meet the above standards, it is at
the discretion of the instructor/coordinator to dismiss that student from the clinical
experience resulting in a clinical absence.
4. Jewelry worn with the student uniform will be limited to a small pair of pierced ear
studs worn in ear lobe. Only one set of ear studs may be worn. No neck jewelry may
be worn with the student uniform. Only one ring may be worn.
Clinical Appearance
The following should be observed when in uniform or lab coat.
1. Cleanliness and neat personal appearance are essential.
2. Hair should be neat, clean, off the shoulder, and worn in a conservative style that
doesn't hang in the face. Hair should be secured so that it doesn't present a hazard
to asepsis. Men should be clean-shaven with sideburns not below the ear lobes. A
neatly clipped mustache and/or beard will be allowed.
3. Fingernails should be clean and short and unpolished. Artificial fingernails of any
type are not allowed.
4. A moderate, conservative amount of make-up may be worn.
5. Undergarments should be unobtrusive under uniforms.
6. Use of perfumes, colognes, or scented lotions are not allowed.
7. Gum may not be chewed while students are in clinical area.
setting.
9. Students in uniform may smoke in designated employee smoking areas. Students
must adhere to all agency policies regarding smoking.
10. When in uniform, all uniform guidelines apply.
11. Students must adhere to the facility code when the facility’s code is more restrictive
than the student dress code.
Electronic Devices
1. Student may use quiet, laptop computer or tape recorder for lecture note taking.
Students are not allowed to tape/record any patient information. If patient information
is recorded, disciplinary action may be taken.
2. No cellular telephones or beepers are to be visually seen or heard in the classroom,
laboratory, or clinical areas.
If policy is broken:

1st occurrence: written warning
2nd occurrence: probation
3rd occurrence: dismissed from the program
Program Policy
25 Texas Administrative Code 289.231
The 25 TAC 289.231 administered by the Texas Department of Health requires that:
1. A separate radiation monitoring device will be worn for each and every site/location
while engaging in duties of employment in which exposure to ionizing radiation is
possible.
2. The Paris Junior College OSL dosimetry badge must be worn only when conducting
oneself as a PJC student, AND a different badge (supplied by the employer) is to be
worn when working around ionizing radiation while not functioning in the capacity of
a PJC student.
3. Each student is required to inform the Program Division Chair or Clinical Coordinator
in writing when employment in a radiation area begins and ends.
4. The employer is supplied with each student’s radiation dosimetry reports. It is the
student’s responsibility to supply PJC with radiation dosimetry reports from their
place of employment.
5. Cumulative records will be maintained by both parties and supplied to the student at
the end of affiliation with either party. (Monthly film badge reports in student file.)
HEALTH POLICIES AND PHYSICAL CONDITION

Since good health is essential for the radiology technologist, the following policies have
been adopted:
1. A physical examination, including a negative chest x-ray or negative TB skin
test, serology, CBC, and urinalysis are required prior to first class day.
2. Tetanus immunization should have been administered in the past ten (10)
years and must be kept up to date. Rubella or Titer (all ages) must have
had at least one dose since 12 months of age or recent serologic
confirmation validating immunity. Measles (those born after January 1, 1957,
only) must have two doses since 12 months of age. The two doses must be
at least 30 days apart. (History of illness may satisfy one vaccine
requirement, or a present positive serum titer will satisfy all requirements).
Mumps (those born after January 1, 1957, only) must have at least one
dose since 12 months of age or history of illness or recent serologic
validation of immunity. Hepatitis B (all ages) a complete series or proof of
immunity prior to beginning direct client care. Varicella: (all ages) – One
dose of vaccine is required for students who received this vaccine prior to 13
years of age. Two doses are required for students who were not vaccinated
before their 13th birthday. A history of varicella illness (chickenpox) validated
by the student’s parent/guardian, physician or serologic confirmation of
varicella immunity is acceptable in lieu of the vaccine.
3. Paris Junior College and the affiliating agencies are not responsible for any
accident, infectious contact, injury, illness or exacerbation of illness incurred
by a student during the time the student is enrolled in the Radiology

Technology Program.
4. The student who is concerned about exposure to infectious disease is
advised to seek counseling from his/her private physician regarding risks and
precautions appropriate for health care workers.
5. Students with a noncontagious illness or injury may be admitted to, or
choose to continue in health occupations courses. If so, the student must
assume the risk that absenteeism or inability to perform duties related to
learning objectives and health care delivery can result in the necessity of
discontinuing in the program. It is the student's responsibility to obtain and
provide to the instructor continual written permission from the student's
physician.
6. Students are to follow standard (Universal) precautions and practice
preventive measures to maintain a health status.
7. Latex Warning: The use of latex/latex based products may exist in health
care standard precautions and in environments such as, but not limited to,
Health Science classrooms and training labs, hospitals, nursing care
facilities, laboratories, clinical areas, and medical/dental offices. Individuals
with latex sensitivity or allergies should seek expert advice from their health
care provider so that they may receive information to make an informed
decision regarding their exposure to latex in the health care field.
Radiation Monitoring or Dosimetry Device Policy

The Paris Junior College Radiology Program utilizes Optically Stimulated Luminescence
(OSL) dosimetry badges provided by Landauer Company. Students will ALWAYS wear
the radiation badge while in clinical sites. Failure to wear the dosimetry badge is a
breach of the dress code.
The dosimetry badge provided by Paris Junior College will not be worn during outside
clinical hours. Students employed in Radiology areas must be provided a dosimetry
badge by the employer. Dosimetry will be exchanged on a monthly basis.
Dosimetry reports will be maintained in the program coordinator’s office. A copy of the
dosimetry report will be placed in the student’s permanent file.
Tampering with other students OSL dosimetry badge will result in dismissal from the
program
Failure of the student to exchange the badge (regardless of it being lost or forgotten) will
result on a lowering of the Clinical Grade by one full letter grade at the end of the
semester. Three (3) incidences of lost or forgotten OSLs will result in dismissal from the
program. If the badge is lost or stolen a written explanation must be furnished to the
Program Coordinator. This written explanation will be maintained in the students file.
If the radiation report for a student is excessive, the student will be counseled to
determine the cause of the excessive exposure. The student will be placed in a low
radiation work area until the problem is resolved.

With Texas being an agreement state with the NRC, the radiation protection aspect of
the radiology program complies with 25 Texas Administrative Code 289.231 – General
Provisions and Standards for Protection Against Machine-Produced Radiation.
ALARA – the student will practice ALARA (As Low As Reasonably Achievable).
Excessive Exposure Report

If a radiation report for a student is excessive, the student will be counseled to
determine the cause of the excessive exposure. If the report continues to show an
increase in exposure, the student will be placed in a low radiation work area until the
problem is resolved.
Guidelines for this policy come from 25 Texas Administrative Code 289.231, General
Provisions and Standards for Protection Against Machine Produced Radiation.
A report will be made by the program coordinator and will include as a minimum:
1. the extent of exposure
2. the cause of the elevated exposure
3. corrective steps taken or planned to ensure against a recurrence, including
the schedule for achieving conformance with applicable limits, and associated
conditions.
This report will include the individual’s name, social security number, and date of birth.
At completion, this report will be placed in the student's permanent record.
An Excessive Exposure is any exposure in excess of 10% of the annual limits is

subsection (m) (1) of 25 Texas Administrative Code 289.231, pg 14.
An Excessive Exposure for a declared pregnant woman is any exposure in excess of

0.1 rem.
Film Badge Policy

The Paris Junior College Radiology Program provides all radiology students dosimetry
badges with the Optically Stimulated Luminescence (OSL) technology provided by
Landauer.
These OSL dosimetry devices are on a monthly basis.
Students receive their badges in the second semester of the program prior to attending
clinical rotation.
Student dosimetry reports are kept in the program coordinator’s office and a copy of the
student’s individual report will be placed into the student’s permanent file.

Pregnancy
Students have the option of informing the program Division Chair, in writing, of a
pregnancy. It is recommended that the student inform the Program Coordinator and/or
the Clinical Coordinator immediately upon learning of the pregnancy so that the student
may be counseled regarding her and her baby’s radiation protection. The student is
encouraged to read the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission Guide 8.13 “Instructions
Concerning Prenatal Radiation Exposure”. A dosimetry badge will be ordered for the
fetus and student’s clinical experience may be modified from any rotation in
which a heavy fluoroscopy load exists until after the first trimester. Pregnant students
will receive no more than an 0.5 rem of radiation exposure during the entire gestation
period. The student MUST provide a written statement from her physician stating that
the student may participate in all radiologic procedures. If the physician will not release
the student, she will be REQUIRED to withdraw from the program.
The pregnant student will be required to function as a normal, healthy student in ALL
assigned radiographic areas, including lifting patients, and transportation. No “light duty
assignments” will be made. If her and/or her physician’s opinions differ from this policy,
the student will be required to withdraw from the program. All female students will sign
an agreement of understanding concerning pregnancy and radiation protection prior to
acceptance. The agreement simply explains this policy and the prospective student
understands the policy.
If the student does not inform the program of her pregnancy in writing, the student will
be considered to not be pregnant regardless of overt signs, the above measures cannot
be taken. These measures are all for the benefit of the student and the baby. Without
the cooperation, the approved, usual and standard safety precautions cannot be
implemented.
In order for the student to maintain a good standing in the program after the baby’s
birth, the pregnant student must begin “banking” clinical hours so that she may have a
maximum of 6 weeks of absences from the Practicum course. The student will supply
her class schedule (clinical and academic) and a written plan for accumulating bank
hours to the clinical coordinator. The student may schedule no more than forty
hours per week of TOTAL classroom, clinical and bank hours. This schedule will
need to be revised each semester according to the student’s schedule and must be
approved by the clinical coordinator. The “bank hours” must be scheduled only at times
in which proper supervision is available. Students will not receive credit for time
spent at clinicals that were not scheduled. All rules of conduct and attendance will
apply while the student is accumulating bank hours. Bank and make-up times are all
subject to the same rules as regular clinical time. Students who fail to bank adequate
hours to cover post partum absences (including in the event of c-section birth) will not
be allowed to return to clinicals, and will be allowed to re-enter in the same semester in
the following year if space is available.

A dosimetry badge will be ordered for the fetus, and the student will be required to wear
it at waist level under the lead apron. The cost of the fetal badge must be paid for by
the student once the pregnancy is declared. The student will attend classes on campus
two- (2) weeks post partum and begin Practicum six- (6) weeks post partum. A letter
from her physician allowing this will be required. The student may return earlier if her
physician consents. The student should not expect nor receive any other
considerations or special treatment from the program. The student’s radiation
exposure will be continuously monitored to insure that the maximum permissible dose of
500 mr is not exceeded. If the student exceeds the maximum permissible dose, she will
be withdrawn from the program. All attendance, absence, and make-up policies will be
equally enforced. All declared pregnant students must sign the Student Declared
Pregnancy Form. (
Criminal Background Checks/Urine Drug Screen

Students may be required to submit to drug screen tests and criminal background
checks as required by clinical facilities. Paris Junior College will follow practice and
procedures of each facility regarding results. Students with positive drug screens will not
be allowed to attend clinical resulting in failure of the course. Students with positive
background checks will follow the practice and procedures of each facility being utilized
by PJC Radiology Technology students.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S Office 903-782-0734
Course RADR 2266

Course Title Practicum (Field Experience)
Course Description
developed by the employer, college, and the student.
1213, RADR 1267, RADR 2301, RADR 2336

ISBN: 978-1-416-03194-9
6 Principles of Radiographic Imaging: An Art and a Science, 4th edition, 2006
ISBN: 978-1-4018-7194-9
7. Merrill’s Pocket Guide to Radiography, Frank, Long, & Smith, 6th edition, 2007
ISBN: 978-0-323-04209-3
Program Outcomes

Course Outcomes
1. Apply the theory, concepts, and skills involving specialized materials, tools,
equipment, procedures, regulations, laws, and interactions within and among
political, economic, environmental, social, and legal systems associated with the
teamwork skills, and appropriate written and verbal communication skills using the
Learning Objectives
Clinical Practice
1. Exercise the priorities required in daily clinical practice.
2. Execute imaging procedures under the appropriate level of supervision.
3. Adhere to concepts of team practice that focus on organizational theories, roles of
team members and conflict resolution.
4. Adapt to changes and varying clinical situations.
5. Support patient-centered clinically effective service for all patients regardless of age,
gender, disability, special needs, ethnicity or culture.
6. Integrate the use of appropriate and effective written, oral and nonverbal
communication with patients, the public and members of the health care team.
7. Choose patient and family education strategies appropriate to the comprehension
level of patient/family.
8. Manage interactions with the patient and family in a manner that provides the
desired psychosocial support.
9. Evaluate the patient’s status and condition before, during and following the
radiologic procedure to demonstrate competence in assessment skills.
10. Demonstrate skills in assessment and evaluation of psychological and physical
changes in the patient’s condition and carry out appropriate actions.
11. Examine gender, cultural, age and socioeconomic factors that influence patient
compliance with procedures, diagnosis, treatment and follow-up of patients.
12. Adapt procedures to meet age-specific, disease-specific and cultural needs of
patients.
13. Assess the patient and record patient histories.
14. Assess patient using the ABCs of CPR and demonstrate basic life support
procedures.
15. Respond appropriately to patient emergencies.
16. Interpret patient side effects and/or complications of radiologic procedures, contrast
administration and take appropriate actions.
17. Document care in the patient’s record.
18. Apply standard and transmission-based precautions.
19. Apply the appropriate medical asepsis and sterile technique.
20. Prepare the technologies and methodologies for the performance of radiologic
procedures.
21. Demonstrate competency in the principles of radiation protection standards to
include time, distance shielding and radiation monitoring.

Course Schedule
The radiology student will be exposed to a variety of clinical facilities during rotating
experiences throughout practicum courses in the program.
The following 16 weeks will include orientation, major and minor facilities, clinic /
doctor’s offices, and final evaluations.
Orientation – 1 week
Major Facility – 5 weeks
Minor Facility – 4 weeks
Clinic / Doctor’s Office – 3 weeks
Final Evaluation – 1 week

Grading Criteria
In order to pass RADR 2266, the student must meet the minimum requirements of the
designated competencies in each column in order to receive the competency points and
the additional points are based on an average of the clinical instructor’s evaluation
forms and attendance.
1. Course grade will depend on the number of points in each of the following
categories:
Competencies
Patient Care
Professionalism
Knowledge/Skills
Attendance
Points are based on the number of clinical competencies in each column.

Total Total = Points
st nd
Competencies: 1 Col. 2 Col.
(Totals must >36 >24 49
meet criteria >34 >22 39
of all columns.) =>32 =>20 29
<32 <20 Fail Semester
Points based on an average of all clinical instructors’ evaluation forms:

Patient Care: 20 = 15
(Total scores 16-19 = 13
of section.) 12-15 = 12
<12 = 0
Professionalism: 25 = 15
of section.) 15-19 = 12
<15 = 0

Knowledge/Skills: 35 = 16
of section.) 21-27 = 12
<21 = 0
Attendance: 0 Absence = 5
1 Absence = 4
2 Absences = 3
3 Absences = 2
4 Absences = 1
>4 Absences = 0
Grading Scale: Depending on number of competencies completed, evaluations, clinical

participation, submission of time sheets, journals, summary logs, and clinical
discussions.
The student is responsible for turning in competencies to the clinical coordinator on a

weekly basis and competencies not submitted within 7 days will not be accepted. All
failed competencies must be turned in each week or 5 points will be taken off the
student’s final grade. After the 3rd incident, it may be grounds for dismissal.
During weekly clinical discussions, the student is responsible for bringing the following
items: competencies, time sheets, and journals with clinical preceptor’s signatures. If
the student does not have each of the items, including signatures, then two (2) points
will be deducted from final grade. The weekly clinical discussion will require the student
to verbally discuss procedures that they assisted, observed, and performed during the
prior week to their classmates for group discussion.
The students’ evaluations will be reviewed. Any problems that might have occurred will
be discussed during clinical discussion so that the whole group may benefit from the
evaluations. Twice a semester the student and instructor will meet to discuss individual
evaluations. There will be a clinical discussion weekly.
Students who have unsatisfactory progress in clinical will be given written notification,
put on probation, and a plan for remediation will be completed. Continued
unsatisfactory progress after remediation may result in dismissal from program.
Evaluations that do not meet minimum requirements are deemed unsatisfactory
progress in the course.
To have satisfactory progress, students must have the following by Midsemester:
Column 1 ≥ 32 competencies
Column 2 ≥ 20 competencies
90-100 points - A
80-89 points - B
70-79 points - C

60-69 points - D
< 60 points - F
Course Policies
sound judgment.
diversity.
health care needs.
health care needs.

psychomotor skills.
various activities.
care field.

catalog.
Technology Program.
courses.

Withdrawal


implemented.

the student.
Dismissal



Grievance Procedure


Attendance Policies



circumstances.
time lost.





evaluations.



laboratory times.


place after use.

instructors.
Lab Safety Protocol

the faculty.
Department.
CLINICAL EXPERIENCE
782-0734).


Invasive Procedures
instructor.

probation.







Clinical Forms
Student Form.

DRESS CODE
Uniform
neat.

Clinical Appearance
setting.
Electronic Devices
Program Policy
possible.
a PJC student.


been adopted:
Technology Program.
physician.


program


conditions.


0.1 rem.
Film Badge Policy

Landauer.
clinical rotation.
Pregnancy

implemented.
Pregnancy Form. (


ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Faculty Lauri Redus
Term: 101S Office 903.782.0734
Section: 01 lredus@parisjc.edu
Course # RADR 2309

Course Title Radiographic Imaging Equipment
Course Description
A study of the equipment and physics of x-ray production, basic x-ray circuits, and the
relationship of equipment components to the imaging process.
1213, RADR 1267, RADR 2301, RADR 2336

1. Radiologic Science for Technologists Physics, Biology, & Protection, Bushong, 9th
edition, 2008 ISBN: 0-323-04837-4
2. Principles of Radiographic Imaging: An Art and a Science, Adler & Carlton, 4th
edition ISBN: 978-1-4018-7194-9
3. The Fundamentals of Imaging Physics and Radiology, Selman, Joseph, 9th edition,
2000 ISBN: 0-398-06987-5
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
1. Describe the equipment and physics of x-ray production;
2. Describe basic x-ray circuits and related equipment components to the imaging
process.
Learning Objectives
Course # (RADR 2309) – Lauri Redus Page 1 of 20

Imaging Equipment
1. Define potential difference, current and resistance.
2. Describe the characteristics of direct and alternating currents
3. Describe electrical protective devices.
4. Identify the general components and function of the primary, secondary and filament
circuits.
5. Identify the function of solid-state rectification.
6. Compare single phase, three phase, high frequency and falling load generators in
terms of radiation production and efficiency.
7. Discuss permanent installation of radiographic equipment in terms of purpose,
components, types and applications.
8. Demonstrate operation of various types of permanently installed radiographic
equipment.
9. Discuss mobile units in terms of purpose, components, types and applications.
10. Discuss the application of automatic exposure control (AEC) devices.
11. Explain the purpose, principles and application of conventional tomography.
12. Indicate the purpose, construction and application of video camera tubes, TV
monitors and video recorders.
13. Identify fluoroscopic recording equipment.
14. Discuss the purpose and procedure of radiographic magnification.
15. Explain image-intensified fluoroscopy.
16. Discuss gain and conversion factors as related to image intensification.
17. Discuss fluoroscopic image formation in terms of image size and brightness.
18. Discuss electronic imaging equipment used in radiography and fluoroscopy.
19. Discuss flat panel detectors used in digital electronic x-ray equipment.
Computers in Radiologic Sciences

1. Identify various types of computers.
2. Define analog to digital conversion and digital signal processor.
3. Identify various terms related to computer fundamentals and components.
4. Describe major functions of central processing unit. (CPU).
5. Differentiate the various types of memory.
6. Give examples of various input and output devices.
8. Explain computer operation.
9. Distinguish between analog computers and digital computers.
10. Discuss application of various types of software.
11. Explain the following computing applications as they related to radiology: radiologic
information systems (RIS), hospital information systems (HIS), and picture archiving
communication systems (PACS).
12. Define digital imaging and communications in medicine (DICOM)
13. Discuss the impact the Internet has on the distribution of health information.
Course Schedule
Week 1: X-Ray Circuit: Electricity, Protective devices, Transforms, Components and
Functions, Rectification
Week: 2: X-Ray Circuit: Electricity, Protective devices, Transforms, Components and

Functions, Rectification continued
Week 3: X-Ray Circuit: Electricity, Protective devices, Transforms, Components and
Functions, Rectification continued
Week 4: Radiographic Equipment: Permanent installation, Mobile units, Automatic
exposure control
Week 5: Exam, Lab Experiment Assignments
Week 6: Diagnostic X-Ray Tubes: Rotating anode, cathode, tube housing construction
Week 7: Viewing and Recording System
Week 8: Conventional Tomography, Image Intensified Fluoroscopy
Week 9: Conventional Tomography, Image Intensified Fluoroscopy, Image intensifier
tube components, Intensification principles
Week 10: Exam
Week 11: Electronic Imaging, Digital Fluoroscopy
Week 12: Computers in Radiologic Sciences, Fundamentals, Digital, Components,
Operations, Radiology applications, Internet
Week 13: Holiday
Week 14: Computers in Radiologic Sciences, Fundamentals, Digital, Components,
Operations, Radiology applications, Internet continued
Week 15: Exam, Review all concepts
Week 16: Final Exam

Grading Criteria
higher.
Attendance 5%
Exams 40%
Quizzes 20%
Final Exam 25%
Lab Experiments 10%
exams will be an alternate exam.

90-100 points - A
80-89 points - B
70-79 points - C
60-69 points - D
< 60 points - F
Course Policies

sound judgment.
diversity.
health care needs.
health care needs.
psychomotor skills.

various activities.
care field.

catalog.
Technology Program.
courses.

Withdrawal

implemented.

the student.
Dismissal




Grievance Procedure


Attendance Policies


circumstances.
time lost.





evaluations.



laboratory times.


place after use.
instructors.

Lab Safety Protocol
the faculty.
Department.
CLINICAL EXPERIENCE
782-0734).

Invasive Procedures
instructor.

probation.








Clinical Forms
Student Form.

DRESS CODE
Uniform
neat.
Clinical Appearance

setting.
Electronic Devices
Program Policy
possible.
a PJC student.

been adopted:

Technology Program.
physician.


program

conditions.


0.1 rem.
Film Badge Policy

Landauer.
clinical rotation.
Pregnancy

implemented.
Pregnancy Form. (

ADA Statement


Term: 101S Office 903-782-0734
Course RADR 2367

Course Title Practicum (Field Experience)
Course Description
developed by the employer, college, and student.
1213, RADR 1267, RADR 2301, RADR 2336, RADR 2266, RADR 2309, RADR2431,
BIOL 2402, RADR 2305, RADR 2313, RADR 2366, ENGL 1301, MATH 1314, RADR
2217, RADR 2233, RADR 2267, Humanities/Fine Arts/Literature Elective

ISBN: 978-1-416-03194-9
6 Principles of Radiographic Imaging: An Art and a Science, 4th edition, 2006
ISBN: 978-1-4018-7194-9
ISBN: 978-0-323-04209-3
Program Outcomes

Course Outcomes
Learning Objectives
Clinical Practice
1. Exercise the priorities required in daily clinical practice.
2. Execute imaging procedures under the appropriate level of supervision.
7. Choose patient and family education strategies appropriate to the comprehension
level of patient/family.
8. Manage interactions with the patient and family in a manner that provides the
desired psychosocial support.
9. Evaluate the patient’s status and condition before, during and following the
radiologic procedure to demonstrate competence in assessment skills.
10. Demonstrate skills in assessment and evaluation of psychological and physical
changes in the patient’s condition and carry out appropriate actions.
11. Examine gender, cultural, age and socioeconomic factors that influence patient
compliance with procedures, diagnosis, treatment and follow-up of patients.
12. Adapt procedures to meet age-specific, disease-specific and cultural needs of
patients.
13. Assess the patient and record patient histories.
14. Assess patient using the ABCs of CPR and demonstrate basic life support
procedures.
16. Interpret patient side effects and/or complications of radiologic procedures, contrast
administration and take appropriate actions.
17. Document care in the patient’s record.
19. Apply the appropriate medical asepsis and sterile technique.
20. Prepare the technologies and methodologies for the performance of radiologic
procedures.

21. Demonstrate competency in the principles of radiation protection standards to
include time, distance shielding and radiation monitoring.
Course Schedule
The radiology student will be exposed to a variety of clinical facilities during rotating
experiences throughout practicum courses in the program.
The following 16 weeks will include orientation, major and minor facilities, clinic /
doctor’s offices, and final evaluations.
Orientation – 1 week
Major Facility – 5 weeks
Minor Facility – 4 weeks
Clinic / Doctor’s Office – 3 weeks
Final Evaluation – 1 week

Grading Criteria
In order to pass RADR 2367, the student must meet the minimum requirements of the
designated competencies in each column in order to receive the competency points and
the additional points are based on an average of the clinical instructor’s evaluation
forms and attendance.
1. Course grade will depend on the number of points in each of the following
categories:
Competencies
Patient Care
Professionalism
Knowledge/Skills
Attendance
Points are based on the number of clinical competencies in each column.

Total Total Total = Points
Competencies: 1st Col. 2nd Col. 3rd Col.
(Totals must >72 >60 >60 49
meet criteria >70 >58 >56 39
of all columns.) =>68 =>56 = >52 29
<68 <56 <52 Fail Semester
Points based on an average of all clinical instructors’ evaluation forms:

Patient Care: 20 = 15
of section.) 12-15 = 12
<12 = 0
Professionalism: 25 = 15
of section.) 15-19 = 12

<15 = 0
Knowledge/Skills: 35 = 16
of section.) 21-27 = 12
<21 = 0
Attendance: 0 Absence = 5
1 Absence = 4
2 Absences = 3
3 Absences = 2
4 Absences = 1
>4 Absences = 0
Grading Scale: Depending on number of competencies completed, evaluations, clinical

participation, submission of time sheets, journals, summary logs, and clinical
discussions.
The student is responsible for turning in competencies to the clinical coordinator on a

weekly basis and competencies not submitted within 7 days will not be accepted. All
failed competencies must be turned in each week or 5 points will be taken off the
student’s final grade. After the 3rd incident, it may be grounds for dismissal.
90-100 points - A
80-89 points - B
70-79 points - C
60-69 points - D
< 60 points - F
Course Policies
sound judgment.
diversity.

health care needs.
health care needs.
psychomotor skills.
various activities.
care field.


catalog.
Technology Program.
courses.

Withdrawal

implemented.


the student.
Dismissal




Grievance Procedure


Attendance Policies



circumstances.
time lost.




evaluations.


laboratory times.



place after use.
instructors.
Lab Safety Protocol

the faculty.

Department.
CLINICAL EXPERIENCE
782-0734).

Invasive Procedures
instructor.

probation.








Clinical Forms
Student Form.


DRESS CODE
Uniform
neat.
Clinical Appearance
setting.

Electronic Devices
Program Policy
possible.
a PJC student.

been adopted:

Technology Program.
physician.

program


conditions.


0.1 rem.
Film Badge Policy

Landauer.

clinical rotation.
Pregnancy
implemented.

Pregnancy Form. (

ADA Statement

Term: 101S Office 903-782-0734
Course RADR 2431

Course Title Advanced Radiographic Procedures
Course Description
Continuation of positioning; alignment of the anatomical structure and equipment,
evaluation of images for proper demonstration of anatomy and related pathology.
1213, RADR 1267, RADR 2301, RADR 2336

ISBN: 978-1-416-0-3194-9
6. Principles of Radiographic Imaging: An Art and a Science, Carlton, 4th ed., 2006
ISBN: 978-1-4018-7194-9
ISBN: 978-0-323-04209-3
Program Outcomes

Course Outcomes
1. Position and alignment of anatomical structures and equipment;
2. Evaluate images for proper demonstration of anatomy.
Learning Objectives
General Considerations
1. Describe the general purpose, and unique features resulting from special
radiographic / fluoroscopic studies.
2. Identify methods and barriers of communication and describe how each may be
utilized or overcome effectively during patient education.
3. Explain radiographic procedures to patients / family members.
4. Modify directions to patients with various communication problems.
5. Apply general radiation safety and protection practices associated with radiologic
examinations.
6. Discuss general procedural considerations for radiographic examinations.
7. Adapt general procedural considerations to specific clinical settings.
8. Adapt radiographic/fluoroscopic procedures based on special considerations.
9. Discuss equipment and supplies necessary to complete radiographic/fluoroscopic
procedures.
Patient Education
examinations.
Procedural Considerations for Contrast

17. Recite the patient preparation necessary for various contrast and special studies.
18. List and explain the routine and special views for all radiographic/fluoroscopic
procedures.
19. Explain the purpose for using contrast media.
20. Differentiate between positive and negative contrast agents.
21. Name the type, dosage and route of administration of contrast media commonly
used to perform radiographic contrast and special studies.
procedures.
24. Distinguish between the types and purpose for various upper and lower
gastrointestinal studies.

25. Stimulate radiographic/fluoroscopic procedures on a person or phantom in a
laboratory setting.
26. Evaluate images for positioning, centering, appropriate anatomy and overall image
quality.
27. Cite the structures demonstrated on routine radiographic/fluoroscopic procedures.
procedures.
30. Distinguish between the types and purpose for various upper and lower
gastrointestinal studies.
31. Stimulate radiographic/fluoroscopic procedures on a person or phantom in a
laboratory setting.
32. Evaluate images for positioning, centering, appropriate anatomy and overall image
quality.
33. Cite the structures demonstrated on routine radiographic/fluoroscopic procedures.
procedures.
examinations.
43. Discuss equipment and supplies necessary to complete radiographic/fluoroscopic
procedures.
Course Schedule
Week 1: Orientation
Week 2: General Considerations, Patient Education
Week 3: Exam 1, Contrast Studies, Urinary System
Week 4: Contrast Studies, Urinary System
Week 5: Exam 2, Digestive System
Week 6: Digestive System continued
Week 10: Exam 3, Biliary System, Special Studies
Week 11: Biliary System, Special Studies continued
Week 12: Exam 4
Week 13: Holiday

Week 14: Positioning and Special Considerations
Week 15: Exam 5
Week 16: Final Exam

Grading Criteria
higher.
Exams 50%
Quizzes 10%
Assignments 10%
Lab 5%
Attendance 5%
Final Exam 20%
exams may be an alternate exam.

90-100 points - A
80-89 points - B
70-79 points - C
60-69 points - D
< 60 points - F
Course Policies
sound judgment.
diversity.

health care needs.
health care needs.
psychomotor skills.
various activities.
care field.


catalog.
Technology Program.
courses.

Withdrawal

implemented.


the student.
Dismissal




Grievance Procedure

Attendance Policies



circumstances.

time lost.


In RADR 1266, 1267, 2266, 2366, 2267, and 2367, grades for the clinical and/or laboratory

experience will be based on the number of mastered competencies, an average of the clinical
instructor’s evaluations for the semester, and attendance. The clinical grade is separate from
the classroom grade. A student who withdraws or receives a failing grade in a didactic course
will be required to repeat both the didactic and the clinical course for the specified semester.


evaluations.


laboratory times.



place after use.
instructors.
Lab Safety Protocol

the faculty.

Department.
CLINICAL EXPERIENCE
782-0734).

Invasive Procedures
instructor.

probation.






Trends of unsafe performance will require documentation on the Student Conference Form
which is signed by the student during counseling with the instructor. Documentation becomes a
part of the student's permanent file.
Clinical Forms
Student Form.


DRESS CODE
Uniform
neat.
Clinical Appearance
setting.
Electronic Devices

Program Policy
possible.
a PJC student.

been adopted:

Technology Program.
physician.

program


conditions.


0.1 rem.
Film Badge Policy

Landauer.
clinical rotation.

Pregnancy
implemented.

Pregnancy Form. (

ADA Statement

Course # (RBTC 1401)

Course Title (Programmable Logic Controllers)
Course Description
A study in programmable controllers. Topics include processor units,
numbering systems, memory organization, relay type devices, timers, counters,
data manipulators, and programming.
Prerequisite(s): ELMT 2433 or Concurrent

Programmable Logic Controllers, Third Edition Frank D. Petruzella
Lab Manual for Programmable Logic Controllers with LogixPro Simulator
Program Outcomes
different courses, but In the course RBTC 1401, Programmable Logic Controllers, 90%
of the students who pass the course will be able to program correctly the traffic lights on
the PLC trainer using three methods: timers, timers with comparison instructions and
with the sequencer output instruction.
Course Outcomes
Write a working PLC program using ladder logic; install and troubleshoot the program;
and integrate PLCs into electromechanical systems.
Learning Objectives
The student will describe how electrical and electronic input and output devices are used
to control automated manufacturing and/or process systems; identify basic elements
used for input and output. Define how programmable electronic systems use input data
to alter output responses; troubleshoot a representative system; and demonstrate how
system operation can be altered with software programming.

Course Schedule
Week 1 PLC Overview
Week 2 PLC Hardware Components
Week 3 Number Systems and Codes
Week 3 Fundamentals of Logic
Week 4 Basics of PLC Programming
Week 5 Developing Fundamental PLC Wiring Diagrams and Ladder Logic Programs
Week 6 Programming Timers
Week 7 Programming Counters
Week 8 Program Control Instructions
Week 9 Data Manipulation Instructions
Week 10 Math Instructions
Week 11 Sequencer and Shift Register Instructions
Week 12 PLC Installation Practices, Editing and Troubleshooting
Week 13 Process Control and Data Acquisition Systems

Week 15 Computer-Controlled Machines and Processes
Week 16 Final Exam
Course Policies
Grading:
Four (4) major tests, homework and lab assignments and a comprehensive final exam
40% Tests
25% Programming Assignments
5% PLC Motor and Starter Control Wiring
10% Homework
20% Final Exam
test score.

Attendance/Drop

departmental computers. All diskettes used on computers outside the department MUST
be scanned for viruses before use.
Cellular Phones, Beepers and Personal Digital Assistants (pda) All cell phones, beepers
and personal digital assistants (pda) must be turned off or in silent mode. Under no
circumstances should a cell phone or beeper sound during class. If a cell phone or
beeper does sound during class the student may be asked to leave for the remainder of
the period. The only exception to this rule includes peace officers, EMT, EMS, or the
emergency personnel, and their devices should be in silent mode.

11375.

Academic Honesty

ADA Statement


Term: 101S Office Phone

Course Title (Programmable Logic Controllers)
Course Description
A study in programmable controllers. Topics include processor units,
numbering systems, memory organization, relay type devices, timers, counters,
data manipulators, and programming.
Prerequisite(s): ELMT 2433 or Concurrent

Programmable Logic Controllers, Third Edition Frank D. Petruzella
Lab Manual for Programmable Logic Controllers with LogixPro Simulator
Program Outcomes
There are several Electromechanical Technology Programs Outcomes for all the different
courses, but In the course RBTC 1401, Programmable Logic Controllers, 90% of the
students who pass the course will be able to program correctly the traffic lights on the
PLC trainer using three methods: timers, timers with comparison instructions and with the
sequencer output instruction.
Course Outcomes
Write a working PLC program using ladder logic; install and troubleshoot the program;
and integrate PLCs into electromechanical systems.
Learning Objectives
The student will describe how electrical and electronic input and output devices are used
to control automated manufacturing and/or process systems; identify basic elements
used for input and output. Define how programmable electronic systems use input data to
alter output responses; troubleshoot a representative system; and demonstrate how
system operation can be altered with software programming.

Course Schedule
Week 1 PLC Overview
Week 2 PLC Hardware Components
Week 3 Number Systems and Codes
Week 3 Fundamentals of Logic
Week 4 Basics of PLC Programming
Week 5 Developing Fundamental PLC Wiring Diagrams and Ladder Logic Programs
Week 6 Programming Timers
Week 7 Programming Counters
Week 8 Program Control Instructions
Week 9 Data Manipulation Instructions
Week 10 Math Instructions
Week 11 Sequencer and Shift Register Instructions
Week 12 PLC Installation Practices, Editing and Troubleshooting
Week 13 Process Control and Data Acquisition Systems

Week 15 Computer-Controlled Machines and Processes
Week 16 Final Exam
Course Policies
Grading:
Four (4) major tests, homework and lab assignments and a comprehensive final exam
40% Tests
25% Programming Assignments
5% PLC Motor and Starter Control Wiring
10% Homework
20% Final Exam
test score.

Policies

Attendance/Drop

departmental computers. All diskettes used on computers outside the department MUST
be scanned for viruses before use.

11375.

Academic Honesty

engage in academic dishonesty through such activities as cheating on exams, plagiarism,
or collusion with others will be referred to the Vice President of Student Services for
disciplinary action such as dismissal from the college. For detailed information on
Academic Honesty, refer to the College Catalog.
ADA Statement
Paris Junior College welcomes students who have special needs. The institution is
committed to assisting qualified students as completely as possible. Paris Junior College
provides equal opportunities for students with disabilities and ensures access to a wide
variety of resources and programs.
Disabilities Act of 1990 requires that the college make certain special arrangement for
students with disabilities. This requirement does not mean that less should be required of
the student with a disability than of other students, but only that reasonable
accommodations should be made to ensure that students with a disability have access to
an education. The college will make reasonable accommodations for qualified students
with a documented physical, psychological or learning disability who have been admitted
to the college and have requested accommodations.


Term: 101S 903-782-0726
Section: 01 roberts@parisjc.edu

Course Title (Robotic Mechanisms)
Course Description
This course will familiarize the student with the fundamentals of power
transmission and mechanical drives. Proper component application,
troubleshooting, lubrication and preventive maintenance will be emphasized.
Hands on laboratory experiments will be conducted with all components. This
knowledge, accompanied by detailed study of various types of drive systems will
give the student the skills and techniques and objectivity required to analyze,
troubleshoot, repair and construct mechanical drive trains. Fundamentals of
force, velocity, work, horsepower, torque, RPM, ratios, coefficient of friction,
useful formulae, conversion factors and solving for unknowns will be covered.


IPT’s Industrial Trades Training Manual by Bruce M. Barsaraba
Power Transmission Handbook and Workbook
By Power Transmission Distributors Association
Power Transmission Interactive – The multimedia primer for the PT/MC Industry
Interactive CD (Provided)
Program Outcomes
different courses, but this course will familiarize the student with the fundamentals of
power transmission and mechanical drives. Proper component application,
troubleshooting, lubrication and preventive maintenance will be emphasized. Hands on
laboratory experiments will be conducted with all components.
This knowledge, accompanied by detailed study of various types of drive systems will

troubleshoot, repair and construct mechanical drive trains.
Course Outcomes
Become familiar with the fundamentals of power transmission and mechanical drives,
calculation of speed ratios and efficiencies and the relationship between horsepower,
rpm and torque.
Learning Objectives
This course will familiarize the student with the fundamentals of power transmission and
mechanical drives. Proper component application, troubleshooting, lubrication and
preventive maintenance will be emphasized. Hands on laboratory experiments will be
conducted with all components.
Course Schedule
Week 1 Fundamentals of Power Transmission
Week 2 Bearings
Week 3 Belt Drives
Week 4 Chain Drives
Week 5 Clutches and Brakes
Week 6 Conveyors and Components
Week 7 Couplings and U-Joints
Week 8 Gears
Week 9 Hydraulics and Pneumatics
Week 10 Linear Motion
Week 11 Motors
Week 12 Adjustable-Speed Drives
Week 13 Controls and Sensors
Week 14 PT Accessories
Week 15 Lubrication
Week 16 Final Exam

Course Policies
Grading:
Eight (8) major tests, homework and lab assignments and a comprehensive final exam
80% Tests and Homework
20% Final Exam
test score.
Attendance/Drop



11375.
Academic Honesty

ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-0726
Section: 02 lrobertsl@parisjc.edu

Course Title (Robotic Mechanisms)
Course Description
This course will familiarize the student with the fundamentals of power
transmission and mechanical drives. Proper component application,
troubleshooting, lubrication and preventive maintenance will be emphasized.
Hands on laboratory experiments will be conducted with all components. This
knowledge, accompanied by detailed study of various types of drive systems will
troubleshoot, repair and construct mechanical drive trains. Fundamentals of
force, velocity, work, horsepower, torque, RPM, ratios, coefficient of friction,
useful formulae, conversion factors and solving for unknowns will be covered.


IPT’s Industrial Trades Training Manual by Bruce M. Barsaraba
Power Transmission Handbook and Workbook
By Power Transmission Distributors Association
Power Transmission Interactive – The multimedia primer for the PT/MC Industry
Interactive CD (Provided)
Program Outcomes
different courses, but this course will familiarize the student with the fundamentals of
power transmission and mechanical drives. Proper component application,
troubleshooting, lubrication and preventive maintenance will be emphasized. Hands on

laboratory experiments will be conducted with all components.
Course Outcomes
Become familiar with the fundamentals of power transmission and mechanical drives,
calculation of speed ratios and efficiencies and the relationship between horsepower,
rpm and torque.
Learning Objectives
This course will familiarize the student with the fundamentals of power transmission and
mechanical drives. Proper component application, troubleshooting, lubrication and
preventive maintenance will be emphasized. Hands on laboratory experiments will be
conducted with all components.
Course Schedule
Week 1 Fundamentals of Power Transmission
Week 2 Bearings
Week 3 Belt Drives
Week 4 Chain Drives
Week 5 Clutches and Brakes
Week 6 Conveyors and Components
Week 7 Couplings and U-Joints
Week 8 Gears
Week 9 Hydraulics and Pneumatics
Week 10 Linear Motion
Week 11 Motors
Week 12 Adjustable-Speed Drives
Week 13 Controls and Sensors
Week 14 PT Accessories
Week 15 Lubrication
Week 16 Final Exam

Course Policies
Grading:
Eight (8) major tests, homework and lab assignments and a comprehensive final exam
80% Tests and Homework
20% Final Exam
test score.
Attendance/Drop


Cellular Phones, Beepers and Personal Digital Assistants (pda)All cell phones,

11375.
Academic Honesty
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Faculty: Stephanie Parker
College Year: 2010-2011 Office: WTC 1036
Term: 101S Office: 903-782-0246
Section: 01 sparker@parisjc.edu
Course: RNSG 2514

Course Title: Integrated Care of the Client
with Complex Healthcare Needs
Course Description
Application of systematic problem-solving and critical-thinking skills to provide nursing
care to diverse clients/families across the life span with complex healthcare needs in
health maintenance and health restoration; methods of collaboration with members of
the multi-disciplinary healthcare team. Topics include the role of the nurse as client
advocate and coordinator of care and applicable competencies in knowledge, judgment,
skills, and professional values within a legal, ethical framework.
Credits: 5 SCH = 5 lecture hours per week, 0 lab hours per week
Prerequisite(s): RNSG 1227 and RNSG 1262

A.D. Nursing Program Faculty, Paris Junior College. (2010). Integrated Nursing
Curriculum-RNSG 2514, RNSG 2560 syllabus.
Alfaro-LeFevre, R., (2009). Critical Thinking and Clinical Judgment, A Practical

Approach, (4th ed.) Philadelphia, Saunders ISBN: 978-1-4160-3948-8
Associate Degree Nursing Student Handbook 2010-2011.
Ball, J., Bindler, R., and Cowen, K.J., (2010), Child Health Nursing: Partnering Children
and Families, (2nd ed.) New Jersey: Prentice Hall. ISBN: 978-0-13-515381-9
Claywell, Lora (2009). LPN to RN Transitions (2nd ed.) Philadelphia: Saunders

ISBN: 978-0-323-15879-7
Curren, A.M., (2006). Dimensional Analysis for Meds (3rd ed.) San Diego: Delmar.
ISBN: 1-4018-7801-6
Gahart, B. and Nazareno, A. (2011) 2011 Intravenous Medications. (27th ed.) Elsevier
Mosby ISBN: 978-0-323-05795-9
Olds, S., London, M., Ladewig, P. and Davidson, M. (2008) Maternity Newborn Nursing
Course # RNSG 2514 – Stephanie Parker Page 1 of 21

C:\Users\ElaPit\Documents\Syllabi for 101s\Word to convert to PDF\RNSG2514 01 101S.doc
and Women’s Health Care. (8th ed.) New Jersey: Prentice Hall.
ISBN: 978-01-3220873-4
Smeltzer, S. C., and Bare, B. G. (2010). Brunner and Suddarth's Textbook of Medical-
Surgical Nursing. (12th ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott. ISBN: 978-0-7817-8590-7
Taylor, C., Lillis, C. J., & LeMone, P. (2008). Fundamentals of Nursing. (6th ed.).
Philadelphia: Lippincott. ISBN: 978-0-7817-8157-2
Texas Nursing Practice Act and Nursing Peer Review Act (latest ed.) Austin: Texas
Board of Nursing (available on-line)
Videbeck, S. (2011), Psychiatric Mental Health Nursing. (5th ed.) Philadelphia:

Lippincott, ISBN: 978-1-60547-8616
Wilson, B., Shannon, M., and Shields, K., (2011 ed.). Prentice Hall’s Nurse’s Drug
Guide, New Jersey: Prentice Hall. ISBN: 978-0-1321-4926-6
Students may choose one (1) of the following as a REQUIRED Nursing Diagnosis
Text:
Doenges, Marilynn E., Moorhouse, Mary Frances, Murr, Alice C. (2010) Nursing
Diagnosis Manual Planning, Individualizing, andDocumenting Client Care, (3rd ed.).
Davis ISBN: 978-0-8036-2221-0
Doenges, Marilynn E., Moorhouse, Mary Frances, Murr, Alice C. (2010) Nurse’s Pocket
Guide Diagnosis, Prioritized Interventions and Rationales, (12th ed.). Davis
ISBN: 978-0-8036-2234-0
Students may choose one (1) of the following as a REQUIRED NCLEX-RN Review:
HESI NCLEX-RN Review, (newest ed.)
Silvestri, L.A. (2008). Saunders Comprehensive Review for NCLEX-RN. (4th or newest
ed.) Philadelphia: Saunders ISBN: 978-1-4160-3708-8
Students may choose one (1) of the following as a REQUIRED Dictionary:

Anderson, K., Anderson L, and Glanze, W (2009). Mosby's Medical, Nursing, and Allied
Health Dictionary. (8th or newest ed.). St. Louis: Elsevier Mosby.
ISBN: 978-0-323-04937-5
Vernes, D and Thomas, C.L. (2009). Taber's Cyclopedic Medical Dictionary. (21st ed.).
Philadelphia: F.A. Davis. ISBN: 978-0-8036-1559-5
Students may choose the following as a RECOMMENDED Lab and Diagnostic

Tests handbook
LeFevre-Key, J. (2010) Laboratory and Diagnostic Tests with Nursing Implications, (8th
or newest ed.) New Jersey: Prentice Hall. ISBN: 978-0-1350-7405-3

Students may choose the following as a RECOMMENDED Physical Assessment
handbook
Bates, B., (2009). Pocket Guide to Physical Examination & History Taking. (6th).
Philadelphia: Lippincott. ISBN: 0-7817-8066-7
Program Outcomes
1. Utilize critical thinking to provide the foundation for appropriate clinical decision-
making.
2. Manage safe, competent, holistic care for a diverse group of clients within the scope
of the professional nurse.
3. Communicate professionally and effectively with individuals, significant support
persons, and members of the multidisciplinary healthcare team.
Course Outcomes
1. Develop and implement a teaching plan for a client/family to promote health
maintenance/health restoration based on assessment data;
2. Demonstrate the ability to utilize critical thinking skills to make safe and ethical
clinical decisions;
3. Use a systematic problem-solving process;
4. Develop and implement a plan of care for the diverse client/family across the life span
with complex health care needs in a variety of health care settings;
5. Demonstrate a working knowledge of the implications of the Nurse Practice Act;
6. Apply therapeutic communication skills with diverse clients and families;
7. Recognize opportunities for client advocacy and professional development activities;
8. Collaborate in multidisciplinary planning to provide care for clients/families with
complex health care needs.
Learning Objectives
Pharmacology
1. Identify the different types of intravenous delivery equipment.
2. Discuss adjusting a delivery system that is too fast and a delivery system that is too
slow.
3. Review the different types of equipment available to start I.V.
4. Review the systems of measures.
5. Demonstrate pediatric weight dose related calculations.
6. Demonstrate titration of infusion calculation.
7. Identify each medication of the required medication list Semesters I and II including:
classification, actions, side effects, nursing implications, appropriate lab values,
signs and symptoms of toxicity, compatibility, and rate of administration.
Health Perception-Health Management

1. Review growth and development across the life span.
2. Identify potential role strains for children and their families during hospitalization.
3. Discuss proper administration techniques of medications based on age.
4. Utilize the nursing process to plan care for the hospitalized child taking into

consideration normal growth and development and cultural implications.
Coping/Stress Tolerance
1. Identify and compare various types of phobias.
2. Identify various types of personality disorders: Paranoid, Schizoid, Schizotypal,
Antisocial, Borderline, Histrionic, Avoidant, Dependent, Passive-Aggressive.
3. Describe various types of somatoform disorders and identify symptoms associated
with each: Somatization disorder, Somatoform pain disorder, Hypochondriasis,
Conversion disorder, Body dysmorphic disorder.
4. Identify and discuss the identified cognition disorders.
5. Apply pharmacological concepts to the care of clients with the listed disorders.
6. Review the consent form required prior to the administration of psychotropic drugs.
7. Discuss common barriers to maintaining the medication regimen.
8. Review the function of different therapies.
Roles-Relationships
1. Identify communication techniques that enhance and hinder communication.
2. Identify levels of clinical practice and roles of the psychiatric mental health nurse.
3. Identify areas in which psychiatric mental health nurses work.
4. Identify basic assumptions behind therapeutic milieu concept.
5. Describe behaviors that promote a positive milieu.
6. Discuss essential components of family systems.
7. Identify characteristics of a dysfunctional family and compare with that of a functional
family.
8. Identify the cycle of abuse.
9. Discuss various treatment options available to families.
Issues in Nursing/Critical Thinking

1. Address the implications of the major goals and outcomes of nursing.
2. Compare and contrast the Diagnoses and treatment and the Predictive,
Management and Promotion approaches to health care.
3. Verbalize the registered nurse’s responsibilities related to diagnoses and
management of medical and nursing processes.
4. Identify and define the listed applications to the Nursing Process.
5. Apply critical thinking techniques in clinical situations.
6. Discuss use of critical thinking in priority setting.
7. Identify interventions/nursing diagnosis of highest priority.
8. Discuss how to utilize critical thinking in clinical practice.
9. Identify and use the Clinical Judgment Skills.
Values-Belief
1. Discuss cultural care including planning, interventions and evaluation of care for
various cultures.
2. Discuss cultural norms, phenomena.
3. Describe the relationship of sociocultural background to health and illness belief and
practices.

4. Describe cultural phenomena, environmental control, biological variations, social
organization and communication that apply to culturally sensitive nursing care.
5. List general health and illness beliefs and practices of Asian, African, Native
Americans, and Spanish and European Americans.
6. Discuss several ways in which planning and implementation of nursing interventions
can be adapted to a client’s ethnicity.
7. Compare and contrast religious aspects of health.
8. Identify spiritual needs of self and others.
9. Discuss the relationship of spiritual health to psychological and psychosocial health.
10. Identify alternative spiritual healing modalities.
Activity-Exercise, Cardiovascular Part

1. Discuss the nursing considerations for the pre-operative period for heart surgery
clients undergoing listed procedures
2. Apply the nursing process to pre and post-operative management and teaching of
the client undergoing listed procedures.
3. Evaluate the risk for death of specific cardiac monitor strips.
4. Discuss similarities and differences among the major valvular heart disorders.
(Aortic, Pulmonic, Mitral, Triscuspid, Prolapse)
6. Describe the socio-cultural and age related concerns for clients with factors affecting
the cardiovascular system.
7. Discuss the nursing interventions used to deal with psychological support across the
age span with clients with cardiovascular alterations.
8. Identify diagnostic tests used for clients with cardiovascular alterations.
9. Consider and discuss the alteration in lifestyle for clients with cardiovascular
alterations.
10. Discuss the legal/ethical issues that occur with clients with cardiovascular
alterations.
11. Describe and discuss listed treatments, procedures, and pharmacology.
Activity-Exercise: Cardiovascular Part II

1. Discuss the nursing considerations for the pre-operative period for heart surgery
clients undergoing listed procedures
3. Define shock and its underlying pathophysiology
4. Compare clinical findings of the stages of shock.
5. Describe organ damage that may occur with shock.
6. Compare hypovolemic and cardiogenic shock in terms of causes, pathophysiologic
and supportive measures.
7. Apply concepts of cardiopulmonary resuscitation in the event of cardiac arrest.
8. Apply knowledge of the etiology and pathophysiology of Rheumatic Fever/ Heart
disease to the nursing care of clients with these disorder and their complications
9. Describe assessment and interventions for possible complications of cardiovascular
surgery.

10. Discuss health teaching rehabilitation and convalescent measures required for
clients after cardiovascular surgery.
alterations.
alterations.
16. Describe and discuss listed treatments, procedures, and pharmacology.
Nutrition-Metabolic: Ingestion
1. Discuss how to teach clients about diets.
2. Identify feeding routes.
3. Identify content of TPN solution.
4. Utilizing the nursing process discuss the care of the client receiving TPN.
5. Identify risk factors for listed malignancies.
6. Identify preventive educational information for clients with identified risk factors for
listed disorders.
7. Discuss medical and nursing management of clients with malabsorption syndromes.
8. Discuss nursing implications for listed surgical procedures including safety, pre and
postoperative education and interventions.
9. Discuss pre and post procedure instructions for clients undergoing EGD and ERCP.
age span with clients with ingestion alterations.
Activity-Exercise: Musculo-Skeletal
1. Identify information in the client’s health history that may affect the musculoskeletal
system.
2. Describe the pathophysiology, etiology, diagnosis, clinical manifestations,
pharmacology and nursing and medical management associated with
musculoskeletal function disorders.
3. Discuss pathophysiology, etiology, diagnosis, clinical manifestations, pharmacology
and nursing and medical and management of congenital musculoskeletal disorders.
4. Discuss care of the client pre and post amputation including rehabilitation.
the musculoskeletal system.
age span with clients with musculoskeletal alterations.
7. Identify diagnostic tests used for clients with musculoskeletal alterations.
8. Consider and discuss the alteration in lifestyle for clients with musculoskeletal
alterations.
9. Discuss the legal/ethical issues that occur with clients with musculoskeletal
alterations.

Nutrition – Metabolic Hematopoetic-Immune
1. Compare and contrast disorders of coagulation.
2. Describe the mechanism of action, methods of administering and safety measure in
providing care to clients on anticoagulant medication.
3. Identify nursing actions/interventions for bone marrow studies.
the hematopoetic system.
age span with clients with hematopoetic alterations.
6. Identify diagnostic tests used for clients with hematopoetic alterations.
7. Discuss the legal/ethical issues that occur with clients with hematopoetic alterations.
8. Discuss the characteristics of immunodeficiency.
9. Describe the pharmacological and other collaborative therapies used in treating
clients with altered immunity.
10. Discuss teaching needs for clients with altered immune responses and their families
using the nursing process, develop a plan of care for clients with altered immune
responses.
the immune system.
age span with clients with immunological alterations.
13. Identify diagnostic tests used for clients with immunological alterations.
14. Consider and discuss the alteration in lifestyle for clients with immunological
alterations.
15. Discuss the legal/ethical issues that occur
with clients with immunological alterations.
Nutrition-Metabolic: Digestion
1. Differentiate among the types of hepatitis.
2. Compare and contrast the clinical manifestations of the three phases of acute
hepatitis.
3. Identify CDC groups recommended for Hepatitis B vaccine.
4. Describe the complete process for hepatitis B vaccination, including lab test to verify
serum conversion.
5. Discuss four major nursing interventions for pediatric clients with hepatitis.
6. Describe the differences in nursing care of the clients with toxic and viral hepatitis.
7. Identify the causes of toxic hepatitis.
8. Describe the infection control steps necessary for the client with hepatitis.
9. Discuss the implication of laboratory test results of the liver function studies.
10. Discuss the pharmacological treatment for each type of hepatitis.
11. Identify the clinical manifestations of the four stages of hepatic encephalopathy
12. Discuss the risk factors for biliary, pancreatic and liver cancers.
13. Compare and contrast the clinical manifestations, nursing interventions and
educational needs for clients with biliary and pancreatic cancer.

the digestion system.
age span with clients with digestive alterations.
16. Identify diagnostic tests used for clients with digestive alterations.
17. Consider and discuss the alteration in lifestyle for clients with digestive alterations.
18. Discuss the legal/ethical issues that occur with clients with digestive alterations.
Cognitive-Perceptual: Cognition
1. Review the psychopathology, etiology and treatment of listed disorders.
2. Discuss and contrast the various causes of CVA including the clinical
manifestations, nursing care, medical interventions and rehabilation potential.
3. Compare and contrast a CVA vs a TIA.
4. Compare and contrast delirium and dementia.
5. Use results of the Mini-Mental exam to guide interventions with clients with
dementia.
6. Describe the essential features of each of the stages of Alzheimer’s disease.
7. Apply the steps of the nursing process to clients with cognitive disorders.
cognition
9. Discuss the nursing interventions used to deal with psychological support and
medication therapy across the age span with clients with cognitive alterations.
10. Identify diagnostic tests used for clients with cognitive alterations.
11. Consider and discuss the alteration in lifestyle for clients with cognitive alterations.
12. Discuss the legal/ethical issues that occur with clients with cognitive alterations.
Nutrition-Metabolic: Endocrine
1. Differentiate between type 1 and type 2 diabetes.
2. Describe etiologic factors associated with diabetes.
3. Relate the clinical manifestations of diabetes to the associated pathophysiologic
alterations.
4. Identify the diagnostic and clinical significance of blood glucose tests.
5. Explain the dietary modifications used for management of children and adults with
diabetes.
6. Describe the relationship between diet, exercise, and medication (i.e. insulin or oral
hypoglycemic agents) for people with diabetes.
7. Identify the role of oral antidiabetic agents in diabetic therapy.
8. Describe the time of onset, peak, and duration of action for all insulin types.
9. Differentiate between hypoglycemia and diabetic ketoacidosis, and hyperosmolar
nonketotic syndrome.
10. Describe the major macrovascular, microvascular,and neuropathic complications of
diabetes and the self-care behaviors important in their prevention.
11. Identify the teaching aids and community support groups available for people with
diabetes.
12. Use the nursing process as a framework for care of the patient with diabetes.
13. Describe the function of the thyroid and parathyroid glands and their hormones.
14. Identify the diagnostic tests used to determine alterations in function of the thyroid

and parathyroid glands.
15. Compare hypothyroidism and hyperthyroidism: their causes, clinical manifestations,
management, and nursing interventions.
Self Perception-Self Management

1. Discuss the psychopathology etiology and treatment of listed disorders.
2. Relate the long-range psychological and pathophysiological aspects on the general
health of clients with eating disorders.
3. Differentiate among the eating disorders based on the symptoms (Anorexia
Nervosa, Bulimia and Binge eating).
4. Compare and contrast the perceptions of self and role performance of clients with
the various eating disorders.
5. Compare and contrast the various types of depression: 1) Major depression, 2)
Chronic depression, 3) Situational depression, 4) Seasonal depression, 5)
Dysrhythmia.
7. Apply the nursing process to provision of care for clients with the listed disorders.
Cognitive-Perceptual: Peripheral Nervous System

1. Discuss the pathophysiology of myasthenia gravis, Guillian Barre’, and ALS.
2. Utilize the nursing process and related nursing diagnoses to plan care for clients of
all ages and socio-cultural backgrounds with myasthenia gravis, Guillian Barre’, and
ALS.
3. Discuss the actions, nursing implications, and client teaching/learning aspects of
Prostimin and Mestinon.
4. Identify necessary teaching aspects for clients with myasthenia gravis to include
avoiding complications, ADLs, safety, adaptation, diagnostic studies and alteration in
lifestyle.
5. Discuss the cultural, social, age, and psychosocial related issues that occur with
PNS alterations.
6. Discuss the legal /ethical considerations for clients with PNS alterations.
7. Discuss the causes, prevention,
medical treatment and nursing care of the client with Meniere’s disease.
8. Discuss nursing interventions in dealing with sensory deprivation and sensory
overload.
Activity-Exercise: Respiratory
1. Differentiate between acidosis and alkalosis etiology based on ABG results.
2. Differentiate between compensated and uncompensated form of acidosis/alkalosis,
*correctly interpret ABG results.
3. Apply concepts of ABG analysis t the care of clients with compromised
activity/exercise tolerance.
4. Explain the listed surgical procedures and appropriate pre-operative and post-
operative care.
5. Identify the nursing diagnoses and management that apply to a client with cystic
fibrosis across the life span.

6. Describe the pathophysiology, clinical manifestations, and therapeutic management
of a client with cystic fibrosis.
7. Explain the respiratory effects of cystic fibrosis and the goals of nursing
management for a child.
8. Describe the pathophysiologic conditions of chest trauma.
9. Describe the complications of chest trauma.
10. Discuss the clinical findings, diagnostic studies and treatment of clients with chest
trauma.
11. Explain the nursing management of the client with chest trauma.
12. Differentiate between the four types of acid base imbalances.
13. Compare acidosis and alkalosis with regard to causes, clinical manifestation,
diagnosis, and management.
14. Describe the comprehensive nursing management of clients with acid-base
imbalances.
15. Discuss potential complications resulting from artificial/mechanical ventilation.
16. Identify physical indications for artificial ventilation.
17. Identify nursing diagnoses and interventions for clients experiencing respiratory
failure.
18. Describe assessment finding critical to recognition of respiratory failure.
19. Compare and contrast negative and positive pressure ventilators.
20. Describe the modes control and settings of positive pressure ventilators.
21. Identify the nursing interventions and management for the listed treatments and
procedures.
22. Demonstrate critical elements in care of the client with chest tubes.
23. Identify correct suctioning techniques.
the respiratory system.
age span with clients with respiratory alterations.
26. Identify diagnostic tests used for clients with respiratory alterations.
27. Consider and discuss the alteration in lifestyle for clients with respiratory alterations.
28. Discuss the legal/ethical issues that occur with clients with respiratory alterations.
Cognitive-Perceptual: Central Nervous System

1. Describe the neurological examination and assessment of the client, including the
use of the Glasgow Coma Scale.
2. Apply concepts of autoregulation of intracranial pressure.
3. Describe assessment and care of the client with a head injury.
4. Compare and contrast the effects of various drugs on the nervous system.
5. Describe prevention, assessment and nursing/medical management for at least four
possible complications of a craniotomy.
the CNS system.
age span with clients with CNS alterations.
8. Identify diagnostic tests used for clients with CNS alterations.

9. Consider and discuss the alteration in lifestyle for clients with CNS alterations.
10. Discuss the legal/ethical issues that occur with clients with CNS alterations.
11. Discuss, compare and contrast the signs and symptoms of brain tumors.
12. Discuss nursing interventions used with clients with brain tumors.
Nutrition Metabolic Cancer; Terminal Care

1. Identify treatments available for clients with cancer.
2. Discuss and identify oncological emergencies.
3. Identify various pharmacological and nonpharmacological pain methods used with
terminal clients.
age span with clients with terminal illness.
5. Identify diagnostic tests used for clients with cancer and other terminal illness.
6. Consider and discuss the alteration in lifestyle for clients with terminal illness,
including hospice.
7. Discuss the legal/ethical issues that occur with clients with terminal illness.
Introduction to Professional Nursing

1. Identify various agencies nurses may practice in.
2. Identify professional nursing practice roles.
3. Compare and contrast the various patterns of care delivery open to nurses.
4. Identify factors utilized by health care agencies to determine staffing ratios.
Activity-Exercise: Vascular
2. Compare hypovolemic and cardiogenic shock in terms of causes, pathophysiologic
and supportive measures.
4. Describe assessment and interventions for possible complications of cardiovascular
surgery.
5. Discuss health teaching rehabilitation and convalescent measures required for
clients after cardiovascular surgery.
6. Identify risk factors for development of vascular disorders.
7. Describe clinical manifestations of an aneurysm.
alterations.
alterations.
Elimination: Urinary

1. Compare and contrast pyelonephritis, glomerulonephritis, and nephritic syndrome:
etiology, pathophysiologic changes, clinical manifestations.
2. Contrast and compare the nursing and medical management for clients with
alteration in elimination: inflammation.
3. Describe the pathophysiology, etiology, clinical manifestations, nursing and medical
management of obstructive urinary disorders.
4. Explain diet modifications for clients according to their specific types of urinary tract
calculi.
5. Identify diagnostic tests used for clients with elimination alterations.
6. Discuss and develop a nursing plan of care for adult/child with general urinary
disorders.
7. Discuss the nursing interventions for a client undergoing lithotripsy including the
pre/post procedure education.
8. Describe the psychological support, socio-cultural, and age related concerns for
clients with factors affecting the elimination system.
9. Consider and discuss the alteration in lifestyle for clients with elimination alterations.
10. Discuss the legal/ethical issues that occur with clients with elimination alterations.
Elimination: Bowel
1. Describe pseudomembranous enterocolitis.
2. Identify collaborative and nursing interventions for selected complications of bowel
disorders.
3. Describe the pathophysiology of bowel obstruction.
4. Discuss the pathophysiology of life threatening bowel disorders.
5. Identify emergency nursing actions to stabilize and/or prevent further damage in the
client experiencing a life threatening bowel condition.
6. Discuss the nursing implications of medications used in managing bowel absorption
and elimination disorder.
the elimination system.
age span with clients with elimination alterations.
9. Identify diagnostic tests used for clients with elimination alterations.
10. Consider and discuss the alteration in lifestyle for clients with elimination alterations.
11. Discuss the legal/ethical issues that occur with clients with elimination alterations.
Course Schedule
Week 1: Pharmacology, Health Perception/Health Management, Coping/Stress
Tolerance, Roles/Relationships, Critical Thinking
Week 2: Obstetrics
Week 3: Values/Beliefs
Week 4: Cardiac
Week 5: Nutrition/Ingestion, Musculoskeletal
Week 6: Hematology/Immune
Week 7: Digestion, Cognition
Week 8: Endocrine, Self Perception/Self Management

Week 9: Peripheral Nervous System
Week 10: Respiratory
Week 11: Reproductive Health, Central Nervous System
Week 12: Culture
Week 13: Thanksgiving Holiday
Week 14: Cancer, Professional Nursing, Vascular
Week 15: Elimination-Urinary and Bowel
Week 16: Finals

GRADING SYSTEM
The course grade is derived from an average of the grades for unit examinations,
NCLEX-RN questions, research paper, and the final examination using the percentages
listed below. Requirements for completion of the course include:
 course grade average of 70% or greater
 completion of all course assignments
 dosage calculation competency examination grade of 90% or greater.
Unit Exams = 73%

I _____________
II _____________
III _____________
IV _____________
V _____________
Total _____________ divided by 5 multiplied by .73 = _____%
NCLEX-RN Questions = 2%
I _____________
II _____________
III _____________
IV _____________
V _____________
Total _____________ divided by 5 multiplied by .02 = ______%
Total Paper Grade ____________ multiplied by .05 = _______% 5%
Final Exam 20%
______________ multiplied by .2 = ________%
Dosage Calculations Exam___________ = N/A
Total 100%
A = 90-100
B = 80-89
C = 70-79
D = 60-69
F = 59 and below
Course Policies
Cellular Phones, MP3’s, Computers and Pagers: All electronic devices must be turned

off or set to silent mode during class/clinical. An exception may be made for on duty
emergency personnel. Under no circumstances should an electronic device sound
during class/clinical hours. Electronic devices may be used in the class/clinical setting
for educational purposes only. There is no instance in which any electronic device may
be used for personal communication, social networking or non-class related internet
access during class/clinical hours. The instructor will exercise his/her right to ask any
student in violation of this policy to leave the classroom/clinical setting for the rest of the
period. Repeated violations may result in dismissal from the course.

internet for non-class related matters should be necessary during class/clinical hours.
Instruct loved ones and/or employers to call the Health Occupations office (903-782-
0734) if there is an emergency. Office personnel will contact the student or the
instructor regarding the emergency. Any situation involving texting, social networking or
inappropriate internet access in the classroom may be considered academic
dishonesty. We do understand that our society has come to expect that we all be
available on a 24/7 basis; however, the student needs to inform all concerned that time
in class/clinical is devoted to the subject at hand and the student will not be available to
them during that time. Please understand the definition of “emergency,” according to
the American Heritage Dictionary, is “a situation or occurrence of a serious nature,
developing suddenly and unexpectedly, and demanding immediate action.”

leave the class/clinical area for the remainder of that class/clinical period. This may
result in the student being counted tardy or absent for that class. Repeated violations of
this policy may result in dismissal from the course.
Withdrawal
A student may withdraw from a nursing course by using the procedure outlined in the
Coordinator of the Associate Degree Nursing Program. After withdrawing from a
nursing course, a student must reapply for admission to the Associate Degree Nursing
Program in order to enroll in any subsequent nursing course.
dropped nursing course.

Students who have unsatisfactory classroom performance will be placed on academic
probation.

Unsatisfactory classroom performance is defined as a test average ≤ 72.

will be specified in the documentation. If the student does not show improvement,
Probationary criteria will be written in the form of behavioral objectives and recorded in
the document entitled "Report of Unsatisfactory Progress in a Course: Probationary
Status". A time frame for review of status will be specified. The terms of probation will
be discussed with the student and validated by the signatures of the course instructors
and the student.
course faculty. This review will be recorded on the document entitled, "Report of Status
Review". If the probation criteria has been met, the student's probation is lifted. Failure
to meet probationary criteria will result in further disciplinary action up to and including
termination from the program. Probation will be contained within each course.
Dismissal
student shows gross negligence, unsafe nursing care, lack of personal or professional
integrity, breach of patient confidentiality, or commits a criminal act..
"Unsafe nursing" is defined as any act of omission or commission which places the
that are absolutely essential for those entering the nursing profession. Actions taken
and attitudes expressed while in the student role are considered indicative of behaviors
to be expected of the graduate. The student will be given the opportunity to discuss the
incident(s) with the course team faculty.
Grounds for Immediate Dismissal from Program

A student is subject to immediate dismissal from the nursing program and failure of the
course in the following situations:
and on tests or written assignments (both parties), making false entries in record
pertaining to the giving of medications, treatments or nursing care, or failing to do
so in any circumstance that shows disregard for patient safety or welfare.
d. The use of alcohol, illegal drugs, or misuse of prescription or any other drugs
during school activities or on school property, or reporting to class/clinical under

e. Appropriating, in connection with the practice of nursing, medication, supplies,
equipment, or personal items of the patient/client, employer, or any other person or

notification of the Division Chair of Health Occupations. If the Division Chair is
absent, the Vice President of Workforce Education must be notified prior to
dismissal.
Grievance with the team leader or Division Chair of Health Occupation.
Grievance Procedure
Associate Degree Nursing Program. Grade disputes should be resolved at the lowest
level possible (i.e., the instructor and student). Recognizing that this is not always
possible, the following procedure has been adopted as policy for resolving grade and
course progress disputes. The steps have been defined to facilitate resolution at the
lowest level and in that interest; the order of steps will at no time be violated. The
grievance procedure must be initiated within two (2) working days of the incident by
which time the student must initiate a "Report of Grievance" with the team leader or
Division Chair of Health Occupations if the team leader is not available.
and the team leader of the course. If a satisfactory decision still has not been reached,
the student may request to meet with the Division Chair of the program.
Division Chair, the student may request an appointment with representative members of
the faculty-as-a-whole. (The definition of faculty-as-a-whole: a representative group of
the LVN, ADN, and a neutral party.) After presentation of the facts to the faculty-as-a-
whole, the faculty vote will be taken by ballot and tallied by the Division Chair of the
program and the neutral party. Failure will require a two-thirds majority vote. The
conference will be recorded on tape and on a Grievance Conference Report form, a
copy of which goes to the student and the original placed in the Confidential File.
Division Chair, the student may request an appointment with the Vice President of

The Confidential File will be kept in the office of the Division Chair of Health

ATTENDANCE POLICIES
Associate Degree Nursing students will follow the absence and tardy policies of Paris
because of the nature of the nursing experience:
1. During inclement weather on clinical days, the student must make his/her own
decision regarding safety for travel to school. A student who decides not to attend
clinical/class because of inclement weather will receive an absence unless official
notification by the college has been made that classes are closed.
absence. Students arriving 30 minutes or less at the clinical area will receive a tardy.
Students may miss up to 60 minutes of clinical and receive a tardy, with the
exception of the 30 minutes arrival rule (i.e. the student who arrives 15 minutes late
to clinical and leaves 45 minutes early from post-conference would miss 60 minutes
or less and receive a tardy).
Students missing 60 minutes or less of classroom during a given day will receive a
tardy. Students missing more than 60 minutes will be given an absence.
A tardy or absence such as arriving late or leaving early may occur at any point
during the day.
4. Permission to enter the clinical area will be left to the discretion of the clinical
instructor.
clinical with an illness which may pose a threat to clients, he/she will be dismissed
from the clinical area and will receive a clinical absence.
5. The ADN program expects students to attend all classes/clinicals regularly and
punctually as scheduled.
Students will be allowed one excused clinical absence in RNSG 1262, RNSG 2560
and RNSG 2561. The only excused absences are for:
*illness certified by a personal physician
*serious illness or death in student's immediate family, *being away from the campus
with the sanction of the College
*court appearance with prior approval of Team
Unexcused absences will be required to be made up in one of two ways as

determined by the ADN faculty team each semester:
In the clinical setting – clinical days will be made up as assigned by the clinical
instructor and may be any day of the week including Saturday.
In the laboratory setting (Paris Campus) – clinical days will be made up as assigned
by the clinical instructor from 8:00 am – 4:30 pm and will consist of completing eight
hours of required assignments pertaining to the clinical setting missed.

If a student does not attend their assigned make-up day it will be considered another
absence, and further disciplinary action may be implemented.
6. Students missing more than the equivalent of three (3) absences, (example: T, A, A,
A; T, A, A, T, T, T) in either the clinical or classroom course per semester must
request a review of absences by the ADN faculty team. The student must provide
supporting evidence to validate the necessity of the absences or tardies. Faculty will
review the information and determine whether the circumstances were extenuating;
if so the student will be placed on probation for excessive absences and be granted
an “extenuating circumstance absence.” The student may request no more than two
(2) faculty review of absences per course per semester. Any further
absences/tardies may result in failure of the program, or withdrawal if prior to the
drop date. If the ADN faculty team denies the student an extenuating circumstance
absence, then the student must make a request to the Team Leader/Instructor or the
Division Chair of Health Occupations, to meet with the Extenuating Circumstances
Committee.

Extenuating Circumstances Committee, composed of student, student advocate (if
desired), course team leader, one AD or LVN faculty, PJC/staff person, curriculum
coordinator and/or Division Chair of Health Occupations.
an “extenuating circumstance absence.”
The student may request no more than two (2) faculty review of absences per
course per semester. Any further absences/tardies may result in failure of the
program, or withdrawal if prior to the drop date. If the ADN faculty team denies the
student an extenuating circumstance absence, then the student must make a
request to the Team Leader/Instructor or the Division Chair of Health Occupations,
to meet with the Extenuating Circumstances Committee.
A. Preventable occurrences are not considered extenuating circumstances.
B. The faculty calling the meeting will write the minutes of the meeting, with
copies for the student, team leader, and minutes notebook.
C. A physician's physical condition statement may be required to return to
clinical.
D. All tardies (time missed) will be discussed in the Extenuating Circumstances
Committee meeting in order to identify trends.
E. A 2/3 majority vote of the committee will be required for the student request of
F. When the decision is made by the committee to allow the student to continue,
the student will be required to formulate a contingency plan to help prevent
further time lost.
G. If the Extenuating Circumstance Committee does not agree to allow the

student to continue, the student will be allowed to withdraw up to the college
designated date of the twelfth week of the semester (and the 4th week in
summer semesters). After the withdrawal date, the students may not withdraw
and termination from the program will result.

When a student must be late or absent from the clinical, that individual must notify the
clinical area by telephone. If the assignment is in a hospital, the agency must be notified
prior to beginning of shift.
When calling, the student should attempt to contact the person in charge (charge
nurse), but if this person is unavailable, speak to the next person in line of authority. The
student should then convey his/her message be relayed to the instructor when he/she
arrives. The student must obtain the name and position of the person contacted about
the absence.
Test review will be held the Thursday following the exam in the following manner.
During the lunch hour, students will have the opportunity to take their test report and
compare their answers to the test key with provided rationales. Students may only bring
their test report into the room. They will be provided with a red pen and a colored-blank
paper to write any test challenges. The student must write his/her name on the
challenge paper in order for the challenge to be accepted. Challenges will only be
accepted at this time. The faculty team will review all challenges following completion of
the self-review. Students will be notified if a change is made to the grades based on the
challenges and if so will be provided with a corrected test report.
Students who make 75 or less on an exam will be required to attend classroom test
review as scheduled on the course calendar.
Students who have a test average of 72 or below will be placed on academic probation
and be required to attend remediation as scheduled.
During the next ten months you should complete a minimum of 5,000 NCLEX-RN Level
practice questions. These questions should be completed on a computer in blocks of
100-200 questions at a sitting. Students will be required to complete a minimum of 400
questions (100 per unit exam) in the Summer semester and 1000 questions (200 per
unit exam) in the Fall and Spring semesters (total: 2400). Students will be required to
submit a test report either 200 per report or (2) 100 question reports due at exam time
according to the course calendar. Test report grades will be averaged and worth 2% of
the course grade. Incomplete assignments will not be accepted for a grade and reports
not submitted prior to exams will receive a “0”. This is a graded assignment and must be
completed independently.
Written Assignments:
All written assignments, classroom or clinical, must be completed and turned in even if
submitted after the due date. Failure to complete all written assignments will result in a

failing (F) grade for the course. This includes all required written assignments except
required written daily clinical paperwork. Required written daily clinical paperwork will be
addressed on the student anecdotal record/clinical evaluation tool.
Dosage Calculation Competency Testing

Students will be tested each semester to determine dosage calculation competency. A
20-question test will be administered at the beginning of each semester. Students must
score 90%. The students will be given three opportunities to achieve a 90%.
If a student scores below 90% on either of the first two tests, remediation and/or tutoring
must be completed before retesting.
If a student does not achieve 90% competency, he/she will be required to drop all
nursing courses.
Students may use label factor method, ratio proportion, or dimensional analysis to
calculate dosage for examinations or clinical.
DOSAGE CALCULATION COMPETENCY TEST PLAN

Type of Problem RNSG 1227 RNSG 2514 RNSG 2535
one step PO 2 1 1
two step PO 3 2 2
one step liquid 2 1 1
two step liquid 3 2 2
IV Flow rate or drip rate 2 2 2
IV time remaining 3 3 2
IV titration MG/KG/Time _____ 4 4
Pedi Doses MG/KG/Day 3 3 4
Units 2 2 2
Require Rounding (6) (6) (6)
Total Problems 20 20 20
Required Score 90% 90% 90%

crucial part of the learning experience. The student development center is staffed with
professional counselors who are available to assist students.
Clinical Screen (Drug and Criminal Background)

Students will be required to submit to drug screen test and criminal background checks.
The Paris Junior College Health Occupations will follow the policies and procedures of
the clinical facilities regarding results. Students with positive drug screens will not be
allowed to attend clinical resulting in failure of the course. Students with positive
background checks will follow the rule of the Nursing Practice Act and Practice and
Procedures of each facility being utilized by PJC nursing students.

ADA Statement
Counseling/ Advising Center by calling 903.782.0426 (Paris campus), 903.454.9333

Paris Junior College Faculty: Stephanie Parker
College Year: 2010-2011 Office: WTC 1036
Term: 101S Office: 903-782-0246
Section: 01 sparker@parisjc.edu
Course: RNSG 2560

Course Title: Clinical Course
Course Description
This course provides practical application of theoretical content in RNSG 2560. On site
clinical instruction, supervision and evaluation will provide education, and training in
providing client care. Specific clinical objectives and skills have been developed for this
course.
Credits: 5 SCH = 5 lecture hours per week
Prerequisite(s): RNSG 1227 and RNSG 1262

A.D. Nursing Program Faculty, Paris Junior College. (2010). Integrated Nursing
Curriculum-RNSG 2514, RNSG 2560 syllabus.
Alfaro-LeFevre, R., (2009). Critical Thinking and Clinical Judgment, A Practical

Approach, (4th ed.) Philadelphia, Saunders ISBN: 978-1-4160-3948-8
Associate Degree Nursing Student Handbook 2010-2011.
Ball, J., Bindler, R., and Cowen, K.J., (2010), Child Health Nursing: Partnering Children
and Families, (2nd ed.) New Jersey: Prentice Hall. ISBN: 978-0-13-515381-9
Claywell, Lora (2009). LPN to RN Transitions (2nd ed.) Philadelphia: Saunders

ISBN: 978-0-323-15879-7
Curren, A.M., (2006). Dimensional Analysis for Meds (3rd ed.) San Diego: Delmar.
ISBN: 1-4018-7801-6
Gahart, B. and Nazareno, A. (2011) 2011 Intravenous Medications. (27th ed.) Elsevier
Mosby ISBN: 978-0-323-05795-9
Olds, S., London, M., Ladewig, P. and Davidson, M. (2008) Maternity Newborn Nursing
and Women’s Health Care. (8th ed.) New Jersey: Prentice Hall.
ISBN: 978-01-3220873-4
Smeltzer, S. C., and Bare, B. G. (2010). Brunner and Suddarth's Textbook of Medical-

Surgical Nursing. (12th ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott. ISBN: 978-0-7817-8590-7
Taylor, C., Lillis, C. J., & LeMone, P. (2008). Fundamentals of Nursing. (6th ed.).
Texas Nursing Practice Act and Nursing Peer Review Act (latest ed.) Austin: Texas
Board of Nursing (available on-line)
Videbeck, S. (2011), Psychiatric Mental Health Nursing. (5th ed.) Philadelphia:

Lippincott, ISBN: 978-1-60547-8616
Wilson, B., Shannon, M., and Shields, K., (2011 ed.). Prentice Hall’s Nurse’s Drug
Guide, New Jersey: Prentice Hall. ISBN: 978-0-1321-4926-6
Students may choose one (1) of the following as a REQUIRED Nursing Diagnosis
Text:
Doenges, Marilynn E., Moorhouse, Mary Frances, Murr, Alice C. (2010) Nursing
Diagnosis Manual Planning, Individualizing, andDocumenting Client Care, (3rd ed.).
Davis ISBN: 978-0-8036-2221-0
Doenges, Marilynn E., Moorhouse, Mary Frances, Murr, Alice C. (2010) Nurse’s Pocket
Guide Diagnosis, Prioritized Interventions and Rationales, (12th ed.). Davis
ISBN: 978-0-8036-2234-0
Students may choose one (1) of the following as a REQUIRED NCLEX-RN Review:
HESI NCLEX-RN Review, (newest ed.)
Silvestri, L.A. (2008). Saunders Comprehensive Review for NCLEX-RN. (4th or newest
ed.) Philadelphia: Saunders ISBN: 978-1-4160-3708-8
Students may choose one (1) of the following as a REQUIRED Dictionary:

Anderson, K., Anderson L, and Glanze, W (2009). Mosby's Medical, Nursing, and Allied
Health Dictionary. (8th or newest ed.). St. Louis: Elsevier Mosby.
ISBN: 978-0-323-04937-5
Vernes, D and Thomas, C.L. (2009). Taber's Cyclopedic Medical Dictionary. (21st ed.).
Philadelphia: F.A. Davis. ISBN: 978-0-8036-1559-5
Students may choose the following as a RECOMMENDED Lab and Diagnostic

Tests handbook
LeFevre-Key, J. (2010) Laboratory and Diagnostic Tests with Nursing Implications, (8th
or newest ed.) New Jersey: Prentice Hall. ISBN: 978-0-1350-7405-3
Students may choose the following as a RECOMMENDED Physical Assessment

handbook
Bates, B., (2009). Pocket Guide to Physical Examination & History Taking. (6th).

Philadelphia: Lippincott. ISBN: 0-7817-8066-7
Program Outcomes
1. Utilize critical thinking to provide the foundation for appropriate clinical decision-
making.
2. Manage safe, competent, holistic care for a diverse group of clients within the scope
of the professional nurse.
3. Communicate professionally and effectively with individuals, significant support
persons, and members of the multidisciplinary healthcare team.
Course Outcomes
occupation and the business/industry,
Learning Objectives
Pharmacotherapeutics
1. Successfully pass the Fall Medication Test.
2. Administer medications in the clinical setting to two-three adult clients demonstrating
appropriate techniques and pharmacological knowledge.
3. Demonstrate adequate knowledge of all medications listed in the Required
Medication List for semester one and two.
4. Complete Pedi medication sheet for assigned clients during the pediatric rotation.
5. Administer medications in the clinical setting to one-two pediatric clients
demonstratingappropriate techniques and pharmacological knowledge without the
use of medication cards.
Health Assessment
1. Provide complete accurate assessment for each client assigned and document
within the first one- two hours of the clinical day.
2. Identify the signs and symptoms of cardiovascular disease when conducting a
physical exam to include health history and diagnostic screening.
3. During dialysis experience assess a shunt.
Obstetrical Nursing
1. Discuss the nursing process for a client in the obstetrical rotation.
2. Demonstrate the use of the nursing process to care for the complicated obstetrical
client during the intrapartal period.
3. Demonstrate the use of the nursing process to care for the complicated obstetrical
client during the postpartal period.
4. Develop and implement a dietary teaching plan for the client with PIH and Anemia
5. Discuss in post-conference a cardiotocograph tracing, which indicates cord

compression, decreased uteroplacental perfusion and head compression.
6. Discuss the use of the nursing process and related nursing diagnosis to give care to
a high-risk neonate.
7. Plan nursing actions to prevent or minimize neonate cold stress in the high-risk
infant, and discuss in post conference.
8. Utilize the nursing process when planning care to meet the emotional needs of a
high-risk neonate and the family, and discuss in post conference.
9. Discuss feelings, beliefs, and values concerning an imperfect or premature child in
post conference.
10. Complete the newborn assessment guide.
Medical-Surgical Nursing
1. Utilize the nursing process to complete a database and three (3) priority nursing
care plans (5 column) for a client in the First medical surgical rotation.
2. Complete Chapter 4 exercises page 131, #1-5, and Chapter 3 exercises page 81,
#1-8, in your Alfaro-LeFevre Critical Thinking book and turn in.
3. Complete quizzes for Chapter 3(culture), 6(values), 21(communicator),
30(perioperative), and 40 (rest) of Taylor Fundamentals companion website and
print out results
4. Complete a Bloch’s cultural assessment on a community client.
5. Demonstrate use of the nursing process in planning care for a client with an
actual/potential acid-base imbalance.
6. Complete DxR Wentzel Case Study: Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease.
7. Demonstrate the use of the nursing process when caring for clients with a
neurological deficit.
8. Utilize/Discuss the nursing process to provide care to a client with impaired immune
response.
9. Utilize the nursing process to care for a client with thyroid/parathyroid problems.
10. Implement a dietary and/or activities restriction plan for a client with coronary artery
disease, consider cultural differences.
11. Demonstrate the use of the nursing process to care for a client with an alteration in
cardiac output.
12. Apply the nursing process to the care of a client experiencing an actual or potential
bowel elimination disorder. (Not constipation or diarrhea).
13. Develop a plan of care for a client with a urinary disorder.
14. Observe a dialysis nurse and complete assigned paperwork.
15. Observe a cardiac cath lab nurse and complete assigned paperwork.
Pediatric Nursing
1. Complete the media link from the Ball and Bindler book chapters 13, 16, 17, and 25.
2. Role-play a pediatric admission assessment during post conference.
3. During the pediatric rotation, develop a teaching plan for the prevention of childhood
accidents directed towards the school age child. After approval implement the plan
and evaluate.
4. Demonstrate the use of play therapy with a child to help him prepare for a painful
procedure.

5. Demonstrate the use of the nursing process for a child experiencing the stress of
and adaptation to hospitalization taking into account normal growth and
development.
6. Demonstrate the use of the nursing process in providing care to a child who has
respiratory problems.
7. Demonstrate the use of the nursing process in providing care to a child experiencing
a gastrointestinal problem.
Geriatric Nursing
This information will be covered in the various clinical settings as the opportunity arises.
Psychiatric Nursing
1. Discuss the nursing process for a client in the psychiatric rotation during post-
conference.
2. Demonstrate the use of the nursing process to provide care for clients demonstrating
anger, denial, or depression.
3. During psychiatric rotation, attend and participate in a therapy session facilitated by
a licensed therapist. Discuss in post conference.
4. Complete a satisfactory Interpersonal Process Analysis during the psychiatric
rotation with a child or adult.
5. Observe restraints and seclusion rooms in a psychiatric facility. Review the facility’s
policy and procedure for the use of restraints and seclusion during post-conference.
6. Discuss the difference between acute and chronic psychiatric problems during post
conference.
7. Identify the differences between state run and private psychiatric facilities and
discuss in post conference.
8. Discuss the bill of rights for all age groups during the psychiatric rotation during post-
conference.
Course Schedule
Week 1: Dosage Competency Exam
Skills Lab – IV and Trach Care
Week 2: Skills Check off – IV and Trach Care
Week 3: Tour Terrell State Hospital
Week 4 - 15: Students will complete 16 hours each week on a rotating schedule in the
following settings.
 Labor & Delivery
 Nursery
 Acute psych
 Telemetry
 Medical
 Surgical
 Oncology
 Long-term acute care
 Pediatrics
Week 16: Final Clinical Evaluations

GRADING SYSTEM
Each clinical rotation will receive a numerical grade based on the following clinical
evaluation tool grade scale.
A = 90-86
B = 85-81
C = 80-76
D = 75-70
F = 69-0
The final clinical course grade is calculated as follows:
Rotation I 10 %
Rotation II 30%
Rotation III 60%
NOTE: All required paperwork must be submitted on the assigned date. If the student is
absent the day an assignment is due, the assignment must be completed the day after
returning. (Required paperwork refers specifically to the Data Base/Nursing Process,
Process Recording, and formal Teaching Plan.)
Students in RNSG 2560 must complete all required clinical objectives for this course in
order to pass the course. Students must also satisfactorily complete required clinical
preparation and provide patient care in a safe and professional manner. (See Student’s
Evaluation of Clinical Performance Tool for criteria.)
Rotation I grade _______ multiplied by 0.1 = _______
Rotation II grade _______ multiplied by 0.3 = _______
Rotation III grade _______ multiplied by 0.6 = _______
= _______ Final grade
Course Policies
Cellular Phones, MP3’s, Computers and Pagers: All electronic devices must be turned
off or set to silent mode during class/clinical. An exception may be made for on duty
emergency personnel. Under no circumstances should an electronic device sound
during class/clinical hours. Electronic devices may be used in the class/clinical setting
for educational purposes only. There is no instance in which any electronic device may
be used for personal communication, social networking or non-class related internet
access during class/clinical hours. The instructor will exercise his/her right to ask any
student in violation of this policy to leave the classroom/clinical setting for the rest of the
period. Repeated violations may result in dismissal from the course.

internet for non-class related matters should be necessary during class/clinical hours.
Instruct loved ones and/or employers to call the Health Occupations office (903-782-
0734) if there is an emergency. Office personnel will contact the student or the
instructor regarding the emergency. Any situation involving texting, social networking or
inappropriate internet access in the classroom may be considered academic
dishonesty. We do understand that our society has come to expect that we all be
available on a 24/7 basis; however, the student needs to inform all concerned that time
in class/clinical is devoted to the subject at hand and the student will not be available to
them during that time. Please understand the definition of “emergency,” according to
the American Heritage Dictionary, is “a situation or occurrence of a serious nature,
developing suddenly and unexpectedly, and demanding immediate action.”

leave the class/clinical area for the remainder of that class/clinical period. This may
result in the student being counted tardy or absent for that class. Repeated violations of
this policy may result in dismissal from the course.
Withdrawal
A student may withdraw from a nursing course by using the procedure outlined in the
Coordinator of the Associate Degree Nursing Program. After withdrawing from a
nursing course, a student must reapply for admission to the Associate Degree Nursing
Program in order to enroll in any subsequent nursing course.
dropped nursing course.

Students who have unsatisfactory classroom performance will be placed on academic
probation.
Unsatisfactory classroom performance is defined as a test average ≤ 72.

will be specified in the documentation. If the student does not show improvement,

and the student.
course faculty. This review will be recorded on the document entitled, "Report of Status
Review". If the probation criteria has been met, the student's probation is lifted. Failure
to meet probationary criteria will result in further disciplinary action up to and including
termination from the program. Probation will be contained within each course.
Dismissal
student shows gross negligence, unsafe nursing care, lack of personal or professional
integrity, breach of patient confidentiality, or commits a criminal act..
"Unsafe nursing" is defined as any act of omission or commission which places the
that are absolutely essential for those entering the nursing profession. Actions taken
and attitudes expressed while in the student role are considered indicative of behaviors
to be expected of the graduate. The student will be given the opportunity to discuss the
incident(s) with the course team faculty.
Grounds for Immediate Dismissal from Program

A student is subject to immediate dismissal from the nursing program and failure of the
course in the following situations:
and on tests or written assignments (both parties), making false entries in record
pertaining to the giving of medications, treatments or nursing care, or failing to do
so in any circumstance that shows disregard for patient safety or welfare.
d. The use of alcohol, illegal drugs, or misuse of prescription or any other drugs
during school activities or on school property, or reporting to class/clinical under
e. Appropriating, in connection with the practice of nursing, medication, supplies,
equipment, or personal items of the patient/client, employer, or any other person or

notification of the Division Chair of Health Occupations. If the Division Chair is
absent, the Vice President of Workforce Education must be notified prior to
dismissal.

Grievance with the team leader or Division Chair of Health Occupation.
Grievance Procedure

ATTENDANCE POLICIES
Associate Degree Nursing students will follow the absence and tardy policies of Paris
because of the nature of the nursing experience:

tardy. Students missing more than 60 minutes will be given an absence.
A tardy or absence such as arriving late or leaving early may occur at any point
during the day.
instructor.
5. The ADN program expects students to attend all classes/clinicals regularly and
Students will be allowed one excused clinical absence in RNSG 1262, RNSG 2560
and RNSG 2561. The only excused absences are for:
*illness certified by a personal physician
*serious illness or death in student's immediate family, *being away from the campus
with the sanction of the College
*court appearance with prior approval of Team
Unexcused absences will be required to be made up in one of two ways as

determined by the ADN faculty team each semester:
In the clinical setting – clinical days will be made up as assigned by the clinical
instructor and may be any day of the week including Saturday.
In the laboratory setting (Paris Campus) – clinical days will be made up as assigned
by the clinical instructor from 8:00 am – 4:30 pm and will consist of completing eight
hours of required assignments pertaining to the clinical setting missed.
If a student does not attend their assigned make-up day it will be considered another
absence, and further disciplinary action may be implemented.
an “extenuating circumstance absence.” The student may request no more than two
(2) faculty review of absences per course per semester. Any further

absences/tardies may result in failure of the program, or withdrawal if prior to the
drop date. If the ADN faculty team denies the student an extenuating circumstance
absence, then the student must make a request to the Team Leader/Instructor or the
Committee.

Extenuating Circumstances Committee, composed of student, student advocate (if
desired), course team leader, one AD or LVN faculty, PJC/staff person, curriculum
coordinator and/or Division Chair of Health Occupations.
an “extenuating circumstance absence.”
The student may request no more than two (2) faculty review of absences per
course per semester. Any further absences/tardies may result in failure of the
program, or withdrawal if prior to the drop date. If the ADN faculty team denies the
student an extenuating circumstance absence, then the student must make a
request to the Team Leader/Instructor or the Division Chair of Health Occupations,
to meet with the Extenuating Circumstances Committee.
A. Preventable occurrences are not considered extenuating circumstances.
B. The faculty calling the meeting will write the minutes of the meeting, with
copies for the student, team leader, and minutes notebook.
C. A physician's physical condition statement may be required to return to
clinical.
D. All tardies (time missed) will be discussed in the Extenuating Circumstances
Committee meeting in order to identify trends.
E. A 2/3 majority vote of the committee will be required for the student request of
F. When the decision is made by the committee to allow the student to continue,
the student will be required to formulate a contingency plan to help prevent
further time lost.
G. If the Extenuating Circumstance Committee does not agree to allow the
student to continue, the student will be allowed to withdraw up to the college
designated date of the twelfth week of the semester (and the 4th week in
summer semesters). After the withdrawal date, the students may not withdraw
and termination from the program will result.

When a student must be late or absent from the clinical, that individual must notify the
clinical area by telephone. If the assignment is in a hospital, the agency must be notified
prior to beginning of shift.
When calling, the student should attempt to contact the person in charge (charge

nurse), but if this person is unavailable, speak to the next person in line of authority. The
student should then convey his/her message be relayed to the instructor when he/she
arrives. The student must obtain the name and position of the person contacted about
the absence.
Test review will be held the Thursday following the exam in the following manner.
During the lunch hour, students will have the opportunity to take their test report and
compare their answers to the test key with provided rationales. Students may only bring
their test report into the room. They will be provided with a red pen and a colored-blank
paper to write any test challenges. The student must write his/her name on the
challenge paper in order for the challenge to be accepted. Challenges will only be
accepted at this time. The faculty team will review all challenges following completion of
the self-review. Students will be notified if a change is made to the grades based on the
challenges and if so will be provided with a corrected test report.
Students who make 75 or less on an exam will be required to attend classroom test
review as scheduled on the course calendar.
Students who have a test average of 72 or below will be placed on academic probation
and be required to attend remediation as scheduled.
During the next ten months you should complete a minimum of 5,000 NCLEX-RN Level
practice questions. These questions should be completed on a computer in blocks of
100-200 questions at a sitting. Students will be required to complete a minimum of 400
questions (100 per unit exam) in the Summer semester and 1000 questions (200 per
unit exam) in the Fall and Spring semesters (total: 2400). Students will be required to
submit a test report either 200 per report or (2) 100 question reports due at exam time
according to the course calendar. Test report grades will be averaged and worth 2% of
the course grade. Incomplete assignments will not be accepted for a grade and reports
not submitted prior to exams will receive a “0”. This is a graded assignment and must be
completed independently.
Dosage Calculation Competency Testing

Students will be tested each semester to determine dosage calculation competency. A
20-question test will be administered at the beginning of each semester. Students must
score 90%. The students will be given three opportunities to achieve a 90%.
If a student scores below 90% on either of the first two tests, remediation and/or tutoring
must be completed before retesting.

If a student does not achieve 90% competency, he/she will be required to drop all
nursing courses.
Students may use label factor method, ratio proportion, or dimensional analysis to
calculate dosage for examinations or clinical.
DOSAGE CALCULATION COMPETENCY TEST PLAN

Type of Problem RNSG 1227 RNSG 2514 RNSG 2535
one step PO 2 1 1
two step PO 3 2 2
one step liquid 2 1 1
two step liquid 3 2 2
IV Flow rate or drip rate 2 2 2
IV time remaining 3 3 2
IV titration MG/KG/Time _____ 4 4
Pedi Doses MG/KG/Day 3 3 4
Units 2 2 2
Require Rounding (6) (6) (6)
Total Problems 20 20 20
Required Score 90% 90% 90%

crucial part of the learning experience. The student development center is staffed with
professional counselors who are available to assist students.
Clinical Screen (Drug and Criminal Background)

Students will be required to submit to drug screen test and criminal background checks.
The Paris Junior College Health Occupations will follow the policies and procedures of
the clinical facilities regarding results. Students with positive drug screens will not be
allowed to attend clinical resulting in failure of the course. Students with positive
background checks will follow the rule of the Nursing Practice Act and Practice and
Procedures of each facility being utilized by PJC nursing students.
ADA Statement
Counseling/ Advising Center by calling 903.782.0426 (Paris campus), 903.454.9333

Paris Junior College Faculty Norman Gilbert
Term: 101S Office 903.782.0738
Section: 01 ngilbert@parisjc.edu
Course SRGT 1441

Course Surgical Procedures I
Course Description
Introduction to surgical pathology and its relationship to surgical procedures. Emphasis
on surgical procedures related to general, OB/GYN, genitourinary, and orthopedic
surgical specialties incorporating instruments, equipment and supplies required for safe
patient care.
Prerequisite(s): HITT 1305, BIOL 2401, BIOL 2402, HPRS 2300, HPRS 2301, BIOL
2420, SRGT 1405, SRGT 1409

1. Surgical Technology for the Surgical Technologist A Positive Care Approach 2008, 3rd ed.
Caruthers, Delmar Publishing. ISBN: 978-1-4180-5168-6
2. Study Guide for Surgical Technology for the Surgical Technologist 2008. Junge, Delmar
Publishing. ISBN: 978-1-4180-5170-9
3. Differentiating Surgical Instruments, 2005. Rutherford, F. A. Davis Publishing.
ISBN: 0-8036-1224-9
4. Medical Dictionary: Either, Mosby’s Medical, Nursing, & Allied Health Dictionary,
ISBN: 0-323-01430-5, or Taber’s Cyclopedic Medical Dictionary, ISBN: 0-8036-1207-9
(any recent edition).
Program Outcomes
1. Demonstrate effective communications skills when interacting with individuals and
members of the surgical team including use of appropriate medical terminology in
the surgical setting.
2. Apply basic understanding of human anatomy, physiology, and pathophysiology in
the perioperative role of the surgical technologist.
3. Demonstrate professional accountability by recognizing legal/ethical situations,
maintaining confidentiality, and by identifying the surgical technologist’s role.
4. Demonstrate the application of the principles of surgical asepsis and provide for
optimal patient care in the OR.
5. Demonstrate basic surgical case preparation skills and perform the role of first scrub
on all basic surgical cases.
Course # (SRGT 1441) – Norman Gilbert Page 1 of 10

C:\Users\ElaPit\Documents\Syllabi for 101s\Word to convert to PDF\SRGT1441 01 101S.doc
Course Outcomes
1. Relate the relevant anatomy and pathology to indications for selected surgical
procedures.
2. Summarize patient preparation for selected surgical procedures.
3. Select appropriate instruments, equipment, supplies and continue to utilize basic
concepts of pharmacology for selected surgical procedures.
4. Reconstruct the sequence for selected surgical procedures.
5. Identify expected outcomes and possible complications for selected procedures.
6. Demonstrate professional accountability by providing safe effective care.
Learning Objectives
General Surgery
1. Recognize and explain the learning format for basic surgical interventions.
2. Discuss general surgery as a specialty and identify the areas of the body that are
included.
3. Review the relevant anatomy, and physiology of the gastrointestinal system,
including the thyroid and breast.
4. Identify the names and uses of general surgery instruments, supplies, and drugs.
5. Discuss the preoperative diagnosis and preparation related to general surgery.
6. List and explain the uses, advantages, disadvantages of different types of incisions
that are used to gain access to the abdomen and include opening and closing
techniques.
7. Utilizing the basic surgical intervention format, describe an overview of the different
types of hernias and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and
expected outcomes.
8. Utilizing the basic surgical intervention format, describe an overview of surgery of
the alimentary canal and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and
expected outcomes.
the gastric area, and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and
expected outcomes.
the small bowel, and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and
expected outcomes.
the colon, and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and expected
outcomes.
the liver, and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and expected
outcomes.
the pancreas and spleen, and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care
and expected outcomes.
the vascular system, and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and
expected outcomes.

15. Describe an overview of surgery and discuss the purpose, surgical intervention,
postoperative care and expected outcomes.
the breasts, and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and expected
outcomes.
the liver, and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and expected
outcomes.
Orthopedic Surgery
1. Review the anatomy and physiology of the musculoskeletal system and identify
certain types of pathology that prompts surgical intervention.
2. Discuss the preoperative diagnostic procedures including the preparation for
orthopedic procedures.
3. Identify orthopedic instruments, supplies, and special equipment used during an
orthopedic intervention.
4. Discuss intraoperative preparation: surgical site identification, patient positioning,
site disinfection, and drapes.
5. Utilizing the basic surgical interventions – format describe an overview of bone
grafting and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and postoperative care
including expected outcomes.
6. Utilizing the basic surgical interventions – format describe an overview of a knee
arthroscopy and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and postoperative care
7. Utilizing the basic surgical interventions – format describe an overview of an
Arthroscopic repair of a torn meniscus and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative
and postoperative care including expected outcomes.
8. Utilizing the basic surgical interventions – format describe an overview of a total
knee arthroplasty and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and postoperative
care including expected outcomes.
endoscopic carpal tunnel release and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and
postoperative care including expected outcomes.
external fixation of a Colles’ fracture and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative
11. Utilizing the basic surgical interventions – format describe an overview of an internal
K-wire fixation of a Colles’ fracture and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and
12. Utilizing the basic surgical interventions – format describe an overview of humerus
fracture reduction and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and postoperative
care including expected outcomes.
arthroscopy of the shoulder and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and
14. Utilizing the basic surgical interventions – format describe an overview of a repair of

a rotator cuff and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and postoperative care
15. Utilizing the basic surgical interventions – format describe an overview of a total hip
arthroplasty and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and postoperative care
16. Utilizing the basic surgical interventions – format describe an overview of an ORIF
of the femur and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and postoperative care
intramedullary rodding of the femur and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and
17. Intramedullary Rodding of the Femur
18. Utilizing the basic surgical interventions – format describe an overview of a
bunionectomy with hammer toe correction and discuss the preoperative,
intraoperative and postoperative care including expected outcomes.
arthrodesis of the ankle and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and
20. Utilizing the basic surgical interventions – format describe an overview of a soft
tissue hand procedure and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and
amputation of the lower extremity and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and
Obstetric and Gynecologic Surgery

1. Review the relevant anatomy and physiology of the female reproductive system that
prompts surgical intervention and the related terminology.
3. Discuss the intraoperative preparation of the patient undergoing an obstetric or
gynecologic procedures.
4. Identify the names and uses of basic instrument sets used in obstetric and
gynecologic surgery.
5. Discuss the pathology of fertility and obstetrical related conditions.
6. Utilizing the basic surgical interventions – format describe an overview of basic
obstetrical surgical procedures and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and
7. Describe the common features of common gynecologic pathology and discuss the
gynecologic examination.
8. List common reproductive organs and typical gynecological procedures.
9. Compare and contrast the typical incisions used in gynecologic abdominal surgery.
10. Utilizing the basic surgical interventions – format describe an overview of the basic
laparaoscopy and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and postoperative care
11. Utilizing the basic surgical interventions – format describe an overview of the basic
colposcopy and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and postoperative care

hysteroscopy and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and postoperative care
13. Utilizing the basic surgical interventions – format describe an overview of the
marsupialization of Bartholin’s gland cyst and discuss the preoperative,
14. Utilizing the basic surgical interventions – format describe an overview of a simple
vuvlectomy and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and postoperative care
anterior and posterior repair (colporrhaphy) and discuss the preoperative,
16. List and describe the different treatments and diagnostic tests involved with the
presence of a cervical lesion or condition.
17. Utilizing the basic surgical interventions – format describe an overview of a dilation
and curettage/suction curettage and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and
myomectomy and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and postoperative care
19. Utilizing the basic surgical interventions – format describe an overview of a total
abdominal hysterectomy and bilateral salpingo-oophorectomy and discuss the
preoperative, intraoperative and postoperative care including expected outcomes.
20. Compare and contrast the vaginal and laparoscopic hysterectomy with the total
abdominal hysterectomy.
21. Define and describe a total pelvic exenteration as a treatment for recurrent
reproductive cancers.
Opthalmic/Otorhinolaryngologic Surgery
1. Review the relevant anatomy, and physiology of the eye.
2. Discuss the pathology that would require surgical intervention of the eye.
3. Identify the ophthalmic instruments and equipment used in eye surgery.
4. Utilizing the basic surgical intervention format, describe an overview of strabismus
correction (recession/resection) and discuss the surgical interventions,
5. Utilizing the basic surgical intervention format, describe an overview of scleral
buckle procedures and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and
expected outcomes.
6. Utilizing the basic surgical intervention format, describe an overview of a
dacryocystorhinostomy, and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care
7. Utilizing the basic surgical intervention format, describe an overview of enucleation
and evisceration of the eye and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative
care and expected outcomes.
keratoplasty, and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and

expected outcomes.
9. Utilizing the basic surgical intervention format, describe an overview of cataract
extraction and phacoemulsification, and discuss the surgical interventions,
10. Utilizing the basic surgical intervention format, describe an overview of a vitrectomy,
and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and expected outcomes.
11. Review the relevant anatomy and physiology of the ear.
12. Discuss the pathology that would require surgical intervention of the ear.
13. Identify the diagnostic procedures and test for the ear.
14. Identify the instruments, drugs, supplies and equipment used in ear surgery.
15. Discuss the use of various grafts used to repair or replace diseased ossicles or
tympanic membranes.
myringotomy, and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and
expected outcomes.
myringoplasty/tympanoplasty, and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative
care expected outcomes and include the classifications for tympanoplasty.
mastoidectomy, and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and
expected outcomes.
stapedectomy, and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and
expected outcomes.
20. Discuss cochlear implants.
21. Review the relevant anatomy and physiology of the nose and sinuses.
22. Discuss the pathology that would require surgical intervention of the nose and
paranasal sinuses.
23. Identify the diagnostic procedures and test for the nose and paranasal sinuses.
24. Discuss special preoperative considerations and identify the instruments, drugs,
supplies and equipment used in nasal and paranasal sinus surgeries.
submucous resection (SMR) / septoplasty/tubinectomy, and discuss the surgical
interventions, postoperative care and expected outcomes.
polypectomy/intranasal antrostomy/ removal of foreign body/internal maxilliary
artery ligation, and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and
expected outcomes.
27. Utilizing the basic surgical intervention format, describe an overview of a Caldwell-
Luc and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and expected
outcomes.
28. Utilizing the basic surgical intervention format, describe an overview of various
sinus procedures and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and
expected outcomes.
29. Utilizing the basic surgical intervention format, describe an overview of a rigid sinus
endoscopy and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and expected

outcomes.
30. Review the relevant anatomy and physiology of the upper aerodigestive tract.
31. Discuss the pathology that would require surgical intervention of the upper
aerodigestive tract.
32. Identify the diagnostic procedures and test for the aerodigestive tract.
33. Discuss special preoperative considerations and identify the instruments, drugs,
supplies and equipment used in aerodigestive surgeries.
tonsillectomy/adenoidectomy/incision and drainage of a peritonsillar abscess and
discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and expected outcomes.
35. Utilizing the basic surgical intervention format, describe an overview of an
uvulopalatopharyngoplasty and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative
care and expected outcomes.
36. Utilizing the basic surgical intervention format, describe an overview of a rigid
laryngoscopy and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care and
expected outcomes.
37. Utilizing the basic surgical intervention format, describe an overview of various
endoscopic procedures and discuss the surgical interventions, postoperative care
38. Utilizing the basic surgical intervention format, describe an overview of a radical
neck dissection with mandibulectomy and discuss the surgical interventions,
Genitourinary Surgery
1. Identify the anatomy of the genitourinary system and review the relevant
pathophysiology that prompts surgical procedures for the genitourinary system.
2. Discuss the diagnostic tests that are specific for the genitourinary system.
3. Discuss the preoperative and intraoperative preparation of the patient undergoing a
genitourinary procedure.
4. Compare and contrast the incisional options with genitourinary surgeries.
5. Discuss an adrenalectomy and give a general view of the procedure including
nephrectomy and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and postoperative care
7. Discuss renal transplantation and describe a general overview of the procedure
including the donor and recipient.
8. Describe the methods for removing urinary calculi.
9. Discuss the surgical technologist’s role in a cystoscopy and cystostomy.
10. Utilizing the basic surgical interventions – format describe an overview of a radical
cystectomy with an ileal conduite and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and
Marshall-Marchetti-Krantz procedure and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative
12. List and explain procedures utilizing transurethral endoscopy of the genitourinary
tract.

orchiectomy / orchiopexy and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and
15. Describe the procedure for a vasectomy and a vasovasostomy
suprapubic prostatectomy and discuss the preoperative, intraoperative and
17. Describe the preoperative, intraoperative and postoperative considerations for an
epispadias / hypospadias repair, hydrocelectomy, and a penile implant.
Course Schedule
Week 1: Orientation, General Surgery
Week 2: General Surgery continued
Week 3: General Surgery continued
Week 4: Exam, Orthopedics
Week 5: Orthopedics continued
Week 8: Exam, OB/GYN
Week 9: OB/GYN continued
Week 10: OB/GYN continued
Week 11: Exam, Eye/ENT
Week 12: Eye/ENT continued
Week 13: Holiday
Week 14: Exam, Urology
Week 15: Urology continued
Week 16: Final Exam
Lab:
Week 1: Open Cholecystectomy with cholangiogram, CBDE with choledochoscopy
Laparoscopic cholecystectomy
Week 2: Small bowel resection, Gastric bypass Colonoscopy, Colectomy, Colostomy,
APR, Open/Laparoscopic appendectomy
Week 3: Herniorrhaphy (umbilical, ventral, incisional, and inguinal), Breast Biopsy,
Lumpectomy, Mastectomy, Thyroidectomy
Week 4: Orthopedic instruments, External fixation, ORIF, Verbalize adjustments for:
Bone graft, Colles’ fracture, AKA, BKA
Week 5: Carpal Tunnel Release, Rotator cuff repair, Verbalize adjustments for:
Shoulder arthroscopy/arthroplasty (TSA)
Week 6: Total Knee Arthroplasty, Total Hip Arthroplasty, Verbalize adjustments for
Knee Arthroscopy
Week 7: Lab with Orthopedic Sales Representative
Week 8: Colposcopy, Hysteroscopy, Laparoscopy
Week 9: Cesarean Section, TAH w/ BSO, Verbalize adjustment for: Ectopic pregnancy
resolution, Micro tubal reanastomosis, Pelvic exenteration

Week 10: Vaginal hysterectomy w/A&P repair, D&C w/one biopsy, Verbalize
adjustments for: Endometrial ablation, Vulvectomy, Balloon therapy,
Laparoscopic assisted vaginal hysterectomy
Week 11: Strabismus Correction, Cataract Extraction, Vitrectomy, Enucleation
Week 12: T &A, BMT, Caldwell-Luc, Parotidectomy, UPPP, Laryngoscopy, Thyroglossal
Duct Cystectomy, Radical Neck Dissection
Week 13: Holiday
Week 14: Cystoscopy, Circumcision, Verbalize adjustments for: Orchiopexy, Vasectomy
Week 15: Nephrectomy, Verbalize adjustments for Adrenalectomy
Week 16: None

In order to pass SRGT 1441, the student must achieve a final average grade of 70 or
Daily Grades (averaged) 20%
Daily grades may consist of written assignments, critical thinking exercises, lab
exercises, and unannounced quizzes (if you are absent, an unannounced quiz can not
be made up) and computer exercises.
Late assignments will have 10 points deducted for every class day that it is late, unless
excused absence is documented.
exams will be fill-in the blank or essay.

Course Policies
Attendance Policy:
Daily class attendance is critical for the successful completion of this course.
Withdrawal requests must be initiated by the student. Failure to take the final exam will
result in a grade of "F" in the course. The student is allowed 2 absences per course per
semester. Students who are absent two days or less will be required to make up all lab
activities. Please see the Surgical Technology Student Handbook for further details
regarding absences and tardiness.
Grievance Procedure
Surgical Technology Program. Grade disputes should be resolved at the lowest level

or Director of Health Occupations if the team leader is not available.
members of the faculty-as-a-whole. The faculty vote will be taken by ballot and
tallied by the Director and a PJC non-Surgical Technology faculty/staff
member. Failure will require a two-thirds majority vote of the faculty. The
conference will be recorded on tape and on a Grievance Conference Report
form, a copy of which goes to the student and the original placed in the
Confidential File.
STEP 3. If a resolution is still not reached, the student may request the Director to
obtain an appointment with the Vice President of Workforce Education.
scheduled meeting.

The CONFIDENTIAL FILE will be kept in the office of the Director of Health
Occupations. Access to the file will be controlled by the director and limited to the
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Faculty Norman Gilbert
Term: 101S Office 903.782.0738
Section: 01 ngilbert@parisjc.edu
Course SRGT 2461

Course Title: Clinical
Course Description
A health-related work-based learning experience that enables the student to apply
specialized occupational theory, skills, and concepts. Direct supervision is provided by
the clinical professional (faculty or preceptor). Clinical education is an unpaid learning
experience.
Prerequisite(s): HITT 1305, BIOL 2401, BIOL 2402, HPRS 2300, HPRS 2301, BIOL
2420, SRGT 1405, SRGT 1409

ISBN: 0-8036-1224-9
Program Outcomes
ISBN: 0-8036-1224-9
Course Outcomes
equipment, procedures, regulations, laws and interactions within and among

surgical setting.
2. Demonstrates legal and ethical behaviors, as well as safety practices.
3. Demonstrates interpersonal and teamwork skills, and appropriate written and verbal
communications skills using the terminology of the surgical technologist.
Learning Objectives
1. Exercise the critical thought processes and priorities required in daily clinical
practice.
6. Adapt procedures to meet physical and cultural needs of patients, including age and
disease-specific considerations.
9. Demonstrate competency in the principles of medical asepsis and sterile
technologies.
10. Prepare the technologies and methodologies for the performance of case-specific
surgical procedure.
Course Schedule
Weekly experiences for the student vary based on location caseload.

Grading Criteria
In order to pass SRGT 2461, the student must achieve a final average grade of 70 or
higher. By the end of the program (upon completion of SRGT 2461 and SRGT 2462)
the student must have satisfactorily completed 125 cases in the scrub role (not the
observation scrub role.) No less than 45 cases must be considered solo or
independent performance. Procedures that are observed or scrubbed in a role less
than 70% of the performance criteria will not count toward meeting the clinical case
requirements and are considered observation scrub assignments. For the case to be
considered first scrub solo, 90% of the criteria should be met.
Of independent cases (Solo Scrub), the following must be met:

10 should be Level - I - Core cases*
15 should be Level - II - Core cases*
10 should be Level - I - Specialty cases*
10 should be Level - II - Specialty cases*
(* see case designation below)
The final grade average will consist of:
Average of Surgical Case Reports (3) 30%

Instructor Evaluations during Clinical Attendance 30%
Preceptor Evaluations 30%
Instructor Assignments (WB) 10%
100% , less attendance penalty points
(see attendance policy)
Late assignments will have 10 points deducted for every class day that it is late, unless
excused absence is documented.

*Absence due to extreme circumstances (i.e. hospitalization or mva) may be considered

extenuating upon board review.
*Specialty Procedures
Specialty cases are those procedures that fall under the heading of certain Surgical
Specialties as determined by the Accreditation Review Council on Education in Surgical
Technology, ARC-ST. Those surgical procedures include the following:
Eye
Peripheral Vascular
Cardiothoracic
Neurological
Plastic, Reconstructive or Cosmetic
Oral and Maxillofacial
*Core Procedures
Procedures of all other types are considered “Core” by the ARC-ST. Core procedures
include the following:
General
Orthopedic
Ear, Nose, Throat (ENT)
Obstetrics and Gynecological
Genitourinary
Course Policies
Attendance Policy
Assigned clinical attendance is mandatory for successful completion of this course. All
missed clinical days must be made-up, involving pre-arrangement with the PJC
Clinical Coordinator and the O.R Supervisor. The student is allowed two (2) absences
per semester (with corresponding make-up days) without penalty. After two (2)
absences, missed clinical days will severely affect the student clinical grade,
even when made-up at a later date*. Points will be deducted directly from the

post-clinical grade for each occurrence (5pts for occurrence 3-4, 10pts for each
additional occurrence).
Final course grades below 70% will prevent student advancement to the next
clinical course. Withdrawal requests must be initiated by the student.
Grievance Procedure
Surgical Technology Program. Grade disputes should be resolved at the lowest level
or Director of Health Occupations if the team leader is not available..
members of the faculty-as-a-whole. The faculty vote will be taken by ballot and
tallied by the Director and a PJC non-Surgical Technology faculty/staff
member. Failure will require a two-thirds majority vote of the faculty. The
conference will be recorded on tape and on a Grievance Conference Report
form, a copy of which goes to the student and the original placed in the
Confidential File.
STEP 3. If a resolution is still not reached, the student may request the Director to
obtain an appointment with the Vice President of Workforce Education.
scheduled meeting.

The CONFIDENTIAL FILE will be kept in the office of the Director of Health
Occupations. Access to the file will be controlled by the director and limited to the

ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Faculty Debbie Bookout
Term: 101S Office 903.782.0736
Section: 01 dbookout@parisjc.edu
Course VNSG 1409

Nursing in Health and Illness II
Course Description
This course is an introduction to common health problems requiring medical and
surgical interventions. Emphasis is on the continued utilization of the nursing process in
planning care for clients experiencing system problems involving gastrointestinal, fluid
and electrolyte, sensory, musculoskeletal and respiratory disorders. Pharmacological
concepts and dosage calculations are also integrated throughout the course. (Clients
include adults and pediatrics)
Credits: SCH = 4 lecture and 1 laboratory hours per week
Prerequisite(s): VNSG 1304, VNSG 1323

Ball & Bindler, (2008), Pediatric Nursing, Caring for Children, (4th ed.), (2008)
ISBN: 978-0-1322-0871-0
Curren, A.M. & Munday, L.D., (2010) Dimensional Analysis for Meds, (4th ed.), W. I.
Publications. ISBN: 978-1-4354-3867-5
Deqlin, Vallerand, (2009), Davis’s Drug Guide for Nurses, (11th ed.), F.A. Davis
ISBN: 978-0-8036-1912-8
Doenges, Marilyn, Moorhouse, Mary Frances, Murr, Alice (2008) Nursing Diagnosis
Manual: Planning, Individualizing & Documenting Client Care, (2nd ed.) F. A. Davis
ISBN: 978-0-8036-1859-6
Holland, Norman & Adams, Michael Patrick (2007), Core Concepts in Pharmacology,
(2nd ed.) Prentice Hall ISBN: 978-0-1317-1473-1
Leeuwen, Poelhuis-Leth, Davis’s Comprehensive Handbook of Laboratory & Diagnostic

Test with Nursing Implications, (3rd ed.), F. A. Davis ISBN: 978-0-8036-1826-8
Silvestri, Linda (2010), Saunders Comprehensive Review for NCLEX-PN, (4th ed.).
Elsview-Saunders ISBN: 978-1-4160-4730-8
Smeltzer, Bare, Hinkle, Cheever, (2010), Brunner & Suddarth’s Textbook of Medical-
Course # (VNSG 1409) – Debbie Bookout Page 1 of 11

C:\Users\ElaPit\Documents\Syllabi for 101s\Word to convert to PDF\VNSG1409 01 101S.doc
Surgical Nursing, (12th ed.), Lippincott ISBN: 978-0-7817-8590-7
Smeltzer, Bare, Hinkle, Cheever, (2010), Study Guide to Accompany Brunner &
Suddarth’s Textbook of Medical-Surgical Nursing, (12th ed.), Lippincott
ISBN: 978-0-7817-8594-5
Taylor, C., Lillis, C. J., & LeMone, P., (2007) Fundamentals of Nursing, (6th ed.).
Taylor, C., Lillis, C. J., & LeMone, P., (2007) Study Guide to Accompany Fundamentals
of Nursing, (6th ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott. ISBN: 978-0-7817-7569-4
Vernes, D. (2009) Taber's Cyclopedic Medical Dictionary, (21st ed.). Philadelphia: F.A.
Davis. ISBN: 978-0-8036-1559-5
Videbeck, S., (2011), Psychiatric Mental Health Nursing, (5th ed.), Lippincott.
ISBN: 978-1-60547-861-6
Program Outcomes
1. Student will provide safe direct patient care at the bedside in relatively stable
situations and progress to semi-complex and complex situations with supervision.
2. Student will participate in the nursing process by:
a. Making observations and gathering data
b. Contributing to development of planned approaches
c. Implementing planned care safely and skillfully
d. Evaluating the care given
3. Using communication skills, the student will collect date, provide psychological
support, identify cultural and spiritual client needs and participate in health teaching
4. The student will practice within the legal/ethical framework of Vocational Nursing
Course Outcomes
1. Compare and contrast normal physiology of body systems to pathologic variations in
the client with common medical-surgical health problems.
2. Compare and contrast diagnostic evaluation and treatment of the client with
common medical-surgical health problems.
3. Incorporate nutrition, drug therapy, and nursing interventions in developing a plan of
care to meet the needs of the client experiencing common medical-surgical health
problems.
4. Utilize the nursing process in caring for the client with common medical-surgical
health problems.
5. Plan basic teaching/learning activities in relation to identified client healthcare needs.
6. Demonstrate, in the campus laboratory, the performance of basic nursing skills with
identification of expected outcomes.
7. Relate the psycho-social-cultural needs of the client with common medical-
surgical health problems.

Learning Objectives
Gastrointestinal System
1. Describe the data to be collected for a client with a digestive disorder.
2. State the nursing responsibilities in the care of a client undergoing diagnostic tests
and procedures for disorders of the digestive system.
3. Describe the client who is experiencing disorders of ingestion with emphasis on
nursing management.
4. Demonstrate the knowledge, skills and rationales required to insert, remove and
manage nasogasteric and enteral tubes.
5. State the nursing responsibilities in the care of a client receiving parenteral nutrition
(PN).
6. Utilize the nursing process in the management of an adult and pediatric client who is
experiencing a disorder affecting digestion and absorption.
7. Plan care for an adult or pediatric client who is experiencing disorders of absorption
and elimination.
8. Define and describe treatment for an adult experiencing anal disorders.
9. Discuss the care and nursing responsibilities for an adult or pediatric client
experiencing an inflammatory disorder of the digestive system.
10. Construct a plan of care for a pediatric client with a digestive dysfunction and / or
disorder.
11. Discuss the nursing management and discharge teaching of a client who has a fecal
diversion.
12. Relate the pharmacologic management of a client with a gastrointestinal disorder
with emphasis on action, uses, adverse reactions, and nursing interventions.
Sensory System
1. Identify the data to be collected in the nursing assessment of the eye in the adult
and pediatric client.
2. Identify the nursing responsibilities for clients having diagnostic studies / procedures
or treatment for eye disorders.
3. Discuss impaired vision, refractive errors, low vision and blindness including
assessment and diagnostic testing, medical and nursing management.
4. Recognize and describe the following eye conditions.
5. Discuss orbital ocular trauma medical and nursing care of a client with a traumatic
eye injury and discuss prevention of injuries of an adult and pediatric client.
6. Recognize and plan care for a client who has cataracts.
7. Recognize and describe the medical treatment and nursing care of a client with
glaucoma.
8. Discuss the medical and nursing management of a client with retinal and corneal
problems.
9. Relate the pharmacologic management of a client with an eye disorder including
action, classification, uses, adverse reactions, and nursing interventions.
10. Identify the data to be collected when assessing the ability to hear.
11. Identify the nursing responsibilities for clients having auditory and vestibular studies.
12. Discuss the following therapeutic measures.
13. Utilize the nursing process when planning care for the hearing impaired adult and

pediatric client including psychosocial management.
14. Discuss the medical treatment and nursing care for clients with a disorder of the
external ear.
15. Utilize the nursing process to plan care for a client with a middle ear disorder
including surgical intervention.
16. Plan care for clients with an inner ear disorder.
17. Discuss the nursing care of a client with age related changes of the ear and nursing
considerations of Ototoxicity.
Musculoskeletal Disorders
1. Discuss the subjective and objective findings used to assess a client's
musculoskeletal system.
2. Identify diagnostic tests performed on clients with musculoskeletal problems and
describe the client care that is necessary for each test.
3. Identify various types of arthritis and discuss the nursing care of each.)
4. Discuss nursing care of the client undergoing a joint replacement.
5. Describe the pathology treatment for the following connective tissue disorders.
6. Recognize and define care for the following connective tissue disorders.
7. Discuss common pediatric musculoskeletal problems of the lower extremity including
nursing management.
8. Recognize and define the listed pediatric musculoskeletal disorders.
9. Differentiate between contusions, strains, sprains, and joint dislocations.
10. Compare the various types of fractures including medical and nursing care.
11. Identify the indications, types, complications and age-related factors for a client with
an amputation and the nursing process of the patient undergoing an amputation.
12. Use the nursing process as a framework for care of the client with cancer of the
bone.
BASIC CLINICAL SKILLS
13. Compare the treatment modalities for a client with a musculoskeletal dysfunction,
include both the adult and pediatric client.
14. Ambulating with an Assistive Device.)
Respiratory Disorders
1. Identify the data to be collected, technique of physical examination of clients with
respiratory disorders for both the adult and pediatric client.
2. Describe the diagnostic test or procedures used to assess respiratory function in
clients with respiratory disorders including the adult and pediatric client and nursing
responsibilities.
3. Utilize the nursing process to plan care for a client with a respiratory problem.
4. Discuss the listed upper respiratory disorders including medical and nursing
management.
5. Construct a plan of care for adult and pediatric clients with the following lower
respiratory diseases.
6. Define Pleurisy and discuss nursing care.
7. Explain the pathophysiology, clinical manifestations, medical and nursing treatment
for the listed respiratory disorders for the adult and pediatric client.

8. Recognize and describe the following respiratory disorders in the adult and
pediatric client.
9. Use the nursing process as a framework for care of the client with cancer of the
lung.
10. Discuss common respiratory system injuries and their medical and nursing
management.
11. Discuss the care of a client having thoracic surgery.
12. Describe the actions, uses, major side effects, and nursing interventions of selected
respiratory drugs.
13. Compare nursing management of a client with an acid base imbalance.
BASIC CLINICAL SKILLS
14. Demonstrate the correct nursing management of a client with chest tubes.
ADVANCED CLINICAL SKILLS
15. Demonstrate the ability to perform nasopharyngeal and oropharyngeal suctioning.
Course Schedule
Week 1: Orientation, Gastrointestinal Disorders
Week 2: Gastrointestinal Disorders continued
Week 5: Unit I Exam, Sensory System
Week 6: Sensory System continued
Week 7: Unit II Exam, Musculoskeletal Disorders
Week 8: Musculoskeletal Disorders continued
Week 9: Unit III Exam, Medication Workshop
Week 10: Medication Workshop continued
Week 11: Medication Workshop Exam, Respiratory Disorders
Week 12: Respiratory Disorders continued
Week 15: Unit IV Exam, Course Evaluations
Week 16: Final Exam
Lab Schedule
Week 1: Demonstration: NGT insertion, NGT irrigation, NGT removal, Bolus Feeding
Week 2: Core Concepts in Pharmacology: Drugs for Gastrointestinal (GI)Disorders
Week 3: G.I. Lab Skill Evaluation, Core Concepts in Pharmacology: Drugs for Skin
Disorders
Week 4: Complete G.I. Lab Skill Evaluation, Smeltzer Study Guide, Core Concepts in
Pharmacology: Drugs for Fluids, Acid-Base, and Electrolyte Disorders
Week 5: Intravenous Therapy Lab Skill Conference, Core Concepts in Pharmacology:
Drugs for Eye and Ear Disorders, IV Therapy Conference Participation
Week 6: Sterile Dressing Changes Lab Skill
Week 7: Sterile Dressing Evaluations, Concepts in Pharmacology: Vitamins, Minerals,
and Nutritional Supplements
Week 8: Sterile Dressing Evaluations continue, Core Concepts in Pharmacology: Drugs

for Muscle, Bone and Joint Disorders
Week 9: Demonstration: Foley catheter insertion, Foley catheter irrigation
Week 10: Foley Catheter Lab Skills Evaluations
Week 11: Foley Catheter Lab Skills Evaluations continue, Core Concepts in
Pharmacology: Drugs for Pulmonary Disorders and Drugs for Inflammation,
Allergies, and Immune Disorders
Week 12: Foley Catheter Lab Skills Evaluations continue, Core Concepts in
Pharmacology: Drugs for Pain Control
Week 13: Chest Tube Lab Conference
Week 14: Nasopharyngeal Suction Conference
Week 15: Lab rechecks, Review of clinical skills
Week 16: Lab Evaluations

1. Four unit exams worth (17.5% each) 70%
2. Medication Workshop Exam 5%
3. Lab 5%
4. A Final Exam worth 20%
A = 90 - 100
B = 80 - 89
C = 70 - 79
F = 0 – 69
The grade for the lab portion of VNSG 1409 will be based on the summative portion of
the evaluation tool utilizing the following percentages of areas needing improvements:
Numerical Grade
0 U’s = A A = 95
1U =B B = 85
2 U's = C C = 75
3 or more U’s = F F = 65

Course Policies
Electronic Devices
1. Students may use quiet, laptop computers for lecture note taking. Students are not
2. No cellular telephones or beepers are permitted in the classroom, laboratory or
clinical areas. P.D.A.’s or smart phones may be used in the clinical area only to
provide point of care information.
Grievance Procedure


Attendance Policy
Vocational Nursing students will follow the absence and tardy policies of Paris Junior
College as discussed in the current school catalog, with the following modifications
because of the nature of the nursing experience.
tardy. Students missing more than 60 minutes will be given an absence. A tardy or
absence such as arriving late or leaving early may occur at any point during the day.

instructor.
5. The Vocational program expects students to attend all classes/clinicals regularly and
Classroom
More than three absences may result in dismissal unless an extenuating
circumstance is granted. The student may request to view the CD of the lecture
presented during the absence within one week of return to the classroom or prior to
the Unit exam should it be due the following Monday after the absence. The CD will
be signed out at the front office.
Clinical
circumstance is granted. The student will be allowed one (1) excused clinical
absence per semester. The only excused absences are for:
*illness of student or immediate family certified by a personal physician
*serious illness or death in student's immediate family
*being away from the campus with the sanction of the College
*court appearance with prior approval of the team
Additional clinical absences will be required to be made up. Clinical days will be
made up as assigned by clinical instructor.
Should the student miss the make up hours it will be considered an absence.
6. Students missing more than the equivalent of three (3) absences, in any semester
must, upon return to school, make a request to an instructor, the Team Leader or the
Committee. The student must provide supporting evidence to validate the necessity
of the absence/tardy. The student may request no more than two (2) extenuating
circumstances meetings per semester. Any further absences/tardies will result in
and the student. At the end of the specified term of probation, the student's status is
reviewed by the course faculty. This review will be recorded on the document entitled,
"Report of Status Review". If the probation criteria has been met, the student's probation
is lifted. Failure to meet probationary criteria will result in further disciplinary action up to
and including failure from the program. Probation will be contained within the course.
Theory Grades
A percentage grade will be given on the composite of written assignments, classroom
examinations, final examinations, and special projects.

A percentage grade for the course will be based on the following scale:
A = 90 - 100
B = 80 - 89
C = 70 - 79
F = 0 - 69
student will be required to take the exam on the first class day upon his/her return to
class. The make-up exam may be different from the original exam. There will be a five
(5) point deduction if a student is absent for an exam.
Test review will be per course syllabus.
After test review, if the student has a concern regarding a question, he/she may take the
textbook(s) (with test present) and verify the answer he/she feels is correct. The student
will be given ample time after test review to complete this activity. When the student has
completed the challenge, he/she will turn the challenge papers with test question
written, answer chosen with textbook reference cited and test into the instructor. At this
point the challenge process ends. The instructor will take the test challenges to the next
team meeting where they will be presented and determined if the student has been able
to validate answers. If it is determined that the answers are valid, the test scores will be
adjusted as applicable. The challenged questions will be reviewed on the next class
day.
Students who make less than 75 on an exam are expected to attend/complete

remediation as scheduled by instructors.
Clinical And Campus Laboratory Grades

Clinical Grades
In order to pass the clinical portions of the Vocational Nursing Program, every
applicable objective on the summative portion of the tool titled Evaluation of Safe
Clinical Practice should be met at a safe level of competency.
The letter grade for the clinical portion of this course will be based on the evaluation tool
titled Instructor Responses/Clinical Grading. A student receiving three (3) CEs in the
same area on the evaluation tool titled Instructor Responses/Clinical Grading will
receive a “U” in that area, be placed on probation, and their clinical grade will be
decreased by one letter grade. The exception being medication errors: when the
second medication error is made the student will receive a “U”, be placed on probation,

and their clinical grade will be decreased by one letter grade. When the probation
status is implemented the “Probation Status” in a course will be utilized. The instructors
will utilize the following percentages for areas that are checked for continued
enhancement.
Letter Grade Numerical Grade

0 U’s = A = 95
1U = B = 85
2 U’s = C = 75
3 or more U’s = F = 65
All clinical work must be done in a safe and professional manner. A student who fails
clinical will receive an "F" for the course. An unsafe grade on the evaluation of safe
clinical practice tool will result in a failure in the course.
Campus Laboratory Grades

The grade for the lab portions of the Vocational Nursing Program will be based on the
summative portion of the Lab Evaluation Tool utilizing the following percentage of areas
needing improvement.
0 U's = A
1U = B
2 U's = C
3 or more U 's = F
Incomplete Or "X" Grades

Should a student receive an incomplete or "X" grade in a nursing course or a concurrent
support course, and this "X" is not removed by the end of two weeks into the next
semester, he/she may not continue in the nursing program.
Guidelines For Campus Laboratory Use

1. The laboratory is available for student use.
place after use.
3. Any items which are defective should be reported to a nursing instructor/nursing
secretary. This is to assure that as many items as possible may be kept available
for student use.
4. An instructor/peer mentor will be available by appointment for individual assistance.
instructors.
6. There will be no smoking, food or visitors in the campus laboratory.
7. Misuse of the campus laboratory, equipment and/or materials will be documented
and placed in the student's file.
Student Responsibilities:
The Student is responsible for:

1. being prepared for class by bringing the textbook and any other material needed for
tests or note taking.
2. referring to the course schedule to determine study assignments and test dates for
particular class periods.
3. organizing study to meet the objectives stated for each unit.
4. making an appointment with the instructor to "make up" any tests missed due to
absence. The student will be required to take the exam on the first class day upon
his/her return to class. (See Student Handbook)
5. conducting her/himself in a mature and professional manner at all times, showing
proper respect for all persons in the classroom. (Any student causing a
disturbance will be asked to leave the class and will be counted absent for the
remainder of the class period.)
ADA Statement

Term: 101S Office 903.782.0736
Course VNSG 1429

Medical – Surgical Nursing I
Course Description
This course is the application of the nursing process to the care of adult patients
experiencing medical surgical conditions in the health illness continuum. A variety of
health care settings are utilized. There is a continued integration of pharmacological
concepts and dosage calculations throughout the course.

ISBN: 978-0-1322-0871-0
ISBN: 978-0-8036-1912-8
ISBN: 978-0-8036-1859-6


ISBN: 978-0-7817-8594-5
Davis. ISBN: 978-0-8036-1559-5
ISBN: 978-1-60547-861-6
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
1. Utilize the concept of the health-illness continuum in identifying areas of health
promotion and adaption to illness involving selected medical-surgical needs.
2. Identify prevalent medical-surgical conditions affecting the adult.
3. Utilize the nursing process to assist in developing a plan of care for selected
medical-surgical conditions with increasing complexity.
4. Identify teaching/learning activities utilizing communication skills that are related to
identified client needs.
5. Incorporate nutrition, drug therapy, and nursing interventions in developing plans of
care to meet the needs of the client experiencing common medical-surgical health
problems.
6. Demonstrate in the campus laboratory the performance of increasingly complex,
nursing skills with identification of expected outcomes.
Learning Objectives
The Integument System
1. Discuss the components of the nursing assessment of the skin.
2. Discuss common skin diagnostic studies used in diagnosing skin disorders.

3. Describe the common therapeutic management for various skin disorders.
4. Discuss pruritus and the nursing management.
5. Discuss the inflammatory conditions and infections of the skin including nursing
care.
6. Describe the common infections and infestations of the skin including medical
management and client education.
7. Describe the various types of skin cancer and their medical and nursing
management.
8. Compare classifications of burn depths and methods of measuring burned body
surface area and describe the body's responses to a major burn injury.
9. Discuss the management of clients with a burn injury.
10. Compare various types of dermatological and plastic reconstructive surgeries
including pre- and post-operative nursing care.
11. Discuss the patient with Impaired Skin Integrity and describe the different stages of
pressure ulcers and the treatment including prevention.
12. Discuss transmission based precautions and barrier techniques for use in infection
prevention and control.
13. Demonstrate the skills needed to use sterile technique to protect a client from
microorganisms.
14. Utilizing the nursing process, provide wound care for a client with the nursing
diagnosis “Impaired skin integrity related to a surgical wound”.
15. Utilizing the nursing process, demonstrate the ability to perform a sterile dressing
change.
16. Calculate IV infusion problems.
Fluid and Electrolytes

1. Differentiate between osmosis, diffusion, filtration, and active transport.
2. Describe the role of the kidneys, lungs, and endocrine glands in regulating the
body’s fluid composition and volume.
3. Identify the effects of aging on fluid and electrolyte regulation.
4. Plan effective care of patients with the following imbalances: fluid volume deficit and
fluid volume excess; hypovolemic shock, sodium deficit (hyponatremia) and sodium
excess (hypernatremia); potassium deficit (hypokalemia) and potassium excess
(hyperkalemia).
5. Describe the cause, clinical manifestations, management, and nursing interventions
for the following imbalances: calcium deficit (hypocalcemia) and calcium excess
(hypercalcemia); magnesium deficit (hypomagnesemia) and magnesium excess
(hypermagnesemia); phosphorus deficit (hypophosphatemia) and phosphorus
excess (hyperphosphatemia); chloride deficit (hypochloremia) and chloride excess
(hyperchloremia).
6. Explain the role of the lungs, kidneys, and chemical buffers in maintaining acid-base
balance.
7. Compare metabolic acidosis and alkalosis with regard to causes, clinical
manifestations, diagnosis, and management.
8. Compare respiratory acidosis and alkalosis with regard to causes, clinical
manifestations, diagnosis, and management.

9. Interpret arterial blood gas measurements.
10. Describe measures for preventing complications of intravenous therapy.
Urological Disorders
1. Identify the data to be collected for assessment of a client with a disorder of the
urinary system.
2. Describe tests and procedures for urologic disorders and the nursing responsibilities
for each.
3. Outline principles of management of a client with an indwelling urinary catheter
utilizing the nursing process.
4. Discuss the different alterations in voiding patterns including the medical and nursing
management.
5. Relate the rationale client preparation and procedures involved in catheterizing a
client.
6. Plan care for a client with the following renal urinary disorders.
7. Using the nursing process care for a client who has experienced trauma to the
urinary system.
8. Discuss the clinical manifestations, medical and nursing management of a client with
cancer of the urinary system.
9. Discuss the care of a client in renal failure.
10. Describe the nursing management for a client who has had surgery of the
renal/urinary system.
11. Discuss conditions of the prostate including the medical and nursing management.
12. Recognize selected conditions affecting the male reproductive system.
13. Describe the pharmacological management of a client with a urological disorder with
emphasis on action, adverse side effects, and nursing interventions.
Basic Clinical Skills
14. Demonstrate the ability to care for a client with a urinary diversion.
15. Demonstrate the ability to care for a client with continuous bladder irrigation.
Hepatic, Biliary and Immunologic Disorders

1. Identify the data to be collected for assessment of a client with a disorder of the
urinary system.
2. Describe tests and procedures for urologic disorders and the nursing responsibilities
for each.
3. Outline principles of management of a client with an indwelling urinary catheter
utilizing the nursing process.
4. Discuss the different alterations in voiding patterns including the medical and nursing
management.
5. Relate the rationale client preparation and procedures involved in catheterizing a
client.
6. Plan care for a client with the following renal urinary disorders.
7. Using the nursing process care for a client who has experienced trauma to the
urinary system.
8. Discuss the clinical manifestations, medical and nursing management of a client with
cancer of the urinary system.

9. Discuss the care of a client in renal failure.
10. Describe the nursing management for a client who has had surgery of the
renal/urinary system.
11. Discuss conditions of the prostate including the medical and nursing management.
12. Recognize selected conditions affecting the male reproductive system.
13. Describe the pharmacological management of a client with a urological disorder with
emphasis on action, adverse side effects, and nursing interventions.
Basic Clinical Skills
14. Demonstrate the ability to care for a client with a urinary diversion.
15. Demonstrate the ability to care for a client with continuous bladder irrigation.
Course Schedule
Week 1: Orientation, Integumentary System
Week 2: Integumentary System continued
Week 3: Integumentary System continued
Week 4: Unit I Exam, Fluid & Electrolytes
Week 5: Fluid & Electrolytes continued
Week 6: Unit 2 Exam, Urological Disorders
Week 7: Urological Disorders continued
Week 10: Unit III Exam, Hepatic, Biliary and Immunologic Disorders
Week 11: Hepatic, Biliary and Immunologic Disorders continued
Week 14: Unit IV Exam, Community Health Resource Presentation
Week 15: Course Evaluations
Week 16: Final Exam

1. Four unit exams (17.5% each) ................... 70%
2. Community Health Resource Project ........... 5%
3. A Final exam .............................................. 20%
4. Lab ............................................................... 5%
A = 90 - 100
B = 80 - 89
C = 70 - 79
F = 0 - 69
The grade for the lab portion of VNSG 1429 will be based on the summative portion of
the evaluation tool utilizing the following percentages of areas needing improvements:
Numerical Grade
0 U’s = A A = 95
1U =B B = 85
2 U's = C C = 75

Course Policies
Electronic Devices
Grievance Procedure

Attendance Policy

instructor.
Classroom
Clinical

Theory Grades
A = 90 - 100
B = 80 - 89
C = 70 - 79
F = 0 - 69
day.



Clinical Grades
enhancement.

0 U’s = A = 95
1U = B = 85
2 U’s = C = 75

0 U's = A
1U = B
2 U's = C
3 or more U 's = F


place after use.
for student use.
instructors.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S Office 903.782.0736
Course VNSG 1560

Medical Surgical Clinical – Practical Nurse
Course Description

ISBN: 978-0-1322-0871-0
ISBN: 978-0-8036-1912-8
ISBN: 978-0-8036-1859-6

Course # (VNSG 1560.01) – Debbie Bookout Page 1 of 10

ISBN: 978-0-7817-8594-5
Davis. ISBN: 978-0-8036-1559-5
ISBN: 978-1-60547-861-6
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
1. Apply the theory, concepts, and skills of VNSG 1409 and VNSG 1429 to direct
patient care.
2. Plan and implement care of clients with common health problems by comparing and
contrasting normal physiology of body systems to pathologic variations and
diagnostic evaluation and treatment.
3. Demonstrate the utilization of the nursing process when caring for clients with
4. Implement basic teaching/learning activities in relation to identified client needs.
5. Demonstrate increasingly advanced nursing skills with identification of expected
outcomes.
6. Demonstrate competency in dosage calculations and safe administration of
pharmacological agents.

Learning Objectives
1. Submit the facilities protocol for a gastrointestinal disorder invasive procedure.
2. Utilize the nursing process in providing care for a client with a nutritional deficit.
3. Utilize the nursing process to care for a client with a gastrointestinal disorder.
4. Figure the number of calories per cc that a client is receiving with an N/G or
gastrostomy feeding. Show this to your instructor.
5. Locate a patient who has a nursing diagnosis for "bowel elimination abnormalities".
List nursing interventions for this situation.
6. Identify a client at risk for fluid and electrolyte imbalance and develop a plan of care.
7. Identify a client with a fluid volume deficit or excess. Describe assessment findings
to instructor with lab values.
8. Assess and record findings of a patient with edema. Determine the stages of edema
accurately (1+, 2+, 3+, 4+).
9. Identify the lab values that would indicate a client is experiencing an electrolyte
imbalance. Discuss the significance of these values with nursing interventions to be
utilized with your instructor.
10.Intravenous Therapy. Observe a licensed nurse perform three or more of the
following:
a. Start an intravenous infusion.
b. Administer intravenous fluid(s).
c. Administer intravenous "piggyback".
d. Give an intravenous push medication.
e. Convert to a heparin saline lock with flush.
f. Document intravenous administration.
11. Demonstrate utilizing the nursing process to provide care for a client with
visual/hearing impairment.
12. Locate a client with arthritis. List interventions to assist the client to perform their
own care.
13. Care for a client with a nursing diagnosis of impaired physical immobility.
14. Develop, implement and evaluate a teaching plan for a patient with a
musculoskeletal disorder.
15. Care for a client receiving oxygen. Show your instructor how to check to be sure the
amount being delivered is the amount ordered.
16. Develop a plan of care for a client with alterations in upper respiratory function.
Include teaching and discharge planning.
17. Observe a client for hypoxemia and hypercapnea. List the symptoms of each.
18. Develop a plan of care for the client undergoing thoracic surgery or testing.
19. Develop a plan of care for a client with a chest tube.
20. Record observations and lab values that would indicate an acid base imbalance.
21. Demonstrate utilizing the nursing process to care for a client with a skin disorder.
22. Observe a client who has a skin lesion. Chart your observations on an extra sheet of
paper and show it to your instructor.
23. Determine the protocol for disposal of contaminated items and discuss in post
conference.
24. Observe a nurse or physician performing a dressing change or sterile procedure.
25. Demonstrate use of the nursing process to give care to patients with disorders of the

urinary system. Take into consideration psychosocial concepts, and develop and
implement as far as possible a teaching/learning plan for your client.
26. Research the agency's protocol for preparation of an invasive diagnostic procedure
for a client with a urinary disorder. Submit to the instructor.
27. Locate a client with incontinence. Submit a teaching plan that would assist the client
with bladder control.
28. Assess a client at risk for urinary tract infection. Discuss predisposing factors and
nursing measures with instructor.
29. Identify abnormal test results that would indicate renal dysfunction. Discuss the
significance of the results with your instructor, including comparison to normal
values.
30. Research significant lab values and assessment findings related to a diagnosis of
hepatic or biliary disorder. Discuss with instructor.
31. Complete a satisfactory nursing process paper during one rotation.
32. Satisfactorily complete each of the following Specialty area objectives:
1. Physical therapy
2. Pediatric Clinic(fall/spring)
3. Early Childhood
4. School Nurse
5. Respiratory Therapy
6. Team Leader (each rotation)
33. Complete Community Health Resource project.
Course Schedule
During the Semester, the students will complete 16 clinical hours per week on a rotating
schedule in the following areas:
WEEK 1:
o Orientation & Hospital tours
o Glucometer training
o Training on Medication Administration Systems
o Fit Testing
o Computer documentation training
Week 2-15
 School nurse
 Pediatric Clinic
 Head Start/Early Childhood
 Medical-Surgical
 Orthopedics
 Rehabilitation

Evaluation Of Clinical Performance
Requirements for Passing the Clinical Component of VNSG 1560:
Statements in the tool titled Summative Evaluation for Clinical Grading are critical

objectives for each phase of the nursing process and essential competencies
established by the Nursing Education Advisory Committee. During each clinical rotation
every applicable objective should be met at a safe level of competency.
Grading Criteria:
A faculty team decision will be made to determine the letter grade for the clinical
component of the course. The grade for VNSG 1560 will be based on the evaluation
tool titled Summative Evaluation for Clinical Grading. At the end of each semester this
tool is used to determine a letter grade for this course. The instructors will review all the
Anecdotal Records of Clinical Experiences for the semester and determine what areas
need continued improvement. To determine the letter grade for the clinical component,
the instructors will utilize the following percentages for areas that are checked for
continued enhancement.

0 U’s = A A = 95
1U =B B = 85
2 U's = C C = 75
Remember all clinical work must be done in a safe and professional manner. (Please
see Student Handbook.) A student who fails clinical will receive an “F” for the course.
Student’s Self Evaluation and Instructor’s Response

After each rotation the student will have an opportunity to meet with the current clinical
instructor to discuss the student’s performance and progress in the course. Prior to this
conference, the student should complete the form titled Student’s Self Evaluation and
Instructor’s Response and submit it to the student’s current clinical instructor.
Guidelines for Performance which is Unsafe:
1. Should a student receive an unsafe evaluation in any two (2) clinical rotations, a
clinical failure will result.
2. Probationary status: The student will be counseled and given written criteria to assist
in improving clinical performance by a specific date. Notification of removal of
probationary status is given to the student in writing. Any probation in VNSG 1560
will result in a maximum grade of B. If probation is not removed by the set date, the
student will receive a clinical failure.
3. Failure in the clinical component of the nursing course results in failure of the
course.
Course Policies
Electronic Devices

Grievance Procedure

Attendance Policy

instructor.
Classroom
Clinical

Theory Grades
A = 90 - 100
B = 80 - 89
C = 70 - 79
F = 0 - 69
day.


Clinical Grades

enhancement.

0 U’s = A = 95
1U = B = 85
2 U’s = C = 75

0 U's = A
1U = B
2 U's = C
3 or more U 's = F


place after use.
for student use.

instructors.
ADA Statement

Term: 101S Office 903.782.0736
Course VNSG 1560

Medical Surgical Clinical – Practical Nurse
Course Description

ISBN: 978-0-1322-0871-0
ISBN: 978-0-8036-1912-8
ISBN: 978-0-8036-1859-6


ISBN: 978-0-7817-8594-5
Davis. ISBN: 978-0-8036-1559-5
ISBN: 978-1-60547-861-6
Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
1. Apply the theory, concepts, and skills of VNSG 1409 and VNSG 1429 to direct
patient care.
2. Plan and implement care of clients with common health problems by comparing and
contrasting normal physiology of body systems to pathologic variations and
diagnostic evaluation and treatment.
3. Demonstrate the utilization of the nursing process when caring for clients with
4. Implement basic teaching/learning activities in relation to identified client needs.
5. Demonstrate increasingly advanced nursing skills with identification of expected
outcomes.
6. Demonstrate competency in dosage calculations and safe administration of
pharmacological agents.

Learning Objectives
1. Submit the facilities protocol for a gastrointestinal disorder invasive procedure.
2. Utilize the nursing process in providing care for a client with a nutritional deficit.
3. Utilize the nursing process to care for a client with a gastrointestinal disorder.
4. Figure the number of calories per cc that a client is receiving with an N/G or
gastrostomy feeding. Show this to your instructor.
5. Locate a patient who has a nursing diagnosis for "bowel elimination abnormalities".
List nursing interventions for this situation.
6. Identify a client at risk for fluid and electrolyte imbalance and develop a plan of care.
7. Identify a client with a fluid volume deficit or excess. Describe assessment findings
to instructor with lab values.
8. Assess and record findings of a patient with edema. Determine the stages of edema
accurately (1+, 2+, 3+, 4+).
9. Identify the lab values that would indicate a client is experiencing an electrolyte
imbalance. Discuss the significance of these values with nursing interventions to be
utilized with your instructor.
10.Intravenous Therapy. Observe a licensed nurse perform three or more of the
following:
a. Start an intravenous infusion.
b. Administer intravenous fluid(s).
c. Administer intravenous "piggyback".
d. Give an intravenous push medication.
e. Convert to a heparin saline lock with flush.
f. Document intravenous administration.
11. Demonstrate utilizing the nursing process to provide care for a client with
visual/hearing impairment.
12. Locate a client with arthritis. List interventions to assist the client to perform their
own care.
13. Care for a client with a nursing diagnosis of impaired physical immobility.
14. Develop, implement and evaluate a teaching plan for a patient with a
musculoskeletal disorder.
15. Care for a client receiving oxygen. Show your instructor how to check to be sure the
amount being delivered is the amount ordered.
16. Develop a plan of care for a client with alterations in upper respiratory function.
Include teaching and discharge planning.
17. Observe a client for hypoxemia and hypercapnea. List the symptoms of each.
18. Develop a plan of care for the client undergoing thoracic surgery or testing.
19. Develop a plan of care for a client with a chest tube.
20. Record observations and lab values that would indicate an acid base imbalance.
21. Demonstrate utilizing the nursing process to care for a client with a skin disorder.
22. Observe a client who has a skin lesion. Chart your observations on an extra sheet of
paper and show it to your instructor.
23. Determine the protocol for disposal of contaminated items and discuss in post
conference.
24. Observe a nurse or physician performing a dressing change or sterile procedure.
25. Demonstrate use of the nursing process to give care to patients with disorders of the

urinary system. Take into consideration psychosocial concepts, and develop and
implement as far as possible a teaching/learning plan for your client.
26. Research the agency's protocol for preparation of an invasive diagnostic procedure
for a client with a urinary disorder. Submit to the instructor.
27. Locate a client with incontinence. Submit a teaching plan that would assist the client
with bladder control.
28. Assess a client at risk for urinary tract infection. Discuss predisposing factors and
nursing measures with instructor.
29. Identify abnormal test results that would indicate renal dysfunction. Discuss the
significance of the results with your instructor, including comparison to normal
values.
30. Research significant lab values and assessment findings related to a diagnosis of
hepatic or biliary disorder. Discuss with instructor.
31. Complete a satisfactory nursing process paper during one rotation.
32. Satisfactorily complete each of the following Specialty area objectives:
1. Physical therapy
2. Pediatric Clinic(fall/spring)
3. Early Childhood
4. School Nurse
5. Respiratory Therapy
6. Team Leader (each rotation)
33. Complete Community Health Resource project.
Course Schedule
During the Semester, the students will complete 16 clinical hours per week on a rotating
schedule in the following areas:
WEEK 1:
o Orientation & Hospital tours
o Glucometer training
o Training on Medication Administration Systems
o Fit Testing
o Computer documentation training
Week 2-15
 School nurse
 Pediatric Clinic
 Head Start/Early Childhood
 Medical-Surgical
 Orthopedics
 Rehabilitation

Evaluation Of Clinical Performance
Requirements for Passing the Clinical Component of VNSG 1560:
Statements in the tool titled Summative Evaluation for Clinical Grading are critical

objectives for each phase of the nursing process and essential competencies
established by the Nursing Education Advisory Committee. During each clinical rotation
every applicable objective should be met at a safe level of competency.
Grading Criteria:
A faculty team decision will be made to determine the letter grade for the clinical
component of the course. The grade for VNSG 1560 will be based on the evaluation
tool titled Summative Evaluation for Clinical Grading. At the end of each semester this
tool is used to determine a letter grade for this course. The instructors will review all the
Anecdotal Records of Clinical Experiences for the semester and determine what areas
need continued improvement. To determine the letter grade for the clinical component,
the instructors will utilize the following percentages for areas that are checked for
continued enhancement.

0 U’s = A A = 95
1U =B B = 85
2 U's = C C = 75
Remember all clinical work must be done in a safe and professional manner. (Please
see Student Handbook.) A student who fails clinical will receive an “F” for the course.
Student’s Self Evaluation and Instructor’s Response

After each rotation the student will have an opportunity to meet with the current clinical
instructor to discuss the student’s performance and progress in the course. Prior to this
conference, the student should complete the form titled Student’s Self Evaluation and
Instructor’s Response and submit it to the student’s current clinical instructor.
Guidelines for Performance which is Unsafe:
1. Should a student receive an unsafe evaluation in any two (2) clinical rotations, a
clinical failure will result.
2. Probationary status: The student will be counseled and given written criteria to assist
in improving clinical performance by a specific date. Notification of removal of
probationary status is given to the student in writing. Any probation in VNSG 1560
will result in a maximum grade of B. If probation is not removed by the set date, the
student will receive a clinical failure.
3. Failure in the clinical component of the nursing course results in failure of the
course.
Course Policies
Electronic Devices

Grievance Procedure

Attendance Policy

instructor.
Classroom
Clinical

Theory Grades
A = 90 - 100
B = 80 - 89
C = 70 - 79
F = 0 - 69
day.


Clinical Grades

enhancement.

0 U’s = A = 95
1U = B = 85
2 U’s = C = 75

0 U's = A
1U = B
2 U's = C
3 or more U 's = F


place after use.
for student use.

instructors.
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College Kevin Ward
Term: 101S 903-782-0384
Section: 01 kward@parisjc.edu
Course # (WLDG 1417)

Course Title (Introduction to Layout and Fabrication)
Course Description
This is an introductory course in fitting and layout. Topics to be covered are blue print
reading, use of tools and procedures common to layout and use of the oxy-fuel torch.
Credits: SCH 4 = 2 lecture and 4 laboratory hours per week

Prerequisite(s): WLDG 1425, WLDG 1428, WLDG 1457, WLDG 1430, WLDG 2443
Must take AWS Structural Steel Certification test utilizing SMAW process

No Text book required, class hand outs will be given on an as needed basis
Program Outcomes
Skills acquired in this course will be used to prepare for and pass a Pipe Welding test in
the 6G position per ASME specifications.
Course Outcomes
Identify welding symbols; identify and select measuring instruments and tools for
fabricating projects; recognize correct layout and fabrication terminology; and identify
structural shapes and materials.
Learning Objectives
1. Be able to lay out pipe fittings on the pipe.
2. Be able to do math related to pipe fitting.
3. Be able to make pipe templates for marking different cuts on different diameter
pipe.
4. Be able to use the tools related to pipe fitting.
5. Be able to use the cutting torch to make pipe fittings.
6. Be able to weld pipe fittings.
7. Taking field measurements

Student should be proficient in the basic safety, setup, and operation of typical shop
welding equipment utilized in the pipe welding industry.

(WLDG 1417) Kevin Ward Page 1 of 3

Course Schedule
M-TH. 8am-3:40pm

1. WELDING GLOVES, LEATHER
2. WELDING HOOD, WITH #10 LENS OR DARKER
3. FLINT STRIKER & CLIP
4. SOAP STONE PENCIL
5. CUTTING GOGGLES #5 LENS
6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
8. LONG SLEEVE COTTON SHIRT
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANER
11. PIPE FITTERS HANDBOOK (BLUE BOOK)
12. WELDING LEATHERS
13. FILE HALF ROUND 14”
14. SAFETY GLASSES
15. EAR PLUGS
16. TAPE MEASURE
17. TORPEDO LEVEL
18. PIPE WRAPAROUND
19. CALCULATOR
20. SPIRAL NOTEBOOK & PENCILS
21. NEEDLE NOSE PLIERS
Student will daily demonstrate their ability to safely utilize industry typical cutting and
welding equipment while preparing projects per ASME specifications. Student will be
evaluated on a rubric scale of 0-100.
Course Policies
Students will be evaluated per a typical job site situation regarding their ability to work
safely, be a productive employee, follow directives, and interact with other employees i
e. tardiness, absences, adhering to shop safety rules, completing individual projects on
time, and observing shop policies.
ADA Statement


Paris Junior College Clint Hutchins

College Year: 2010-2011 Room AS 122
Term: 101S 903-782-0384
Section: 02 CHutchins@parisjc.edu
(WLDG 1417.02)
(Intro. To Layout and Fabrication)
Course Description
Introduction to Layout and Fabrication
Credits: SCH = 4 lecture = 2 laboratory =4 hours per week
Prerequisite(s): WLDG 1435.02

Not required
Program Outcomes
Will learn blue print reading, use of tools and procedures common to layout and use of
oxygen-acetylene torch.
Course Outcomes
Identify welding symbols; identify and select measuring instruments and tools for
fabricating projects; recognize correct layout and fabrication terminology; and identify
structural shapes and metals.
Learning Objectives
Upon completion of this course the student should be able to demonstrate proficiency in
the following
1. Be able to lay out pipe fittings on the pipe.
2. Be able to do math related to pipe fitting.
3. Be able to make pipe templates for marking different cuts on different diameter pipe.
4. Be able to use the tools related to pipe fitting.
5. Be able to use the cutting torch to make pipe fittings.
6. Be able to weld pipe fittings.
Course Schedule
Monday-Friday 4:00 pm to 10:00 pm

All students must have the listed tools and have a 3.0 (GPA) to take the certification and
to return for the next semester.
(WLDG 1417.02) – Clint Hutchins Page 1 of 2


6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANERS
11. PIPE FITTERS HANDBOOK (BLUE BOOK )
14. SAFETY GLASSES
15. EAR PLUGS
16. TAPE MEASURE
17. TORPEDO LEVEL
18. PIPE WRAPAROUND
19. CALCULATOR
Course Policies
The student must complete all projects in the time given. Then the instructor will
evaluate the projects and the student.
ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-0384

Course Title (Introduction to Oxy-Fuel Welding and Cutting)
Course Description
An Introduction to Oxy-Fuel welding and cutting, safety, setup and maintenance of Oxy-
Fuel welding, and cutting equipment and supplies.

Prerequisite(s): NONE

Program Outcomes
Skills acquired in this course will be used to pass a Structural Welding test in the 1G,
2G, 3G, and 4G positions per AWS specifications.
Course Outcomes
Demonstrate oxy-fuel welding and cutting safety procedures; identify and classify fuels
and filler metals; perform entry-level oxy-fuel welding and cutting operations and select
proper equipment and materials.
Learning Objectives
1. Setup, turn on, and adjust an oxy-fuel cutting rig safely.
2. Be able to make quality cuts in all positions using oxy-fuel.
3. Be able to cut steel plate using an oxy-fuel track torch.
Oxy-Fuel cutting and welding equipment.
Course Schedule
M-TH. 8am-3:40pm




6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANER
13. SAFETY GLASSES
14. EAR PLUGS
15. TAPE MEASURE
16. SPEED SQUARE
17. HOBART POCKET WELDING GUIDE 27th EDITION
18. VICTOR WELDING, CUTTING & HEATING GUIDE
19. SPIRAL NOTEBOOK AND PENCILS
20.WIRE BRUSH
Students will daily demonstrate their ability to safely utilize Oxy-Fuel cutting and welding
equipment while preparing projects per AWS specifications. Students will be evaluated
on a rubric scale of 0-100.
Course Policies
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0384
(WLDG 1425.02)
(Intro to Oxy-Fuel Welding and Cutting)
Course Description
Introduction to oxy-fuel welding, cutting and safety and learn how to maintain equipment
Prerequisite(s):

Not required
Program Outcomes
All students must be able to properly cut, fit and weld all projects correctly and
efficiently by the AWS guidelines.
Course Outcomes
Demonstrate oxy-fuel welding and cutting safety procedures; identify fuels and filler
metals; perform entry-level oxy-fuel welding and cutting and select proper equipment
and materials.
Learning Objectives
the following
1. Setup, turn on, and adjust an oxygen and acetylene welding rig safely.
2. Be able to make quality welds in all positions using oxygen and acetylene.
3. Be able to cut steel plate using the oxygen and acetylene torch.
Course Schedule
Monday-Friday 4:00pm to 10:00pm


6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANERS
12. FILE - HALF ROUND 14"
13. SAFETY GLASSES
14. EAR PLUGS
15. TAPE MEASURE
16. SPEED SQUARE
20. WIRE BRUSH
Course Policies
ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-0384

Course Title (Introduction to Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW))
Course Description
An introduction to the shielded metal arc welding process. Emphasis placed on power
sources, electrode selection, oxy-fuel cutting, and various joint designs. Instruction
provided in SMAW fillet welds in various positions.


Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Select electrodes and amperage settings for various thicknesses of materials and
welding positions; define principles of arc welding; explain electrode classifications;
perform SMAW operations in various positions using selected electrodes and different
joint designs.
Learning Objectives
1. Set up, turn on, and operate welding equipment safely.
2. Be able to select the correct equipment to weld with.
3. Be able to select the correct electrode.
4. Be able to solve welding problems.
5. Be able to make a quality fillet weld in the flat position.
6. Be able to set up and prepare test plates for AWS welding test.
7. Be able to pass the AWS flat welding test using an E6010 electrode.
8. Be able to pass the AWS flat welding test using an E7018 electrode.
9. Be able to pass the AWS flat welding test using a Flux Core Arc welder.
10. Be able to tell the difference in a good and bad weld.
Oxy-Fuel cutting and typical shop welding equipment utilizing the SMAW and FCAW
processes.

Course Schedule
M-TH. 8am-3:40pm

6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANER
13. SAFETY GLASSES
14. EAR PLUGS
15. TAPE MEASURE
16. SPEED SQUARE
20.WIRE BRUSH
welding equipment while preparing projects per AWS specifications. Student will be
Course Policies
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0384
(WLDG 1428.02)
(Intro. To Shielded Metal Arc Welding )
Course Description
Introduction to (Shielded Metal Arc Welding)

Not required
Program Outcomes
The essentials of good welding techniques, to include flat beads, weaving the electrode,
flat fillet welds, flat butt joints, weld inspection, and troubleshooting welding problems.
Course Outcomes
Select electrodes and amperage settings for various thicknesses of materials and
welding positions; define principles of arc welding; explain electrode classifications;
perform SMAW operations in various positions using selected electrodes and different
joint designs.
Learning Objectives
the following
1. Set up, turn on, and operate welding equipment safely.

2. Be able to select the correct equipment to weld with.
3. Be able to select the correct electrode.
4. Be able to solve welding problems.
5. Be able to make a quality fillet weld in the flat position.
6. Be able to set up and prepare test plates for AWS welding test.
7. Be able to pass the AWS flat welding test using a E6010 electrode.
8. Be able to pass the AWS flat welding test using a E7018 electrode.
9. Be able to pass the AWS flat welding test using a flux core welder.
10. Be able to tell the difference in a good and bad weld.
(WLDG1428.02) – Clint Hutchins Page 1 of 3

Course Schedule
Monday-Friday 4:00 pm to 10:00pm
6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANERS
13. SAFETY GLASSES
14. EAR PLUGS
15. TAPE MEASURE
16. SPEED SQUARE
20. WIRE BRUSH
Course Policies
The student must complete all projects in the time given. Then the instructor will evaluate
the projects and the student.
ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-0384

Course Title (Introduction to Gas Metal Arc Welding and (GMAW))
Course Description
Principles of gas metal arc welding, setup and use of Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW)
equipment, and safe use of tools/equipment. Instruction in various joint designs


Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Describe welding positions with various joint designs on plate; describe the effects of
welding parameters in GMAW; apply safety rules; troubleshoot equipment used;
perform visual inspection; weld various types of structural material; diagnose welding
problems.
Learning Objective
1. Be able to setup and operate a semi-automatic wire feed machine.
2. Identify basic weld joints. Be able to read and understand welding symbols.
3. Making quality welds in the vertical position.
4. Be able to set up and prepare test plates for an AWS welding test.
5. Be able to pass the AWS vertical welding test using an E6010 electrode.
6. Be able to pass the AWS vertical welding test using an E7018 electrode.
7. Be able to pass the AWS vertical welding test using a Flux core welder.
Oxy-Fuel cutting and typical shop welding equipment utilizing the SMAW, GMAW, and
FCAW processes.
Course Schedule
M-TH. 8am-3:40pm

6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANER
13. SAFETY GLASSES
14. EAR PLUGS
15. TAPE MEASURE
16. SPEED SQUARE
20.WIRE BRUSH
Course Policies
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0384
(WLDG 1430.02)
(Intro. Gas Metal Arc Welding)
Course Description
Intro. Gas Metal Arc Welding
Prerequisite(s): 1428.02

Not required
Program Outcomes
Emphasis is placed on vertical welding. The student will be introduced to vertical fillet
and butt joints. The student will learn joint design and welding symbols.
Course Outcomes
Describe welding positions with various joint designs on plate; describe the effects of
welding parameters in GMAW; troubleshoot equipment; perform visual inspection; weld
various types of structural materials; diagnose welding problems.
Learning Objectives
Upon completion of this course the student should be able to demonstrate proficiency
in the following.
1. Be able to setup and operate a semi-automatic wire feed machine.
2. Identify basic weld joints.
3. Be able to read and understand welding symbols.
4. Making quality welds in the vertical position.
5. Be able to set up and prepare test plates for an AWS welding test.
6. Be able to pass the AWS vertical welding test using a E6010 electrode
7. Be able to pass the AWS vertical welding test using a E7018 electrode.
8. Be able to pass the AWS vertical welding test using a Flux core welder.

Course Schedule

All students must have the listed tools and have a 3.0 (GPA) to take the certification
and to return for the next semester.
6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANERS
13. SAFETY GLASSES
14. EAR PLUGS
15. TAPE MEASURE
16. SPEED SQUARE
20. WIRE BRUSH
Course Policies
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0384

Course Title (Introduction to Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW))
Course Description
Principles of gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW), including setup, GTAW equipment.
Instruction in various positions and joint designs.


Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Describe various joint designs; describe safety rules and equipment; and describe the
effects of welding parameters in GTAW; weld various structural materials.
Learning Objectives
1. Setup and adjustment of a TIG welding outfit for different applications.
2. Selection of proper tungsten, filler rod, and shielding gas for different TIG welding
applications.
3. Welding mild and carbon steel in all positions.
4. Welding stainless steel in all positions.
5. Welding aluminum in all positions.
Course Schedule
M-TH. 8am-3:40pm


6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANER
14. SAFETY GLASSES
15. EAR PLUGS
16. TAPE MEASURE
17. TORPEDO LEVEL
18. PIPE WRAPAROUND
19. CALCULATOR
Course Policies
ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-0384
(WLDG 1434.02)
(Intro. To Gas Tungsten Arc Welding)
Course Description
Principles of gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW), including setup, GTAW equipment.
Instruction in various positions and joint design.

Not required
Program Outcomes
Tig welding non ferrous metals to include stainless and aluminum. Welding will be done
in all positions .The study of gases and fillers to be included.
Course Outcomes
Describe various joint designs; describe safety rules and equipment; and describe the
effects of welding parameters in GTAW; weld various structural materials.
Learning Objectives
the following
1. Setup and adjustment of a TIG welding outfit for different applications.
2. Selection of proper tungsten, filler rod, and shielding gas for different TIG welding
applications.
3. Welding mild and carbon steel in all positions.
4. Welding stainless steel in all positions.
5. Welding aluminum in all positions.
Course Schedule



6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANERS
14. SAFETY GLASSES
15. EAR PLUGS
16. TAPE MEASURE
17. TORPEDO LEVEL
18. PIPE WRAPAROUND
19. CALCULATOR
Course Policies
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0384

Course Title (Introduction to Pipe Welding)
Course Description
An introduction to welding of pipe using the shielded metal arc welding process
(SMAW), including electrode selection, equipment setup, and safe shop practices.
Emphasis on weld positions 1G and 2G using various electrodes.


Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Describe equipment and required pipe preparation and perform 1G and 2G welds using
various electrodes.
Learning Objectives
1. Be able to translate API codes.
2. Be able to select the right rod for the job.
3. Be able to operate a pipe beveling machine.
4. Be able to weld pipe in the 1G position using E6010 and E7018 electrodes.
5. Be able to weld pipe in the 5G position using E6010 and E7018 electrodes.

Course Schedule
M-Th. 8am-3:40pm


6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANER
14. SAFETY GLASSES
15. EAR PLUGS
16. TAPE MEASURE
17. TORPEDO LEVEL
18. PIPE WRAPAROUND
19. CALCULATOR
Course Policies
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0384
(WLDG 1435.02)
(introduction to pipe welding)
Course Description
Course emphasis on weld positions 1G and 2G using various electrodes.

Not required
Program Outcomes
Describe equipment and required pipe preparation and perform 1G welds using E6010
& E7018 electrodes.
Course Outcomes
various electrodes.
Learning Objectives
the following
1. Be able to translate API codes.
2. Be able to select the right rod for the job.
3. Be able to operate a pipe beveling machine.
4. Be able to weld pipe in the 2G position using E6010 electrodes.
Course Schedule


6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANERS
14. SAFETY GLASSES
15. EAR PLUGS
16. TAPE MEASURE
17. TORPEDO LEVEL
18. PIPE WRAPAROUND
19. CALCULATOR
Course Policies
ADA Statement

Paris Junior College KEVIN WARD
Term: 101S 903-782-0384

Course Title (INTERMEDIATE LAYOUT AND FABRICATION)
Course Description
A continuation of the introductory Layout and Fabrication course which covers design
and production of shop layout and fabrication. Emphasis placed on symbols, blueprints,
and written specifications

Prerequisite(s): WLDG 1425, WLDG 1428, WLDG 1457, WLDG 1430, WLDG 2443,
WLDG 1435, WLDG 2406, WLDG 1434, WLDG 2453, WLDG 1417, Must take AWS
Structural Steel Certification test utilizing SMAW process, Must take ASME all position
Pipe Certification test utilizing SMAW process

Program Outcomes
the 6G position per ASME specifications for the Stainless Steel/Aluminum alloy utilizing
the GTAW process and to familiarize the student with a typical job shop atmosphere.
Course Outcomes
The student should show proficiency in the safe selection of and usage of the typically
utilized cutting/welding equipment in a welding/repair facility. Upon completion of this
course the student should be able to demonstrate proficiency in the following learning
objectives.
Learning Objectives
1. Identify auxiliary views and calculate steel and pipe dimensions using layout tools and construction
templates.
2. Identify fittings, weldments, templates, and tools.
Course # (WLDG 1453– Kevin Ward Page 1 of 3

3. Identify and interpret orthographic and isometric drawings.
Course Schedule
M-Th. 8am-3:40pm

6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANER
14. SAFETY GLASSES
15. EAR PLUGS
16. TAPE MEASURE
17. TORPEDO LEVEL
18. PIPE WRAPAROUND
19. CALCULATOR
Course Policies
ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-0384
(WLDG 1453.02)
(Intermediate Layout and Fabrication)
Course Description
Intermediate Layout and Fabrication

Not required
Program Outcomes
An intermediate course in layout and fabrication. Include design and production of shop
layout and fabrication. Emphasis placed on symbols, blueprints, and written
specifications.
Course Outcomes
Identify auxiliary views and calculate steel and pipe dimensions using layout tools and
construction templates; identify fittings, weldments, templates, and tools; and interpret
orthographic and isometric drawings.
Learning Objectives
the following
1. Identify auxiliary views and calculate steel and pipe dimensions using layout tools
and construction templates.
2. Identify fittings, weldments, templates, and tools.
3. Identify and interpret orthographic and isometric drawings
Course Schedule

1. 2 PIECE 90 DEGREE TURN
2. 3 PIECE 90 DEGREE TURN
3. TRUE Y
4. 90 DEGREE SADDLE
5. 45 DEGREE LATERAL

6. ORANGE PEEL CAP
7. CONCENTRIC REDUCER
8. ECCENTRIC RISER
Course Policies
ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-0384

Course Title (Intermediate Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW))
Course Description
A study of the production of various fillets and groove welds. Preparation of specimens
for testing in various positions.


Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Identify principles of arc welding; describe arc welding operations of fillet and groove
joints; explain heat treatments of low alloy steels; and explain weld size and profiles;
prepare test plates; perform fillet welds in the overhead position; perform air carbon arc
weld removal; perform bevel groove welds with backing plates in various positions; and
demonstrate use of tools and equipment.
Learning Objectives
1. Making quality welds in the horizontal position.
2. Be able to pass the AWS horizontal welding test using an E6010 electrode.
3. Be able to pass the AWS horizontal welding test using an E7018 electrode.
4. Be able to pass the AWS horizontal welding test using a Flux Core welder
Oxy-Fuel cutting and typical welding/repair shop equipment utilizing the SMAW and
FCAW processes.
Course Schedule
M-TH. 8am-3:40pm



6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANER
13. SAFETY GLASSES
14. EAR PLUGS
15. TAPE MEASURE
16. SPEED SQUARE
20.WIRE BRUSH
Course Policies
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0384
(WLDG 1457.02)
(Intermediate Shielded Metal Arc Welding)
Course Description
Intermediate Shielded Metal Arc Welding

not required
Program Outcomes
All students must be able to properly cut, fit and weld all projects correctly and efficiently
by the AWS guidelines.
Course Outcomes
Identify principles of arc welding; describe arc welding operations of fillet and groove
joints; explain heat treatments of low alloy steels; and explain weld size and profiles;
prepare test plates; perform fillet welds in the overhead position; perform air carbon arc
weld removal; perform bevel groove welds with backing plates in various positions; and
demonstrate use of tools and equipment.
Learning Objectives
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to demonstrate proficiency in the
following
1. Making quality welds in the horizontal position.

2. Be able to pass the AWS horizontal welding test using a E6010 electrode.
3. Be able to pass the AWS horizontal welding test using a E7018 electrode
4. Be able to pass the AWS horizontal welding test using a Flux core welder
Course Schedule


6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANERS
13. SAFETY GLASSES
14. EAR PLUGS
15. TAPE MEASURE
16. SPEED SQUARE
20. WIRE BRUSH
Course Policies
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0384

Course Title (SPECIAL TOPICS IN WELDER/WELDING
TECHNOLOGIST)
Course Description


Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
objectives.
Course # (WLDG 1491) – Kevin Ward Page 1 of 3

Learning Objectives
Course Objectives: Upon completion of this course the student should be able to
demonstrate proficiency in the following:
1. Learning outcomes/objectives are determined by local occupational need and

business and industry trends.
Required Projects: All shop projects will be provided by local industry and will vary from
one semester to the next.
Course Schedule
M-Th. 8am-3:40pm

6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANER
14. SAFETY GLASSES

15. EAR PLUGS
16. TAPE MEASURE
17. TORPEDO LEVEL
18. PIPE WRAPAROUND
19. CALCULATOR
Course Policies
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0384
(WLDG 1491.02)
(Special Topics in Welder/Welding Technologist)
Course Description
Special Topics in Welder/Welding Technologist

Not required
Program Outcomes
Be able to identify current events, skills, knowledge, and/or attitudes and behaviors
pertinent to the technology or occupation and relevant to the professional development
of the student. Students can repeat this course multiple times to improve skills.
Course Outcomes
learn outcomes/objectives are determined by local occupational need and business and
industry trends.
Learning Objectives
the following
1. Learning outcomes/objectives are determined by local occupational need and
business and industry trends.
Course Schedule

All shop projects will be provided by local industry and will vary from one semester to
the next.
Course Policies

ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0384

Course Title (Intermediate Pipe Welding)
Course Description
A comprehensive course on the welding of pipe using the shielded metal arc welding
(SMAW) process. Welding will be done using various positions. Topics covered include
electrode selection, equipment setup, and safe shop practices.


Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
1. Describe equipment and required pipe preparation.
2. Perform 2G welds using E6010 and E7018 electrodes.

Student should safely demonstrate their ability to utilize various types and
configurations of Oxy-Fuel cutting and welding equipment and techniques while in
typical welding/repair shop situations.
Learning Objectives
Describe equipment and required pipe preparation. Perform 2G, 5G, and 6G, welds
using E6010 and E7018 electrodes.
Course Schedule
M-TH. 8am-3:40pm


6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANER
14. SAFETY GLASSES
15. EAR PLUGS
16. TAPE MEASURE
17. TORPEDO LEVEL
18. PIPE WRAPAROUND
19. CALCULATOR
Course Policies
ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-0384
(WLDG 2406.02)
(Intermediate Pipe Welding)
Course Description
A comprehensive course on the welding of pipe using the shielded metal arc welding
process.
Prerequisite(s): structural welding and WLDG 2453.02

not required
Program Outcomes
Welding will be done using various positions. Topics covered include electrode
selection, equipment setup, and safe shop practices.
Course Outcomes
Describe equipment and required pipe preparation; perform welds using various
positions.
Learning Objectives
the following
1. Describe equipment and required pipe preparation

Course Schedule



6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANERS
14. SAFETY GLASSES
15. EAR PLUGS
16. TAPE MEASURE
17. TORPEDO LEVEL
18. PIPE WRAPAROUND
19. CALCULATOR
Course Policies
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0384

Course Title (INTERMEDIATE WELDING USING MULTIPLE
PROCESSES)
Course Description
Instruction using layout tools and blueprint reading with demonstration and guided
practices with some of the following welding processes: oxy-fuel gas cutting and
welding, shield metal arc welding (SMAW), gas metal arc welding (GMAW), flux-cored
arc welding (FCAW), gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW), or any other approved welding
process.


Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
objectives.
Learning Objectives

1. Identify and explain oxy-fuel welding procedures; and select proper tools,
equipment, and materials.
2. Setup, turn on, and adjust an oxy-fuel welding rig safely.
3. Be able to make quality welds in the flat positions using oxy-fuel.
4. Be able to make quality welds in the horizontal positions using oxy-fuel.
5. Be able to make quality welds in the vertical positions using oxy-fuel.
6. Be able to make quality welds in the overhead positions using oxy-fuel.
7. Be able to cut steel plate using the oxy-fuel torch.
Course Schedule
M-Th. 8am-3:40pm

6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANER
14. SAFETY GLASSES
15. EAR PLUGS
16. TAPE MEASURE
17. TORPEDO LEVEL
18. PIPE WRAPAROUND
19. CALCULATOR

Course Policies
ADA Statement


Term: 101S 903-782-0384
(WLDG 2413.02)
(Intermediate Welding Using Multiple Processes)
Course Description
Intermediate Welding Using Multiple Processes
Prerequisite(s): Pipe Class

Not required
Program Outcomes
Instruction using layout tools and blueprint reading with demonstration and guided
practices with some of the following welding processes: oxy-fuel cutting and welding,
SMAW, GMAW, FCAW, GTAW, or any other approved welding process.
Course Outcomes
Identify proper safety equipment and tools and identify and select the proper welding
process for a given application. Demonstrate skills training using more than one
approved welding process; demonstrate ability to analyze situations and make
decisions using skills as taught concerning safety and electrode selections; and select
the most economic and practical welding process for the given task.
Learning Objectives
the following
1. Identify proper safety equipment and tools and identify and select the proper welding
process for a given application.
2. Demonstrate skills training using more than one approved welding process.
3. Demonstrate ability to analyze situations and make decision using skills as taught
concerning safety and electrode selections.
4. Select the most economic and practical welding process for the given task.

Course Schedule

1. Vertical Pad Using GMAW

2. Overhead Pad Using GMAW

3. Vertical Pad Using FCAW
4. Overhead Pad Using FCAW
5. Vertical Fillet Using GTAW
6. Overhead Fillet Using GTAW
7. Vertical Bend Test Using GMAW
8. Overhead Bend Test Using GMAW
9. Vertical Bend Test Using FCAW
10. Overhead Bend Test Using FCAW
11. Vertical Bend Test Using GTAW
12. Overhead Bend Test Using GTAW
Course Policies
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0384

Course Title (ADVANCED LAYOUT AND FABRICATION)
Course Description
A continuation of the Intermediate Layout and Fabrication course which covers
production and fabrication of layout tools and processes. Emphasis on application of
fabrication and layout skills.


Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
objectives.
Learning Objectives
1. Apply appropriate techniques of fabrication.
2. Design welding projects.

3. Prepare drawings and produce templates.
4. Apply layout offsets; take offs; bills of materials.

5. Apply mathematical concepts in the construction of projects.
Course Schedule
M-Th. 8am-3:40pm

6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANER
14. SAFETY GLASSES
15. EAR PLUGS
16. TAPE MEASURE
17. TORPEDO LEVEL
18. PIPE WRAPAROUND
19. CALCULATOR
Course Policies

ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0384
(WLDG 2435.02)
(Advanced Layout Fabrication)
Course Description
Advanced Layout Fabrication

Not required
Program Outcomes
An advanced course in layout and fabrication. Includes production and fabrication of
layout, tools, and processes. Emphasis on application of fabrication and layout skills.
Course Outcomes
Apply appropriate techniques of fabrication; design welding projects; prepare drawings
and produce templates; apply layout offsets; take offs; bills of materials; and apply
mathematical concepts in the construction of projects.
Learning Objectives
the following
1. Apply appropriate techniques of fabrication.
2. Design welding projects.
3. Prepare drawings and produce templates.
4. Apply layout offsets; take offs; bills of materials.
5. Apply mathematical concepts in the construction of projects.
Course Schedule

1. PIPE FITTING PRACTICE
2. FLANGE ALIGNMENT
3. FITTING CUTBACKS
4. GROUP PIPE FITTING PROJECTS
5. WORKING FROM BLUE PRINT

Course Policies
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0384

Course Title (ADVANCED OXY-FUEL CUTTING & WELDING)
Course Description
A study of all position welding on ferrous and nonferrous metals using the oxy-fuel
welding process, including welding and cutting, brazing, and soldering operations.


Program Outcomes
the GTAW process.
Course Outcomes
objectives.
Learning Objectives
1. Identify and explain oxy-fuel welding procedures; and select proper tools,
equipment, and materials.
2. Setup, turn on, and adjust an oxy-fuel welding rig safely.
3. Be able to make quality welds in the flat positions using oxy-fuel.

4. Be able to make quality welds in the horizontal positions using oxy-fuel.
5. Be able to make quality welds in the vertical positions using oxy-fuel.
6. Be able to make quality welds in the overhead positions using oxy-fuel.
7. Be able to cut steel plate using the oxy-fuel torch.
Course Schedule
M-Th. 8am-3:40pm

6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANER
14. SAFETY GLASSES
15. EAR PLUGS
16. TAPE MEASURE
17. TORPEDO LEVEL
18. PIPE WRAPAROUND
19. CALCULATOR
Course Policies

ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0384
(WLDG 2439.02)
(Advanced Oxy-Fuel Welding and Cutting)
Course Description
Advanced Oxy-Fuel Welding and Cutting

Not required
Program Outcomes
A study of all position welding on ferrous metals using oxy-fuel welding process,
including welding and cutting, brazing, and soldering operations.
Course Outcomes
Demonstrate oxy-fuel welding procedures advanced oxy-fuel welding and cutting
operations; and identify and select appropriate tools, equipment, and materials.
Learning Objectives
the following
1. Identify and explain oxy-fuel welding procedures; and select proper tools, equipment,
and materials.
2. Setup, turn on, and adjust an oxygen and acetylene welding rig safely.
3. Be able to make quality welds in the flat positions using oxygen and acetylene.
4. Be able to make quality welds in the horizontal positions using oxygen and
acetylene.
5. Be able to make quality welds in the vertical positions using oxygen and acetylene.
6. Be able to make quality welds in the overhead positions using oxygen and acetylene.
7. Be able to cut steel plate using the oxygen and acetylene torch.
Course Schedule

1. Oxy-Fuel cut plate to size
2. Oxy-Fuel Bead Test

3. Oxy-Fuel Lap Joint
4. Oxy-Fuel Corner Joint
5. Oxy-Fuel Fillet
Course Policies
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0384

Course Title (Advanced Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW)
Course Description
Advanced topics based on accepted welding codes. Training provided with various
electrodes in shielded metal arc welding processes with open V-groove joints in all
positions.
Credits: SCH 4 = 2 lecture and 4 laboratory hours per week, from approved course list

Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
Describe effects of preheating and postweld heating; explain precautions used when
welding various metals and alloys; distinguish between qualification and certification
procedures; and discuss problems of welding discontinuities; perform open groove
welds with low carbon steel and low alloy electrodes in all positions.
Learning Objectives
1. Making quality welds in the overhead position using various welding techniques.
2. Be able to pass the AWS overhead welding test using an E6010 electrode.
3. Be able to pass the AWS overhead welding test using an E7018 electrode.
4. Be able to pass the AWS overhead welding test using a Flux core welder.
Oxy-Fuel cutting and typical shop welding equipment utilizing the SMAW, GMAW, and
FCAW processes.
Course Schedule
M-TH. 8am-3:40pm

6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANER
13. SAFETY GLASSES
14. EAR PLUGS
15. TAPE MEASURE
16. SPEED SQUARE
20.WIRE BRUSH
Course Policies
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0384
(WLDG 2443.02)
(Advanced Shielded Metal Arc Welding)
Course Description
Advanced Shielded Metal Arc Welding

not required
Program Outcomes
All students must be able to properly cut, fit and weld all projects correctly and efficiently
by the AWS guidelines
Course Outcomes
Describe effects of preheating and postweld heating; explain precautions used when
welding various metals and alloys; distinguish between qualification and certification
procedures; and discuss problems of welding discontinuities; perform open groove
welds with low carbon steel and alloy electrodes in all positions.
Learning Objectives
the following
1. Making quality welds in the overhead position using various welding techniques.
2. Be able to pass the AWS overhead welding test using a E6010 electrode.
3. Be able to pass the AWS overhead welding test using a E7018 electrode.
4. Be able to pass the AWS overhead welding test using a Flux core welder
Course Schedule

to return for the next semester

6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANERS
13. SAFETY GLASSES
14. EAR PLUGS
15. TAPE MEASURE
16. SPEED SQUARE
20. WIRE BRUSH
Course Policies
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0384

Course Title (Advanced Pipe Welding)
Course Description
Advanced topics involving welding of pipe using the shielded metal arc welding (SMAW)
process. Topics include electrode selection, equipment setup, and safe shop practices.
Emphasis on weld positions 5G and 6G using various electrodes.



Program Outcomes
Course Outcomes
1. Be able to translate ASME and AWS codes.

2. Be able to weld pipe in the 2G position using GTAW / SMAW processes.
3. Be able to weld pipe uphill in the 5G position using GTAW / SMAW processes
4. Be able to weld pipe uphill in the 6G position using GTAW / SMAW processes.
Oxy-Fuel cutting and welding equipment.
Course Schedule
M-TH. 8am-3:40pm


6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANER
14. SAFETY GLASSES
15. EAR PLUGS
16. TAPE MEASURE
17. TORPEDO LEVEL
18. PIPE WRAPAROUND
19. CALCULATOR
Course Policies
ADA Statement

Term: 101S 903-782-0384
(WLDG 2453.02)
(Advance Pipe Welding)
Course Description
Advance topics involving welding of pipe using the shielded metal arc welding and
shielded metal arc welding processes.
Prerequisite(s): structural welding

not required
Program Outcomes
Tests will be done in compliance with specifications and requirements of AWS and
ASME codes. Major emphasis will be put on pipe welding with the GTAW / SMAW
processes in the 2G, 5G, and 6G positions. All testing will be done to American Society
of Mechanical Engineers Code (ASME).
Course Outcomes
various electrodes.
Learning Objectives
the following
1. Be able to translate ASME codes.

2. Be able to weld pipe in the 2G position using GTAW / SMAW processes.
Course Schedule


6. CHIPPING HAMMER
7. LEATHER BOOTS
9. WELDING CAP
10. TIP CLEANERS
14. SAFETY GLASSES
15. EAR PLUGS
16. TAPE MEASURE
17. TORPEDO LEVEL
18. PIPE WRAPAROUND
19. CALCULATOR
Course Policies
ADA Statement

Fall 2010 Syllabi

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fall 2010 Syllabi

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Paris Junior College Robert Rankin

College Year: 2010-2011 AS 144

Course # ACCT 2301

Credits: 3 SCH = 3 lecture and 1 laboratory hours per week

Textbook and Readings

ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES, 9TH EDITION, by Weygandt, Keiso, and Kimmel

Categorize accounts to prepare income statement, statement of owners equity,

Course # ACCT 2301 - Rankin Page 1 of 4

Semester Week Topic

Course Requirements and Evaluation

3. Homework will be graded for all chapters.

Course # ACCT 2301 - Rankin Page 2 of 4

General Classroom Rules

Come to class and be on time.

Course # ACCT 2301 - Rankin Page 3 of 4

Course # ACCT 2301 - Rankin Page 4 of 4

Course # ACCT 2301

Credits: 3 SCH = 3 lecture and 1 laboratory hours per week

Textbook and Readings

ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES, 9TH EDITION, by Weygandt, Keiso, and Kimmel

Categorize accounts to prepare income statement, statement of owners equity,

Course # ACCT 2301 - Rankin Page 1 of 4

Semester Week Topic

Course Requirements and Evaluation

3. Homework will be graded for all chapters.

Course # ACCT 2301 - Rankin Page 2 of 4

General Classroom Rules

Come to class and be on time.

Course # ACCT 2301 - Rankin Page 3 of 4

Course # ACCT 2301 - Rankin Page 4 of 4

Course # ACCT 2301

Credits: 3 SCH = 3 lecture and 1 laboratory hours per week

Textbook and Readings

ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES, 9TH EDITION, by Weygandt, Keiso, and Kimmel

Categorize accounts to prepare income statement, statement of owners equity,

Course # ACCT 2301 - Rankin Page 1 of 4

Semester Week Topic

Course Requirements and Evaluation

3. Homework will be graded for all chapters.

Course # ACCT 2301 - Rankin Page 2 of 4

General Classroom Rules

Come to class and be on time.

Course # ACCT 2301 - Rankin Page 3 of 4

Course # ACCT 2301 - Rankin Page 4 of 4

Textbook and Readings

Course # (ACCT 2401) – Tim Kingsbury Page 1 of 3

Course Requirements and Evaluation

Course # (ACCT 2401) – Tim Kingsbury Page 3 of 3

Paris Junior College Gene Anderson

Course # ACCT 2301

A study of accounting principles as applied to vouchers, books of original

Credits: 3 SCH = 3 lecture and 1 laboratory hours per week

Textbook and Readings

1. Resolve ethical dilemmas in a socially responsible manner.

1. To develop a general understanding of financial reports and analyses that students

2. To provide a strong foundation for future courses in business and finance.

3. To provide the foundation courses that lead to a career in accounting.

Course # (ACCT 2301) – Gene Anderson Page 1 of 6

1. Explain what accounting is.

Course # (ACCT 2301) – Gene Anderson Page 2 of 6

Week 2 Basic Accounting Equation, Financial Statements & Recording Process

Week 4 Adjusting & Closing Entries

Week 6 Merchandising Operations & Inventories

Week 8 Accounting Information Systems, Fraud, Internal Control, & Cash